JP6765604B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

In addition, some of these game consoles are provided with display means such as an image display panel and a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, there is room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a characteristic display means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
An image display panel that can perform production display and
A POV display that can perform production display and
It is a game table equipped with
The POV display is provided with a movable body and has a movable body.
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body, and is provided with a light emitting body.
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as "first position").
The movable body, a location in front of the image display panel (hereinafter,. As "second position") may be located,
Before SL POV display during operation of the constant-speed operation by the movable body, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitters are configured to visually recognize the residual image to the player,
The movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement") before the constant speed operation is performed.
The first effect display may be displayed on the image display panel,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in an area including the first display area in the image display panel in a state where the first movement is performed by the movable body.
A second effect display may be performed on the POV display.
The first display area is a display area behind the movable body at a certain timing in the state where the first movement is being performed.
The first effect display and is the one of the picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first pattern".) Ri Der things effect display aspects including,
It is configured to perform deceleration of the movable body.
The deceleration operation is an operation until the movable body performing the constant speed operation reduces the speed and shifts to the stopped state.
The movable body is moved from the second position to the first position (hereinafter, referred to as "second movement") after the deceleration operation is performed and the movable body is stopped. It is composed and
The fifth effect display may be displayed on the image display panel,
The fifth effect display is an effect display performed in an area including a third display area in the image display panel in a state where the second movement is performed by the movable body.
The third display area is a display area behind the movable body at a certain timing in the state where the second movement is being performed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / fail determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 14 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect of another case following FIG. 15 (q) step by step. (A) is a diagram for explaining a display example of the notice icon, (b) is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408, and (c) is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area. It is a figure explaining an example of the digestion timing, (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 22 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 32 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 33 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 34 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the production example in which the notice icon changes step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example step by step when the power is cut off and is restored while the notice icon is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon increase effect and digestion effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 41 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon increase effect and digestion effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 46 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the production example using the movable means applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon increase effect and digestion effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which can be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining the lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 62 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / fail determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. (A) is an example of a box data table provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit, and (b) is an example of a part data table provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the command transmission in the effect control of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the command transmission in the effect control of this embodiment. (A) is a flowchart of the effect system operation process, and (b) is a flowchart of the chance button operation state determination process. It is a flowchart of various button operation related processing. It is a flowchart of various button operation related processing. It is a flowchart of a button press processing. It is a flowchart of one operation processing. It is a flowchart of one operation processing. It is a flowchart of a continuous hit operation process. It is a flowchart of a long press operation process. It is a flowchart of other button operation processing. It is a flowchart of the setting display processing at the time of the decision button operation. It is a flowchart of the setting display processing at the time of right button operation. (A) is a flowchart of the luminance setting display update process, and (b) is a flowchart of the user luminance setting operation process. (A) is a flowchart of the volume setting display update process, and (b) is a flowchart of the user volume setting operation process. It is a flowchart of the setting display processing at the time of the up button operation. (A) is a flowchart of the button long press process, and (b) is a flowchart of the chance button long press operation state determination process. It is a flowchart of various button long press operation related processing. It is a figure which shows the operation key unit shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 107 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect of another case following FIG. 108 (q) step by step. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the symbol variation display is not performed, and (b) is a diagram showing the operation result of each button during the symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example, and (c) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button during a big hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure explaining another production example in the production shown in FIG. 111. It is a figure explaining another production example in the production shown in FIG. 111. It is a figure explaining another example of the effect shown in FIG. 111. It is a figure explaining an example of the setting operation using an effect button and an operation key unit. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the effect button and the operation key unit. (A) is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuous striking operation by the effect button and the effect display during the execution of the effect for continuous striking, and (B) is the timing chart using the effect button during the execution of the effect for continuous striking. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the long press operation and the effect display, and (C) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the long press operation by the effect button and the effect display during the execution of the effect for long press. is there. (A) is a timing chart for explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button is performed intermittently during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting, and (B) is the execution of the effect for long press. Among them, it is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button is performed intermittently. It is a figure which shows an example of the production for continuous hitting centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for continuous hitting centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for long-pressing mainly on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 122 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of another effect performed in the effect shown in FIG. 122. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the effect display in a decorative pattern display device, and the operation of an effect button. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the effect display in a decorative pattern display device, and the operation of an effect button. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 130. It is a figure which shows an example of the production for continuous hitting centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 137 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure explaining another example of the effect shown in FIG. 141. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 142. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine (rotary cylinder game machine) as a game table to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side). (A) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 5 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the rear side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. An example of a display symbol on the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 1, and (b) is an example of special figure 2. An example of a stop display symbol is shown, (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main processing of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. (B) to (e) are examples of pre-reading result storage units for special figure 1 and special figure 2 provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the hit / fail determination table for a normal drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied, and the example of a symbol sorting and a hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the hit / fail determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol sorting table for special figure 1 and the operation at the time of a big hit in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol sorting table for special figure 2 and the operation at the time of a big hit in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing. (B) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows the flow of the image control processing. .. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an electric chulong opening effect executed in an effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chulong opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric Chulong opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied, and (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub-control unit main process. (B) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the example of the lottery table of the look-ahead notice used in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied, and the lottery table of the notice at the time of variable disclosure (after a big hit determination). It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied from the front. It is a figure explaining the movable body 1002 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of the 2nd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the effect pattern of the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-1 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-3 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-4 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-5 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-6 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-7 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-1 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-2 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-3 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-4 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-5 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-6 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-7 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-1 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-2 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-1 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-2 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-3 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-4 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-1 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-2 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-3 of the 3rd Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of 4th Embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 2000 as a game table by a modification to which this invention is applied from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification to which this invention is applied, (a) shows the casino machine 3000, (b) is the mobile phone 4000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 equipped with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) includes a storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. A home video game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view which saw the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure is shown. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 different from FIG. 248 from the front. It is a figure which shows the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism which moves the 1st movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255. It is a figure which shows the modification of the drive unit shown in FIG. 257, and is the figure for demonstrating the structure of the so-called slip ring. It is a figure which shows the modification of the drive unit shown in FIG. 258. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in the pachinko machine equipped with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255 step by step. (A) is an enlarged view of FIG. 260 (q), and (b) is a view showing a display area by hatching. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the button notice which continues from FIG. 262 (k) step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example stepwise from FIG. 262 (g). It is a figure which shows the other example stepwise from FIG. 263 (l'). It is a figure which shows the other example stepwise from FIG. 262 (c). It is a figure which shows the other example which becomes a big hit stepwise from FIG. 262 (i). It is a figure which shows the example of loss step by step which continues from FIG. 262 (i). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect of displaying a pattern by an afterimage effect by rotating the first movable body 260 which becomes a sub liquid crystal unit at high speed by the mechanism shown in FIG. 258 and FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a button notice step by step which continues from FIG. 269 (g). It is a figure which shows the example which continues from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which makes a big hit by another type of Versa notice using the first movable body 260 which continues from FIG. 269 (i) step by step. Similar to 272, this is an example of the Versa notice continuing from FIG. 269 (i), but it is a diagram showing a stepwise example of losing. It is a figure which shows an example which changes the display mode of a hold icon step by step by using a versa notice. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of changing the display mode of the changing icon using the Versa notice, which continues from FIG. 274 (l). FIG. 5 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of changing the display mode of the changing icon, which continues from FIG. 275 (n'). It is a figure which shows the modification of the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, FIG. 260 and the like. It is a figure which shows an example of the Versa notice using the POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277. It is a figure which shows an example of the Versa notice when the ball removal notice is performed. It is a figure which shows the example in which the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed stepwise on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 before the LED array 282 becomes a constant speed operation. It is a figure which shows the example in which the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays an enemy role is displayed stepwise on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 before the LED array 282 becomes a constant speed operation. It is a figure which shows the example in which the pattern h of a princess character is displayed stepwise on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 before the LED array 282 becomes a constant speed operation.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 73, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 73 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 1 to 73, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 73, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 73 are prioritized.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits light, the ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the card unit is instructed to return the player's balance. It includes a return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152 are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 4). (See FIG. 4), a payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (FIG. 4) for performing control processing related to launching a game ball. A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 4), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative symbol and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be used as a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term "hold" as used herein means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. Further, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the term "controlled state", which refers to the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), will be used, but the term "controlled state" includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". It is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is formed. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has passed through the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the normal figure start port 228. That is, the second special figure start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special drawing start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the second special drawing start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 are closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal drawing variable game is won and the normal drawing display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special drawing start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is the easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. When the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are the stationary states, the closed state is the predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3, as long as the game ball wins a prize by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In the pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special figure start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player cannot easily see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may be able to visually recognize a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice hole, or the shoji portion of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body to be rearward. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of decorative pattern display means.

Further, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is attached to the game board 200 at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. It is equipped with a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit shall have two counters built-in), a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and an opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower plate full tank sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the normal symbol display device 210. Display control of the drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, the normal drawing hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing the operation, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the start port 232 of the special figure 2 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234. , Are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special drawing 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special drawing 2 starting port 232. , The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, and an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the machine.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main processing of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 issues commands to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that a signal can be transmitted, it is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamps 138). Output from the drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, the shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, the chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be adjusted, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. VDP (video) that reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. -Display processor) 434 and is connected.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. The sensor circuit 518 for outputting to the basic circuit 502, the game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and the game board frame lamp drive for controlling the game board frame lamp 542. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the circuit 540, the game board lamp drive circuit 530, and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, nine types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure I", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G”) are prepared as stop symbols for the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get the ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can not expect to get the ball out in the remaining rounds, it is a real 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that you can expect to get a ball in one round, but you can not expect to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 4 out of 15 rounds It is a real 4R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in the round, but not in the remaining rounds, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to get a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is easier to open more than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed, but at least of these. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 100 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the 101st time is non-electric. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum for each operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5B, six types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure f", are shown, and five kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure f"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball out in all rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball out in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and "Special Figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. In the pattern display area, "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot ("special figure B"), 5R normal jackpot ("special figure F"), and 2R normal jackpot ("special figure e"), "decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative symbols with the same numbers other than "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB, and substantial 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1", "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is the big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 5D shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 for storing the reserved number of special figures may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Permission to operate and set initial values. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is turned on (indicating that the operation has been performed). In other words, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power supply status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after the interrupt prohibition is set, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been awarded. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the subsequent processing associated with winning the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number, and the value is obtained as the initial value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for timing the fluctuation / stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. Read out, add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (c)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening / closing of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the normal figure state is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal map variable games is stored in the normal map reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal map variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. 5 (a) is on, and the 2R jackpot flag is on. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure e, and the loss flag is on, the special figure f. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), a 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and a lost symbol (special figure e). Confirmation display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. The door member is attached to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closure period in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example). (3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be inserted into the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many game balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting port 232 until the game balls are entered. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In this example embodiment, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game in this example) having a high advantage is given priority over the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game in this example) having a low advantage. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. As an example, the special figure 2 variable game with low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and the hold of special figure 1 is held in special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, etc. The command type-identifiable information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and timers selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command that includes information indicating a number, etc., it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc., and the winning effect start command and end. In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 or 235 has been won. Including presence / absence. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit is used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special figure). The figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data ranks. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the read-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, the start information of the increased special figure 2 is always pre-read, and the increased start information of the special figure 1 is always pre-read except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, "special figure I" (off) is stored in the storage area "hold 1" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I" is stored in the storage area "hold 2" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Off) is remembered.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In addition, in FIG. 9B, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 9C shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and the pre-reading result. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

Next, refer to FIG. 10 for the winning / failing determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for determining whether or not it is correct, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for determining whether or not it is correct or not. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to in the case of the special figure high probability state, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. , Refer to the low probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 10 (b). Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

Similarly, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to, and the special figure low probability state is obtained. In this case, the low-probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 10B is referred to. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. If the hit / fail judgment result of the big hit is incorrect, refer to the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10 (c), and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value. , Select the winning / failing judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / failing determination result determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of a special diagram 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is based on the winning / failing result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop symbol of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b) is referred to, and based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed is set in the special symbol display device.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the input / output port is initialized, the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized, and the like.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S417 following step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP434 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. If not (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S705, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP434 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S711, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization process, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. .. In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S809 following step S807, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 and the effect data by the lamp) corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S811 following step S809, the lamp control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S813 following step S811, the movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. After that, the process returns to step S803.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 14 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 14, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a general drawing are shown. Hold lamp 216 is shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A, the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, the default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal symbol and the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1. , It becomes the notification area during the symbol change of the special figure 2. While the symbol of the normal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the normal figure is changing, the quadrangle figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but while the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing, the round figure is blinking or turned off. The triangular figure is lit and displayed while the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, but the triangular figure is blinked or turned off while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing. As described above, not only the display position of the fourth symbol is different, but also the display mode (here, the shape) is different, so that the player can distinguish at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special drawing 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

The hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. .. The number of holds of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lights of special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the number of holds of special figure 2 is the number of lights of special figure 2 hold lamp 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon, and in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the hold icon.

In FIG. 14A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 14A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is. The hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the hold icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display the line defining the area, but in FIG. 14A, the area is shown. Is shown with a dotted line for the sake of clarity. A line defining the area may be provided, or a line defining the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (gaming state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 14A, the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular patternless and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, but also the display mode ( The shape) is also different here, so that the player can distinguish at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → blinking start or turn off of the fourth symbol → movement animation start or erase of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 14B, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet.

In FIG. 14C, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 14D, the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 14E, the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but it is still displayed at this stage. The variable display of decorative icons has not started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 14 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 14 (g), the operation promotion notification image 136P urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 14 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 14 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 14J, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "It's a chance" are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

In FIG. 14 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 14 (l). Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the reach state may be entered without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 14 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced to be displayed, and in FIG. 14 (n). , Has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (n) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (o) follows the duel between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation of the scene is displayed.

It should be noted that the reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to super reach.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 14 step by step.

In FIG. 15 (p) following from FIG. 14 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 15 (s). In FIG. 15 (s), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 15 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of hiding, a different background image may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. (U), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a background image different from the conventional one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for which the 15R probability variation jackpot is confirmed is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 15 (v) is lit. In FIG. 15 (v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 15 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of "probability change big hit" is made together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

On the other hand, in the case of reaching the reach state with different decorative symbols (substantially 5R probability variation jackpot, 5R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) in FIG. 14 (l), the figure in another case continued from FIG. 15 (t). In 15 (u'), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in FIG. 15 (v') following FIG. 15 (u'), "decoration 6-decoration" is displayed. The combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "6-Decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 15 (w') following FIG. 15 (v'), as a big hit game start effect, the characters "big hit" are displayed together with the background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

FIG. 16 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in another case following FIG. 15 (q).

In FIG. 16 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 14 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 16 (b). In FIG. 16 (b), the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 16 (c), as in FIG. 15 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 16D, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (e), the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 lights up, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the period of the final display of the special figure 1, the erasure animation of the variable icon h0 is executed in the variable icon display area 280. In the figure (f), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, the erasing animation continues in the figure (g), and the variable icon h0 disappears completely in the figure (h). The erasure animation of the variable icon h0 may be executed before the final display of the special figure 1 is performed.

Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Here, FIG. 17A is a diagram for explaining a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 17B is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. (C) is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. (D) is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. Further, FIG. 18A is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 18B is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is further displayed). Is 8 in total), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area are different. The number of notice icons that can be displayed and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one, or may be set to any number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), the notice icon I6 of the hat made of the pattern of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 has a thousand-car box. The notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box consisting of the symbols is displayed, the notice icon I10 of the fan consisting of the symbols of the fan is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 The notice icon I7 of the back sword consisting of the design of the back sword is displayed, and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon consisting of the design of the ribbon is displayed in the notice icon 5th display area YA5, and the notice icon 6th display area YA6 is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 17 (b). It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

As shown in FIG. 17 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (c), for example. It is controlled to be done. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400, and is appropriately read and executed according to the progress of the game. That is, when 8 seconds have passed from the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 17A, the ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. Corresponding effects may be performed. After that, when the fluctuation is completed, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the change display of the decorative symbol (the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1) is started. When 12 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 17A) moves toward the change icon display area 280. When the decoration symbol variation display (symbol variation corresponding to hold 2) is started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested 4 seconds after the symbol variation is started, and then the hat notice icon I6 is digested. An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. Further, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of SP reach, the notice icon I9 of the 1000-car box may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the digested 1000-car box notice icon I9 may be executed. After that, when 2 seconds have passed since all the decorative symbols were temporarily stopped, the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the digested fan notice icon I10 may be executed. .. In this way, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon is to notify the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 17 (d). Is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400, and is appropriately read and executed according to the progress of the game. That is, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 17 (a), the palace effect appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice icon is increased. Will be done. In this lord's production, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken are increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the change is completed and the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is started, a DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a DJ effect of increasing the notice icon is executed. In this DJ effect, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is increased to the notice icon display area 285 and displayed. After that, after the symbol variation corresponding to hold 1 is completed and the symbol variation corresponding to hold 2 is started, 4 seconds have passed from the start of the second pseudo-continuous production, the lord effect is executed, and the fan The notice icon I10 is increased to the notice icon display area 285 and displayed. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variation display of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the big hit symbol change display may be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the outlying symbol change display. For example, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is out of order may be set to a maximum of 1, and the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be set to at least 2.

Next, the types of the notice icons displayed in the present embodiment and the corresponding effect contents will be described with reference to FIG. The notice icons include those in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear as shown in FIG. 18 (a) and those in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear as shown in FIG. 18 (b).

The notice icons (notice icons before change) for which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear include, for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord, as shown in FIG. 18A. There are a third lord's notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is a notice icon showing the silhouette of the lord's face in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. The second lord's notice icon I2 is a notice icon that shows the silhouette of the lord's face in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third lord's notice icon I3 is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is represented in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the jackpot is either weak to strong. When the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord come to the predetermined change display timing (for example, the timing of the increase display of the notice icon), the figure. It changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in 18 (b). Further, the first button notice icon I4 changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 18B at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. The first button notice icon I4 may be changed to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 are started to be read ahead. It may be displayed before the icon, and it may function as a look-ahead notice. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed accompanying the notice icon, and the first lord's notice icon I1, No. When the notice icon I2 of the second lord and the notice icon I3 of the third lord are displayed, a "question mark" may be added and displayed.

On the other hand, as the notice icon (notice icon after change) in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I7 of the back sword, and the ribbon There are a notice icon I8, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and a second button notice icon I11.

The notice icon I6 of the hat is a notice icon that imitates the hat worn by the character of the bancho, and the reliability of the jackpot is about strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed only once. Here, there are a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a ghost pattern in the pseudo continuous production. In the strong pattern pseudo-ream effect, for example, as will be described later, the character of the bancho appears when the pseudo-ream effect starts, but the display mode of the character of the bancho is different from the usual (for example, the bancho becomes an aura). The display mode is wrapped) to notify that the reliability is high. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, it may be notified that it is the third pseudo-continuous production to indicate that the reliability is high. In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is low by displaying the character of the appearing Bancho in the normal display mode. Further, as will be described later, the pseudo-continuous production of the Gase pattern is an production in which the pseudo-continuous production is pretended to be performed and the display is off. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I6 of the hat, if the reliability is high, "Continue" is displayed in red or black as the A pattern. May occur. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as "continuation" in black letters with "continuation" or "question mark". Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon that imitates the shuriken thrown by the character of Oniwaban (ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, the notice effect being executed may be switched to the highly reliable strong notice effect after the freeze effect. There is (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be given to notify in advance a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, if the reliability is high, "freeze" may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, it may be displayed as "Chan-me" as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon that imitates the ribbon worn by the character of Princess Chibi, and the reliability of the jackpot is high or low. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, the effect of shifting to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the fluctuation notice mode may be executed (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, an effect of changing the displayed background from a plurality of types of backgrounds used in a normal gaming state may be executed (stage change weak). Direction). Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, if the reliability is high, "Stechen" is displayed in red or black as the A pattern. May occur. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, "Stechen" may be displayed in black as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, either the stage change strong effect or the stage change weak effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is a notice icon that imitates the Senryo box thrown by the character of the lord toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is confirmed as a jackpot, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand-car box is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box is digested during the execution of the weak reach effect with low reliability, and undergoes the reach transition effect. Later, a production that shifts (promotes) to a highly reliable strong reach production is performed (reach transition production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested after executing the weak cut-in notice with low reliability, and then the strong cut-in notice with high reliability is executed (notice promotion). Direction). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the advance notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, if the big hit is confirmed, "Large board behavior" may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is high, "promotion" may be displayed in red or black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, "promotion" may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is exhausted, one of the final effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance promotion effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon that imitates the fan worn by the princess character, and the reliability of the big hit is confirmed. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, a premier notice that notifies in advance that the big hit is confirmed appears, or a premier reach that the big hit is confirmed is executed (premier production). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach loss is displayed, and a big hit revival effect is executed (revival effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the fan notice icon I10, it may be displayed as "blessing". When the notice icon I10 of the fan is exhausted, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed without fail. Further, in the present embodiment, the content to be produced differs depending on the timing at which the fan notice icon I10 is digested, but the digestion timing may be the same.

The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon that imitates the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is either the weakest to the big hit confirmation. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect is performed to urge the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the operation reception period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digestion display of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, and the ribbon. The notice icon I8 of the above, the notice icon I8 of the Senryo box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan may be changed to the digestion display, and the corresponding effect may be executed. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing to any of the notice icons.

In the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned notice icon before change changes to the notice icon after change, the change display of the notice icon is performed, but the change display of the notice icon before the change is performed. It is also possible to display to erase the notice icon (notice icon "none" shown in item 5 of FIG. 18B: erasing effect). In this production, it is notified that the fluctuation will be out of order. That is, it is a false notice indicating that it is an out-of-order confirmation pattern. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, it may be a big hit.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 19 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 19, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a normal figure display device 210, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, and a normal figure display device 210 are shown. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 14, for example, displaying the display result of the fourth symbol depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 200, for example, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a symbol changing notification area of a normal figure, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2. When the symbol of the normal figure is stopped, the LED in the area where the square figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the normal figure is changing, it is blinking or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing, the LED is blinking or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinking or turned off. As described above, not only the display position of the fourth symbol is different, but also the display mode (here, the shape) is different, so that the player can distinguish at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part. In FIG. 19 (1), the notice icon is not displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variation display of the decorative symbol accordingly. At the same time, the fourth symbol display device 284a performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1. The notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

Further, in FIG. 19 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two special figure 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Both the hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icons h0 of the two special figures 1 are displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless and white display mode). In this production example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (2), the number of lights on the first special figure hold lamp 218 increases by one to three, and is held. It is shown that the number is now three. Further, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display the notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is shown by hatching, but in reality, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1. It is a display mode (a round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 2-Decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 19 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 19 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 is changed, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (7), the character YM of the lord moves and displays the character YM to the predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (8), the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display of throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. 19 (10). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the player expects that the effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that by displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285, it is foretold that the pseudo continuous effect will be executed in the future.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 19 (11) to 19 (12), the character YM of the lord is displayed to be framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 step by step.

In FIG. 20 (14) following from FIG. 19 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol are not changed. It hasn't happened yet.

In FIG. 20 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (17), after the character YM of the lord moves and displays to the predetermined throwing position, at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is the notice icon third display area. It is displayed on YA3, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed on the notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as in FIGS. 19 (10) to 19 (12) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 20 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 20 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), when two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as two notice icons I6 of the hat being displayed, for example, on the left side. Although it is set in advance to give priority to the displayed notice icon for digestion, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon to use may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially digested. That is, the order of digesting the notice icons is limited to those described above and can be appropriately set.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (24), and then enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 20 (25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continue" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing of FIG. 20 (26), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "continue", and then as shown in FIG. 20 (27). The left and right symbols are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown to be in a non-reach state.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 step by step.

In FIG. 21 (28) following from FIG. 20 (27), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is stopped and displayed on the right. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same decorative symbol as the left symbol (for example, " It may become decoration 1 ”) to form a reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a pseudo-continuous symbol representing the character of the lord is displayed. There is a display that moves at a low speed from the top to the bottom.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (30), as shown in FIG. 21 (31), the character of the lord and "continuation" are displayed. A cut-in display consisting of the character display of is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. If the pseudo-ream symbol is not displayed as a stop and the frame is out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the combination of the decorative symbols that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed even when the notice icon I6 of the hat is not digested.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect has started is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. .. At this time, the reach production has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (34), the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is displayed to move from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (35), and then enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 21 (36). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing of FIG. 21 (37), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased with the character display of "continue", and then, in FIG. 21 (38), the hat In response to the digestion of the notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display is performed to push up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the second pseudo-continuous production is performed. Notifies the player that there is a possibility that

After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is changed from "decoration 1" to "decoration 1". It has been changed to "decoration 2" to form a non-reach state, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display is performed in which the pseudo-continuous symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, the character information of "pseudo x 2" is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be changed while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed. In this effect example, after the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again to maintain the reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (40), as shown in FIG. 21 (41), the character of the lord and "continuation" are displayed. A cut-in display consisting of the character display of is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, the more the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested in one symbol variation display, the more likely it is to become a big hit. That is, there is a case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and a case where two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice. It is easier to get a big hit if two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested, and there are cases where only two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo-continuous production is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested. It can be said that it is easier to win a big hit if three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested, in the case where the pseudo-continuous production is performed three times.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 3” indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect has started is displayed.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

In FIG. 22 (43) following from FIG. 21 (42), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. Here, the reach production will be started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (44), it develops into the above-mentioned super reach (swordsman reach). The variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced. Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (44) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (45) follows the duel between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation display of the scene starts.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed to move from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (47), and above the enlarged notice icon I9 of the Senryo box. The text display of "promotion" is added to announce that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box together with the character display of "promotion" at the timing of FIG. 22 (48), and then the figure. At the timing of 22 (49), the above-mentioned reach transition effect is started. When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (49), the reach effect display that has been executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes slightly darker, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display. A display for cutting off the reach effect display during execution is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG. 22 (50).

After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a highly reliable strong reach effect (button reach effect). When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "Is it too hot?" On the darkened background, and then FIG. 22 (52). The character "No" is displayed at the timing shown in. After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (53), the character display of "blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter to notify the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (55), as shown in FIG. 22 (56), the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the button image 136a. It is shown that the button reach production failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 22 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1".

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 22 step by step.

In FIG. 23 (58) following from FIG. 22 (57), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 23 (59), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1" (temporary symbol stop display) is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

After that, for example, when 2 seconds have passed from the provisional symbol stop display, the display that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (60). .. That is, the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is displayed to move from the notice icon 4th display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the fan notice icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged, or may be performed before the enlarged display is performed. , May be done after enlarged display.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the fan notice icon I10 at the timing of FIG. 23 (62), and the notice icon display area 285 is framed out upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 23 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbol that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. It should be noted that the notice icon display area 285 may continue to be displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 23 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced. To.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 23 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the jackpot is confirmed in "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop display of the 15R probability variation jackpot "special figure A", and the fourth symbol display device 284a displays the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1. Is lit. After that, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above-mentioned jackpot game start effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, so that the re-variation effect is executed and a big hit is obtained. However, the notice icon I10 of the fan is the notice icon display area. If it is not displayed on the 285, the display result of the deviation may be derived without performing the re-variation effect. That is, when the reach transition effect executed by digesting the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is performed and is missed, this reach shift effect can be said to be a fake notice effect. That is, when one notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested and a reach transition effect as a kind of fake notice corresponding to the digested Senryo box notice icon I9 is executed, the result of the symbol variation display Can be said to be out of the question. This also applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the advance notice effect can be executed according to the number of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.

In the present embodiment, the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed, but the look-ahead notice is the target. Even in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the look-ahead notice and the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display subject to the look-ahead notice are different. It may be the same or the same.

Next, another effect example of the above-mentioned increase effect of the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. Here, FIGS. 24 to 26 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. In FIGS. 24 to 26, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

24 (8a) to 24 (10a) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 24 (8a), instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9a-1), the thrown notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (9a-2), after the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed to explode, the timing shown in FIG. 24 (10a) is displayed. Then, the notice icon I1 of the first lord who exploded changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the character YM of the lord succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Even with this production example, the player expects that the production corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future.

24 (8b) to 24 (9b) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to 19 (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8b), the effect display is performed in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9b), the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. When the effect button 136 is operated between the time when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the time when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the first lord It changes to one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. As described above, in this effect example, it is difficult to recognize the reliability of the jackpot indicated by the notice icon until the effect button 136 is operated. Therefore, there is an incentive to operate the effect button 136 in order to know the reliability of the jackpot. May work and enhance the effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until it is digested may be the valid period for the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be invalidated. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Further, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was planned to be displayed when the effect button 136 is operated during the digestion effect of the notice icon is displayed. The corresponding effect display may be performed, or when the button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is exhausted and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that was planned to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The production display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect is started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is exhausted, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may be configured so as not to change to another notice icon.

24 (8c) to 24 (9c) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to 19 (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8c), as in FIG. 19 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I6 of the hat toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 24 (9c), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left side of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the number of ghosts that fails to increase the notice icon. It should be noted that the notice icon other than the notice icon I6 of the hat may be used to increase the gap. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the more difficult it is to perform the increase effect.

24 (7d) to (9d) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7d), as in FIG. 19 (7), the character YM of the lord holding the notice icon I6 of the hat is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position. After that, in FIG. 24 (8d), not only one notice icon I6 of the hat but also three notice icons I6 of the hat are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. It should be noted that the effect display may be one by one, not at the same time.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three thrown hats are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of the plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for an increase in the number of times the notice is executed may be improved, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, so that the pseudo-ream Since it is guaranteed that the production will be executed three times, it may be announced that the jackpot will be confirmed. Further, the notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and the notice icon with low reliability is easy to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). It may be vice versa.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d'), part or all of the notice icon I6 of the three thrown hats did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and from the left side of the display area. It is also possible to execute a partial loss increase effect or a total loss increase effect that causes the frame to be out.

24 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7e), unlike the production example shown in FIG. 19 (7), the character YM of the lord who has the notice icon I6 of one hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan. Is shown to be moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two notice icons out of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or a randomly selected notice icon may be displayed. You may want to display only. After that, in FIG. 24 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. It should be noted that the effect display may be one by one, not at the same time. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other, and for example, the same notice icon may be included more than once.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9e), the three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3. Each is displayed. As described above, even in this effect example, the increase of a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of times the notice is executed can be increased, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of types of notices can be increased, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. In some cases.

Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9e'), part or all of the three thrown notice icons did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol display device 208 was displayed. It is also possible to execute a partial loss increase effect or a total loss increase effect that frame out from the left side of the area.

24 (12f-1) to 24 (12f-2) show other production examples of the production shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in FIG. 24 (12f-1), as in FIG. 19 (12), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (12f-2), the decorative symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. To. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot ends.

FIG. 25 (8 g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8 g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode by the Sabohani character), the character YM of the lord displays the hat notice icon I6 as the notice icon display area 285. There is a production display that throws at. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

FIG. 25 (8h) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8h), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, for example) of the game board 200. It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208) to display the number of holds. The effect holding lamp 286 is provided with, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in the default light emitting mode (for example, lighting in white), light emission of a look-ahead notice is emitted. Drive control is possible depending on the mode (for example, lighting while switching 7 colors). In FIG. 25 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the object of pre-reading is hatched, but in reality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 1, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is also lit by the default light emission mode.

25 (8i) to 25 (9i-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 25 (8i), as in FIG. 19 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I6 of the hat toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 25 (9i-1), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the look-ahead notice. The effect display (holding change effect) that changes to is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I6 of the hat may not be displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but may appear as an opportunity to start the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the more difficult it is to execute the hold change effect.

As shown in FIG. 26 (9i-2'), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and holds the display using the effect hold lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, after the notice icon I6 of the hat falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the hold lamp of the first special figure 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the look-ahead notice.

25 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25 (8j), it is different from FIG. 19 (8). , It is shown that the DJ character BY with the notice icon appears from the right side of the display area on the flying carpet instead of the character YM of the lord (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8j), the DJ character appears with the hat notice icon I6. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and holds the notice icon I6 of the hat on the notice icon display area 285 of the notice icon first display area YA1. The production display to be placed in is performed. The number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285 in one time of increasing the number of notice icons by the DJ character BY. In this way, a plurality of types of notice icon increase effects (for example, the first notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and the second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY) may be prepared. Depending on the configuration, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

25 (8k) to 25 (9k) show other production examples of the production shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to 19 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further formed. It is shown that the character BY appears from the right side of the display area on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8k), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (9k), the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is displayed. While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged on a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if passing through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k'), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by arranging it on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if it were. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is placed on the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lord and displayed in the first display area YA1 of the notice icon. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, the notice icon may be overwritten. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, and this may further enhance the effect.

FIG. 25 (12l) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 25 (12l), the character notation corresponding to each of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is attached. For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the characters "continue", and the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. The word "promotion" is added to the sign, and the word "blessing" is added to the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon 3rd display area YA3, and the notice icon 4th display. The notice icon I7 of the back sword displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the characters "Chan eyes", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the fifth display area YA5 of the notice icon is "Stechen". Characters are additionally displayed, and the characters of "question mark" are additionally displayed together with "continuation" on the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon 6th display area YA6. As a result, the content of the advance notice effect whose execution is announced after that may become easier to understand.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 25 (12l') and FIG. 25 (12l'), some or all of the characters added to the notice icon are made into “question marks” to clarify the corresponding notice effect. It may not be displayed in. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

Further, it may be announced that the effect display in which the big hit is confirmed is executed by the combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of the displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. 25 As shown in (12l ″ ″), when three notice icon I6s of the hat with the character notation of “continue” are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the jackpot is confirmed four times. It is also possible to give notice that the effect display including the continuous effect will be performed. If the characters added to the notice icon do not correspond to the notice icon (for example, if the word "promotion" is added to the hat notice icon I6), the hat notice icon I6 It may be a premier notice display that announces that the result of the symbol variation display when is digested is a big hit confirmed (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

In the above-mentioned production example, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the character YM of the lord and the character BY of the DJ, but in the production example shown in FIG. 26, the notice icon is increased by displaying the decorative pattern. It is something to do.

In FIG. 26 (A1), the decorative symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, a normal reach.

After the reach effect is started, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped and displayed. The character notation of "stock" is added near the lower part of the notice icon symbol of this hat, and when the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is notified that the notice icon is additionally displayed. are doing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), the notice icon symbol of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat and moved to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in (A4), the decorative symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is off. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this way.

In FIG. 26 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the decorative symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. , Normal reach production starts.

After the reach effect starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the notice icon symbol of the first lord imitating the notice icon I1 of the first lord is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the production example shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the character notation of "stock" is added on top of the notice icon symbol of the first lord, and the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed to display the notice icon display area. It is informed that the notice icon is increased and displayed on 285.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the notice icon symbol of the first lord changes to the notice icon I1 of the first lord and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is performed, and as shown in FIG. 26 (B4), the decorative symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is off. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the hat notice icon I6, and may be another type of notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period during which the symbol change display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the execution of the symbol change display from the next time onward, or the notice may be changed. It may not change until the timing when the icon is digested. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this way.

Next, another effect example of the above-mentioned notice icon digestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. Here, FIGS. 27 to 30 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. In addition, in FIGS. 27 to 30, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

27 (38 m) to 27 (40 m-3) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 21 (38) to (40). 27 (38 m) to 27 (39 m) show the same effect as in FIGS. 21 (38) to 21 (39), but in FIG. 27 (40 m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed at a low speed. Pseudo-continuous symbols appear after variable display, but after that, as shown in FIG. 27 (40 m-2), the variable display becomes high speed and the pseudo-continuous symbols become high speed just before the pseudo-continuous symbols reach the stop display position of the decorative symbol. Is scrolled out to the lower part of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-3), a temporary stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", and then the shaking fluctuation is displayed. , The stop display is displayed and it is notified that the result is off. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may not be performed.

27 (23n) to 27 (24n) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23n), the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started, but as shown in FIG. 27 (24n), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is enlarged and displayed. It may be displayed that the display is erased as it is, and it may be notified that the digested effect is not performed.

27 (23o) to 27 (24o-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23o), the display that the hat notice icon I6 is digested is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (24o-1), but the hat is displayed as it is. The notice icon I6 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 27 (24o-2), in the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of alignment without starting the pseudo-continuous production (in FIG. 27 (24o-2), "decoration 1-decoration 2" -The combination of the decorative symbols in "Decoration 2") causes a temporary stop display to display the shaking fluctuation, and then the stop display is displayed to notify that the result of the disconnection. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may not be performed.

27 (22p) to 27 (23p) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, in FIG. 27 (23p), the leftmost side (notice icon) of the notice icon display area 285 Instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first display area YA1), other notice icons may be digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 27 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the notice icons may not be digested in order from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stock order), but the notice icons stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, if the notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to be a big hit, or conversely, it may be difficult to be a big hit. Further, the digestion order of the notice icons may be determined regardless of the stock order. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, or the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the digestion order of the notice icons. You may try to do it. Further, by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order, it may be possible to give a notice that the big hit will be confirmed. For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat and the shuriken A rule may be set such that the jackpot is confirmed when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order. This may give the player an incentive to find the law of the digestion order of the notice icons that will be a big hit, and may improve the motivation to play.

27 (24q-1) to 27 (24q-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested and becomes the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy is created, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon 2nd display area YA2 to the notice icon 4th display area YA4 are moved to the left. It may be. At this time, for example, a movement animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left side may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

FIGS. 28 (Aa) to 28 (Ae) show an example of the effect when the advance notice icon is increased after the notice icon digestion effect is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (Aa), after the notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed, and FIG. At the timing shown in 28 (Ab), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and it is notified that the display result is off. After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ac), after the hold is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ad), the notice icon is increased by the character YM of the lord. When the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ae), the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted and becomes blank. The notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box thrown into the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases as the notice icon is digested may be displayed in the blank notice icon display area.

FIG. 28B shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are created in the notice icon display area due to the plurality of notice icons being digested. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM of the lord When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3, which are blank, are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left side. In this way, the notice icon may be displayed to be increased. When there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icons is not limited to the above, and may be any other order, and the first sub-control unit may be used. It may be set in advance in 400. In addition, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, but the jackpot is hit depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of notice icons displayed are different. For example, if an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon 6th display area YA6 among the blank display areas in the notice icon display area 285, at least 6 notice icons are the notice icons. It may be suggested that it is displayed in the display area 285, or it may be suggested that the jackpot has the highest reliability.

FIG. 28C shows an example of an effect in which the digestion effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (C), while the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being digested, the lord The notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the character YM. Here, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is an increased notice icon in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display is executed. In this way, the digestion effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, the period in which the notice icon digestion effect is performed and the period in which the notice icon increase effect is performed may overlap. Further, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, the digestion effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon may be started. The digestion effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area where the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the increase effect of the notice icon is displayed. It may be an area that will be blank before it is started.

FIG. 28 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), before the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, the effect of inciting whether or not the notice icon is digested is performed. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon that is the target of digestion is digested by shaking and fluctuating. I try to fan it. After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (60), the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, or the fan notice icon I10 may not be digested. If it is not digested, the notice icon may be deleted without being digested, or the notice icon may be displayed and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), when the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased without being digested, after that, it is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the way, and the display result of the out of place. You may notify that.

28 (59s) to FIG. (60s) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 23 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 28 (59s), the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Of these notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, after the shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1", the notice icon of the fan is different from the above. When I10 is digested, it becomes a notice that it will be a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 28 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, hat notice icon I6) are digested, it is removed as it is. It is also possible to notify that the combination of the decorative symbols of is stopped and displayed and the icon is out of alignment.

28 (23t) to FIG. (32t) show other production examples of the production shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 21 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (23t), in this production example, in the notice icon display area 285, a digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added. As shown in FIGS. 28 (23t) to (25t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the digested hat notice icon I6 Is displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIGS. 28 (28t) to (32t), the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed even after being digested, and the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous effect) ) Is displayed continuously until the end. The timing at which the notice icon display in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 starts may be after the notice icon digestion effect starts, or even before the notice icon digestion effect starts. It may be at the same time as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is deleted may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is completed or before the digestion effect of the notice icon is completed. It may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, it may be after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon has started, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, it may be before the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or it may be the digested notice icon. It may be deleted at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, or it may be deleted at the end of the symbol change in which the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure), or the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion. Is deleted at the timing when is deleted (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 are erased at FIG. 22 (44), or only the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is erased). You may. When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the first digested notice icon A is the digestion of the notice icon A. It may be in a state where no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion, which is deleted after or at the end of the effect, or the digestion effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. It may be erased at the same time as or after it has been started, or it may be erased at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digestion notice icon display area corresponding to the next digested notice icon B is displayed. Alternatively, the notice icon a may be left as a history even during the digestion effect of the notice icon B, or at the end of the symbol change in which the notice icon A and the notice icon B are digested (for example, special). It may be erased at the symbol stop timing in the figure). If the notice icon display area 285 is deleted when a specific effect display (for example, during super reach effect, big hit effect, island simultaneous effect, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted and the notice is being digested. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

FIGS. 29 (Aa) to 29 (Ae) show an example of an effect in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are digested at the same time. That is, in FIG. 29 (Aa), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. The notice icon I8 of the ribbon is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Then, among these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested. The production starts. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be the order corresponding to the execution order of the effect.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed with additional characters as shown in FIG. 29 (Ab). .. Specifically, the character display of "continue" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "Stechen" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ac), the shoji is closed, and after the character CH of Princess Chibi appears on the front side thereof, the shoji is opened and the moon is opened as shown in FIG. 29 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. It should be noted that during the execution of the stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moves to and is displayed in reduced size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ae), the decorative design that was reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area, and then corresponds to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, and the character BC of the chief is Appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display is performed to push up the stopped-displayed right symbol, and then the player is notified that a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. ..

In this production example, a plurality of productions corresponding to the digested notice icons are started at different start timings, but they may be started at the same time.

29 (66u-1) to FIG. 29 (66u-3) show other production examples of the production shown in FIG. 23 (66). That is, in FIG. 29 (66u-1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed. It is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-2), after the jackpot start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-3), even after the jackpot round game is started, the undigested A notice icon is displayed. In this production example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during the execution of the jackpot game, but it may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a jackpot (for example, an effect of notifying that a probability variation jackpot is confirmed), for example, FIG. 29 (66u). In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the execution of the big hit game, the notification that the probability change big hit is confirmed is given, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested. May notify that the 15R jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when other notice icons are digested, for example, it may have a meaning suggesting that there is a possibility of promotion. In this way, even with the same notice icon, if it is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect such as giving a different meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be different. That is, a notice icon peculiar to the jackpot may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. ..

FIGS. 29 (Ba) to 29 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and then the hold is digested and the symbol changes. When the display is started, the stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 29 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 29 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when the stage change is performed. After the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be deleted without fail, only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or the notice icon may not be deleted. Good.

29 (22v-1) to FIG. (23v) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-2), the character YM2 of the lord holding the placard appears and is digested. Notice The type of icon is notified in advance. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (23v), the digestion effect of the notice icon in which the advance notice type notice icon (hat notice icon I6) is digested is started. Even when the advance notice of the type of the advance notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, and the notice icon of a type different from the advance notice icon is digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

FIG. 29 (22w) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 20 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the digestion of the notice icon. May be good.

In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the character BC of the Bancho appears, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. The effect corresponding to is executed, and the other effects are not executed. For example, although the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the chief character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. When an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), such as when the big hit is fixed, the big hit may be fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is determined and is configured so that the player cannot select the notice icon to be digested. It may be possible to select.

In addition, if a big hit occurs while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probabilistic state or a time saving state. It may be configured so that it is not. In addition, when a big hit is made while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is temporarily hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned and displayed after the probability change state or the time saving state is completed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, it may be configured so that it will not be carried over even after the probability change state or the time saving state ends.

Next, an example of an effect that announces the content of the reach effect that will be transferred thereafter depending on the type of the advance notice icon to be digested will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30 (Aa), when "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, and the reach state is reached, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-1), the enlarged character BC2 of the bancho is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the Bancho reach corresponding to the appearing character. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-2), the enlarged display of the character YM3 of the lord is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the lord reach corresponding to the appearing character. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-3), when the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-3), the enlarged princess character HM is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In this production example, it corresponds to the reliability of the jackpot that the notice icon means, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach productions is configured in the order of princess reach> lord reach> bancho reach. There is. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a character of the lord who is enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 is digested) (so-called law breakage occurs). May be configured so that the jackpot is fixed. Further, a plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may appear in response to the combined digestion to execute the combined notice. In addition, a unique effect for digesting a plurality of notice icons (a special effect for multiple digestion) may be executed, and it is a big hit if a plurality of notice icons are digested rather than one notice icon is digested. It may be configured to increase the reliability of.

Next, the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. 30 At the timing shown in (Bb), the display that the second button notice icon I11 is digested is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter as shown in FIG. 30 (Bc), and the effect button 136 Notifies that the operation can be accepted and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136.

Next, another effect example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30 (Ca), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the button reach effect described above, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. After that, at the timing of FIG. 30 (Cb), the display that the second button notice icon I11 is digested is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is shown in FIG. 30 (Cc). As described above, the effect button 136 changes to the protruding button image 136b represented in the protruding mode. That is, it is shown that the jackpot has been promoted to a button reach production with higher reliability.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 31 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 step by step. 33 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 32 stepwise, and FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 33 stepwise. 35 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 34 step by step.

In addition, in FIGS. 31 (1) to 32 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon was changed from the hat notice icon I6 to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Since it is the same as FIGS. 19 (1) to 20 (14) except for the points, the description thereof is omitted here. Also, regarding the effect performed between FIGS. 32 (14) and 32 (20), all the notice icons used in the increase effect of the notice icon have been changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. It is the same as FIG. 20 (15) to FIG. (19) except that.

In FIG. 32 (20), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of the detachment is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 32 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 32 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 32 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed to move from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (23), when the same notice icon is displayed more than once in the notice icon display area 285 such as four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is preset to give priority to the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. In addition, which notice icon to use may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the far right may be set to be preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be appropriately set.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown in 32 (25), below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good.

After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (26), the character display of "continue" attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is deleted. After the I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In this way, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be redisplayed at the original position. When the digested notice icon is redisplayed in the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed so as to be recognizable. For example, the display area in which the digested notice icon is displayed may be displayed. It may be displayed in gray out, or the character information of "done" may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

After that, as for the effect contents shown in FIGS. 32 (27) to 33 (33), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon. It is the same as in FIGS. 20 (27) to 21 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icons I1 of the first lord. The description of is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (34), the display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is displayed to move from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown in 33 (36), below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed.

After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (37), the character display of "continue" attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is deleted. After the I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, as for the effect contents shown in FIGS. 33 (38) to (45), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the notice is given. Icon 3rd display area YA3 and notice icon The notice icon displayed in the 4th display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, but FIGS. 21 (38) to 22 (Fig. 21) to FIG. 22 ( Since it is the same as 45), the description here will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (46), the display in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed to move from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (47) and is enlarged and displayed. Above the displayed notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, a character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to notify that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208, the character display of "promotion" attached to the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is erased, and the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 33 (48). The display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, at the timing of FIG. 34 (49), the above-mentioned reach transition effect is started. In this production example, when the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 34 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect display as if a power failure has occurred, and then has a highly reliable strong reach. The production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in this effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (50-1), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "Is it a chance?" On the darkened background. , The character "No" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (50-2). After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (51), the character "Is it too hot?" Is displayed, and then the character "No" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (52). After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (53), the character display of "blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter to notify the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (55), as shown in FIG. 34 (56), the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the button image 136a. It is shown that the button reach production failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 34 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1".

In FIG. 34 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 34 (59), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1" (temporary symbol stop display) is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

After that, for example, when 2 seconds have passed from the provisional symbol stop display, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (60). To be started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed to move from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I10 of the fan at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (61) and is enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged, or may be performed before the enlarged display is performed. , May be done after enlarged display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the notice icon I10 of the fan is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (62), the original display position, that is, the notice icon fourth display area of the notice icon display area 285. The display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 35 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbol that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed.

In the revariating effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced. To.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 35 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the jackpot is confirmed in "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop display of the 15R probability variation jackpot "special figure A", and the fourth symbol display device 284a displays the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1. Is lit. After that, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above-mentioned jackpot game start effect is executed.

Next, another effect example of the above-mentioned increase effect of the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. Here, FIGS. 36 to 38 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. In FIGS. 36 to 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

36 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8a), the effect display is performed in which the notice icon I3 of the third lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I1 of the first lord. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

36 (8b) to FIG. (9b) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8b), as in FIG. 31 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I1 of the first lord toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9b), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the amount of waste using the notice icon of the lord.

36 (8c) to FIG. (9c) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8c), not only one notice icon I1 of the first lord but also three notice icons I1 of the first lord are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. It should be noted that the effect display may be one by one, not at the same time.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (9c), the three first lord's notice icons I1 thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of the plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for an increase in the number of times the notice is executed may be improved, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced. Further, the notice icon with high reliability (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord) is difficult to be displayed (hard to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon with low reliability (for example, the first lord) is difficult to be displayed. The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (notice icon I1 of the first lord) is increased by three, but a plurality of types of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example. , The notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I3 of the third lord may be increased at the same time.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (9c'), a part or all of the notice icon I1 of the three thrown first lords did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative design. It is also possible to execute a partial loss increase effect or a total loss increase effect that frame out from the left side of the display area of the display device 208.

FIG. 36 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode by the Sabohani character), the lord's character YM gives the first lord's notice icon I1 a notice icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

FIG. 36 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8f), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number is displayed by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 36 (8f), for convenience of explanation, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the object of pre-reading is hatched, but in reality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 1, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is also lit by the default light emission mode.

36 (8 g) to FIG. (9 g-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8 g), as in FIG. 31 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I1 of the first lord toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first lord acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to give a look-ahead notice. An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode of is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but may appear as an opportunity to start the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first lord. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the more difficult the hold change effect is to be executed. Good.

36 (12h-1) to (12h-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (12). That is, in FIG. 36 (12h-1), as in FIG. 31 (12), the decorative symbol is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Fluctuation display is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (12h-2), the decorative symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. To. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot ends.

37 (8i) to FIG. (9i) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8i), it is different from FIG. 31 (8). It is shown that the DJ character BY with the notice icon appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the flying carpet instead of the character YM of the lord. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (9i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and holds the notice icon I1 of the first lord who holds the notice icon I1 of the notice icon display area 285. The effect display placed in the display area YA1 is performed. The number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285 in one time of increasing the number of notice icons by the DJ character BY. In this way, a plurality of types of notice icon increase effects (for example, the first notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and the second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY) may be prepared. Depending on the configuration, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

37 (8j) to FIG. (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8j), a DJ having a notice icon is further formed. It is shown that the character BY appears from the right side of the display area on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9j), the notice icon I1 of the first lord thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged on a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if passing through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 (9j'), by arranging the DJ character BY on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the back side of the notice icon is placed. It may be displayed as if it is passing.

37 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further formed. It is shown that the character BY appears from the right side of the display area on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I3 of the third lord. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9k), the notice icon I1 of the first lord thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I3 of the third lord in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of. That is, the promotion may be performed by overwriting the notice icon with low reliability of the big hit with the notice icon with high reliability of the big hit. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, and this may further enhance the effect. It should be noted that this promotion effect may be performed while the same symbol variation display is being executed, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

FIG. 37 (12l) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is accompanied by the character notation of "question mark". For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4, and the notice icon 5th display area YA5 of the third lord. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon 6th display area YA6, and the character notation of "question mark" is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l'), the type of the notice icon after the change may be announced in character notation for some of the notice icons before the change. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the first display area YA1 of the notice icon, the notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the second display area YA2 of the notice icon, and the notice icon 4th. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has the character notation of "question mark" added and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA3 is annotated to change to the notice icon I7 of the back sword with the character notation of "Chan eyes" added, and is displayed in the notice icon 5th display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the character "continue" to announce that it will change to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon 6th display area YA6 is displayed. It is foretold that the notice icon I1 of the lord of No. 1 will be changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat by adding the character notation of "question mark" together with "continuation". These character notations may be notified at once for all or part of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l ″), all or part of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to the changed notice icons, and the changed notice icons are displayed. The corresponding character notation may be added only for the thing.

38 (8m-1) to FIG. (9m) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 38 (8 m-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8m-2), the notice icon I1 of the first lord thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 38 (9 m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box that he has is thrown by the character YM of the lord, and the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this effect example, the notice icon before the change may be overwritten with the notice icon after the change. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, and this may further enhance the effect. It should be noted that this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwrite effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

38 (8n-1) to FIG. (9n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 38 ( As shown in 9n), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and throws the notice icon I1 of the first lord who has it by the character YM of the lord, and the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I1 of the first lord in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten with the notice icon before the change. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, and this may further enhance the effect. It should be noted that this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwrite effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Further, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change becomes the notice icon before overwriting (for example, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box). May be another notice icon. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher when the notice icon after overwriting is digested than when the notice icon before overwriting is digested, or the reliability of the jackpot may be lower. It may be configured so that the reliability of the jackpot does not change.

Next, an example of the effect in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 39A, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, indicating that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (A), the character YM2 of the lord holding the placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. This placard is marked with the words "It will change", foretelling that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

After that, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 39 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box. The display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 39 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode displays the look-ahead notice display mode. Changes to. The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may be changed, the display mode of any of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may be changed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed. May change. As described above, in this production example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the above-mentioned effect, the notice icon is held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

Further, as shown in 39 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, but it is reduced and displayed in the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, indicating that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39C, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce a chance for Princess Chibi. The Chibihime chance production is a production that may be started when the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation game is executed. The Chibihime chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery, in which the character of the Chibihime selects one from the five start points, moves along the Amida route from the selected start point, and reaches the goal point. It is a notice that the effect corresponding to the indicated icon will be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it is announced that the blade member 2321 of the second special figure start port 232 will be opened for a long time, and the "super hot" When the goal point indicated by the character notation is reached, it is suggested that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and when the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached. Foretells that the variable display result of the general map is out of order.

Further, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by the notice icon of the lord is reached, among the notice icons before the change displayed in the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 39 (D1). At least one of the changes to a notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box. The display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

When the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 39 (D2), at least one of the hold icons in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The display mode of the look-ahead notice changes. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the look-ahead notice display mode. The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may be changed, the display mode of any of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may be changed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed. May change.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the above-mentioned effect, the notice icon is held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

Next, a display example when the power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Here, FIG. 40 is a diagram stepwise showing a display example when the power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 40 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, indicating that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is a look-ahead notice display mode, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a default display. It is an aspect. Further, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, respectively, and the notice icon third display area YA3 has a thousand boxes. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

FIG. 40 (B) shows a power failure for some reason, and FIG. 40 (C) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the power is instantly restored. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C) is displayed with the characters "Please wait for a while during restoration", which is a restoration display. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), the symbol variation display ends, and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays "special figure I" which is a display result of the detachment. When the symbol variation display is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7", which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Then, when the power is cut off or restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. In addition, when the power is cut off or restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or restored, the look-ahead result information stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit or the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308 is "undetermined" information. It may be configured to be. Here, if there is at least one hold that includes "undetermined" information in the subcommand including the look-ahead result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, the "undetermined" information is included. The look-ahead notice including the digestion effect and the increase effect of the advance notice icon may not be performed until all the pending reservations are exhausted. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for the newly increased hold (hold where the look-ahead result is saved) after the power is cut off or restored, and the look-ahead notice is given after all the holds containing "undetermined" information are exhausted. However, for the newly increased hold after power interruption / recovery, a look-ahead notice may be given before the hold containing "undetermined" information is exhausted.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and stepwise shows another effect example of the increase effect of the notice icon and the digestion effect. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 41 step by step. In FIGS. 41 to 42, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 41, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIG. 41 (1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 19 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in large size in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the center of the display screen. It differs from FIG. 19 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display area is formed above the hold icon display area 281 and the three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size. The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured so that after the fluctuation starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the determination is stopped.

At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, unlike FIG. 19 (6), the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I21 of the "house" in which the characters "house" are surrounded by a circle.

After the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (3) and displays the notice icon I21 of the possessed "house" at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (4). An effect display of throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (5), the notice icon I21 of the thrown "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then as shown in FIG. 41 (6). In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of the "house" is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, at least suggesting that the family crest effect described later may be executed in the future.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41 (7) to 41 (8), the character YM of the lord is displayed to be framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special diagram 1 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is special drawing 1. It becomes the first hold icon h11 of. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I22 of the "crest" in which the characters of the "crest" are surrounded by a circle.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (12), the character YM of the lord moves and displays the character YM to the predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display of throwing toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (14), the notice icon I22 of the thrown “crest” is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, the same effect display as in FIG. 41 (6) is performed, and then the same effect display as in FIGS. 41 (7) to (8) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 41 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I21 and the notice icon of the "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (19) following FIG. 41 (18). The display that the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of the "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and Notice icon A display is performed to move from the second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" have been digested. The timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is deleted may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. Further, the timing of starting the movement of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may be the same, or the start of the movement of the "house" notice icon I21 may be the "crest" notice icon I22. The movement start of the "crest" notice icon I22 may be earlier than the movement start of the "house" notice icon I21.

After that, when the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (20), and then FIG. 42 ( At the timing shown in 21), the family crest accessory 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image to that effect. A fall effect is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (22), it develops into a super reach (swordsman reach). The contents of the swordsman reach are as described above in FIGS. 14 to 16, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

In the present embodiment, when two specific notice icons (for example, "house" notice icon I21 and "crest" notice icon I22) are digested, the corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. It is configured in. Even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or other effects may be performed. In addition, when the family crest drop effect is performed, it may be guaranteed that the symbol variation display will be a big hit, or it may result in a loss. In addition, the case where the family crest drop effect is performed may be configured so that the big hit is easier than when the family crest drop effect is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured so that the family crest drop effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is a loss. In addition, it is easier to digest two specific notice icons (for example, "house" notice icon I21 and "crest" notice icon I22) in the big hit symbol change display than in the lost symbol change display. It may be configured in.

43 and 44 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. In FIGS. 43 to 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

In FIG. 43 (a1), unlike FIG. 41 (5), the “crest” notice icon I22 appears before the “house” notice icon I21 and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. , As shown in FIG. 43 (a2), the notice icon I21 of the “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a3), the "crest" notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display area YA2 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display that the notice icon I21 of the "house" that had been used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of the "house" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and The notice icon is displayed so as to move from the second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach state by the "decoration 1" is formed, and the reach effect is started.

After that, when the "crest" notice icon I22 and the "house" notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1). To. At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of "house" and "crest") instead of the order of "crest" and "house". Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the notice icon I22 of the "crest" and the notice icon I21 of the "house" may be enlarged and displayed in the order of the "crest" and "house". In this production example, regardless of whether it is shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the above-mentioned family crest drop effect is subsequently performed. For example, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "house" and "crest" (that is, the correct order), the family crest drop effect is performed and the order of "crest" and "house" (that is, that is). If the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the wrong order), the family crest drop effect may not be performed. Also, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", it is more difficult to start the family crest drop effect than when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "Crest". It may be configured in.

FIGS. 43 (b1) to 43 (b6) show another form of the family crest drop effect.

First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b1), only the notice icon I21 of the “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “crest” is displayed. It is shown that the notice icon I22 is digested without waiting for the notice icon I22 to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b2), when only the notice icon I21 of the “house” is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 43 (b3), the family crest role The object 224B descends slightly from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and moves up and down while overlapping the front side of a part of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It operates as if it is vibrating in the direction (fanning operation). At this time, in the upper right portion of the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "Preparing for family crest" are displayed to indicate that the family crest drop effect may be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b2), the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the production of the lord has started. At this time, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I22 of the "crest". Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b4), when the character YM of the lord moves to a predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 Notice icon is displayed in the second display area YA2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the off display result is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. The notice icon I22 of the "crest" is still displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, at this time, the family crest accessory 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position to make it easier to recognize that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, but it is not retracted to the initial position and the fanning operation is continued. May be good. On the other hand, the character display of "Preparing for family crest" is continuously displayed.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 43 (b6), the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the evacuated family crest accessory 224B descends again and resumes the fanning operation. In this production example, after that, for example, when the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest accessory 224B is lowered, and FIG. 42 The family crest fall effect shown in (21) is performed. In some cases, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, in FIG. 43 (b2), the notice icon I21 of the “house” may be displayed in an enlarged display until the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed later is digested. At that time, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be stocked, but it may be digested as it is without being stocked.

FIGS. 43 (c1) to 43 (c2-3) show other examples of the notice icon digestion effect. In this production example, it is shown that the background notice that the background changes is performed by digesting the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 43 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the “Den” surrounded by the characters “Den” in a circle is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon I32 of the "princess" that encloses the letters "princess" in a circle is displayed in the second display area YA2 of the notice icon, and the notice icon I33 of the "grandfather" that encloses the letters "old man" in a circle gives a notice. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

In FIG. 43 (c2-1), the background display after the three notice icons I31 of the “Den”, the notice icon I32 of the “princess”, and the notice icon I33 of the “old man” have been digested is shown. ing. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image in which the grandfather's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and the face of the lord. A background display is displayed in which the uploaded image and the image with the princess's face uploaded are divided into three equal parts. In the present embodiment, when all three notice icons of "Den" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "old man" notice icon I33 are digested, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. Is configured to display a background display indicating that is the highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested at the same time or one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. For example, the notice icon I31 of "Den"> "Princess" The reliability may be the highest when digested in the order of "notice icon I32"> "old man" notice icon I33, but the relationship between the digestion order and the reliability of the jackpot can be appropriately set. ..

Further, in FIG. 43 (c2-2), among the three notice icons of the "Den" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "old man" notice icon I33, the "princess" notice icon I32 and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of the "old man" has been digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image in which the princess's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and the grandfather's face. A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three notice icons of the "Den" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "old man" notice icon I33 are digested, the symbol variation display is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, but the background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "old man" are digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "Den". The notice icon I31 of the "princess" and the notice icon I32 of the "princess" may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of the "den" and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, "Don" The notice icon I31 of the "old man" and the notice icon I33 of the "old man", the notice icon I32 of the "princess" and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" are more reliable than when the notice icon I33 of the "old man" is digested. And when the "old man" notice icon I33 is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the "princess" notice icon I32 and the "old man" notice icon I33 are digested. These can be set as appropriate.

Further, in FIG. 43 (c2-3), of the three notice icons I31 of the "Den", the notice icon I32 of the "princess", and the notice icon I33 of the "old man", only the notice icon I33 of the "old man" The state of the background display after the icon is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background display in which the image with the grandfather's face up is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three notice icons of the "Den" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "old man" notice icon I33 is digested, the symbol variation display is displayed. It is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot in the above is lower than that when the two notice icons are digested. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I33 of "old man" is digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested. Alternatively, the "princess" notice icon I32 may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested, the notice icon I32 of "Princess" or the notice of "Grandfather" The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and when the notice icon I32 of the "princess" is digested, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of the "old man" is digested. However, these can be set as appropriate.

Further, in this production example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of the displayed notice icon. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "Princess" or "Grandfather" The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "Princess" is displayed, and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" is displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are displayed. Or, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "old man" are displayed, and the notice icon I31 of "den" and the notice icon I33 of "old man" are displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of the "princess" and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" are displayed, but these can be set as appropriate.

Further, in this production example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but the background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change, and in this case, as a so-called breaking of the law, it may be notified that the big hit is confirmed.

Further, when displaying the three notice icons, the three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol change display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol change display is performed. You may do it. In this case, the reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on the display order.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested, the character of the lord appears and the reach of the lord is started, and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" is digested, the old man character may appear and the old man reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I33 of the "old man" and the notice icon I32 of the "princess" are digested, the character of the old man and the character of the princess appear, the old man & princess reach is started, and the notice icon of the "lord" When I31 and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, the character of the lord and the character of the princess appear and the lord & princess reach is started, the notice icon I31 of "lord" and the notice icon of "old man" When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather may appear and the lord & grandfather reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "Den", the notice icon I32 of "Princess", and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are digested, the character of the lord, the character of the princess, and the character of the grandfather appear. The princess & grandfather reach may be started. In this way, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

Further, what is displayed after these notice icons are digested is not limited to the above-mentioned notice of reach effect and background display, and for example, the effect mode in the jackpot game and the mode during symbol change are changed. Other notices (for example, various notices such as characters that increase the notice icon) may be given. Further, the effect performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music, etc.) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed, or the digested notice icon may be used. The effect may be performed by the corresponding light emission pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, an example in which an effect may be performed for each of the time when the notice icon I21 of the “house” is digested and the time when the notice icon I22 of the “crest” is digested. explain.

First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (d1), the notice icon I21 of the “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of the “crest”. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state by the "decoration 1", and the reach effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (d2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only the "house" notice icon I21 of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested. It is shown that it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), the notice icon I21 of the “house” is enlarged and displayed as the middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of the "house" is digested to change to the chance symbol which is a special symbol.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in connection with the display of the chance symbol, or as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2), the family crest is displayed together with the effect image. In some cases, a family crest drop effect is performed to drop the accessory 224B. After such an effect is performed, for example, there is a case where the swordsman reach described above is performed. In addition, it is possible to shift to the swordsman reach after performing the effect of dropping the family crest character 224B without displaying the effect image, or to the swordsman reach without dropping the effect image or the family crest character 224B. You may want to migrate. Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-3), the normal reach effect may be started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of the “house”.

In addition, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be shifted to another super reach (family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the stop display is performed by the combination of "decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1", at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (d4-4). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters of "family crest challenge" indicating that the family crest challenge reach has been started are displayed. The first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated while maintaining the combination of "decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1" at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (d5-4), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the character YM of the lord pulls the “crest” notice icon I22 with a rope, and the “crest” notice. It is suggested that the attraction of the icon I22 raises the expectation for the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4), when the character YM of the lord succeeds in attracting the notice icon I22 of the "crest", the family crest accessory 224B falls as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect is performed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the "crest" was successfully digested. After the family crest fall effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above will be performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4a), the rope pulled by the character YM of the lord may break and the "crest" notice icon I22 may fail to be attracted. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the swordsman reach may be started. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower than that in the case where the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is successfully attracted. Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the character YM of the lord is broken and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" fails to be attracted, it is shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied when the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is digested first. Further, it may be configured so that the family crest drop effect is more likely to occur when the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested than when the "house" notice icon I21 is digested. The reverse may be true.

In addition to the above-mentioned "house" notice icon I21, "crest" notice icon I22, "den" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "old man" notice icon I33, these There may be a Gase notice icon that resembles an icon, for example, a "U" notice icon, a "shark" notice icon, an "old" notice icon, a "minister" notice icon, or an "auntie". You may prepare a notice icon or the like. For example, even if the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "shark" are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "crest" are digested. The family crest drop effect may be performed less frequently when the "house" notice icon and the "shark" notice icon are digested than when the notice icon is displayed. In addition, the notice icon of Gase such as "shark" may be changed to the notice icon such as "crest".

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, one word is formed by the two characters "house" and "crest", and a predetermined production is performed by satisfying the requirements for forming the word. However, for example, a word composed of three or more characters may be applied to this production example. For example, a "suspicious" notice icon, a "similar" notice icon, and a "ream" notice icon may be applied. When the three icons of the icons are digested, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed.

Further, in this production example, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest", when there is only one stock space in the notice icon display area 285. , The notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may not be displayed. Further, only one of the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not be displayed may be displayed as the notice icon. When there is a vacancy in the area 285, the display may be increased, or when there is no vacancy in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon displayed in the first place may not be digested. Further, even if the notice icon display area 285 becomes empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be digested as it is.

Further, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of them is not displayed by the time the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" are exhausted, for example, "house". When the notice icon I21 of the "house" is digested, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be digested together, or only the notice icon I21 of the "house" may be digested.

FIG. 45 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is an increase effect of a notice icon and a digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification step by step. In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 45 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice, and its display mode is another hold icon (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. The first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in a manner in which the decorative symbol is displayed in large size in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, shows how various parts are added. In FIG. 45 (e1), the hold icon display area 281 shows. The second hold icon h12, which is set, constitutes the first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image imitating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen, and the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is the first. We are carrying the second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1. The second notice part P2 is an image imitating the head of a snowman.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3 is an image imitating a bucket that covers the head of a snowman.

At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e3), the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed out in the decorative symbol display device 208, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position and displays, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e4), the third notice part P3 possessed is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, it can be said that the present embodiment has a function of stocking the notice parts constituting the hold icon in the notice icon display area 285. After that, the character YM of the lord is framed out as described above as shown in FIGS. 41 (6) to 41 (8).

FIG. 45 (e6) shows how the display result of the loss is derived, one of the pending variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, or the hold icon display mode that is already the look-ahead notice display mode is more reliable. Notifies that the display mode is changed to a higher degree. In addition, a big hit notice display in the running symbol change display is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e7), the variable display of the symbol is started in the chance roulette display area 287.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third notice part P3 is digested. The third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. This DJ character BY possesses the fourth notice part P4. This fourth notice part P4 is an image imitating a muffler wrapped around the neck of a snowman.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 imitates the head constituting the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the snowman. The DJ character BY is placed on the upper part of the notice part P2, and while flying toward the upper left corner of the display screen, the fourth notice part P4 in possession is placed on the notice icon display area 285. 2 The effect display placed in the display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, the variable display of the symbol is still performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e10), a display result in which the characters “Get” are displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived in the chance roulette display area 287. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image imitating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is the first model that imitates the body constituting the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 45 (e11'), the first notice icon in the notice icon display area 285 on which the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately mounting the fifth notice part P5. It may be displayed (stocked) once in the display area YA1. In this case, the notice icon may not be displayed in the first display area YA1 but may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notice icon third display area YA3 or the like).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 45 (e12), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and is removed. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". In this production example, the variable icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but it may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 is still displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 45 (e13), the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variable icon h0, which is a display mode of the snowman. After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the variable icon h0, which is the display mode of the snowman, and the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon), which is the display mode of the snowman. ) Is completed. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. When the display mode of the completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a look-ahead notice, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot in the fluctuation is high.

Further, the fourth notice part P4 may be attached not only during the normal symbol variation display but also when, for example, a super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 45 (e14-2). As shown in FIG. 45, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach, and is attached to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e15-2). You may do so. Here, as the variable icon h0 shifts to super reach, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed out downward, and the display position is displaced downward accordingly.

In this production example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are digested, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. The display may be made. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lowered. In addition, when the displayed notice part is digested, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of look-ahead, functions as a look-ahead notice of other hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not the target of look-ahead. , It may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

FIG. 46 is a diagram stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and is an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the digestion effect stepwise, and FIG. 47 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 46 step by step. In FIGS. 46 to 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold are shown. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 46, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold icon h12 is the target of the look-ahead notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1. Similar to the second hold icon h11, the display mode is the default. Further, FIGS. 46 to 47 are different from the above-described embodiment in that the first decorative symbol display device 208A as the main display device and the second decorative symbol display device 208B as the sub display device are provided. .. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A performs the second. Variable display of decorative patterns is performed. As shown in FIG. 46 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the character YM of the lord. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second display area is displayed. When the notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the display area is increased and the notice icon can be stocked. Often, for example, each time the display area being displayed is full with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are full with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that were hidden. Further, when the character YM of the lord appears, the display area may be increased by the number of the notice icons possessed by the character YM of the lord. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icons. In the case where the character YM of the lord possesses one notice icon when the production of the lord is started, one display area is displayed when the character YM of the lord throws the notice icon. It may be increased by the amount, or all the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. In addition, when the character YM of the lord possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by only three when the character YM of the lord throws the notice icon. , The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second display area is displayed. When the notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the decorative design display device 208B, the notice icon display area (first notice) consisting of four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed is displayed. The icon display area) is reduced, and the notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) consisting of four new display areas where the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed, and this second notice icon is displayed. A new stock notice icon may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing for displaying the second notice icon display area may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 may be reduced and displayed, or the number of stocks of the notice icon may be displayed instead of the notice icon display area 285. , The notice icon display area 285A may be erased. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the pre-reading notice may be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

After the character YM of the lord moves to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (3) and displays the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (4), the notice icon display area 285A An effect display is performed to throw at. In this production example, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. When displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B may not be straddled. For example, the first decorative symbol display device may be displayed. The notice icon displayed on the 208A that has entered the predetermined warp entrance may be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and then, as shown in FIG. 46 (6), In the first decorative pattern display device 208A, the effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, foretelling that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production effect will be executed in the future. After that, the character YM of the lord is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

FIG. 46 (7) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

After that, as a result of performing the symbol variation display based on the hold of the variation display of the first special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 46 (8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, "decoration 7-decoration 6" -The combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the off display is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued as usual, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 46 (9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved by the movement animation. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 46 (10), the notice icon first of the notice icon display area 285A in the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The display that the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed to move from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. When the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, at this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (11), the digested hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (12). Will be done. The digested notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (11) indicates the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display by displaying the first decorative symbol. It may be the timing when the device 208A is moved to the center, or the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (12) is enlarged and displayed.

In FIG. 47 (13), which continues from FIG. 46 (12), the character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat. The timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the character display of "continue" is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed, or the timing before the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "continue" at the timing of FIG. 47 (14), and the second decorative symbol display device 208B gives a notice. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed over two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown to be in a non-reach state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (16), the enlarged character BC2 of the Bancho appears, is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and then is displayed in FIG. 47. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the Bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed is displayed. It is performed and informs the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production is started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the character BC of the Bancho is displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 47 (16), the character BC2 of the Bancho does not have to be displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "displaying across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be. Further, the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be used for integrated display. Further, the display moving from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (18), the pseudo-continuous symbol is framed in from above the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the display is performed so as to move downward at a low speed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (19). After that, for example, the pseudo-continuous production is performed as shown in FIGS. 21 (31) and later as described above.

48 and 49 are diagrams showing stepwise another modification of the notice icon increasing effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect step by step. In FIGS. 48 to 50, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold are shown. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 48 and 49, the hold icon, which is the target of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon display area 281, is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

In FIGS. 48 (a1) to 48 (a7-2), the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 46 to 47, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The difference is that when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, it is configured so that it can overlap the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol is variablely displayed. The contents displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 are as described above as shown in FIG. 45, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps substantially the center of the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208B switches from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image that surrounds the periphery of the second decorative symbol display device 208B to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. Since the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 48 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 46 (2) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. 48 As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and the stop display is stopped by the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" which is the result of the loss. At this time, although the variation icon h0 is not deleted, it may be deleted at a timing before the variation display of the special figure 1 ends. Further, in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but the first decorative symbol is displayed and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this production example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during the symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interruption regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is in progress.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised even after the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in a lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are exhausted is completed, but at what timing 2 Whether to raise the decorative symbol display device 208B can be appropriately set. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are lost as a result of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". Is displayed as a stop in combination. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

FIG. 48 (a6-2) shows that after that, two holds are exhausted and the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started. Specifically, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the variation of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display is being made.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is digested, the notice icon I6 of the hat expands as shown in FIG. 48 (a7-2). Then, it is displayed so as to extend from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continue" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed over. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so that the player can easily see it. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then rise and return to the initial position, or may maintain the lowered state until the symbol variation is completed.

In FIGS. 48 (b1) to 48 (b4), the number of notice icon displays is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208) instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. An example in which the device 288 is provided is shown. The notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) on which the notice icon is displayed.

FIGS. 48 (b1) to 48 (b3) have the same effect contents as those of FIGS. 20 (17) to (19), but in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, It is shown that the numerical value changes according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 48 (b1), since only one notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, “01” indicating the number is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. There is. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b2), the character YM of the lord throws three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, thousand box notice icon I9, fan notice icon I10). However, since it has not yet been displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value shown in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM of the lord throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called ghost is displayed). Then, when the above-mentioned three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b3), the value is updated and "04" is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (b4), when the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the notice icons is reduced by one, the value is updated and "03" is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. The timing for reducing and displaying the value of the notice icon display number display device may be the timing before the notice icon is digested, may be at the same time as the notice icon is digested, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be the timing after digestion. As shown by enclosing with a broken line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is digested, and the total number of notice icons (4 in this example) displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do so. In this production example, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments, but for example, an operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as a production movable body, for example, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, or a sound, a decorative symbol display device (a decorative symbol display device on which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and other decorative symbol display devices). The number of notice icons displayed may be notified by a decorative pattern display device or the like).

The production examples shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to 49 (c9) use two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 46 to 47. However, they differ in that they use the same size display device. In FIG. 49, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 49 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held. The mode is, for example, the default display mode as in the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are They are arranged so as to substantially overlap. The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second hold number display H1 and the special figure 2 second hold number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are held. "2" and "0" are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 49 (c1). At the timing shown in, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-mentioned chance roulette display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed. It is shown. Further, the background display is also displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

As shown in FIG. 49 (c1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, the second decorative symbol display device 208D is the first decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 49 (c2). It descends to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display was performed was switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B, and was derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C is changed to the display mode when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol becomes smaller and is displayed only in the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

In FIG. 49 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon 1st display area YA1 and the notice icon 2nd display area YA2, respectively, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon 3rd display area YA3. .. Since the number of holdings is one at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c3), "1" indicating that is displayed in the special figure 1 second holding number display H1.

FIG. 49 (c4) shows the state when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested. That is, it is notified that the chance eye notice is performed by digesting the notice icon I7 of the shuriken. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 49 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of this loss is an opportunity, and it is informed that the symbol variation display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by displaying this chance eye.

FIG. 49 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol change of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is foretelling that the second pseudo-ream notice will be made. Since the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And, it will be displayed on the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (c9), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the second hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the stop display is displayed. An effect display is performed to push up the right symbol, and the player is notified that the second pseudo-continuous effect may be started. At this time, the character BC of the Bancho is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (c9), when the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a number symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying a decorative symbol in a small size, a small symbol consisting of only a number symbol is displayed, and the large symbol and the small symbol are displayed in different display modes, but the large symbol and the small symbol are displayed. It is also possible to make the display mode the same by changing only the size.

In this production example, when the notice icon display area 285B is displayed, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. , Both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved in a direction in which they are separated from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display When the devices 208D are separated from each other, the accessory arranged on the back side thereof may be visible, and further, the accessory may be moved so as to project forward. You may. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are exhausted.

FIG. 49 (d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, in FIG. 49 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display device 208E arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but are slightly smaller in width. It should be noted that all three decorative symbol display devices may have the same size.

The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed over three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (d), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively. In particular, the notice icon second display area YA2 The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed on the above is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. Further, the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device for each symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display. It is displayed on the device 208G. In addition, there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative design display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable both in the examples described so far and in the examples described below.

FIG. 50 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, in FIG. 50, the first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. , The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction as compared with the first decorative symbol display device 208H, but are slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with frame portions protruding from the upper end side, the lower end side, and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side, and the right end side. Each frame is provided so as to project. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, respectively, and when they are closest to each other, they are positioned. It is possible to display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be covered.

Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done.

FIG. 50 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 22 (47), and covers the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. It is shown that the swordsman reach is being carried out. That is, in FIG. 50 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the Senryo box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and it is announced that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It is shown that it is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in directions close to each other. At this time, both ends of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, so that the display state is difficult to see. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digesting the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 50 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. It becomes a state. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J perform the reach transition effect as shown in FIG. 22 (49) as described above. That is, over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the reach effect display that was being executed becomes slightly darker, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display, and the reach effect that is being executed. The display is cut off. This display is rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e3) to 50 (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect starts before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to accept the operation of the effect button 136. Notifies that this is possible and encourages the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed is performed at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 50 (e7), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are covered with "decoration 1-decoration 2-". The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e8) to 50 (e9), all of them are temporarily hidden, and in that state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. The first decorative symbol display device 208H is rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface.

Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other and return to the initial position, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e10), Along with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display of the fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e11-1), the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" that has fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed as a result of the loss.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the display that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e11-2). That is, the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed to move from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. As described above, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate even if the notice icon is digested.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e12-2), the effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed, and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and revariable display is performed. After that, a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 1-decoration") 1-A combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 1") is derived and displayed.

FIG. 50 (e7') shows an example in which a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in FIG. 50 (e6) is performed. It is a figure. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (e7'), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather's character is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

FIG. 50 (e7 ″) is configured so that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. An example of the production when it is done is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e3) to 50 (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also has these. It is also possible to rotate it together with. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured or separately. It may be configured as a body and may be configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be rotated in a state where it is difficult to see by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in the figure (e6) is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The device 208J moves in a direction away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 50 (e7'), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208I. The widths of the display screens of the decorative pattern display device 308J can be aligned.

FIG. 51 is a diagram stepwise showing another modification of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 51, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative design display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative design display device 208 via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 51, the first layer panel arranged on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is provided with a lens cut that imitates a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 51, the light guide plate IL is shown surrounded by a broken line. Further, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL panel is not limited to two, and may be one layer or three or more layers. Here, when it is composed of one layer, for example, by changing the lens cut pattern, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when the light is emitted may be different. Further, in FIG. 51, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 51, the hold icon, which is the target of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon display area 281, is hatched for the preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variable icon display area 280 and the variable icon display area 280 are displayed. In the hold icon display area 281, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. The contents displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 are as described above as shown in FIG. 45, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a dark display. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 51 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon is performed by the darkening display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (turns off), and the blackout display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The blackout display of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While displaying the movement toward, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, so that the stock effect of the notice icon is performed. You may be asked.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display and guides. The stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise and causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. You may do so. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured separately by the panel of the first layer and the panel of the second layer. In this case, for example, only the panel of the second layer is rotated and the first layer is rotated. The layer panel may not be rotated, or the first layer panel may be rotated along with the second layer panel.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, thereby pseudo in the future. It is foretold that the continuous production will be executed.

FIG. 51 (g) shows how the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been digested. As shown in FIG. 51 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing. The warning icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the warning icon I6 of the hat.

FIG. 51 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows that it has been announced in advance. As shown in FIG. 51 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the symbol is performed in the chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, as a result of the variation display of the pattern in the chance roulette display area 287, the hat Notice icon I6 is foretold to be derived.

FIG. 51 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (i), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate is erased. A pattern imitating the warning icon I6 of the hat is formed by emitting light of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL, and the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer is also emitted to imitate the effect image. The notice icon digestion effect is performed so as to form. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, it may be possible to make the patterns formed on the panels of the above stand out.

FIG. 51 (j) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, and then the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The display is enlarged to fill the screen, and at that timing, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL is made to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, and the notice icon digestion effect is performed. At this time, although the notice icon display area 285 is erased, it may be in the displayed state.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. In addition, in FIGS. 52 (1) to 52 (11), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is replaced with the fan notice icon I10 and is replaced with the drink notice icon I31. Since it is the same as that of FIGS. 22 (44) to 22 (54), only the parts different from the above description will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is configured to be able to project upward by an actuator such as a motor, and its position can be displaced according to the content of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed to a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

As shown in FIG. 52 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I31 of this drink is a notice icon for notifying that the content to be produced is changed by digestion.

At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 52 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon I31 is digested. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is enlarged and displayed, and the button image 136a is sprinkled with the contents of the drink.

Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the protruding button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protruding position after the liquid image disappears. At this time, it is the state before the start of operation acceptance of the effect button 136.

Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (17), the button reception time meter is reduced in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 52 (18). Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. It may be the timing before the display of, or the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the drink notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. Further, in the period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, the light is turned on in a manner of notifying that the period is other than the operation reception period (for example, it lights in blue), and when the operation reception period is reached, for example, It may be lit (for example, lit in red) in a manner of notifying that fact.

FIG. 53 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect using a movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

In FIGS. 53 (a1) to 53 (a3), when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the stock of the notice icon. There is. FIG. 53 (a1) has the same display as that of FIG. 41 (1), but the effect movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the effect device. It is arranged so as to be hidden behind the 206.

FIG. 53 (a2) shows how the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden in the effect device 206 to the visible position which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that one of the plurality of types of notice icons will be stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified. For example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the notice may be given by voice, a lamp, or the like. , A plurality of types of the effect movable body 224C may be prepared according to the type of the advance notice icon, and the type of the advance notice icon stocked depending on the type of the effect movable body 224C that appears may be notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, the stock notice icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 53 (a3) shows how the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

In FIG. 53B, effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that can rotate with the depth direction as the rotation axis are arranged in the upper and lower neighborhoods of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the upper vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable body 224 Da with the letters "Large", the fifth effect movable body 224 De with the asterisk symbol, and the "board". The second effect movable body 224Db with the characters of is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and in the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable body 224Dc with the characters of "shake" is attached. The sixth effect movable body 224Df with the asterisk symbol and the fourth effect movable body 224Dd with the characters "Mai" are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate according to the number of the notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 53B, when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd are displayed. Rotates. When the notice icon is digested, the rotation of the digested number of effect movable bodies may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of stocked notice icons may be rotated. May be good.

FIGS. 53 (c1) to 53 (c6) show that the pre-reading mode is notified by operating the effect movable body 224. In this production example, the special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is digested, the mode shifts to the look-ahead mode for notifying that the variable display of the special figure, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended.

FIG. 53 (c1) shows how the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested and moved to the center of the display screen. On the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body 224 imitating an arm is arranged. The effect movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation shaft ax1. .. Further, the forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation shaft ax2 at its base end portion.

When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the look-ahead mode is started, as shown in FIG. 53 (c2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display "preparing for special training" is displayed on the right in the strip-shaped scroll display area. It is scrolled to the left from. As a result, the player is notified that the read-ahead mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, the initial position where the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the position covering the front side of the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first position). A reciprocating operation (look-ahead operation) is performed between the two. The look-ahead operation by the effect movable body 224 is set to temporarily return to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, during the execution of the look-ahead operation, only the upper arm portion 224a operates and the forearm portion 224b does not operate, but the forearm portion 224b may also operate in addition to the upper arm portion 224a, or the forearm portion 224a does not operate and the forearm portion 224a does not operate. Only part 224b may operate.

FIG. 53 (c3) shows a state in which two “decorations 1” are aligned to form a reach state during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading. Here, too, the look-ahead operation is continuously performed.

FIG. 53 (c4) shows how the special training reach as a super reach effect has started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of "preparing for special training" is finished, and the characters "start of special training" indicating that the special training reach has been started are displayed. Further, in the effect movable body 224, after returning to the initial position once, the upper arm portion 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 53 (c5), and then as shown in FIG. 53 (c6). In addition, the forearm portion 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum moving position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, and notifies that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

FIG. 54 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing another effect example of the increase effect of the notice icon stepwise. Is. In FIG. 54, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 54, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold icon h12 is the target of the look-ahead notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1. Similar to the second hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

Since FIG. 54 (1) has the same display as that of FIG. 41 (1) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 54 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat.

In this production example, the character YM of the lord moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (3), but the notice icon I6 of the hat he possesses has not yet thrown, and FIG. 54 (4) As shown in the above, while the character YM of the lord is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 54 (5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special diagram 1 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is special drawing 1. It becomes the first hold icon h11 of. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The character YM of the lord is still waiting at the throwing position.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (6), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this production example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, the advance notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display that is being executed, but the advance notice icon is stocked. Instead, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. In addition, when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, a notice is given that the notice icon will be displayed during the running symbol change display, but the notice icon is not displayed. You may. In this case, for example, the character YM of the lord may end the display by the time the variable display of the symbol to be read ahead starts, and for example, one before the variable display of the symbol to be read ahead. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the character YM of the lord may be terminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is completed. For example, the super reach performed during the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is started. The display of the character YM of the lord may be terminated before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the character YM of the lord may be continuously displayed even after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, when the character of the lord is on standby and a big hit occurs in the symbol fluctuation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing for deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example). , During the shaking fluctuation display), the standby display may be continued with the character of the lord holding the notice icon, or may be deleted.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are performed, and the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are shown in FIGS. 19 (9) to 19 (10). Since it is the same as (12) except that the second decorative pattern is variablely displayed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 54 (11) shows how the result of the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be read ahead is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. There is. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 54 (12), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 54 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested. The notice icon digestion effect is performed.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of another effect of increasing the notice icon. In FIG. 55, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 55, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

In FIGS. 55 (a1) to 55 (a6), the notice icon is stocked after the effect of notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

FIG. 55 (a1) shows that when the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanatory display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, the character display of "Item Get by Strike" indicating that the item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, if a strike is won in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a bowling effect by the character of the lord has started. The contents of the mission and its success reward displayed on the explanation display unit 288 are related to the stock of the notice item, for example, the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, and the contents are being executed. It may be related to the notice about the symbol variation display of. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display displayed only on the notice regarding the stock of the notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that the notice that the notice icon is stocked is given by performing the bowling effect as shown in FIG. In addition, this bowling effect may be a dedicated effect performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the running symbol change display, or may be used as another look-ahead advance notice. May be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect is not finished, and the character display of "following the next fluctuation" is displayed indicating that the bowling effect is to be continuously performed in the next symbol variation display. In addition, "Strike item Get" indicating the mission and its success reward is also displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the ball thrown by the character of the lord rolls on the lane and heads toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , Fueling expectations that notice icons may be stocked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the scene where the strike was taken is displayed together with the character display of "strike", and it is assumed that the mission has been achieved, as shown in FIG. 55 (a5). As shown, the character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. You will be notified that it has been stocked. As described above, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, the advance notice item is displayed without displaying (stocking) the advance notice item during the running symbol variation display. Has been announced.

As shown in FIG. 55B, the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-mentioned bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display devices 208K are arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The notice icon display area 285C that displays the display area WP2 and displays the notice icon in the lower half is displayed, the above-mentioned boring effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the stock notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. It may be displayed in.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 55, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the bowling effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during the shaking fluctuation display). The background display may be displayed, or a background display different from this may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a2) may be displayed.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (b), if a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be terminated, but the display may be continued as it is. .. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (c), if a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. You may.

FIG. 56 is a diagram stepwise showing another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the variable display of the special figure 2 is given priority over the special figure 1, but in this production example, either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game is prioritized. However, it is applied to the game in which the special figure variation game related to the holding of each of the special figures 1 and 2 is started in the starting opening winning order, and the starting opening winning order is changed. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to a special figure 2 priority variation. Further, in FIG. 56, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 56, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold icon h13 is the target of the look-ahead notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1. Similar to the second hold icon h11, the display mode is the default. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h11, the third hold icon h12, and the fifth hold icon h13 are located at the first special figure start port 230. It is a hold icon indicating the variable display of the special figure 1 which has been won and held, and the second hold icon h21 and the fourth hold icon h22 have been held by winning the second special figure start port 232. It is a hold icon which shows the fluctuation display of special figure 2.

The effect shown in FIG. 56 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg and reaches the destination. It is a production (Amida production) to acquire notice items and the like.

First, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and displays the variation of the special figure 2. It has been reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Amida effect has started. Specifically, when the Amida production is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), the Sabohani character SB is assigned to any one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. Is arranged, and a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a loss icon IX are placed at each end point of the three horizontal lines. In addition, a number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set as appropriate, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of reservations at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the Sabohani character moves on the line according to the Amida rule and reaches the end point where the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 is placed, the notice icon is stocked. When the end point where the lost icon IX is placed is reached, it is notified that the notice icon will not be stocked. Then, each time the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. In addition, the character SB of Sabohani may move to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-ream is performed. For example, when the pseudo-ream occurs, the character SB advances to the vertical line two ahead. Etc. In addition, one symbol variation display may be advanced to two or more vertical lines ahead. It should be noted that the effect as shown in FIG. 56 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 55 (c) and FIG. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue to display the effect even during the execution of Super Reach. Then, for example, it may be possible to simultaneously perform an effect in which the notice icon increases during super reach.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon is moved. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the other hold icons move to the right one by one. On the other hand, the decorative design starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of Sabohani starts moving from the start point of the upper horizontal line among the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is started. When it reaches the line, the smoke that was hiding the vertical line is erased, and it is displayed that the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are connected by the vertical line, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the vertical line. , At the timing shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the player has reached the middle of the horizontal line in the middle row.

After that, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is completed, the variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. Will be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1), when the character SB of Sabohani reaches the second vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the lower row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being erased, it was found that this vertical line was cut off in the middle, and the vertical line could not be moved from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani is in the middle. Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

Then, when the variation display of the special figure 2 is completed, the variation display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), when the character SB of Sabohani reaches the third vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is connected to the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row. Therefore, according to the rules of Amidakuji, the character SB of Sabohani is changed from the horizontal line in the middle row to the upper row by the vertical line. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of Sabohani reaches the end point of the horizontal line in the upper row where the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a5), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After the display indicating that the acquisition has been performed, the Amida effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Will be done.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1) and described above, any one of a plurality of different types of notice icons was selected. For example, in FIG. 56 (a1-). As shown in 2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is placed at all the end points of the horizontal line, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the notice icon I10 of the fan is placed at all the end points of the horizontal line. May be good. By arranging the same type of notice icons at all the end points of the horizontal lines in this way, it is possible to notify the player that it is confirmed that the displayed notice icons will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon indicating that the effect of notifying that the big hit is confirmed is performed as described above, so that the player can use the notice icon. In some cases, the expectation for a big hit can be further increased. The production as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3) is a kind of premier production that rarely appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), the loss icon IX is not arranged, and the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 are placed at the end points of each horizontal line. You may make sure that one of the notice icons is always in stock. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), the Sabohani character SB is arranged at all the start points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (hat notice icon I6, fan notice icon I10) are placed at the end points of each horizontal line. And it may be confirmed that all of the notice icons I9) of the Senryo box are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), since the fan notice icon I10 is included, it is guaranteed that the effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed will be performed, so that the player goes to the big hit. It may be possible to further raise the expectation of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-6), the notice icon of the lord whose type of notice icon is not clear at the end point of each horizontal line (notice icon I1 of the first lord, notice icon I2 of the second lord, first The notice icon I3) of the lord of 3 may be placed, and in this way, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. It may be possible to improve expectations. In addition, as mentioned above, the color of the notice icon of the lord differs depending on the type, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color of the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is the notice icon of the red lord, is more likely to be changed to the notice icon in which the "pseudo-ren" is confirmed than the notice icon in which the "pseudo-ren" is not confirmed, and the white lord. On the contrary, the notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon of the above, can be easily changed to the notice icon in which the "pseudo-ream" is not fixed.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke to make it difficult to identify the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB may be specified when the Amida effect is started. As a result, the player can recognize in advance which notice icon will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the Amida effect with peace of mind. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the start point of the horizontal line on which the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to make the effect more exciting.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida production is displayed so as to be recognizable. , As shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2), during the execution of the Amida effect, the area where the notice icon placed at the end point of each horizontal line is displayed is hidden by smoke, and then FIG. 56 (a2-2a). ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2a), the lost icon IX is changed to the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, and the content of the Amida production is promoted. In addition, for example, some or all of the notice icons placed at the end points of each horizontal line will be changed to the lost icon IX or the lower rank notice icon, so that the contents of the Amida production will be demoted. It may be.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), the smoke hiding a part of the vertical line extends in the vertical direction during the execution of the Amida effect, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a). The vertical lines may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a), it was suggested that either the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 could be obtained before the smoke was extended, but after the smoke disappeared. Then, the third vertical line disappears, and it is guaranteed that the fan notice icon I10 will be stocked.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut off in the middle, the loss icon IX was not selected. As shown in 56 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut, so that after the loss icon IX is selected and the Amida effect is completed, FIG. 56 (a4-3a) As shown in the above, the notice icon may be notified that the notice icon is not stocked in any of the display areas of the notice icon display area 285.

In the above-mentioned Amida effect, a look-ahead notice for the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead may be given depending on the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect stepwise. is there. In FIG. 57, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 57, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display to be read ahead, and the hold display is the display mode of the look-ahead notice (hold icon of Sabohani). It differs from the above-described embodiment in that.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part. In FIG. 57 (1), the notice icon is not displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 responds to the first decorative symbol and the second decoration. The variable display of the design is performed.

Further, in FIG. 57 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two special figure 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icons h0 of these two special figures 1 are both displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (2), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. It is displayed and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading. In this production example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the look-ahead notice display mode (sabohani display mode).

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold in FIG. The icon h11 is set, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 57 (5) shows how the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat. In this way, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started next to the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. A certain lord production has started.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (7), the character YM of the lord moves and displays the character YM to the predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (8), the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display of throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. 57 (10). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 57 (11) to 57 (12), the character YM of the lord is displayed to be framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon display area 280 is moved to the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. ..

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" at the timing shown in FIG. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (16), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon display area 280 is moved to the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 57 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested. The notice icon digestion effect is performed. As described above, according to this production example, it can be said that the look-ahead notice by the hold icon is performed at the same time as the look-ahead notice by the notice icon.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and stepwise shows another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect. It is a figure which shows. In FIG. 58, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 58, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIGS. 58 (a1) to 58 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is performed to notify in advance that the notice icon will be stocked. As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display is out of alignment. The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold is held at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the third hold icon h13. The hold icon at the display position becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 that announces that the notice icon will be stocked in the next symbol variation display to be started. Specifically, on this placard PL1, a hat notice icon I6 is displayed following "at the next fluctuation", and then "is stock" is displayed, and a hat notice icon I6 is displayed. Is informed that it will always be stocked during the next symbol change display.

After that, when the variation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the variation display ends and the next variation display of the special figure 1 is started, for example, a lord effect is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the figure is shown. As shown in 58 (a3-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As a result, the player can recognize in advance that the notice icon I6 of the hat will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In the above-mentioned production example, the notice icon is always in stock when the placard PL1 is displayed. For example, the placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-2) is used. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed after "in the next fluctuation", and "is stock" is displayed following this, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

If the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 58 (a3-2), no effect regarding the stock of the notice icon is performed. It should be noted that the effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, the effect of the lord) may be performed, but in this case, the so-called Gasestock effect in which the notice icon is not stocked is performed.

FIGS. 58 (b1) to 58 (b3) show a pre-reading mode, which is one of the pre-reading notices, during the running symbol variation display at the time when the symbol variation display to be read ahead is suspended. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 58 (b1), the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port 230, and the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended, and the pre-reading notice is displayed as the display mode of the third hold icon h13. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed in response to the variable display of the special figure 1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the look-ahead mode, which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "approaching intense heat" scroll from right to left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Is displayed.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the variation display ends, and the next variation display of the special figure 1 starts, as shown in FIG. 58 (b3), during the execution of the symbol variation display. The lord's production is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon, and a look-ahead notice by changing the background display.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 58 (c1) to 58 (c2), during the symbol variation display that is being executed at the time when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, a notice icon is performed by performing a lord effect or the like. May be stocked.

FIGS. 58 (d1) to 58 (d3) show how the advance notice icon is stocked and digested during the execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, the stock and digestion of the notice icon relating to the advance notice effect during the symbol variation display are also feasible.

As shown in FIG. 58 (d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the direction of the lord, the notice icon I6 of the hat displays the notice icon as shown in FIG. 58 (d2). The notice icon in the area 285 is temporarily stocked in the first display area YA1. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58 (d3), the notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (e1) to 58 (e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown into the notice icon display area 285 by the direction of the lord, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may do so.

FIG. 59 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is different from the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of. In FIG. 59, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 59, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIGS. 59 (a1) to 59 (a3) show a state in which the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are also used.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is a “castle town”. There is. In addition to displaying the current stage name, the stage display area 289 may display tutorials such as the content of the notice and the explanation of the characters appearing, or the notice may be displayed. May be good. In this way, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanatory display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the above-mentioned lord effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the character display of "stock" is added, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is given. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (b1) to 59 (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to the production of the lord is not stocked as it is. You may try to digest it. As a result, it is possible to perform the digestion effect of the notice icon regarding the notice during the symbol change display.

FIGS. 59 (c1) to 59 (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and a notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end of the display screen, and the second notice icon display area is provided at the right end of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this production example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area in which a notice icon other than the button notice icon is displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (notice icon first display area YAL1, notice icon second display area YAL2, notice icon third display area YAL3, notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon 1st display area YAL1 and the notice icon 2nd display area YAL2, respectively, and the notice icon I7 of the back sword is displayed in the notice icon 3rd display area YAL3. It is displayed. In addition, the second notice icon display area 285F also has four display areas (notice icon first display area YAR1, notice icon second display area YAR2, notice icon third display area YAR3, notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the substantially center of the display screen, and it is shown that these second button notice icons I11 are stocked. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F, respectively. In this production example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4, respectively. After that, that is, when the second button notice icon I11 is filled up in the second notice icon display area 285F and then these second button notice icons I11 are exhausted, the number is smaller than this. Even if the reliability of the jackpot is different from the case where the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and then these second button notice icons I11 are digested. Often, for example, the larger the number of the second button notice icon I11 in stock, the more likely it is to be a big hit. It should be noted that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 need to be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two may be digested. In this case, In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being digested. Further, the first notice icon display area 285E may also be configured so that the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the number of stocked notice items.

FIGS. 59 (d1) to 59 (d3) show other examples of the increase effect of the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 59 (d1), the notice icon I6s of the hat is displayed small on the variable icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the notice icon I7s of the shuriken is the first hold. It is displayed small on top of the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which the hold icon may be displayed including the notice icon is shown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced hat displayed on the variable icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the character display of "stock" is added to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Will be done. In this production example, every time the hold of the symbol variation display is exhausted, the effect of stocking the notice icon displayed on the change icon h0 is performed, but the timing of stocking the notice icon is set to this. Not limited.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 59 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all of the variable icon and the hold icon, but may be displayed only on some of the variable icon or the hold icon.

FIGS. 59 (f1) to 59 (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon h0.

FIG. 59 (f1) shows the same figure (d1) as described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, after that, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (f2), and then the variable icon is started as shown in FIG. 59 (f3). Although h0 is erased, at this time, along with the variable icon h0, the hat notice icon I6s displayed on the variable icon h0 is also erased, and it is notified that the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked. In this way, even if the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

FIGS. 59 (g1) to 59 (g3) show that when a certain notice icon is digested, the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 59 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I51 of the bouquet includes two or more of the above-mentioned plurality of types of notice icons with reference to FIG. 18 (b). It is a difficult aspect to identify.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 is enlarged and displayed after moving from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (g3), the display of the bouquet notice icon I51 changes to the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8, and the type of the notice icon included in the bouquet notice icon I51. Becomes recognizable. Therefore, the player may be able to have the pleasure of stocking the notice icon and have a sense of expectation as to which type of notice icon is included.

In the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may be continued to be displayed even after the symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol variation display may be suspended. Not only when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, but also when the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed without holding the symbol fluctuation display, the stock status even during the demo display. May be maintained. Further, as long as the notice icon is stocked, the stock state may be maintained regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display is held.

Further, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be noticed.

Further, the stocked notice icon may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the stocked hat notice icon I6 may be changed to the fan notice icon I10. , When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of chance eyes while the hat notice icon I6 is in stock, the hat notice icon I6 may be changed to the thousand box notice icon I9. .. On the contrary, the stocked notice icon may be demoted (leveled down).

Further, the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (level up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. The effect of changing to the notice icon I10 of the fan may be performed while the notice icon I10 of the hat is being used, or the number of pseudo-reams may be increased in the pseudo-ream effect executed by digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat. Good. On the contrary, the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down).

When the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed, but it may not be displayed.

When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but it may not be displayed.

Further, it may be decided whether or not to give a notice to stock the notice icon depending on the length of the symbol variation display time.

Further, the length of the variation display time when the advance notice for stocking the notice icon is not performed between the symbol variation display that is a big hit and the symbol variation display that is a loss may be the same or different.

Further, as the variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, a variation time having a length that does not stock the notice icon may be selected.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be regulated in a controlled manner.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the effect data table may be set so as not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the variation time of the length for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stock notice icon may be digested in the interrupted symbol variation display of the special figure 1, or may be digested during the interrupted symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted by the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 before the interruption is stocked in the symbol variation display before the interruption. The notice icon may remain in stock and not be digested, or it may be configured to be digested.

Further, the type of the notice icon is not limited to the one described above or the one described later, and various types can be adopted.

For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon, and when this item for customization is digested, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a player's selection. It may be possible to increase the possible production modes (for example, one-shot notification mode).

Further, for example, an item for production selection may be displayed, and when the item for production selection is exhausted, for example, BGM can be changed, the production mode can be changed, volume setting, and the like. The brightness may be set.

Further, for example, an item for clearing user settings may be displayed, and when this item for clearing user settings is exhausted, for example, the user settings may be made clear, or the user settings may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

Further, for example, the effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is exhausted, for example, the look-ahead mode can be ended or the effect mode can be ended. It may be possible to end after confirming the end of the look-ahead mode or the end of the effect mode.

In addition, for example, points earned items and level-up gift items may be displayed, and when these items are digested, for example, points can be presented and the level can be raised. It may be.

Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, and for example, when the icon of the lord is digested, the lord VS swordsman reach may be performed.

Further, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is digested, the icon "next notice" is displayed, and the notice effect of "next notice" is displayed. May be started.

Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune-telling icon) in which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demo production, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demo production.

In addition, for example, there may be an icon that displays information about the simultaneous production of islands when digested. For example, the countdown to the start of the simultaneous island production may be started, the time until the start of the simultaneous island production may be displayed, or the content of the next simultaneous island production may be displayed. May be good.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that can be customized on the store side when it is digested. For example, even if it is possible to set the production to be performed according to the area of the game store to be installed (for example, the Tohoku region mode, the Chubu region mode, etc.) and the name of the game store to be installed. Good. For example, depending on the setting, the group notice character appearing in the Tohoku region mode (for example, Namahage group) and the group notice character appearing in the Chubu region mode (for example, Shachihoko group) can be made different. In some cases.

Also, for example, there may be an icon that starts the tutorial display when it is digested.

Also, for example, there may be an icon that starts the roulette effect when it is digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed, or a result indicating that a notice about the symbol variation display is performed may be displayed.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when it is digested.

Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table related to notice items. Is.

FIG. 60 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. The normal figure display device 210, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (a), the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2 are adjacent to each other on the left and right below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as if. In FIG. 60A, the number of reservations for both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the detachment, is stopped and displayed. Further, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2, and the notice icon Ih of the princess is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icon is displayed left-justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

FIG. 60B shows a state in which two game balls have won a prize at the first special drawing start port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side left-justified. All of these hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, since the first hold is exhausted, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is moved to the left side as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the game ball has won a prize in the second special figure start opening 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed left-justified in the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. The hold icon h21 is the default display mode.

Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 60 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold of the special figure 1 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice (the display mode displayed as "heat"). ).

After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, when the timing shown in FIG. 60 (e) is reached, the notice icon It of the lord and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. To. That is, the notice icon is displayed to increase.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI appears with a balloon with the characters "Atari" and "Question mark". The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), after "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which is the result of the deviation. Is notified.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, so that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (h). To. In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, a notice icon is displayed. Is not digested, and the notice icon is not increased. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 becomes a big hit, it is possible not to perform either the digestion and the increase display of the notice icon, or when the digestion and the increase display of the notice icon are performed. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 may be hidden. Only the area 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is interrupted, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When the dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 3", and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is out of order. ..

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (j), after the pending symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is digested, and the "Atari" and "question mark" are displayed. The character YI of the lord appears with a balloon of character notation. The timing of the appearance of the character YI of the lord may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 60 (j), the notice icon Id of the villain is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, the notice icon is displayed to increase. Here, the timing at which the villain's notice icon Id is additionally displayed may be before, after, or at the same time the digestion display of the lord's notice icon It is started. It may be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the villain's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the villain character DI appear. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. Further, the appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the appearance timing of the villain character DI.

Then, at the timing of FIG. 60 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , It is notified that it was a big hit.

Subsequently, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for deciding whether or not to execute the increase display and the digestion display of the notice icon in this production example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the hold of the special figure 1, 4 There is a 1/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be increased, a 3/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be increased, and a 2/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be increased. .. On the other hand, there is a 40/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be digested, a 35/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be digested, and a 25/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform a digestive display of. Since the lottery for executing these increase display and digestion display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time, or the digestion display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time. There is.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is out of order, the symbol variation display which becomes the jackpot is suspended as a result of the pre-reading of the hold of FIG. There is a 3/50 chance of increasing the lord's notice icon, a 2/50 chance of increasing the princess' notice icon, and a 1/50 chance of increasing the villain's notice icon. Perform the display. On the other hand, there is a 1/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be digested, a 10/50 chance that the princess's notice icon will be digested, and a 15/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform a digestive display of.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a jackpot, regardless of the pre-reading result of the hold of the special figure 1. , 25/50 chance to increase the lord's notice icon, 20/50 chance to increase the princess' notice icon, and 7/50 chance to increase the villain's notice icon. Execute. On the other hand, there is a 20/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be digested, a 15/50 chance that the princess's notice icon will be digested, and a 5/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform a digestive display of. In addition, for example, in a pachinko machine that is not supposed to win a prize in the second special figure start port 232 in a normal game state (non-electric support state), even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, anytime The notice icon of is not displayed in an increased manner, and the digestion display may not be displayed for any of the notice icons.

In addition, if the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, the increase display is displayed for all the notice icons regardless of the pre-reading result of the hold of the special figure 1. No, and no digestion display is performed for any of the notice icons.

In addition, for example, when the electric support state ends and one or more holds remain for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the hold of the special figure 2. Alternatively, the notice icon may be increased or digested according to the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73.

62 to 73 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 62 to 73, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 62 to 73 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be referred to. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidably movable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 62 to 73, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion to which the light is irradiated. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in FIGS. 62 to 72, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 62 stepwise. Is.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) portion is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is located in the center of the UI portion. It is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 62A, since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, various information related to the game and the production is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a), "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed, and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol, but is a display area of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, here, the explanation display unit (or the explanation display area) may be a place where something is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and the stage name is displayed in red when the stage is moved to a certain stage, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. To put it the other way around, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not as hot as the red stage name display, so this may also be a kind of notice.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 62 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be always displayed.

Further, below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. ing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (b), the hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. In this production example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) instead of the default display mode. At this time, a voice output of "pon" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice has been given by the hold display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result is off. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (d) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" are still displayed. As described above, the explanatory display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord displays the icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. It is shown trying to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the production when thrown by the character of the lord. The throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed with an animation in which the notice icon to be displayed can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of throwing, or it may be identifiable from the beginning. In addition, the animation related to the notice icon (high expectation notice icon) with high expectation of big hit when digested and the animation related to the notice icon with low expectation of big hit when digested than the high expectation notice animation. , The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (f), it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (g), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" has been changed to "By digesting the notice icon ...", and something happens when the notice icon is digested. There is an explanation of what will happen. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the bomb icon I61. It may be a timing after the move to. As described above, in the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of explanatory displays may be displayed in one symbol variation display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, the burst bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (i). .. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is an icon that announces the transition to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. Further, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" to notify the effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of 1 to 1 to many to many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is reduced and displayed, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 62 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the character of the lord. The animation ends. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. Here, "difficult to see" means that it is more difficult to see than when the notice icon does not overlap the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the tutorial display section TT1 display and the swordsman's notice icon I62 display. May be possible. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.
The position of the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be arranged in a position close to the tutorial display unit TT1 in addition to a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and the same effect can be obtained in this way. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or may have nothing to do with the swordsman's notice icon I62. The content may be related to the current production, or may have nothing to do with the content currently being produced. In FIG. 62 (j), the content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is a display related to the notice icon, which is related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, but the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed. Although it is not displayed in relation to, but happens to be related to the content of the explanation, the content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is decided according to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. It may be configured to be. When displaying the tutorial display according to the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. It may be displayed at the same time. The swordsman's notice icon I62, which is arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1, is digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading, as will be described later. In addition, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be digested in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display to be read ahead. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started. In this production example, the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display unit ST1.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the off display result is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from "By digesting the notice icon ..." to "Panda is the master of the lord". , The relationship between the character of the lord and the character of the panda is explained. That is, in this production example, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed to a new content while the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has started with the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing of the display change of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The timing may be later than the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If the timing of the display change of the tutorial display unit TT1 is earlier than the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanation a plurality of times in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

FIG. 62 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display targeted for pre-reading is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from "Panda is a master of the lord" to "When Shogun Yatsushiro moves ...". It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the Shogun character 224Fb operate.

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Will be done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, fueling expectations as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. By doing so, the player may be eager to use the notice icon as soon as possible. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect is displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62. It is not necessary to display the effect. This effect display depends on the character display portion of the tutorial display unit TT1, and therefore, the explanation display may be noticeable.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been digested. As a result, the overlapping state due to the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the player may be able to easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a) following FIG. 62 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that it will develop into a super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the development to the swordsman reach is announced by digesting the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, and it is produced that the reliability of the big hit in this swordsman reach is high. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see.

FIG. 63 (c) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display. In the stage name display unit ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed. An animation of the duel scene is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (c), the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are displayed facing each other. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the variable icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be framed out after the hold icon is deleted, or the UI unit may be framed out together with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, in the state where the explanation is displayed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted at the same time. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted may be different.

In FIG. 63 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting red) indicating that the operation is being accepted. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. It may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (f), as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L "goes" with the up of the lord. The cut-in image with the character display "Ze" is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene.

After that, as shown in Fig. 63 (h), the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role, and in Fig. 63 (i), both the first decorative design and the second decorative design were "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". The combination of decorative symbols is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes "decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (j). -Decoration 3-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols, and the display result of the off display is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". If a notice icon (for example, the above-mentioned fan notice icon I10) is stocked after the display is lost, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town, which is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 stepwise. Is. Since FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (l) are the same as those in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (l), the description thereof is omitted here.

FIG. 64 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display targeted for pre-reading is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as "decoration C") displayed as "C" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" is displayed. The temporary stop is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "6". The notice icon symbol CS has a function of notifying that the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance, which will be described later, will be stocked when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon symbol CS may include an image imitating the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance (including the enlarged / reduced image itself), and may move to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the notice icon acquisition animation by the design may be displayed so that the notice icon can be identified. In addition, there may be something that does not correspond to the notice icon symbol CS and the chance-up notice icon I63. Further, the types of the notice icons displayed by the symbols may be more or less than the types of the notice icons not displayed by the symbols. The type of notice icon displayed in the wake of the animation related to the character of the lord (for example, throwing animation) is the notice displayed in the wake of the animation related to the symbol (for example, the animation performed by displaying the notice icon symbol CS). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be the icons displayed at the trigger of both animations. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-continuous notice icon may be displayed at two triggers, and two may or may not be stocked at different triggers with one fluctuation. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in any of the symbol rows. Although the variable icon h0 is deleted here, it may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from "Panda is a master of the lord" to "When Shogun Yashiro moves ...".

As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 64 (n), the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon symbol CS, and FIG. 64 (o) ), The position overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and is moved to the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 and placed (stocked). Then, the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance-up notice icon I63 has been stocked. At the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, the notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the player can easily recognize that the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but the voice notification may be performed. As described above, in this production example, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be made difficult to see by the plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this production example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. Further, in this production example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 have different opportunities to be stocked, and therefore, the production contents until they are stocked are different.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 64 (q), and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (a) following FIG. 64 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" are stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (b), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed according to the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display unit TT1. It also depends on the chance-up notice icon I63 stocked in, and therefore, it may be possible to pay attention to the chance-up notice icon I63 being stocked in addition to the explanation display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been digested. In this production example, the overlap state of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is still in a state of overlapping with the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman's notice icon I62 to make the swordsman's notice icon I62 stand out. FIG. 65 (c) shows. As shown, this effect display depends on the tutorial display unit TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and the explanation display and the chance-up notice icon I63 may also attract attention.

At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that the player will reach the swordsman. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. In addition, the pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63, which was not digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance-up notice icon I63. May be difficult to see. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 65 (e), a part of the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. There is. Here, since a predetermined space is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player. In some cases, the chance-up notice icon I63 can be made easy to see.

FIG. 65 (f) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display. In the stage name display unit ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the duel scene is animated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (f), the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are displayed facing each other. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, so the display position of the variable icon h0 has moved downward, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is not affected by that, and the display position is Not changed.

In FIG. 65 (g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (h), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting red light) indicating that the operation is being accepted. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 has begun to swing, fueling expectations as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 will be digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect is displayed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (i), as shown in FIG. 65 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L "goes" with the up of the lord. The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display "ze" is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the swinging chance-up notice icon I63 is moved upward and digested.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the face of the lord is different and the displayed image extends in the upper right direction is displayed superimposed on the first cut-in image, and is a big hit. It has been reported that the reliability of the product has increased. That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the notice icon I63 of the chance up. The first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. You may. Further, when the second cut-in image is displayed, if another notice icon is stocked, the notice icon in which the second cut-in image is stocked may be overlapped. , The second cut-in image may overlap with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not overlap with the stocked notice icon. The second cut-in image may not overlap the stock notice icon. In the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be the timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or it may be the timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. Further, in this production example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed, but any display is displayed when the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Does not overlap. That is, the stocked notice icon has a predetermined display area, and may overlap with another image at a certain moment, but may not overlap with another image at a certain moment. Can be done. When the chance-up notice icon I63 is used for promotion of the button display shown in FIG. 65 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of the cut-in display, which is another promotion target. It may or may not have disappeared.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (m), the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role, and in the same figure (n), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern were "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination of the decorative symbols of is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes "decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (o). -Decoration 2-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols, and the display result of the big hit is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

FIG. 66 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the advance notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 66, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the displayed notice icon is moved to the stock position by sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is shown how it is going.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are displayed in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as will be described later, an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. Further, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown to pop out downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "By digesting the notice icon ..." to "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord." The timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR, or at a timing before the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or it may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a3), the bomb icon I6 that jumped out of the treasure box image TR bursts. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a4), the exploding bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, a voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as if it were not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N (as if to go). At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a6), it is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed straddling the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 completely moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman's notice icon I62 with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (a7).

Next, another example of the advance notice icon increasing effect performed across the plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 (b1) to (b8).

As shown in FIG. 66 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are displayed in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord" is displayed as an explanatory display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown to pop out upward from the inside.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b3), the bomb icon I6 that jumped out of the treasure box image TR changes to the enlarged notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, a voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be the timing before, the timing after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing before the treasure box image TR is erased. It may be the same timing as the treasure chest image TR is erased, or it may be a timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI unit displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see. May be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as if it were not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N (as if to go). At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b6), it is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap of the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is eliminated, and the player can see the player. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be easy to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is reduced and displayed, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see.

In this production example, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5'), the height of the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is set to at least the height of the lower end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208N. When the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the 208L is higher than the displayed position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a state in which they do not overlap, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N on which the notice icon is displayed is in the vicinity of the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since the slide is moved with, the effect of the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be seen while visually recognizing the display state of the tutorial display unit TT1.

In the production example shown in FIG. 66, when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid and moved, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon. May be overlapped, and an effect display may be performed such that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that the overlapping state of the notice icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

FIG. 67 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the advance notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 67, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally out of frame, and when the explanation is displayed, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), since the three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all displayed in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 67 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from below the frame on the right side of the display screen, and then shown in FIG. 67 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a4), "The lord is Shogun Yatsushiro" is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 67 (a5) to 67 (a6), and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or may be framed out. It may be erased at a timing after the animation starts, or it may be displayed until the frame-out of the tutorial display unit TT1 is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a7), for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to 62 (j) and described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked and then shown in FIG. 67 (a8). As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from below the frame on the right side of the display screen, and then in FIG. 67 (a10). At the timing indicated, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a11), the explanation display "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, but the tutorial display unit TT1 is overlapped by the swordsman's notice icon I62. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to see.

After that, when the tutorial display unit TT1 displays is performed for a predetermined time, the animation that the tutorial display unit TT1 frames out starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the swordsman's notice icon I62 The overlapping state with TT1 is eliminated. If the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out, the explanation display may be easier to see by eliminating the overlapping state. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frame-outs from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

Further, also in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 67 (b1) to (b2), even if the notice icon is digested and rises during the period when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlapping state with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. Since FIGS. 67 (b1) to (b2) are as described above in FIGS. 62 (p) to (q), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 68 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 shows how the tutorial display is performed not only in the tutorial display unit TT1 but also in the conversation production of the character.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), since the three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all displayed in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), "The lord is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Further, in this production example, a balloon unit TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The character CH1 and the balloon part TT2 of Princess Chibi are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation that "gold is hotter than red", and an explanation is given regarding the notice given in the pachinko machine 100. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon portion TT2 may overlap with the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the balloon unit TT2 or the balloon unit TT3 described later. Further, the display that is exactly the same as the display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger display area or a smaller display area than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the fonts of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3 may be the same or different. Further, the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbols are configured so as not to overlap in the display area where the other explanatory display is performed, but they may overlap. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the explanation less frequently or may be higher than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3 may be display areas defined by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not divided by lines.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the character CH of Princess Chibi. In addition, the decorative design is still being displayed in a variable manner. As described above, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The balloon portion TT2 may also be configured to be displayable across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". In the tutorial display section TT1, "The lord is Shogun Yashiro" is still displayed.

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 68 (a4), and the first hold icon h11 The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" are still displayed. As described above, the explanatory display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed again together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a5), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation that "the swordsman reach is hot", and an explanation regarding a specific super reach is given. The timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, the timing may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or the timing after the throwing animation is started. There may be.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), it is shown that the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon unit TT3 as the third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), the balloon portion TT3 is provided with an explanatory display saying "when a panda intrudes", and an explanation regarding the advance notice effect is given. Here, the balloon portion TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. The timing at which the blowout portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61. It may be the timing after the timing when the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" has been changed to "By digesting the notice icon ...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon portion TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon portion TT3 may be difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the display of the balloon portion TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3. The timing may be earlier than the timing, or the timing may be later than the timing when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon portion TT3.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst may be positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon portion TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon portion TT3 may be difficult to see.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a9), the exploding bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon portion TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon portion TT3 may be difficult to see. Further, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" to notify the effect. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effect displays (speech balloon TT2 and balloon TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is reduced and displayed, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. As described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap with a plurality of display units (tutorial display unit TT1 and balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation is displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 68 (a1) to 68 (a10), an explanatory display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the balloons (speech balloon TT2 and balloon TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the display mode of the blowing portion TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the blowing portion TT2 is changed to red), and the word "extreme heat" is added. In some cases, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed, such as by displaying.

FIGS. 68 (c1) to 68 (c3) show other examples of the contents displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is starting to swing. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the explanation display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c3), the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from "Panda is a master of the lord" to "Development into a swordsman reach", and an explanation display (live broadcast) about the event that will occur in the future. Display) is made. With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. At the timing of FIG. 68 (c3), the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been digested.

In the above-mentioned production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying an explanation about the production. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown. In addition to changing (for example, changing the background color of the tutorial display unit TT1 to red), the characters "extreme heat" may be displayed to display a notice or look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display. May be good.

FIG. 69 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 69 shows how the UI unit is displayed at the bottom of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the stage name display unit ST2 are integrated. Has been done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 is deleted. In this production example as well, in the case of super reach, the UI unit is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, it is displayed without frame out. You may leave it as it is.

As shown in FIG. 69 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit shown in FIG. 69 (a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display unit ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It has been reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224F and the general accessory. 224Fb and the like are arranged.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a2), the hold icon of the third special figure 1 (third hold icon h13) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. In this production example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) instead of the default display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

After that, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 69 (a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to 62 (k) and described above.

In FIG. 69 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, the burst bomb icon I61 changes to the princess' notice icon I64, and while being reduced and displayed, it moves to the stage name display unit ST2. At the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a5), it is shown that the stage name display unit ST2 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, but does not reach a predetermined display position (stock position). .. In this case, the princess notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, so the explanation display of the "castle town stage" is displayed, and at least a part of the princess notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. The explanation display may be erased before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display unit ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 64), the explanation display is deleted before overlapping with the stage name display unit ST2, and the explanation display is based on the opportunity to acquire the notice icon. May be configured so that the timing at which is deleted is different. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display unit. Further, a pattern (so-called ghost) in which the notice icon is not acquired may be provided after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display unit ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, even if the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, the explanation display may not be erased (that is, in the case of the Gase pattern, the explanation display is not erased and is really In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2. Is enabled, and when the UI part is hidden during this darkening effect, at least part of the process from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the disappointment is executed while the darkening effect is being executed. Specifically, when the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started, the darkening effect is started, and the darkening effect is finished and the UI part is redisplayed, a notice is given. It may be configured so that the icon is acquired (the state in which the explanation display is displayed to the state in which the explanation display is disappeared). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect is performed. It may be in a state where both are not performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed until now on the stage name display unit ST2. The explanation display of "Stage" is erased, and it functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters "STOCK" are displayed on the upper part of the stage name display unit ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, the stage name is not displayed. In addition, the scene in which the notice icon is digested and the execution of the above-mentioned darkening effect may be configured to overlap. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) is moved to move the movable means. Or to overlap at least a part of the already acquired notice icons (such as the entire notice icon of at least one of a plurality of notice icons, a part of one notice icon, etc.) You may. In addition, the movable means is moved during at least a part of the period from before the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. May be good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the off display result is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the stage is changed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this effect example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is hidden, and when the stage name display unit ST2 is hidden, the changed stage name is displayed. It is not displayed either. When the stage is changed, the stage name after the change may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and then the stage name may be deleted and the notice icon may be displayed.

FIG. 69 (a9) shows that five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is deleted, and the area functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT4, the tutorial display (explanatory display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are first stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, and then the tutorial display unit. The swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked in TT4.

In this production example, for example, when the notice icons are digested in order from the left side, an animation may be performed to change the display position of the notice icons other than the digested notice icons. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 69 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo-ream notice icons I65 are moved to the left one by one, and the tutorial display is displayed. The swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the part TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display part ST2, and the chance-up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 moves to the left side. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of other displays may not be affected by teleporting or the like.

Then, when all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 have been digested, the explanation display is restarted on the tutorial display unit TT4, and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 have been digested. In that case, the stage name display unit ST2 restarts the display of the stage name. It is not necessary to restart the explanation display and the stage name display. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested (for example, restart after the super reach). Further, when the explanation display is resumed, the exact same display may be resumed, or the telop type (scroll type) display may be restarted from the display of a different part.

Further, the type of the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the type of the notice icon displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 may be predetermined. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, it may not move with respect to other notice icons.

Further, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, or may be held. It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, and when the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is stored in the tutorial display unit. Up to 3 more can be stocked in TT4, but if the tutorial display part TT4 is stocked first and the number of stocked is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is further 3 in the stage name display part ST2. Up to one may be configured to be stockable.

Further, in this production example, a part of the notice icon is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4). In the state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon is completely settled in the stage name display unit ST2 or the tutorial display unit TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the explanation display may or may not be displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when the notice icon is digested. In addition, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display unit ST2 and the tutorial display unit TT4, and the explanation display is displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when the notice icon is digested. It may not be done.

Further, in this production example, the above-mentioned one shown in FIG. 62 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it goes without saying that it is naturally possible to combine the modes shown in other figures.

Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested, such as a variable icon display area.

Further, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order of being digested. For example, even if a plurality of notice icons are digested in a toothless manner and other notice icons are moved so as to fill the vacant place. You don't have to move.

In addition, one starting port can be divided into a first special figure winning opening and a second special drawing winning opening, and eight symbol variation displays can be held in a normal game state, so-called MAX 8 machines (8). The hold icon display area is prepared in advance for four hold icons, and when there are four hold icons, the display area expands to five hold icon display areas. Or may be expanded up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display unit ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

FIGS. 69 (b1) to 69 (b2) show a state in which the stocked notice icon is digested.

As shown in FIG. 69 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, it is time to digest the chance-up notice icon I63, and as shown in FIG. 68 (b2), the chance-up notice icon I63 is shown to move upward. In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position on the stage name display unit ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, it is used as an explanatory display. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. This also applies to the tutorial display unit TT4. The display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position on the stage name display unit ST2.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing stepwise another production example according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 70 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed.

70 (a1) to 70 (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

FIG. 70 (a1) shows the state of the castle town stage. The display mode of the castle town stage is the same as that shown in FIG. 62 (a), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 70 (a2) shows the state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L in the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that the UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section of the space stage, the variable icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and the hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side. The display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon in the castle town stage described above as shown in FIG. 62. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The display modes of the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage are pentagonal, unlike the display modes of the variable icons and the hold icons on the castle town stage. In the default display mode, for example, , A white pentagonal display mode, and a look-ahead notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 70A2, the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are the default display modes, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. It has become. Further, in the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, in the space stage, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display area TT1 are different, the tutorial display area TT1 does not overlap with the notice icon.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

FIG. 70 (a3) shows the state immediately after the transition from the other stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and remains hidden until a new explanation is displayed. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 which is in the hidden state. The explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition is performed. Further, when the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage) and the stage is moved to another stage (for example, a space stage), the explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

FIGS. 70 (b1) to 70 (b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the notice icon is stocked. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (b1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are displayed in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this case, the third is displayed. The tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is erased. Here, the button icon IBT can be stocked in a plurality of sizes, and is, for example, an icon that notifies in advance the number of times a button is operated during a specific effect. For example, the number of times the button operation effect is generated is large. It can be said that the higher the reliability of the jackpot, that is, the larger the number of button icon IBT stocks, the easier it is to win the jackpot.

As described above, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that the other display is sacrificed.

FIG. 71 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 shows another production example using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned character of the lord.

FIGS. 71 (a1) to 71 (a6) show how the already-stocked notice icons change due to the throwing animation.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both displayed in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1), "The lord is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a1), Hatena's notice icon I66 is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is time to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested, so-called Gase It may also function as a notice icon for. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a3), it is shown that the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" has been changed to "By digesting the notice icon ...".

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches Hatena's notice icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps with the front side of Hatena's notice icon I66, and at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is at least large enough to cover Hatena's notice icon I66. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a6), the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the notice icon I66 of Hatena has been changed to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a6), what was displayed as "By digesting the notice icon ..." has been changed to "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord." The timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started, or from the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. It may be the timing before, or it may be the timing after the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIGS. 71 (b1) to 71 (b3) show how the already-stocked notice icons change due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 71 (b1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4) and FIG. 71 (b3) is the same as FIG. 71 (a6), the description of these drawings will be omitted. In the tutorial display unit TT1 in FIG. 71 (b3), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed.

After the effect shown in FIG. 71 (b1) is performed, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches Hatena's notice icon I66 and bursts as shown in FIG. 71 (b2). At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see, and the overlapping range is larger than that of the effect image shown in FIG. 71 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIGS. 71 (c1) to 71 (c3) show how the already-stocked notice icons change due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 71 (c1) is the same as FIG. 71 (b1) and FIG. 71 (c2) is the same as FIG. 71 (b2), the description of these drawings will be omitted.

After the bomb icon I61 bursts at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (c2), the effect image of the burst bomb icon I61 is erased as shown in FIG. It has changed to icon I62 and chance-up notice icon I63. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are performed at the same time by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

FIGS. 71 (d1) to 71 (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes depending on the throwing animation. Since FIG. 71 (d1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), the description of this drawing will be omitted.

After the effect shown in FIG. 71 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord is placed on the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps with the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is at least large enough to cover the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (d3), the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, the display mode changes from blue to red). )are doing. Then, a voice "pon" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

As described above, in the production example shown in FIG. 71, at least a part of the animation at the time of acquiring the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is displayed. The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

FIG. 72 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In FIGS. 72 (a1) to 72 (a7), it is shown that a specific notice icon has been stocked and that the mission has been completed by displaying the fact. Since FIGS. 72 (a1) to 72 (a3) are the same as those of FIGS. 62 (h) to 62 (j), the description of these drawings will be omitted.

After the effect shown in FIG. 72 (a3) is performed, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends as shown in FIG. 72 (a4). Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 as an explanatory display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. It is displayed. On the achievement display unit KM1, "swordsman stock" indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked is displayed. That is, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed and the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed to that effect to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in order to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who announces that the production with extremely high expectation for the big hit will be performed. May be good. The timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be at the same time as the end of the throwing animation, may be a timing before the end of the throwing animation, or may be after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, it may be possible to draw attention to the achievement display unit KM1. In addition, the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed so as to overlap with the achievement display unit KM1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" is displayed. The temporary stop is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "6". Although the variable icon h0 is deleted here, it may be displayed.

As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 72 (a6) to 72 (a7), the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is generated from the notice icon symbol CS. It pops out toward the display position to the right of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display unit KM1, making at least a part of the explanatory display on the achievement display unit KM1 difficult to see.

In this production example, for example, when the notice icon is stocked and the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the type of the notice icon to be digested. The overlap with the icon may be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked and the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be aligned at predetermined intervals due to the digestion of the notice icons, among the plurality of notice icons. When a predetermined number of notice icons are exhausted, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display unit KM1 may be eliminated.

In FIGS. 72 (b1) to 72 (b3), for example, an example of the operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate at the time of development to super reach or when it becomes a big hit is shown. It is shown.

FIG. 72 (b1) shows how super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (b1), the background screen of the super reach is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. .. As described above, the UI unit is framed out downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variable icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed above the display screen, and the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In some cases. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display while giving a feeling of expectation for a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are close to each other, are integrated along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. Further, the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is rectangular. An image with the characters "celebration" in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of special figures 1 and 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the family crest accessory 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overhangs the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the general accessory 224Fb, which were wrapped and arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, moved downward and overlapped with the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part thereof overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In some cases. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may overlap with the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa or the general accessory 224Fb. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may overlap with the family crest accessory 224E. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable movement and the explanatory display by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body are hidden, it may be possible to draw attention to the explanatory display while giving a feeling of expectation for the big hit.

In FIGS. 72 (c1) to 72 (c4), the effect button 136 is displayed by displaying the button image 136a at all times or at least for a certain period of time in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and changing the display state of the button image 136a. It is shown that the state is being notified.

FIG. 72 (c1) shows how the duel scene in the swordsman reach is being animated. FIG. 72 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 63 (d), but the stage name display unit ST1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The difference is that the button image 136a is always or at least for a certain period of time displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

In FIG. 72 (c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c2), the button reception time meter is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208L, and the button image is displayed. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136. By this display, it is notified that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting red) indicating that the operation is being accepted.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c3), as shown in FIG. 72 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L “goes” with the up of the lord. The cut-in image with the character display "Ze" is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode on the assumption that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has expired. In this production example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-mentioned button notice icon (first button notice icon I4 or second button notice icon I11) becomes effective, as described above. In some cases, the player can be encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

FIG. 72 (d) shows an example of a notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, Hatena's notice icon I66, pseudo-ream notice icon I65, chance-up notice icon I63, princess's notice icon I64, swordsman's notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68, for example. , Panda notice icon I69 is available. Here, the hold promotion notice icon I67 is an icon that announces that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon will be changed to a display mode with higher reliability for a jackpot when it is digested. In addition, the pseudo-ream notice icon is an icon that announces that the pseudo-ream effect will be performed when digested. Further, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that the chance eye will be derived as a result of displaying the decorative pattern when digested. In addition, the princess's notice icon is an icon that announces that it will move to the look-ahead zone when it is digested. In addition, the panda's notice icon I69 is an icon that announces that when the panda is digested, the panda will intrude into the effect and it will surely be a big hit (correct).

FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

FIGS. 73 (a1) to 73 (a7) show that the explanation display (for example, the display of "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord") displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is scrolled. The left side of the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 73 overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

FIG. 73 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanatory display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord" is scrolled in sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display unit TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a2), only the part "Swordsman is" is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a3), only the part "Swordsman is a lord" is scrolled in. There is. In these cases, none of the characters overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62, so that the explanation display may be clearly recognizable.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a4), the entire characters "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord" are displayed. In this case, at least the character portion of "swordsman" overlaps with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is difficult to see.

Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a5), the part "Swordsman is" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the part "I am the nemesis of the lord" is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. .. In this case, at least the character part of "Den-sama" is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a6), the part "Swordsman is a lord" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the part "I am a nemesis" is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. .. In this case, at least the character part of "nemesis" overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this production example, the characters overlapped by the notice icon are changed over time by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling of the explanation display causes a period in which the explanation display overlaps with the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display does not overlap. When the explanation display is repeatedly scrolled, these periods also occur repeatedly.

FIGS. 73 (b1) to 73 (b7) are shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 while scrolling the explanation display (for example, "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord") displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The state when the display (for example, the notice display of "super heat") is performed is shown. 73 (b1) to (b3) and 73 (b6) to (b7) are FIGS. 73 (a1) to 73 (a3) and 73 (a6) to 73, respectively. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the explanatory display is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 73 (b3), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a notice as shown in FIGS. 73 (b4) to 73 (b5). As for the notice display, the background color of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed to red, and the characters "extreme heat" are displayed, so that the notice display and the look-ahead notice display in the symbol variation display are performed. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to see, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

After that, when the notice display ends, as shown in FIG. 73 (b6), the scroll display of the explanation display resumes. The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even during the period when the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after proceeding in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanatory display at the time when the display of the explanatory display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of interruption. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (b7), the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Although the advance notice display has been described as an example of interrupting the scroll display of the explanation display, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

FIGS. 73 (c1) to 73 (c5) show the explanation display (for example, "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord") displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 when a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as some notice icons are exhausted.

In FIG. 73 (c1), the chance-up notice icon I63, which is the first notice icon to be digested, and the swordsman's notice icon I62, which is the second notice icon to be digested, are the chance-up notice icons I63. Arranged side by side on the right side of, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is shown to overlap on the left side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see.

After that, when the chance-up notice icon I63 is digested as shown in FIG. 73 (c2), the swordsman's notice icon I62 has a chance-up as shown in FIGS. 73 (c3) to (c5). An animation of moving the notice icon I63 to the position where the notice icon I63 was displayed is performed. As a result, after the range of overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easy to see. May become. That is, in this production example, the notice icons may or may not overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 depending on the number of stocked notice icons. When the explanation display is scrolled on the tutorial display unit TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display may overlap.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
A symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display, and
With notice means capable of executing multiple types of notices [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542, etc.] ,
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon, etc.].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.] in the image display means.
The hold display is a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number") [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 has a hold icon display area 281. , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the image display means.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, , If the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo-ream effect may be executed, and if the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the first notice icon [for example, hat notice icon I6, etc.] among the plurality of types of notice icons is the first number [for example, two, etc.]. ] It is configured so that a second number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the first number, is more likely to be a big hit than a digested case.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the image display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production.

In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easier to recognize that there is a fluctuation that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent the notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being overlooked.

In addition, according to this game table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icon and improve the interest of the game.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be executable in addition to the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the notice means may be one that can execute only a plurality of types of notices, or may be a means that can be executed in addition to the plurality of types of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of types of notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of notices.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be displayable in addition to the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area of the image display means.

Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by, for example, characters, numbers, or symbols.

Further, the hold display may be displayed only for the number of holds, or may be displayed in addition to the number of holds.

Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. In addition, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is exhausted, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may be displayed in a field other than the notice icon display area of the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be one that can display only one or more notice icons, or may be one that can display other than one or more notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the type of notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. , When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the type of notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be feasible. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the type of notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, "the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed [for example, as many notice icons as the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. The notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player does not miss the notice display. You may be able to do it.

Here, the notice icon may display only the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be other than the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. There may be.

In addition, "the advance notice means gives a fake notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is out of place] in the same manner as the mode of the advance notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect that becomes a big hit]. It ’s a viable means,
The notice means is the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a means capable of executing the above-mentioned fake notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous notice that is out of order, a reach transition effect, etc.] corresponding to.
After the false notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the player may be able to feel tense until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice in the same mode as the notice, or may be capable of executing a false notice in the same mode as the notice. You may. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same mode as the notice, or may not execute a fake notice in the same mode as the notice.

Further, even if the notice means can execute only a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, something other than a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be executable. .. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be out of order after the fake notice is executed, or the result of the symbol variation display may be a big hit after the fake notice is executed. There may be.

After the fake notice is executed, a notice with a high possibility that the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, "During the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than that of the third number [for example, one or the like]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the number three, is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, it is provided with "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, effect hold lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holds.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to clearly distinguish between the hold display and the notice icon display.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only the display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing the display other than the display according to the number of holds. Further, the hold display means may always execute the display according to the number of holds, or may not execute the display according to the number of holds.

Further, "The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

Here, the hold display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured by including other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be one composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, and may be a hand-held one including a plurality of LEDs in one package, such as a full-color LED. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

Further, in addition to the hold display means, the launch operation notification means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the launch operation means may also be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, "pre-reading notice means capable of executing pre-reading notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 540, etc." ] With
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon may be displayed to increase the expectation for a big hit.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may be one that can execute only the look-ahead notice, or may be one that can execute other than the look-ahead notice. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice, or may not execute the look-ahead notice.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing the look-ahead notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may be other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The look-ahead notice may be executable. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, "the symbol variation display to be read ahead (hereinafter," second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of look-ahead shown in FIG. 19 (2), etc.]] The notice icon may be digested by the fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period when () is being executed.
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "three objects to be read ahead shown in the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 19 (2))". The notice icon may be digested by the sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period during which the "design variation display based on the hold held before the eye hold, etc.]" is being executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 19 (4). During the period when the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the look-ahead is executed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of the look-ahead is displayed. It is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the number of digested notice icons differs depending on whether the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is being displayed or the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand the symbol variation display that should be noted.

Here, in the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or during the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed. In the case, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. In addition, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the fifth number during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a different number than the sixth number. In addition, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol change display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol change display is being executed, or the first one. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. Further, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, or the first symbol may be displayed. During the period in which the variation display is being executed, it may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digestion display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

Here, the notice icon may always start to be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period other than the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to be displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, "in the period during which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" third symbol variation display ") executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed is executed, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C) is the symbol variation display. Increased display during execution of symbol variation display executed before],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed only during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be started to be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to always start to be displayed. In the period when the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed may not start to be displayed.

The notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed does not have to start displaying during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed.

In addition, "the hold display area is an area in which the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.].
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.].
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, so that the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

The maximum number of pending displays that can be displayed and the maximum number of notice icons that can be displayed may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable hold displays of the special figure 1, or at least the number may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable hold displays of the special figure 2, or at least the number may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the total number of maximum displayable numbers of the hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, or at least may be the same.

In addition, "the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542". Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (49) to (50) and 34 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)].
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIGS. 22 (51) to (57) and 34 (50-1) to (57). Directing, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a lunar background].
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice is a notice that the first effect is executed.
The second notice is a notice that the second effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the content of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first effect and the second effect. .. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

Further, the first notice may only notify that the first effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. .. Further, the first notice may always notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect will be executed.

Further, the second notice may only notify that the second effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. .. Further, the second notice may always notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect will be executed.

Further, "The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail [for example, FIGS. 19 (1) to 23 (66) and 31 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.], which is a game table. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon is displayed is always executed, it may be possible to improve the expectation of the player.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first display means capable of executing the symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.] and
A second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the effect hold lamp 286].
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous effect, freeze effect, stop pattern advance notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “suspended number”) in the reserved display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect hold lamp 286, etc.] is a display means that can be displayed [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of pending items depending on the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a means [for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, the reach transition effect is executed. In some cases, etc.],
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is digested than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit if it is done,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the image display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production.

In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easier to recognize that there is a fluctuation that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent the notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being overlooked.

In addition, according to this game table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icon and improve the interest of the game.

Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be executable other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be displayable in addition to the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be displayable in addition to the plurality of types of notice displays. In addition, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the second display means may be one that can display the display according to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or the one that can display the display according to the number of holds other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. ..

Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is not digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is digested, or may not be started even if the hold is digested.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be one that can display only one or more notice icons, or may be one that can display other than one or more notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon can be displayed. May be good. In addition, the second display means always displays a type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed.

Further, "The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to expect the number of times to display the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player does not miss the notice display. May be possible.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or display the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. It may not be possible.

In addition, "the second display means is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is out of place] in the same manner as the mode of the notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is a big hit, a reach transition effect, etc.]. It is a display means that can display [transition effect, etc.]
The second display means is the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, pseudo-continuous notice that is out of order, reach transition effect, etc.]
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display, or something other than the fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display. May also be displayable. In addition, the second display means may always display a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display, or may not display a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display. There may be.

In addition, the second display means can display only a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. If one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it is possible to display something other than the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon. It may be. In addition, the second display means always displays a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It may be present, or when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed. ..

Further, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be out of order after the fake notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the fake notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

After the fake notice display is displayed, the symbol display means may display a notice display that is likely to display the jackpot symbol.

Further, "During the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than that of the third number [for example, one or the like]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the number three, is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, "The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.].
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, turning on a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to clearly distinguish between the hold display and the notice icon display.

Here, the second display means may be composed of two display means or may be composed of three or more display means.

Further, the second display means may be composed of only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be composed of other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be one in which the image display means and the hold display means are always configured, or may not form at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying the display according to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be able to display the display according to the number of holds other than the hold display area. May be good. Further, the hold display means may always display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

Further, "The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

Here, the hold display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured by including other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be one composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, and may be a hand-held one including a plurality of LEDs in one package, such as a full-color LED. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

Further, in addition to the hold display means, the launch operation notification means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the launch operation means may also be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the variable display of the decorative symbol and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of hold while visually recognizing the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, "pre-reading notice means capable of executing pre-reading notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 540, etc." ] With
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon may be displayed to increase the expectation for a big hit.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may be one that can execute only the look-ahead notice, or may be one that can execute other than the look-ahead notice. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice, or may not execute the look-ahead notice.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing the look-ahead notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may be other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The look-ahead notice may be executable. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, "the symbol variation display to be read ahead (hereinafter," second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of look-ahead shown in FIG. 19 (2), etc.]] The notice icon may be digested by the fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period when () is being executed.
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "three objects to be read ahead shown in the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 19 (2))". The notice icon may be digested by the sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period during which the "design variation display based on the hold held before the eye hold, etc.]" is being executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. 19]. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of look-ahead during the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that was held before the second hold that is the target of look-ahead shown in (4) is being executed. A game table characterized in that the hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special drawing 1]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the number of digested notice icons differs depending on whether the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is being displayed or the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand the symbol variation display that should be noted.

Here, in the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or during the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed. In the case, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. In addition, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the fifth number during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a different number than the sixth number. In addition, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

In addition, the display according to the number of holds may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol change display is held during the period when the first symbol change display is being executed. , It may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, the display according to the number of holds may always notify that the operation of the second symbol change display is suspended during the period when the first symbol change display is being executed. During the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, it may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digestion display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

Here, the notice icon may always start to be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period other than the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to be displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, "in the period during which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" third symbol variation display ") executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed is executed, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C) is the symbol variation display. Increased display during execution of symbol variation display executed before],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed only during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be started to be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to always start to be displayed. In the period when the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed may not start to be displayed.

The notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed does not have to start displaying during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed.

In addition, "the hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.] according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.].
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the displayable number of the display according to the number of holds and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, so that the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

Here, the hold display area may always display the display according to the number of holds up to the seventh number, or may not display the display according to the number of holds up to the seventh number. Good.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

The maximum number of displays that can be displayed according to the number of reservations and the maximum number of notice icons that can be displayed may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable displayable numbers according to the number of reservations in Special Figure 1, or at least the same number may be used.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable displayable numbers according to the number of reservations in Special Figure 2, or at least it may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the total number of maximum displayable numbers according to the number of reserved figures 1 and 2, or at least the same. Good.

In addition, "the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542". Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (49) to (50) and 34 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIGS. 22 (51) to (57) and 34 (50-1) to (57). Directing, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a lunar background].
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the content of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and may also display notice displays other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. May be good.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first effect and the second effect. .. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

Further, the first notice display may only notify that the first effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. Further, the first notice display may always notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

Further, the second notice display may only notify that the second effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may always notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect will be executed.

Further, "The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail [for example, FIGS. 19 (1) to 23 (66) and 31 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.], which is a game table. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon is displayed is always executed, it may be possible to improve the expectation of the player.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that.

In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a look-ahead notice, but it may be displayed separately from the look-ahead notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the look-ahead mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or be digested even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may be increased or digested even while the special background mode for look-ahead is being executed. May be good.

Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, the notice icon C is displayed. When the notice display b, the notice display c or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested in the notice display a when the notice c is always displayed. It is a display that is displayed when the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed when the "symbol variation display in which the notice display a is displayed" is performed than when the "variation display" is performed. Further, the notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C or the notice icon D is digested. It is a display, and it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the "symbol variation display with the notice display b displayed" is executed than when the "symbol variation display with the notice display c displayed" is executed. It may be configured in. Further, the notice display d is a display displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested, and the notice icon C is displayed. When it is digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when "notice icon A, notice icon B or notice icon D is digested" is executed rather than "notice icon C is digested symbol change display". It may be configured to be easy. In addition, the jackpot symbol is better when the "symbol variation display in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed" is executed than when the "symbol variation display in which the notice display d is displayed" is executed. It may be configured so that it can be easily confirmed and displayed.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first display means capable of executing the symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.] and
A second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the effect hold lamp 286].
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous effect, freeze effect, stop pattern advance notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “suspended number”) in the reserved display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect hold lamp 286, etc.] is a display means that can be displayed [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of pending items depending on the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of a notice icon first display area YA1 and a notice icon sixth display area YA6, and each of them. It is configured so that a notice icon can be displayed in each area],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, , If the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo-ream effect may be executed, and if the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
A second number that is greater than the first number [eg, one, etc.] than if the notice icon was digested during the period in which the symbol variation display was executed once. For example, 3 etc.] It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit when digested.
The second display means is based on the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, based on the third hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (2)". It is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the start of "design variation display, etc.]".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In addition, "the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is out of place] in the same manner as the mode of the notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is a big hit, a reach transition effect, etc.]. It is a display means that can display [transition effect, etc.]
The second display means is the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, pseudo-continuous notice that is out of order, reach transition effect, etc.]
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the second display means is composed of a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.]. Is a display means
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "One of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, an effect hold lamp 286, etc.], and the hold display means. Is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, turning on a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (9) to 20 (20), display of the notice icon as a look-ahead notice. Is done by the decorative icon display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, during the period in which the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of the look-ahead shown in FIG. 19 (2)] is being executed, the notice icon is displayed. Fifth number [eg, 3 etc.] may be digested,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "three objects to be read ahead shown in the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 19 (2))". The notice icon may be digested by the sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period during which the "design variation display based on the hold held before the eye hold, etc.]" is being executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. 19]. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of look-ahead during the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that was held before the second hold that is the target of look-ahead shown in (4) is being executed. A game table characterized in that the hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special drawing 1]. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely digested by the end of the symbol variation display to be read ahead [for example, FIG. 19 (1)). -As shown in FIGS. 23 (66) and 31 (1) to 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested by the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digestion display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, it is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon may be started to be displayed [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is during execution of the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.] according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.].
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542". Etc.]
As the notice icon, the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box shown in FIGS. 22 (47) and 33 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon shown in FIG. 29 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (49) to (50) and 34 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIGS. 22 (51) to (57) and 34 (50-1) to (57). Directing, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a lunar background].
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300, etc.] and
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
While the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (2)] is being displayed, the notice icon is displayed. As a result, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Displayed, etc.],
The first notice icon that is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 19 (9) to 20. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat that started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (14). ],
The symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, "the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol based on the third hold which is the object of pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (2))" (Variation display, etc.] ”), the first notice icon that was not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested [for example, FIG. 19 (for example, FIG. 19 (. 9) As shown in FIGS. 20 (25), the notice icon I6 of the hat which started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is a symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading as shown in FIG. 20 (23). Digested in],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notice icon of the hat]. The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested by the symbol variation display where the display of I6 has started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "as a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be started to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIGS. 19 (9) to 19 (9) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20 (25), the symbol variation which is the target of pre-reading so that the notice icon I6 of the hat which started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (23). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed as a look-ahead notice of the display]. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "during the display of one symbol variation display, the second number [for example, three, etc.] is higher than the case where the first notice icon of the first number [for example, one, etc.] is digested. ] Is more likely to be a big hit when the first notice icon is digested.
The second number is larger than the first number,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "a second notice icon [for example, fan notice icon I10, etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop pattern advance notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is digested, the first notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIGS. 21 (28) to 21 (31)) is used as the notice display. Continuous production, etc.] may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is out of place].
When the first notice icon [for example, hat notice icon I6, etc.] is digested, the first fake notice table [for example, pseudo-continuous production, etc.] is displayed as the fake notice display. May be
The display mode of the first false notice display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notice display.
It is configured so that the symbol variation display on which the first false notice display is displayed is out of alignment.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect, which is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG. 18B].
As the notice icon, a third notice icon [for example, ribbon notice icon I8, etc.] can be displayed.
When the third notice icon is digested, the look-ahead effect display may be started [For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, The background shifts to the look-ahead mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.]. Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a decorative symbol variable display, etc.]" Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of the look-ahead shown in FIG. 19 (9), the first notice icon that was started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon I6, etc. of the hat whose display was started during the symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, hold which is the target of pre-reading]. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the pattern change display based on],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the display means.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of a notice icon first display area YA1 and a notice icon sixth display area YA6. It is configured so that a notice icon can be displayed in each area],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, it is provided with "effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500]].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300, etc.] and
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, a notice icon I21 of "house", and a notice icon I22 of "crest". , "Den" notice icon I31, "Princess" notice icon I32, "Grandfather" notice icon I33, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is the jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 41 (1)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 42, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 during the period from when the symbol variation display to be read ahead is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. Notice icon I21 and "Crest" notice icon I22 are displayed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is an effect display.
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 21 (32), a hat. When the notice icon I6 of the above is digested, a pseudo-ream may be performed, and as shown in FIGS. 22 (46) to (57), when the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested, a strong reach effect is produced. May be started, etc.],
The first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons [for example, the combination of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 shown in FIG. 41] changes once. By being digested in the display, the first effect display [for example, the effect image displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 42 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the notice icon of the first combination is digested.

In addition, according to this game console, it is possible to show a plurality of notice icons during the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started, which gives a feeling of expectation for a big hit. You may be able to do it.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. A display other than the effect display corresponding to the above may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. The effect display corresponding to may not be displayed.

Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, only the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. It is good, and the first combination of the displayed multiple notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as the effect display. May be done. Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. Alternatively, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be digested in one symbol variation display, so that the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display.

Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. It is also configured so that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the displayed multiple notice icons is not digested in one symbol variation display. May be done.

Further, "The first combination is a combination consisting of the notice icons of the first number [for example, two or the like].
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first effect display is displayed from the time when the notice icon of one of the first combinations consisting of the first number of notice icons is displayed until the first number of notice icons are digested. It may be possible to continue to have the expectation that may be displayed.

In addition, "the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of a" house "] and a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I22 of a" crest "]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that the effect of the effect may be enhanced.

Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. You may. Further, the first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. It may be.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 41 (1)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of the above is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (19), the symbol variation display to be read ahead is suspended. During the period from the time until the end of the symbol variation display, the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been digested],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "In one symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the first effect display is not displayed [for example, Even if only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested, the effect image shown in FIG. 42 (21) is not displayed, etc.]. The stand. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol variation display, so that the first effect display is displayed. It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who was able to see.

Here, in one symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, only the first effect display may not be displayed, or once. In the symbol variation display of, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in one symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not always be displayed, or the first effect display may be configured once. In the symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the first effect display may be displayed.

In addition, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested only in one symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed, or the first effect display may be displayed once. In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, "the third notice icon as the notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 20] is digested, so that the third effect display [for example, FIG. 21 (28) ), The effect display in which the character BC of the bancho displayed in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 pushes up the right pattern, etc.] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the production is increased, and the production effect may be enhanced.

Here, the third notice icon may be digested so that only the third effect display is displayed, or the third notice icon is digested to display the third effect display. It may be configured so that a display other than the effect display is also displayed. In addition, it may be configured so that the third effect display is always displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third effect display is digested by digesting the third effect icon. The display may be configured so that it may not be displayed.

In addition, it may be configured so that the third effect display is displayed only when the third notice icon is digested, or the third notice icon is not digested. It may be configured so that the three effect displays are displayed.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 19]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), in the target of pre-reading. Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 41]. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 41 (notice icon I21 of" house "or notice of" crest "". Icon I22, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]
The second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The first display means is a display related to the notice icon [for example, a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 46 (10) to 47 (13) is digested, or a display in FIGS. 47 (16) to 47 (19). ), The display of the character BC of the chief character, which is performed corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, or the pseudo-continuous production, or the display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to (c5). Etc.] is a means that can be displayed,
The second display means is a display related to the notice icon [for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to 47 (13) and the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 46 (5) to (9). It is a means capable of displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat, or the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 49 (c6).
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 may function as a look-ahead notice display, etc.].
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 49 (c1)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to 49 (c9), the notice icon is displayed during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to be read ahead to the end of the symbol variation display. Two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed in area 285B],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the player's line of sight looking at the display related to the notice icon should not be concentrated on one display means. It may be possible to entertain the player.

Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display related to the notice icon, or may be able to display a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display related to the notice icon, or may not display the display related to the notice icon.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the display related to the notice icon, or may be able to display a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display the display related to the notice icon, or may not display the display related to the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 49 (c1)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of No. 1 is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to 49 (c9), they are subject to pre-reading. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the shuriken notice icon I7 and the two hat notice icons I6 have been digested, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, the notice icon is displayed in the "second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. It is configured [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (5), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the display means on which the stock effect can be performed is defined, it may be possible not to overlook the stocked notice icon.

Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display something other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display means, and the notice icon may be displayed in the display means other than the second display means. May be good.

Further, "the notice icon is displayed in the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. A notice may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to (5), a display for notifying that the notice icon I6 of the hat will be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A (Direction) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the notice icon may be displayed, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the display means and prevent the player from overlooking the display of the notice icon. is there.

Here, the first display means may only display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed, or the first display means may display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed. Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, the first display means may always display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed, and the first display means may display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed in the display means other than the first display means. May be displayed to give notice.

Further, "the first display means includes a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. It is a provided means,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, and the like]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (4) and (10), the notice icon is the first. It is displayed over 1 decorative symbol display device 208A and 2nd decorative symbol display device 208B],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to produce an impactful notice icon, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with a second display area without fail, or may not be provided with a second display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed in a display other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over an area. Further, the notice icon may always be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

Further, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over.

Further, "the first display means includes a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. It is a provided means,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, and the like]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of types of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 18].
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. As shown in 47 (16) to FIG. 18 (18), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the enlarged display of the chief character BC2 is changed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed over 208B. It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to produce an impactful notice icon, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with a second display area without fail, or may not be provided with a second display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayable only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode according to the type.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area. , When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the display area other than the first display area and the second display area. May be good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. , When the notice icon is digested, the effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 19]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), in the target of pre-reading. Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 46]. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (hat notice icon I6, etc.) is shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
The first movable means [for example, an actuator that displaces the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 52 (12), a family crest accessory 224B shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2), etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, a notice icon I21 of "house", and a notice icon I22 of "crest". , Drink notice icon I31, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (2)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66) and FIG. 52, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be read ahead is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, a drink notice icon I31, etc. are displayed in the notice icon display area 285],
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect that displaces the effect button 136 from a default position to a protruding position, as shown in FIGS. 52 (12) to (17)]. It ’s a viable means,
When the fourth notice icon [for example, drink notice icon I31, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there was room for improvement in the movable means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic in the movable means.

Further, according to this game table, when the fourth notice icon is digested by the display means, the first movable effect by the first movable means may be performed, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. In some cases.

Further, according to this game table, the line of sight of the player can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayable only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode according to the type.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. Further, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

Further, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. When the fourth notice icon is exhausted, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may be executed. Further, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed without fail, or the displayed notice icon may be configured. It may be configured so that the first movable effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. It may be configured so that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not digested.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (2)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of the above is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66) and FIG. 52, the look-ahead During the period from the suspension of the target symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icon I6 for the two hats, the notice icon I9 for the Senryo box, the notice icon I31 for the drink, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18, the notice icon I21 of the "house", etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable It is configured so that the production is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured so that only the first movable effect is not executed, or among the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, it may be configured so that a movable effect other than the first movable effect is not executed. Further, it may be configured so that the first movable effect is not always executed when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the first of the displayed notice icons. It may be configured so that the first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are digested.

Further, it may be configured so that the first movable effect is not executed only when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the first of the displayed notice icons. It may be configured so that the first movable effect is not executed even when the notice icon of the fifth is not digested.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
The first movable means is a means for moving the operating means.
The first movable effect shows the mode of the operating means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 52 (12)] to the second mode [for example, FIG. 52 (17). It is an effect that changes to the protruding position, etc.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the operation means may be noticed by the notice icon, so that the operation means may also be noticed.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player without fail, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the first movable means may be one in which only the operating means can be moved, or one in which other than the operating means can be moved. Further, the first movable means may be one in which the operating means is always movable, or may not be movable.

In addition, "a second movable means [for example, a family crest accessory shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)] is provided.
The second movable means is a means capable of performing the second movable effect [for example, the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)].
When the sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of "house"] among the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be executed. ing,
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a wide variety of productions by movable means, which may improve the interest.

Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. Further, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

Further, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. When the sixth notice icon of the above is digested, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may be executed. In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or among the displayed notice icons. It may be configured so that the second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is digested.

Further, it may be configured so that the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. It may be configured so that the second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon of the above is not digested.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 19]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), in the target of pre-reading. Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may always be digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 41]. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 52 (notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, notice icon I31 of a drink, etc.)). Is not an icon indicating the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is the jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 54 (1)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), the notice icon is displayed during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to be read ahead to the end of the symbol variation display. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, etc. are displayed in area 285],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 (2) to (6), a notice that the notice icon produced by the lord is displayed, etc. ], And
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display suggesting that the display of the notice icon may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, it may be suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may be able to suggest only that the notice icon display may be started, or may be other than the case where the notice icon display may be started. It may be suggestive. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the notice icon display may be started, or may not suggest that the notice icon display may be started. There may be.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 54 (1)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of No. 1 is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), the look-ahead target. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the two hat notice icons I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are exhausted. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, "The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 (2) to (5), twice. There is a notice that the notice icon will be displayed by the director over the pattern change display],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than the plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be the one that may occur. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, "While the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display is being displayed, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is terminated [for example, FIG. 54 (2)). ~ As shown in Fig. (5), the notice that the notice icon will be displayed by the lord's direction has ended before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol variation display to be pre-read starts, it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol variation to be pre-read.

Here, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated, or the second symbol variation may be terminated. During the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated. Further, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end without fail, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. It may be configured so that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not end during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before.

Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be terminated. It may be configured so that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display ends even when the symbol variation display displayed before is not displayed.

Further, "The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that the display of at least one of the notice icons of a third number [for example, three or the like] may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), in the Amida production, at least one of the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice icon I10 for the fan, and the notice icon I9 for the Senryo box may be started to be displayed. It suggests that there is, etc.],
The third number is a number of two or more.
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, at least one of the previously suggested notice icons may be displayed, so that the player can know which notice icon may be displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to entertain the fluctuation of the design on which the notice icon is displayed.

Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may only suggest that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or may be a third. It may also suggest something other than that at least one of the number of notice icons may be initiated. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the notice icon of the third number may be started. It may not suggest that at least one of the displays may be initiated.

In addition, "the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. 56 (a1-1) -As shown in the figure (a-6), as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display may be started only by at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon display suggestion display, or the notice may be started. Display other than at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested by the icon display suggestion display may also be started. In addition, at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the notice icon display suggestion display may start the display may be configured so as to always start. The display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the icon display suggestion display may be started may not be started.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 19]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), in the target of pre-reading. Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 54]. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 54 (hat notice icon I6, etc.) is shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 57 (2)]] ”) Is suspended, and then the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as“ first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 57 (4) to (13)] ”) is displayed. May be started,
During the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons"). The display may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (4) to 23 (66), the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the jackpot that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed from the start of the display to the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that starts to be displayed after the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be read ahead is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but then started. It may be possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as the look-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display to be read ahead from the symbol change display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as the first look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the first look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, a symbol variation display other than the display of the display may be started. Further, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

Further, the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, only the display of one symbol variation display may be started.

Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, or the first In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the display of the first symbol variation may be started. The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "the plurality of notice icons may be digested in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example," As shown in FIGS. 19 (4) to 23 (66), the target of pre-reading is the target of pre-reading after the display of the symbol variation display, which is started after the symbol variation display that is the jackpot that is the target of pre-reading, is suspended. By the end of the big hit symbol variation display, the notice icon I6 for the two hats, the notice icon I9 for the Senryo box, the notice icon I10 for the fan, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be read ahead is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started after that. It may be possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a look-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of look-ahead from the symbol change display.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be digested without fail, and the first symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the start of display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 57]. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 57 (hat notice icon I6, etc.) is shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

Further, when the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 57 (2)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is performed. The display of the hold display [for example, the display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 57 (2)] is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be recognized that the second symbol variation display has been suspended.

Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is not suspended. The display of the hold display may be started. Further, the display of the second hold display may be started whenever the second symbol change display is suspended, and the display of the second hold display may be started when the second symbol change display is held. It does not have to be started.

Further, "as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second look-ahead display mode [for example, the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode of Sabohani) shown in FIG. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode [for example, FIG. 57 (2). ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (sabohani display mode) when the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of look-ahead, is held. Display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the look-ahead notice display increases, and the interest may be improved.

Here, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, or as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be displayed. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the second look-ahead display mode. Further, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, and as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is the second look-ahead display. It may not be displayed in the mode.

Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second In the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display of is suspended, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second look-ahead display mode. Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display may be displayed. In the symbol variation display displayed when is held, the second hold display may not be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

Further, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode only in the symbol change display displayed when the second symbol change display is held, or the second In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display of No. 1 is suspended, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third look-ahead notice display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect display shown in FIGS. 58 (b2) to (b3)].
The third look-ahead notice display is a display in which the display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 58 (b1) to 58 (b3). In this way, the pre-reading mode effect display is started after the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading, is held.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the look-ahead notice display increases, so that the interest may be improved.

Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition to the above, the display may be started. Further, the third look-ahead notice display may always start after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or may not start after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation that is the loss based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 57 (2)). Display, etc.] ”) is suspended, and then referred to as a symbol variation display (hereinafter,“ third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 57 (4) to (13)] ”. ) May start to appear
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started [for example, the figure. As shown in 19 (4) to 23 (66), the pre-reading target is the target of the pre-reading after the display of the symbol variation display, which is started after the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead is suspended, is started. By the time the display of the symbol variation that causes a certain loss is completed, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, the notice icon I10 of the fan, etc. will be displayed],
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that starts to be displayed after the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, a symbol variation display other than the display of the display may be started. Further, the display of the third symbol variation display may be always started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

Further, the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, and the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, only the display of the three symbol variation displays may be started.

Further, in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, or the third symbol variation display may be started. In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the display of the third symbol variation may be started. The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), in the target of pre-reading. Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 72D, and the like].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69].
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). The display of "Den-sama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the part TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" etc. displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in the figure (l)].
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 or the like shown in FIG. 69] in the display means.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a swordsman's notice icon I62. And the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. May be good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be one. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. ..

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, the notice icon is displayed. The explanation is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be one that is not displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be one that is not displayed even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not always be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed.

Further, "When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be restarted, or when the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display may be restarted. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display [for example, the character display of" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d)".
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 shows "super heat". Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. May be good.

Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may always include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern shown in FIG. 66].
The third display means is a display that matches the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 66 (a2) to 66 (a4) to give a notice of the swordsman. Display that icon I62 is stocked, etc.] is a means that can be displayed.
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is located below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include a display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display. It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display matching the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display matching the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may not display a display that matches the display of the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display area may be provided in a part of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area in the third display means. ..

Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area in the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. It may be the one that was given. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69].
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of the "castle town stage" displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means.
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the stage name display unit ST2 has a princess notice icon I64. Two pseudo-ream notice icons I65 are displayed (stocked), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. You may. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display unit ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may be a state in which the notice icon is displayed only in the second display area and may not be displayed, or a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be in the state of or not displayed. Further, the third display may not always be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or is displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

Further, "The first display area is a display area divided by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by lines, or may be partitioned including items other than lines. Further, the first display area may be always divided by a line, or may not be divided by a line.

In addition, "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 69]. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a7) (princess notice icon I64, pseudo-ream notice icon I65, The swordsman's notice icon I62, chance-up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons that indicate the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.], and the display means is a notice icon [for example, Each notice icon shown in FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.] can be displayed.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69, the stage name display unit ST2, etc.] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69]. The display area is different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69] on which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc.] are displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69].
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). The display of "Den-sama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the part TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" etc. displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in the figure (l)].
When displayed, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 or the like shown in FIG. 69] in the display means.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a chance up with the swordsman's notice icon I62. Notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed in a field other than the first display area of the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area of. Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state of being displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, only the first display may not be displayed, or in the state of being displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, the first is displayed. It is also possible to hide the display other than the display of. Further, the first display may not always be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the first display may not be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The display may be displayed.

Further, the first display may not be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or even in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. It is possible that only the first display is not displayed.

Further, "When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will be resumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is also restarted. In some cases. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

Further, when the first display is, for example, the explanation of the first character, the tenth display, which is an explanation display different from the first display, may be displayed.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display [for example, the character display of" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d)".
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 shows "super heat". Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. May be good.

Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may always include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

The notice display in this description may be one of a number of notice displays.

Further, the notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of the display is the third display [for example, the character display of" gold is hotter than red "in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), or the same figure. The character display of "Swordsman reach is hot" in the balloon part TT2 and the character display of "When a panda breaks in" in the balloon part TT3 shown in (a6)].
The third display is an explanatory display.
The display content of the third display is different from the display content of the first display.
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed [for example, a balloon portion TT2, a balloon portion TT3, etc. shown in FIG. 68 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be completely different.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed in a field other than the second display area of the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area of. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed in the second display area of the display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be completely different.

Further, "Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10). Even if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, the character display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon display section TT2, and "When a panda breaks in" on the balloon display section TT3. Character display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may always be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The third display may be displayed even in the state of.

In addition, the animation introducing the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be displayed in the second display area. In addition, the notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternately.

In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [for example, the character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69].
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of the "castle town stage" displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The display content of the fourth display is different from the display content of the first display.
The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means.
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area.
In a state where the notice icons of the first number [for example, three, etc.] are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be completely different.

Further, the fourth display may be displayable only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. May be good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be completely different.

Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area, or the first one. In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may always be displayed in the third display area, or the first one. In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

Further, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, or the first number. Even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon of is displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

Further, here, a type in which the stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display unit ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth display may be a state in which the notice icon is displayed only in the third display area and may not be displayed, or a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be in the state of or not displayed. Further, the fourth display may not always be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or is displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern shown in FIG. 66].
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 66 (a2) to (a4), and the swordsman's notice icon I62 Is a means that can display [displays that are stocked, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is located below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include a display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display. It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked with the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display the display linked with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display linked with the display of the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display area may be provided in a part of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area in the third display means. ..

Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area in the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. It may be the one that was given. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

Further, "The first display area is a display area divided by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by lines, or may be partitioned including items other than lines. Further, the first display area may be always divided by a line, or may not be divided by a line.

Further, the second display area may also be divided by lines, and the third display area may also be divided by lines.

In addition, "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 69]. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a9) (princess notice icon I64, pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, The swordsman's notice icon I62, chance-up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons that indicate the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

It should be noted that the number of holds and the number of notice icons may happen to match.

Further, the maximum number of holds and the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon may be the same or different.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 143, other game consoles to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 and a spinning machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. To do. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 74 to 143 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 74 to 143, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 74 to 143 are used. In the description using FIG. 143, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 74 to 143 are prioritized.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 74. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and is an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106 as a door body, and a door with a ball storage plate. A 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of the above, the effect button 136 as an example of the operation means that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 76) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits the effect button 136, the ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the player's card unit. It is provided with a return operation button 142 for instructing the return of the balance, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 74 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 as an example of the operation means is also provided, and the effect button 136 and each button of the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other so that the player can operate them with one hand. In the present embodiment, each button constituting the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a first operating means, and the effect button 136 may be referred to as a second operating means.

Here, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 106, the operation key unit 137 includes six buttons, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, and a cancel button 137f. Each of these buttons is smaller than the effect button 136, that is, the operation area is small. In other words, it can be said that the effect button 136 is larger in size than the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the enter button 137e, and the cancel button 137f.

The effect button 136 has an operable position (first position) protruding from the upper surface of the door 108 with the ball storage dish by the effect button drive motor 434 (see FIG. 77) as an example of the drive means, and the door with the ball storage dish. It is possible to displace from the inoperable position (second position) that enters the inside from the upper surface of 108. The effect button 136 can be pressed by the player at the operable position, and cannot be pressed by the player at the inoperable position. The effect button 136 may be configured to vibrate during operation.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 74, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 76.

FIG. 75 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 74 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152 are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 77). (See FIG. 77), a payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 77) A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 77), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

FIG. 76 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative symbol and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be used as a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term "hold" as used herein means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. Further, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the term "controlled state", which refers to the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), will be used, but the term "controlled state" includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 74. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". It is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is formed. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has passed through the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the normal figure start port 228. That is, the second special figure start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special drawing start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the second special drawing start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 are closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal drawing variable game is won and the normal drawing display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special drawing start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is the easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. When the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are the stationary states, the closed state is the predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 76, as long as the game ball wins a prize by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In the pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special figure start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 200, and can be moved in the vertical direction by a family crest motor (not shown). The effect movable body 225 can be displaced between a position retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advanced position). There is.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player cannot easily see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may be able to visually recognize a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice hole, or the shoji portion of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body to be rearward. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 74, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76, the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display. The device 208 corresponds to an example of a display means or a decorative pattern display means.

Further, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is attached to the game board 200 at a position visible to the player.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are used. It may be composed of one common circuit board, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, and one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) is combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, and one of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means. Further, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 has a plurality of boards (for example, a plurality of control boards, one or a plurality of relay boards, and one or a plurality of control boards). It may be composed of. Further, if the combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is regarded as the sub-control means, in the pachinko machine 100 described here, the main control unit 300 and the sub-control means (first sub-control) The unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) are provided on separate boards, and the boards are directly connected by an electric signal line, but an electric signal between the boards is directly connected by another relay board. It may be configured to relay the transmission / reception of.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. There is. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address, and when the table is referred to in the following description, the conditions for determining which address in the ROM 306 is specified are expressed in a table format. It may refer to a summary. These points are the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 has a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit contains three random number value generation circuits). The lower plate full tank detection that detects that the main body open sensor, the front frame door sensor, the door sensor with the ball storage plate, and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 74 are full due to the game ball. A random number value generation circuit that receives signals output by various sensors 320 including sensors, each start port, the entrance of the winning port, and a ball detection sensor provided inside the variable winning port, and outputs the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage. The sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the 318 and the basic circuit 302, the drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and the display control of the normal figure display device 210. Display control of the drive circuit 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, the normal drawing hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing the operation is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close the second special figure start port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the like.

The main control unit 300 is a game control means for performing game control, and has a hit / fail determination means, a start information look-ahead means, and a pre-determination means, which will be described later.

The random number value generation circuit 318 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derive the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random number value generation circuit 318 acquires irregular values by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 is used when the value thus acquired is used as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor of the various sensors 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is also the same. The value in is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 built in the random number value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize at the normal figure start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the normal figure start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in the random number value storage register built in the random number value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the normal drawing start port 228.

Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a prize is won in a predetermined winning opening such as a general winning opening 226, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234. Examples thereof include a sensor that detects a ball that has been formed and a sensor that detects a ball that passes through the starting port 228.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of the electric system abnormality signal output means. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 may be provided in the power management unit 660.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main processing of the main control unit described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the game control means.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub control unit 400 and an input / output interface for transmitting and receiving commands to and from the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication, the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 is the main control unit. It is configured so that the signal corresponding to the command can be transmitted to the 300. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 may be regarded as one-way communication so that the payout control unit 600 cannot transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, an effect button 136 shown in FIG. 74, and an operation key unit. The detection signals from the button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of various buttons constituting 137 and the effect button initial position sensor 427 as a detection means that detects that the effect button 136 is located at the initial position are sent to the basic circuit 402. The output sensor circuit 428, the drive circuit 430 for controlling the upper arm motor and forearm motor for driving the effect movable body 224, the family crest motor for driving the effect movable body 225, and the effect button drive for driving the effect button 136. It is connected to a drive circuit 432 for controlling the motor 434. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is set to the above-mentioned operable position, but is not limited to this, and can be set to an appropriate position. For example, the initial position is set to the above-mentioned inoperable position. You may try to do it.

Further, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

The sub-control means including the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command signal from the main control unit 300, which is a game control means, and based on the received command signal, a decorative symbol display device. Controls the directing means such as 208.

As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 function as an example of the effect control means.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and receives a prize based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor (not shown) may be connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor detects when the front frame door 106 and / or the main body 104 is open, and outputs an open signal. Here, the payout control unit 600 may output the door opening information to the main control unit 300 when the opening signal from the frame sensor is input.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 shown in FIG. 74 and ball feed that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. It controls the device 634.

The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. Further, the power management unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the launch control unit. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 78A to 78D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 78 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 78 (a), nine types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure I", are shown. In FIG. 78A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G”) are prepared as stop symbols for the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get the ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can not expect to get the ball out in the remaining rounds, it is a real 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that you can expect to get a ball in one round, but you can not expect to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 4 out of 15 rounds It is a real 4R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in the round, but not in the remaining rounds, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to get a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is easier to open more than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed, but at least of these. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 100 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the 101st time is non-electric. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum for each operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 78 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 78 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 78 (b), six types of special figures "special figure a" to "special figure f" are shown, and five kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure f"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball out in all rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball out in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and "Special Figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 78 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. In the pattern display area, "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot ("special figure B"), 5R normal jackpot ("special figure F"), and 2R normal jackpot ("special figure e"), "decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative symbols with the same numbers other than "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB, and substantial 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1", "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is the big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 78 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 78 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

The pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment has a long-press auto continuous striking function in which a pseudo continuous striking operation is performed by a long-pressing operation of the effect button 136. Here, the long-press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer, and the continuous press operation is the effect button 136. It is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long-press auto continuous striking function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In the present embodiment, in the state where the long-press auto continuous striking function is enabled, the continuous striking operation at regular intervals (for example, 100 ms intervals) is simulated while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136, in order to appropriately perform the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, the long-press auto continuous hit function is the effect button 136. It is configured so that the pseudo continuous striking operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses from the start of the pressing operation of.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 for storing the reserved number of special figures may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 79 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Permission to operate and set initial values. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 75 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is turned on (indicating that the operation has been performed). In other words, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power supply status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 75 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after the interrupt prohibition is set, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 77 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 stores prize-winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been awarded. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the subsequent processing associated with winning the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number, and the value is obtained as the initial value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for timing the fluctuation / stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. Read out, add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 77 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 78 (c)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 78 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening / closing of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the normal figure state is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal map variable games is stored in the normal map reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal map variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. 78 (a) is on, and the 2R jackpot flag is on. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure e, and the loss flag is on, the special figure f. The 7-segment LED is turned on / off, and the driving control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), a 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and a lost symbol (special figure e). Confirmation display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. The door member is attached to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closure period in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example). (3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be inserted into the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many game balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting port 232 until the game balls are entered. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In this example embodiment, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game in this example) having a high advantage is given priority over the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game in this example) having a low advantage. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. As an example, the special figure 2 variable game with low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and the hold of special figure 1 is held in special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, etc. The command type-identifiable information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and timers selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command that includes information indicating a number, etc., it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc., and the winning effect start command and end. In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not special figure 2 starting port 232 has won a prize, whether or not a variable winning port 234 has won a prize, etc. including. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit is used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 79 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and pre-determines the stop symbol (special figure). The pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c)) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data ranks. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the read-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 81, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 82A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 82 (a), "special figure I" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 2". "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Off) is remembered.

FIG. 82B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 82 (b), "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In addition, in FIG. 82B, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 82 (c) shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and the pre-reading result. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

Next, refer to FIG. 83 for the win / fail determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability table for hit / fail determination, and FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability table for hit / fail determination. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 83 (a) is referred to in the case of the special figure high probability state, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. , Refer to the low probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 83 (b). Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

Similarly, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed, when the special figure is in the high probability state, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 83 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is in the low probability state. In this case, the low-probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 83 (b) is referred to. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

FIG. 83 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. If the hit / fail judgment result of the big hit is incorrect, refer to the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 83 (c), and based on the numerical range shown by the referenced small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value. , Select the winning / failing judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / failing determination result determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 84. Here, FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 84 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is based on the winning / failing result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random value. Select the stop symbol of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 (b) is referred to, and based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed is set in the special symbol display device.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 85A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 85A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the input / output port is initialized, the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized, and the like.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is converted into the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to. Further, in the chance button control process in the present embodiment, if there is a command to operate the effect button 136 in the effect data read in step S409 or the updated effect data, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. To do.

In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 following step S413, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S417 following step S415, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 430.

In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 85B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 85C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S443 following step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 86A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 86A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. .. In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S509 following step S507, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208 or effect data by the cloaking device 246) is read from the ROM (not shown). Processing is performed, and when it is necessary to update the production data, the production data is updated.

In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP (not shown) in the effect data read in step S509, this instruction is output to VDP (details will be described later).

In step S513 following step S511, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to a drive circuit (not shown) for driving the cloaking device 246.

In step S515 following step S513, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when the effect requested by the command of the first sub-control unit 400 is started or ended, a control command for notifying the first sub-control unit 400 to that effect is output. After that, the process returns to step S503.

FIG. 86B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 86 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, control commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 set in the information transmission process (step S515) of the second sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

FIG. 86 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM (not shown). As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU sets the ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address), etc. in the VDP attribute register based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM to the VRAM. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP transfers image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instructions set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S555, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM in step S551, the CPU has information on the image data (coordinate axes of the VRAM, image size) constituting the display image. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP. The VDP sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs VDP to start drawing an image. The VDP starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU.

In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S561, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

FIG. 87 is an example of a table provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 87 (a) is an example of a box data table, and FIG. 87 (b) is an example of a parts data table. ..

The first sub-control unit 400 stores the box data shown in FIG. 6A at the timing of each effect execution, such as when the fluctuation starts, when the hold changes, when the advance notice effect is produced, when the reach effect is generated, and when the button effect occurs. Set in the data setting area. The box data is part data consisting of a liquid crystal command and information such as voice, light emission, and accessory (movable body) executed in response to the effect based on the liquid crystal command (here, as an example, parts A to H ...). It is composed of. The liquid crystal command is a command for displaying the effect display corresponding to each of the change start, hold change, notice effect, reach effect, button effect, etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, No. Box data commands such as 101, 102, 201-203) are included.

In addition, the liquid crystal command responds to the operation of the accessory M (effect movable body 246, 224, 225) corresponding to each of the change start, hold change, notice effect, reach effect, button effect, etc. It includes a command for displaying the display (for example, a command for box data such as No. 255).

Specifically, in this example, No. The box data of 1 includes a liquid crystal command for starting the special figure fluctuation, part A (data for storing the bicep accessory), and part B (data for storing the shutter). In addition, No. The box data of 101 includes a liquid crystal command for displaying the hall background and part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the hall background), and No. The box data of 201 includes the liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 01 and the part E (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 01 (display of the character (character) and the character "?")), And the No. The box data of 202 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 02, and parts E and F (conversation notice 02 (display of characters (princess) and "How are you?" Characters)). , No. The box data of 203 is the liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 03, and the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 03 (display of the characters (character (princess) and "super hot!") Of the conversation notice 03). Including No. The box data of 255 includes a liquid crystal command for moving the bicep accessory up and down, and a part H (data for moving the bicep accessory up and down).

As shown in FIG. 3B, the part data includes the movable mode of the accessory (directed movable body 246, 224, 225, etc.) to be executed corresponding to each effect, the output sound (sound) from the speaker 120, and so on. This is information on the light emitting mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418 and the like).

That is, each part data is composed of a sound layer having sound device data, a lamp layer having lamp device data, an accessory operation layer having shutter device data, accessory (movable body) device data, and the like. A plurality (two) of sound layers, lamp layers, and accessory operation layers are provided here, and the larger the number of each layer, the higher the priority. Each part data may have one layer or one device data (or type).

Specifically, in this example, the part A (data for storing the bicep accessory) returns the bicep accessory (directing movable body 224) to the accessory operation layer 1 (bicep accessory operation layer). Contains device data. Further, the part B (data for storing the shutter) includes device data for returning the shutter accessory (effect movable body (shielding means) 246) to the initial position in the accessory operation layer 2 (shutter accessory operation layer). There is.

Further, the part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the hall background) includes the sound device data which is the BGM for the hall background in the sound layer 1 and the lamp device data of the light emission pattern for the hall background in the lamp layer 1. There is.

Further, the part E (directing data corresponding to the conversation notice 01) corresponds to the sound device data of the dialogue (such as "n?") Issued by the character (Den) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2 and the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice is included.

In addition, the part F (directing data corresponding to the conversation notice 02) is the sound device data of the dialogue ("How are you?") Issued by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2 and the notice in the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to is included.

In addition, the part G (directing data corresponding to the conversation notice 03) is the sound device data of the line ("Geki Atsuyo!") Issued by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2 and the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice is included.

Further, the parts H (data for the vertical movement of the bicep accessory) are the lamp device data of the light emitting pattern corresponding to the vertical movement of the bicep accessory in the lamp layer 2 and the accessory operation layer 1 (the bicep accessory operation layer). ) Includes device data for moving the bicep accessory (directing movable body 224) up and down.

Although not shown here, the storage position (position) of each part data is set in each box data. The position is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, for example, No. In the box data of 201, the start address of position 0001 (for example, address 1001) is set as the storage position of the part E. Also, for example, No. In the box data of 203, the start address of position 0001 (for example, address 1001) is set as the storage position of part E, and the start address of position 0002 (for example, address 1002) is set as the storage position of part G. ing.

The first sub-control unit 400 sets the above-mentioned box data (for each effect) at the timing of each effect execution, and transmits a liquid crystal command to the second sub-control unit 500. Each box data is also set when the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. At this time, the RAM 408 stores the part data at addresses (part data setting areas) corresponding to a plurality of positions. It is not necessary that the part data is stored in all of the plurality of positions.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 executes control for performing the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command, and transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400. The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command sets the corresponding position in the RAM 408 if the position (part data) corresponding to the box data is set. When the part data is stored, the control data of the sound of the sound layer of the part data, the light emitting mode of the lamp layer, and the movable mode of the accessory operation layer is transferred to each device or, if necessary, a second. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 500 to perform an effect corresponding to the effect display.

FIG. 88 is a schematic view showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment, and is an example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command.

The first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85, and the second sub-control unit 400 performs each effect according to the result. A control command is sent to 500.

For example, when the first sub-control unit 400 produces the conversation notice 01, the first sub-control unit 400 is directed to the second sub-control unit 500 with the No. The liquid crystal command of the box data of 201 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative pattern display device 208 to display an image of a character (Den) and a character of the line (“?”).

Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, No. The part data is stored at the corresponding address of the RAM 408 based on the position set in the box data of 201. That is, in this example, No. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data of 201, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 whose start address is, for example, address 1001 (1). As a result, in the area starting from address 1001 of the RAM 408, the sound device data of the dialogue (for example, "n?") Issued by the character (Den) corresponding to the conversation notice 01 and the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice. Lamp device data is stored.

No. 1 from the first sub-control unit 400 Upon receiving the liquid crystal command of 201, the second sub-control unit 500 displays the effect of the conversation notice 01 (the image of the character (Den) and the character of the dialogue ("?") On the decorative pattern display device 208 (conversation notice 01). The display control) for performing the display) is executed, and the second sub-control unit 500 returns to the first sub-control unit 400 and transmits a command (2). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data if the position (part data) corresponding to the box data is set. Set the control data (3). In this example, since the return command includes the information of the position 0001, various device data (sound, lamp) corresponding to the part E stored in the position 0001 (the area where the address 1001 is the start address) of the RAM 408 is included. The data of the light emitting mode of L) is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, to execute the effect (4). Since the effect of the speaker 120 and the lamp L is actually after receiving the command from the main control unit 300, a time lag occurs.

FIG. 89 is another example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command.

For example, when the first sub-control unit 400 produces the conversation notice 03, the first sub-control unit 400 has a No. 2 sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. The liquid crystal command of the box data of 203 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative pattern display device 208 to display an image of a character (Den), a character of the line (“?”), And an image of a character (princess). It contains a command to instruct the display of the characters in that line ("Geki Atsuyo!").

Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, No. The part data is stored at the corresponding address of the RAM 408 based on the position set in the box data of 203. That is, in this example, No. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data of 203, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 whose start address is, for example, address 1001, and the No. Based on the position 0002 set in the box data of 203, the part G is stored in the area of the RAM 408 whose start address is, for example, address 1002 (1). As a result, the sound device data of the dialogue (for example, "n?") Issued by the character (Den) and the lamp device data of the corresponding light emission pattern are stored in the area starting from address 1001 of the RAM 408. In the area starting from address 1002 of the RAM 408, the sound device data of the dialogue ("Gekiatsuyo!") Issued by the character (princess) and the lamp device data of the corresponding light emission pattern are stored.

No. 1 from the first sub-control unit 400 Upon receiving the liquid crystal command of 203, the second sub-control unit 500 displays the effect of the conversation notice 03 (the image of the character (Den) and the character of the dialogue ("?") On the decorative pattern display device 208 (conversation notice 03a). After that, the image of the character (princess) and the character of the line ("Geki Atsuyo!") Are displayed (display control of the conversation notice 03b)). After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a to the first sub-control unit 400 (2), and transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b (3). .. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a includes the information of the position 0001 in the return command, so that the position 0001 of the RAM 408 (address 1001 is the first). Various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part E stored in the address area) are set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L to execute the effect (4). .. Further, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b includes the information of the position 0002 in the return command, so that the position 0002 of the RAM 408 (address 1002). Data of various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part G stored in the area (the area whose start address is) is set, and the data is transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L to execute the effect (the effect). 5).

In this way, when one liquid crystal command is a command for instructing the execution of a plurality of effect displays (display of conversation notice 03a and conversation notice 03b), and part data (parts E and G) are set for each, The first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command corresponding to the display control that performs each display from the liquid crystal command, and based on the part data (parts E and G) corresponding to each return command, the speaker 120 and the lamp L are used. Perform the production.

Next, the production system operation processing will be described. FIG. 90A is a flowchart of the effect system operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This effect system operation process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85 (a).

The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 first initializes the operating state of the operating means (step S601). That is, the process of clearing (port clearing) the signal input from the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed. The CPU 404 subsequently clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S603).

After that, the CPU 404 executes the chance button operation state determination process (step S605).

Here, the chance button operation state determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (b).

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as a chance button is being operated (step S701). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is operated by detecting the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port.

When the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is being operated (step S701: Yes), the CPU 404 updates the operation status of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 to the input state (step S703).

Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation of the effect button 136 this time is the first operation (step S705). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation status of the previous effect button 136 is OFF and the operation status of the current effect button 136 is ON.

When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 this time is the first operation (step S705: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after turning on the first operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S707). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 this time is not the first operation (step S705: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S707.

If the CPU 404 does not determine in step S701 that the effect button 136 has been operated (step S701: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the long press operation has ended (step S709). When the CPU 404 determines that the long press operation is completed (step S709: Yes), the box data table related to the long press release is set (step S711). As a result, a liquid crystal command indicating that the long press is released is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, whereby the decorative symbol display device 208 has a chance button indicating, for example, the effect button 136. An effect may be displayed to the effect that the long press on the image has been released. It should be noted that the effect display of the long press release in the long press effect and the effect display of the long press release during the long press auto continuous striking may be different or the same. Further, in response to the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, according to the part data corresponding to the set box data table, the output of the sound effect by the speaker 120 and various lamps 418 are performed according to the effect display of the long press release. It may be possible to enhance the effect by blinking with.

If the CPU 404 does not determine in step S709 that the long press operation has ended (step S709: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S711.

Returning to FIG. 90A, after executing the chance button operation state determination process, the CPU 404 determines the decision button operation state determination process (step S607), the left button operation state determination process (step S609), and the right button operation state determination process. The process (step S611), the up button operation state determination process (step S613), and the down button operation state determination process (step S615) are sequentially executed. The contents of each process of the decision button operation state determination process, the left button operation state determination process, the right button operation state determination process, the upper button operation state determination process, and the lower button operation state determination process are described in the above-mentioned chance button operation state determination process. Since it is the same as the processing, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the CPU 404 ends this process after executing various button operation-related processes (step S617).

Next, various button operation-related processes executed in the effect system operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 92. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of various button operation-related processes executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the various button operation-related processes shown in FIG. 91.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S801). The CPU 404 ends this process when the initial operation flag is not ON (step S801: No), but when the initial operation flag is ON (step S801: Yes), various buttons (effect button 136, operation keys) Assuming that the unit 137) is pressed, the power saving state during the customer waiting demonstration is released (step S803). The power saving state is configured to shift after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses without displaying the symbol variation or pressing various buttons after the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed. Specifically, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 100 is reduced by turning off the various lamps 418 or lowering the brightness, or lowering the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, it may not shift to a power saving state. In addition, the power saving state is canceled when one of the various buttons is operated, but the power saving state can be canceled even when two or more buttons are operated at the same time. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the power saving state is not released when two or more buttons are operated at the same time. Further, the power saving state may be released only when only one button is operated for a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated independently (step S805). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is being operated independently (step S805: Yes), the CPU 404 terminates this process after executing the button pressing process (step S807). The details of the button press processing will be described later.

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is being operated independently (step S805: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the determination button 137e is being operated independently (step S809). When the CPU 404 determines that the decision button 137e is operated independently (step S809: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the button press process described later (step S811), and then executes the decision button operation setting display process. (Step S813), this process is terminated. The details of the setting display process when the enter button is operated will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the determination button 137e is operated independently (step S809: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the right button 137d is operated independently (step S815). When the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is operated independently (step S815: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the button pressing process described later (step S817), and then executes the right button operation setting display process. (Step S819), this process is terminated. The details of the setting display process when operating the right button will be described later.

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is being operated independently (step S815: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the left button 137c is being operated independently (step S821). When the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is being operated independently (step S821: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the button pressing process described later (step S823), and then executes the left button operating setting display process. (Step S825), this process is terminated. The details of the setting display process when operating the left button will be described later.

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the left button 137c is being operated independently (step S8211: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the upper button 137a is being operated independently (step S827). When the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated independently (step S827: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the button pressing process described later (step S829), and then executes the upper button operation setting display process. (Step S831), this process is terminated. The details of the setting display processing when the upper button is operated will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the upper button 137a is operated independently (step S827: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the lower button 137b is operated independently (step S827: No) (step S827: No). Step S833). When the CPU 404 determines that the lower button 137b is being operated independently (step S833: Yes), the CPU 404 executes a button pressing process (step S835), which will be described later, and then executes a lower button operating setting display process. (Step S837), this process ends. The details of the setting display processing when the lower button is operated will be described later.

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the lower button 137b is being operated independently (step S833: No), it determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are being operated (step S839). .. When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are being operated (step S839: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the button pressing process described later (step S841).

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are being operated (step S839: No), it determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are being operated. (Step S843). When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are being operated (step S843: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the button pressing process described later (step S845).

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are being operated (step S843: No), whether or not the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are all operated. (Step S847). If the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are being operated (step S847: Yes), after executing the button pressing process described later (step S849), this process. To finish. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are being operated (step S847: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S849. ..

Next, the button press processing executed in the various button operation-related processes and the various button long-press operation-related processes described later will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the button press processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect for which the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is being accepted is being executed (step S901). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect during operation acceptance is being executed (step S901: No), the CPU 404 ends this process, and if it determines that the effect during operation acceptance is being executed (step S901: No). Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for one-time operation of the button (step S903). The effect determined here is not limited to the effect of actually urging the button to be pressed. For example, the effect of urging the button to be pressed is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, the effect of urging the button to be pressed) is not performed. It also includes an effect in which a predetermined effect (back button effect) is executed when the effect button 136 or the like is operated.

When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for one-time operation of the button (step S903: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the operation process once (step S905). .. Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for one-time operation of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is required in the effect being executed. For example, when an effect that requires one operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the effect being executed is an effect for one operation of the button, provided that the effect button 136 is operated once. It is configured to determine that. The details of the one-time operation process will be described later.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for one-time operation of the button (step S903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for repeated button presses. (Step S907). It should be noted that the effect determined here is not limited to the effect of actually urging the button to be repeatedly pressed, and for example, the effect of urging the button to be repeatedly pressed is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, It also includes an effect in which a predetermined effect (back button repeated press effect) is executed when the effect button 136 and the like are repeatedly pressed.

When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for repeatedly hitting a button (step S907: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the continuous hit operation process (step S909). Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for repeatedly hitting a button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is required in the effect being executed, for example. , When an effect requesting the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is executed, it is determined that the effect being executed is an effect for the continuous striking of the button on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated once. It is configured as follows. The details of the continuous striking operation process will be described later.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for repeatedly hitting a button (step S907: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button (step S907: No). Step S911). It should be noted that the effect determined here is not limited to the effect of actually urging the long press of the button. For example, the effect of urging the long press of the button is not performed, but a predetermined button ( For example, an effect in which a predetermined effect (back button long press effect) is executed when there is a long press operation of the effect button 136 or the like is also included.

When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the long-press operation process (step S913). Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is required in the effect being executed. For example, when an effect that requires a long press operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the effect being executed is an effect for long press of the button, provided that the effect button 136 is operated once. It is configured to determine. The details of the long press operation process will be described later.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for long-pressing the button (step S9111: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the other button operation process (step S915). .. The details of other button operation processes will be described later.

In step S917, the CPU 404 transmits a liquid crystal command corresponding to the box set in the one-time operation process, the continuous hit operation process, the long press operation process, or the other button operation process to the second sub-control unit 500, as will be described later. Later (step S917), this process ends.

Next, the one-time operation process executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 95. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the one-time operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the one-time operation process.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect of a single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of a single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: Yes), the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing the effect that the chance button has been operated. Then (step S1003), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1005), the process of step S1031 shown in FIG. 95 is executed. In this process, when other buttons are operated at the same time in addition to the effect button 136, the operation of the effect button 136 itself is treated as invalid, but it is treated as valid. It may be.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect of a single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: No), the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. Whether or not it is determined (step S1007). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1009). .. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing the effect that the chance button is operated is set, and when the right button 137d is operated, the right button 137d is set. When the right button operation box for executing the effect of being operated is set and both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, it means that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. A button operation box is set to execute the effect of. In this process, when other buttons (for example, upper button 137a, etc.) are operated at the same time in addition to the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the operation itself of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is invalid. Although it is treated as being valid, it may be treated as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. In that case, one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. Even if this is done, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated.

Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are in the operated state (step S1011). When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are being operated (step S1011: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1013), the step shown in FIG. 95. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1011: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1013. The button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON, and the button operation flag of the right button 137d is OFF. It may be configured so that the process of step S1033 described later is executed when the two button operation flags are turned ON.

Further, when the CPU 404 determines in step S1007 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: No), the effect being executed is the effect button 136 and the left button. It is determined whether or not the effect is the simultaneous operation of 137c (step S1015). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1017). .. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing the effect that the chance button is operated is set, and when the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. When the left button operation box for executing the effect of being operated is set and both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, it means that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. A button operation box is set to execute the effect of. In this process, when another button (for example, lower button 137b, etc.) is operated at the same time in addition to the effect button 136 and the left button 137c, the operation itself of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c is invalid. Although it is treated as being valid, it may be treated as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. In that case, one of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c is operated. Even if this is done, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated.

Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are in the operated state (step S1019). When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are being operated (step S1019: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1021), the step shown in FIG. 95 The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are not operated (step S1019: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1021. The button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON, and the button operation flag of the left button 137c is OFF. It may be configured so that the process of step S1033 described later is executed when the two button operation flags are turned ON.

Further, when the CPU 404 determines in step S1015 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: No), the effect being executed is as shown in FIG. 95. Is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set. (Step S1025). For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing the effect that the chance button is operated is set, and when the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. A left button operation box for executing the effect of being operated is set, and when the right button 137d is operated, a right button operation box for executing the effect of operating the right button 137d is set. It is set. Further, when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, a button operation box for executing the effect that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated is set, and the effect button 136 is set. When both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing the effect that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated is set, and the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the left button 137c are set. When all of the right button 137d is operated, a button operation box for executing the effect that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated is set. In this process, in addition to the effect button 136, the left button 137c and the right button 137d, when another button (for example, the enter button button 137e, etc.) is operated at the same time, the effect button 136, the left button 137c And the operation of the right button 137d itself is treated as invalid, but it may be treated as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated. In that case, the effect button 136, the left button 137c and the right button 137d may be performed. Even if any one or two of the buttons are operated, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is operated when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated. Is configured to be set.

Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are in the operated state (step S1027). When the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S1027: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1029), step S1031 Executes the processing of. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1027: No), the process of step S1031 is performed without executing the process of step S1029. Execute. The button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON, and the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated. The flag may be left OFF, and the process of step S1033 described later may be executed when the three button operation flags are turned ON.

In step S1031, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the button operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S1031). When the CPU 404 determines that the button operation flag is ON (step S1031: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the operation valid period end process (step S1033). Specifically, the CPU 404 sets a box for ending the operation valid period even before the operation valid period ends, and then ending the effect of accepting the button operation. Based on the set box, the CPU 404 transmits a liquid crystal command to the second sub-control unit 500 to end the reception of the button operation. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 displays that the acceptance of the button operation is finished, and then returns to the first sub-control unit 400 and transmits a command. If the reception of the button operation is continued until the operation valid period ends, the process of ending the operation valid period may not be performed.

Next, the continuous striking operation process executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the continuous striking operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for continuous striking by the effect button 136 (step S1101). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for continuous striking by the effect button 136 (step S1101: No), the CPU 404 ends this process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for continuous hitting by the effect button 136 (step 1101: Yes), the CPU 404 performs a continuous hit effect lottery and sets the result (step S1103). Specifically, for example, whether or not to increase the continuous striking meter displayed in the continuous striking effect for urging the player to repeatedly strike the effect button 136, and if it is to be increased, the amount of the increase is determined by lottery. Set the box according to the result. Then, a liquid crystal command corresponding to the increase amount of the continuous hit meter is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an increase display of the continuous hit meter in an manner corresponding to the liquid crystal command (the 0th mode). ).

Here, an example applicable to the mode of the continuous hitting effect lottery will be described.

(First form)
The validity / invalidity of the operation may be determined by comparing the comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation valid period with the interval at which the player operates the button. For example, if the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.5 seconds, and finally the effect button 136 is operated. From 1 to 0.5 seconds, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is determined to be invalid, and if the effect button 136 is operated after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, it is determined to be valid. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.3 seconds, and the effect is produced until 0.3 seconds have elapsed since the last operation of the effect button 136. Even if the button 136 is operated, it is determined to be invalid, and if the effect button 136 is operated after 0.3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined to be valid. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the comparison time C is set to 0.1 seconds, and the effect button 136 is used until 0.1 seconds have elapsed since the last operation of the effect button 136. Even if there is an operation, it is determined to be invalid, and if the effect button 136 is operated after 0.1 seconds have elapsed, it is determined to be valid.

(Second form)
Further, the operation is effective by comparing the comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation valid period to the first player operation and the interval at which the player operates the effect button 136. The invalidity may be determined. For example, if the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled at 0.5 second intervals, and at other timings. Disable the operation. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled at intervals of 0.3 seconds from the initial operation, and the operation at other timings is invalidated. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled at 0.1 second intervals from the initial operation, and the operation at other timings is invalidated.

(Third form)
Further, in the production lottery (continuous hitting effect lottery) of the operation effect in which the continuous hitting operation or the long-press auto-continuous hitting operation can be performed, the progress pattern of the continuous hitting effect effect is larger than the progress pattern of the long-pressed automatic continuous hitting effect ( For example, the increase amount of the continuous striking meter reaches 70% of the entire meter in 5 operations in the continuous striking operation, whereas it does not increase to 70% of the entire meter in the long press auto continuous striking unless the liquid crystal command is transmitted 7 times. Etc.), and vice versa.

(Fourth form)
In addition, the amount of increase due to the continuous striking operation and the long-press auto continuous striking operation changes according to the elapse of the operation valid period (for example, the increase amount increases / decreases as the operation effective period elapses). You may.

(Fifth form)
Further, depending on the number of times the effect button 136 is operated during the predetermined determination period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the operation valid period (for example, 10 seconds) of the continuous hitting effect, the remaining after the determination period ends in the operation valid period. A lottery table for determining whether or not to execute the effect according to the operation in the period (for example, 8 seconds) may be selected, and the effect execution lottery may be performed based on the selected lottery table. For example, the effect execution may be performed. If the lottery is won, the effect according to the operation is executed, and if the result is not won, the effect according to the operation may not be performed. More specifically, for example, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 during the determination period is 5 or more, a low-probability lottery table having a low probability of winning in the effect execution lottery is set, and the operation of the effect button 136 during the determination period is set. If the number of times is less than 5, by setting a high-probability lottery table with a high probability of winning in the production execution lottery, it may be possible to fully enjoy the production content even for players who are not good at repeated hitting operations. .. On the other hand, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is 5 or more, a high-probability lottery table is set, and if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is less than 5, a low-probability lottery table is set. Therefore, it may be possible to make the player who has actively performed the continuous striking operation more entertaining. In addition, even in the determination period, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to perform the effect according to the operation. In this case, the lottery table referenced in the predetermined period may be the same as or different from any of the lottery tables referenced in the remaining period. Further, the effect may be performed according to all the operations. In this case, in the effect according to the operation performed in the determination period, for example, the effect can be performed until the meter reaches the threshold value (for example, the meter can be increased to a certain value). May be good. Here, the lottery table described above is a table for drawing whether or not the effect can be executed, but it may be configured as a table for determining the amount of change in the effect by lottery.

(6th form)
Further, in the effect of operating one or more buttons at the right time in the operation valid period (sometimes referred to as "timing operation effect"), the effect period (may be the operation valid period, for example, 15 seconds). The remaining period (for example, the number of times the button is operated during the period when the timing of the corresponding button operation is judged to be good) during the predetermined judgment period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start is determined. It may be configured to determine the operation validity period of the timing operation effect in (10 seconds). For example, when the number of times a button is operated in a timely manner during the judgment period is three or more, the period in which the timing of the corresponding button operation is judged to be good is set as the first judgment period, and the timing is good during the judgment period. If the number of button operations is less than 3 and the period for judging that the timing of the corresponding button operation is good is the second judgment period, the second judgment period is better than the first judgment period. By setting for a long time, it may be possible to fully enjoy the content of the production even for a player who is not good at timing operation. On the other hand, by setting the first judgment period longer than the second judgment period, it may be possible to entertain the player who is good at timing operation. Further, the period for determining that the timing of the operation of the corresponding button in the determination period is good may be the same as or different from either the first determination period or the second determination period. Here, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set longer than the first determination period and the second determination period, the player can practice the timing operation in the determination period, and the timing It may be possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the operation production. On the other hand, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the judgment period is set shorter than both the first judgment period and the second judgment period, the operation becomes easier as the timing operation effect progresses, so that the timing operation is gradually performed. It may be possible to make you think that you have improved. Further, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set between the first determination period and the second determination period, the timing operation effect can be determined by the skill of the player, and the timing operation can be performed. It may be possible to satisfy both a player who is not good at timing and a player who is good at timing operation.

In the present embodiment, it may be applied only to any one of these 0th to 6th embodiments, and a plurality of types of continuous striking effects are prepared and implemented according to the type of continuous striking effects. May be different.

Subsequently, the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing the effect that the effect button (chance button) 136 has been operated (step S1105). Then, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation based on the first operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1107). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect button 136 is being pressed.

When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1107: Yes), after setting the time T1 until the next transmission of the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting in the predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1107: Yes) Step S1109), this process ends. In the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted is set to, for example, 500 ms, but can be set to any time. As a result, if the time T1 is long-pressed during the execution of the effect for continuous striking, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed without pressing the button again. There is.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, when it is determined that the long press auto-continuous hitting is in progress (step S1107: No), the CPU 404 then transmits a liquid crystal command for auto-continuous hitting. After setting the time T2 until the operation is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1111), this process ends. In the present embodiment, the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted is set to, for example, 100 ms, but can be set to any time. As a result, during the execution of the effect for continuous striking, if the long press is continuously maintained and the time T2 elapses, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed without pressing the button again. It has become.

The continuous striking operation process in the present embodiment is executed only for the continuous striking operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button of the operation key unit 137 (up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, determination. The repeated hitting operation process may be executed for the button 137e).

Next, the long press operation process executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of a long press operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step S1201). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step S1201: No), the CPU 404 ends this process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step 1201: Yes), the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation based on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect button 136 is being pressed.

When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1203: Yes), the CPU 404 sets the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted in the predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1205). ), End this process. In the present embodiment, the time T3 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted is set to, for example, 100 ms, but can be set to any time. As a result, during the execution of the long press effect, the long press of the time T3 is performed, so that the effect can be performed assuming that the long press of the effect button 136 is started.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, when it is determined that the effect button 136 is being pressed for a long time (step S1203: No), the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated. The chance button operation box for executing the effect of is set (step S1207). Then, after setting the time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted to the predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1209), this process ends. In the present embodiment, the time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted is, for example, 231 ms, but can be set to any time. As a result, during the execution of the effect for long press, when the long press is continuously maintained and the time T4 elapses, the effect in which the long press of the effect button 136 is maintained can be performed. In the present embodiment, the time T4 set in step S1209 is configured so that the same time (231 ms) is set each time, but the set time may vary each time it is set.

The long-press operation process in the present embodiment is executed for the long-press operation effect by the effect button 136, and each button of the operation key unit 137 (up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, The long press operation process may be executed for the enter button 137e).

Next, other button operation processes executed in the button press processing will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of other button operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation is the operation of the determination button 137e of the operation key unit 137 (step S1301). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the decision button 137e is performed (step S1301: Yes), after setting the decision button pressing box for executing the effect that the decision button 137e has been operated (step S1303), This process ends.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation is not the operation of the decision button 137e (step S1301: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation is the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the right button 137d (step S1305: Yes), after setting the right button pressing box for executing the effect that the right button 137d has been operated (step S1307), This process ends.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation is not the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation is the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the left button 137c (step S1309: Yes), after setting the left button pressing box for executing the effect that the left button 137c has been operated (step S1311), This process ends.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation is not the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation is the operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the upper button 137a is performed (step S1313: Yes), after setting the upper button pressing box for executing the effect that the upper button 137a has been operated (step S1315), This process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation is not the operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313: No), it is assumed that the operation is the operation of the lower button 137b, and the lower button is pressed to execute the effect that the lower button 137c has been operated. After setting the box (step S1317), this process ends.

Next, the setting display process at the time of the decision button operation executed in the various button operation related processes will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the setting display process at the time of operation of the decision button executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the power-on related process is being executed (step S1401). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the returning display ends. When the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1401: No), the CPU 404 ends this process. In the present embodiment, the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen, which will be described later, are not displayed from the time the power is turned on until the restoration display ends. It should be noted that the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed so that the volume setting and the brightness setting can be performed even after the power is turned on until the restoration display ends.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is not being executed (step S1401: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is hidden (step S1403). That is, the CPU 404 does not display the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen as shown in FIG. 115 (e) in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, the symbol variation display, the jackpot game, or the like. Determine if it is in a state. When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is non-display (step S1403: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is displayed (step S1403: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume / brightness setting mini icon is displayed (step S1405). Specifically, the CPU 404 clearly or suggests to the player that the volume setting and the brightness can be set by operating the operation key unit 137, for example, during the customer waiting demo display displayed in the standby state. Determine if the icon is displayed. Even when such an icon is not displayed, the process of step S1405 is not necessary if the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen is displayed if a predetermined operation is performed. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini icon is displayed (step S1405: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini icon is not displayed (step S1405: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1407). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208, the current brightness of various lamps 418, and the brightness setting screen for displaying the set brightness are displayed. In the present embodiment, the brightness setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b. When the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen, which will be described later, are configured to be displayed at the same time, it is not necessary to separate the types of setting screens to be displayed depending on the type of button. This brightness setting screen is erased when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating each button of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137. When the CPU 404 determines that the luminance setting screen is displayed (step S1407: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after setting the liquid crystal command for displaying the luminance setting screen as it is (step S1409). That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the luminance setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time as it is.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1407: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the volume setting screen for displaying the set volume are displayed. In the present embodiment, the volume setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. This volume setting screen is erased when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating each button of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after setting the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is (step S1413). That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the volume setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time as it is.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1411: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation setting screen is displayed (step S1415). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines, for example, whether or not the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen displayed during the symbol variation display is displayed. When the CPU 404 determines that the setting screen for changing the symbol is displayed (step S1415: Yes), the CPU 404 sets a liquid crystal command for hiding the setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Later (step S1417), this process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is not displayed (step S1415: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S1417.

Next, the right button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a right button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Since the left button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes also performs the same process as the right button operation setting display process, the description of the right button 137d is replaced with the description of the left button 137c. As a matter of fact, the description will be omitted.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the power-on related process is being executed (step S1501). When the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1501: No), the CPU 404 ends this process.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is not being executed (step S1501: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is hidden (step S1503). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is non-display (step S1503: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is in the non-demo state (step S1505). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the customer waiting demo display is being performed in the standby state. When the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S1505: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after setting the liquid crystal command for displaying the symbol variation setting screen (step S1507). That is, the CPU 404 sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen displayed during the symbol variation display. The brightness setting screen may be displayed together with the volume setting screen. Further, only the brightness setting screen may be displayed, or a setting screen other than the volume and brightness may be displayed.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demo state (step S1505: No), the CPU 404 ends this process after setting the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1509).

Further, when the CPU 404 determines in step S1503 that the setting display is not hidden (step S1503: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume / brightness setting mini icon is displayed (step S1511). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini icon is displayed (step S1511: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after setting the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1513). ..

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini icon is not displayed (step S1511: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515). When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the brightness setting screen update process (step S1517). In the present embodiment, when the right button 137d (left button 137c) is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is set, but the right button 137d (left button 137c) is set. May make it impossible to set the brightness. The details of the brightness setting screen update process will be described later.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1515: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the volume setting screen update process (step S1521). The details of the volume setting screen update process will be described later.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1519: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation setting screen is displayed (step S1523). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S1523: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the volume setting screen update process (step S1525). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is not displayed (step S1523: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S1525.

Next, the luminance setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. 101 (a). FIG. 101 (a) is a flowchart of the luminance setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 executes the user luminance setting operation process (step S1601). Here, the details of the user luminance setting operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 101 (b). FIG. 101B is a flowchart of the user luminance setting setting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the luminance volume knob (step S1701). Specifically, for example, the value indicated by the luminance volume knob is acquired based on the signal output from the luminance volume knob (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160. The brightness volume knob is, for example, a knob for changing the brightness by a game clerk. That is, the brightness volume knob can be said to be a volume knob for setting the brightness master. The luminance volume knob may not be provided. In this case, the process as in step S1701 may not be executed. Further, one volume knob may be provided, and the volume knob may be used to unify the function of the volume volume knob and the function of the brightness volume knob, which will be described later.

Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the luminance volume knob is 0 (step S1703). When the CPU 404 determines that the value of the luminance volume knob is 0 (step S1703: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the value of the luminance volume knob is not 0 (step S1703: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not this operation is an operation for increasing the luminance (step S1705). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation is the operation of the upper button 137a or the right button 137d.

When the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation for increasing the brightness (step S1705: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the brightness being set is the maximum value (step S1707). That is, when the brightness can be set in 10 steps of 1 to 10, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the brightness being set is 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness being set is the maximum value (step S1707: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness being set is not the maximum value (step S1707: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715 after increasing the brightness by one step (step S1709).

Further, when the CPU 404 determines in step S1705 that the current operation is not an operation for increasing the brightness, that is, an operation for lowering the brightness (for example, an operation of the lower button 137b or the left button 137c) ( Step S1705: No), it is determined whether or not the brightness being set is the minimum value (step S1711). That is, when the brightness can be set in 10 steps of 1 to 10, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the brightness being set is 1. When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness being set is the minimum value (step S1711), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, if it is determined that the brightness being set is not the minimum value (step S1711: No), the brightness is lowered by one step (step S1713), and then the process of step S1715 is executed.

In step S1715, the CPU 404 ends this process after performing a resetting process for updating the brightness setting display changed as described above (step S1715). Here, when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen is kept in a hidden state. Even when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the brightness setting can be changed and the set brightness can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in this way.

Returning to FIG. 101 (a), when the CPU 404 executes the user luminance setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the luminance setting screen is erased (step S1603), the luminance setting display update process is performed. finish. Here, the timer setting until the brightness setting screen is erased is a process of resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting a liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including.

Next, the volume setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart of the volume setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 executes the user volume setting operation process (step S1801). Here, the details of the user volume setting operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). FIG. 101B is a flowchart of a user volume setting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the volume volume knob (step S1901). Specifically, for example, the value indicated by the volume volume knob is acquired based on the signal output from the volume volume knob (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160. The volume volume knob is, for example, a knob for changing the volume by a game clerk. That is, the volume volume knob can be said to be a volume knob for setting the volume master. The volume volume knob may not be provided. In this case, the process of step S1901 may not be executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the volume volume knob is 0 (step S1903). When the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume volume knob is 0 (step S1903: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume volume knob is not 0 (step S1903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not this operation is an operation to raise the volume (step S1905). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation is the operation of the right button 137d or the upper button 137a.

When the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation for raising the volume (step S1905: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907). That is, when the volume can be set in 10 steps of 1 to 10, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume being set is 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is not the maximum value (step S1907: No), the CPU 404 raises the volume by one step (step S1909) and outputs data for outputting a sound effect for increasing the volume. After setting (step S1911), the process of step S1919 is executed. As a result, every time the volume raising operation is performed, a sound effect indicating that the volume has been raised is output from the speaker 120.

Further, when the CPU 404 determines in step S1905 that the current operation is not an operation to increase the volume, that is, an operation to decrease the volume (for example, an operation of the left button 137c or the operation of the lower button 137b) ( Step S1905: No), it is determined whether or not the volume being set is the minimum value (step S1913). That is, when the volume can be set in 10 steps of 1 to 10, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume being set is 1. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the minimum value (step S1913), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume being set is not the minimum value (step S1913: No), the volume is lowered by one step (step S1915), and after setting the data for outputting the sound effect for volume reduction. (Step S1917), the process of step S1919 is executed.

In step S1919, the CPU 404 ends this process after performing a resetting process for updating the volume setting display changed as described above (step S1919). Here, when the value of the volume volume knob is 0, the volume setting screen is kept in a hidden state. Even when the value of the volume volume knob is 0, the volume setting screen may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the volume setting can be changed and the set volume can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in this way.

Returning to FIG. 102 (a), when the CPU 404 executes the user volume setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the volume setting screen is erased (step S1603), the volume setting display update process is performed. finish. Here, the timer setting until the volume setting screen is cleared is a process of resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and sending a liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including. The time until the volume setting screen is erased (timer) and the time until the brightness setting screen is erased (timer) are set to be the same time, but one time is configured to be longer than the other time. You may be.

Next, the upper button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the upper button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Since the lower button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes also performs the same process as the upper button operation setting display process, the description of the upper button 137a is replaced with the description of the lower button 137b. As a matter of fact, the description will be omitted.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the power-on related process is being executed (step S2001). When the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S2001: No), the CPU 404 ends this process.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is not being executed (step S2001: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is hidden (step S2003). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is non-display (step S2003: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is in the non-demo state (step S2005). If the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S2005: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demo state (step S2005: No), the CPU 404 ends this process after setting the liquid crystal command for displaying the luminance setting screen (step S2007).

Further, when the CPU 404 determines in step S2003 that the setting display is not hidden (step S2003: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume / brightness setting mini icon is displayed (step S2009). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini icon is displayed (step S2009: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after setting the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2011). ..

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini icon is not displayed (step S2009: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013). When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013: Yes), the CPU 404 terminates this process after executing the brightness setting screen update process shown in FIG. 101 (a) (step S2015). ..

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S2013: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017: Yes), the CPU 404 terminates this process after executing the volume setting screen update process shown in FIG. 102 (a) (step S2019). .. In the present embodiment, when the upper button 137a (lower button 137b) is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is set, but the upper button 137a (lower button 137b) is set. May not be able to set the volume.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S2017: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation setting screen is displayed (step S2021). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S2021: Yes), after resetting the timer until the symbol changing setting screen is erased (step S2023), this process. To finish. The setting screen for changing the symbol is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without operating each direction button of the operation key unit 137, but the process of step S2023 is executed. The display time of the setting screen for changing the symbol is reset.

Next, the button long press process will be described. FIG. 104A is a flowchart of a button long press process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This button long press process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85 (a).

The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 first initializes the operating state of the operating means (step S2101). The CPU 404 subsequently clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S2103).

After that, the CPU 404 executes the chance button long press operation state determination process (step S2105).

Here, the chance button long press operation state determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (b).

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as a chance button is in a long-pressed operation (step S2201). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is being pressed and held by detecting that the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port is continuously ON.

When the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 has been long-pressed (step S2201: Yes), the CPU 404 updates the operation status of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 to the long-pressed state (step S2203). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 has been pressed for a long time (step S2201: No), the CPU 404 ends this process.

Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205). Specifically, the CPU 404 is set in the time T1 and T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking set in the continuous striking operation process shown in FIG. 96 is transmitted, and in the long press operation process shown in FIG. 97. It is determined whether or not the time T3 and T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted has elapsed.

When the CPU 404 determines that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after turning on the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 (step S2207). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S2207.

Returning to FIG. 104 (a), after executing the chance button long press operation state determination process, the CPU 404 performs the decision button long press operation state determination process (step S2107) and the left button long press operation state determination process (step S2109). , Right button long press operation state determination process (step S2111), up button long press operation state determination process (step S2113), down button long press operation state determination process (step S2115) are sequentially executed. In addition, each process of the decision button long press operation state judgment processing, the left button long press operation state judgment processing, the right button long press operation state judgment processing, the up button long press operation state judgment processing, and the down button long press operation state judgment processing Since the content is the same as the above-mentioned chance button long press operation state determination process, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the CPU 404 ends this process after executing various button long press operation-related processes (step S2117).

Next, various button long press operation-related processes executed in the button long press process will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of various button long press operation-related processes executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S2301). When the command transmission flag is not ON (step S2301: No), the CPU 404 ends this process, but when the command transmission flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), the effect button (chance button) 136 is independent. It is determined whether or not the operation is performed in (step S2303). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is being operated independently (step S2302: Yes), the CPU 404 terminates this process after executing the button pressing process shown in FIG. 93 (step S2305).

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is being operated independently (step S2303: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the determination button 137e is being operated independently (step S2307). When the CPU 404 determines that the decision button 137e is being operated independently (step S2307: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the button pressing process described above (step S2309).

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the decision button 137e is being operated independently (step S2307: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the right button 137d is being operated independently (step S2311). When the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is being operated independently (step S2311: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the button pressing process described above (step S2313).

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is being operated independently (step S2311: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the left button 137c is being operated independently (step S2315). When the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is being operated independently (step S2315: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the button pressing process described above (step S2317).

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the left button 137c is operated independently (step S2315: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the upper button 137a is operated independently (step S2319). When the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is being operated independently (step S2319: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the button pressing process described above (step S2321).

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the upper button 137a is operated independently (step S2319: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the lower button 137b is operated independently (step S2323). When the CPU 404 determines that the lower button 137b is being operated independently (step S2323: Yes), the CPU 404 ends this process after executing the button pressing process described above (step S2325). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the lower button 137b is being operated independently (step S2323: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S2325.

In the present embodiment, for example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is required during the effect for one operation, the effect for repeated hits, the effect for long press, and the display of various setting screens, the effect button 136 In addition to that, if the right button 137d is also operated at the same time, and if a button other than the button for which the operation is requested is further operated, all operations are treated as invalid, but they are invalid. For example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is required and the right button 137d is operated at the same time in addition to the effect button 136, the effect button 136 may be treated as valid. May be treated as being manipulated.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 107 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 107, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a general drawing are shown. Hold lamp 216 is shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (a), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, the default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal symbol and the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1. , It becomes the notification area during the symbol change of the special figure 2. While the symbol of the normal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the normal figure is changing, the quadrangle figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but while the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing, the round figure is blinking or turned off. The triangular figure is lit and displayed while the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, but the triangular figure is blinked or turned off while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing. As described above, not only the display position of the fourth symbol is different, but also the display mode (here, the shape) is different, so that the player can distinguish at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 107 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special drawing 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

The hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. .. The number of holds of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lights of special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the number of holds of special figure 2 is the number of lights of special figure 2 hold lamp 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon, and in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the hold icon.

In FIG. 107 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 107 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 107 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special drawing 2 starting port 232. Because it is. The hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the hold icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display the line defining the area, but in FIG. 107 (a), the area is shown. Is shown with a dotted line for the sake of clarity. A line defining the area may be provided, or a line defining the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (gaming state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular patternless and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, but also the display mode ( The shape) is also different here, so that the player can distinguish at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → blinking start or turn off of the fourth symbol → movement animation start or erase of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 107 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet.

In FIG. 107 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 107 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 107 (e), the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but it is still displayed at this stage. The variable display of decorative icons has not started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 107 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 107 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, when the effect button 136 is valid for a valid period (hereinafter, this valid period is referred to as a "second operation valid period"). The operation promotion notification image 136P prompting the user to press the image is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. As described above, the operation promotion notification image 136P can be said to be an example of the operation display relating to the operation means.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 107 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 107 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 107 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "It's a chance" are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. Even if the effect button 136 is not pressed within the valid period, the display as shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be performed, or the display as shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed. May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (j). This also applies to the effect for one-time operation, the effect for repeated hits, and the effect for long press. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach state entry notice image 2071 functions as a second operation result display. Further, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, "operation result display" may be referred to as "operation response display".

In FIG. 107 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 107 (l). Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the reach state may be entered without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 107 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced to be displayed, and in FIG. 107 (n). , Has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (n) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (o) follows the duel between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation of the scene is displayed.

It should be noted that the reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to super reach.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 107 step by step.

In FIG. 108 (p) following from FIG. 107 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 108 (s). In FIG. 108 (s), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 108 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of hiding, a different background image may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. (U), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a background image different from the conventional one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for which the 15R probability variation jackpot is confirmed is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 108 (v) is lit. In FIG. 108 (v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 108 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of "probability change big hit" is made together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

On the other hand, when a different decorative symbol (substantially 5R probability variation jackpot, 5R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, and symbol combination) is reached in FIG. 107 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 108 (t). In 108 (u'), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in FIG. 108 (v') following FIG. 108 (u'), "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration" is displayed. The combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "6-Decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 108 (w') following FIG. 108 (v'), as a big hit game start effect, the characters "big hit" are displayed together with the background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

FIG. 109 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 108 (q).

In FIG. 109 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 107 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 109 (b). In FIG. 109 (b), the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 109 (c), as in FIG. 108 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 109 (d), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (e), the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 lights up, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the period of the final display of the special figure 1, the erasure animation of the variable icon h0 is executed in the variable icon display area 280. In the figure (f), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, the erasing animation continues in the figure (g), and the variable icon h0 disappears completely in the figure (h). The erasure animation of the variable icon h0 may be executed before the final display of the special figure 1 is performed.

Next, an example of the operation result for each game state generated by the operation of the effect button and each button of the operation key unit 137 in the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 110A is a diagram for explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the symbol variation display is not performed, and FIG. 110B is a diagram showing the symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the above, and FIG. 3C is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button during a big hit game.

As shown in FIG. 110A, when the production button 136 (chance button) is operated during the customer waiting demo display (animation demo display) by animation in the standby state, the animation demo display is stopped and the design demo is displayed. Move to the display. The symbol demo display is a display or the like showing a variation display result of the decorative symbol displayed at the end. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol demo is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, the demo effect corresponding to the operation is displayed. Here, in the demo effect, for example, when a plurality of types of effect modes can be executed, the effect mode is changed, a character appears, an effect is displayed, and a game method is explained. It is an effect display that starts an explanation. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol demo is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume or brightness after the setting is fixed and the setting screen is deleted.

Further, when the enter button 137e is operated while the setting screen is hidden in the standby state, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, when the enter button 137e is operated while the setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the display time of the displayed setting screen (volume setting screen or brightness setting screen) is reset to extend the display.

Further, when the right button 137d is operated while the setting screen is hidden in the standby state, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the right button 137d is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. When the right button 137d is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased to become brighter.

Further, when the left button 137c is operated while the setting screen is hidden in the standby state, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. If the left button 137c is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered to become dark.

Further, in the standby state, when the upper button 137a is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the upper button 137a is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased. If the upper button 137a is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

Further, when the lower button 137b is operated while the setting screen is hidden in the standby state, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. If the lower button 137b is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 136 during the symbol variation display, the effect according to the operation is performed. Specifically, the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for one operation, the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for repeated hits, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for long press. The production etc. will be performed according to. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period of the effect button 136 during the symbol variation display, no operation result is obtained. In the present embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the same time in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, any operation result is obtained. It is configured so that it will not be done. Further, even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, an effect may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or a sound effect may be output according to the operation of the effect button 136. .. At this time, the effect may be unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display.

Further, if the enter button 137e is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, when the enter button 137e is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume after the setting is fixed and the displayed setting screen is hidden.

Further, when the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

Further, when the left button 137c is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

Further, if the upper button 137a is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the upper button 137a is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the display time of the symbol variation setting screen being displayed is reset to extend the display.

Further, if the lower button 137b is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, when the lower button 137b is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the display time of the symbol variation setting screen being displayed is reset to extend the display.

Further, when the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated within the operation valid period for accepting the operation during the symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, when both the effect button 136 and the direction key are pressed at the same time during the execution of the effect for one operation that requires the operation of the effect button 136 and the direction key, the effect corresponding to the effect, etc. Is done. Further, when both the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated during the symbol variation display and outside the operation valid period, no operation result is obtained. Even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 are blinked, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with an effect, and a sound effect is output according to the operation of both the effect button 136 and the direction key. You may do so. At this time, the effect may be unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display.

As shown in FIG. 110 (c), if the effect button 136 is operated during the jackpot game and within the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 136, the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for one operation, the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for repeated hits, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for long press. The production etc. will be performed according to. Further, if the effect button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period of the effect button 136 during the big hit game, no operation result is obtained. In the present embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the same time in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, any operation result is obtained. It is configured so that it will not be done. Further, even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, an effect may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or a sound effect may be output according to the operation of the effect button 136. .. At this time, the effect may be unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display.

Further, if the enter button 137e is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the enter button 137e is operated while the setting screen (volume setting screen or brightness setting screen) is being displayed during the big hit game, the volume or brightness after the setting is confirmed and the displayed setting screen is displayed. You want to hide.

Further, when the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the right button 137d is operated while the volume setting screen is being displayed during the big hit game, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. If the right button 137d is operated during the jackpot game and the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased to become brighter.

Further, when the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. If the left button 137c is operated during the jackpot game and the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered to become dark.

Further, when the upper button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the upper button 137a is operated during the jackpot game and the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased. If the upper button 137a is operated while the volume setting screen is being displayed during the big hit game, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

Further, when the lower button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated during the jackpot game and the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. If the lower button 137b is operated while the volume setting screen is being displayed during the big hit game, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

In addition, if the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during the jackpot game and other than the jackpot round (for example, during the pre-big hit production, during the inter-round production, during the jackpot end production, etc.), any operation result will be obtained. Not done. Further, when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during the big hit game, the BGM song output during the big hit game is changed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs are prepared as BGM output during the jackpot game. For example, each time the effect button 136 + left button 137c is operated, "song 1"-"song 3"-"song" The selected song can be changed in the opposite direction, such as "2"-"Song 1".

Further, if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated in a game other than the jackpot round, no operation result is obtained. Further, when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the big hit game, the BGM song output during the big hit game is changed. More specifically, each time the production button 136 + right button 137d is operated, it is selected in the forward direction, such as "song 1"-"song 2"-"song 3"-"song 1". You can change songs.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 111 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The production example shown in FIG. 111 is an production example that may be executed in a part of the production performed from FIGS. 107 to 109.

FIG. 111 (1) corresponds to FIG. 107 (o), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. As shown in FIG. 111 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the setting screen is hidden. In the present embodiment, while it is shown that the "decoration 7" is reaching, the three decorative symbols are also variablely displayed at the lower left of the display screen. For example, at the timing when the special figure is stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time by the combination of the symbols corresponding to the display result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, three decorative symbols displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen are stopped and displayed at the same time, but for example, the stop display may be performed in the order of left, right, and middle. ..

At this time, when the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the symbol changing setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, red or the like) while being operated. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in another light emitting mode (for example, blue). Similarly, when the left button 137c is operated, the setting screen for changing the symbol is displayed. The setting screen for changing the design is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the setting screen for changing the symbol functions as an example of the volume setting display. Further, the symbol changing setting screen displayed by operating the right button 137d or the left button 137c may be said to be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. The setting screen for changing the pattern is arranged and displayed on the layer in front of the layer on which the effect display is performed. Therefore, while the setting screen for changing the symbol is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display. According to the volume gauge VG, it is shown that the volume is the third stage out of the five stages.

When the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 111 (4) while the setting screen for changing the symbol is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 111 (5). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is in the fourth stage. In the present embodiment, the volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated once. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated while the volume gauge VG indicates that it is in the third stage, the volume is lowered by one stage, and the volume gauge VG is in the second stage accordingly. It will change to the display indicating that. In this way, the volume gauge VG that changes and displays when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated while the symbol change setting screen is displayed is an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. You may be able to do it. In the present embodiment, only the volume can be set while the symbol is fluctuating, but the brightness setting, the effect mode, the BGM, and the like may be set. When the right button 137d (left button 137c) is long-pressed, the auto-repeat function is activated for the long-pressed period, and the volume is increased by one step at predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). It may be configured to (decrease), or it may be configured so that the volume does not increase (decrease) unless the auto-repeat function is activated and the operation is performed once. Further, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is fixed to the set value and the symbol changing setting screen is deleted. It may be. In addition to this, for example, on the password input screen, the input password may be fixed by operating the effect button 136. That is, in this case, it can be said that the effect button 136 functions as a first operating means for making various settings.

FIG. 111 (6) corresponds to FIG. 108 (p), and the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, after that, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (7), the effect (first effect) of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image urging both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated at the same time within the valid period. To. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 which is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 which is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar indicating the remaining time of the valid period. 136P2 is included. At this time, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed as an operation waiting animation. Here, the operation waiting animation is, for example, an animation in which a button repeatedly retracts or protrudes. Here, the still image may be used without displaying the animation waiting for operation. The timing shown in FIG. 111 (8) is before the start of the operation valid period, and even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid. The operation promotion notification image may be configured to be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period starts. Here, the operation valid period is a period in which the period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is valid and the period in which the operation of the right button 137d is valid overlap. For example, one of the buttons first. When the valid period of the operation is started and then the valid period of the operation of the other button is started, the overlapping period is also included in the operation valid period referred to here. Further, the effect of the continuous striking operation or the effect of the long press operation may be performed during the valid period of the operation started earlier, and the effect of adding the simultaneous operation of two or more buttons as it is may be performed. On the contrary, the validity period of the operation of one button and the validity period of the operation of the other button overlap first, and then the validity period of the operation of one (the other) button ends and the validity period of the operation of the other (one) ends. An effect may be performed so that the valid period of the button operation continues. For example, after the effect of simultaneously operating two or more buttons is performed, the effect of operating one (the other) button is continuously performed. You may perform the production of the composition such as. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display including the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 may be referred to as an example of the first operation display relating to the operations of both the first operation means and the second operation means. ..

Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (10), as shown in FIG. 111 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated at the same time, as shown in FIG. 111 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The display screen may be hidden. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing an effect display (first operation result display) in which the effect movable body 225 is shining. That is, the operation result is produced. The effect button 136 and the right button 137d emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, red or the like) while being operated. As a result, it is notified in advance that the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit. In addition, even if the result of the symbol variation display does not become a big hit, it may be performed so that the degree of expectation for the big hit is high. Here, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is not limited to the case where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing, and the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is pressed. Needless to say, this also includes the case where the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is pressed. That is, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d may be pressed. It should be noted that the effect of simultaneous operation as shown in FIG. 111 (12) may be started only when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. Further, if one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is not operated within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after being pressed, it may not be treated as a simultaneous operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect is produced by the effect movable body 225 by simultaneously operating the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, but even if the effect is not performed simultaneously within the operation valid period, the effect movable body 225 is used. It is configured so that the production may be performed. If the simultaneous operations are not performed within the operation valid period, the effect by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed. Further, the content of the effect to be executed may be different depending on whether the simultaneous operation is performed within the operation valid period and the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation valid period. For example, within the operation valid period. If the simultaneous operation is performed, the effect with high expectation for the big hit is performed, and if the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the effect with low expectation for the big hit is performed. It may be done or vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is suggested that the larger the number of buttons requesting the operation, the higher the expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display. As a result, as the number of buttons increases, the player may have a higher expectation for a big hit and the interest of the game may be improved. That is, it can be said that the display shown in FIG. 111 (8) and the like functions as the change notice. In addition, regardless of the number of buttons requesting operation, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variation display may be the same. In addition, it may be performed as a look-ahead notice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (13), the animation of the duel scene is resumed, and in FIG. 111 (14), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and then, as shown in FIG. 111 (15). At the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed by shaking. Further, in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the three decorative symbols are still displayed in a variable manner.

In the present embodiment, the brightness is not set during the symbol variation display, but the brightness may be set. The setting method in this case can be performed in the same manner as the volume setting. For example, in the case of the brightness setting, the up button 137a and the down button 137b are operated to set the symbol during the change of the brightness setting. The screen may be displayed and the brightness may be set, and the brightness may be changed by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. That is, the symbol changing setting screen displayed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation, and the symbol changing setting screen may be displayed. The luminance gauge that fluctuates and displays when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is operated in the displayed state may be said to be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation.

FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect in the effect shown in FIG. 111. Here, FIGS. 112 (a1) to 112 (a5) show the case where only one of the buttons is operated while the effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed. 112 (b1) to FIG. (B5) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 112 (a1) to 112 (a5), and FIG. 112 (c1). )-In the figure (c5), when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed, one button is operated first and the other is maintained in that state. An example of the effect when the button of is operated is shown.

FIG. 112 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 111 (10). At this time, if the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 112 (a2), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is not as shown in FIG. 112 (a3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed. Here, even if the right button 137d is operated, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 may not change. If the right button 137d is operated during the execution of the symbol variation display, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set, but the button operation is performed in order to perform an effect such as a notice. From the start of the display prompting (button operation promotion display) to the end of the symbol variation display, the display of the symbol variation setting screen is prohibited and the volume is not set. That is, from the timing of FIG. 111 (7) to the end of the symbol variation display, the volume setting is prohibited. It should be noted that the volume setting may be prohibited only while the button operation promotion display is being performed. Further, the volume setting may be prohibited only from the start of the button operation promotion display to the end of the operation result effect.

After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 112 (a4), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode during operation to the display mode during non-operation as shown in FIG. 112 (a5). The mode has changed, and the operation result is not yet produced.

FIG. 112 (b1) is also a display corresponding to FIG. 111 (10), but the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. At this time, if the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 112 (b2), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is not changed as shown in FIG. 112 (b3). The display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, but the operation result effect is not performed. Further, since both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated at the same time, the operation validity period continues, and the right button image 137dP1 as well as the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1. The corresponding remaining time display bar 136P2b also displays that the meter continues to decrease even though the right button 137d is operated.

After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 112 (b4), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode during operation to the display mode during non-operation as shown in FIG. 112 (b5). The mode has changed, and the operation result is not yet produced.

FIG. 112 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 111 (10). At this time, if the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 112 (c2), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is not changed as shown in FIG. 112 (c3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (c4), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is started as shown in FIG. 112 (c5). This also applies when only the effect button 136 is operated first and the right button 137d is operated in that state. That is, even when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated or held down and the other button is operated, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. The same result as in the case (execution of operation result production) can be obtained.

FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. 111. Here, FIGS. 113 (a1) to 113 (a2) show the case where only one of the buttons is operated while the effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed. 113 (b1) to FIG. (B2) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (8), and FIG. 113 (c1). )-Fig. (C2) shows other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (8).

FIG. 113 (a1) shows a state in which only the right button 137d is pressed and held without operating the effect button 136. Therefore, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 has changed from the display mode during non-operation to the display mode during operation. After that, for example, when the remaining 1/3 of the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 113 (a2), the effect button image 136P1 seems to vibrate with the character display "Please also press the chance button". Animation display (vibration animation display) is started, and a display that further prompts the operation of the button that has not been operated is performed. The start timing of the vibration animation display is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a predetermined time (for example,) after one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. The vibration animation display may be started when 3 seconds) have elapsed. The vibration animation display ends when the corresponding button (in FIG. 113 (a2), the effect button 136) is operated. In this way, when a predetermined time elapses while only one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the display (vibration animation display) is different from the normal display (operation waiting animation display). ) May be performed.

FIGS. 113 (b1) to 113 (b2) correspond to FIGS. 111 (7) to (8), but in FIG. 113 (b2), the right button image 137dP1 is not displayed and only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed. Is displayed.

Further, FIGS. 113 (c1) to 113 (c2) also correspond to FIGS. 111 (7) to (8), but in FIG. 113 (c2), in addition to the right button image 137dP1 and the effect button image 136P1. , Left button image 137cP1 is further displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for the big hit is changed by changing the number of displayed button images. For example, the larger the number of displayed button images, the more the big hit. It is configured to have high expectations.

FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect shown in FIG. 111.

FIG. 114 (a) corresponds to FIG. 111 (7), and the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image urging both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated at the same time within the valid period. To. In FIG. 114 (b), as the operation promotion notification image, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period are displayed corresponding to the respective button images. Has been done. The timing shown in FIG. 114B is before the start of the operation valid period, and even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid.

Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (c), at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (d), as shown in FIG. 114 (e), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the right button 137d is operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 and the right button image 137dP1 changes to grayout display as shown in FIG. 114 (f). , The meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2b displays that the remaining time is 0. The right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b may be deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (g), the effect movable body 225 moves to a position covering the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a vibrating fanning operation is performed on the spot, and the operation result effect may be performed. It suggests that it may not be possible. In addition, the fanning operation by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (h), when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled and the effect button 136 is operated, the effect movable body 225 is a decorative symbol display device as shown in FIG. 114 (i). It may move to a position that covers the entire display screen of 208. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing the above-mentioned effect display.

In this way, the operation result effect may be performed by performing the button operation once in the order of the right button 137d and the effect button 136 during the operation valid period. In this production example, the operation result effect may be performed by operating the two buttons once for the effect button 136 and the right button 137d regardless of the operation order, or the correct order ( For example, the operation result effect may be performed on the condition that the button operation is performed with the right button 137d and the effect button 136). Further, the operation result effect may be performed even when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time. In this case, for example, when only the effect button 136 is operated or when only the right button 137d is operated, the effect movable body 225 performs the fanning operation in the manner shown in FIG. 114 (g), and the effect button is operated. When both 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 114 (i) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated but the operation result effect is not performed, the effect movable body 225 is lowered as shown in FIG. 114 (i'). It rises without any notice, and the effect of failing to operate the button once is performed. At this time, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the effect button image 136P1 changes to a grayout display, and the meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2a displays that the remaining time is 0. Become. As a result, it is notified that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d have been operated. The effect button image 136P1, the right button image 137dP1, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b may be deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (j'), the animation of the duel scene is resumed, and it is displayed that the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed. Although the display prompting the operation of the button requesting the operation is performed such as prompting the operation, for example, the display prompting the operation of the button other than the button requesting the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when requesting one operation of the effect button 136, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed, but the operation result effect is produced by operating only the effect button 136. You may try to do. In addition, a display prompting the operation of a button different from the button requesting the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when the operation of the right button 137d is requested, only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, but even if the effect button image 136P1 is operated, the operation result effect is not performed and the right button 137d is operated. In that case, the operation result effect may be performed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the operation promotion notification image is not started, and then the operation promotion notification image is deleted, so that a so-called fake effect is produced. You may do it. As a fake effect, for example, in an effect in which an operation promotion notification image is displayed when two effect button images 136P1 approach each other and overlap each other, the operation promotion notification image is displayed because the two effect button images 136P1 do not overlap. It is not displayed and the effect of button operation is not started, and the operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the target button prompting the operation is mechanically difficult to press or is displaced to the inoperable position. It is possible to create an effect that makes it impossible to press.

FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting operation using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

In FIG. 115, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a general drawing are shown. Hold lamp 216 is shown. Further, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol LED 285a for special drawing 1 and a fourth symbol LED 285b for special drawing 2 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 200. The fourth symbol LED 285a for the special figure 1 notifies whether or not the special figure 1 is undergoing a symbol change depending on the lighting mode, and the fourth symbol LED 285b for the special figure 2 is a special figure 2 depending on the lighting mode. Notifies whether or not the symbol is changing. For example, when the fourth symbol LED 285a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol LED 285b for special figure 2 blink at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 seconds) during the symbol variation display, and the display result is lost. Is configured to turn off and turn on when the display result is a big hit, but the lighting mode can be set arbitrarily, and the emission color can be changed according to the symbol variation display state. It may be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (a), a jackpot start effect indicating that the jackpot game has started is displayed. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a striking method display for urging right striking is displayed. Further, the 4th symbol LED 285a for special drawing 1 is turned off, indicating that the display result is lost, and the 4th symbol LED 285b for special drawing 2 is lit, indicating that the display result is a big hit. Has been done. That is, the big hit this time is a big hit due to the special figure a being displayed on the second special figure display device 214.

FIG. 115 (b) shows how the first round has started. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect during the big hit round. Then, "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and below the striking method display, it indicates that it is the first big hit game. "BONUS x 1" is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, a music name display MT indicating the music name of the BGM output from the speaker 120 is displayed in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 115 (c) shows how the third round is being executed. At this time, when the right button 137d (or the left button 137c) is operated once as shown in FIG. 115 (d), the volume setting is set in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 115 (e). The screen is displayed. According to the volume gauge VG on the volume setting screen, it is shown that the volume is the third stage out of the five stages. The volume setting screen may be displayed or deleted when the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated at the same time. By doing so, the player intentionally operates the screen. By doing so, the volume can be set, and it may be possible to suppress the annoyance that the volume setting screen is displayed due to an unintended operation.

Then, when the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 115 (f) while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step as shown in FIG. 115 (g). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is in the fourth stage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115 (h), when the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115 (i). , The volume is not increased or decreased, the music of BGM is changed, and the music name after the change is displayed on the music name display MT. That is, in the present embodiment, the volume cannot be changed while the effect button 136 is being operated. The volume setting screen is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the last operation of any of the direction buttons on the operation key unit 137. Here, when the effect button 136 and any of the direction buttons in the operation key unit 137 are operated at the same time, it may be assumed that the direction buttons are not operated. Further, when the effect button 136 and the direction button are operated at the same time, the volume setting screen may be deleted.

FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. ..

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 116A, one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode (round shape). It is displayed in a non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In addition to the default display mode, the hold icon can be displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode, and can also function as a look-ahead notice for the pending symbol variation display.

Further, in the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the default display mode. In addition to the default display mode, the variable icon h0 can be displayed in a notice display mode, and can also function as a notice display for the symbol change display.

As shown in FIG. 116 (b), when the right button 137d is operated once during the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 116 (a), the volume setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 116 (c). Is displayed. At this time, according to the volume gauge VG, it is shown that the volume is the fourth stage out of the five stages. In the present embodiment, even if a button to which an effect or function is not assigned according to the operation is operated, no operation result is obtained. However, for example, the button is operated. You may make an effect effect to confirm that. In addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect effect may be an effect by sound output from the speaker 120 or light emission of lamps by various lamps 418.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the operation promotion notification image 136P that urges the effect button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (d), since it is before the start of the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. On the other hand, the volume setting is valid, and the volume can be changed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. Further, since the remaining time display bar 136P2 is arranged and displayed on the layer on the back side of the volume gauge VG, it is displayed so as to overlap the volume gauge VG, which makes it difficult to see. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can use the decorative symbol or the like that is variablely displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Can be recognized as changing. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (e), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time as shown in FIG. 116 (f), FIG. As shown in 116 (g), neither the operation result effect performed by operating the effect button 136 nor the volume change is performed. That is, the operations of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are treated as invalid. The meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2 hidden in the volume gauge VG is reduced and displayed with the passage of time.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses after the last operation of the direction key, the volume setting screen is erased and the remaining time display bar 136P2 appears as shown in FIG. 116 (h). Even in this case, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid unless the operation of the right button 137d is stopped.

Next, the relationship between the operation of the effect button 136 and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 118. Here, FIG. 117 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuous striking operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during the execution of the effect for continuous striking, and FIG. 117 (B) is the effect for continuous striking. Is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the long press operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during the execution of the effect, and FIG. 3C shows the long press operation by the effect button 136 during the execution of the effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the effect display and the effect display. Further, FIG. 118 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the effect display when the effect button 136 is intermittently pressed while the effect for continuous striking is being executed, and FIG. 118 (B) is a timing chart for explaining the effect display. It is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed intermittently while the effect for long press is being executed.

In the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the effect pattern of the decorative symbol variation display according to the received command. To do. Then, in the production with the determined production pattern, a production lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute various productions. All the box data of the production contents decided to be executed by the production lottery are read out, the part data included in the read box data is stored in the RAM 408, and the liquid crystal command included in the box data is stored in the first sub-control unit 400. To the second sub-control unit 500.

The liquid crystal commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the start of the symbol variation display include, for example, a background command for specifying the background, a timer command for specifying the fluctuation time, and a number of holds. Hold number change command to be held, hold display command to specify the display position and color of the hold icon, notice command to specify the content of the notice, reach command to specify the content of reach to be executed, temporary stop to specify the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped There are a symbol command, a final stop symbol command that specifies a decorative symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the symbol is stopped, and the like. Here, the timer command includes data that can identify the effect time before reach (notice timer) and the effect time of reach (reach timer).

Then, the second sub-control unit 500 is controlled based on the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 so that the effect display designated at the designated time is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when a predetermined effect display is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command to that effect to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the control corresponding to the received return command.

When the effect for continuous striking is performed during the symbol variation, as shown in FIGS. 117 (A) and 117 (B), the liquid crystal is displayed from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing of a. When the command is transmitted, the second sub-control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the effect display for repeated hitting at the timing of c, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command to that effect to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing of d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable. It controls the movements of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also performs the operation effectively. Set the period to start. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of A1, and a liquid crystal command to that effect is issued to the first sub-control unit 400. Is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. Will be done.

After that, similarly, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C1 (E1) and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control In the unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of D1 (F1), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the effect button 136 is long-pressed and the long-press auto-continuous hitting function, the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1 and a liquid crystal command to that effect is given. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1 and displays the effect that the effect button 136 has been operated. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

After that, when the time T1 (for example, 500 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 and operates the effect button 136. The effect display to that effect is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the case of a long press operation, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the second operation has been performed by the effect button 136 unless at least the time T1 has elapsed since the operation was started. Therefore, in the case of repeated striking operations, every time the effect button 136 is operated, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 is operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated even before the period of 1 has elapsed, and more effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed than when the effect button 136 is pressed and held. It is possible to make it.

After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, each time T2 (for example, 100 ms) elapses until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted (E2, G2, I2 ... (At the timing), a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 assuming that the effect button 136 has been operated once, and the second sub-control unit 500 (F2, H2). In response to the reception of the liquid crystal command (at each timing of, J2, ...), The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. That is, in the case of a long press operation, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated until at least the time T2 has elapsed. Therefore, in the case of repeated striking operations, every time the effect button 136 is operated, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 is operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated even before the period of 1 has elapsed, and more effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed than when the effect button 136 is pressed and held. It is possible to make it.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 117 (A) and 117 (B), when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing of g, A return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 also sets the end of the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the end of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if there is a single operation of the effect button 136 and a long press operation, both of the operations are treated as invalid.

In addition, when the execution condition of the operation result effect is satisfied by the continuous striking operation or the long press auto continuous striking function at the timing before the timing of g, the second sub-control unit 500 ends the operation valid period. A return command to start the operation result effect is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the operation valid period is set to end. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end and stores it in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and the effect control is performed based on the read part data.

Further, in the first sub-control unit 400, the effect button 136 was operated during the operation valid period, and a liquid crystal command to that effect was transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, but the second sub-control unit 500 received the liquid crystal command. Occasionally, when the operation valid period has expired, the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is invalid, and displays the effect that the effect button 136 has been operated. I can't.

When the effect for long press is performed during the symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing of a, the liquid crystal command is transmitted. The second sub-control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for long press is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing of d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable. It controls the movements of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also performs the operation effectively. Set the period to start. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

After that, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of α, but at this point, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is not transmitted.

After that, when the time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing at the timing of A3. When a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B3 and presses the effect button 136. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the long press operation is being performed. That is, in the case of a long press operation, the second sub-control unit 500 recognizes that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed until at least the time T3 has elapsed since the operation was started. Can not.

After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, every time T4 (for example, 231 ms) elapses until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted (at each timing of C3, E3 ... ), Assuming that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is ongoing, a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 (D3, F3). In response to the reception of the liquid crystal command (at each timing of ...), The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 is performing a long press operation.

After that, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing of g, a return command to that effect is issued from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. Along with being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500 also sets the end of the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the end of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid.

If the execution condition of the operation result effect by the long press operation is satisfied at the timing before the timing of g, the second sub-control unit 500 ends the operation valid period and starts the operation result effect. A return command to the effect is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the operation valid period is set to end. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end and stores it in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and the effect control is performed based on the read part data.

Subsequently, the operation when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed intermittently during the execution of the effect for continuous striking will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (A). It should be noted that FIG. 118 (A) shows how the effect for continuous striking is performed during the symbol variation.

First, when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit at the timing of a, the second sub-control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the effect display for repeated hitting at the timing of c, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command to that effect to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing of d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable. It controls the movements of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also performs the operation effectively. Set the period to start. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

After that, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1 and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives B1. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command at the timing, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. The operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

After that, when the time T1 (for example, 500 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 and operates the effect button 136. The effect display to that effect is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 is released at the timing of β1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing of C2, the liquid crystal command of the button release is sent to the first sub-control unit. It is transmitted from 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of β2, the second sub-control unit 500 recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

After that, when the operation of the effect button 136 is restarted at the timing of E4, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F4, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. The operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

After that, when the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the liquid crystal command to that effect is assumed to have been operated once at the timing of G4. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of H4, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. That is, if the long press operation is temporarily interrupted during the operation valid period and the long press operation is performed again, the liquid crystal is displayed until the time T1 elapses from the start of the long press operation, as in the case of the first long press operation. No command is sent. If the long press operation is performed again during the operation valid period, the liquid crystal command may be transmitted when the time T2 has elapsed from the start of the long press operation. In addition, the liquid crystal command is transmitted when a time different from the time T2 (which may be longer or shorter than the time T2) elapses after the long press operation is restarted. May be good.

After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the effect button 136 is operated once every time T2 (for example, 100 ms) elapses until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is transmitted. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 indicates that the effect button 136 has been operated in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing of g, a return command to that effect is issued from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. Along with being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500 also sets the end of the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the end of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if there is a single operation of the effect button 136 and a long press operation, both of the operations are treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T2 elapses at the timing of g and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 as if the effect button 136 was operated once, the second sub-control unit 500 is second. At the timing of h when the sub-control unit 500 receives the command, the operation valid period has already expired, so the operation is treated as invalid.

Subsequently, the operation when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed intermittently during the execution of the effect for long press will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (B). Note that FIG. 118 (B) shows how a long press effect is performed while the symbol is changing.

First, when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit at the timing of a, the second sub-control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for long press is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing of d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable. It controls the movements of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also performs the operation effectively. Set the period to start. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

After that, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of α1, but at this point, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is not transmitted.

After that, when the time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing at the timing of A3. If there is, a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 is performing a long press operation.

After that, when the time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 continues at the timing of C3. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D3, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 is performing a long press operation.

On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 is released at the timing of γ1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing of C3, the liquid crystal command of the button release is sent to the first sub-control unit. It is transmitted from 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of γ2, the second sub-control unit 500 recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

After that, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started again at the timing of α2, and when the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted elapses, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing at the timing of E5. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F5, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 is performing a long press operation.

After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is being continued every time the time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted elapses. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs a long-press operation by the effect button 136 in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display to that effect is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing of g, a return command to that effect is issued from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. Along with being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500 also sets the end of the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the end of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T4 elapses at the timing of G5 and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 on the assumption that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing. At the timing when the second sub-control unit 500 receives the command, the operation valid period has already expired, so that the long press operation is treated as invalid.

Next, an example of the effect for continuous striking in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. Here, FIG. 119 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect for continuous striking centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect for continuous striking. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for continuous hitting centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 step by step.

FIG. 119 (a) shows how the panda entered the reach state and developed into a super reach (panda group invasion reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (a), it is shown that the “decoration 7” is in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are variablely displayed at the lower left of the display screen.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), after the effect display of the appearance of innumerable pandas rushing in is performed, the effect button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 119 (c). By repeatedly hitting, the characters "Kill all pandas by hitting the button repeatedly" are displayed, suggesting that the mission may be completed and a big hit may be achieved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to repeatedly press the effect button 136 to defeat all the pandas within the operation valid period. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 119 (d) is the state before the operation valid period (first operation valid period) starts, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. The character "preparation" to that effect is displayed, and then the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (e). At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "100 more" indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is 100.

Then, for example, at the timing of A1 in FIG. 117 (A), when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 119 (f), the effect is produced from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. When a liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (g). As shown, it is updated to the character display of "98 more" indicating that two pandas have been defeated. The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases with the passage of time. As described above, in the effect for continuous striking, an effect display in which the number of remaining pandas to be defeated decreases in response to the operation of the effect button 136 may be an example of the first effect display.

After that, for example, at the timing of C1 in FIG. 117 (A), when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 119 (h), the effect is produced from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. When a liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows FIG. 119 (i). As shown, it is updated to the character display of "72 more" indicating that 26 pandas have been defeated.

After that, for example, at the timing of E1 in FIG. 117 (A), when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 119 (j), the effect is produced from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. When a liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (k). As shown, it is updated to the character display of "50 more" indicating that 22 pandas have been defeated.

Then, in response to the continuous striking operation by the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated decreases, as shown in FIG. 119 (l). , The effect button 136 is operated after the update display to the character display of "one more" indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one, and before the operation validity period ends. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 is updated to the character display of "0 more bodies" indicating that all the pandas have been defeated, and as shown in FIG. 119 (n). In addition to the effect that the character of the bancho throws the panda away, it is notified that all three "decoration 7" will be a big hit. That is, in this effect example, since the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous striking operation is satisfied, the effect as shown in FIGS. 119 (m) to 119 (n) as the operation result effect (first result display). The display is done.

On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous hit operation, as shown in FIG. 119 (m'), the character of the bancho is knocked out by the panda and the effect is lost. At the same time, "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed to notify that the player is lost. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 119 (m') is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c) to 119 (m), the "button repeated hits" suggesting that the mission may be achieved and a big hit may be achieved by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. The character display "Defeat all pandas with" is displayed, and a series of displays that prompts you to defeat all pandas within the operation valid period by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136 may be called a continuous hit operation display. is there.

FIG. 120 shows the same effect as that of FIG. 119, but shows a state in which a continuous hit operation using the long press auto continuous hit function by the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

Since FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (e) are the same as those of FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, for example, at the timing of A1 (first timing) in FIG. 117 (B), when the operation of the effect button 136 is started as shown in FIG. 120 (f) (that is, the length of the effect button 136). When the pressing operation is started), a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second is performed at the timing of B1 in FIG. 117 (B). When the sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is updated with the character display of "98 more" indicating that two pandas have been defeated, as shown in FIG. 120 (g). .. The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases with the passage of time.

After that, at a timing before the elapse of the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained (for example, the timing of D1 in FIG. 117 (A)), the first Since the liquid crystal command from the 1 sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated has not been updated as shown in FIG. 120 (h).

After that, while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, at the timing of C2 (second timing) in FIG. 117 (B), the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted has elapsed. Then, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 received the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 in FIG. 117 (B), and the decorative symbol display device 208 defeated 26 pandas as shown in FIG. 120 (i). It is updated to the character display of "72 more bodies" indicating. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is transmitted functions as an example of the first time.

After that, at a timing before the elapse of the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained (for example, the timing of F1 in FIG. 117 (A)), the first Since the liquid crystal command from 1 sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated has not been updated as shown in FIG. 120 (j).

After that, while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, when the timing of E2 in FIG. 117 (B) and the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is operated elapses, the effect button 136 is released. A liquid crystal command indicating that the operation has been performed once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 received the liquid crystal command at the timing of F2 in FIG. 117 (B), and the decorative symbol display device 208 defeated 22 pandas as shown in FIG. 120 (j). It is updated to the character display of "50 more bodies" indicating. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is transmitted functions as an example of the second time.

Then, in response to the continuous press operation by the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated decreases as the time T2 elapses. As shown in 119 (l), when the time T2 elapses after the update display to the character display of "one more" indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one, the decoration In the symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 120 (m), the character display is updated to "0 more bodies" indicating that all the pandas have been defeated, and as shown in FIG. Along with the effect that the character throws the panda away, it is notified that all three "decoration 7" will be a big hit. That is, in this effect example, since the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous striking operation is satisfied, the effect as shown in FIGS. 119 (m) to 119 (n) as the operation result effect (first result display). The display is done.

On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous hit operation, as shown in FIG. 119 (m'), the character of the bancho is knocked out by the panda and the effect is lost. At the same time, "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed to notify that the player is lost. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 119 (m') is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

Next, an example of the effect for long pressing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. Here, FIG. 121 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect for long pressing centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

FIG. 121 (a) shows how the player entered the reach state and developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (a), it is shown that the “decoration 7” has reached the reach state, and at the lower left of the display screen, three decorative symbols are variablely displayed. An animation of the duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed.

In FIG. 121 (b), the animation of the duel scene continues. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (c), the effect for long press by the effect button 136 is started. At this time, the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2. The timing shown in FIG. 121 (c) is before the start of the operation valid period (second operation valid period), and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

Then, when the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (d), the character display of "long press" is performed to promote the long press operation of the effect button 136. After that, for example, at the timing of α (third tying) in FIG. 117 (C), as shown in FIG. 121 (e), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started, but at this point, the effect The liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is not operated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used until the time T3 for transmitting the long-pressed liquid crystal command while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (f), the same display mode as in FIG. 121 (d) is maintained.

After that, when the time T3 elapses and the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing of A3 in FIG. 117 (C), it is shown in B3 in FIG. 117 (C). At the timing, in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 121 (g), the display image of the lord displayed above the display screen is enlarged, while the display image of the swordsman is reduced, and the lord is displayed. A display is made to show that it is slightly superior. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display in which the display screen of the lord displayed above the display screen is enlarged while the display image of the swordsman is reduced may be an example of the second effect display. Further, in the present embodiment, the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted functions as an example of the third time.

After that, the time T4 elapses while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, and for example, at the timing of C3 in FIG. 117 (C), a liquid crystal command indicating that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and at the timing shown in D3 in FIG. 117 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 121 (h). , While the display screen of the lord displayed above the display screen is further enlarged, the display image of the swordsman is further reduced, and a display is performed to show that the lord is considerably superior.

Then, in response to the continuous press and hold operation of the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the display image of the lord gradually expands as time T4 elapses, and then, after that, When the execution condition of the operation result effect (second result display) by the long press operation is satisfied, for example, the effect display as shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to 111 (15) is performed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (h), the display of the operation promotion notification image that promotes the long press operation of the effect button 136 may be referred to as the long press operation display.

Next, an example of the step-up effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. Here, FIG. 122 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a step-up effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 123 is an example of the effect shown in FIG. 122. It is a figure which shows the continuation step by step, and FIG. 124 is a figure which shows the other effect example performed in the effect shown in FIG. 122.

In FIG. 122, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a normal figure hold The lamp 216, the fourth symbol LED 285a for special drawing 1 and the fourth symbol LED 285b for special drawing 2 are shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In response to this, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is also stopped and displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. Further, both the 4th symbol LED 285a for special drawing 1 and the 4th symbol LED 285b for special drawing 2 are turned off, indicating that the display result is lost.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 122 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

In FIG. 122 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11, h12, of these three special figures 1 are displayed. All of h13 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

In FIG. 122 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation is started in the first special symbol display device 212, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 122 (3), the hold icon (hold icon subject to this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 by the movement animation of the hold icon, and the change icon h0. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. It moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. At this time, the fourth symbol LED 285a for special drawing 1 starts blinking. The timing of the start of the movement animation of the hold icon may be before the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or the variation of the decorative symbol. It may be after the start of the display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two "decoration 7" are stopped and enter the reach state. At the lower left of the display screen, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 122 (5) shows how the product has evolved into a super reach (Echigoya reach). In this super reach, the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed, which suggests that catching the character of Echigoya during the reach production may lead to a more reliable reach production. This Echigoya reach is a reach that includes a step-up effect in which the effect for one operation is performed up to three times.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 122 (6), when the Echigoya reach was started, the first production for the first operation (the production of step-up 1) was started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 held a thousand boxes. It is displayed that the character of Echigoya is being chased by the character of the main character, Tonosama.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display for prompting the operation of the effect button 136 within the valid period. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At this time, the operation waiting animation is displayed on the effect button image 136P1. It should be noted that the timing shown in FIG. 122 (7) is before the start of the operation valid period, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (8), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 122 (9), FIG. 122 (10) As shown in the above, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect is performed to the effect that the effect for the first operation is successful and the effect is shifted to the effect for the second operation. The effect shown in FIG. 122 (10) is also displayed when the effect button 136 is not operated before the operation valid period ends, but when the operation valid period ends without any operation, the effect is displayed. A different effect (for example, an effect such as the display shown in FIG. 124 (a1) described later and then the display shown in FIG. 122 (10)) may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (11), the second production for the first operation (the production of step-up 2) is started, and in the decorative design display device 208, the character of Echigoya holding a thousand boxes is the main character. The appearance of being chased by the character of is displayed again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display for prompting the operation of the effect button 136 within the valid period. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At this time, the operation waiting animation is displayed on the effect button image 136P1. It should be noted that the timing shown in FIG. 122 (12) is before the start of the operation valid period, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 122 (14), FIG. 122 (15) shows. As shown in the above, the decorative symbol display device 208 is produced to the effect that the effect for the second first operation is successful and the effect is shifted to the effect for the third first operation. The effect shown in FIG. 122 (15) is also displayed when the effect button 136 is not operated before the operation valid period ends, but when the operation valid period ends without any operation, the effect is displayed. A different effect (for example, an effect such as the display shown in FIG. 124 (b1) described later and then the display shown in FIG. 122 (15)) may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (16), the third production for the first operation (the production of step-up 3) was started, and in the decorative design display device 208, the character of Echigoya holding a thousand boxes was the main character. The appearance of being chased by the character of is displayed again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display for prompting the operation of the effect button 136 within the valid period. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At this time, the operation waiting animation is displayed on the effect button image 136P1. It should be noted that the timing shown in FIG. 123 (17) is before the start of the operation valid period, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (18), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 123 (19), FIG. 123 (20) As shown in the above, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect that the character of the lord has caught the character of Echigoya is performed, so that the effect that the effect for the third operation is successful is notified. The effect shown in FIG. 123 (20) is also displayed when the effect button 136 is not operated before the operation valid period ends, but when the operation valid period ends without any operation, the effect is displayed. A different effect (for example, an effect such as the display shown in FIG. 124 (b1) described later and then the display shown in FIG. 123 (20)) may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (21), since the decorative symbol display device 208 succeeded in producing the effect for one operation three times, it is shown that the display shifts to the special reach, which is an advanced reach of the super reach. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the dark display, leaves the decorative symbol displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen, and makes other displays difficult to see. As shown in 123 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display indicating that the swordsman reach, which is an example of the special reach, is started.

As described above, the effect for the first operation can be said to be an example of the first continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the second operation. Further, the effect for the second one-time operation can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the first one-time operation, and the effect for the third one-time operation. In this relationship, it can be said to be an example of the first continuous production display. Further, the effect for the third one-time operation can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the second one-time operation.

FIGS. 124 (a1) to 124 (a3) are diagrams stepwise showing an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 122 (9). FIGS. 124 (a1) to 124 (a3) show an example of an effect when the first operation effect fails.

FIG. 124 (a1) shows that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the first operation effect period, or the character of Echigoya escapes after the operation valid period ends. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the first operation effect has failed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol that was variablely displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen temporarily stops at "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" and shakes. The state of fluctuation is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (a3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" even in the center of the display screen, and it may be lost. Be notified.

FIGS. 124 (b1) to 124 (b2) are diagrams stepwise showing an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 122 (14). FIGS. 124 (b1) to 124 (b2) show an example of an effect when the second operation for the first operation fails.

FIG. 124 (b1) shows a state in which the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the second operation valid period, or after the operation valid period ends, the character of Echigoya puts a thousand boxes and runs away. Is displayed to produce. That is, it is notified that the second operation for the first operation has failed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by the “decoration 7” is formed again, and for example, a normal reach is performed. The reach is not limited to the normal reach, and a reach effect other than the normal reach (for example, long reach, super reach, etc.) may be performed.

FIGS. 124 (c1) to 124 (c3) are diagrams stepwise showing an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 123 (19). FIGS. 124 (c1) to 124 (c3) show another example of the effect when the third operation for the first operation is successful.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c1), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows the character of the lord wearing sunglasses and riding a motorcycle to chase after the character of Echigoya. The effect shown in FIG. 124 (c1) is for the third one-time operation after the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the third one-time operation effect, or after the operation valid period ends. A notification is made that the production was successful, but at this time, instead of the production that the character of Echigoya was caught as shown in Fig. 123 (20), the character of the lord is the character of Echigoya as shown in FIG. It is a production that shifts after the production that indicates that the player continues to chase around, and is a premium production (the production of step-up 4) that is confirmed to be a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the full rotation reach and fluctuates and displays at a low speed while maintaining a state in which three of the same decorative symbols are lined up.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (c3), the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed to be a big hit.

Next, the relationship between the effect content and the operation of the effect button 136 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. Here, FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the effect button 136, and FIG. 126 shows the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect button 136. It is a figure explaining the relationship with operation.

In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 has an operable position (first position) that can be pressed by the player by driving the effect button drive motor 434 in order to improve the effect, and the player. It can be displaced from the inoperable position (second position) where the pressing operation by is impossible. The operable position is the position where the effect button 136 is most protruding, and the inoperable position is the position where the effect button 136 is most recessed. The inoperable position is, for example, a position where the upper end edge of the flange-shaped flange provided at the upper end of the cylindrical button case surrounding the side wall of the button body of the effect button 136 and the upper surface of the button body are flush with each other. The upper surface of the button body may be recessed from the upper end edge of the flange portion. The condition for displacing the effect button 136 to the inoperable position is, for example, a case where the pressing of the effect button 136 is restricted in order to operate another effect button. After the effect button 136 is displaced to the inoperable position, when the button return condition is satisfied, the effect button drive motor 434 is driven to perform the initial position return control for returning the effect button 136 from the inoperable position to the operable position. At this time, for example, the player may be pushing the effect button 136 and may not be able to recover due to the pressing pressure. As a result, when the drive time of the effect button drive motor 434 elapses, the effect button 136 cannot return to the operable position and remains in the inoperable position. After that, for example, every time a return condition such as the start of the symbol variation display is satisfied, the initial position return control is performed, so that it is possible to avoid maintaining such a situation. .. In the state where the effect button 136 is maintained in the inoperable position, it is determined that the effect button 136 is in the ON state. Therefore, for example, during the execution of the effect for long press or the effect for continuous striking, the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time. It is determined that the operation has been performed, and during the execution of the effect for one operation, it is not determined that the effect button 136 has been operated unless there is an operation from OFF to ON, so that it is practically impossible to operate. Become.

FIGS. 125 (a1) to 125 (a3) show an example in which the initial position return control is performed at the start of the symbol variation display.

FIG. 125 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state of being displaced to the inoperable position and not returning in the previous symbol variation display.

FIG. 125 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (2). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the detection state of the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, it is detected by the effect button initial position sensor 427 that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 acquires the detection result so that the effect button 136 is initially set. Determine that you are not in position. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is a position after the power-on operation (initial operation) performed at the time of power-on is performed.

After that, the CPU 404 drives the effect button drive motor 434 by executing the initial position return process for returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, and the effect button 136 is moved to the initial position as shown in FIG. 125 (a3). Be returned. Note that FIG. 125 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (3). The timing at which the initial position return process is executed and the initial position return operation is started may be before the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol or at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It may be after the start of the decorative pattern variation display.

FIGS. 125 (b1) to 125 (b3) show an example in which the initial position return control is performed when the above-mentioned Echigoya reach is being performed.

FIG. 125 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (10). That is, it is informed that the process shifts to the step-up 2 effect. At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state of being displaced to the inoperable position and not returning.

FIG. 125 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (11). That is, it is shown that the effect of step-up 2 (second continuous effect display) has started. The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 detects the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 to the effect that the effect of step-up 2 has started. Determine the state. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, it is detected by the effect button initial position sensor 427 that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 acquires the detection result so that the effect button 136 is initially set. Determine that you are not in position.

After that, the CPU 404 drives the effect button drive motor 434 by executing the initial position return process for returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, and as shown in FIG. 125 (b3), for the second first operation. The effect button 136 is returned to the initial position before the operation valid period in the effect of is started. That is, the effect button 136 is controlled to be returned to the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Note that FIG. 125 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (12). The timing at which the initial position return process is executed and the initial position return operation is started is not limited to the above, and for example, a return command indicating that the operation promotion notification image is displayed is issued to the first sub-control unit 400. The initial position return operation may be started based on the reception. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial position return process is executed in the effect of step-up 2, but the initial position return process is executed in the effect of step-up 1, the effect of step-up 3, and the effect of step-up 4. You may do so.

FIGS. 126 (a1) to 126 (a3) show an example in which the initial position return operation is not performed even though the step-up effect in the above-mentioned Echigoya reach is performed.

FIG. 126 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (4). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state of being displaced to the inoperable position and not returning.

FIG. 126 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (5). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 to the effect that the effect of step-up 1 has started, but the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command. Since the part data for performing the initial position return operation corresponding to the return command is not set, the effect button 136 remains in the inoperable position without performing the initial position return operation.

FIG. 126 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (8). As described above, since the effect button 136 does not perform the initial position return operation in step-up 1, as shown in FIG. 126 (a3), the effect button is displayed while the effect of step-up 1 is performed. 136 remains in the inoperable position. Further, when the operation valid period is started, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emitting mode indicating that the chance button lamp 138 is being operated, but the effect button 136 cannot be operated as described above. In this case, the light emitting mode of the chance button lamp 138 may not be emitted in the light emitting mode indicating that the light emitting mode is being operated. For example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off.

FIGS. 126 (b1) to 126 (b4) show the effect button 136 when the character of Echigoya escapes in the effect of step-up 1 shown in FIGS. 126 (a1) to 126 (a3). An operation example is shown.

FIG. 126 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state of being displaced to the inoperable position and not returning.

FIG. 126 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a2). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position.

FIG. 126 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a3). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. As described above, in this effect example, when the first operation effect fails, the initial position return operation is not performed in the symbol variation display. In this production example, the operation when the first first operation effect fails is described, but there is also a case where the second first operation effect or the third first operation effect fails. Similarly, the initial position return operation may not be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b4), when the hold is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, the initial position return operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 125 (a2) to 125 (a3). Will be done.

In the present embodiment, after the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs the initial position return operation, it is determined from the detection result of the effect button initial position sensor 427 whether or not the effect button 136 is in the initial position. However, if it is determined that there is no such thing, a predetermined retry control is performed. Specifically, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position as a result of performing the first initial position return operation, the CPU 404 performs the second initial position return operation. This is repeated until it is determined that the effect button 136 is in the initial position, and the effect button 136 is not in the initial position even though the initial position return operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the fifth time). If it is determined that there is a problem in the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button drive motor 434 is disabled until the power is cut off so that the effect button 136 is not driven.

In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is displaced to the first position where the button protrudes and the second position where the button is recessed, but these, the first position and the second position. The position can also be rephrased as the first state and the second state. For example, the second position (second state) may be a position that protrudes further than the first position (first state), and the effect button 136 is hardened and difficult to press. It may be in a state, the effect button 136 may be softened and easily pressed, or it may be in a vibrating state without being pressed, or inside the effect button 136. In the case where the movable body is housed, the state in which the movable body rotates or moves may be set as the second state.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 143.

FIG. 127 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 127 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, and while both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are required to be operated, only the right button 137d is operated. It shows the state of the production performed in the case. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 127 (1) to 127 (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 111 (1) to (10), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (10), as shown in FIG. 127 (11), of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. When only the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 127 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate, and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also performed. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed when the operation result is not produced (that is, the operation result effect is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. Here, the right button image 137dP1 may be erased while the right button 137d is being operated. As a result, it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not yet been performed because the remaining time is continuously displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 127 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect being performed. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 127 (14) to 127 (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 127 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). It should be noted that the above-mentioned operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. An operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed. This also applies to the above description, and the same applies to the following description.

FIG. 128 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 128 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, and while both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are required to be operated, only the effect button 136 is operated. It shows the state of the production performed in the case. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 128 (1) to 128 (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 111 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (9), of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (10), as shown in FIG. 128 (11). When only the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 128 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate, and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also performed. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed when the operation result is not produced (that is, the operation result effect is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be deleted while the effect button 136 is being operated. As a result, it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not yet been performed because the remaining time is continuously displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 128 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect being performed. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 128 (14) to 128 (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 128 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15).

FIG. 129 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 129 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, but the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. It is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 129 (1) to (7) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 111 (1) to (7), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 129 (7), after the simultaneous operation (first effect) of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started, as shown in FIG. 129 (8). On the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed. In addition to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, the operation promotion notification image corresponds to the remaining time display bar 136P2a and the right button image 137dP1 corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 instead of the remaining time display bar 136P2. The remaining time display bar 136P2b is included. Both the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 are displayed so that the meter decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (10), as shown in FIG. 129 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated at the same time, the operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 129 (12). In this production example, in the operation result production, a confirmation sound for notifying the jackpot confirmation is output from the speaker 120. Here, the definite sound may not be output, or the definite sound may be output without fail. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the display shown in FIGS. 129 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). As described above, in this production example, when the definite sound is output from the speaker 120, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be definitely displayed than when the definite sound is not output from the speaker 120.

In this production example, the operation result effect is produced when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, but one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed during the operation valid period. The operation result may be produced even when the other button is operated within a predetermined time after the button is operated. Here, it is preferable that the predetermined time is set to an appropriate time as an error (allowable range) of simultaneous pressing, but in the pachinko machine 100, it is necessary to perform the simultaneous operation with one hand because the game ball is launched. There are cases where there is a problem, and it is preferable to use it in such cases. Further, in this case, the operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the above-mentioned operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed. That is, during the operation valid period, the first operation result effect is performed by simultaneously operating the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, and the first operation result effect is produced by operating either the effect button 136 or the right button 137d. A device that is configured to produce a second operation result effect other than that can be included in the present invention.

FIG. 130 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 130 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. Although both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are required to be operated, only the effect button 136 is operated. It shows the state of the production performed in the case. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 130 (1) to 130 (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (10), as shown in FIG. 130 (11), of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. When only the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 130 (12), the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without the operation result effect, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed. , Both are displayed according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be deleted while the effect button 136 is being operated. In this case, the display of the remaining time bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 may be continued. As a result, it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not yet been performed because the remaining time is continuously displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2a. Further, the remaining time display bar 136P2a may be erased together with the effect button image 136P1. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 130 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect being performed. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 130 (14) to 130 (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 130 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

FIG. 131 is a modification of the production example shown in FIG. 130. Specifically, in FIG. 131, after the operation validity period was started, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d were requested to be operated, whereas a button different from the requested button was operated. The situation of the case is shown.

First, as shown in FIG. 131 (11'), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, as shown in FIG. 131 (12'), the operation result effect is not performed and the operation is performed. The promotion notification image may be continuously displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, the type is different from the above-mentioned operation result effect (for example, the first operation result effect). (For example, the second operation result effect) may be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “super hot” are displayed in the center of the display area, and 10 pandas are displayed around the display area. The operation result display including the display arranged so as to surround the character display is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), even when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″), the above-mentioned operation result effect is produced. May be done. That is, in this case, it can be said that the upper button 137a, which is different from the button (right button 137d) to which the operation is instructed, corresponds to a so-called hidden command (hidden button).

In the above-mentioned effect example, an example in which the effect button 136 and other direction keys are operated is shown, but a button other than the direction keys and the effect button 136 may be operated, for example. It is configured so that at least a part of the front frame door 106 can be pressed, and when the pressing operation portion of the effect button 136 and the front frame door 106 is operated, the above-mentioned first operation result effect is not performed. Alternatively, the second operation result effect different from the first operation result effect may be performed, or the first operation result effect may be performed. Further, a lever may be provided instead of the pressing operation portion of the front frame door 106, and the operation result as described above may be obtained by operating the effect button 136 and the lever. Further, in addition to the lever, any operating means capable of pushing the structure can be applied. In each of these cases, it is possible to function as a hidden button.

FIG. 132 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect for continuous striking centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the effect example shown in FIG. 132 shows another example of the effect following FIG. 111 (6). Specifically, in FIG. 111, the above-mentioned operation result effect is performed by pressing the effect button 136 and the right button 137d at the same time, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 132, the effect button 136 and the right button are displayed. The operation result is produced as a result of repeated hits by the simultaneous operation of the button 137d.

After the display shown in FIG. 111 (6) is performed, the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) are simultaneously operated at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (1) to encourage repeated hits. Simultaneous operation including the display of "Right key and chance button repeated hits" is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image urging both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be repeatedly hit at the same time within the valid period. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 which is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 which is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar indicating the remaining time of the valid period. 136P2 is included. The operation promotion notification image has the same display mode as the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), but may have a different display mode. For example, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are repeatedly hit. Animated display may be performed. Further, the operation valid period in this effect example may be a period in which the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are requested to be pressed a plurality of times at the same time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (3), when one or a plurality of simultaneous operations are performed, the effect movable body 225 gradually moves downward as shown in FIG. 132 (4), and the effect movable body is gradually moved downward. The lower part of the 225 overlaps a part of the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the operation promotion notification image is still displayed. Each time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time, the effect movable body 225 vibrates, and when the effect is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the effect movable body is operated. The 225 may be moved downward. That is, an effect in which the effect movable body 225 vibrates each time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated can be regarded as an example of the operation result effect, and one or more of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. It can be said that the effect of moving the effect movable body 225 downward when the simultaneous operation of the times is performed is also an example of the operation result effect. That is, it can be said that the operation result effect is performed for each effect that the effect movable body 225 moves little by little by pressing the effect button 136 and the right button 137d at the same time. It should be noted that an effect different from the operation result effect may be performed. In addition, each time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated, the content of the effect is, for example, first operation result effect> second operation result effect> third operation result effect. May be configured to change each time a simultaneous operation is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (5), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are subsequently simultaneously operated once or a plurality of times, the effect is movable as shown in FIG. 132 (6). The body 225 moves further downward, and about 3/4 of the lower part of the effect movable body 225 overlaps the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (7), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated once or a plurality of times, the effect movable body 225 is performed as shown in FIG. 132 (8). Moves further downward, and the entire effect movable body 225 overlaps the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing an effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining. That is, the same effect as in FIG. 111 (12) is performed.

In this effect example, the long-press auto-continuous striking function (described later) may be enabled for the effect button 136. For example, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated before the operation valid period starts. After that, when the operation valid period is started, the operation result effect such as the effect movable body 225 vibrates is performed only for the first time, and after that, the long press auto continuous hit function is provided. The right button 137d that has not been operated may be configured so that the operation result effect is not performed unless the operation state is OFF> ON. Further, after the operation valid period is started, the operation result may be produced on the condition that the buttons required to be operated are turned OFF> ON, respectively. In such a case, the operation result may be produced. For example, when the operation valid period is started while the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is not performed unless the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated again. It may be configured in. Further, when the operation valid period is started while the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is performed every time the pseudo repeated hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. May be good. Further, when the long-press auto continuous striking function is enabled for the effect button 136, the timing at which the operation result effect is performed may be based on the timing at which the pseudo continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed. The timing at which the player operates the right button 137d for which the long-press automatic continuous striking function is not enabled may be used as a reference. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the operation result effect by arbitrarily combining these.

FIG. 133 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 133 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. In this effect example, the auto mode can be set, and when the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 is set. When a button effect that requires an operation is performed, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated, and the operation result effect is performed. That is, in this effect example, while the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, only the right button 137d is operated, but both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. It is shown that the operation result is being produced. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 133 (1) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (9), of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d as shown in FIG. 133 (11) at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (10). When only the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 133 (12). As described above, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 is controlled as if it is operated even if it is not operated. Therefore, by operating the right button 137d, the effect button is operated. It is controlled so that the operation result effect is performed assuming that both 136 and the right button 137d are operated. In this production example, the definite sound is not output, but the definite sound may be output. After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the display shown in FIGS. 133 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 133 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

FIG. 134 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 134 is an effect example corresponding to FIGS. 129 (7) to (15). In this effect example, a pseudo continuous striking operation is performed by long-pressing the effect button 136. It has a long-press auto continuous hit function. Here, the long-press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer, and the continuous press operation is the effect button 136. It is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. It should be noted that the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In this effect example, the long-press auto continuous striking function is enabled, and while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the continuous striking operation at regular intervals (for example, 200 ms intervals) is simulated. It is configured in. Further, in this effect example, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136, in order to appropriately perform the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, the long-press auto continuous hit function is the effect button 136. It is configured so that the pseudo continuous striking operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses from the start of the pressing operation of. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 134 (1) to 134 (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (7) to (10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (3), at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (4), as shown in FIG. 134 (5), after operating the effect button 136, the right button 137d Is performed. However, since the timing at which the right button 137d is operated is before the start of the pseudo continuous striking operation, the effect button 136 is in an operation invalid state. Therefore, the operation result production is not started at this timing. After that, when the pseudo continuous striking operation is started at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (6), the operation of the effect button 136 becomes effective, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 134 (7), the operation result effect is produced. As described above, in this effect example, since the long press auto continuous hit function is enabled, if the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated, both buttons are enabled. It will be delayed until the timing is reached. In this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be valid at the time when the operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, for example, when the effect button 136 is pressed and held after operating the right button 137d, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 136d is not enabled at the timing when the long press of the effect button 136 is started, and a pseudo operation is performed. It may be delayed until the timing at which the continuous striking operation is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (8), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the display shown in FIGS. 134 (9) to (10) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 134 (8) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

FIG. 135 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 135 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 134, and the long press auto continuous striking function is also effective in this effect example. In this effect example, the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated, and both buttons are operated, but the right is before the timing when the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started. The state when the operation of the button 137d is released is shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 135 (1) to 135 (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (7) to (10), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (3), at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (4), as shown in FIG. 135 (5), after operating the effect button 136, the right button 137d Is performed. However, at the timing when the right button 137d is operated, the effect button 136 is in an operation invalid state because it is a period during which the pseudo continuous striking operation is not started. Therefore, the operation result production is not started at this timing. After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (6), when the operation of the right button 137d is released before the timing at which the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is started, the effect button 136 and the right button are released. Both 137d are not in the operated state, and as shown in FIG. 135 (7), the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without the operation result effect being performed, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed. Is a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 135 (8), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect being performed. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 135 (9) to (10) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 135 (8) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 130 (13) to (15).

FIG. 136 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 136 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 133. In this effect example, when the auto mode is set, in addition to the effect button 136, the direction keys including the right button 137d are also displayed. , When a button effect that requires the operation of the direction key is performed, the operation result effect is performed even if the direction key is not operated, assuming that the direction key is operated. That is, in this effect example, the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, whereas the operation result effect is produced even when neither the effect button 136 nor the right button 137d is operated. It is shown how it will be done. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 136 (1) to 136 (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (9), when the timing shown in FIG. 136 (10) is reached, either the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is shown as shown in FIG. 136 (11). However, as shown in FIG. 136 (12), the operation result effect is produced. As described above, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are controlled as if they are operated even if they are not operated. Therefore, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d Even if none of the above is operated, it is controlled so that the operation result effect is performed assuming that the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time. In this production example, the definite sound is not output, but the definite sound may be output. Further, it is possible to appropriately set the timing at which the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are to be operated after the operation valid period is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the display shown in FIGS. 136 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 136 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 133 (13) to (15).

FIGS. 137 to 138 are diagrams stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Here, FIG. 137 is another production example continuing from FIG. 107 (e), and FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a continuation of the production example shown in FIG. 137 step by step.

FIG. 137 (a) following FIG. 107 (e) shows how the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the effect button 136 is set within the valid period (in this effect example, it may be referred to as the second valid period). The operation promotion notification image 136P prompting the user to press is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. As described above, the operation promotion notification image 136P can be said to be an example of the operation display relating to the operation means.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 137 (c), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 137 (d), the player presses the effect button 136. Here, the effect button 136 is in a normal button state. For example, the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red and no operation such as vibration is performed (the second button state of the effect button 136). When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "It's a chance" are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. Even if the effect button 136 is not pressed within the valid period, the display as shown in FIG. 137 (e) may be performed, or the display as shown in FIG. 137 (e) may be displayed. May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (e). This also applies to the effect for one-time operation, the effect for repeated hits, and the effect for long press. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach state entry notice image 2071 functions as a second operation result display. Further, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, "operation result display" may be referred to as "operation response display".

In FIG. 137 (f), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 137 (g). Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the reach state may be entered without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed. In this way, when the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the operation promotion notification image 136P is not displayed, but the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. It does not have to be configured as such.

In FIG. 137 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced to be displayed, and in FIG. 137 (i). , Has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (i) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The animation of the scene is displayed.

It should be noted that the reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to super reach.

In FIG. 137 (k), the animation of the duel scene continues. In this production example, after that, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l), the production (first production) of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously set within the valid period (sometimes referred to as the first valid period in this effect example). An operation promotion notification image prompting the user to enter the operated state is displayed. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 which is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 which is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar indicating the remaining time of the valid period. 136P2 is included. At this time, an operation-waiting animation display showing how the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating is performed. At this time, the effect button image 136P1 may not be displayed as vibrating and may be a still image. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the effect button image 136P1 is displayed as vibrating than when the effect button image 136P1 is not displayed as vibrating. It has become. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), the effect button 136 (may be referred to as a second operation means in this effect example) and the right button 137d (may be referred to as a first operation means in this effect example). When both of) are operated, as shown in FIG. 137 (o), the operation result effect shown in FIG. 137 (e) (in this effect example, it may be referred to as the second operation result effect). Different operation result effects (sometimes referred to as the first operation result effect in this effect example) are performed. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an operation including a display in which the character "Gekiatsu" is displayed in the center of the display area and 10 pandas are arranged around the character display so as to surround the character display. The result is displayed. Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 lights up in red and vibrates (the first button state of the effect button 136). As a result, it may be possible to increase the expectation of the player for a big hit. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the effect button 136 vibrates than when the effect button 136 does not vibrate. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (p), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 138 (q) to 138 (r) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 138 (p) to (r) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). Here, the second operating means may be the effect button 136, the right button 137d, or another direction key. Further, the first operating means may be the right button 137d, the effect button, or another direction key.

In this effect example, the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136 differ depending on the presence or absence of vibration of the effect button 136. For example, the first button state and the second button state are different. Then, the strength of the vibration may be different. For example, in the first button state, the effect button 136 may vibrate with a strong vibration, and in the second button state, the effect button 136 may vibrate with a weak vibration. Further, in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, the lighting mode of the chance button lamp 138 is the same, but may be different. For example, the first button state and the second button state may be different. The light emission color may be different depending on the button state of (for example, the first button state is a state in which the effect button 136 emits light in the first light emission color, and the second button state is a state in which the light emission color is different. The effect button 136 may be in a state of emitting light with a second light emitting color), or may have the same light emitting color but different brightness (for example, the effect button 136 may be in a state of the first button state. Is a state in which light is emitted at the first brightness, and the second button state may be a state in which the effect button 136 emits light at a second brightness lower (higher) than the first brightness). The number of LEDs to be used may be different (for example, the first button state is a state in which the number of light emission of the LEDs constituting the chance button lamp 138 is the first number, and the second button state is The number of LEDs that make up the chance button lamp 138 may be a second number that is less (more) than the first number). Further, in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, the form of the effect button 136 is the same, but may be different. For example, in the second button state, the first button state is used. The main body of the effect button 136 may be in a protruding position with respect to the button state, or may be in a depressed position. That is, it is included in the present invention as long as the first button state and the second button state are configured so that at least a part of the states is different.

Further, the state of the effect button 136 before the start of the first valid period may be all the same state, or the state of the effect button 136 may change during a period other than the first valid period. For example, the effect button 136 may be changed to function as a notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice.

Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is configured to be vibrable, but for example, at least a part of the effect button 136 may be configured to be rotatable, for example, a portion of the effect button 136 that is directly operated. The button body may be rotatable, or the body of the effect button 136 is transparent and the inside is visible, and a decorative member such as a light emitting body is rotatably provided inside the body of the effect button 136. May be good. Further, a cylindrical case body that accommodates and supports the button body of the effect button 136 and is attached to the door 108 with the ball storage plate may be rotatably configured. The effect button 136 configured in this way may be in a rotating state in the first button state and in a non-rotating state in the second button state, or may be in a non-rotating state in the first button state. In the second button state, the rotation state may be set at the first rotation speed, and the rotation state may be set at the second rotation speed slower (faster) than the first rotation speed.

As described above, in this production example, any form can be applied as long as the first button state and the second button state take different states.

FIG. 139 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 139 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. In this effect example, the state in which the direction keys vibrate when the operation valid period is started is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 139 (1) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 139 (7), after the effect (first effect) of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started, as shown in FIG. 139 (8). On the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed. Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (10), as shown in FIG. 139 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated at the same time, the operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 139 (12). In this production example, as shown in FIG. 139 (11), the direction keys vibrate when the operation valid period is started. As a result, it may be possible to increase the expectation of the player for a big hit. The effect button 136 may be vibrated together with the direction keys. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the direction key (right button 137d) vibrates than when the direction key (right button 137d) does not vibrate. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the display shown in FIGS. 139 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 139 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

FIG. 140 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 140 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. In this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 blinks in red when the operation valid period is started. It is shown how it emits light at.

FIG. 140 (1) corresponds to FIG. 129 (1), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. As shown in FIG. 140 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the setting screen is hidden. In the present embodiment, while it is shown that the "decoration 7" is reaching, the three decorative symbols are also variablely displayed at the lower left of the display screen. For example, at the timing when the special figure is stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time by the combination of the symbols corresponding to the display result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.

At this time, when the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 140 (2), the symbol change during setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, red or the like) while being operated. Further, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in another light emitting mode (for example, white). Similarly, when the left button 137c is operated, the setting screen for changing the symbol is displayed. The setting screen for changing the design is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the setting screen for changing the symbol functions as an example of the volume setting display. The setting screen for changing the pattern is arranged and displayed on the layer in front of the layer on which the effect display is performed. Therefore, while the setting screen for changing the symbol is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display. According to the volume gauge VG, it is shown that the volume is the third stage out of the five stages.

When the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 140 (4) while the setting screen for changing the symbol is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 140 (5). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is in the fourth stage. At this time, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. The effect button 136 may be lit in red, or it may be lit in blue and not lit in red. In addition, it may emit light in another light emitting mode (for example, a mode in which it lights up in white). In the present embodiment, the volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated once. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated while the volume gauge VG indicates that it is in the third stage, the volume is lowered by one stage, and the volume gauge VG is in the second stage accordingly. It will change to the display indicating that. When the right button 137d (left button 137c) is long-pressed, the auto-repeat function is activated during the long-pressed period, and the volume is increased by one step at predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). It may be configured to (decrease), or it may be configured so that the volume does not increase (decrease) unless the auto-repeat function is activated and the operation is performed once.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (6) to 140 (10) are performed. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (6) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (6) to (10), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 140 (7), after the simultaneous operation (first effect) of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started, as shown in FIG. 140 (8). On the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed. Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 140 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 140 (10), as shown in FIG. 140 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated at the same time, the operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 140 (12). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 140 (11), when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 emits light in a manner of blinking in red. As a result, it may be possible to increase the expectation of the player for a big hit. In addition to the effect button, the direction key (right button 137d) may be made to emit light in a manner of blinking in red. Further, when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 may be made to emit light in a mode of blinking in red, or may be emitted in another light emitting mode (for example, a mode of lighting in red). There may be. Further, when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 may not always emit blue light. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the case where the effect button 136 flashes in red than in the case where the effect button 136 flashes in red and does not emit light. .. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the display shown in FIGS. 140 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 140 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

FIG. 141 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 141 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. In the operation promotion notification image, it is promoted to operate only the effect button 136, and the operation of the right button 137d is not notified. That is, in this effect example, at least some of the buttons requesting operation (effect button 136 and right button 137d) are not notified to be operated, and the operation of the right button 137d functions as a hidden command. Indicates to do. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 141 (1) to 141 (5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (1) to (5), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 141 (6) shows how the animation of the duel scene continues. In this production example, the production of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (7). However, as shown in FIG. 141 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 requires the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, whereas only the operation of "press the chance button" and the effect button 136. Is displayed as if requesting. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 141 (8), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1, and displays the remaining time corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 and the right button image 136dP1. Bar 136P2b is not included. Therefore, a normal player is expected to produce a predetermined operation result by operating only the effect button 136, but for example, a player who has obtained information by looking at the Internet or a strategy magazine. If so, it may be possible to expect that a special operation result effect is performed by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136.

Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (10), as shown in FIG. 141 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated at the same time, the operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 141 (12). In this production example, in the operation result production, a confirmation sound for notifying the jackpot confirmation is output from the speaker 120. When only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 141 (12), for example, only the effect movable body 225 is dropped, and a definite sound is produced. An effect that is not output may be performed. Further, during the operation valid period, the operation result effect may not be performed and the operation promotion notification image may be continuously displayed until both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time (that is, display). At least one of the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b may not be erased). Then, as shown in FIG. 141 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the display shown in FIGS. 141 (14) to 141 (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 141 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 141.

FIG. 142 (6) following FIG. 141 (5) shows how the animation of the duel scene continues. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (7), the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. However, as shown in FIG. 142 (7), this effect requires the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, whereas unlike the effect shown in FIG. 141 (7), the decorative symbol display In the device 208, the display requesting the button operation is not performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 142 (8), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the remaining time display bar 136P2, and does not include the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Therefore, a normal player who sees this may be able to recognize that the period for doing something has started, and may be able to give a sense of expectation to the subsequent development of the production. On the other hand, for example, a player who has obtained information by looking at the Internet, a strategy magazine, or the like can expect that a special operation result effect is produced by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136. In some cases. Further, the display position of the remaining time display bar may be displayed at the same position as the position displayed when the effect button image 136P1 is displayed to make the player think that something is present. The remaining time display bar may be conspicuous as a position other than the button image (for example, the center of the display screen).

Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (10), as shown in FIG. 142 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated at the same time, the operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 142 (12). In this production example, in the operation result production, a confirmation sound for notifying the jackpot confirmation is output from the speaker 120. When only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 142 (12), for example, only the effect movable body 225 is dropped, and a definite sound is produced. An effect that is not output may be performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the display shown in FIGS. 142 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 142 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 141 (13) to (15).

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 142.

FIGS. 143 (8A) to (10A) correspond to FIGS. 142 (8) to (10). FIGS. 143 (8A) to 143 (10A) show how the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Unlike FIGS. 142 (8) to 142 (10), the operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the number of remaining time display bars (136P2a, 136P2b) corresponding to the number of buttons requesting operation. The effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are not included. In this way, by making the buttons requesting operation (effect button 136 and right button 137d) hidden buttons and displaying the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b corresponding to the hidden buttons, the number of buttons can be operated. It may be possible to imply to the player whether it should be done.

FIGS. 143 (8B) to (10B) correspond to FIGS. 142 (8) to (10). FIGS. 143 (8B) to 143 (10B) show how the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation promotion notification image displayed here is different from FIGS. 142 (8) to (10), and neither the button image nor the remaining time display bar is included. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image is not displayed. In this way, by not displaying any of the buttons requesting the operation (effect button 136 and right button 137d) and the remaining time display bar, it may be possible to perform an effect that is a completely hidden command. In this production example, the display of the animation of the duel scene is dimmed, so that it may be possible to suggest to the player that the hidden command is being accepted. Here, the display of the animation of the duel scene may not be dimmed.

In the present embodiment, an example of effect when a plurality of buttons are operated at the same time has been described. For example, a touch panel is provided and the button and the touch panel are operated at the same time, or a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor is applied. May be applied to those that operate the button and the non-contact sensor at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same button (effect button 136) is used for the button for performing the normal button operation and the button for performing the long-press auto-continuous hitting, but the button for performing the normal button operation is used. , An effect button corresponding to the operation method may be provided, such as providing a button for performing long-press auto-continuous hitting separately.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect for one operation, the effect may be such that the plurality of buttons are operated at preset timings. Specifically, for example, the effect button image 136P1, the right button image 137dP1, and the remaining time display bar 136P2 are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the effect button 136 icon is displayed at a predetermined position on the gauge of the remaining time display bar 136P2. The icon of the right button 137d may be displayed to indicate the operation timing of each button, and the operation result may be produced when each button is operated at an appropriate timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of combining the long press operation and the one-time operation may be performed. For example, the left button 137c may be pressed and held to increase the gauge, and the effect button 136 may be operated in that state to provide an operation result effect. In this case, if the effect content is made different according to the amount of the gauge at the time when the effect button 136 is operated, the effect may be further improved. Further, the effect of combining the continuous hit operation or the long press auto continuous hit and the one-time operation may be performed, or the effect may be performed by combining the continuous hit operation or the long press auto continuous hit and the long press operation. ..

Further, a long-press simultaneous operation effect may be performed such that an operation result effect is performed by performing a long-press operation with each of the two or more buttons. For example, when the long-press simultaneous operation effect is started, After displaying a reminder to press and hold both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d at the same time, a display urging the long-pressed button to be released is displayed. As a result, if the long press simultaneous operation effect is successful, the operation result effect indicating success is performed, and if it fails, the operation result effect indicating failure is performed. Here, the degree of change in the effect (for example, the amount of increase in the gauge) is made different depending on whether only one of the two buttons requested to be operated is long-pressed or both are long-pressed. You may. Further, the degree of change in the effect may be different depending on whether only one button is long-pressed or the other button is long-pressed. In addition, the effect may not be changed unless both buttons are pressed and held. Also, when releasing the two long-pressed buttons, the display contents will be different, such as the effect in the operation result production will be different depending on whether only one of the two buttons is released or both are released. Alternatively, the operation result effect may not be performed when only one of the two buttons is released, and the operation result effect may be performed when both of the two buttons are released.

Further, the operation result may be produced by performing a continuous striking operation or a long press auto continuous striking with each of the two or more buttons.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 are provided one by one for each function, but two or more buttons having the same function are provided and described above. It may be configured to be applicable to the embodiment. For example, a configuration in which two effect buttons are provided and three upper buttons 137a are provided, and an effect is produced by simultaneously operating the two effect buttons and one or a plurality of upper buttons. You may prepare. Further, in addition to the buttons, a production lever, a steering wheel for automobiles, a steering wheel for a motorcycle, or the like may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. A configuration may be provided in which an effect is produced by simultaneously operating the buttons of. Alternatively, a dial for production such as a jog dial may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, the production is performed by operating the dial for production and other buttons at the same time. Such a configuration may be provided. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of effect buttons 136 having the same function but different uses are provided, the configuration may be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, a first effect button used in a normal effect and a second effect button used when a special effect is being performed are provided, and a second effect button is operated while operating the second effect button. A configuration may be provided in which an effect that further enhances the sense of expectation is performed by operating the effect button of 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the eco mode (power saving mode) may be configured to be settable. The eco mode shifts to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) by performing a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) in the pachinko machine 100, and this setting is performed. It can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the screen. At this time, every time the direction key or the enter button 137e is operated, a notification to that effect (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Further, when the eco mode is set, a notification to that effect (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Here, the eco mode is decorated for the purpose of suppressing power consumption, for example, when the symbol variation display is not started within a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) after the customer waiting demo display is started. This mode limits or stops the driving of one or more driving devices, such as reducing the brightness of the backlight of the symbol display device 208, turning off various lamps 418, and turning off the output from the speaker 120. When the eco mode is set, the emission brightness and volume of the various lamps 418 may be reduced during the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the original (Daitomo) mode may be set. The original mode shifts to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed in the pachinko machine 100, and this setting is performed. It can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the screen. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIGS. 4 and 77 may be provided with an original mode selection switch for switching whether the original mode is enabled or disabled. This original mode selection switch is operated by the pachinko machine 100 manufacturer at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 100 from the factory, or by a clerk of the pachinko machine installation store. The original mode selection switch may be disabled after shipment by crimping the portion of the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 provided with the original mode selection switch at the time of shipment. That is, since the original mode selection switch cannot be operated by the player, it is preferable that the original mode selection switch can be operated only by a limited number of people such as a manufacturer or a clerk.

In the original mode, the game console can set the original mode, and the history information of the result of playing the game in the state set in the original mode is stored in the game console. At the game console, various benefits (for example, an effect having a low appearance rate, an effect showing information on the profit of the game, etc.) are given according to the history information. When terminating the game in which the original mode is set, the individual setting information which is the player's personal information including the history information stored in the game console is input to the server. Each time the game in which the original mode is set is completed, the game console issues individual setting information including new history information reflecting the history of the game. When the player inputs the individual setting information including the new history information to the server, the individual setting information saved on the server side is updated. By inputting the individual setting information saved in the server to the game console when the next game is performed, a privilege corresponding to the history information included in the input individual setting information is given to the next game as well. This individual setting information is included in the encrypted password having a predetermined number of digits and is exchanged between the game console, the player (external device), and the server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that identifies the model of the game console, and the corresponding model code is stored in the game console. In the specification that the history information can be used in common between different models, the corresponding model code is multiple, and in the specification that the history information can be used only between the same models, the corresponding model code is one. ..

In the original mode, when entering a password for storing the player's history information in the pachinko machine 100, for example, on the screen for setting the original mode, a predetermined direction key (for example, the right button 137d) is pressed. By operating, the password input screen can be displayed. On the password input screen, for example, while looking at the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone to which the password has been sent, operate the direction keys to move to the desired character position, and press the effect button 136, the enter button 137e, or the like. By doing so, the input character is determined. After the password input of the predetermined number of characters (for example, five characters) is completed, when the predetermined operation (for example, the input completion operation using the direction key and the enter button 137e) is performed, the input password is the first pachinko machine 100. 1 It is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

Further, when the player's history information stored in the pachinko machine 100 is initialized as described above, for example, on the screen for setting the original mode, a predetermined direction key (for example, the left button 137c) is used. It may be possible to do this by manipulating. In this case, the player's history information may be initialized after displaying a confirmation message as to whether or not the player's history information may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 and giving a warning.

Further, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to set whether to turn on or off the above-mentioned auto mode function. The auto mode setting shifts to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed in the pachinko machine 100, for example. On this setting screen, the setting can be made by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 100 may be set by performing a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the decision button 137e in the customer waiting state), or by using a direction key other than the decision button 137e. It may be something that can be set. For example, the auto mode function may be switched between the ON state and the OFF state each time the decision button 137e is operated in the customer waiting state.

Further, in the present embodiment, it may be configured so that the time can be set. The time setting shifts to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed in the pachinko machine 100, and this setting is performed. It can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the screen. When the screen for setting the time is displayed as described above, the time can be changed, for example, by operating the direction keys.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the effect button 136 may be long-pressed to enable the automatic continuous striking function, or each button (up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d) constituting the direction key together with the effect button 136 , The enter button 137e, the cancel button 317f), any one or more of the buttons may be enabled with the long press auto-continuous hitting function.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting operation (for example, the first setting operation) is performed by the operation of one button (for example, the right button 137d) constituting the direction key. By simultaneously operating one button (for example, the left button 137c and the right button 137d), a setting operation different from the first setting operation (for example, the second setting operation) may be configured, for example, the left. Character selection of the password can be performed by operating the button 137c, and the entered password may be all cleared by simultaneously operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, the setting operation may be enabled by simultaneously pressing the effect button 136 and the direction key.

Further, in the present embodiment, the long-press auto-striking function and the auto mode are disabled only when a special effect such as a button effect that requires simultaneous pressing of two or more buttons is performed. May be done. Further, even when the hidden command can be accepted, the auto continuous hit function and the auto mode may be disabled. According to this, it may be possible to keep the existence of the hidden command secret from a normal player. Further, even when the hidden command can be accepted, the long press auto continuous hit function or the auto mode may be enabled. According to this, it may be possible to notify a normal player of the existence of a hidden command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation result effect is described as being performed during the execution of the reach effect, but the symbol variation display before the reach effect is started may be performed, or the reach effect is not performed. The symbol variation may be displayed, the re-lottery effect performed after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be being executed, the decorative symbol jackpot symbol promotion lottery during the jackpot is being produced, or the probability variation lottery. It may be during the production, or it may be applied to various notifications or productions such as notification of pre-reading notice.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, BGM may be selected (song selection). For example, a song is selected by the direction key or the effect button 136 on the setting screen that can be transferred while waiting for a customer. It may be configured so that it can be done. The song selection may be changed not only while waiting for customers, but also during the jackpot start effect or the jackpot game, and the song may be selected by the direction keys or the effect button 136. In this case, for example, the display of the song name to be changed by operating the direction keys and the notification that the song selection is confirmed by operating the effect button 136 can be said to be an example of the notification of the result of the setting operation. In some cases.

In the above description,
"The first operating means that can be operated by the player [for example, up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, etc.]
A second operating means that can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136, etc.]
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a volume setting display [for example, a symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (3), a volume setting screen shown in FIG. 115 (e), and the like].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first operation result display [for example, the effect display shown in FIGS. 111 (12), 112 (c5), 114 (i), etc.].
The volume setting display is a display that may be displayed depending on the operation of the first operating means [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the right button during the symbol variation display. When 137d is operated, the setting screen for changing the symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (3)],
The first operation result display is a display that may be displayed depending on the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, in FIG. 111 (11). As shown, when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is decorated as shown in FIG. 111 (12). In the symbol display device 208, an effect display such that the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, the display contents when the first operating means is operated and when a plurality of operating means are operated can be different. Therefore, the variation of the display according to the operation can be increased, and the player can play. It may be possible to improve the interest of.

Here, the first operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by other than the player. Further, the first operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be able to be operated by the player.

Further, the second operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by other than the player. Further, the second operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be able to be operated by the player.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may be displayable in addition to the volume setting display and the first operation result display. .. Further, the display means may always display the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may not display the volume setting display and the first operation result display.

Further, the volume setting display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the first operating means, or in response to a case other than the operation of the first operating means. May be displayed. Further, the volume setting display may be always displayed according to the operation of the first operating means, or may not be displayed according to the operation of the first operating means. You may.

Further, the first operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means, or the first operation. It may be displayed depending on something other than the operation of both the means and the second operating means. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed according to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means, and the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. It may not be displayed depending on that both of the two operating means have been operated.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the volume setting display, the brightness setting display, the display setting display of the display means (decorative symbol display device 208, the liquid crystal display device, etc.), and the character selection for selecting the character to appear in the game. It is possible to display the display, the song selection display for selecting BGM, the mode selection display for selecting the production mode during the game, and the user mode display for entering the password etc. to inherit the game history of the player. It may be configured in. That is, the volume setting display can be said to be an example of an effect means in which a set value can be set by a setting operation.

Here, as the types of display settings of the display means, for example, the brightness adjustment of the LCD backlight, the color temperature adjustment, the black level adjustment (brightness adjustment of the black portion of the image), and the white level adjustment (image). (Adjustment of brightness of white part), adjustment of color depth, adjustment of hue, adjustment of sharpness (outline of image), adjustment of resolution, etc. In addition, when the sound output means is configured to include a treble speaker and a bass speaker, the settings related to the sound output means include volume adjustment of only bass, volume adjustment of treble only, and balance adjustment of treble and bass. You may.

Further, the display performed in response to the operation of the first operating means is not limited to the setting display, and may be an effect display. For example, when two treasure chests are displayed side by side, if you operate the right button 137d, the treasure chest on the right side will open and you can get an item, or if you want to select one from the two left and right routes, press the left button 137c. When operated, it is also possible to perform an effect display in which the route on the left side is selected.

Further, during the period in which the "first effect [for example, the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 111 (6) to (12)] is performed, the first operation means [For example, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the enter button 137e, etc.] and the second operating means [for example, the effect button 136, etc.] are both operated. The first operation result display is configured to be displayed [for example, in the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 111 (6) to (12), the effect button 136 and When the right button 137d is operated at the same time, the effect display as shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed, etc.],
During the period in which the first effect is performed, the volume setting display is not displayed even if the first operation means is operated [for example, the effect of simultaneous operation shown in FIG. 111 (6). When is started, the volume setting is prohibited, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also described.

According to this gaming machine, during the period when the first effect is performed, the volume setting display is not displayed even if the second operation means is operated during the operation of the first operation means, so that the first effect is performed. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally displaying the volume adjustment display while the game is being played, and to concentrate on the first effect.

Here, the first operation result display is displayed only in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed. Alternatively, it may be displayed according to the operation of both the first operating means and the second operating means in a period other than the period in which the first effect is performed. Further, even if the first operation result display is always displayed according to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means during the period when the first effect is performed. It may not be displayed depending on the operation of both the first operating means and the second operating means during the period in which the first effect is performed.

Further, the volume setting display may not be displayed only when the first operating means is operated during the period when the first effect is performed, or may be displayed during the period when the first effect is performed. It may not always be displayed when one operating means is operated.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second operation result display [for example, the reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j)].
The second operation result display is a display that may be displayed depending on the operation of the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to 107 (j)). , If the effect button 135 is pressed within the operation valid period, the reach state entry notice image 2071 may be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means, or other than the operation of the second operation means. It may be displayed according to the above. Further, the second operation result display may always be displayed according to the operation of the second operation means, or may not be displayed according to the operation of the second operation means. There may be cases.

Further, during the period in which the "second effect [for example, the effect of displaying the operation promotion notification image 136P shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to 107 (h)"] is performed, the second operation means is operated. It is configured to display the second operation result display according to what has been done.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means during the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect. May be displayed in response to something other than the operation of the second operating means during the period in which Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed according to the operation of the second operation means during the period when the second effect is performed, or the second effect may be displayed. In the period in which it is performed, it may not be displayed depending on the operation of the second operating means.

In addition, during the period when the second effect is performed, the second operation result display may be displayed even when the first operation means is operated in addition to the second operation means, or the second operation. A display different from the result display (for example, a back button display) may be displayed.

Further, in a period other than the period in which the second effect is performed, the second operation result display may be displayed according to the operation of the second operation means, or the second operation. The operation result display different from the result display may be displayed.

In addition, "the first operation result display is not displayed even if both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated during the period when the second effect is performed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 116 (f) to 116 (g), when the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed, the operation result even if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time. No production, no volume changes, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first operation result display, the first operation result display is displayed even if both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated during the period when the second effect is performed. In some cases, the first operation result display is displayed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in a period other than the period in which the second effect is performed. May be the case.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of displays is the first operation display.
The first operation display is a display relating to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, the chance button and the right key shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to 111 (10). Directing to encourage simultaneous operation, etc.]
The first operation result display is a display displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first operation result display may be displayed only until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. It may be displayed other than until both of the operating means of are operated. Further, the first operation result display may be displayed without fail until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation may be displayed. It may not be displayed until both means are operated.

It should be noted that the first operation display may be displayed during the first effect, but the first operation display may not be displayed during the second effect. In this case, when the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, a predetermined operation result effect (for example, a back button effect) may be performed.

In addition to the first production, the first operation display may be performed. For example, in the tutorial production performed during the symbol variation display, "pressing the chance button and the right key produces a hot production. The first operation display may be performed at a timing completely different from the timing at which the first operation means and the second operation means can be operated, such as displaying "may be output". Further, in this tutorial effect, a display explaining the period during which the back button effect is executed and the operation method of the operation means at that time may be displayed.

Further, "The first operation display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "a door body [for example, a front frame door 106, etc.] is provided, and the door body is provided with the first operating means and the second operating means.
It is configured so that the player can simultaneously operate the first operating means and the second operating means with one hand [for example, as shown in FIG. 74, a ball provided on the front frame door 106. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the door 108 with the storage plate, so that the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are two operating means at positions that are easy to operate even when firing, so you can easily operate both operating means at the same time with one hand and become accustomed to operating the operating means. It may be possible to make it easier for non-players to participate.

Here, the door body may be provided with only the first operating means and the second operating means, or may be provided with other than the first operating means and the second operating means. Good. Further, the door body may be provided with the first operating means and the second operating means without fail, or may not be provided with the first operating means and the second operating means. Good.

In addition to the first operating means and the second operating means, there may be one that the player can operate at the same time with one hand.

Further, "The second operating means is an operating means having a larger size than the first operating means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In other words, it can be said that the second operating means is an operating means having a wider operable surface than the first operating means.

The first operating means may be smaller than the second operating means, or the first operating means and the second operating means may have the same size.

In addition, it is provided with "effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500]].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control related to the operation of the first operating means when the first operating means is operated [for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control according to each button constituting the operation key unit 137, etc.],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control related to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated [for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control according to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the control related to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means. If there is, control other than the control related to the operation of the first operating means may be feasible. Further, the effect control means may always execute control related to the operation of the first operation means when the first operation means is operated, or the first operation means may be operated. In that case, the control related to the operation of the first operating means may not be executed.

Further, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the control related to the operation of the second operating means when the second operating means is operated, or the operation of the second operating means may be performed. If so, control other than control related to the operation of the second operating means may be feasible. Further, the effect control means may always execute the control related to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated, or the second operation means may be operated. In that case, the control related to the operation of the second operating means may not be executed.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136, etc.]
A drive means for driving the operation means [for example, an effect button drive motor 434, etc.]
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and
It is a game table equipped with
The driving means moves the operating means into a first position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 125 (a3)] and a second position [for example, an inoperable position shown in FIG. 125 (a1)]. Etc.], which is a means that can be displaced.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display relating to the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "operation display [for example, an operation promotion notification image or the like shown in FIG. 125 (b3)]").
It is configured so that the operating means may be displaced to the first position when the operating means is at a position different from the first position at the timing before the operation display is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 125 (b2) to 125 (b3), when the effect button 136 is at a position different from the operable position (initial position), the operation promotion notification image is performed by performing the initial position return operation. Return the effect button 136 to the operable position before is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the operation means.

Further, according to this game table, the movable means in the second state is transformed into the first state before the operation display is displayed, so that the operation valid period of the operation means is started in advance. It may be possible for the player to grasp it.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be able to be operated by the player.

Further, the driving means may be one that can drive only the operating means, or may be one that can drive other than the operating means. Further, the driving means may always drive the operating means, or may not drive the operating means.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the operation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the operation display. Further, the display means may always display the operation display, or may not display the operation display.

Further, the driving means may be such that the operating means can be displaced only between the first position and the second position, and the operating means can be set to the first position and the second position. It may be something that can be displaced other than between. Further, the driving means may be such that the operating means is always displaced between the first position and the second position, or the operating means is displaced between the first position and the second position. It may not be allowed.

Further, the operating means may be configured so that the operating means may be displaced to the first position only when the operating means is different from the first position at the timing before the operation display is displayed. It may be configured so that the operating means may be displaced to the first position at a timing before the display is displayed, even when the operating means is different from the first position. Further, the operating means may be configured to be always displaced to the first position when the operating means is different from the first position at the timing before the operation display is displayed, or the operation display may be displayed. In the timing before the operation, if the operating means is different from the first position, it may not be displaced to the first position.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the first continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 1 shown in FIGS. 126 (a1) to 126 (a3)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 2 shown in FIGS. 125 (b1) to (b3)].
It is configured so that both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display may be displayed in one symbol variation display.
The second continuous effect display is a display displayed after the first continuous effect display.
The operation display is a display displayed during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 126 (a3), the operation promotion notification image is displayed in the effect of step-up 1]. Etc.],
The operation display is a display displayed during the period in which the second continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 125 (b3), the operation promotion notification image is displayed in the effect of step-up 2]. Etc.],
When the operating means is in the second position at the timing between the display of the second continuous effect display and the start of the display of the operation display, the operating means is the first. It is configured to be displaced to a position [for example, as shown in FIGS. 125 (b1) to 125 (b3), after the effect of step-up 2 is started and before the operation promotion notification image is displayed. The production button 136 has been returned to the initial position, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be able to grasp in advance that the second operation display will be displayed in the second continuous effect display.

Further, according to this game table, since it is known in advance from the displacement state of the operating means that the second continuous effect display is displayed, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the fluctuation. ..

Here, the display means may be configured so that only both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display can be displayed, or other than both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. It may also be configured to be displayable. Further, the display means may be configured so that both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display are always displayed, or at least one of the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. One of them may not be displayed.

Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display displayed only after the first continuous effect display, or may be displayed after a display other than the first continuous effect display. May be good. Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is always displayed after the first continuous effect display, or may not be displayed after the first continuous effect display.

Further, the operation display may be displayed only during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. There may be. Further, the operation display may be always displayed during the period when the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may not be displayed during the period when the first continuous effect display is displayed. May be good.

Further, the operating means is displaced to the first position only when the operating means is in the second position at the timing between the display of the second continuous effect display and the start of the display of the operation display. In addition to the case where the operation means is in the second position at the timing between the display of the second continuous effect display and the start of the display of the operation display. It may be configured to be displaced to one position. Further, the operating means is always displaced to the first position when the operating means is in the second position at the timing between the display of the second continuous effect display and the start of the display of the operation display. The first is when the operating means is in the second position at the timing between the display of the second continuous effect display and the start of the display of the operation display. It may not be displaced to the position.

In addition, it is provided with "effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500]].
The first position is an initial position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 125 (a3)].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control for displacing the operation means to the first position (hereinafter, referred to as "initial position return control").
The effect control means is a means capable of executing the initial position return control when the operation means is not in the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started [for example, FIG. 125]. (B2) to (b3), the initial position return control is performed when the effect button 136 is not in the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed]. The stand. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, before the operation acceptance period starts, by performing the initial position return operation for the "movable means that is not in the initial position", it is possible to give a misunderstanding that the movable means is not in the initial position. It may be possible to prevent it.

Further, according to this game console, since the effect control means executes the initial position return control, it may be possible to reduce the control load of the main control unit.

Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the initial position return control, or may be capable of executing control other than the initial position return control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the initial position return control, or may not execute the initial position return control.

Further, the effect control means may be capable of executing the initial position return control only when the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. The initial position return control may be executed even when the operating means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the display is started.

Further, "a detection means [for example, an effect button initial position sensor 427 or the like] capable of detecting that the operation means is in the first position is provided.
The effect control means can execute the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. Means
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to accurately grasp that the operating means is not in the first position.

Here, the detecting means may be one that can detect only that the operating means is in the first position, or may be one that can detect the operating means other than the first position. Further, the detecting means may always detect that the operating means is in the first position, or may not detect that the operating means is in the first position.

Further, the effect control means can execute the initial position return control only when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. It may be present, or the initial position return control can be executed even when the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. There may be. Further, the effect control means always executes the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. Alternatively, the initial position return control may not be executed when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. ..

In addition, "The effect control means is a means capable of executing retry control.
The retry control is a control that re-executes the initial position return control when it is determined that the operating means is not in the first position even after the initial position return control is executed. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect control means may be one that can execute only the retry control, or may be one that can execute other than the retry control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the retry control, or may not execute the retry control.

In addition, "the first position is a position where the player can operate the operating means [for example, an operable position].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first position may be a position where only the player can operate the operating means, or a position where the operating means can be operated by other than the player. Further, the first position may be a position where the player always operates the operating means, or the operating means may not be operated by the player.

Further, "the second position [for example, an inoperable position] is a position in which the player cannot operate the operating means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second position is a position where the player can operate the operating means, and may be a position different from the first position.

Further, "when the symbol variation display is started, if the operating means is at a position different from the first position [for example, an inoperable position], the operating means is displaced to the first position. Is configured as
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by performing an operation of returning the operating means to the initial position at the start of the symbol variation display, the operating means is put into the initial position when the effect of putting the operating means into the second state is performed. It may be easier to get started.

Further, according to this game table, it is possible to prevent the state in which the operating means is not in the initial position from being continued in a plurality of symbol variation displays, and to make it easier for the game clerk to judge whether or not a problem has occurred. There is.

Further, according to this game table, by performing the initial position return operation at the start of the symbol change, when the operation is performed in a range overlapping with the rotation range of the other effect movable body, the contact with the other effect movable body is caused. It may be easier to prevent.

Further, "The operation display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 125 (b3)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136, etc.]
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display [for example, the number of remaining pandas to be defeated in response to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous striking shown in FIG. 120 (g). , Etc.]
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed during the first operation valid period [for example, the operation valid period in the continuous striking effect].
The first operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, and the timing at which the long press operation is started in the first operation valid period (hereinafter, "first timing [for example, FIG. From 117 (B), the timing of A1 etc.] ”), the long press operation by the operating means continues for the first time [for example, the time T1 etc. until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted. ] Depending on what has been done, the first effect display may be displayed.
The first effect display may be displayed in response to the fact that the long press operation is continuously performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation valid period.
The second timing is a timing in which the long press operation is continued for the first time after the first timing is reached.
The first time and the second time are different,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, the timing at which the first effect display is displayed can be different between the time from the timing when the long press operation is started and the time from the timing when the time has elapsed. It may be possible to entertain the player by preventing the timing at which the effect is displayed from becoming monotonous.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be able to be operated by the player.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be a display that may be displayed only during the first operation valid period, or may be displayed other than the first operation valid period. Further, the first effect display may always be displayed during the first operation valid period, or may not be displayed during the first operation valid period.

Further, the first effect display may be configured so that it may be displayed only when the long press operation by the operating means is continuously performed for the first time from the first timing. However, it may be configured so that it may be displayed depending on something other than the fact that the long press operation by the operating means is continuously performed from the first timing for the first time. The first effect display may be configured so that it may always be displayed depending on the fact that the long press operation by the operating means is continuously performed for the first time from the first timing. It may be configured so that it may not be displayed depending on the fact that the long press operation by the operating means is continuously performed for the first time from one timing.
Further, as for the first effect display, the first exercise display is displayed only when the long press operation is continued from the second timing in the first operation valid period and is performed for the second time. In some cases, the first effect display may be displayed in response to a case other than the fact that the long press operation is continuously performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation valid period. May be displayed. In addition, as for the first effect display, the first effect display is always displayed according to the fact that the long press operation is continued for the second time from the second timing in the first operation valid period. In some cases, the first effect display may not be displayed depending on whether the long press operation is continued for the second time from the second timing in the first operation valid period. There may be.

Also, the first time and the second time may be the same or different, the first time may be longer, and the second time may be longer. May be good.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the first result display [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIGS. 119 (n) and 120 (n)].
The first result display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation validity period is started [for example, shown in FIG. 119 (n)). In this way, by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136, the operation result effect that the character of the Bancho throws the panda is displayed, etc.],
The first result display is a display that may be displayed even when the long press operation is performed after the first operation valid period is started [for example, FIG. 120 (n)). As shown in, by pressing and holding the effect button 136, the operation result effect in which the character of the Bancho throws the panda is displayed, etc.],
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means during the first operation valid period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first result display may be displayed regardless of whether the operation is repeated or long-pressed, so that the player may be able to arbitrarily select the operation method. .. That is, a player who knows that the first result display is displayed regardless of whether the operation is repeated or long-pressed, can be comforted by long-pressing, and knows this. A player who does not have a continuous hit operation, so a player who knows this may be able to enjoy a little. That is, since there is an element of engaging in the game, it may be possible to promote participation in the game.

Here, the first result display may be displayed only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation validity period is started, or the first operation may be displayed. After the validity period is started, it may be displayed in a case other than the case where the operating means is repeatedly hit. Further, the first result display may be displayed whenever the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation validity period is started, or the first operation validity period starts. After that, it may not be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit.

Further, the first result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the first operation validity period is started, or the first operation may be displayed. It may be displayed in a case other than the case where the long press operation is performed after the validity period is started. Further, the first result display may be displayed whenever a long press operation is performed after the first operation valid period is started, or the first operation valid period may be displayed. After it is started, it may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed.

Further, the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the operating means in the first operation valid period, or the operating means may be displayed in the first operation valid period. It may be displayed depending on something other than the operation. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed according to the operation of the operating means in the first operation valid period, or the operating means may be displayed in the first operation valid period. It may not be displayed depending on the operation.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a continuous striking operation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c) to (m), a mission is performed by repeatedly striking the effect button 136. Is achieved and the character "Kill all pandas by hitting the button repeatedly" is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit, and prompting to hit all the pandas within the operation validity period by hitting the production button 136 repeatedly. A series of displays that display operation promotion notification images, etc.],
The continuous striking operation display is a display prompting the continuous striking of the operating means.
The first operation valid period is configured to start after the continuous hit operation display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be able to easily recognize that the continuous hit operation display is performed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, a display shown in FIG. 121 (g), in which the display of the lord is enlarged while the display image of the swordsman is reduced, etc. ], And
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed during the second operation valid period [for example, the operation valid period in the long press effect].
The second operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.
The second operation validity period is a period different from the first operation validity period.
From the timing when the long press operation is started in the second operation valid period (hereinafter, referred to as "third timing"), the long press operation continues for a third time [for example, a liquid crystal for long press]. Time until command is transmitted T3, etc.] Depending on what has been done, the second effect display may be displayed.
The second effect display is a display that is not displayed unless the long press operation is continued for the third time after the third timing is reached [for example, shown in FIG. 121 (g). , While the display of the lord is enlarged, the display image of the swordsman is reduced. The display is not displayed until the time T3 has passed since the operation of the effect button 136.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the same long press operation is performed, the timing at which the effect display is displayed differs depending on the effect, so it may be possible to entertain the player by giving variation to the display timing of the effect display. is there.

Further, according to this game table, a player who is accustomed to the game may display the first effect display or the second effect display depending on the time until the effect display is displayed. It may be possible to grasp and entertain the operation.

Here, the second effect display may be a display that may be displayed only in the second operation valid period, or may be displayed in a period other than the second operation valid period. Good. In addition, the second effect display may always be displayed during the second operation valid period, or may not be displayed during the second operation valid period.

Further, the second operation valid period may be a period in which only the operation of the operating means is valid, or a period in which the operation other than the operation of the operating means is valid. In addition, the operation of the operating means may be valid for a period of time, or the operation of the operating means may not be valid.

Further, the second effect display may be displayed only when the long press operation is continued from the third timing and is performed for the third time, or the third effect display may be displayed. It may be displayed depending on something other than the fact that the long press operation is continuously performed for the third time from the timing of. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed according to the fact that the long press operation is continued from the third timing and is performed for the third time, or from the third timing. It may not be displayed depending on the fact that the long press operation is continuously performed for the third time.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a long press operation display [for example, an operation promotion notification for promoting a long press operation of the effect button 136 shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (h). Image display, etc.]
The long-press operation display is a display that prompts the user to press and hold the operation means.
The second operation valid period is configured to start after the long press operation display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (d), the operation promotion notification is started. The operation validity period has started after the image is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the second operation valid period is started after seeing the long press operation display, it may be possible to take a sufficient period during which the long press operation can be performed.

Here, the second operation valid period may be configured so that it can be started only after the long press operation display is started, or it can be started even after the long press operation display is started. You may. Further, the second operation valid period may be configured to always start after the long press operation display is started, or may not start after the long press operation display is started.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second result display [for example, an operation result effect by a long press operation, etc.].
The second result display is a display that may be displayed when the long press operation is performed after the second operation valid period is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the second operation validity period is started, or the second result display may be performed. After the operation validity period is started, it may be displayed other than when the long press operation is performed. Further, the second result display may be displayed whenever a long press operation is performed after the second operation valid period is started, or the second operation valid period may be displayed. After it is started, it may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed.

Further, the first time [for example, the time T1 or the like until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is transmitted] after the first timing [for example, the timing of A1 in FIG. 117 (B)] is set. In response to the operation of the operating means again before the lapse of time, the first effect display [for example, in the effect for continuous striking shown in FIG. 120 (g), the operation is defeated in response to the operation of the effect button 136. A production display that reduces the number of remaining pandas to be used, etc.] may be displayed.
It is configured so that the first effect display is not displayed until the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing is reached. A game table featuring. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even if the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time elapses after the first timing is reached. Alternatively, it may be displayed depending on the operation means other than being operated again before the first time elapses after the first timing. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time elapses after the first timing. It may not be displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time elapses after the first timing.

Here, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed until only the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing is reached. , It may be configured so that it is not displayed even when a time other than the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing is reached. Further, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed without fail when the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing is reached. , It may not be displayed even after the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing is reached.

In addition, it is provided with "effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500]].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to reduce the control load of the main control unit.

Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation, or may execute other than the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation. It may be one. Further, the effect control means may always execute the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation, or may not execute the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation. May be good.

Further, "a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first operation valid period is a period started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

Also, "The first time is longer than the second time,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent the first effect display from being unintentionally displayed.

The first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time may be the same.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first operating means that can be operated by the player [for example, up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, etc.]
A second operating means that can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136, etc.]
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a volume setting display [for example, a volume gauge VG shown in FIGS. 111 (3) and 115 (e)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is an operation result display [for example, an effect display shown in FIGS. 111 (12), 112 (c5), 114 (i), etc.].
The volume setting operation by the first operation means [for example, the volume setting operation by the left button 137c and the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 111 (4) and 115 (f)] is possible.
While the volume setting display is being displayed, the display mode of the volume setting display is changed by performing the volume setting operation [for example, FIGS. 111 (3) to 111 (5) and FIGS. As shown in 115 (e) to FIG. (G), when the right button 137d is operated while the volume gauge VG in the third stage display mode is being displayed, the volume gauge VG is changed from the third stage display mode. Change to the 4th stage display mode, etc.],
In the first validity period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the operation result display is displayed [for example, As shown in FIG. 111 (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the effect movable body 225 displays the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 111 (12). While moving to the front side of the screen, the decorative pattern display device 208 performs an effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining.],
The first valid period is a period during which both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are valid [for example, the right button 137d at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9). The period during which the operation and the operation of the effect button 136 are valid (operation valid period) is started, or the period during which both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are valid (operation valid period) is started. Is started, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of the first valid period (hereinafter," first valid period display [for example, FIG. 111 (8)). ~ The remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. (10) and the remaining time display bar 136P2a, 136P2b, etc. shown in FIG. 112 (b1)] ”.
In the first valid period, even if only the first operating means is operated, the display mode of the first valid period display is configured to continue to change [for example, FIG. 112 (b1)). -As shown in FIG. (B3) and FIG. 113 (a1), even if the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated, the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a and 136P2b continue. Decreasing, etc.],
In the first valid period, even if only the second operating means is operated, the display mode of the first valid period display is changed so as to continue [for example, the right button 137d is operated. Even if only the effect button 136 is operated, the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b will continue to decrease, etc.],
In the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the display of the first valid period display is terminated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (10) to (12) and 112 (c3) to (c5), both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed during the operation valid period. When operated, the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b are erased, and an effect display is performed such that the effect movable body 225 is shining.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of displays is an operation promotion display.
The operation promotion display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, shown in FIGS. 111 (8), 112 (b1), and 113 (1). An operation promotion notification image, etc. that urges both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated at the same time within the valid period].
The first validity period is configured to start after the display of the operation promotion display is started [for example, after displaying the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. The operation validity period starts at the timing shown in 111 (9)],
The operation promotion display is an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter, "the right shown in the first operation image [for example, FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), and FIG. 113 (1)). Right button image 137dP1 etc. that imitates button 137d] ”) is included in the display.
The operation promotion display is an effect that imitates the second operation means (hereinafter, "the second operation image [for example, shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), and FIG. 113 (1)). It is a display including an effect button image 136P1 etc. that imitates the button 136] ”.
The first validity period display corresponding to the first operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 112 (b1)] and the first. The first valid period display corresponding to the second operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 shown in FIG. 112 (b1)] is displayed. Is composed of,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "In the first valid period, the display of the first valid period display is terminated by the operation of the second operating means during the operation of the first operating means. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to 112 (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased and the effect is movable. The effect is displayed as if the body 225 is shining],
In the first valid period, the display of the first valid period display is terminated by the operation of the second operating means during the operation of the second operating means. [For example, when the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased and the effect display is performed such that the effect movable body 225 is shining.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of displays is an operation promotion display.
The operation promotion display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, shown in FIGS. 111 (8), 112 (b1), and 113 (1). An operation promotion notification image, etc. that urges both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated at the same time within the valid period].
After the display of the operation promotion display is started, the first validity period is started [for example, after displaying the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. The operation validity period starts at the timing shown in 111 (9)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "a symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first valid period is a period that starts during the execution of the symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 111 (9) to (12), 112 (c1) to (c5), and the like. As shown in FIGS. 113 (a1) to 113 (a2), the operation validity period has started during the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "In the second valid period, the volume setting display is configured to start to be displayed in response to the operation of the first operating means [for example, FIGS. 111 (2) to the same". As shown in FIG. (3), when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated during the operation valid period for setting the volume, the volume gauge VG is displayed, etc.],
The second valid period is a period during which the volume setting operation is valid.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first valid period and the second valid period do not overlap [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), the button operation promotion display is started after the button operation promotion display is started. Until the symbol variation display ends, the display of the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "In the first valid period, the operation result display is displayed by the operation of the second operating means during the operation of the first operating means [for example," As shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to 112 (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, an effect display is performed such that the effect movable body 225 is shining. ],
In the first valid period, the operation result display is displayed by the operation of the first operating means during the operation of the second operating means [for example, the effect button]. When the right button 137d is operated while 136 is operated, an effect display is performed as if the effect movable body 225 is shining.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "While the volume setting display is being displayed, when the second operating means is being operated, the display mode of the volume setting display is not changed even if the volume setting operation is performed. [For example, when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated as shown in FIGS. 116 (f) to 116 (g), the volume is not changed, etc.]. A featured game table. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, a "door body [for example, front frame door 106, etc.] is provided.
The door body is provided with the first operating means and the second operating means.
It is configured so that the player can simultaneously operate the first operating means and the second operating means with one hand [for example, as shown in FIG. 74, a ball provided on the front frame door 106. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the door 108 with the storage plate, so that the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, it is provided with "effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500]].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control related to the operation of the first operating means when the first operating means is operated [for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control according to each button constituting the operation key unit 137, etc.],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control related to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated [for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control according to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A plurality of operating means provided at positions that can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, decision button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.]
Production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, effect movable body 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means [for example, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.].
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.].
By operating the first operating means, settings related to the game console can be made [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (2) to (3) and 127 (2) to (3)). In addition, when the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIGS. 111 (4) to (5) and 127 (4) to FIG. As shown in Fig. (5), if the right button 137d is operated while the symbol change setting screen is displayed, the volume will increase by one step, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)].
When both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 111]. When both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time as shown in (11), the operation result effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
In a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 127 (11). ), As shown in FIG. 127 (12), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is not performed, or FIG. 128 () As shown in 11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 128 (12)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, since the first effect is not performed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Here, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions that can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at positions that can be operated by persons other than the player. Good. Further, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate them, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate the plurality of operating means.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, as the effect means, any appropriate means such as a display means, a sound output means, a light emitting means, a movable body, and a light guide plate for displaying a design can be adopted. Further, the effect means may be composed of a plurality of means, such as a combination of the display means and the sound output means and a combination of the display means and the light emitting means.

Further, the operation of the first operating means may be configured to enable only the settings related to the game console, or the operation of the first operating means may be configured to enable settings other than the settings related to the game console. .. Further, it may be configured so that the setting related to the game console is always performed by the operation of the first operating means, or the setting related to the game console may not be possible by the operation of the first operating means. ..

Further, the effect means may be one that can execute only the first effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect, or may not execute the first effect.

Further, it may be configured so that the first effect may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. The first effect may be executed even in cases other than the case where both the operating means and the second operating means are being operated. Further, it may be configured so that the first effect is always executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means. It may be configured so that the first effect may not be executed when both the first effect and the second operation means are operated.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. When both the operation means of the above and the second operation means are operated, the effect other than the first effect may be executed.

Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, it may be configured so that only the first effect is not executed. In a state where only one of the operating means and the second operating means is operated, the effects other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect may not always be executed, or the first effect may not be executed. It may be configured so that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is operated.

In addition, it is provided with "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The first effect is configured to be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated during the first valid period. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (12), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the operation valid period, the effect movable body 225 displays a decorative symbol. While moving to the front side of the display screen of the device 208, the decorative pattern display device 208 performs an effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8)].
The first display is a display that encourages the operation of both the first operating means and the second operating means.
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "first image [for example, right button image 137dP1 or the like shown in FIG. 111 (8)]"). Yes,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "second image [for example, effect button image 136P1 shown in FIG. 111 (8)]"). Yes,
The first display is a valid period display related to the first valid period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 111 (8) and the remaining time display bars 136P2a, 136P2b shown in FIG. 129 (8). Etc.] is included in the display,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by providing the first valid period, it is possible to increase the difficulty of operating the plurality of operating means, so that the sense of accomplishment may be increased.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first effect is configured to be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. It may be configured so that it may be executed in a case other than the case where both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated during the first validity period. You may. Further, the first effect may be configured to be executed whenever both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated during the first valid period. However, it may be configured so that it may not be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated during the first valid period.

Further, the first effect is configured to be executed only during the first valid period when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. It may be configured so that it may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated even during a valid period other than the first valid period. May be done.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may be a display prompting only to operate both the first operating means and the second operating means, or both the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. It may be a display that prompts other than the operation.

Further, the first display may be a display including only the first image, the second image, and the validity period display, or may include a display other than the first image, the second image, and the validity period display. It may be a display. Further, the first display may be a display that always includes the first image, the second image, and the validity period display, or may not include the first image, the second image, and the validity period display. There may be.

Further, "The first image is an image that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 127 (Fig. 127). 11) -As shown in FIG. 12), the right button image 137dP1 is not deleted when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated],.
The second image is an image that does not disappear when only the second operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, FIGS. 128 (11) to 128 (11) to As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the effect button image 136P1 is not deleted when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated],.
The first image is an image that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated [for example, FIGS. 111 (11) to 11). As shown in FIG. (12), the right button image 137dP1 is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated],.
The second image is an image that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated [for example, FIGS. 111 (11) to 11). As shown in FIG. (12), the effect button image 136P1 is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, neither the first image imitating the first operating means nor the second image imitating the second operating means disappears when only one of the operating means is operated. This makes it possible to notify that an effective operation has not been performed. Therefore, it may be possible to effectively encourage the player to operate the plurality of operating means.

Here, the first image may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or the first operating means and the second operating means. Even if an operating means other than the above is operated, it may not disappear.

Further, the second image may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or the second image may disappear other than the first operating means and the second operating means. Even if the operating means of is operated, it may not disappear.

Further, the first image may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first image may disappear. It may disappear even when both the operating means and the second operating means are not in the operated state. Further, the first image may always disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the first image may be the same as the first operating means. It may not disappear when both of the second operating means are operated.

Further, the second image may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first image may disappear. It may disappear even when both the operating means and the second operating means are not in the operated state. Further, the second image may always disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the second image may be the same as the first operating means. It may not disappear when both of the second operating means are operated.

Further, "The first display includes only one valid period display [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation promotion notification image has one remaining time display bar 136P2. Only one is included],
The valid period display is a display suggesting the remaining period of the first valid period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed in a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period, etc.].
The validity period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated [for example, FIGS. 111 (11) to 111 (FIG. 11) to FIG. As shown in (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, so that it is possible to recognize that an effective operation has been performed. You may be able to do it.

Here, the validity period display may suggest only the remaining period of the first validity period, or may suggest other than the remaining period of the first validity period. Further, the validity period display may always suggest the remaining period of the first validity period, or may not suggest the remaining period of the first validity period.

Further, the validity period display may notify the remaining period of the first validity period.

Further, the validity period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, or may be disappeared with the first operating means. It may disappear even in cases other than the case where both of the second operating means are operated. Further, the validity period display may be always erased when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. It may not disappear when both of the operating means are operated.

Further, "The validity period display is a display that does not disappear when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, FIGS. 127 (11) to 127). As shown in FIGS. (12) and 128 (11) to (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 may be used when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. If only the effect button 136 is operated, it will not be deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the valid period display does not disappear, so that the valid operation is not performed. It can be notified, and therefore, it may be possible to urge the player to properly operate the first operating means and the second operating means.

Here, the validity period display may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or other than the first operating means and the second operating means. Even if the operating means of is operated, it may not disappear.

Further, "The first display includes two of the valid period displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (8), the operation promotion notification image includes the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b. Two are included, etc.],
The valid period display is a display suggesting the remaining period of the first valid period [for example, the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed in a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period, etc.] ,
One of the two validity period displays (hereinafter, referred to as "two validity period displays") is a validity period display corresponding to the first operating means (hereinafter, "first validity period display [for example," , The remaining time display bar 136P2b etc. displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 129 (8)] ”.
One of the two valid period displays is a valid period display corresponding to the second operating means (hereinafter, "second valid period display [for example, an effect button image shown in FIG. 129 (8)). The remaining time display bar 136P2a, etc. displayed corresponding to 136P1] ”).
The first validity period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated [for example, FIG. 129 (11)). -As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2b is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated],.
The second validity period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated [for example, FIG. 129 (11)). -As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2a is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

If it is configured so that only the validity period display corresponding to the operated operating means disappears, it is misunderstood that the player has performed an appropriate operation when each operating means is operated without performing an appropriate operation. However, according to this game console, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first valid period display and the second valid period are displayed. Since the display is configured to disappear, it may be possible to recognize that a valid operation has been performed.

Here, the first display may include only two valid period displays, or may include three or more.

Further, the validity period display may suggest only the remaining period of the first validity period, or may suggest other than the remaining period of the first validity period. Further, the validity period display may always suggest the remaining period of the first validity period, or may not suggest the remaining period of the first validity period.

Further, the validity period display may notify the remaining period of the first validity period.

Further, the first validity period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first valid period display may disappear. It may disappear even when both the operating means and the second operating means are not in the operating state. Further, the first validity period display may be always disappeared when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means and the display may disappear. It may not disappear when both of the second operating means are operated.

Further, the second validity period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first valid period display may disappear. It may disappear even when both the operating means and the second operating means are not in the operating state. Further, the second validity period display may be always disappeared when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means and the display may disappear. It may not disappear when both of the second operating means are operated.

Further, "The first validity period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, the remaining The time display bar 136P2b is not deleted when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated],
The first validity period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 130 (11). ) ~ As shown in FIG. 12), the remaining time display bar 136P2b is not deleted when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated],.
The second validity period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, the remaining time display bar]. 136P2a is not deleted when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated],
The second validity period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 130 (11). )-As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2a is not erased when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated]. Game table. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, neither the first valid period display nor the second valid period display disappears. It is possible to notify that an effective operation has not been performed, and therefore it may be possible to urge the player to properly operate the first operating means and the second operating means.

Here, the first validity period display may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or the first operating means and the second operating means may disappear. Even if an operating means other than the operating means is operated, it may not disappear.

Further, the second validity period display may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or the first operation means and the second operation. Even if an operating means other than the means is operated, it may not disappear.

Further, "The first valid period is a period during which both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are valid [for example, shown in FIG. 111 (9). At the timing, the period during which the operation of the right button 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are valid (operation valid period) is started, or it is valid that both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated. Period (operation valid period) is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first valid period may be a period in which only the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are valid, or the operation of the first operating means and the second. It may be a period during which the operation of the operating means other than both of the operations of the operating means of is valid. Further, the first valid period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are always valid, or the operation of the first operating means and the second. In some cases, both operations of the operating means may not be valid.

Further, "The operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 127 (8) is displayed, for example, so that the first validity period is started after the display of the first display is started. After that, the operation validity period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (9)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to recognize that the first validity period will start.

Here, it may be configured that only the first validity period is started after the display of the first display is started, or the first after the display of the first display is started. It may be configured to start a validity period other than the validity period of. Further, the first validity period may be configured to always start after the display of the first display is started, or the first display may be started after the display of the first display is started. It may be configured so that the validity period may not start.

Further, the first validity period may be configured to start only after the display of the first display is started, and the first display may be started even after the display of the first display is started. May be configured to start the validity period of.

In addition, "settings related to the game console" are "settings for executing the power saving mode [for example, eco mode]".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "a game table characterized in that" setting related to a game table "means" time setting ". 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "a symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first effect is an effect whose execution may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (12), the variation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2). Operation result production has started inside],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the first effect is performed during the symbol variation display, it can be applied to, for example, a notice effect, and the expectation for a big hit may be further increased.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display. It may be. Further, the first effect may be such that the execution is always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the execution may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, "The first operating means is a button,
The second operating means is a button.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A plurality of operating means [for example, effect button 136, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, decision button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.] provided at positions that can be operated by the player are provided. It ’s a game table
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.].
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means [for example, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.], and there are a plurality of types. It is configured to be able to perform notification of
One of the plurality of types of notifications is the first notification [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)].
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a second notification [for example, erasing the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5), or the reach state entry notice image shown in FIG. 107 (i). 2071 etc.]
It is configured so that the first notification may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time during the operation valid period, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed. May be reported],
In the state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated during the first valid period, the first notification is not executed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (11), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated during the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 127 (12). When the operation result effect is not performed, or when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 128 (11), as shown in FIG. 128 (12). , Operation result production is not performed, etc.],
In the second validity period, when the first operating means is operated, the second notification may be executed [for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 111 (5). If the effect button 136 is operated while the changing setting screen is being displayed, the volume may be fixed to the set value and the setting screen for changing the symbol may be deleted, or as shown in FIG. 107 (i). When the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed, etc.],
The first valid period and the second valid period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, the symbol is concerned. Until the fluctuation display is completed, the display of the setting screen for symbol fluctuation including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or the operation validity period shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to 107 (j) and the figure. The operation validity periods shown in 111 (7) to (12) are different periods, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the operation means.

Further, according to this game table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operating means and the second operating means, which makes it easier for the player to find a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Here, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions that can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at positions that can be operated by persons other than the player. Good. Further, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate them, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate the plurality of operating means.

Further, it may be configured to execute only a plurality of types of notifications, may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of notifications, or may not execute a plurality of types of notifications.

Further, it is configured so that the first notification may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. It may be configured so that the first notification may be executed even when both the first operating means and the second operating means are not operated. May be good. Further, it may be configured so that the first notification is always executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. However, it may be configured so that the first notification may not be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.

Further, in the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, only the first notification may be executed. It may be configured so that when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, notifications other than the first notification may be executed. Good.

Further, in the state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first valid period, only the first effect is not executed. Alternatively, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the effects other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect may not always be executed, or the first effect may not be executed. It may be configured so that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is operated.

Further, in the second valid period, the second notification may be executed only when the first operating means is operated, or the first operating means may be operated. It may be configured so that the second notification may be executed even in cases other than the above. Further, in the second valid period, the second notification may be configured to be executed without fail when the first operating means is operated, or when the first operating means is operated. , The second notification may not be executed.

In addition, it is provided with "effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, effect movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc."].
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)].
The first notification is the first production.
The second notification is the notification of the result of the setting operation [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5) is being displayed, the volume is set to the set value. It is confirmed, and the setting screen for changing the design is deleted, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first operating means may be used for different purposes.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

In addition, it is provided with "effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, effect movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc."].
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)].
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, the reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (i)].
The first effect and the second effect are different effects.
The first notification is the first production.
The second notification is the second effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first operating means may be shared by different effects.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

In addition, "The first operating means is an operating means that can be changed into a plurality of states.
The state of the first operating means during the first valid period and the state of the first operating means during the second valid period may be different [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n). In the first validity period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates, while in the second validity period, the effect button 136 is a chance, as shown in FIG. 137 (d). The button lamp 138 lights up in red, and there is no vibration or other operation],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to recognize the difference in the required operation between the first valid period and the second valid period due to the difference in the state of the first operating means.

Here, the first operating means may be one that can be changed only to a plurality of states, or may be one that can be changed to a state other than the plurality of states. Further, the first operating means may be one that always changes to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states.

Further, only the state of the first operating means in the first valid period and the state of the first operating means in the second valid period may be different, or the first operation in the first valid period may be different. The state of the means and the state other than the state of the first operating means in the second valid period may also be different. Further, the state of the first operating means in the first valid period and the state of the first operating means in the second valid period may always be different, and the state of the first operating means in the first valid period may be different. And the state of the first operating means in the second validity period may not be different.

In addition, "One of the plurality of states is the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates. State, etc.]
One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138, and an operation such as vibration is performed. Unbroken state, etc.]
The first state and the second state are different states.
The first operating means is an operating means that is more likely to be in the first state than the second state during the first effective period [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), the first operating means. During the valid period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates, etc.],
The first operating means is an operating means that is more likely to be in the second state than the first state during the second valid period [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the second operating means. During the valid period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138, and no operation such as vibration is performed.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means by vibrating the first operating means.

Here, the first operating means may be in the first state or may be in the second state during the first validity period. Further, the first operating means may be in the first state or may be in the second state during the second validity period. Further, the first operating means may or may not always be in the first state during the first validity period, or may not be in the second state. Further, the first operating means may or may not always be in the second state during the second validity period, or may not be in the first state.

In addition, "a plurality of light emitting means [for example, various lamps 418, etc.] are provided.
One of the plurality of light emitting means is a first light emitting means [for example, a chance button lamp 138 or the like].
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the first operating means.
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns.
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is the first light emission pattern [for example, a light emission pattern in which the chance button lamp 138 blinks in red as shown in FIG. 140 (11)]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is a second light emission pattern [for example, a light emission pattern in which the chance button lamp 138 lights up in blue as shown in FIG. 140 (4)]. Yes,
The first light emission pattern and the second light emission pattern are different light emission patterns.
The first state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern.
The second state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting pattern.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means by the light emitting pattern of the first operating means.

Here, the first light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may be capable of emitting light in a light emitting pattern other than the plurality of types of light emitting patterns. Further, the first light emitting means may always emit light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may not emit light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns.

Further, "The first operating means is an operating means configured so that at least a part of it can vibrate.
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the first operating means is vibrating [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is vibrating as shown in FIG. 137 (n)]. ,
The second state is a state in which the first operating means does not vibrate [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 does not vibrate as shown in FIG. 137 (d)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the vibration of the first operating means may make it possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means.

Here, the first operating means may be partially oscillated or may be entirely oscillated. Further, the first operating means may be configured so that at least a part thereof can vibrate, or a part other than at least a part thereof can be vibrated. Further, the first operating means may be configured so that at least a part of the operating means vibrates without fail, or at least a part of the operating means may not vibrate.

In addition, "The first operating means is an operating means that is configured to be rotatable at least in part.
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the first operating means is rotating.
The second state is a state in which the first operating means is not rotating.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the rotation of the first operating means may make it possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means.

Here, the first operating means may be partially rotatably configured or may be entirely rotatably configured. Further, the first operating means may be configured so that at least a part thereof can be rotated, or a part other than at least a part thereof can be rotated. Further, the first operating means may be configured so that at least a part of it rotates without fail, or at least a part of it may not rotate.

In addition, "a symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first valid period is a period that may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (m), during the variation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The first validity period has started, etc.],
In the first valid period, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the first operating means is in the first state than when it is not in the first state [for example, , As shown in FIG. 137 (m), when the effect button 136 vibrates in the first valid period, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, both the first operating means and the second operating means can give a notice by one of the operating means in addition to the effect by the operation, so that the range of the effect of the operating means is widened. In some cases.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

In addition, the first validity period may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started even during the execution of the symbol variation display. May be good. Further, the first validity period may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Further, in the first valid period, the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in the symbol variation display only when the first operating means is in the first state, or in the first valid period, the first is Even in cases other than the case where one operating means is in the first state, the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. Further, in the first valid period, when the first operating means is in the first state, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, or in the first valid period, the first is When one operating means is in the first state, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed on the symbol variation display.

In addition, even if the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the first operating means is in the first state than when the first operating means is not in the first state only during the first validity period. Even in a period other than the first valid period, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the first operating means is in the first state than when it is not in the first state. You may do so.

Further, during the first validity period, the first operating means may always be in the first state, or the first operating means may not be in the first state.

Further, in the first valid period, the first operating means may be in the second state, and in the first valid period, the first intention operating means may be in the second state. In the case of a state, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, "a plurality of operating means provided at positions that can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, decision button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.] It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means [for example, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.].
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.].
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications.
One of the plurality of types of notifications is the first notification [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)].
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a second notification [for example, erasing the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5), or the reach state entry notice image shown in FIG. 107 (i). 2071 etc.]
It is configured so that the first notification may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time during the operation valid period, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed. May be reported],
In the state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated during the first valid period, the first notification is not executed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (11), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated during the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 127 (12). When the operation result effect is not performed, or when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 128 (11), as shown in FIG. 128 (12). , Operation result production is not performed, etc.],
In the second validity period, when the first operating means is operated, the second notification may be executed [for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 111 (5). If the effect button 136 is operated while the changing setting screen is being displayed, the volume may be fixed to the set value and the setting screen for changing the symbol may be deleted, or as shown in FIG. 107 (i). When the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed, etc.],
The first valid period and the second valid period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, the symbol is concerned. Until the fluctuation display is completed, the display of the setting screen for symbol fluctuation including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or the operation validity period shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to 107 (j) and the figure. The operation validity periods shown in 111 (7) to (12) are different periods, etc.],
The state of the second operating means during the first valid period and the state of the second operating means during the second valid period may be different [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n). In the first validity period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates, while in the second validity period, the effect button 136 is a chance, as shown in FIG. 137 (d). The button lamp 138 lights up in red, and there is no vibration or other operation],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the operation means.

Further, according to this game table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operating means and the second operating means, which makes it easier for the player to find a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to recognize the difference in the required operation between the first valid period and the second valid period due to the difference in the state of the second operating means.

Here, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions that can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at positions that can be operated by persons other than the player. Good. Further, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate them, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate the plurality of operating means.

Further, it may be configured to execute only a plurality of types of notifications, may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of notifications, or may not execute a plurality of types of notifications.

Further, it is configured so that the first notification may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. It may be configured so that the first notification may be executed even when both the first operating means and the second operating means are not operated. May be good. Further, it may be configured so that the first notification is always executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. However, it may be configured so that the first notification may not be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.

Further, in the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, only the first notification may be executed. It may be configured so that when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, notifications other than the first notification may be executed. Good.

Further, in the state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first valid period, only the first effect is not executed. Alternatively, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the effects other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect may not always be executed, or the first effect may not be executed. It may be configured so that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is operated.

Further, in the second valid period, the second notification may be executed only when the first operating means is operated, or the first operating means may be operated. It may be configured so that the second notification may be executed even in cases other than the above. Further, in the second valid period, the second notification may be configured to be executed without fail when the first operating means is operated, or when the first operating means is operated. , The second notification may not be executed.

Further, the second operating means may be one that can be changed only to a plurality of states, or may be one that can be changed to a state other than the plurality of states. Further, the second operating means may be one that always changes to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states.

Further, only the state of the second operating means in the first valid period and the state of the second operating means in the second valid period may be different, or the second operation in the first valid period may be different. The state of the means and the state other than the state of the second operating means in the second valid period may also be different. Further, the state of the second operating means in the first valid period and the state of the second operating means in the second valid period may always be different, and the state of the second operating means in the first valid period may be different. And the state of the second operating means in the second validity period may not be different.

Further, "The first valid period is a period during which both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are valid [for example, the right button at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9). The period during which the operation of 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are valid (operation valid period) is started, or the period during which both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are valid (operation valid) is started. Period) will be started, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first valid period may be a period in which only the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are valid, or the operation of the first operating means and the second. It may be a period during which the operation of the operating means other than both of the operations of the operating means of is valid. Further, the first valid period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are always valid, or the operation of the first operating means and the second. In some cases, both operations of the operating means may not be valid.

In addition, "The first operating means is a button,
The second operating means is a button.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A plurality of operating means provided at positions that can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, decision button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.]
Production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, effect movable body 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means [for example, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.].
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 129 (12)].
When both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 129]. When both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time as shown in (11), the operation result effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 129 (12)],.
In a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 127 (11). ), As shown in FIG. 127 (12), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is not performed, or FIG. 128 () As shown in 11) and 130 (11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIGS. 128 (12) and 130 (12), The operation result effect is not performed, or as shown in FIGS. 131 (11 ″) and 131 (11 ″ ″), both the upper button 137a and the effect button 136 are operated at the same time instead of the right button 137d. And an effect different from the operation result effect shown in FIG. 130 (12) (the second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) and the operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″). May be done, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, since the first effect is not performed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Here, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions that can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at positions that can be operated by persons other than the player. Good. Further, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate them, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate the plurality of operating means.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, as the effect means, any appropriate means such as a display means, a sound output means, a light emitting means, a movable body, and a light guide plate for displaying a design can be adopted. Further, the effect means may be composed of a plurality of means, such as a combination of the display means and the sound output means, a combination of the display means and the light emitting means, and the like.

Further, the effect means may be one that can execute only the first effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect, or may not execute the first effect.

Further, it may be configured so that the first effect may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. The first effect may be executed even in cases other than the case where both the operating means and the second operating means are being operated. Further, it may be configured so that the first effect is always executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means. It may be configured so that the first effect may not be executed when both the first effect and the second operation means are operated.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. When both the operation means of the above and the second operation means are operated, the effect other than the first effect may be executed.

Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, it may be configured so that only the first effect is not executed. In a state where only one of the operating means and the second operating means is operated, the effects other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect may not always be executed, or the first effect may not be executed. It may be configured so that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is operated.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of effects is shown in the third effect [for example, the second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12") and the second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ""). Operation result production, etc.]
The first effect and the third effect are different effects.
It is configured so that the first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 129 (7) to (12), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the operation valid period, the effect movable body 225 displays a decorative symbol. While moving to the front side of the display screen of the device 208, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining, and further, a fixed sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
The third effect may be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated during the first valid period. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 131 (11 ″) and 131 (11 ″ ″), when both the upper button 137a and the effect button 136 are operated at the same time instead of the right button 137d, FIG. 130 When an effect different from the operation result effect shown in (12) (the second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) or the operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″)) is performed. Or, in FIG. 129 (11), an operation of either the effect button 136 or the right button 137d may perform a second operation result effect different from the first operation result effect. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, when the simultaneous operation of the first operation means and the second operation means fails (when only one operation means is operated), a third effect different from the first effect Is performed, so that a sense of accomplishment of the player may be given when the first production is performed.

Further, according to this game table, even if the simultaneous operation of the first operating means and the second operating means fails, the player's dissatisfaction can be alleviated by executing another effect (third effect). You may be able to do it.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the third effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the third effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the third effect, or may not execute the third effect.

Further, it is configured so that the first effect may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. Alternatively, the first effect is executed even in cases other than the case where both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated during the first valid period. It may be configured to have. Further, it may be configured so that the first effect is always executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. However, even if it is configured so that the first effect may not be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. Good.

Further, only during the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may be executed. Alternatively, the first effect is executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated even during a period other than the first valid period. It may be configured to have.

Further, in the first valid period, the third effect may be executed only when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. Alternatively, in the first valid period, the third effect may be executed other than the case where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. It may be configured as follows. Further, in the first valid period, the third effect may be executed without fail when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. However, even if it is configured so that the third effect may not be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first valid period. Good.

Further, only during the first valid period, the third effect may be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. Alternatively, even in a period other than the first valid period, the third effect is executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. May be configured to be.

Further, "the effect means includes a first effect means [for example, effect movable body 225, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and a second effect means [for example, speaker 120, effect movable body 225, etc.]. It is a means that has been done
The first effect means and the second effect means are different effect means.
The first effect is an effect executed by using both the first effect means and the second effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 is decorated. The confirmation sound is output from the speaker 120 by moving to the front side of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, or as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moving to the front side, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining.],
The third effect is an effect executed by using either one of the first effect means and the second effect means [for example, in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″). As shown, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but there is no fixed sound output from the speaker 120, or as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), the decoration The character "Gekiatsu" is displayed in the center of the display area of the symbol display device 208, and the operation result is displayed including a display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first effect may be executed as a more flashy effect than the third effect, and the player can simultaneously operate both the first operation means and the second operation means. It may be possible to improve the sense of accomplishment.

Here, the effect means may be configured to include only the first effect means and the second effect means, or may include the effect means other than the first effect means and the second effect means. It may be composed of. Further, the effect means may be configured to always include the first effect means and the second effect means, or include at least one of the first effect means and the second effect means. It may not be available.

Further, the first effect may be executed only by using both the first effect means and the second effect means, or an effect other than the first effect means and the second effect means. It may also be carried out using means. Further, the first effect may be performed without fail using both the first effect means and the second effect means, or both the first effect means and the second effect means may be used. It may not be executed using it.

Further, the third effect may be executed using only one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the first effect means. It may be executed by using an effect means other than any one of the two effect means. Further, the third effect may be executed by always using either one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the first effect means. It may be executed without using any one of the two effect means.

Further, "The first effect means is a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
The second effect means is a movable means [for example, an effect movable body 225, etc.].
The movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movable effects.
One of the plurality of types of movable effects is the first movable effect.
The first movable effect is a movable effect in which at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means [for example, the effect movable body 225 is above the decorative symbol display device 208. To move to the front side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208].
The third effect is an effect executed without using the second effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), the effect movable body 225 does not operate and the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition to displaying the characters "Gekiatsu" in the center of the display area of the device 208, the operation result display including the display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display is performed, etc.],
The first effect is an effect including the first movable effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. , In the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display such that the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a display related to the first movable effect [for example, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc. shown in FIG. 129 (12)].
The first effect is an effect including the second display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first movable effect is performed only when the first operation means and the second operation means are successfully operated at the same time, so that the player may be given a sense of accomplishment. is there.

Here, the movable means may be one that can execute only a plurality of types of movable effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the plurality of types of movable effects. Further, the movable means may always execute a plurality of types of movable effects, or may not execute the movable effects of the reconstituted alcoholic beverages.

Further, the movable means may be one that can execute only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first movable effect. Further, the movable effect may be one that always executes the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

Further, the first movable effect may be one that moves only to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or is movable in front of the display area of the display means. At least a part of the means may move to a position other than the overlapping position. Further, the first movable effect may always move to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or the movable means may move in front of the display area of the display means. It may not move to the position where at least a part of the above overlaps.

Further, the third effect may be executed without using only the second effect means, or may be executed without using any effect means other than the second effect means. Good. Further, the third effect may be executed without always using the second effect means, or may be executed by using the second effect means.

Further, the first effect may include only the first movable effect, or may include an effect other than the first movable effect. Further, the first effect may always include the first movable effect, or may not include the first movable effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

Further, the second display may be a display related only to the first movable effect, or may be a display related to other than the first movable effect. Further, the second display may be a display always related to the first movable effect, or may not be related to the first movable effect.

Further, the first effect may include only the second display, or may include a display other than the second display. Further, the first effect may always include the second display, or may not include the second display.

In addition, it is provided with "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8)].
The third display is a display that does not include an image that imitates the first operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Our right button image 137dP1 is not included],
The third display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means [For example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8), of the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Production button image 136P1 is included, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed during the first valid period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8) is displayed during the operation valid period, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by not displaying an image imitating the first operating means during the first valid period, the simultaneous operation of the first operating means and the second operating means can function as a hidden command. It may be possible, and it may be possible to give a rare value to the appearance of the first production.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display, or may not display the third display.

Further, the third display may not include only an image imitating the first operating means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the first operating means. .. Further, the third display may not always include an image imitating the first operating means, or may include an image imitating the first operating means.

Further, the third display may include only an image imitating the second operating means, or may include an image other than the image imitating the second operating means. Further, the third display may always include an image imitating the second operating means, or may not include an image imitating the second operating means.

Further, the third display may be displayed only during the first validity period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first validity period. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first valid period, or may not be displayed in the first valid period.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the case of the first validity period.

In addition, it is provided with "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8)].
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image that imitates the first operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Our right button image 137dP1 is not included],
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image that imitates the second operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Our production button image 136P1 is not included],
The fourth display is a display including a display relating to the first validity period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8) includes a remaining time display bar 136P2, etc.],
The fourth display is a display that may be displayed during the first valid period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8) is displayed during the operation valid period, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, only the display related to the first validity period may be displayed, and the player can be made to perform various operations during the first validity period in order to see the first effect. There is.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to notify that it is a hidden button effect by displaying the first validity period.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may not include only an image imitating the first operating means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the first operating means. .. Further, the fourth display may not always include an image imitating the first operating means, or may include an image imitating the first operating means.

Further, the fourth display may not include only an image imitating the second operating means, or may not include an image other than the image imitating the second operating means. .. Further, the fourth display may not always include an image imitating the second operating means, or may include an image imitating the second operating means.

Further, the fourth display may include only a display relating to the first validity period, or may include a display other than the display relating to the first validity period. Further, the fourth display may always include a display relating to the first validity period, or may not include a display relating to the first validity period.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the first valid period, or may be displayed in a period other than the first valid period. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the first valid period, or may not be displayed in the first valid period.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the case of the first validity period.

In addition, it is provided with "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B)].
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image that imitates the first operating means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. Our right button image 137dP1 is not included],
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image that imitates the second operating means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. Our production button image 136P1 is not included],
The fifth display is a display that does not include the display relating to the first validity period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B) does not include the remaining time display bar, etc.],
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed during the first valid period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B) is displayed during the operation valid period, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible for the player to perform various operations during the first valid period in order to see the first effect.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to notify that it is a hidden button effect.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

Further, the fifth display may not include only an image imitating the first operating means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the first operating means. .. Further, the fifth display may not always include an image imitating the first operating means, or may include an image imitating the first operating means.

Further, the fifth display may not include only an image imitating the second operating means, or may not include an image other than the image imitating the second operating means. .. Further, the fifth display may not always include an image imitating the second operating means, or may include an image imitating the second operating means.

Further, the fifth display may not include only the display relating to the first validity period, or may not include a display other than the display relating to the first validity period. In addition, the fifth indication may not always include the indication regarding the first validity period, or may include the indication regarding the first validity period.

Further, the fifth display may be displayed only in the first valid period, or may be displayed in a period other than the first valid period. Good. Further, the fifth display may always be displayed in the first valid period, or may not be displayed in the first valid period.

Further, the fifth display may be displayed only in the case of the first validity period.

In addition, "the game console can be set by operating the first operating means [for example, FIGS. 111 (2) to (3) and 127 (2) to (3)). As shown in, when the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, the symbol fluctuation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIGS. 111 (4) to (5) and 127 (FIG. 127). 4) -As shown in Fig. (5), if the right button 137d is operated while the symbol change setting screen is displayed, the volume will increase by one step, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first operating means may be used for different purposes.

Here, the operation of the first operating means may be configured to enable only the settings related to the game console, or the operation of the first operating means may be configured to enable settings other than the settings related to the game console. Good. Further, it may be configured so that the setting related to the game console is always performed by the operation of the first operating means, or the setting related to the game console may not be possible by the operation of the first operating means. ..

In addition, "settings related to the game console" are "settings for executing the power saving mode [for example, eco mode]".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "" setting related to the game console "means" time setting ",
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "a symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first effect is an effect whose execution may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the variation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2). Operation result production has started inside],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the first effect is performed during the symbol variation display, it can be applied to, for example, a notice effect, and the expectation for a big hit may be further increased.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display. It may be. Further, the first effect may be such that the execution is always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the execution may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, "The first operating means is a button,
The second operating means is a button.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Below, I will add what I have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means and
A symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A notice means that can execute multiple types of notices,
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area in the image display means.
The hold display is a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number").
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more notice icons can be displayed.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested.
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the first notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons is larger than the first number when the first number is digested. It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit when it is digested by two numbers,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same mode as the notice.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 3.
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number and larger than the third number during the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
A hold display means capable of displaying according to the number of holds is provided.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The game console described in Appendix 5.
The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 6.
Equipped with a look-ahead notice means that can execute look-ahead notice
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in Appendix 7.
During the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") to be read ahead is being executed, the notice icon may be digested by the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display"), which is executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 8.
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console described in Appendix 9.
The fourth symbol variation is executed during the period during which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "third symbol variation display") is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon that is digested during the period when the display is being executed may start to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 10.
The hold display area is an area in which the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to the eighth number.
The seventh number is characterized in that it is a number different from the eighth number.

(Appendix 12)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11.
Equipped with a production means that can execute multiple types of production
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is the second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice is a notice that the first effect is executed.
The second notice is a notice that the second effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 12.
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 13.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
A game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
While the first symbol variation display is being displayed, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon.
The first notice icon that was started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display that was not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The game console described in Appendix 15.
The first notice icon, which is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display, may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game console according to Appendix 15 or 16.
As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 17.
During the display of one symbol variation display, the case where the first number of the first notice icons are digested is larger than the case where the second number of the first notice icons are digested. Easy to become
The second number is larger than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 18.
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 19.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The game console described in Appendix 20
One of the plurality of types of indications is a fake notice indication.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display.
The display mode of the first false notice display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notice display.
It is configured so that the symbol variation display on which the first false notice display is displayed is out of alignment.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 21.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display.
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is digested, the look-ahead effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 22.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 23.
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 24.
The first notice icon, which is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display, is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 25.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the display means.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 26.
Equipped with production control means
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game console described in Appendix 27.
Main control means and
A symbol display means that can display a symbol variation display,
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 28.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
The first display means that can execute the symbol variation display,
The second display means,
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "held number") in the reserved display area.
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of pending items depending on the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area, and the notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of the notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested.
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the case where the notice icon is digested by the second number larger than the first number is a big hit than the case where the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become
The second display means is displayed in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol change display”), which is the target of pre-reading, is started. A display means capable of displaying the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The game console described in Appendix 30
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game console according to Appendix 30 or 31.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode.
The second display means can display the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 32.
The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The game console described in Appendix 33.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is an image display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is a hold display means.
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
The game console described in Appendix 34.
The game table, characterized in that the hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means.

(Appendix 36)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 32.
The second display means is an image display means.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 36.
During the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be digested by the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display"), which is executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 36.
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely digested by the end of the symbol variation display to be read ahead.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 30 to 38.
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game console described in Appendix 39.
The notice icon that is digested during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is executed during the period during which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to appear,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 40.
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to the eighth number.
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 30 to 41, provided with a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production.
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display.
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed.

(Appendix 43)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 42.
Main control means and
Production control means and
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 30 to 43.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is an effect display.
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed, and the notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is the first. It is a notice icon,
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is the second notice icon.
The first effect display is displayed as the effect display by digesting the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "first number notice icons") in one symbol variation display. Is configured to
The first number of notice icons are notice icons including the first notice icon.
The game console, wherein the first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the second notice icon.

According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic display.

Also, according to this game console, there is a possibility that the first effect display will be displayed from the time when one of the first number icons is displayed until the first number icon is digested. It may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for something.

In addition, according to this game console, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit by making the number of notice icons appear to be a symbol change before the hold to be read ahead.

Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

Further, when the first notice icon is digested, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, or when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding effect display B may be performed, or when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested, the effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be done.

Also, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, and only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. It may be displayed in.

(Appendix 46)
The game console described in Appendix 45.
It is configured so that the first effect display is not displayed even if the second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "second number notice icons") is digested in one symbol variation display. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers.
The second number of notice icons are notice icons including one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the first notice icon and the other notice icon of the second notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon in one symbol variation display is displayed. However, since the first effect display is not displayed, the player who can see the first effect display may be given a sense of superiority.

Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

In addition, there may be an effect display displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

Further, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may change according to the number of the digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be configured to be digested without fail.

Further, even if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured so that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix 47)
The game console according to Appendix 45 or 46.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon.
By digesting the third notice icon, the third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production and enhance the production effect.

The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 47.
When the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is displayed after the third symbol variation display is started. The multiple notice icons may be digested before the end,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be read ahead is completed.

Depending on whether the result of the pre-reading target symbol variation display is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the pre-reading target symbol variation display. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

In addition, depending on whether the result of the pre-reading target symbol variation display is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the pre-reading target symbol variation display. The minimum number of warning icons may be the same or different.

In addition, once the symbol variation display to be read ahead is performed before the symbol variation display to be read ahead (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) in the state where the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held. The maximum number of notice icons that can be digested in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display to be read ahead is a big hit or a loss. It may be the same or different.

In addition, once the symbol variation display to be read ahead is performed before the symbol variation display to be read ahead (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) in the state where the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held. The minimum number of notice icons that can be digested in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display to be read ahead is a big hit or a loss. It may be the same or different.

In addition, the maximum number of notice icons that can be digested by the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading while the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended is , The result of the symbol variation display to be read ahead may be the same or different depending on whether the result is a big hit or a loss.

In addition, the minimum number of notice icons that are digested by the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended is , The result of the symbol variation display to be read ahead may be the same or different depending on whether the result is a big hit or a loss.

(Appendix 49)
The game console described in Appendix 48.
When the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. In some cases,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily become a lower jackpot, so it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be read ahead is completed.

(Appendix 50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 49.
Equipped with a hold display means
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number").
A game table characterized by that.

The hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix 51) The game console described in Appendix 50.
Depending on the number of times the notice icon is displayed, the number of held items is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

(Appendix 52)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 51.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 51.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A game console with multiple display means
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or a light guide plate may be lens-cut and a pattern may appear by irradiating the light guide plate with a light source from the side. , It may be configured by a light emitting means such as an LED, or it may be configured by 7 segments.

Further, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the stock of the notice icon, a display related to the digestion of the notice icon, or a notice of stock of the notice icon. It may be a display, or it may be an effect display executed when the notice icon is digested.

Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The game console described in Appendix 54.
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, one notice icon may be newly displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be digested by the second display means.

(Appendix 56)
The game console according to Appendix 54 or 55.
In the first display means, a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, "display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 54 to 56.
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area.
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area.
The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 54 to 56.
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area.
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area.
The effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means and
Movable means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as "notice icon digestion effect") is performed.
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "first movable means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, although the effect by the movable means may be performed only by the first movable means effect, a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means on which the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The game console described in Appendix 59.
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, the first movable means production may not be performed, and when the 21st notice icon is digested, the first movable means is always produced. Means may be directed.

Further, when the 21st notice icon is digested, an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect having a different operation) may be performed.

Further, when the 21st notice icon is digested, an effect by a movable means different from the 1st movable means may be performed, or the 21st notice icon is digested. And, the effect by the first movable means may be always performed.

(Appendix 61)
The game console according to Appendix 59 or 60.
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game table characterized by that.

Even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed, and when the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) is performed. May be done.

(Appendix 62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 59 to 61.
Equipped with operating means
The movable means is the operating means, and is
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the mode of the operating means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, "change" has a meaning including deformation, displacement, movement, and movement.

(Appendix 63)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 59 to 62.
Equipped with a second means of movement,
The movable means is the first movable means, and is
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "second movable means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display.
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game table characterized by that.

The notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed whenever the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once in the symbol change display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only in one symbol change display without fail.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The game console described in Appendix 64.
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game table characterized by that.

The change in which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66) The game console according to Appendix 64 or 65.
An icon of one of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon is increased by one.

Further, the notice icon displayed on the notice icon increase suggestion display does not have to increase.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of the ghost that the notice icon does not increase.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons are increased. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is 3, only 2 may be increased.

In addition, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The game console according to Appendix 64 or 65.
A game characterized in that the twelfth number of the notice icons among the eleven number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon. The stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means and
Hold display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold display") of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol change display") which is the target of pre-reading is displayed, the first A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
When the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The game console described in Appendix 68.
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a look-ahead display mode.
A game table characterized in that, in the symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the look-ahead display mode.

(Appendix 70)
The game console according to Appendix 68 or 69.
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth hold display") of the lost symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol change display") which is the target of pre-reading is displayed, the third The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is an explanatory display.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area when it is displayed.
When displayed, the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of a selectable effect mode effect mode name. Here, the effect mode includes, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change in the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and a mode for changing the frequency of occurrence of the one-shot notification effect. There is a mode for making it.

Further, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearance animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, and the notice may be made closer to the display position of the animation in the middle. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

Further, here, the "notice icon" may be only one notice icon, may be only a part of the notice icons among the plurality of notice icons, or may be all of the plurality of notice icons. It may be a notice icon of. Further, the "notice icon" may be only the notice icon displayed first among the plurality of notice icons, or a part including the notice icon displayed first among the plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may be completely the same, or a part of the display period of the first display may overlap with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the first display. In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display.

Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time.

Further, the frequency of display may differ between the first display and the second display. For example, if the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. Further, the size of the first display area and the second display area may be different, or the roles of the first display area and the second display area may be different. For example, the notice display may not be performed in the first display area, but the notice display may also be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game console according to Appendix 71 or 72.
The first display is a variable icon display.
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as "first part").
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first part is eliminated.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the relevant and after the next symbol change display is given, rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give new expectations to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the look-ahead notice display is digested.

In addition, the entire display of the second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

Further, during the period in which the variable icon is displayed, the variable icon may at least suggest a feeling of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variable display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display or may be digested in a symbol variation display which is a target of look-ahead.

Further, the notice icon may be always digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayable only by a single number, or may be configured to be displayable by a plurality of notice icons. Here, when displaying a plurality of notice icons, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icons can be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix 74)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 73.
While the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 73.
A game table characterized in that the second display is not started when the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 76)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 75.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is a notice display and is
A game table characterized in that when the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 77)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 76.
The second display area is a line-delimited area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 77.
The phrase "the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed" is described in Appendix 71. Is displayed in the second display area when it is displayed. "
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 78.
The number of the notice icons that are digested is larger in the big hit symbol variation display than in the lost symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the explanation display of the notice icon.
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon.
The explanatory display of one of the plurality of types of explanatory displays is the first explanatory display.
The first explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The jackpot fluctuation has more digested notice icons than the loss fluctuation,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The game console described in Appendix 80.
The game console is characterized in that the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as "first display area") in which the first explanatory display is displayed.

(Appendix 82)
The game console described in Appendix 81.
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanatory display is not displayed in the first explanatory display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 80 to 82.
The explanatory display of one of the plurality of types of explanatory displays is the second explanatory display.
The second explanatory display is a display showing the current production stage.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as "second display area") in which the second explanatory display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game console described in Appendix 83.
Even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the effect stage changes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 80 to 84.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of types of notice icons") as the notice icons.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is the first notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon.
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect.
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is an explanatory display.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 87)
The game console described in Appendix 86.
A game table characterized in that the first display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 88)
The game console described in Appendix 87.
When the notice icon is exhausted, the display of the first display may resume.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 86 to 88.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 86 to 89.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying the effect display.
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display that matches the display of the second display means.
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 86 to 90.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is an explanatory display.
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means.
The game console is characterized in that the notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 92)
The game console described in Appendix 91.
When the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability variation expectation degree.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the reach jackpot expectation level.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the expected degree of jackpot of the character.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured so as not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

It should be noted that the term "notice icon" explained so far is given for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience according to the display mode (motif), and when the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, if the notice icon is a display indicating the skill, it may be called a notice skill, and if the notice icon is a box-shaped one, it may be called a notice box, etc., a display showing the notice + shape (for example) , Notice medal). In addition, the term "notice" in the notice icon is also named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item to indicate that it is to be stored.

(Appendix 93)
Multiple operating means provided at positions that can be operated by the player,
A production means that can perform the first production,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of operating means is the first operating means.
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means.
By operating the first operating means, it is possible to set the game console.
In the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the first effect is performed.
In the first valid period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect is not performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 94)
The game console described in Appendix 93.
Equipped with a display means that can display the first display
The first display is a display that encourages the operation of both the first operating means and the second operating means.
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "first image").
The first display is a display including an image imitating the second operating means (hereinafter, referred to as a "second image").
The first display is a display including a validity period display relating to the first validity period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
In the game console according to Appendix 94, the validity period display in the first display is one.
The validity period display is a display suggesting the remaining period of the first validity period.
The validity period display is a display that does not disappear when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated.
The validity period display is a display that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The game console according to Appendix 94 or 95.
The first image is an image that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated.
The second image is an image that does not disappear when only the second operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated.
The first image is an image that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.
The second image is an image that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The game console described in Appendix 94.
There are two valid period indications in the first indication.
One of the two valid period displays is a valid period display according to the first operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "first valid period display").
One of the two validity period displays is a validity period display according to the second operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "second validity period display").
The first validity period display is a display that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.
The second validity period display is a display that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 98)
The game console described in Appendix 97.
The first validity period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated.
The first validity period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated.
The first image is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated.
The second image is a display that does not disappear when only the second operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated.
The first image is a display that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.
The second image is a display that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 99) The game console according to any one of Appendix 93 to 98.
The "setting operation related to the game console" described in Appendix 93 is an eco-mode setting operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 93 to 98.
The "setting operation related to the game console" described in Appendix 93 is a time setting setting operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 93 to 100.
The first operating means is a button.
The second operating means is a button.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 93 to 101.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 93 to 101.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
It is a game table equipped with a plurality of operating means provided at a position where the player can operate.
One of the plurality of operating means is the first operating means.
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means.
When both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated in the first valid period, the notification of the operation result (hereinafter referred to as "first notification") is performed. It is configured to be
In the first valid period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first notification is not performed. Is composed of
In the second valid period, when the first operating means is being operated, the operation result is notified (hereinafter, referred to as "second notification").
The first validity period and the second validity period are different periods.
The mode of the first operating means in the first valid period and the mode of the first operating means in the second valid period may be different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
The game console according to Appendix 104.
The first notification is a production.
The second notification is the notification of the result of the setting operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The game console according to Appendix 104.
The first notification is the first production.
The second notification is the second production.
The first effect and the second effect are different effects.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to 106.
The first operating means is a means capable of taking a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The first operating means is an operating means configured to take the first aspect more easily than the second aspect during the first valid period.
The first operating means is an operating means configured to take the second aspect more easily than the first aspect during the second valid period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The game console described in Appendix 107.
The first aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means emits light in the first light emission pattern.
The second aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means emits light in a second emission pattern.
The first light emission pattern and the light emission pattern of the valley are different light emission patterns.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
The game console described in Appendix 107.
The first operating means is a means in which at least a part of the first operating means is oscillated.
The first aspect is a mode in which at least a part of the first operating means vibrates.
The second aspect is a mode in which the first operating means does not vibrate.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
The game console described in Appendix 107.
The first operating means is a means in which at least a part of the first operating means is rotatably configured.
The first aspect is a mode in which at least a part of the first operating means is rotated.
The second aspect is a mode in which the first operating means does not rotate.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 107 to 110.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display
The first operating means is a means that may take the first aspect during the first valid period.
In the case where the first operating means takes the second aspect during the first effective period, the symbol corresponding to the big hit is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 112)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to 111.
The first operating means is a button.
The second operating means is a button.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to 112.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to 112.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 115)
It is a game table equipped with a plurality of operating means provided at positions that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of operating means is the first operating means.
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means.
In the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the operation result is notified.
In the first valid period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the operation result is not notified. It is composed and
In the second valid period, when the first operating means is being operated, the operation result is notified.
The first validity period and the second validity period are different periods.
The mode of the second operating means in the first valid period and the mode of the second operating means in the second valid period may be different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 116)
Multiple operating means provided at positions that can be operated by the player,
A production means that can perform multiple productions,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of operating means is the first operating means.
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means.
One of the plurality of productions is the first production,
In the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the first effect is performed.
In the first valid period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect is not performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 117)
The game console described in Appendix 116.
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect, and the first effect and the second effect are different effects.
In the first valid period, the second effect is performed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 118)
The game console described in Appendix 117.
The effect means is a means configured to include a plurality of means.
One of the plurality of means is the first means,
One of the plurality of means is a second means,
The first means and the second means are different means.
The first effect is an effect performed by using both the first means and the second means.
The second effect is an effect performed by using one of the first means and the second means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 119)
The game console described in Appendix 118,
The first means is a display means,
The second means is a movable means,
The second effect is an effect performed without using the second means.
The first effect is an effect including an effect in which at least a part of the movable means is movable in front of the display area of the display means (hereinafter, referred to as "movable effect").
The first effect is an effect including a display effect related to the movable effect by the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 120)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 116 to 119.
A game table characterized in that a setting operation related to the game table can be performed by operating the first operating means.

(Appendix 121)
The game console described in Appendix 120.
The "setting operation related to the game console" described in Appendix 120 is an eco-mode setting operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 122)
The game console described in Appendix 120.
The "setting operation related to the game console" described in Appendix 120 is a time setting setting operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 123)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 116 to 122.
Equipped with a second display means capable of displaying multiple displays
One of the plurality of indications is the first indication,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display includes a display imitating the first operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "first image"). And
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operating means (hereinafter, referred to as a "second image").
The second display is a display that does not include the first image.
The first display is a display displayed in connection with the setting operation.
The first display is a display that may not be displayed during the first validity period.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the first validity period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 124)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 116 to 122.
Equipped with a second display means capable of displaying multiple displays
One of the plurality of indications is the first indication,
One of the plurality of indications is a second indication,
One of the plurality of indications is a third indication,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "first image").
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operating means (hereinafter, referred to as a "second image").
The second display is a display that does not include the first image.
The third display is a validity period display according to the first validity period.
The first display is a display that may not be displayed during the first validity period.
The second display is a display that may not be displayed during the first validity period.
The third display is a display that may be displayed even when the first display and the second display are not displayed during the first validity period.
A game that is characterized by that.

(Appendix 125)
The game console described in Appendix 124.
In the first validity period, both the first image and the second image may not be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 126)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 116 to 125.
The first operating means is a button.
The second operating means is a button.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 127)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 116 to 126.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 128)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 116 to 126.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 has been illustrated and described. For example, a game ball is enclosed in the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and the enclosed ball is circulated and used in the main body of the pachinko machine. The present invention can also be applied to a type pachinko machine, in which the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed ball as a launching ball, and the payout of the ball may be executed by credit.

Further, the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, a spinning game machine (slot machine) that uses a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball).

Here, a slot machine (rotary barrel game machine) as a game table to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. 144. First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1000 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. It should be noted that the figure is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 144 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 144), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, the down winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that this game can be re-played (no medal insertion is required) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041, and the insertion means that both are included. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), which will be described later, and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided at the lower part of the title panel 1062.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Information display button>
FIG. 145 (a) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and FIG. 145 (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. As shown in FIG. 145, the information display button 1046 includes a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 1050. That is, the information display button 1046 is a general term for a plurality of buttons provided in the information display button unit 1050, and more specifically, the decision (call) button 1046O provided in the substantially center of the information display button unit 1050 and the decision (decision). The upper selection button 1046U, the lower selection button 1046D, the left selection button 1046L and the right selection button 1046R provided separately on the left side of the call) button 1046O, and the cancel provided separately on the right side of the enter (call) button 1046O. It includes a button 1046C.

The slot machine 1000 configured as described above is also configured to be capable of setting the above-mentioned eco-mode, setting the original (Daitomo) mode, setting the time, and the like. For example, when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the chance button 1100 in the standby state) is performed in the slot machine 1000, the screen shifts to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), and information is displayed on this setting screen. By appropriately operating each button constituting the button 1046, the various settings described above can be performed.

Further, for example, in an effect requiring button operation, a specific button effect is performed in which both the chance button 1100 and a certain button (for example, the right selection button 1046R) constituting the information display button 1046 are operated at the same time. It may be configured. The buttons requesting operation are the chance button 1100, the medal insertion button 1032, the stop button 1037 to 1039, and the buttons constituting the information display button 1046 (for example, the upper selection button 1046U, the lower selection button 1046D, the left selection button 1046L, right). The selection button 1046R, the enter (call) button 1046O, and the cancel button 1046C) can be appropriately combined. Further, it may be operated in combination with the start lever 1035. Further, the title panel 1062 may be configured to be press-operable, and by operating this in combination with another button or the start lever 1035, a specific button effect may be performed.

Further, in the above-mentioned specific button effect, after the start lever 1035 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012, the first stop operation is performed to stop the first stop reel, and then the second stop operation is performed. It is possible to start at any timing after the second stop reel is stopped and the third stop operation is performed and the third stop reel is stopped. Further, it may be possible to start in a so-called freeze period in which the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is not accepted for a certain period of time. Further, the RTC (Real Time Clock) may be provided so that the RTC can be started in a simultaneous effect executed when a predetermined start time is detected by the RTC.

Further, the operation valid period in which the button operation can be accepted may be forcibly terminated by various operations controlled on the main control circuit side.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

As described above, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Even if the constituent requirements are included only in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and appendices, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments, modifications, and appendices.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 245, other game consoles to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) will be described. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 146 to 245 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 146 to 245, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 146 to 245 are used. In the description using FIG. 245, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 146 to 245 are prioritized.
[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface thereof as an external structure.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 to serve as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

Further, the front frame door 106 is a passage in which a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) can be stored in a portion below the opening 116 and the game balls are guided to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 provided with the above plate 126, the lower plate 128 for storing the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 are discharged to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. The ball removal button 130, the ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as the dollar box) by the operation of the player, and the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 146) by the operation of the player. The chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137 that can perform various settings by the operation of the setter (for example, the player, the game clerk), and the ball for the card unit (CR unit). A ball lending operation button 140 that gives a lending instruction, a return operation button 142 that gives an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a ball lending display unit that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit (shown). ), And. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with.

The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and includes an confirm (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirm button, and a lower button located below the confirm button. It includes a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button. Further, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and the operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 148) by the operation of the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. You may be.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 147 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 146 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 and the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152 are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 149). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and the effect are related based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub board 160 for accommodating a first sub board 160 including a rotary type volume adjustment switch 161 that constitutes a first sub control unit 400 that performs control processing and adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk. A substrate case 162, a second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 that performs control processing related to production based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, and A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and control for launching a game ball. A power source that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 that performs processing, and a power supply control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices, and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a switch 178 and an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to a main control unit 300 when the power is turned on, a payout control unit 600, and a card unit. The CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals, and the relay board 188 that relays between the main board 156, the first sub-board 160, etc., and the hall computer, etc. in order to output the information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer, etc. And are arranged.

Since the main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. need to be changed for each model, they are provided on the back surface of the game board 200, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power supply board 182, etc. are provided. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

FIG. 148 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, a decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center. The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The game board 200 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launch handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side of the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side of the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to the normal symbol start port 228, the normal symbol start port 229, the first special symbol start port 230, the second special symbol start port 232 (open state), the variable winning opening 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between the game ball that falls on the right path and the game ball that falls on the left path.

For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232, and the variable winning opening 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232, and the variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy for the game ball to fall on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible for the game ball to fall on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol start port 228, the first special symbol start port 230, and the variable winning opening 234, a game in which the left path is dropped due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238 and the presence of the warp device 242 and the like. It is relatively easy to enter the ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter the game ball falling on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is given as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various images (moving images or still images) used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

In the lower part of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 are provided. , A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as "general symbol", the special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol", the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2".

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal figure variable games. It is possible to put it on hold. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable game is predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur to a high probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general drawing start opening 228, 229, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, and a special drawing 2 starting opening 232 are variable. The winning openings 234 and 235 are arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls include a ball paid out to the player as a consideration for winning a prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "prize ball") and a ball lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as a "rental ball"). In some cases) and is included.

The normal figure start port 228 and the normal figure start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one normal drawing start port 228 is arranged on the left side path of the game board 200, and one normal drawing start port 229 is arranged on the right side path. The ball that has passed through the Fuzu start port 228 and the Fuzu start port 229 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 or the normal drawing start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one start port 230 is arranged in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. , The special figure variable game (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure 1 variable game") by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is arranged on the right side path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the 210 hits and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. , The special figure variable game (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure 2 variable game") by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called large winning openings or attackers. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is arranged in. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 each include a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member is closed. When the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol by winning the special figure variable game, for example, one of the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing). It opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launching mallet 148. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning openings (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) and the like. Win a prize at the starting port (Special Figure 1 Starting Port 230, Special Figure 2 Starting Port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal drawing starting port 228, 229. Reach mouth 240.

Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. It is arranged. Further, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is arranged on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The fourth symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged vertically side by side. For example, LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to the special figure 1, and the lower lamp corresponds to the special figure 2. The fourth symbol display device 248 may include only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, as in this example, the fourth symbol display device may be provided in the effect device 206 (center accessory). Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. In the front stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the central portion of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the 230.

The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped panel on which the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The effect movable body 224 can be moved in the vertical direction in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player cannot easily see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may be able to visually recognize a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice hole, or the shoji portion of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body to be rearward. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 149. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. ..

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. It is equipped with a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit shall have two counters built-in), a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and an opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower plate full tank sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a special figure 1 display device 212 or a special figure 2 display device 214, and display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal symbol display device 210. To control the display of the drive circuit 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, the normal drawing hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). Drive circuit 330, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of a special start port 232, a door member of a variable winning opening 234, 235, and the like. Is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special drawing 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special drawing 2 starting port 232. , The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main processing of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 issues commands to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that signals can be transmitted, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the sensor 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamps 138). Output from the drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, the shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, the chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and the speaker 120. Volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 149) for adjusting the volume to be adjusted, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors. The sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402 and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read out to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and the image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is connected to a VDP (video display processor) 434 that displays.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. The sensor circuit 518 for outputting to the basic circuit 502, the game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and the game board frame lamp drive for controlling the game board frame lamp 542. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the circuit 540, the game board lamp drive circuit 530, and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 stop and display. The types of figures and general figures will be described. FIG. 150 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and FIG. 150 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. On the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. 2 The variable game of FIG. 2 is started on condition that the start port sensor detects it. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. .. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol referred to in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 occurs. After that, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is displayed from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or after the start of the "variation display of the special figure 2". The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, after the start of this "variation display of special figure 1 or 2", the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays up to this point is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 150A shows seven types of special figures, “special figure A” to “special figure G”, as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of special figure 1. In FIG. 150A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on. "Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit and the number of rounds are determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the big hit game is completed. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game, and after the end of the 7R big hit game, the time is shortened (electric support state). The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special Figure A" and the 7R special jackpot symbol "Special Figure B" are symbols that are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and are 7R jackpot symbols. "Special figure C" is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These "special figure A", "special figure B", and "special figure C" are symbols in which the advantage to the player is relatively large.

"Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called a sudden change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R and "Special Figure B" which is 7R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability change or hidden probability change. As will be described later, when "Special Figure E" is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called) after the big hit game (opening time 100 ms x 2R) ends. If "Special Figure E" is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state after shifting to the latent probability change state), the special figure high probability normal after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms x 2R) ends. It shifts to the high probability state (see FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b)). That is, in "special figure E", the operation during the big hit game and the game state that shifts thereafter are determined by the game state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different pattern.

"Special figure F" is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the "special figure G" is an out-of-line symbol, which is a symbol in which the advantage to the player is relatively small.

FIG. 150 (b) shows four types of special figures, “special figure a” to “special figure d”, as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of special figure 2. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is an outlier symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special figures (of which five are big hits) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used as the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, whereas special figure 2 is used. As the stop symbol mode, four types of special figures (three of them are big hits) of "special figure a" to "special figure d" are used. With this configuration, it may be possible to provide a difference in the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a probable change among the big hits. In this example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes in which almost no balls are ejected, whereas the jackpot in Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. , The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of special figure 1.

FIG. 150 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 9" and "Decoration 10" represent the numbers "1" to "9" and "0", respectively. The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. In the pattern display area, switch the display in the order of "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3"-> ...-> "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

Then, the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", the 7R special jackpot of "Special Figure B", the 7R special jackpot of "Special Figure C", the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", and the 7R special jackpot of "Special Figure b". , When notifying the 7R jackpot of "special figure c", a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-" Decorative 2-Decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When explicitly notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A" and the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-") "Decoration 3", "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7", etc.) are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called the latent probability change (hidden probability change) of "Special Figure E" or the small hit of "Special Figure F", "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. To do. When notifying a 2R jackpot called a sudden change in "Special Figure D", "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of the "special figure G" and the "special figure d", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 150 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 150 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are three types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: the hit symbol "Public figure A" and "Public figure B", and the outlier symbol "Public figure C". Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228 and the normal figure start port 229, the normal figure display device 210 has all seven segments lit and one in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" that repeats lighting of the segment. Then, "Public figure A" or "Special figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the normal figure variable game, and "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed when notifying the loss of the normal figure variable game. To do. Also in FIG. 150 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

First, in step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT314 is set. Allow operation and set initial values. In the present embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage is less than (9 V in this example). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, the first 1 Output port to the sub control unit 400) to output a clear signal, set to allow writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is used. In the case of setting the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. When the power status information is information indicating suspend, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte structure register having an initial value of 0. By doing so, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400 Will be sent to.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the command setting transmission process (command setting transmission process) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, like the power recovery command. In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115 following step S113, the basic random number initial value update process is performed after the interrupt prohibition is set. In this basic random number initial value update process, for generating the initial values of four random number counters for generating the normal figure winning random number value, the normal figure random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value, respectively. The four random number counters for generating initial values, the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal figure, and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map provided in the RAM 308. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in the basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Is started in a predetermined cycle.

First, in step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, WDT is periodically scheduled so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). (In this example, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit).

In step S205 following step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting port 228. It is determined that there was a passage at 229. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229 have been awarded. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the general winning opening 226 is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 following step S205, the basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the main control unit 300 uses the winning random number value and the normal figure. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to.

For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number, and the value is obtained as the initial value. In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value of the normal figure and the special figure 1 random number value generation The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for the purpose and the random number counter for the special figure 2 random number value generation have each made one round. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and a counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211 following step S209, the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the timer for changing / stopping the symbol is clocked on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for displaying the symbol is changed / stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Update various timers including a timer for timing the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S215 following step S213, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229, the prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the number storage area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In step S217 following step S215, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the normal drawing starting opening 228, 229, and the variable winning opening 234, 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

When the special figure 1 start port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start port 230 of the random number value generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 is used. The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 random number value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308 is used as a special figure. 1 Random number values are acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value set with the highest hold order (first) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 hold decreases by one. At the same time, the remaining data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value set are processed so as to be moved up by one. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 hold increases by one, a new special figure 1 is added to the next hold order of the data of the set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value set having the lowest (last) hold order. The data of the winning random number value and the set of the special figure 1 random number value are written.

If there is a prize in the special figure 2 start port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 232 of the random number value generation circuit 318. The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, it is stored in the special figure 2 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, every time the number of special figure 2 holds decreases by one, the data of the set of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value having the highest hold order is deleted, and the remainder is deleted. The data of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value set are processed so as to be moved up by one. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 holdings increases by one, a new special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 data of a set of random numbers is written.

In addition, special figure 1 start information (a set of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a set of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) is newly acquired. In that case, the special figure look-ahead process is executed using the start information. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later.

If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 228 or the normal figure start port 229 and the corresponding normal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is calculated from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. It is acquired as a winning random number value, and the normal figure random number value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the normal figure random number value provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the normal figure random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value in the normal figure random value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of the normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold number storage area. In the normal figure random value storage area, every time the number of normal figure hold decreases by one, the data of the set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value with the highest hold order (first) is deleted, and the remainder is deleted. It is processed so that the holding order of the data of the set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of holdings of the normal figure increases by one, a new winning random number value of the normal figure and a new winning random number value of the normal figure and a new holding order of the data of the set of the winning random number value of the normal figure and the random number value of the normal figure are added to the next holding order. The data of the set of random values is written. When a prize is given to the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a prize is given to the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

In step S219 following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221 following step S219, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal map display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the normal figure hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to display the normal figure display mode, and when the normal figure hit flag is off, the normal figure display is performed so as to display the outlier symbol. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal figure display device 210 has one of a hit symbol (a normal figure A or a normal figure B shown in FIG. 150 (d)) and an outlier symbol (a normal figure C shown in FIG. 150 (d)). The symbol of is confirmed and displayed. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on. When the normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the normal operation in the setting area, during a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the vane member is set to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232. A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is wrong, the normal map hit flag is turned off. When this normal figure hit flag is off, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the number of normal figure variable games and the number of normal figure variable games that are not controlled to open / close the special figure 2 start port 232 (the state of the normal figure is not operating) and are on hold. Is executed using the set of the earliest Fuzu winning random value and the Fuzu random value in the Fuzu random value storage area, with the condition that is 1 or more.

The main control unit 300 acquires the Fuzu start information (a set of the Fuzu winning random value and the Fuzu random value) from the earliest (most previously stored) hold position in the Fuzu random value storage area. A winning / failing determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the acquired random number value for winning the normal figure in the start information of the normal figure and the value of the probability fluctuation flag for the normal figure in the RAM 308 (FIGS. 154 (a) and 154 (b) described later). (See) is used to determine whether to win or miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 hits the normal map determination table (hit shown in FIG. 154 (c)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the normal map random value in the acquired normal map start information and the determined hit / fail determination result. (Refer to the time operation table) is used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the normal diagram. Next, the main control unit 300 selects various tables (for example, a timer number (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal diagram, and the like. The fluctuation display time (timer number) of the normal map is determined using the table), and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal map fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map fluctuation display time.

After extracting the earliest normal figure start information from the normal figure random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest normal figure start information from the normal figure random value storage area and stores the number of reserved numbers in the normal figure. The number of reserved maps in the area is subtracted by 1. At this time, the normal map start information extracted from the normal map random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the normal map start information stored in this temporary area. May be good.

The main control unit 300 sets the normal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 to on when the winning / failing determination result is a hit (winning), and sets the normal figure hit flag to off when the result is unwinning.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 7R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on. Is the special figure a, 7R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 150 (b) is on, the special figure b, 7R jackpot flag is on when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special figure c and the out-of-order flag are on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in each mode of the special figure d, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is specially controlled. Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that the stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a definite display of any one of the special figures a to d.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state). Further, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332) until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning openings 234 and 235. In addition to outputting a signal for holding the door member in the open state, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the closure period in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, the opening / closing control of the door member was repeated a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of the special figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of the special figure 1), and the process was completed. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, the player waits for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. In order to set to, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 and 235 are entered during the jackpot game, and many of the special figure 2 starting openings 232 are reached before the game balls enter. This is to solve the problem that a game ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this jackpot game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. However, in this example, since the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2, the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0). The special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figures A and 7R jackpot flags shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B and 7R jackpot flags are on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C and 2R jackpot flags are on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D and 2R jackpot flags are on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure E, when the small hit flag is on. The 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off so that the special figure F and the special figure G are in the respective modes when the off flag is on, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set. Is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a definite display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In the present embodiment, the special figure variable game having a high advantage (special figure 2 variable game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variable game having a low advantage (special figure 1 variable game in this example). .. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table (see FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (d) described later) is used to make a big hit, or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in special figure 1). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (whether it is correct or not). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table (FIG. 156 (a), which is stored in the ROM 306, based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the determined hit / fail determination result, and the like. (See the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 157 (a)) is used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special figure 2. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table (not shown)).

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. As an example, the special figure 2 variable game with low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and the hold of special figure 1 is held in special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the special figure 2 variable game or the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started in the order in which the special figure variable game is won in the start opening prize. It may be forward fluctuation. In the starting opening winning order change, the maximum number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of pending items.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special figures may be displayed in one area. Further, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command Etc.), Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol change start command and the symbol change stop command related to the normal figure are also included as command types.

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the special figure symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special figure related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes information indicating the timer number selected in step 3, including various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the start command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. is included, and in the case of the jackpot round number specification command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. I try to include it. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 or 235 has been won. Includes information indicating the presence or absence. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data is information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the like. Included in.

In addition, if the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command of the normal figure, the command data includes the values such as the normal figure hit flag, the normal figure miss flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, and the normal figure related lottery process. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the normal map, indicates the values of the normal map hit flag, normal map miss flag, normal map probability fluctuation flag, etc. Is included.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, and special figure probability fluctuation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 1. FIG. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display are displayed via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 151 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 151.

FIG. 153 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process executed in the prize acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and pre-reads the stop symbol before the hit / fail determination process. The determination is made, and the pre-determination result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 153 (b) to (e)) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data ranks. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is determined, for example, by the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 reserved number stored area. Fig. 2 Compared with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, and when the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number. It is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage area as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the number of pre-reads in Special Figure 1 stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit timer interrupt is used. The process returns to the winning process (step S217) of the interrupt process.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the read-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the present embodiment, the increased start information of the special figure 2 is always pre-read, and the increased start information of the special figure 1 is always pre-read except during the electric support. , Whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of special figures 1 and 2 may be decided by lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the read-ahead result.

FIGS. 153 (b) to 153 (e) illustrate a state in which pre-reading result information and the like are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 153 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 153 (b), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 153 (b), the storage area "hold 1" stores "special figure G" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "hold 2" stores "special figure G" as stop symbol information. (Out of line) is stored, "special figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is memorized.

FIG. 153 (c) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 153 (c), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 153 (c), "special figure d" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 153 (c), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

FIG. 153 (d) shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 153 (d), "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

As shown in FIG. 153 (e), in each storage area of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1, not the stop symbol information but the “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is the look-ahead result. It may be remembered as. In the example shown in FIG. 153 (e), the storage area "hold 1" stores "timer 3" as timer number information, and the storage area "hold 2" stores "timer 5" as timer number information. The timer number information is not stored in the storage areas "hold 3" and "hold 4". In FIG. 153 (e), the state in which the timer number information is not stored is described as “none”. Further, when the timer number information is stored in each storage area of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the pass / fail result.

In the above description, an example has been given in which the stop symbol and timer number are pre-determined and the stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit. However, the hit / fail judgment result and the like are pre-determined and the information is pre-read. It may be stored in the result storage unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as pre-reading result information.

Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 157 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

FIGS. 154 (a) and 154 (b) show an example of a pass / fail determination table used when performing a pass / fail determination in the general drawing-related lottery process (step S223). The hit / fail determination table shown in FIGS. 154 (a) and 154 (b) is composed of each item of "normal figure probability", "random number range", and "win / fail result". The item of "probability of normal figure" indicates the probability of normal figure (low probability of normal figure or high probability of normal figure) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of "random number range" indicates the numerical range to be compared with the acquired random number value of the winning normal figure. Here, the range of the winning random numbers in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

The pass / fail determination table shown in FIG. 154 (a) is a pass / fail determination table for a normal map used when the probability of the normal map at the time of the pass / fail determination is low. As shown in FIG. 154 (a), when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

The pass / fail determination table shown in FIG. 154 (b) is a pass / fail determination table for a normal map used when the probability of the normal map at the time of the pass / fail determination is high. As shown in FIG. 154 (b), when this pass / fail determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. Comparing this hit / fail determination table with the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 154 (a), the probability of winning is 100 times. In this way, in the high probability state of the normal figure (during the time saving operation), only the hit may be selected. Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% during the time reduction operation, but the probability that the hit is selected is higher during the time reduction operation than when the time reduction is not operated (normally low probability state).

FIG. 154 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hit operation for ordinary drawings. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the normal symbol random number value when determining the stop symbol in the general symbol-related lottery process (step S223), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, the distribution rate of each symbol). (Equal to the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 154 (c), the distribution rate of each winning symbol when the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal figure variation game is a hit is 50% for the normal figure A and 50% for the normal figure B. The normal figures A and B are symbols in which the electric chew opening operation is executed after the normal figure variable game. In addition, since there is only one out-of-sight symbol selected when the hit / fail determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of out of order. When the normal figure C is selected, the electric chew opening operation is not executed after the normal figure fluctuation game.

As shown in FIG. 154 (c), the opening operation of the special drawing 2 starting port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal drawing A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of stop display in normal drawing A is not activated for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened only for 100 ms, then closed only for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened only for 5400 ms. To do. When the gaming state at the time of stop display in normal drawing A is a time-saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened only for 1800 ms, then closed only for about 2000 ms, opened again for 1800 ms, and then opened. It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), the opening operation of the special drawing 2 starting port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal drawing B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the normal drawing B is not activated in a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the gaming state at the time of stop display in normal drawing B is a time-saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened only for 2400 ms, then closed only for about 2000 ms, then opened only for 1450 ms, and then again. It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for only 1450 ms.

FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (d) show an example of a winning / failing determination table used when performing a winning / failing determination in the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The hit / fail determination table shown in FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (d) is composed of each item of "special figure probability", "random number range", and "win / fail determination result". The item of "special figure probability" indicates the special figure probability (low probability of special figure or high probability of special figure) at the time of hit / fail judgment. The item of "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value or special figure 1 winning random number value. Here, the range in which the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example can be taken is 0 to 65535 (the width of the numerical range is 65536).

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 155 (a) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is low. As shown in FIG. 155 (a), when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 155 (b) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is high. As shown in FIG. 155 (b), when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399. Comparing this hit / fail determination table with the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 155 (a), the probability of a big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of a small hit is the same.

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 155 (c) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is low. As shown in FIG. 155 (c), when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is 0.

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 155 (d) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is high. As shown in FIG. 155 (d), when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is 0. Comparing this hit / fail determination table with the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 155 (c), the probability of a big hit is about 10 times.

FIG. 156 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each). Equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 156 (a), the distribution rate of each jackpot symbol when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is 30% for the special figure A (15R special big hit) and the special figure B. (7R special jackpot) is 25%, special figure C (7R jackpot) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability change jackpot) is 10%, and special figure E (latent probability variation jackpot) is 10%. is there. Special figures A, B, D, and E excluding special figure C are symbols in which the probability change is activated after the jackpot game is completed. Special figure 1 The ratio of the probability variation jackpot (special figures A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

The special figures A, B, and D are the game states (high probability of special figure, low probability of special figure, high probability of normal figure (during time saving operation), low probability of normal figure (time saving not activated) at the time of hit / fail judgment (when the symbol is stopped). Regardless of time)), it is a symbol that the time reduction (no time reduction number setting) is activated after the big hit game is completed. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time reduction (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is activated after the jackpot game is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of winning / failing determination. The special figure E is a symbol in which the time reduction is activated after the jackpot game is completed only when the game state at the time of winning / failing is the special figure high probability state or the normal figure high probability state. That is, when the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, if the special figure E is stopped and displayed multiple times as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure). (It will be in a low probability state), but after the second and subsequent stop displays, the time reduction will be activated (it will be in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). The probability that the time reduction is given in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and 100% in the other game states.

In this example, there is only one type of small hit symbol and one type of miss symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is obtained. If it is out of alignment, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random value of the special figure 1. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and missed symbols may be provided as in the case of large hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

FIG. 156 (b) shows an example of the operation at the time of a big hit in each symbol of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 156 (b), in the big hit game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after the special figure B or the special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the big hit game after the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R.

With respect to the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state when the symbol stop display is displayed. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released for 2R at 100ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released twice for 100 ms at one opening opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 157 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each). Equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 157 (a), the distribution rate of each big hit symbol when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit) and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. The special figures a and b are symbols in which the probability change is activated after the jackpot game is completed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variation game.

The special figures a and b are the game states (high probability of special figure, low probability of special figure, high probability of normal figure (when short-time operation), low probability of normal figure (when short-time operation is not performed) at the time of hit / fail judgment (when the symbol is stopped). ), It is a symbol in which the time reduction (no time reduction number setting) is activated after the jackpot game is completed. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time reduction (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is activated after the jackpot game is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of the winning / failing determination. Special Figure 2 The probability that a time reduction will be given in a jackpot of a variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Therefore, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is incorrect, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random value of the special figure 2. However, a plurality of types of missed symbols may be provided as in the case of the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using the special figure 2 random value.

FIG. 157 (b) shows an example of the operation at the time of a big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 157 (b), in the big hit game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or c is stopped and displayed. In the jackpot game, the attacker is opened for 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1, and the attacker has a long opening time (or a large number of R's). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 has a higher advantage than the special figure 1.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 158 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the input / output port is initialized, the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized, and the like.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. Of the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric chulong opening effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136.

In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S417 following step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 158 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 158 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

FIG. 158 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP434 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is not input. Wait for the incoming signal to be input.

In step S705, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, and if not, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S711, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

FIG. 159 (a) shows the flow of the electric chulong opening effect processing executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 159 (b) shows an example of the electric chulong opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric chew long opening effect is an effect that can be performed during the normal figure variable game, and the special figure 2 starting port (electric chew) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter,) after winning the normal figure variable game. , Sometimes called long opening) It is a production that encourages whether or not to do it. It should be noted that even after the normal map fluctuation is stopped, the electric chew long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "electric chew is being opened!") May be continued based on the normal figure stop symbol.

In the electric chulong opening effect process shown in FIG. 159 (a), in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub control unit 400 in FIG. 158 (a), the symbol variation of the normal figure starts from the main control unit 300. (Start rotation) Executed when the command is received.

The first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric chulong opening effect execution regulation flag that regulates the execution of the electric chulong opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the execution of the electric chulong opening effect is restricted by referring to the value of the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. For example, even if the electric chulong opening effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chulong opening effect cannot be obtained. .. Therefore, in such a case, the electric chulong open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure fluctuation game during the display darkening. Further, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened and the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric chulong opening effect, the game is played. It is possible to perform an electric tulong opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric chulong open effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure variable game is correct or the demo effect.

When the electric chulong opening effect execution regulation flag is turned on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric chulong opening effect is restricted, and regulates the electric chulong opening effect. Other control processes are executed to end this process, and the process returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

When the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric chulong opening effect can be executed, proceeds to step S803, and starts the symbol variation (starts rotation) of the normal figure. From the command data of the command, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail judgment result of the normal figure variation game is hit by referring to the information about the normal figure hit flag and the normal figure miss flag.

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of the hit / miss determination of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S805 and proceeds to the normal figure from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command of the normal figure. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variation game is the normal symbol A.

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the normal figure variation game is normal figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects an effect whose production type is "success pattern", and opens the electric tulong. Set as a production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric chulong opening effect based on the "success pattern", ends this process, and controls the effect of the main process. The process returns to the process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the normal figure variation game is not normal figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose production type is "failure pattern A", and opens the electric tulong. Set as a production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric chulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern A", ends this process, and produces the main process. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of the hit / miss determination of the normal figure variation game is not a hit, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric chulong open false (gase) effect execution lottery process. In the electric Chulong open fake effect execution lottery process, a random number value is taken out from the random number counter for the electric Chulong open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric Chulong open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit.

The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric chulong open false effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination in step S815 (step S817).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric chulong opening false effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is "failure pattern B", and sets the electric chulong opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric chulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern B", ends this process, and produces the main process. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric chulong release fake effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes other control process for not executing the electric chulong release effect, ends this process, and ends the main process. Return to the effect control process (step S409) of.

In the processing of the electric chulong opening effect shown in FIG. 159, when the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric chulong opening effect is always performed if it is a hit. The execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as in the case of the loss, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Further, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set when the electric chew is opened for a short time (short open) (normal figure B), and the "failure pattern" is set when the electric chew is not opened (normal figure C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed for hits (normal figure B) and off (normal figure C).

FIG. 159 (b) shows an example of the electric chulong opening effect. FIG. 159 (b) shows a display effect executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. In front of the background effect, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" move from top to bottom in sequence (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is being executed. A variable icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side of the effect display area 208d, and a variable icon having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the right side of the variable icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying the hold of the special figure is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. An electric chulong open effect area d is arranged on the lower right side of the effect display area 208d. The non-figure variable game is started on the non-figure display device 210 (not shown), the execution of the electric chewlong opening effect is not regulated, and the electric chewlong opening effect is executed in the electric chewlong opening effect area d. As an electric chew long opening effect, along with the display of "Help chance lottery", the image of the samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed, and the special figure 2 start port 232 is won by winning the normal figure fluctuation game. A fanning effect is being performed that makes the player expect the player to open for a long time. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric chulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. In this way, the electric Chulong opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or the variable display of the decorative symbol makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the electric Chulong opening effect. There may be.

Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 of FIG. 160A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S901. In this initialization process, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. .. In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S909 following step S907, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S911 following step S909, the lamp control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S913 following step S911, the movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. After that, the process returns to step S903.

FIG. 160B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

FIG. 160 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 173.

FIG. 161A shows an example of a look-ahead notice lottery table used when a look-ahead notice lottery is performed in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 158. The look-ahead lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the look-ahead result information command including the look-ahead result information from the main control unit 300, and the display mode of the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the look-ahead result by the look-ahead notice lottery. Is determined. The look-ahead notice lottery table shown in FIG. 161 (a) is composed of each item of "look-ahead notice mode", "big hit", and "missing".

The “look-ahead notice mode” in the left column of the figure indicates a display mode of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. "White" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a white circle, "black" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a black circle, and "heat" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is in a circle. "Heat" indicates that the character is drawn, and "white → black" indicates that a change animation (details will be described later) in which the display mode of the hold icon changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. , "Black → heat" indicates that a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon changes from a black circle to a mode in which the characters "heat" are drawn in a circle. In the present embodiment, the default display mode of the hold icon is a white circle. If the look-ahead result includes undetermined information, the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the look-ahead result may be displayed in the default display mode without executing the look-ahead notice lottery.

The "big hit" in the middle column of the figure is a look-ahead lottery random number acquired from a look-ahead lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the look-ahead notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the look-ahead result is a big hit. The distribution rate of the random number range of the look-ahead notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each look-ahead notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), when the look-ahead notice result is a big hit, the distribution rate of each look-ahead notice mode is 80% for "white", 2% for "black", and "heat". It is 7%, "white → black" is 3%, and "black → heat" is 8%.

The "missing" in the right column of the figure is the look-ahead lottery random number acquired from the look-ahead lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when determining the look-ahead notice mode in the effect control process (step S409) when the look-ahead result is wrong. The distribution rate of the random number range of the look-ahead notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each look-ahead notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), when the pre-reading notice result is out of order, the distribution rate of each pre-reading notice mode is 94% for "white", 2% for "black", and "heat". It is 1%, "white → black" is 2%, and "black → heat" is 1%.

FIG. 161 (b) shows an example of a notice lottery table at the start of fluctuation (after a big hit determination) used when performing a notice lottery in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 158. Is shown. The advance notice lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change start command from the main control unit 300, and the advance notice lottery determines the mode of the advance notice effect for the special figure change game being executed. The lottery table for advance notice at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 161 (b) is composed of each item of "notice mode", "big hit", and "missing". The “notice mode” in the left column of the figure indicates a mode of notice executed by using the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect movable body 990. "Logo drop" indicates that the notice is executed in a mode in which the movable body 990 for production moves downward, and "rotation" indicates that the notice is executed in a mode in which the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated. "Logo drop + rotation" indicates that the movable body 990 for production moves downward, and the notice is executed in such a manner that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates, and "None" indicates that. It indicates that the advance notice effect is not executed.

The "big hit" in the middle row of the figure is the notice lottery random number acquired from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. The distribution rate of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), when the notice result is a big hit, the distribution rate of each notice mode is 4% for "logo drop", 7% for "rotation", and "logo drop + rotation". Is 14%, and "none" is 75%.

The "missing" in the right column of the figure is the advance notice lottery random number acquired from the advance notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the advance notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the hit / fail determination result is out of order. The distribution rate of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), when the notice result is out of order, the distribution rate of each notice mode is 3% for "logo drop", 2% for "rotation", and "logo drop + rotation". Is 1%, and "none" is 94%.

In addition, the notice mode of "logo drop" may be different depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not. For example, the distance at which the effect movable body 990 moves downward may be different depending on the case of a big hit and the case of a miss, or the speed at which the effect movable body 990 moves may be different. In addition, the notice mode of "rotation" may be different depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not. For example, in the case of a big hit, the image is rotated once, and in the case of a miss, the rotation display is ended and the normal display is returned without rotating the image once. The image may be rotated once even if it is out of alignment. Further, for example, the rotation angle of the image may be different, the angular velocity of the image rotation may be different, or the rotation direction of the image may be different depending on whether the hit is a big hit or not. The images to be rotated may be different. In addition, the notice mode of "logo drop + rotation" may be different as described above depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not.
(Example 1)
An production example of the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 162. Further, in FIG. 162 and each figure described later, production examples of the special figure 1 variable game in each embodiment are shown in chronological order. Further, the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is indicated by a thick white arrow.

First, with reference to FIG. 162 (a), the common points of FIG. 162 and each of the figures described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the upper left portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative frame f1 having the shape of an inverted “L” is displayed. A square special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 is provided in the upper left portion of the decorative frame f1, and a square special figure 2 reserved number display area 932 is provided to the right of the square special figure 1 reserved number display area. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 is provided below the 931 and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934 is provided below the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as a number, and for example, "0" is displayed when there is no hold of the special figure 1. In the special figure 2 hold number display area 932, the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no hold of the special figure 2, "0" is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, "/" is used to notify that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed as the variable display of the fourth symbol. , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when the special figure 1 is stopped display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display. The image is displayed. "-" Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, and "○" is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, "/" is notified as the variable display of the fourth symbol that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed. , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when the special figure 2 is stopped display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display. The image is displayed. "-" Is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, and "○" is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game.

A horizontally long rectangular decorative frame f2 is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the decorative frame f2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 940 in which a part of the left and right frames is open is provided. The variable icon may be displayed in a display size different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 930 described later (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon.

A special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth holding order of the special figure 1. That is, the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most memorized in the past) special figure 1 hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed respectively. Similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth holding order of the special figure 2. That is, the special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most memorized in the past) special figure 2 hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed respectively. Further, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960, various animations representing the movement of the hold icon are executed.

A square navigation character display area 970 is provided on the left side of the special figure 1 hold display area 950. The merchant character image h1 is displayed in the navigation character display area 970. The merchant character image h1 is used for an explanatory effect such as a tutorial effect and a notice (notice of the change or a look-ahead notice).

A square-shaped effect custom state display area 980 is provided on the right side of the special figure 2 hold display area 960. In the effect custom state display area 980, "levels 1 to 99" are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 100. The level of the effect custom state is set to increase, for example, by performing an effect with a low appearance rate. The level of the effect custom state may be set to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big hit is won.

FIG. 162 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" notifying the loss is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game was out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

FIG. 162 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0.

Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. The right-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the variable icon 941 in FIG. 162 (b) indicates the moving direction of the variable icon 941.

In FIG. 162 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variable icon 941 is displayed in the variable icon display area 940. Indicates the state in which is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and white in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 in FIG. 162 (b) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 952. Further, in FIG. 162 (c), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. .. The balloon image is an image used for a notice by the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 162 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 in FIG. 162 (d) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 953. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and an effect that is expected to develop into a reach effect is executed. Further, the hold change image h2 having a substantially quadrangular shape including the image of the character string of "hold change" is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. .. The hold change image h2 is an image displayed to notify that a look-ahead notice or an effect of the change notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon being displayed is executed. In this example, the hold change image h2 notifies that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed. The hold change image h2 may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1 is changed, or may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 2 is changed. It may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or it may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is changed. The display may appear only when the hold icon and the change icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or appear only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2, and the change icon are changed. It may be a display.

In FIG. 162 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. In addition, an erase animation is displayed in which the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 moves downward, and the variable icon 941 is gradually erased. Further, FIG. 162 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of a lightning strike from the hold change image h2 to the special figure 1 hold icon 952 is displayed, and an effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special figure 1 hold icons 952 and 953, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon 952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are hidden by the effect image.

FIG. 162 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. Further, in FIG. 162 (f), the change animation ends, the hold change image h2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 162 (e) are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. It's changing.

FIG. 162 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, the special figure 1 hold icon 952 becomes a variable icon, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and the move animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are started. ing. Further, in FIG. 162 (g), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. ..

FIG. 162 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 162 (h), an image of the character string of "Don-" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, suggesting that the character image h3 of the character image h3 described later appears. The production is being executed. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 162 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the character string "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. In addition, an image of the character string "Don!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 162 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1, and then "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace.

In FIG. 162 (k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target image” in this embodiment) are the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of being rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in FIG. 162 (k), the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed and displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated that is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise is taken with the horizontal axis in the direction rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. Aspect ratio of the case. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated after rotation is the aspect ratio when the horizontal axis is taken in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis is taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. .. For example, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image when the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player is the rotation target image in a state where the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° clockwise when viewed from the player. It shows the ratio of the vertical length to the horizontal length of. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

The image to be rotated before rotation shown in FIG. 162 (j) is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). The rotation target image shown in 162 (k) is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the palace, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so as to be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. To. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

FIG. 162 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 162 (k). Shown. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 162 (l), the rotation target image is displayed as a whole without being cut off.

FIG. 162 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total rotation 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 162 (l). Shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation.

FIG. 162 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 162 (m). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 162 (n), the pending change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 162 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the palace, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so as to be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. To.

FIG. 162 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 162 (n). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 162 (o), the image to be rotated is not completely cut off. Further, FIG. 162 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In this effect, an animation is executed in which lightning strikes from the pending change image h2 and strikes a variable icon displayed in a black circle. The lightning strike variable icon overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 162 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second region of the 950 shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation.

FIG. 162 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 162 (o). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 162 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping with the entire change icon 941 are erased, and the character "heat" is drawn in the circle. A variable icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 162 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 162 (p). , Indicates a state in which the image to be rotated has rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 162 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed. The downward arrow shown in the upper left of the variable icon in FIG. 162 (r) indicates the moving direction of the variable icon.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed. A character image may be used as the rotation target image, and the presence of the character image may be enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, which may give a strong impression to the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated once (360 ° rotation), but the rotation target image may be rotated by one rotation or more. For example, the jackpot reliability may be set to increase as the number of rotations of the image to be rotated increases.

The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. In some cases, the work area of the VRAM 436 may be used to generate a display image. In addition, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated using random numbers, and generates a display image from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio using the work area of the VRAM 436. May be done. Further, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced so as to keep the display area of the rotation target image constant. The aspect ratio may change.

In this embodiment, the image to be rotated has the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation, but the image to be rotated may have the center of rotation at an arbitrary position of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. May be good. Further, the image to be rotated may be rotated around a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated. It may be rotated as an axis. Further, in this embodiment, the angular velocity of rotation of each image in the image to be rotated is constant, but the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be different depending on the distance from the center of rotation. For example, the farther the distance from the center of rotation is, the slower the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be. In this case, it may be possible to give the player the impression that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks. Further, in the present embodiment, an effect of changing the change icon is performed during the rotation display notice effect as a notice of the symbol change display being executed. For this reason, it may be possible to synergistically raise expectations for the special figure variation game being executed by performing these effects at the same time.
(Example 2)
An example of the production of the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (r) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. FIG. 163 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as shown in FIG. 162 (a). Next, FIG. 163 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 162 (b). Next, in FIG. 163 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 ends, and the variable icon display area 940 is displayed. The variable icon 941 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon 952 appears by the increasing animation of the hold icon. Further, FIG. 163 (c) shows immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

FIG. 163 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

In FIG. 163 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. Next, FIG. 163 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 162 (f). Next, FIG. 163 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 162 (g). Next, FIG. 163 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 162 (h). Next, FIG. 163 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed, which is the same as FIG. 162 (i). Indicates the state.

FIG. 163 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1, and then "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace.

FIG. 163 (k) shows a decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a pending change image h2, a character image h3 of the palace, a blowout image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the palace, a decorative frame f2, and a decorative frame f2. An image (holding icon, variable icon, merchant character image h1, etc.) displayed inside, and a blowout image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "rotation target image" in this embodiment. (A) indicates a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the image display area as the center of rotation. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, the decorative frame f1 and the image displayed in the decorative frame f1 (holding number display, first 4 Symbol images) (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images” in this embodiment) are not rotated, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target images does not change. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotational target images may be displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 163 (k) is displayed. The target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the palace, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so as to be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. To. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

FIG. 163 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 163 (k). Shown. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 163 (l), the rotation target image is displayed as a whole without being cut off.

FIG. 163 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 163 (l). Shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Further, the decorative frame f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative frame f2. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative frame f2.

FIG. 163 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 163 (m). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 163 (n), the pending change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 163 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the palace, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so as to be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. To.

FIG. 163 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 163 (n). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 163 (o), the image to be rotated is not completely cut off. Further, FIG. 163 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In this effect, an animation is executed in which lightning strikes from the pending change image h2 and strikes a variable icon displayed in a black circle. The lightning strike variable icon overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 163 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second region of the 950 shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation.

FIG. 163 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 163 (o). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 163 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping with the entire change icon are erased, and the change in the mode in which the characters "heat" are drawn in the circle. The icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 163 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 163 (p). , Indicates a state in which the image to be rotated has rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 163 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed. For the non-rotating target image, the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area and the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area are used. For this reason, the image that conveys important information for the player is not rotated.
(Example 3)
An example of the production of the third embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (r) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. 164 (a) to 164 (h) show the same state as in FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (h). Next, in FIG. 164 (i), the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display area 208d. The character image h3 of the palace and the decorative frame f2 are displayed overlapping, and a part (chin part) of the character image h3 of the palace is hidden by the decorative frame f2. Further, FIG. 164 (i) shows the same state except that the display positions of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h3 of the palace are different from those of FIG. 163 (i). Next, FIG. 164 (j) shows the same state except that the display positions of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h3 of the palace are different from those of FIG. 163 (j).

FIG. 164 (k) shows a balloon image representing the lines of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image h3 of the palace, and the character image h3 of the palace (hereinafter, in this embodiment, these images are referred to as “). (Sometimes referred to as a “rotation target image”) indicates a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the image display area as the rotation center. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment, the image displayed in the decorative frame f1, the decorative frame f1, the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f2 are displayed. The rotation display of the image and the blowout image representing the dialogue of the grandfather character (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as "non-rotation target image" in this example) is not executed, and the non-rotation target image is not executed. Aspect ratio does not change. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotational target images may be displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

In FIG. 164 (k), the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed and displayed. The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 164 (k) is displayed. The aspect ratio of the target image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. Further, in the character image h3 of the palace, the hidden chin portion is displayed. Further, a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is cut off in the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, FIG. 164 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 164 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 164 (l). Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, FIG. 164 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 164 (m). The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. Further, in FIG. 164 (n), the pending change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 164 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

FIG. 164 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, FIG. 164 (o) shows a state in which an effect (animation of changing the variable icon) for changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect of the present embodiment, the lightning generated from the pending change image h2 is displayed so as to fall at a position different from the change icon of the change target. In addition, the variable icon of the non-rotating target image changes from a black circle to a form in which the characters "heat" are drawn in a circle at the timing when lightning is generated from the pending change image h2 and the effect image is displayed. ing. In this embodiment, since the changing variable icon is not hidden by the effect image, the changed variable icon can be visually recognized earlier than when the changing variable icon is hidden by the effect image.

FIG. 164 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. The pending change image h2, the lightning image, and the effect image have been erased. Next, FIG. 164 (q) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 164 (p) and returned to the original state. Shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio. Next, in FIG. 164 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed. As the non-rotating target image, an image such as a fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area, a hold number display, a hold icon, and a variable icon displayed in the hold number display area is used. For this reason, the image that conveys important information for the player is not rotated.
(Example 4)
An example of the production of the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (r) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (i) show the same state as in FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (i).

FIG. 165 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1, and then "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. Further, FIG. 165 (j) shows a decorative frame f2, an image displayed in the decorative frame f2 (hold icon, variable icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and a blowout image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1. It has been erased.

FIG. 165 (k) is a balloon image representing the lines of the decorative symbol, the pending change image h2, the character image h3 of the palace, and the character image h3 of the palace displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, in this embodiment, (Sometimes referred to as a “rotation target image”) indicates a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the image display area as the rotation center. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, the image displayed in the decorative frame f1 and the decorative frame f1 (hereinafter, in this example, These images may be referred to as "non-rotating target images"), and the rotation display is not executed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotating target image does not change. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotational target images may be displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Further, in FIG. 165 (k), the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed and displayed. The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 165 (k) is displayed. The aspect ratio of the target image changes according to the aspect ratio of the screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

FIG. 165 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 165 (k). Shown. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 165 (m), the image to be rotated was rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 165 (l). Indicates the state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Further, the decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol. Next, in FIG. 165 (n), the image to be rotated was rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 165 (m). Indicates the state. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. Further, in FIG. 165 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the hold change image h2g is a decoration displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed overlapping with the design and the character image h3 of the palace. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 165 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

FIG. 165 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 165 (n). Shown. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, FIG. 165 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. The effect is different from the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon during the rotation display notice effect of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present embodiment, and the lightning generated from the pending change image h2 is changed. It is displayed so that it does not fall on the target variable icon. Further, the variable icon of the non-rotating target image is displayed in a circle at the position of the variable icon display area 940 before the rotation display notice effect is executed at the timing when the effect image is displayed due to the lightning generated from the pending change image h2. The variable icon 942 in the form in which the characters "heat" are drawn temporarily overlaps with the pending change image h2 and "decoration 3", and takes precedence over the pending change image h2 and "decoration 3" to the front side. It is displayed. Therefore, the player can temporarily confirm that the variable icon has changed.

FIG. 165 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 165 (o). Shown. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, the pending change image h2, the lightning image, the effect image, and the change icon 941 have been deleted. Next, in FIG. 165 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 164 (p). It shows the restored state. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio. In addition, the erased decorative frame f2, the image displayed in the decorative frame f2 (hold icon, variable icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 are displayed. There is. Next, in FIG. 165 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed.

In this way, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed, the images such as the hold icon and the variable icon, which are important information for the player, are intentionally not displayed. , The player may be able to pay attention to the rotation display of the rotation target image. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the effect of changing the variable icon is performed even though the variable icon is not displayed. For this reason, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise. In addition, the player's expectation may be satisfied by displaying only the variable icon that has changed temporarily during the effect of changing the variable icon. Further, the variable icon may be temporarily or may not be displayed until the rotation display of the rotation target image is completed. In this case, since it takes a predetermined time from the end of the change animation of the change icon to the display of the change icon, it may be possible to amplify the expectation of the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, an effect of changing the hold icon may be performed even though the hold icon is not displayed.
(Example 5)
An example of the production of the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (l) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. Further, the pachinko machine 100 used in this embodiment and Examples 6 to 9 described later has a sub display device 209 mounted on the movable body 225 for production. The movable body 225 for effect can be two-dimensionally moved up and down and rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). .. The effect movable body 225 may be capable of operating three-dimensionally. Further, the sub-display device 209 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub display device 209, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLumisense) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the sub display device 209 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400 in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub-display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 166 (a), the sub display device 209 (effect movable body 225) is located at the initial position.

FIG. 166 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. As described above, in FIG. 166 (b), the movement animation between the hold / change icons is executed.

FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons is completed and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Further, FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. In this example, the character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 166 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the rotation display of the character image h3 of the palace is executed in the sub display device 209. FIG. 166 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed on the sub display device 209 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “rotation target image” in this example) has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. It shows a state of being rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise. Further, in FIG. 166 (d), the rotation target image is displayed with the aspect ratio of the image changed. The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the sub display device 209), whereas the image to be rotated is shown in FIG. 166 (d). The aspect ratio of the image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 166 (e) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 166 (d). Is shown. In addition, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 166 (f) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is in the state shown in FIG. 166 (e) or is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 135 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5.

FIG. 166 (g) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 166 (f). ing. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, FIG. 166 (h) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 166 (g). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 166 (i) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 166 (h). Is shown. In addition, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 166 (j) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 166 (e). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, in FIG. 166 (k), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 166 (j). It shows the state of returning to. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 166 (l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the sub-display device 209, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. Further, by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change when the rotation target image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated and displayed. A character image is used as the rotation target image. By changing the aspect ratio of the character image, the presence of the character image may be enhanced, which may have an impact on the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the image to be rotated is rotated once (360 °), but the image may be rotated by one rotation or more. For example, the higher the number of rotations of the image to be rotated, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be.

Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. A display image may be generated from the data using the work area of the VRAM 436. In addition, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated using a random number, and based on the aspect ratio, the display image is displayed from the image data stored in the ROM 406 using the work area of the VRAM 436. It may be generated. Further, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced so as to keep the display area of the rotation target image constant. The aspect ratio may change.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center, but the rotation target image may have an arbitrary position of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. May be good. Further, the image to be rotated may be rotated around a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position of the image display area of the sub display device 209 may be rotated. It may rotate as a rotation axis.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angular velocity of rotation of the image to be rotated is constant, but the angular velocity of rotation of the image to be rotated may be different depending on the distance from the center of rotation. For example, the farther the distance from the center of rotation is, the slower the angular velocity of rotation of the image to be rotated may be. In this case, it may be possible to give the player the illusion that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks.
(Example 6)
An example of the production of the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 (l) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 has a hold display area 209b for displaying a hold number display image at the lower left. In FIG. 167 (a), in the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209, “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed as the hold number display image.

FIG. 167 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. In this way, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is executed. Further, in the hold display area 209b at the lower left of the sub display device 209, "0" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 0 is displayed as the hold number display image.

FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons is completed and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Further, FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the character image h3 of the palace is rotated by 360 ° counterclockwise. FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 moves from the front position of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower position, and rotates 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Shows the state of Further, the hold display area 209b at the lower left of the sub display device 209 has been moved to the upper left part of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed rotated by °.

FIG. 167 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 167 (d). Is shown. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed with ° rotation (90 ° rotation in total). Next, in FIG. 167 (f), the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 135 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 167 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Shows the state of Further, the hold display area 209b in the upper left portion of the sub display device 209 has been moved to the upper right portion of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 135 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 167 (g), the sub-display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 167 (f) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation (total rotation of 180 °). Shows the state of Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 180 ° in total).

FIG. 167 (h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 167 (g). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 209b in the upper right part of the sub display device 209 has been moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the "0" image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. (Rotated by 225 ° in total) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 167 (i), the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 167 (h) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation (total rotation of 270 °). Shows the state of Further, the "0" image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed (rotated by 270 ° in total).

FIG. 167 (j) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 167 (i). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 209b at the lower right of the sub display device 209 has been moved to the original position at the lower left of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 315 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 167 (k), the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 167 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation (total 360 ° rotation). Shows the state of Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed by rotating (rotating 360 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 167 (l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. Indicates a state in which the presence is notified. Further, the sub-display device 209 erases the character image h3 of the palace, and the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the variable icon 941 by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward. The animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated and displayed by rotating the sub display device 209. Further, when the sub display device 209 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode in which the player does not rotate. Further, the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 209 as viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 209. Therefore, during the rotation of the sub-display device 209, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 209, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated to rotate the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol may be rotated. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 209 at the same time or continuously, an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 may be performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 209 may be immovably fixed to the game board 200.
(Example 7)
An example of the production of the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (l) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 168 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 166 (a). Next, FIG. 168 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 166 (b). Next, in FIG. 168 (c), the decorative symbol variation display is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variation icon ends, and the variation icon display area A state in which the variable icon 941 is displayed on the 940 is shown. Further, FIG. 168 (c) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is moved downward and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub-display device 209. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 168 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 168 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise with respect to the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 209. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. Next, FIGS. 168 (e) to 168 (k) show a state in which the sub-display device 209 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 168 (e) to 168 (k), the character image h3 of the palace is rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. Therefore, during the rotation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace is always visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotating. Next, in FIG. 168 (l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, the sub-display device 209 erases the character image h3 of the palace, and the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the variable icon 941 by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward. The animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, while rotating the sub display device 209, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated in the direction opposite to that of the sub display device 209 at the same speed. , The character image is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Therefore, even though the sub-display device 209 is rotating, the image displayed on the sub-display device does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness. Further, in this embodiment, the character image is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, but the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. In some cases, the character image may be rotated at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 209, or at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. The character image may be rotated at different speeds.
(Example 8)
An example of the production of the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIGS. 169 (a) to 169 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 169 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 166 (a). Next, FIG. 169 (b) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves downward and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed on the sub display device 209, showing the same state as in FIG. 168 (c). .. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). Further, FIG. 169 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (b). .. The image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 at the lower left of the palace character image h3, and the princess character image h3 and the princess character image h4 are This is image data in a non-rotating manner. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. FIG. 169 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 centered on the center of the image data is cut out and used as display data. FIG. 169 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (b-2).

FIGS. 169 (c) to 169 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then clockwise. Is rotated 45 °. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 169 (c) to 169 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. Further, the arrows shown in the drawings of FIGS. 169 (c) to 169 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

FIG. 169 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 169 (b). .. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 209, a part of the character image h4 of the princess, which has been cut off from the sub-display device 209, is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 169 (c-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1) is rotated by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 169 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1). FIG. 169 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (c-2), and the sub display device 209 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (b). Shows the state rotated by 30 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 169 (c).

FIG. 169 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 169 (c). .. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 209, the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player in the lower left. Further, FIG. 169 (d-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) is rotated clockwise by 15 ° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 169 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1). FIG. 169 (d-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (d-2), and the sub-display device 209 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (e). Shows the state rotated by 15 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 169 (d).

FIG. 169 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub-display device 209. Further, FIG. 169 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 169 (e-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (e-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation, and is shown in FIG. 169. It is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). FIG. 169 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (e-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 169 (c-2). FIG. 169 (e-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (c-2), and the sub-display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (d). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 169 (d) is shown. FIG. 169 (e-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 169 (c-3).

In FIG. 169 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates the notified state. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is displayed. Further, in FIG. 169 (f), the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 169 (e) to return to the original state. It shows the state. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the sub-display device 209 does not display the princess character image h4. FIG. 169 (f-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (f-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 169 (e-1) is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation, and is shown in FIG. 169. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). FIG. 169 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (f-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 169 (b-2). FIG. 169 (f-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (f-2), and the sub-display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (e). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 169 (f) is shown. FIG. 169 (f-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 169 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated at the same speed in the direction opposite to that of the sub display device 209 while rotating the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the palace is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image h4 of the princess that was cut off in the sub display device 209 before the rotation display notice effect is executed is the rotation display of the image displayed on the sub display device 209. Is displayed on the sub-display device 209. Further, the character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 is rotated by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of this implementation, the character image h4 of the princess is displayed by rotating the sub display device 209, but the character corresponding to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed is displayed. You may try to do it. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the palace may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the princess character image h4, the sub-display device 209 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle to display the enemy of the palace. Characters may be displayed. Further, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect.
(Example 9)
An example of the production of the ninth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIGS. 170 (a) to 170 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 170 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 166 (a). Next, in FIG. 170 (b), the decorative symbol variation display is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variation icon ends, and the variation icon display area The variable icon 941 is displayed on the 940. Further, in FIG. 170 (b), the sub display device 209 is moved downward, and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209, and the character image h1'of the merchant is displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209. It shows the state that was done. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). Further, the merchant character image h1'is the same character image as the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970. Further, FIG. 170 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (b). .. The image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 at the lower left of the palace character image h3, and the princess character image h3 and the princess character image h4 are This is image data in a non-rotating manner. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. FIG. 170 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 centered on the center of the image data is cut out and used as display data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (b-2) is located at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) of the first sub-control unit 400. It is the display data in which the character image h1'of the merchant read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 170 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (b-2). Further, the character image h1'of the merchant is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) is displayed with priority over the character image h1'of the merchant. It may be displayed with priority.

FIGS. 170 (c) to 170 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then clockwise. Is rotated 45 °. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings 170 (c) to 170 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. Further, the arrows shown in the figures of FIGS. 170 (c) to 170 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

FIG. 170 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b). .. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1'displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 209 can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b) to the image display area of the sub display device 209 by rotating the sub display device 209. It is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4, which has been cut off from the sub-display device 209, is displayed in the lower right of the character image h1'in a mode in which the player does not rotate. Further, FIG. 170 (c-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) is rotated by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 170 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (c-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 170 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1'read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 170 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (c-2), and the sub display device 209 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b). Shows the state rotated by 30 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 170 (c).

FIG. 170 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (c) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. .. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1'displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 209 can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 170 (c) to the image display area of the sub display device 209 by rotating the sub display device 209. It is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 209, the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the right side of the character image h1'of the merchant in a mode in which the character image h4 of the princess is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 170 (d-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) is rotated clockwise by 15 ° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 170 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (d-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 170 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1'read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 170 (d-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (d-2), and the sub-display device 209 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (c). Shows the state rotated by 15 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 170 (d).

FIG. 170 (e) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1'displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 209 can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 170 (d) to the image display area of the sub display device 209 by rotating the sub display device 209. It is displayed in a mode in which the center is rotated by 15 ° clockwise. Further, in the sub-display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player at the lower right of the character image h1', and the other part is displayed from the sub-display device 209. It is out of stock. Further, FIG. 170 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. Further, FIG. 170 (e-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 170 (e-2) shows the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1) in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (e-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 170 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1'read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 170 (e-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (e-2), and the sub-display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (d). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 170 (d) is shown.

In FIG. 170 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates the notified state. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is displayed. Further, in FIG. 170 (f), the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 170 (e) to return to the original state. It shows the state. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1'displayed at the lower left of the sub-display device 209 can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 170 (e) to the image display area of the sub-display device 209 by rotating the sub-display device 209. It is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated 30 ° clockwise with the center as the center of rotation and returned to its original position. Further, the sub-display device 209 does not display the princess character image h4. FIG. 170 (f-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (f-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1) is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation, and is shown in FIG. 170. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). FIG. 170 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (f-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (f). The generated display data is shown. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (f-2) is located at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) of the first sub-control unit 400. It is the display data in which the character image h1'of the merchant read from the ROM 406 is superimposed, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 170 (b-2). FIG. 170 (f-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (f-2), and the sub-display device 209 is clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (e). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 170 (f) is shown. FIG. 170 (f-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 170 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image (character image h3 of the palace) displayed on the sub display device 209 in a mode in which the sub display device 209 is rotated but does not rotate when viewed from the player. And the princess character image h4) and the character image (merchant character image h1') displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed. The rotating sub-display device 209 simultaneously displays a character image displayed in a non-rotating mode as seen by the player and a character image displayed in a rotating mode as seen by the player. In some cases, it can give the player an unexpected surprise.
(Example 10)
An example of the production of the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIGS. 171 (a) to 171 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 171 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 169 (a). Next, FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 169 (b). Further, FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is moved downward and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed on the sub-display device 209. The character image h3 of the palace is an image used for the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

FIGS. 171 (c) to 171 (e) show a state in which the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of this embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves in the left-right direction in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 171 (c) to 171 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before moving in the left-right direction.

FIG. 171 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 171 (b). Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner of moving to the right by the same distance as the left movement distance of the sub display device 209. There is. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the character image h4 of the princess that has been cut off in the sub display device 209 is displayed in the upper left portion. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability.

FIG. 171 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved from the state shown in FIG. 171 (c) in the left lateral direction. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode of moving to the right by the same distance as the movement distance in the left direction of the sub display device 209. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed so as to be visually recognized as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed in the upper left portion.

FIG. 171 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 171 (d). Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a mode of moving to the left by the same distance as the moving distance to the right of the sub-display device 209. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left portion, and a part of the princess character image h4 is cut off. Further, FIG. 171 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

In FIG. 171 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates the notified state. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is displayed. Further, FIG. 171 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 171 (e) and returns to the original state. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a mode of moving to the left by the same distance as the moving distance to the right of the sub-display device 209. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in a non-moving manner when viewed from the player. Further, the sub-display device 209 does not display the princess character image h4.

As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is moved in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed while the sub display device 209 is horizontally moved. , The character image h3 of the palace is displayed in a mode in which the player does not move as seen from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4, which has been cut off in the sub display device 209, is displayed on the sub display device 209 before the horizontal movement display notice effect is executed. By performing the horizontal movement display, it is displayed on the sub display device 209. Further, the character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves by a predetermined distance or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the moving distance of the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present implementation, the character may be displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the palace may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance to display the princess character image h4, the sub-display device 209 moves to the right by a predetermined distance to display the enemy character of the palace. May be displayed. In addition, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess used for the horizontal movement display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the horizontal movement display notice effect.
(Example 11)
An example of the production of the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIGS. 172 (a) to 172 (n) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. Further, the pachinko machine 100 used in this embodiment and the eleventh embodiment described later has a movable body 990 for directing. The movable body 990 for effect can be moved and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). .. The effect movable body 990 may be able to move and rotate three-dimensionally. Further, the movable body 990 for production has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a character string image of "CR metropolitan machine" is displayed on the surface thereof.

FIG. 172 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 172 (a) shows a state in which the effectable movable body 990 is located at the upper center position of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 172 (a), the effect movable body 990 is located at the initial position.

FIG. 172 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is executed. Further, in the hold display area 209b at the lower left of the sub display device 209, "0" indicating that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 0 is displayed.

In FIG. 172 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variable icon 941 is displayed in the variable icon display area 940. Indicates the state in which is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and white in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. Further, FIG. 172 (c) shows immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

FIG. 172 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 172 (e) shows a state in which the effect of moving the movable body 990 downward (hereinafter, may be referred to as “logo drop effect”) is executed. The logo drop effect is an effect used for notifying the "logo drop" shown in the figure of FIG. 161 (b). Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is displayed straddling the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the peripheral position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for the logo drop effect. Further, in FIG. 172 (e), after the effect image h5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the variable game is out of order. Further, by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed. Further, FIG. 172 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. The logo drop effect shown in FIG. 172 (e) may be used as an effect in conjunction with a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle, or is displayed in a black circle. It may be used as an effect in conjunction with the display of the special figure 1 hold icon 953, or may be used alone as an effect of a look-ahead notice. Next, FIG. 172 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 172 (e) and returns to the original position shown in FIG. 172 (a). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased as the movable body for effect 990 moves upward.

FIG. 172 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 to indicate the state immediately after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the move animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 are started. Further, FIG. 172 (g) shows immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

FIG. 172 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 172 (h), an image of the character string of "Don-" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, suggesting that the character image h3 of the character image h3 described later appears. The production is being executed. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 172 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the character string "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. In addition, an image of the character string "Don!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 172 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1, and then "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace.

FIG. 172 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. Further, in FIG. 172 (k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target image” in this example) are the image display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of being rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the region as the center of rotation. Further, in FIG. 172 (k), the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed and displayed. The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 172 (k) is displayed. The aspect ratio of the target image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 4: 5. Further, a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 172 (k), in order to make the rotation display notice effect stand out, the effect movable body 990 moves to a position above the decorative symbol display device 208 that cannot be seen by the player.

FIG. 172 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 172 (k). Shown. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 209, the image to be rotated is not completely cut off. Further, FIG. 172 (l) shows a state in which the logo drop effect in which the movable body 990 for effect moves downward from the position (not shown) in FIG. 172 (k) is executed during the rotation display notice effect. .. Further, the effect image h5 is displayed as a rotation target image on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 172 (l), unlike the state shown in FIG. 172 (e), the effect image h5 is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d in a mode rotated by 90 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player. ing. Further, the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 172 (l) is smaller than the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 172 (e). The size. The same applies to the hold icon, the variable icon, the merchant character image h1, and the effect image h5.

FIG. 172 (m) shows that the image to be rotated is rotated 270 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 172 (j). It shows the returned state. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio and the original size. Further, in FIG. 172 (m), the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position of FIG. 172 (l) and is located at the position in the original state (the position in the state shown in FIG. 172 (a)). .. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased. Next, in FIG. 172 (n), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. Indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is placed at a position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When operating the effect movable body 990 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a production that is displayed. The effect image displayed at the position behind the effect movable body 2990 may make the player emphasize the movement of the effect movable body 990, and is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990. Since the effect image is displayed at an unexpected position, the effect image may give the player an unexpected surprise. In addition, the jackpot reliability may differ depending on the size of the effect image, the display color, and the display position.
(Example 12)
An production example of Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIGS. 173 (a) to 173 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 173 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 172 (a). Next, FIG. 173 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 172 (b). Next, in FIG. 173 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, showing the same state as in FIG. 172 (c).

FIG. 173 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, FIG. 173 (d) shows a state in which the effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “logo drop effect”) in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. Shown. The logo drop effect is an effect used for notifying the "logo drop" shown in the figure of FIG. 161 (b). Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is displayed straddling the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the peripheral position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for the logo drop effect.

FIG. 173 (e) shows a state in which the island simultaneous effect is started during the execution of the logo drop effect. The island simultaneous production is a production in which pachinko machines of the same model installed on the same island facility perform the same production at the same timing. In the island simultaneous production of the present embodiment, the mode in which the princess character image h6 is singing is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character string image of "Island simultaneous production start!" Is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in FIG. 173 (e), the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the effect image h5 displayed in FIG. 173 (d) is located at a position different from the position displayed in FIG. 173 (d). The reduced display is shown in the lower right corner. Further, FIG. 173 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is displayed. The logo drop effect of this embodiment may be used as an effect suggesting that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is performed, or a pre-reading notice may be used. It may be used alone as a production.

In FIG. 173 (f), the movable body for production 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 173 (d) and returns to the original position (position shown in FIG. 173 (a)) during the simultaneous island production. Is shown. In addition, a character string image of "island simultaneous performance" is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the island simultaneous production is in progress. Further, the effect image h5 reduced to the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced to the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 have "decoration 2". -Decoration 4-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Further, by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the display state and the effect movable body 990 are operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the back of the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a state. The state in which the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative pattern display device 208 may give the player unexpectedness, and may give the player unexpectedness. It may be possible to provide a topic. In addition, the jackpot reliability may differ depending on the size of the effect image, the display color, and the display position.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the first embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 146 to 173.
(A1)
A game table provided with an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a sub display device 209).
The image display means may rotate and display the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the palace).
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIGS. 162 (j) to (q) or 166 (c) to (k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the aspect ratio of the first image may change when the rotation display of the first image is performed, so that the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, it can make a strong impression on the player. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as the first image, or other than these images. The image of may be the first image.
(A2)
The game console described in (A1) above.
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the hold icon or the hold number display) may not rotate (for example, FIGS. 164 (j) to (q), or FIGS. 167 (c) to (c). k) See),
A game table characterized by that.
(A3)
The game console described in (A2) above.
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the fourth symbol) does not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 163 (j) to (q)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, when the rotation display of the first image is performed, the rotation display of the second image may not be performed, so that the rotation display of the first image is emphasized. At the same time, the second image can be clearly seen by the player. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as a second image, and these images and May use a different image as the second image.
(A4)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above.
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) that has been cut off by the image display means before the rotation display is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation display. (See, for example, FIGS. 169 (b)-(d)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console having this configuration, the image that was cut off in the image display means before the rotation display of the first image is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation display of the first image. In some cases, it can give the player an unexpected surprise.
(A5)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above.
When the rotation display is performed, the image (for example, a decorative pattern) displayed on the image display means before the rotation display is performed may be cut off by the image display means due to the rotation display. Yes (see, for example, FIGS. 162 (i)-(k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, when the image displayed in the image display means before the rotation display of the first image is performed is cut off by the image display means due to the rotation display of the first image. Because of this, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.
(A6)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.
(A7)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.
(B1)
Movable body for production (for example, movable body for production 990) and
Image display means (for example, decorative pattern display device 208) and
It is a game table equipped with
In the first state (for example, FIG. 172 (e)) in which the first image (for example, the effect image h5) is displayed at the first position when the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means. The display state of the effect image h5 shown or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 173 (d) may be obtained.
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 172 (e) or FIG. 173 (d)).
The first image is an effect image and
The display of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 172 (l) in the second state in which the first image is displayed at the second position when the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means. It may be in a state or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 173 (e).
The second position is a position different from the back of the movable body for effect in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 172 (l) or FIG. 173 (e)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console having this configuration, when the movable body for production is operated in front of the image display means, the first image is placed at a second position different from the position behind the movable body for production. Since the effect image of the first image may be displayed in the second state, the effect image of the first image will be displayed at a position unexpected to the player, giving the player unexpectedness. May be possible.
(B2)
The game console described in (B1) above.
In the first state, the first image may be displayed straddling the first position and the third position.
The third position is a position different from the back of the movable body for effect in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 172 (e) or FIG. 173 (d)).
A game table characterized by that.
(B3)
The game console according to (B1) or (B2) above.
The size of the first image in the first state is the first size.
The size of the first image in the second state is the third size.
The third size is smaller than the first size (see, for example, FIGS. 172 (e), (f), or FIGS. 173 (d), (e)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the size of the first image in the first state and the size of the first image in the second state are different, so that the player can enjoy the variation of the first image. It may be possible to do so.
(B4)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B3) above.
In the first state, the second image (eg, decorative design) may be displayed in the first orientation (see, eg, FIG. 172 (e)).
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in the second direction (direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the first direction) (see, for example, FIG. 172 (l)).
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second orientation is a orientation different from the first orientation.
A game table characterized by that.
(B5)
The game console described in (B4) above.
The size of the second image in the first state is the second size.
The size of the second image in the second state is the fourth size.
The fourth size is smaller than the second size (see, for example, FIGS. 172 (e) and 172 (l)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the size of the second image in the first state and the size of the second image in the second state are different, so that the player can enjoy the variation of the second image. It may be possible to do so. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as a second image, and these images and May use a different image as the second image.
(B6)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.
(B7)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.
(C1)
An image display unit (for example, a sub-display device 209) capable of displaying a production image for producing a game, and
A driving means for driving the image display unit (for example, a movable body for directing 225) and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means.
The image display is performed during a period (hereinafter, referred to as "first period") in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (rotational direction or linear direction about the rotation axis of the image display unit). The unit may display the first video (for example, the video of the character image h3 of the palace or the video of the character image h4 of the princess).
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess) moves in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the period of the movement as a notification means. Can make movements that are not seen on an extraordinary basis, and may allow the player to forget about the daily routine and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. Further, with a certain effect as an opportunity, the entire period from the start of the image display unit moving in the first direction to the stop may be set as the first period, or an effect different from the one effect may be used as an opportunity. A part of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to when it stops may be set as the first period.
(C2)
The game console described in (C1) above.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.

In the embodiment according to the present embodiment, the facial expression, the outer shape, and the like of the first image (character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess) are fixedly displayed, but the facial expression of the first image is shown. , The outer shape, etc. may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, exemplifying FIG. 169, the face of the palace, which was not displayed in FIG. 169 (a), is displayed as a straight face in FIG. 169 (b), and becomes a little smile in FIG. 169 (c). An animation may be performed such that a full smile is obtained in 169 (d), a slight smile is returned in FIG. 169 (e), and a true face is returned in FIG. 169 (f). Further, the mode in which the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the palace) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image h3 of the palace moves. Animation is not limited to variable display of character display, but changes in the outer shape of characters, variable display of dialogue (change display from a partial character string indicating dialogue to an entire character string, etc.), characters and icons. It may be either a color change of the character or a moving display of a character or an icon, or a combination of these may be included.
(C3)
The game console according to (C1) or (C2) above.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction.
During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction.
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite directions.
A game table characterized by that.

In a game table equipped with this configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is one when a certain effect is triggered (for example, the timing to start the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, to the left), and triggered by another effect (for example, the timing to start the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether the probability change at the end of the big hit starts), the image The first orientation when the display unit operates may be another orientation (for example, rightward). Further, the first orientation and the second orientation may be the same orientation instead of the opposite orientation. In this case, the player is asked to move or rotate the first image faster than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. Is visible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained by rotating the image in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is further speeded up. It may be possible to forget more everyday feelings and concentrate on the game by rotating and moving with.
(C4)
The game console described in (C3) above.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at the first speed.
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the image display unit appears to the player to move, but the display position, display angle, etc. of the first image do not appear to move, so it is unusual as a notification means. When it is possible to perform a similar operation, and the notification itself by the image display unit display can fulfill the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both an impactful operation and notification. There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite to each other, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In that case, the second speed is higher than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. The player visually recognizes that one image moves and rotates slowly. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained by rotating the image in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is the image display unit. By moving or rotating so as to slowly follow the movement or rotation of the image, it may be possible to forget the everyday feeling and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with emphasis on impact, by slowly moving and rotating the first image, the notification itself by the image display unit display becomes close to the case where it is not moving. It may be possible to serve as a notification.
(C5)
The game console according to any one of (C1) to (C4) above.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image h1') is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(C6)
The game console described in (C5) above.
During the first period, the second image is configured to be immobile in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.

The game console provided with this configuration may be configured so that a second image that does not move in the first direction is not displayed in the first period. That is, in the first period, all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, so that the movement of the image display unit and the image is unified and has more impact. The production operation may be feasible.
(C7)
The game console according to (C5) or (C6) above.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the second image.

In the embodiment according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the facial expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image (merchant character image h1') are fixedly displayed, but according to the game console provided with the configuration. The facial expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, exemplifying FIG. 170, the face of the merchant, which was not displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 170 (a), is displayed as a straight face in FIG. 170 (b), and a little in FIG. 170 (c). An animation may be performed in which the face becomes steep, in FIG. 170 (d), the face becomes steep, in FIG. 170 (e), the face returns to a slightly steep face, and in FIG. 170 (f), the face returns to a true face. Further, the mode in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. Animation is not limited to variable display of character display, but changes in the outer shape of characters, variable display of dialogue (change display from a partial character string indicating dialogue to an entire character string, etc.), characters and icons. It may be either a color change of the character or a moving display of a character or an icon, or a combination of these may be included.
(C8)
The game console according to (C3) or (C4) above.
The phrase "moved by the drive of the drive means" described in (C1) above means "rotates by the drive of the drive means".
The "first image moves in the first direction" described in (C1) above means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction (for example, a circumferential direction) about the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game table characterized by that.
(C9)
The game console described in (C8) above.
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game table characterized by that.
(C10)
The game console according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above.
The phrase "moving by driving the driving means" described in (C1) above means "moving linearly by driving the driving means".
The "first image moves in the first direction" described in (C1) above means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction".
A game table characterized by that.

The above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in the left-right direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of the leftward orientation and the rightward orientation. The above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in an oblique direction". The first orientation in this case is one of the upper left, lower right, upper right, and lower left directions.

A modified example of the configuration described in the examples according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the driving means (movable body for effect 225) shown in FIGS. 166 to 171 is a case where the rotational movement and the linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, front-back direction when viewed from the player) are combined. There may be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a movable body for directing. Further, before the image display unit rotates or moves, the movable body for production moves from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the movable body for production is in the movable state performs the rotation or movement operation. After stopping, the movable body for effect may be configured to move to the initial state. Further, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more when the effect operation shown in FIG. 168 is performed than when the effect operation shown in FIG. 167 is performed. The mode may be configured so that the mode is likely to be a big hit mode, and the effect operation of FIG. 167 is performed when the effect operation of FIG. 167 is performed during the symbol variation display. The symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a jackpot mode. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 167 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the jackpot mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 168 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the jackpot mode. Further, although FIGS. 167 and 168 both show an example in which the same effect display is performed, when the sub display device shown in FIG. 167 is rotated, the image displayed on the sub display device is also rotated. The effect of being visually recognized by the player is different from the effect of being visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub-display device is not rotated together when the sub-display device shown in FIG. 168 is rotated. It may be configured to be the production of. For example, "one of the other productions" is a production in which the lord fights against the musician, and "the other production of another production" is a production in which the princess dances. May be good. One type of "one of the other effects" may be installed, a plurality of types may be installed, or one type of "the other effect of another effect" may be installed. , Multiple types may be installed. Also, when the sub-display device rotates as shown in FIG. 167, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub-display device rotates together with the number of types of effects. As shown in 168, when the sub-display device rotates, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub-display device is visually recognized by the player so as not to rotate together. It may be configured so that the number of types is larger. On the contrary, when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 168, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together. At least a part (or all of) of the images displayed on the sub-display device are rotated together when the sub-display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 167, rather than the number of types of effects. It may be configured so that the number of types is larger.

Further, the effect example shown in FIG. 167 and the effect example shown in FIG. 168 may be combined. For example, during the period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is prevented from rotating the image displayed on the sub-display so that the player can see it to rotate with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at speed B (eg, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of B'(eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub-display device is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display device is larger than that of the sub-display device. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of C'(eg, 40 rpm) so that the player sees it as spinning slowly. Further, in the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. Rotate at least part or all of the image at speed D (eg 60 rpm) in other directions (eg clockwise) so that the player sees only the sub-display as rotating. Let me. In the next period (period E), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed of E (eg, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of E'(eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed F (eg, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of F'(eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. During the period (period G) before the end of rotation of the sub display device in the next period, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so that the player can visually recognize it so that it rotates together with the sub display device. In this way, as in the examples from period A to period D, as the period in which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. , The sub-display device rotates, and by shifting to a state where the player can see part or all of the display of the sub-display device as if it is stopped, a new sense of unity between the sub-display device and the image It may be possible to perform a certain production. Further, as in the examples from period D to period G, as the period during which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device. By making the player visually recognize the changes in this way, it may be possible to create a new sense of unity with the sub-display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced, and in the periods D to G, the sub display is displayed. The difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, but conversely, during periods A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and in the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. It may be configured so that the difference in speed is gradually reduced. Further, here, the image displayed on the rotating sub-display device and the rotating sub-display device is illustrated, but the same applies to the image displayed on the linearly moving sub-display device and the linearly moving sub-display device. Is also possible.
[Second Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 202. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the following description except for FIGS. 184 and 185, the side closer to the player when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on the island equipment of the game store is referred to as "front" (front, front side, front side, front end, etc.). , And vice versa as "rear" (rear, rear, rear, rear end, etc.), vertically above the player as "up" (upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and vice versa. (Lower, lower, lower end, etc.), horizontal left as seen from the player is "left" (left, left, left end, etc.), and vice versa "right" (right, right, right end, etc.) ).

FIG. 174 is a schematic front view of the game board 1000 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is arranged in a center case substantially in the center of the game area 124 formed by the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 drives a decorative pattern display device 208 and a lamp to produce an effect, and the details will be described later.

The game board 1000 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. As for the normal figure start port 228 and the special figure 2 start port 232, since the normal figure start port 228 and the special figure 2 start port 232 are arranged on the right side path, the ball entering the game ball falling on the right side path. Is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left side path. With respect to the variable winning opening 234, it is relatively easy for the game ball falling on the right path to enter, and it is relatively difficult for the game ball falling on the left path to enter due to the arrangement pattern of the game nails. Note that in FIG. 174, the illustration of the game nail is omitted. On the other hand, with respect to the special figure 1 starting port 230, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails and the presence of the warp device 242 and the like, it is relatively easy for the game ball falling on the left side path to enter the right side path. It is relatively difficult for a falling game ball to enter. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is given as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used. In addition, general winning openings (not shown) are provided on the right side route and the left side route.

On the front side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and a plurality of movable bodies are arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. Has been done. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has six movable bodies, that is, a movable body 1002, a movable body 1004, a movable body 1006, a movable body 1008, a movable body 1010, and a movable body 1012. These movable bodies are arranged in the order of the movable body 1010, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1002, the movable body 1006, 1008, and the movable body 1012 from the front side. The movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are arranged so that their positions in the front-rear direction are the same. Further, the movable body 1004 is arranged on the front surface side of the movable body 1002. The second sub-control unit 500 executes the drive control of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1010, and the movable body 1012. The drive control may be executed by the first sub-control unit 400.

The movable body 1002 has a horizontally long rectangular external shape when viewed from the front side. The movable body 1002 can move vertically behind the front stage 244. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. Further, the movable body 1002 has a sub display device 1030 on the front side.

A liquid crystal display device is used in the sub display device 1030. The sub-display device 1030 has a horizontally long rectangular display area smaller than the decorative pattern display device 208, and displays one or a plurality of images to produce an effect. In this example, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of the seascape where the yacht floats. Although the sub-display device 1030 employs a liquid crystal display device, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted. Further, the display control of the sub display device 1030 is executed by the first sub control unit 400. The display control of the sub-display device 1030 may be executed by the second sub-control unit 500, or a new display control unit may be provided to execute the display control. The display control unit may execute display control of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, the movable body 1002 includes an elongated illumination unit 1014a, an illumination unit 1014b, an illumination unit 1014c, and an illumination unit 1014d arranged so as to surround the sub display device 1030. The illumination unit 1014a is arranged on the left side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014b is arranged below the sub-display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014c is arranged on the right side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014d is arranged above the sub-display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as the light source of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and the illumination units 1014a to 1014d can emit light in a plurality of colors.

Further, the movable body 1004 is arranged in the upper left portion of the movable body 1002. The movable body 1004 has an external shape that imitates lightning. The movable body 1004 is outside the display area of the sub-display device 1030, and one point is fixed at the upper left portion of the movable body 1002. By being driven by a stepping motor (not shown), the movable body 1004 can rotate in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the sub display device 1030 with the one point as the center of rotation. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. The movable body 1004 overlaps with the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the state of being located at the operation completion position. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1004. The initial position of the movable body 1004 is a position in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 174. The movable body 1004 does not overlap the display area of the sub-display device 1030 when it is located at the initial position.

A movable body 1006 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1006 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001, and can move in the left-right direction. The movable body 1002 has a plate-like shape, and a transmission portion 1006a is provided at the upper portion and a transmission portion 1006b is provided at the lower portion. The transmitting portions 1006a and 1006b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1006 can be visually recognized via the transmitting portions 1006a and 1006b. The transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b may be provided so that the rear side can be visually recognized. A transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be arranged on the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b, and the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b are openings. You may. Further, an elongated illumination unit 1016 is arranged at the right end on the front surface side of the movable body 1006. The illumination unit 1016 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1016, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1006. The movable body 1006 moves left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The operating range of the movable body 1006 is from the position where the right end of the movable body 1006 is located to the left of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The movable body 1006 is invisible to the player when it is located at the left end of the operating range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position. When the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position, it overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized via the transparent portions 1006a and 1006b of the movable body 1006.

A movable body 1008 is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1008 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and can move in the left-right direction. The movable body 1008 has a plate-like shape, and a transmission portion 1008a is provided at the upper portion and a transmission portion 1008b is provided at the lower portion. The transmission portions 1008a and 1008b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized via the transmission portions 1008a and 1008b. The transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b may be visible on the rear side, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be arranged on the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b, and the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b are openings. You may. Further, an elongated illumination unit 1018 is arranged at the left end portion on the front surface side of the movable body 1008. The illumination unit 1018 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1018, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1008. The movable body 1008 moves left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The operating range of the movable body 1008 is from the position where the left end of the movable body 1008 is located to the right of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The movable body 1008 is invisible to the player when it is located at the right end of the operating range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. When the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position, it overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1008. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized through the transparent portions 1008a and 1008b of the movable body 1008.

The movable body 1006 functions as a left shutter, and the movable body 1008 functions as a right shutter. When the movable body 1006 moves to the right end of the moving range and the movable body 1008 moves to the left end of the moving range, the right end portion of the movable body 1006 and the left end portion of the movable body 1008 are in contact with each other. The effect of opening and closing the shutter is executed by the movable bodies 1006 and 1008.

A movable body 1010 is arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1010 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and has a character string of "chance" on the front side. Further, the movable body 1010 can be moved in the vertical direction in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown). Further, when the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 are closed, the movable body 1010 can move in the vertical direction in front of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1010 is located at the initial position.

The movable body 1012 is arranged in the upper left portion of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 has an external shape imitating a lightning bolt similar to the movable body 1004. Further, the movable body 1012 is outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and one point is fixed at the upper left side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. By being driven by a stepping motor (not shown), the movable body 1012 can rotate in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the one point as the center of rotation. The movable body 1012 can rotate 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1012 may be rotatable at 360 ° or more.

Further, on the game board 1000, one sensor for detecting whether or not the movable bodies 1002 to 1012 are located at the initial positions is arranged for each movable body. The sensor is included in the effect movable body sensor 424 shown in FIG. 149. Further, for example, a photo sensor is used as the sensor.

The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is arranged on the rear side of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. In the state shown in FIG. 174, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a white circular fluctuation icon a1, a white circular hold icon b1, a white circular hold icon b2, and the character "heat" in the white circle. The hold icon b3 on which is drawn and the black circular hold icon b4 are displayed side by side in this order from the left. The hold icon b1 indicates the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the first hold order, the hold icon b2 indicates the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the second hold order, and the hold icon b3 indicates the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the third hold order. The holding of the special figure 1 variable game is shown, and the hold icon b4 shows the holding of the special figure 1 variable game having the fourth hold order. Further, in the effect display area 208d, a background image including an image of the sun, clouds, and a balloon is displayed. A part of the image of the sun is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun is visible to the player through the transmitting portion 1006a of the movable body 1006. Further, a part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible to the player through the transparent portion 1006b of the movable body 1006. Also, a part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1002.

Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 includes an elongated illumination unit 1020, an illumination unit 1022, an illumination unit 1024, and an illumination unit 1026 arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 208. The illumination unit 1020 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1022 is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1024 is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1026 is arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as the light source of the illumination units 1020 to 1026, and the illumination units 1020 to 1026 can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the entire illumination unit 1024 and 1026 are visible to the player, and only a part of the upper portion of the illumination unit 1020 is visible to the player via the transmission unit 1006a. Is visible to the player through the transmissive portion 1008a only in part above.

Next, the movable body 1002 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the front. Below the movable body 1002, a motor 1040, which is a driving source of the movable body 1002, is arranged. The motor 1040 is fixed to the center case of the game board 1000 so that the rotation axis is in the vertical direction. One end of the screw shaft 1042 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1040 so that the drawing direction is the vertical direction.

A lower base 1044 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the motor 1040. The lower base 1044 is fixed to the game board 1000. The motor 1040 and the lower base 1044 are arranged below the rear side of the front stage 244 and are invisible to the player. Further, the lower base 1044 has a receiving portion 1044a having a flat surface for receiving the movable body 1002 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1044b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. The receiving portion 1044a and the shaft fixing portion 1044b are different from each other, and the receiving portion 1044a is located at a position higher than the shaft fixing portion 1044b. Therefore, when the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost part of the moving range, the movable body 1002 comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a but not with the shaft fixing portion 1044b.

Further, the receiving portion 1044a is provided with a through hole that penetrates the lower base 1044 in the vertical direction, and a slide bearing is arranged in the through hole. The screw shaft 1042 passes through the slide bearing and is supported by the slide bearing.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 175 (a), the movable body 1004 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1004 can rotate about 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1004 may be rotatable by 60 ° or more (for example, 360 °).

FIGS. 175 (b) and 175 (c) show a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the rear right side. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (b), the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position of the moving range. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (c), the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost part of the moving range. As shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and 175 (c), the movable body 1002 includes a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a moving unit 1036. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, is arranged on the front side of the movable body 1002, and includes the movable body 1004, the lighting units 1014a to 1014d, and the sub display device 1030 as shown in FIG. 174.

The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a driver for the sub display device 1030, LEDs for the lighting units 1014a to 1014d, a driver for the LEDs, a motor for driving the movable body 1004, and gears. Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a rectangular window portion 1034a, a window portion 1034b, a window portion 1034c, a window portion 1034d (not shown in FIG. 175 (b)), and a window portion 1034e on the rear side. The window portion 1034a is arranged behind the illumination unit 1014a, the window unit 1034b is arranged behind the illumination unit 1014b, the window unit 1034c is arranged behind the illumination unit 1014c, and the window unit 1034d is arranged behind the illumination unit 1014d. Has been done. A transparent plate is arranged on the window portions 1034a to 1034e, and the front side of the window portions 1034a to 1034e can be visually recognized. An LED, an LED driver mounting substrate, a decorative lens, and the like are arranged on the front side of the window portions 1034a to 1034d. The windows 1034a to 1034d are used for inspection of the lighting unit. Further, the window portion 1034e is arranged behind the movable body 1004. A motor for driving the movable body 1004 and a gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor and transmitting power to the movable body 1004 are arranged on the front side of the window portion 1034e. The window portion 1034e is used for inspecting the drive mechanism of the movable body 1004.

The moving unit 1036 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape smaller than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and is arranged on the rear surface side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The moving unit 1036 has a motor for rotationally driving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and a gear internally which is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor and transmits the power of the motor to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 are connected via a harness. Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is installed in the moving unit 1036 so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate around the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the same plane including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the initial posture. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 175 (b), and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In this way, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 also functions as a movable body.

When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable unit 1036 are connected by using the connection unit (slip ring or the like) shown in FIGS. 184 and 185 described later, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. In the direction of, it may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, it may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees, and there may be no limitation on the rotation angle.

Further, the moving unit 1036 is provided with two through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. A nut is fixed to the through hole on the right side, and the screw shaft 1042 is fitted in the nut. The nut can be moved up and down by the rotation of the screw shaft 1042, and the movable body 1002 can be moved up and down. A guide shaft 1046 passes through the through hole on the left side. The movable body 1004 is guided by the guide shaft 1046 and can move up and down stably.

An upper base 1048 is arranged above the moving unit 1036. The upper base 1048 is fixed to a transparent plate (not shown) arranged at a position between the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1006 and 1008 in the front-rear direction, and is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 1048 has a receiving portion 1048a having a flat surface for receiving the moving unit 1036 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1048b on the left side to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed. A slide bearing is arranged on the receiving portion 1048b, and the other end of the screw shaft 1042 is supported by the slide bearing. Further, the receiving portion 1048a and the shaft fixing portion 1048b are different from each other, and the receiving portion 1048a is located at a position lower than the shaft fixing portion 1048b. Further, the moving unit 1036 has an upper surface portion 1036a having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1048a when moved to the uppermost position. As shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position, the upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

Further, the moving unit 1036 has a lower surface portion 1036b having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044 when moved to the lowermost position. As shown in FIG. 175 (c), when the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

Further, the moving unit 1036 is provided with a control means for controlling the moving operation of the movable body 1002 and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. Examples of the mobile control means arranged in the mobile unit 1036 include a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, and a communication control circuit. The movement unit 1036 may include only one of these movement control means, or may include a plurality of them. Further, a harness (not shown) having one end connected to the sub display device 1030 extends from the rear side of the moving unit 1036, and the other end of the harness is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 1000 (for example,). It is connected to the first sub-board 160). The other end of the harness may be connected to the relay board, and the sub display device 1030 and the control board may be connected via the harness and the relay board.

Next, the operation of the movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 (b) and 175 (c). FIG. 175 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position in the moving range. The upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1048a of the upper base 1048. The receiving portion 1048a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002.

From the state shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the motor 1040 is driven to rotate the screw shaft 1042 clockwise when viewed from below to above, the nut is fixed to the moving unit 1036 and the nut fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves below the shaft 1042. As a result, the movable body 1002 moves downward.

FIG. 175 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position in the moving range. The lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044. The receiving portion 1044a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002. Further, when the screw shaft 1042 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from below to above by the motor 1040 from the state shown in FIG. 175 (c), the nut is fixed to the moving unit 1036 and the nut fitted in the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves above the shaft 1042. As a result, the movable body 1002 moves upward.

Further, when the movable body 1002 is stopped at a position higher than the lowermost position, a load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 due to the weight of the movable body 1002. Therefore, a torque of a magnitude commensurate with the load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 by the motor 1040. .. As a result, the screw shaft 1042 can be prevented from rotating due to the load of its own weight of the movable body 1002, and the movable body 1002 can be made stationary.

Further, if the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off for some reason while the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowermost position, the electric power for driving the motor 1040 cannot be obtained. Therefore, the load of the movable body 1002 causes the screw shaft 1042 to rotate clockwise when viewed from below, and the movable body 1002 moves until it comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044b of the lower base 1044. Even when the movable body 1002 moves downward by its own weight, the movable body 1002 can be received by the receiving portion 1044b, so that the movable body 1002 can be prevented from being damaged.
(Example 1)
176 and 177 show an example of production in the first embodiment of the present embodiment. 176 and 177 show the effect state in chronological order. 176 (a) to (q), (t), (u), (x) to (z), (a) to (d) and FIGS. 177 are the games of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174. The schematic front of the board 1000 is shown, FIGS. 176 (r) and 176 (s) show only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted, and FIGS. 176 (v) and 176 (w) show only the movable body 1002 extracted. In addition, in FIG. 176 and later, the illustration of the normal drawing display device 210, the special drawing 1 display device 212, the special drawing 2 display device 214, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, and the high accuracy middle lamp 222 is omitted. However, the illustration of the game ball is also omitted.

FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is a position higher than the lowermost position shown in FIG. 175 (c) and a position closer to the lowermost position than the uppermost position shown in FIG. 175 (b). When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b.

FIG. 176 (b), which continues from FIG. 176 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

FIG. 176 (c), which continues from FIG. 176 (b), shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 176 (d) following FIG. 176 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIGS. 176 and later, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a thick white arrow pointing downward. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the start of the movement animation of the hold / variable icon.

FIG. 176 (e), which continues from FIG. 176 (d), shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 176 (e).

FIG. 176 (f) following FIG. 176 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost part of the operating range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and the part of the image becomes invisible to the player. In the pachinko machine 100, when at least a part of a decorative pattern or a preview image (for example, an image of the sun, clouds, balloons, hold icons, variable icons, etc.) is overwrapped with a movable body and becomes invisible to the player. Is more likely to be a big hit in a running special figure variable game or a pending special figure variable game than in the case where at least a part of the decorative symbol or the preview image is not overwrapped with the movable body. It may be configured as follows.

FIG. 176 (g) following FIG. 176 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position of the moving range of the movable body 1010. When the movable body 1010 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1010 in the reach effect ends.

FIG. 176 (h) following FIG. 176 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the right. A part of the image of the sun and a part of "decoration 2" are visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a, and a part of the image of clouds is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006b. The image of the sun and the case where the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (g) and the case where the movable body 1006 is moved to the right from the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (h). The visible part of the cloud image is different. When the image of the sun or the image of clouds is displayed as a preview image, the visible part of the preview image differs before and after the movement of the movable body. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured.

FIG. 176 (i) following FIG. 176 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. As a result, the effect operation of the movable body 1006 in the reach effect is completed.

FIG. 176 (j) following FIG. 176 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the left. A part of the cloud image and a part of "decoration 2" are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b. As a result, there are cases where the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (i) and cases where the movable body 1008 is moved to the left from the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (j). The visible part of the image and the image of the cloud are different. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case of the above.

FIG. 176 (k) following FIG. 176 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. As a result, the effect operation of the movable body 1008 in the reach effect is completed.

FIG. 176 (l) following FIG. 176 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position from the initial position. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and starts the effect operation.

FIG. 176 (m) following FIG. 176 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate 180 ° clockwise and counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 176 (l) in which the upper and lower end sides are parallel to the horizontal direction and the left and right end sides are parallel to the vertical direction. Is. In FIG. 176 (m), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise.

FIG. 176 (n) following FIG. 176 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 176 (m). As shown in FIGS. 176 (l) to 176 (n), the visible portion of the balloon image and the cloud image is different before and after the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. When an image of a balloon or an image of a cloud is displayed as a notice image, the visible part of the notice image differs before and after the operation of the movable body. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case of the above.

FIG. 176 (o) following FIG. 176 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 176 (n) and returned to the initial posture.

FIG. 176 (p) following FIG. 176 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved downward and returned to the initial position. As a result, the effect operation of the movable body 1002 in the reach effect is completed.

FIG. 176 (q) following FIG. 176 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 176 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 at the same timing as FIG. 176 (q) extracted, and shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotational operation of the movable body 1012, the movable body 1012 and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap. Therefore, the movable body 1012 makes the image of the sun and a part of the "decoration 2" invisible to the player. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case of the above.

FIG. 176 (s) following FIGS. 176 (q) and 176 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted, and the movable body 1012 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 176 (q) and 176 (r). It shows the state of rotating 90 ° and returning to the initial position. FIG. 176 (t) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 176 (s). When the movable body 1012 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1012 in the reach effect ends.

FIG. 176 (u) following FIGS. 176 (s) and 176 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 176 (v) shows only the movable body 1002 having the same timing as that of FIG. 176 (u), and shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotational operation of the movable body 1004, the movable body 1004 and the image of the seascape displayed on the sub-display device 1030 overlap. Therefore, the movable body 1004 makes a part of the image of the seascape invisible to the player. The image of the sea view may be displayed as a preview image. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case of the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 176 (u), the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball is inserted into the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the effect display area 208d is reached. A white circular hold icon is displayed.

FIG. 176 (w) following FIGS. 176 (u) and (v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted, and the movable body 1004 is 60 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 176 (u) and 176 (v). It shows the state of rotating by ° and returning to the initial position. FIG. 176 (x) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 176 (w). When the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1004 in the reach effect ends.

FIG. 176 (y) following FIGS. 176 (w) and (x) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 176 (z) following FIG. 176 (y) shows a state in which the erasing animation of the variable icon is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d, the black circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is erased.

FIG. 176 (a), which continues from FIG. 176 (z), shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes the variable icon and moves to the left.

In FIG. 176 (b), which follows from FIG. 176 (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started based on the reception of the symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 by the first sub-control unit 400. Indicates the state. The symbol change start command contains information on the change time. The fluctuation time of this example is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 152.

FIG. 176 (c) following FIG. 176 (b) shows a state in which a power failure occurs 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off. Further, in this example, all the movable bodies other than the movable body 1002 are stationary at the position at the timing when the power failure occurs.

FIG. 176 (d) following FIG. 176 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowest position in the moving range due to its own weight. The movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state in which the power is off. The lowermost position of the movable body 1002 is a non-operating position of the movable body 1002. When the movable body 1002 is located in the non-operating position, only the upper end of the display area of the sub display device 1030 is visible to the player.

FIG. 177 (a) following FIG. 176 (d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

FIG. 177 (b) following FIG. 177 (a) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned from off to on, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are started in this order. In FIG. 177 (b), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub A character string image of "starting ..." is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400.

FIG. 177 (c) following FIG. 177 (b) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 177 (d) following FIG. 177 (c) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is first executed. As shown in FIG. 177 (d), the movable body 1002 has moved to the uppermost position. Further, the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002 displays a character string image of "initial operation" as in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 177 (e) following FIG. 177 (d) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 177 (f) following FIG. 177 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 177 (e). In FIG. 177 (g) following from FIG. 177 (f), the movable body 1002 is returned to the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 177 (f) and returned to the initial posture. It shows the moved state. In the initial operation of the movable body 1002 of this example, the movable body 1002 first moves from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and then. , The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° clockwise, then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1002 is moved to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is the start position of the effect operation of the movable body 1002.

FIG. 177 (h) following FIG. 177 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the moving range. FIG. 177 (i) following FIG. 177 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, the movable body 1010 first moves from the initial position (the uppermost position) to the lowermost position, and then the movable body 1010 returns from the lowest position to the initial position. .. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

FIG. 177 (j) following FIG. 177 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the moving range. FIG. 177 (k) following FIG. 177 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, the movable body 1006 first moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 returns from the rightmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

FIG. 177 (l) following FIG. 177 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 177 (m) following FIG. 177 (l) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1008 of this example, the movable body 1008 first moves from the initial position to the leftmost position, and then the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position from the leftmost position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1008 is completed.

FIG. 177 (n) following FIG. 177 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 177 (o) following FIG. 177 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1012 of this example, the movable body 1012 first rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1012 is completed.

FIG. 177 (p) following FIG. 177 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 177 (q) following FIG. 177 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. Further, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.

In this example, the initial operation of the movable body is executed in the order of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1010, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1012, and the movable body 1004. The execution order of the initial operation of the movable body can be arbitrarily set.

FIG. 177 (r) following FIG. 177 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212 is being executed. If a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 is decorated from the completion of the initial operation of the movable body until the symbol variation stop command is received from the main control unit 300. The symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are controlled so as to be the preparation screen. As a result, the character string image of "preparing" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (r), one game ball is inserted in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a hold icon indicating an increased hold because of the preparation screen. Not done. The leftmost LED of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on, and the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 1.

Further, the main control unit 300 uses the power interruption process (step S243) executed at the time of power interruption, and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game being executed is hit or miss, the stop symbol, the fluctuation time, and the special figure 1 stored in the RAM 308. The display symbol update timer or the like is saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308. The main control unit 300 returns to the gaming state before the power failure by the power recovery process (step S111) after the power is turned on, based on the recovery data. As a result, the main control unit 300 executes control to end the special figure 1 variable game when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable game that was executed at the time of power interruption elapses for 30 seconds.

FIG. 177 (s) following FIG. 177 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 1 variable game of this example is out of order. The first sub-control unit 400 receives an effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 based on the reception of the symbol fluctuation stop command including the information that the hit / fail determination result is incorrect from the main control unit 300. To resume. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3", which is an outlier combination of symbols, is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun image and clouds are displayed in the effect display area 208d. A background image is displayed, including the image of and the image of the balloon. Further, since the hold of the special figure 1 is 1, one white circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Further, the variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that was executed before the power interruption is not displayed in the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power is restored. In addition, an image of the seascape is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 177 (t), which continues from FIG. 177 (s), shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the movable body 1002 waits at the initial position until the second sub-control unit 500 receives the effect operation start command. Further, the movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost position. When the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes visible. Therefore, by moving the movable body 1008 to the rightmost position, the preview image that overlaps with the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position may be visible. The symbol variation display in which the notice image may be visible may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the notice image remains invisible.

FIG. 177 (u) following FIG. 177 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the effect operation. The second sub-control unit 500 starts the drive control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start command of the effect operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub-control unit 400. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

FIG. 177 (v) following FIG. 177 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1002 waits at the initial position until the second sub-control unit 500 receives the effect operation start command. Further, the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball is inserted into the starting opening 230 of the special drawing 1, and a black circular holding icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. ..

FIG. 177 (w) following FIG. 177 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order. Further, the movable body 1008 has returned to the initial position. In addition, the change animation of the change icon is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the change icon of the white circle is erased.

FIG. 177 (x), which continues from FIG. 177 (w), shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the movable body 1002 is waiting at the initial position to receive the start command of the effect operation.

FIG. 177 (y) following FIG. 177 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the effect operation. The second sub-control unit 500 starts the drive control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start command of the effect operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, after the movable body 1002 moves from the initial position to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise.

FIG. 177 (z) following FIG. 177 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, the movable body 1002 moves downward and returns to the initial position. The movable body 1002 may move downward during the rotation operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture.

FIG. 177 (a) following FIG. 177 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 177 (b) following FIG. 177 (a) shows a state in which the erasing animation of the variable icon is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, the black circular variable icon is erased.

In this embodiment, the movable body 1002 starts the effect operation from the initial position and ends the effect operation at the initial position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position, and may end the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The start position of the effect operation of the movable body 1002 and the end position of the effect operation may be the same or different.
A game table characterized by that.

Further, even when the power is turned off while the movable body 1002 is in a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position (for example, the fourth position), the movable body 1002 is in the lowermost position from the fourth position. It may be configured to move to.

Further, even when the power is turned off while the movable body 1002 is in a third position other than the fourth position, the initial position, and the lowermost position, the movable body 1002 is moved from the third position. It is configured to move to the lowest position.

Further, it includes a fourth control means (for example, a second sub-control unit 500) for controlling the movable body 1002, and a driving means for driving the movable body 1002.

Further, if the sensor is provided to detect whether or not the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, and when the power is turned off, the sensor detects that the movable body 1002 is not located at the initial position. , The movable body 1002 is configured to move to the lowest position. A sensor for detecting whether or not the movable body is in the initial posture is provided, and when the power is turned off, when the sensor detects that the movable body is not in the initial posture, the movable body is placed in the initial posture. It may be configured to return to. The drive control of the movable body 1002 in this embodiment may be applied to another movable body.
(Example 2)
FIG. 178 shows an production example in the second embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 178 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 178 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 178 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 178 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 178 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

In FIG. 178 (b), which continues from FIG. 178 (a), the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball is inserted into the special figure 1 starting port 230. It shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display area 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

FIG. 178 (c) following FIG. 178 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started executing the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. The timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 may be the same, or one of them may be earlier. The symbol variation display in which the number of movable bodies moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is large at almost the same timing is larger than the symbol variation display in which the number of movable bodies moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is small at the same timing. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.

FIG. 178 (d) following FIG. 178 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 execute the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 executes the effect operation. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 178 (c), and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. The initial posture of the movable body 1010 is a posture in which the upper and lower ends of the movable body 1010 are parallel to the horizontal direction. Further, as the drive mechanism for rotating the movable body 1010, the same drive mechanism as for the drive mechanism for rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be adopted. In the state shown in FIG. 178 (d), the movable body 1010 is rotated 30 ° clockwise, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 is moved to the right from the initial position. The operation start timings of the movable body 1010, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and the movable body 1006 may be the same, the operation start timings of the two movable bodies may be the same, or the operation start of the three movable bodies may be started. The timing may be different. In the symbol variation display, the number of movable bodies that rotate in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at almost the same timing is large, and the number of movable bodies that rotate in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing is small. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the display.

FIG. 178 (e), which continues from FIG. 178 (d), shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to a power failure during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 178 (f) following FIG. 178 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture with the pachinko machine 100 turned off. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 has a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. Be prepared for. When a power failure occurs, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power supply supplied from the power storage circuit to return it to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and the control for returning the movable body 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable body 1006 remains stationary at the position when the power failure occurred. If the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and a power failure occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotating operation, the movable body 1006 stands still in a state of being rotated from the initial posture.

FIG. 178 (g) following FIG. 178 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowermost position below the initial position. Even if the second sub control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowermost position. Good.

FIG. 178 (h) following FIG. 178 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 178 (i) following FIG. 178 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

FIG. 178 (j) following FIG. 178 (i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for the power to be turned on.

FIG. 178 (k) following FIG. 178 (j) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 178 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub A character string image of "starting ..." is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400. Further, the character image of "ki" in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

FIG. 178 (l) following FIG. 178 (k) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 178 (m) following FIG. 178 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is first executed. As shown in FIG. 178 (m), the movable body 1002 is moving from the lowermost position to the uppermost position. Further, the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002 displays a character string image of "initial operation" as in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 178 (n) following FIG. 178 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 178 (o) following FIG. 178 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 178 (n). In FIG. 178 (p) following from FIG. 178 (o), the movable body 1002 is returned to the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 178 (o) and returned to the initial posture. It shows the moved state. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed.

FIG. 178 (q) following FIG. 178 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowermost position. FIG. 178 (r) following FIG. 178 (q) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 178 (s) following FIG. 178 (r) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 178 (r) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 178 (t) following FIG. 178 (s) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, the movable body 1010 first moves from the initial position to the lowest position, then the movable body 1010 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture, and then the movable body 1010. Rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1010 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

FIG. 178 (u) following FIG. 178 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. If the movable body 1006 is stopped at a position other than the initial position at the start of the initial operation, the movable body 1006 first returns to the initial position. FIG. 178 (v) following FIG. 178 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 178 (w) following FIG. 178 (v) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, the movable body 1006 first returns to the initial position, then the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 moves to the rightmost position. Returns to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

FIG. 178 (x) following FIG. 178 (w) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 178 (y) following FIG. 178 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position.

FIG. 178 (z) following FIG. 178 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 178 (a) following FIG. 178 (z) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position.

Further, in FIG. 178 (a), the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 178 (b) following FIG. 178 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position. FIG. 178 (c) following FIG. 178 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise. FIG. 178 (2) following FIG. 178 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, the movable body 1004 first rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position, and then returns to the initial position. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. In this way, the same operation may be executed a plurality of times in the initial operation of the movable body. Further, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.
(Example 3)
FIG. 179 shows an production example in the third embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 178 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 179 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 179 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 179 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 179 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

In FIG. 179 (b), which continues from FIG. 179 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the starting port 230 of Special Figure 1. It shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display area 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

FIG. 179 (c) following FIG. 179 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started executing the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position.

FIG. 179 (d), which continues from FIG. 179 (c), shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the movable body 1004, and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 execute the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 executes the effect operation. There is. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 179 (c), and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In the state shown in FIG. 179 (d), the movable body 1010 is rotated 30 ° clockwise, the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 Is moving to the right from the initial position. The timing of starting the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1004 may be the same or different.

FIG. 179 (e), which continues from FIG. 179 (d), shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to a power failure during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 179 (f) following FIG. 179 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture with the pachinko machine 100 turned off. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 has a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. Be prepared for. When a power failure occurs, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power supply supplied from the power storage circuit to return it to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and the control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable bodies 1004 and 1006 remain stationary at the position when the power failure occurs. If the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and a power failure occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotating operation, the movable body 1006 stands still in a state of being rotated from the initial posture. Further, control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial positions may be executed.

FIG. 179 (g) following FIG. 179 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowermost position below the initial position. Even if the second sub control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowermost position. Good.

FIG. 179 (h) following FIG. 179 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 179 (i) following FIG. 179 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

FIG. 179 (j) following FIG. 179 (i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for the power to be turned on.

FIG. 179 (k) following FIG. 179 (j) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 179 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub A character string image of "starting ..." is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400. Further, the character image of "ki" in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

FIG. 179 (l) following FIG. 179 (k) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 179 (m) following FIG. 179 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, if there is a movable body stopped at a position different from the initial position at the start of the initial operation of the movable body, control for returning the movable body to the initial position is executed. In FIG. 179 (m), first, the movable body 1006 is returned to the initial position.

FIG. 179 (n) following FIG. 179 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position.

FIG. 179 (o) following FIG. 179 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial value from the lowest position. FIG. 179 (p) following FIG. 179 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 starts the initial operation and moves to the uppermost position. The movable body 1002 starts the initial operation after returning to the initial position.
(Example 4)
FIG. 180 shows an example of production in Example 4 of this embodiment. FIG. 180 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each of FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (n) shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 180A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 180A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 180A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

In FIG. 180 (b) following from FIG. 180 (a), the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the start port 230 in Special FIG. It shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display area 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

FIG. 180 (c) following FIG. 180 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started executing the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

FIG. 180 (d) following FIG. 180 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 executes the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise.

FIG. 180 (e) following FIG. 180 (d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to a power failure during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 180 (f) following FIG. 180 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position by its own weight without the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returning to the initial posture. In this example, the control for returning the movable body to the initial posture or the initial position at the time of power failure is not executed.

FIG. 180 (g) following FIG. 180 (g) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for the power to be turned on.

FIG. 180 (h) following FIG. 180 (g) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 180 (h), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image of "starting ...", and the sub display device 1030 displays a character string image of "starting up".

FIG. 180 (i) following FIG. 180 (h) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 180 (j) following FIG. 180 (i) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is started. After the movable body 1002 is moved to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is performing an operation of rotating clockwise. In the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 executes an operation of rotating 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In this example, since the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is stationary while being rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture at the start of the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 360 ° clockwise after the initial operation is started.

FIG. 180 (k) following FIG. 180 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture and is stationary. FIG. 180 (l) following FIG. 180 (k) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating counterclockwise. The sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 180 (k), and then rotates 180 ° clockwise to return to the initial posture. FIG. 180 (m) following FIG. 180 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 180 (n) following FIG. 180 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the initial position. When the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position, the movable body 1002 ends the initial operation.

FIG. 180 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 in the state shown in FIGS. 180 (f) to 180 (i) is viewed from the rear right side. In this example, the movable body 1002 is moved to the lowermost position in a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. As shown in FIG. 180 (o), a lower escape portion 1050 having a space for allowing the movable body 1002 to escape is provided below the front side of the lower base 1044. The lower escape portion 1050 is located below the rear side of the front stage 244 of the game board 1000 and is provided in the center case of the game board 1000. At the lowermost end of the lower relief portion 1050, a receiving portion 1052 having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is arranged. A buffer portion 1054 is provided on the upper surface of the receiving portion 1052. A sheet-shaped cushioning member is used for the cushioning portion 1054.

If the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by, for example, 45 ° or more from the initial posture, the moving unit 1036 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 cannot be received by the lower base 1044, but the lower relief portion 1050 It can be received by the receiving unit 1052. As a result, even if the movable body 1002 in a posture different from the initial posture moves to the lower limit position, it is possible to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with the peripheral device or the peripheral member.

Although not shown, if the movable body 1002 can be moved above the initial position of the movable body 1010, an upper relief portion may be provided. The upper relief portion, like the lower relief portion 1050, is provided to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with the peripheral device and peripheral members. The upper relief portion may be provided with a receiving portion having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a cushioning portion on the lower surface of the receiving portion.
(Example 5)
FIG. 181 shows an example of production in Example 5 of this embodiment. FIG. 181 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 181 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 181 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 181 (a), the movable bodies 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

FIG. 181 (b), which continues from FIG. 181 (a), shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 in FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

FIG. 181 (c) following FIG. 181 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 181 (d) following FIG. 181 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 181 (e) following FIG. 181 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 181 (e).

In the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate. As the drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the same mechanism as the drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the above embodiment is used. In this way, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 also functions as a movable body. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 ° clockwise and counterclockwise with the center of the display area as the center of rotation from the initial posture in which the upper and lower ends of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are parallel to the horizontal direction. It is possible. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotatable, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may not be rotatable, or both units may be rotatable. In this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot rotate. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 cannot rotate as in the above embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may or may not be rotatable.

FIG. 181 (f), which continues from FIG. 181 (e), shows a state in which the effect of the previous stage of the rotational operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. In this example, before the main liquid crystal unit 1001 starts the rotation operation, the variable icon, the hold icon, and the decorative symbol are displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then these displays are erased from the decorative symbol display device 208. .. In this example, first, the black circular variation icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then the variation icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. When the hold icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208 after the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The display mode of the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is the same as the display mode of the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 181 (g) following FIG. 181 (f) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the sub-display device 1030. After the sub-display device 1030 temporarily stops and displays "decoration 2" as the left and right symbols and displays the middle symbol in a variable manner, the display of the decorative symbol is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208.

When the display of the variable icon, the hold icon, the decorative symbol, or the like is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208, another display that overlaps these displays may be visible to the player. The other display may be displayed as a preview image. The symbol variation display, in which the other display may be visible to the player, is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the other display remains invisible to the player. It may be configured.

FIG. 181 (h) following FIG. 181 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has started the effect operation. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

FIG. 181 (i) following FIG. 181 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 181 (h). Further, the number of holdings in the special drawing 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball is inserted into the starting opening 230 of the special drawing 1, and a white circular holding icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. ..

FIG. 181 (j) following FIG. 181 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 181 (i) and returned to the initial posture. Further, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 1030 as a middle symbol, and the sub display is based on the fact that the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command transmitted from the main control unit 300. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the device 1030 as a definite symbol.

FIG. 181 (k) following FIG. 181 (j) shows a state in which the erasing animation of the variable icon is executed. On the sub-display device 1030, an animation for erasing the variable icon is executed, and the black circular variable icon is erased.

FIG. 181 (l) following FIG. 181 (k) shows the non-execution state of the special figure variation game. The special drawing 1 of the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed on the special drawing 1 display device 212 (not shown), and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the sub-display device 1030.

FIG. 181 (m) following FIG. 181 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes the variable icon and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Further, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movable body 1006 has moved to the leftmost end. Therefore, the movable body 1006 becomes invisible to the player.

FIG. 181 (n) following FIG. 181 (m) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 181 (o) following FIG. 181 (n) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted during the execution of the next special figure variable game of the special figure variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is erased on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 181 (n) following FIG. 181 (o) shows a state in which the display of the variable icon is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the display of the variable icon and the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during the execution of the next special figure variable game of the special figure variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the display of the variable icon is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable icon is erased on the sub display device 1030. When the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030 after the display of the hold icon is started on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 181 (q) following FIG. 181 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order. The movable body 1006 may return to the initial position after the end of the special figure 1 variable game.

FIG. 181 (r) following FIG. 181 (q) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variable icon is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is erased.
(Example 6)
FIG. 182 shows an example of the effect of the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 182 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 182 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 182 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot move or rotate, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves in the vertical direction by the same drive mechanism as the movable body 1002 shown in FIG. 175. It is possible. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate as in the fifth embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 182 (a), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the initial position in the initial posture. Both the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be movable up and down.

FIG. 182 (b), which continues from FIG. 182 (a), shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to a power failure during non-execution of the special figure variation game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 182 (c) following FIG. 182 (b) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. Similar to the movable body 1002, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves to the lowest position of the moving range by its own weight. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state in which the power is off. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may execute drive control for moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 to the lowermost position by the power supply supplied from the power storage circuit provided in the power supply control unit 660.

FIG. 182 (d) following FIG. 182 (c) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

FIG. 182 (e) following FIG. 182 (d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 182 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 is running, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 display a character string image of “starting”. Has been done.

FIG. 182 (f) following FIG. 182 (e) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed. The sub-display device 1030 continues to display the character string image of "starting up".

FIG. 182 (g) following FIG. 182 (f) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, only the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is executed. As shown in FIG. 182 (g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves upward and is located at the initial position.

FIG. 182 (h) following FIG. 182 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 182 (i) following FIG. 182 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 182 (h). FIG. 182 (j) following FIG. 182 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 182 (i) and returned to the initial posture. In the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 first moves from the lowest position (non-operating operation position) to the initial position, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 counterclockwise from the initial posture. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 °, then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 90 ° clockwise, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is completed.

FIG. 182 (k) following FIG. 182 (j) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is resumed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. The stop symbol of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is the default stop symbol. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (k), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0.

The movement of the movable body 1002 from the initial position to the lowermost position in FIGS. 176 (c) and 176 (d), and the movement of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 in FIGS. 182 (b) and 182 (c) from the initial position to the lowest position. The operation of moving the first movable body to the first position when the power is turned off, such as movement, may be performed not only when the power is turned off but also as a big hit notice. The symbol variation display with the jackpot notice may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily than the symbol variation display without the jackpot notice, or the jackpot notice may be displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the above is performed, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally stopped and displayed. On the contrary, even in the symbol variation display in which the big hit notice is given, the off-design mode may be finally stopped and displayed. Of course, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed even in the symbol variation display in which the jackpot notice is not given.
(Example 7)
FIG. 183 shows an example of the effect of the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 183 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 183 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 183 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 183 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in this embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can perform the vertical movement and rotation operation, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can perform the vertical movement and rotation operation. In the state shown in FIG. 183 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the initial position in the initial posture, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is initially positioned. It is stationary in a posture.

FIG. 183 (b), which continues from FIG. 183 (a), shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 in FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

FIG. 183 (c) following FIG. 183 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 183 (d) following FIG. 183 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 183 (e) following FIG. 183 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 183 (e).

FIG. 183 (f) following FIG. 183 (e) shows a state in which the effect operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is started. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

FIG. 183 (g) following FIG. 183 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (g).

FIG. 183 (h) following FIG. 183 (g) shows a state in which the effect operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

FIG. 183 (i) following FIG. 183 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (h). The rotation start timings of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be at the same time, or either one may come first. In the rotation operation, the rotation speeds of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are the same.

FIG. 183 (j) following FIG. 183 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (h). In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and at the time shown in FIG. 183 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (i). It is rotated by 60 °, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (i).

FIG. 183 (k) following FIG. 183 (j) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (j) and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is shown in FIG. 183 (j). It shows a state of being rotated 30 ° clockwise from. In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

In FIG. 183 (l) following from FIG. 183 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (k), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is from the state shown in FIG. 183 (k). It shows a state of being rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise. As a result, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 return to the initial posture.

FIG. 183 (m) following FIG. 183 (l) shows a state in which the effect operation of moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the vertical direction is executed. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves downward, and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves upward. As described above, in the effect operation of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in opposite directions.

FIG. 183 (n) following FIG. 183 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are returned to the initial positions prior to the end of the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 183 (o), which continues from FIG. 183 (n), shows a state in which the erasing animation of the variable icon is executed while the special figure variable game is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is erased.
(Example 8)
Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the connection unit 1060 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. A slip ring is used for the connection unit 1060 of this embodiment.

FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (d) are external perspective views of the connection unit 1060 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. First, the appearance configuration of the connection unit 1060 will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (a). The connection unit 1060 includes an upper case 1062 and a lower case 1064. The upper case 1062 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1062 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (d) and (f), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched so that the configurations can be easily distinguished.

A lower case 1064 is arranged below the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1064 is open. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1062 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1064 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1062 are the same size, and the lower case 1064 is arranged so that the upper surface matches the lower surface of the upper case 1062. Further, the lower case 1064 has a shorter vertical length than the upper case 1062 when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (e), the lower case 1064 is provided with hatching that rises to the right in order to make it easier to distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1062 and the lower case 1064 are arranged on the moving unit 1036 side.

A fixed-side connector 1066 is provided in the lower center of the front side surface of the upper case 1062. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness to which one end is connected to the fixed side connector 1066 is connected to the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400. The harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected to each other via a relay board.

Further, a circular opening 1068 is provided at the center of the upper surface of the upper case 1062. A circular rotating side case 1070 is arranged in the opening 1068. The rotating side case 1070 is arranged on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. A fixing hole 1072 for a rotating shaft is provided in the center of the rotating side case 1070. In the rotation shaft fixing hole 1072, one end is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor arranged in the moving unit 1036, and the other end is fixed to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the rotation side case 1070. Arranged to stretch to. Further, the rotating side case 1070 is provided with a rotating side connector 1074. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness to which one end is connected to the rotating side connector 1074 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

The rotation side case 1070 is adapted to rotate with the shaft. FIGS. 184 (b) to 184 (d) show a state in which the rotating side case 1070 is rotated. FIG. 184 (b) shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 184 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 184 (c) shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 184 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 184 (d) shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 270 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 184 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above.

FIG. 184 (e) shows a state in which the inside of the lower case 1064 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the upper case 1062 side. A circular shaft hole 1076 is provided in the center of the lower case 1064. A shaft for rotationally driving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 passes through the rotary shaft hole 1076.

Further, the fixed-side connector 1066 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1064 is provided with conductive portions 1078, 1080, 1082, 1084, 1086, 1088 connected to each pin of the fixed-side connector 1066, respectively. There is. Taking the conductive portion 1078 as an example, the conductive portion 1078 has an elongated conductive plate 1078a and a fixture 1078b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064. The fixture 1078b fixes the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064 so that the conductive plate 1078b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1078b. The conductive portions 1080 to 1088 have the same configuration as the conductive portions 1078.

FIG. 184 (f) shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotating side case 1070 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the lower case 1064 side. A rotating side substrate 1090 is arranged on the lower surface side of the rotating side case 1070. The rotating side substrate 1090 is a slip ring. The rotating side substrate 1090 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1092. Further, circumferential wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1092 of the rotating side substrate 1090. The wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. Further, the insulating portion 1092 and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are arranged concentrically, and the rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the concentric circles. In FIG. 184 (f), the insulating portion 1092 and the wiring portions 1094 to 1104 are hatched upward to the right in order to make it easier to distinguish the configurations.

The rotating side connector 1074 of the rotating side case 1070 is provided with 6 pins, and each pin and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are connected to each other. Further, the wiring 1094 is connected to the conductive portion 1078 shown in FIG. 184 (e), the wiring 1096 is connected to the conductive portion 1080 shown in FIG. 184 (e), and the wiring 1098 is connected to the conductive portion 1082 shown in FIG. 184 (e). Connected, the wiring 1100 is connected to the conductive portion 1084 shown in FIG. 184 (e), the wiring 1102 is connected to the conductive portion 1086 shown in FIG. 184 (e), and the wiring 1104 is connected to the conductive portion 1088 shown in FIG. 184 (e). Is connected with.

Next, using FIGS. 184 (g) and 184 (h), the connection state between each conductive portion and each wiring will be described by exemplifying the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094. 184 (g) and (h) show the conductive portion 1078 cut along the line AA of FIG. 184 (e). The conductive plate 1078a has a shape extending diagonally upward from the lower case 1064. When the lower case 1064 is placed on the upper case 1062 by combining the upper surface of the lower case 1064 and the lower surface of the upper case 1062, the wiring 1094 has the other end of the conductive plate 1078a downward as shown in FIG. 184 (h). It comes into contact with the conductive plate 1078a so as to be pushed in. In this way, the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are connected. The same applies to the connection state between the conductive portions 1080 to 1088 and the wirings 1096 to 1104.

The conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1080 and the wiring 1096 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1082 and the wiring 1098 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1084 and the wiring 1100 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1086 and the wiring 1102 are used to transmit various signals from the first sub-board 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1088 and the wiring 1104 are used to transmit various signals from the first sub-board 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

As an example of various signals, when a microcomputer for controlling an image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) is mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the first sub control unit 400 transfers the microcomputer to the microcomputer. Examples include production commands (commands that specify production, progress of production, still images, moving images, progress of image display scenarios, etc.).

Further, the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) may be mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer may be provided. Examples include image commands for the means (commands that specify the progress of still images, moving images, image display scenarios, etc.).

Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub-board 160 or the moving unit 1036, and the sub liquid crystal unit is mounted. The 1032 may be equipped with an image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means, etc.). In this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.) can be mentioned with respect to the liquid crystal driving means or the like.
(Example 9)
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, a connection unit between the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the mobile unit 1036 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the connection unit 1110 is used as the connection unit.

FIG. 185 (a) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 is arranged in the mobile unit 1036 shown in FIG. 175 and is electrically connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

First, the appearance configuration of the connection unit 1110 will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (a). The connection unit 1110 includes an upper case 1112 and a lower case 1114. The upper case 1112 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1112 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 185 (a) and 185 (c), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched so that the configurations can be easily distinguished.

A lower case 1114 is arranged below the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1114 is open. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1112 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1114 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1112 are the same size, and the lower case 1114 is arranged so that the upper surface matches the lower surface of the upper case 1112. Further, the lower case 1114 is shorter in the vertical direction than the upper case 1112 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 185 (a) to 185 (b), the lower case 1114 is provided with hatching that rises to the right in order to make it easier to distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1112 and the lower case 1114 are arranged on the moving unit 1036 side.

A fixed-side connector 1116 is provided in the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1112. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness to which one end is connected to the fixed-side connector 1116 is connected to the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400. The harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected to each other via a relay board.

Further, a circular opening 1118 is provided in the central portion of the upper bottom surface of the upper case 1112. A circular rotating side case 1120 is arranged in the opening 1118. The rotating side case 1120 is arranged on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The rotating side case 1120 is provided with a rotating side connector 1022. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness to which one end is connected to the rotating side connector 1122 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

On the upper surface of the rotating side case 1112, a columnar rotating body connecting shaft 1124, 1126, 1128 that is orthogonal to the upper surface and extends upward is fixed. The rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126 and 1128 have the same length. Further, the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are arranged at equal intervals in the rotating side case 1112. A bearing is attached to the tip of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is attached to the bearing. Further, when the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are connected, an equilateral triangle is formed, and data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 described later are arranged at the center of gravity of the equilateral triangle.

FIG. 185 (b) shows a state in which the inside of the lower case 1114 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the upper case 1112 side. The fixed-side connector 1116 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1164 is provided with conductive portions 1130, 1132, 1134, and 1136 connected to 4 of the 6 pins of the fixed-side connector 1164, respectively. .. Taking the conductive portion 1130 as an example, the conductive portion 1130 has an elongated conductive plate 1130a and a fixture 1130b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114. The fixture 1130b fixes the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114 so that the conductive plate 1130b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1130b. The conductive portions 1132 to 1136 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1130.

Further, in this embodiment, the conductive portions 1130 to 1136 are used for power supply and GND connection, and signal communication is performed by optical communication (wireless communication). A data transmission / reception unit 1138 for optical communication is arranged in the center of the lower case 1114. The data transmission / reception unit 1138 is connected to pin 2 of the 6 pins of the fixed side connector 1114. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1138 is used for signal transmission, but it can also receive signals.

FIG. 185 (c) shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotating side case 1120 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the lower case 1114 side. A rotating side substrate 1140 is arranged on the lower surface side of the rotating side case 1120. The rotating side substrate 1140 is a slip ring. The rotating side substrate 1140 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1142. A data transmission / reception unit 1144 is arranged at the center of the rotation-side substrate 1140. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is arranged to face the data transmission / reception unit 1138 so as to overlap the data transmission / reception unit 1138 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from above. Signals are transmitted and received between the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 by optical communication. Further, the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is connected to pin 2 of the 6 pins of the rotation side connector 1122. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is used for signal reception, but signal transmission is also possible.

Circumferential wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, and 1152 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1142 of the rotating side substrate 1140. The wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, and 1152 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. Further, the insulating portion 1142 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 are arranged concentrically, and the data transmitting / receiving portion 1144 is provided at the center of the concentric circles. In FIG. 185 (c), the insulating portion 1142 and the wiring portions 1146 to 1152 are hatched upward to the right in order to make it easier to distinguish the configurations.

Four of the six pins and wirings 1146 to 1152 are connected to the rotation side connector 1122 of the rotation side case 1120, respectively. Further, the wiring 1146 is connected to the conductive portion 1130 shown in FIG. 185 (b), the wiring 1148 is connected to the conductive portion 1132 shown in FIG. 185 (b), and the wiring 1150 is connected to the conductive portion 1134 shown in FIG. 185 (b). Connected, the wiring 1152 is connected to the conductive portion 1136 shown in FIG. 185 (b).

FIGS. 185 (d) and 185 (e) show the connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146. FIGS. 185 (d) and 185 (e) show the conductive portion 1130 cut along the line AA of FIG. 185 (b). The connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 is the same as the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 shown in FIGS. 184 (e) and 184 (f). The connection state between the conductive portions 1132 to 1136 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 is also the same.

The conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1132 and the wiring 1148 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1134 and the wiring 1150 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1136 and the wiring 1152 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160.

Further, as an example of various signals transmitted / received between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144, when the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling an image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.). Is an effect command (command for specifying effect, progress of effect, still image, moving image, progress of image display scenario, etc.) from the first sub-control unit 400 to the microcomputer.

Further, the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) may be mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer may be provided. Examples include image commands for the means (commands that specify the progress of still images, moving images, image display scenarios, etc.).

Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub-board 160 or the moving unit 1036, and the sub liquid crystal unit is mounted. The 1032 may be equipped with an image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means, etc.). In this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.) can be mentioned with respect to the liquid crystal driving means or the like.

In this embodiment, the data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 is optical wireless communication. Laser light is used for optical wireless communication. The data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 may be radio communication instead of optical wireless communication. Further, LED light may be used instead of laser light for optical wireless communication.

When both the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the data transmission / reception unit 1138 to the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is as described above, but the data transmission / reception from the data transmission / reception unit 1144. For unit 138, an ACK signal or a state signal from a control means or the like provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 (for example, an image control means, a microcomputer for controlling the image control means, an image drive means (liquid crystal drive means), or the like). , Information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (for example, a detection signal output when a sensor provided on the rotating side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side, an output signal of an encoder provided on the rotating side, etc. ) May be sent.

FIG. 185 (f) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has only the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 as the rotating body connecting shaft. The rotating body connecting shaft 1124 is arranged at the center (rotation center) of the rotating side case 1120.

FIG. 185 (g) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 and 1126 as the rotating body connecting shafts. The straight line connecting the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the tip of the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 passes through the center (rotation center) of the rotating body case 1120. Further, the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 are arranged at equal distances from the center.
(Example 10)
FIG. 186 shows an effect example 1 in the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 186 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 186 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174. Further, the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 of the pachinko machine 100 of Examples 10 and 11 to 16 described later in the present embodiment are different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174, and the front side of the movable body 1002. It is arranged on the front side of the movable body 1002 and can move in the left-right direction.

FIG. 186 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b.

FIG. 186 (b), which continues from FIG. 186 (a), shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 in FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

FIG. 186 (c) following FIG. 186 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 186 (d) following FIG. 186 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIGS. 186 and later, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a thick white arrow pointing downward. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the start of the movement animation of the hold / variable icon.

FIG. 186 (e) following FIG. 186 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 186 (d).

In FIG. 186 (f) following from FIG. 186 (e), the movable body 1008 started the effect operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 moved to the position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 186 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the right half area of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so as to be difficult to see. An image of clouds displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. In addition, a part of the area on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. The yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the yacht image or the cloud image may be shielded by the movable body 1008 has a fixed jackpot symbol mode as compared with the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. It may be configured to be easily displayed.

FIG. 186 (g) shows an extracted movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and a transmission portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 186 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguished from other configurations. Hatching is attached for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 186 (h) to 186 (k) following from FIG. 186 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown. Hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the composition of. In FIG. 186 (g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. An image of a cloud is displayed at a position behind the movable body 1008 below the transparent portion 1008b, but the image of the cloud is not visible because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. Further, in this embodiment, the image of the cloud is an image displayed as a preview image.

FIG. 186 (h) following FIGS. 186 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 186 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by about 10 °.

FIG. 186 (i) following FIG. 186 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 186 (h). Further, in FIG. 186 (i), in the states of FIGS. 186 (g) and 186 (h), an image of a cloud that was invisible due to overlapping with the movable body 1008 is formed by rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. It shows a state in which it becomes visible through 1008b. The pattern variation display in which the cloud image may be visually recognized via 1008b due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is the case where the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 186 (h), so that the entire cloud image can be visually recognized via 1008b. , Only a part of the cloud image may be visible via 1008b.

FIG. 186 (j) following FIG. 186 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 186 (i). In FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (j) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (h) are the same, but in the state shown in FIG. 186 (h), they are visually recognized via 1008b. Since the display of moving the image of the missing cloud upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 was performed, a part of the image of the cloud is visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 186 (j). Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the cloud is visually recognized so that the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The moving display of the image of is may be performed.

FIG. 186 (k) following FIG. 186 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated clockwise by about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 186 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 186 (k), an image of a cloud that was not visually recognized through 1008b in the state shown in FIG. 186 (g) is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (k) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (g) are the same, but after the state shown in FIG. 186 (j), the image of the cloud. Is displayed to be moved upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, so that it is visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 186 (k). Further, since the display for moving the cloud image upward is performed, the area of the cloud image that can be visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 186 (k) is visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 186 (j). It is wider than the possible cloud image area. Further, in this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 10008b. The moving display of the cloud image may be performed.

In FIG. 186 (l) continuing from FIG. 186 (k), after the movable body 1008 has moved to the initial position, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows the state of notifying that the result of the variable display is a big hit.

FIG. 187 shows an effect example 2 in the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 187 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 187 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

187 (a) to (f) show the same state as in FIGS. 186 (a) to 186 (f). FIG. 187 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 187 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguished from other configurations. Hatching is attached for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 187 (h) to 187 (k) following from FIG. 187 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown. Hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the composition of. Further, FIG. 187 (g) shows the same state as in FIG. 186 (g). FIG. 187 (h) following FIGS. 187 (f) and 187 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation, and shows the same state as in FIG. 186 (h).

FIG. 187 (i) following FIG. 187 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 187 (i). In FIG. 187 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 186 (i), the image of the cloud displayed behind the movable body 1008 is moved and displayed to the left as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. It shows a state in which it is not visually recognized through 1008b. Further, the cloud image may be erased as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates, or may not be displayed from the beginning.

FIG. 187 (j) following FIG. 187 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 187 (i). FIG. 187 (j) shows a state in which the cloud image is not visually recognized, unlike the state shown in FIG. 186 (j).

FIG. 187 (k) following FIG. 187 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated clockwise by about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 187 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. FIG. 187 (k) shows a state in which the cloud image is not visually recognized, unlike the state shown in FIG. 186 (k).

In FIG. 187 (l), which continues from FIG. 187 (k), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position. , Special Figure 1 shows the state of notifying that the result of the variation display is out of order.

As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may execute the rotational operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, the player may be able to visually recognize the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 through the transparent portion of the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. is there. Further, in the present embodiment, the image of the cloud displayed on the sub-display device 1030, which becomes invisible due to the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 moves to the left, is displayed as a preview image. In the present embodiment, the movement operation of the movable body 1008 causes the player to visually recognize at least a part of the preview image via the transparent portion 1008b, and at least the preview image via the transparent portion 1008b. There is an effect when some images are not visible to the player. Further, when a part of the notice image is visually recognized by the player through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008 due to the moving operation of the movable body 1008, the notice image is displayed through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. Compared with the case where at least a part of the images is not visually recognized by the player, it is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode as the final result of the variable display of the symbol.

The images of clouds, balloons, and the sun displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be movable and displayed as the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. For example, the image of the cloud displayed in the upper center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 206 is moved so as to be invisible through the transparent portion 1008a when the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the left. The image of the balloon or the sun may be displayed, and the image of the balloon or the sun is moved so that it can be visually recognized via the transmission portion 1008a or the transmission portion 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the left. It may be displayed. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the symbol variation display in which the images of clouds, balloons, and the sun can be visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008a and the transparent portion 1008b is displayed via the transparent portion 1008a and the transparent portion 1008b. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which the images of clouds, balloons, and the sun are invisible. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the moving display of the image of the cloud, the balloon, or the sun makes it impossible to see the image of the cloud, the balloon, or the sun through the transmitting portion 1008a or the transmitting portion 1008b. In the symbol variation display, which may occur, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the moving display of the image of clouds, balloons, or the sun is not performed, so that the clouds or It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which the images of the balloon and the sun remain visible. Further, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the images of clouds, balloons, and the sun when they are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a and the transmission unit 1008b are displayed in a color different from the normal time. There may be cases. For example, if the cloud image is normally displayed in white and is visible through the transmissive portion 1008a or transmissive portion 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the left, it is blue, green, or It may be displayed in red. The symbol variation display in which the cloud image may be displayed in a color different from the normal time is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the cloud image is displayed in the normal color. It may be configured in. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may execute a rotational operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 186 (g) to (k) or 187 (g) to (k) of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the sub display device 1030. There may be.
(Example 11)
FIG. 188 shows Production Example 1 in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 188 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 188 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 188 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 188 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 188 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b.

FIG. 188 (b), which continues from FIG. 188 (a), shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 in FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

FIG. 188 (c), which continues from FIG. 188 (b), shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 188 (d) following FIG. 188 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIGS. 186 and later, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a thick white arrow pointing downward. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the start of the movement animation of the hold / variable icon.

FIG. 188 (e) following FIG. 188 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 188 (d).

In FIG. 188 (f) following from FIG. 188 (e), the movable body 1008 started the effect operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 moved to a position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 188 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the right half area of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so as to be difficult to see. An image of clouds displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. In addition, a part of the area on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. The yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. In the symbol variation display in which the yacht image or the cloud image may be shielded by the movable body 1008, the jackpot symbol mode is determined as compared with the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. It may be configured to be easily displayed.

FIG. 188 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 188 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguished from other configurations. Hatching is attached for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 188 (h) to (k) following from FIG. 188 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008 is shown by extracting the movable body 1008 from the other. Hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the composition of. In FIG. 188 (g), a part of the movable body 1008 excluding the right portion of the illumination unit 1014b, the lower end portion of the illumination unit 1014c, and the right end portion of the illumination unit 1014d is shielded, and illumination is performed through the transmission unit 1008b. The portion of the portion 1014c excluding the shielded portion and the right end portion of the illumination portion 1014d are visually recognized. Further, FIG. 188 (g) shows a state in which the portion of the lighting unit 1014a to 1014d visible to the player emits light in blue. Further, in FIG. 188 (g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 188 (h) following FIGS. 188 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 188 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by about 10 °. Further, in FIG. 188 (h), the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is reduced via the transmission unit 1008b as compared with the state shown in FIG. 188 (g). Further, in the unshielded region of the movable body 1008, the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is increased.

FIG. 188 (i) following FIG. 188 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 35 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 188 (h). In FIG. 188 (i), the black-painted portion of the illumination unit 1014d indicates a blue-emitting portion, and the white-painted portion indicates a red-emitting portion. In FIG. 188 (i), in the region not shielded by the movable body 1008, the portion of the lighting unit 1014d that is not visible to the player due to overlapping with the movable body 1008 is visible to the player. It shows the state that became. The symbol variation display in which the red light emitting portion may become visible due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is a symbol variation display in which the red light emitting portion does not become visible because the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. In comparison with the above, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed.

FIG. 188 (j) following FIG. 188 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 35 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 188 (i). Further, FIG. 188 (j) shows a state in which the area of the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits light in red is large and the area of the portion that emits light in blue is small. In FIG. 188 (j), a part of the cloud image as a preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the cloud is visually recognized so that the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The image may be displayed. The symbol variation display in which at least a part of the cloud image as the preview image may be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is the image of the cloud as the advance notice image through the transmission unit 1008b. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the above is not visually recognized.

FIG. 188 (k) following FIG. 188 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated clockwise by about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 188 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 188 (k) shows a state in which the area of the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits light in red is further increased, and the illumination unit 1014d emits light in red. In FIG. 188 (k), a part of the cloud image as a preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. Further, since the display for moving the cloud image upward is performed, the cloud image region that can be visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 188 (k) is visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 188 (j). It is wider than the possible cloud image area. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 188 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 10008b. The moving display of the cloud image may be performed.

In FIG. 188 (l), which continues from FIG. 188 (k), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the movable body 1008 has moved to the initial position. , Special Figure 1 shows the state of notifying that the result of the variable display is a big hit.

FIG. 189 shows an effect example 2 in the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 189 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 189 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

189 (a) to (f) show the same state as FIGS. 188 (a) to (f). FIG. 189 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 189 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguished from other configurations. Hatching is attached for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 189 (h) to 189 (k) following from FIG. 189 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b are extracted and shown. Hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the composition of. Further, FIG. 189 (g) shows the same state as in FIG. 188 (g). FIG. 189 (h) following FIGS. 189 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation, and shows the same state as in FIG. 188 (h).

FIG. 189 (i) following FIG. 189 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 189 (i). Further, in FIG. 189 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (i), the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is small, so that the illumination unit 1014d is not visible to the player because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. It shows a state in which the light emitting part is not visually recognized.

FIG. 189 (j) following FIG. 189 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 189 (i). Further, in FIG. 189 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), the area of the red light emitting portion of the illumination unit 1014d is not large, so that the red light emitting portion of the illumination unit 1014d is visually recognized. It shows the state that it is not. Further, in FIG. 189 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), a state in which the cloud image as a preview image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

FIG. 189 (k) following FIG. 189 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated clockwise by about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 189 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 189 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), the area of the red light emitting portion of the illumination unit 1014d is not large, so that the red light emitting portion of the illumination unit 1014d is not visually recognized. Indicates the state. Further, in FIG. 189 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), a state in which the cloud image as a preview image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

In FIG. 189 (l), which continues from FIG. 189 (k), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position. , Special Figure 1 shows the state of notifying that the result of the variation display is out of order.

As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may execute a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 causes the lighting unit. The light emitting mode of 1014d may change. In this embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by a maximum of 45 ° behind the movable body 1008, the light emitting mode of the lighting unit 1014d is changed, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is behind the movable body 1008. When the unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by a maximum of 30 °, the light emitting mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. The symbol variation display in which the light emitting mode of the illumination unit 1014d may change due to the rotational operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. Therefore, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.
(Example 12)
FIG. 190 shows an example of production in Example 12 of the present embodiment. FIG. 190 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 190 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b.

FIG. 190 (b), which continues from FIG. 190 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

FIG. 190 (c) following FIG. 190 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 190 (d) following FIG. 190 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 190 (e) following FIG. 190 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 190 (d).

In FIG. 190 (f) following from FIG. 190 (e), the effect operation is started from the state shown in FIG. 190 (e) by the movable body 1008, and the left end of the transparent portion 1008 b of the movable body 1008 is the screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state of moving to the position located at the left end. FIG. 190 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the display area of the sub display device 1030 and the illumination unit 1014d are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. Further, the yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 190 (g) following FIG. 190 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and is hidden by the movable body 1008 behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 190 (g), an image of clouds as a preview image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

In FIG. 190 (h), which continues from FIG. 190 (g), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state of FIG. 190 (g) behind the movable body 1008 and passes through the transmission portion 1008 b. , Indicates a state in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized. FIG. 190 (h) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 190 (i) following FIG. 190 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 190 (h). FIG. 190 (i) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a preview image displayed on the right side of the screen of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 190 (j) following FIG. 190 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the state of FIG. 190 (i) behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 190 (j) shows a state in which the cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030, which was visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b, cannot be visually recognized.

FIG. 190 (k) following FIG. 190 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 190 (k) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 190 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated in a state where the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008, thereby passing through the transmission portion 1008b. The amount of images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 that is visually recognized is changing. Further, the image of the cloud is displayed by moving upward from the state shown in FIG. 190 (i).

In FIG. 190 (l) following FIG. 190 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 190 (k) behind the movable body 1008 (total 90 °). It shows the rotated state. FIG. 190 (l) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 190 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated in a state where the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008, thereby passing through the transmission unit 1008b. The amount of images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 that is visually recognized is changing.

In FIG. 190 (m) following FIG. 190 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 110 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 190 (l) behind the movable body 1008 (total 200 °). (Rotated) is shown. FIG. 190 (m) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

In FIG. 190 (n), which continues from FIG. 190 (m), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 160 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 190 (l) behind the movable body 1008 (total 360 °). (Rotation) shows the state of returning to the initial posture. FIG. 190 (m) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

In FIG. 190 (o) following from FIG. 190 (n), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 190 (o) and returns to the initial position behind the movable body 1008. It shows the state of. FIG. 190 (o) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 190 (p) following FIG. 190 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 190 (o) and returns to the initial position. FIG. 190 (p) shows a state in which the effect operation of each movable body (movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012) is completed.

FIG. 190 (q) following FIG. 190 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates behind the movable body 1008, so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized by the player through the transmissive portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. The area of the image (for example, the image of the cloud as a preview image) may be configured to change. The symbol variation display in which the area may change may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitely displayed than the symbol variation display in which the area does not change. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a moving and rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 13)
FIG. 191 shows an example of production in the thirteenth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 191 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 191 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 191 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 191 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 191 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 191 (b), which continues from FIG. 191 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a). Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image may not be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the variable display.

FIG. 191 (c) following FIG. 191 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 191 (d) following FIG. 191 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 191 (e) following FIG. 191 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 191 (d).

FIG. 191 (f), which continues from FIG. 191 (e), shows a state in which the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Is shown. FIG. 191 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transparent unit 1008b. FIG. 191 (f) shows a state in which the image of the balloon displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

In FIG. 191 (g) following from FIG. 191 (f), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is hidden by the movable body 1008. The image of the balloon and the image of the yacht displayed in are invisible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

FIG. 191 (h) following FIG. 191 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 191 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. In FIG. 191 (h), the image of the balloon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 can be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b, and the image of the yacht cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008.

FIG. 191 (i) following FIG. 191 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 191 (h). Further, FIG. 191 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 240 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated by 300 °) from the state of FIG. 191 (h) behind the movable body 1008. ing. Further, in FIG. 191 (i), an image of a part of the balloon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 can be visually recognized in the area not shielded by the movable body 1008, and the image of the yacht displayed on the sub-display device 1030. Indicates a state in which it cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008.

FIG. 191 (j) following FIG. 191 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the state of FIG. 191 (i). Further, FIG. 191 (j) shows an operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 191 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Both movements to move to the lower initial position are performed in parallel, indicating the initial posture and the state of returning to the initial position. Further, FIG. 191 (j) shows a state in which both the image of the balloon and the image of the yacht displayed on the sub-display device 1030 have been erased.

FIG. 191 (k) following FIG. 191 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 191 (j) and returns to the initial position.

FIG. 191 (l) following FIG. 191 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

As described above, in the production of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a plurality of character images may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008, all the characters in the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. Of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030, the image is configured so as not to be visible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is moved to a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only one character image is visible to the player. Further, in the case where one character image becomes visible at that time is a specific character image (for example, a preview image), the symbol variation display specifies that there is one character image that becomes visible at that time. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed as compared with the symbol variation display when the character image is not. Further, the character image of one of the characters displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is such that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. In some cases, it may be visible. A character image of one of the characters displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized by the movable bodies of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 performing a moving operation. The symbol variation display in the case is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable bodies of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized even if they perform the moving motion. It may have been. Further, the character image of one of the characters displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is obtained by the movable bodies of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 moving. The symbol variation display when it is visible is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move. It may be configured in. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 14)
FIG. 192 shows an example of production in Example 14 of the present embodiment. FIG. 192 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 192 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174. The pachinko machine 100 of the 14th embodiment of the present embodiment and the 15th and 16th embodiments described later is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174, and the variable icon and the hold icon are displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1030. ..

FIG. 192 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 192 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 192 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 192 (b), which continues from FIG. 192 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special Figure 1. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image may not be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the variable display.

FIG. 192 (c) following FIG. 192 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is started. In addition, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon has been erased.

FIG. 192 (d) following FIG. 192 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, FIG. 192 (d) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons that the hold icon becomes the change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 change game is completed in the sub display device 1030. ing.

FIG. 192 (e) following FIG. 192 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 192 (d).

In FIG. 192 (f) following from FIG. 192 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 is at a position where the variable icon on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden. It shows the moved state. FIG. 192 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transparent unit 1008b. FIG. 192 (f) shows a state in which the variable icon cannot be visually recognized because the variable icon displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

FIG. 192 (g) following FIG. 192 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the state of FIG. 192 (f). Further, in FIG. 192 (g), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The variable icon and the image of the yacht are invisible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

FIG. 192 (h) following FIG. 192 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 192 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 192 (h), an image of the balloon is displayed on the sub-display device 1030, and the image of the balloon is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. Further, in FIG. 192 (h), by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the variable icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the notice mode (white diamond). , The state in which the variable icon of the notice mode is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b is shown. In the production of this embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize that the variable icon in the normal mode changes to the notice mode via the transmissive unit 1008b. , The variable icon in the normal mode may be made visible to the player after changing to the notice mode.

FIG. 192 (i) following FIG. 192 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 is rotated 200 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 192 (h) and returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 192 (i) shows a state in which the image of the balloon, the image of the yacht, and the variable icon of the advance notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized.

FIG. 192 (j) following FIG. 192 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves downward from the state of FIG. 192 (i) and returns to the initial position. Further, in FIG. 192 (j), the variable icon of the notice mode displayed on the sub-display device 1030 is shown in a state of being visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 192 (j), the image of the yacht and the image of the balloon on the sub-display device 1030 show a state in which they cannot be visually recognized.

FIG. 192 (k) following FIG. 192 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 192 (j) and returns to the initial position.

FIG. 192 (l) following FIG. 192 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is a big hit.

As described above, in the production of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variable icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub-display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008, all the characters in the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. The image, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 by being configured to be invisible to the player and by locating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 at a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only one of the plurality of character images and the variable icon may be configured to be visible to the player. In addition, there are cases where one character image that becomes visible at that time is a specific character image (for example, a notice image), or the change icon is a notice mode. At that time, one character image that becomes visible is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display when the variable icon is not a specific character image and the variable icon is not the notice mode. You may be. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, all the character images and the variable icons among the plurality of character images are displayed. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or the variable icon may be visible. It may be configured so that only the player can see it, or it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be seen by the player.

In addition, one of the character images and variable icons displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In some cases, it may become visible. One of the character images and variable icons displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is that both the movable body of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform a moving operation. Compared with the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized even if both the movable bodies 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving motion, the symbol variation display when visually recognizable by It may be configured as follows. In addition, one of the character images and variable icons displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 causes both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 to move. The symbol variation display that may be visible by performing the jackpot symbol mode is determined as compared with the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move. It may be configured to be easily displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 15)
FIG. 193 shows an example of production in Example 15 of the present embodiment. FIG. 193 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 193 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 193 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 193 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 193 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 193 (b), which continues from FIG. 193 (a), shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of special figure 1. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image may not be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the variable display.

FIG. 193 (c) following FIG. 193 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is started. In addition, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon has been erased.

FIG. 193 (d) following FIG. 193 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, FIG. 193 (d) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons that the hold icon becomes the change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 change game is completed in the sub display device 1030. ing. Further, FIG. 193 (d) shows a state in which the number of reserved balls in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the starting port 230 in Special FIG. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1.

FIG. 193 (e) following FIG. 193 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 193 (d).

In FIG. 193 (f) following from FIG. 193 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Shows the state of FIG. 193 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to be difficult to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transparent unit 1008b. FIG. 193 (f) shows a state in which the hold icon cannot be visually recognized because the hold icon displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap each other. Further, the variable icon displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized in the area not shielded by the movable body 1008.

FIG. 193 (g) following FIG. 193 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the state of FIG. 193 (f). Further, in FIG. 193 (g), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The variable icon, hold icon, and yacht image are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. Then, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

FIG. 193 (h) following FIG. 193 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 192 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 193 (h), the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the look-ahead notice mode (white diamond) by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. However, the state in which the variable icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode are visually recognized is shown through the transparent unit 1008b. In the production of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the look-ahead notice mode via the transmission unit 1008b. However, the hold icon in the normal mode may be visually recognized by the player after changing to the look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 193 (i) following FIG. 193 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 193 (h) and returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, in FIG. 193 (i), the image of the balloon, the image of the yacht, the variable icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008. Indicates a state in which it cannot be done.

FIG. 193 (j) following FIG. 193 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves downward from the state of FIG. 193 (i) and returns to the initial position. Further, FIG. 193 (j) shows a state in which the variable icon in the normal mode and the variable icon in the notice mode displayed on the sub-display device 1030 are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 193 (j), the image of the yacht on the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which it cannot be visually recognized.

FIG. 193 (k) following FIG. 193 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 193 (j) and returns to the initial position.

FIG. 193 (l) following FIG. 193 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 193 (m), which continues from FIG. 193 (l), shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is started.

In FIG. 193 (n), which continues from FIG. 193 (m), in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons moves to the left. Indicates the finished state. Further, FIG. 193 (n) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. A predetermined reach effect is started after FIG. 193 (n).

FIG. 193 (o), which continues from FIG. 193 (n), shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the predetermined reach effect is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is a big hit. In this way, the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode is finally more finally than the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the normal mode. The jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

As described above, in the production of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variable icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub-display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008, all the characters in the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. The image, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 by being configured to be invisible to the player and by locating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 at a position behind the movable body 1008. Only the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the hold icon that becomes visible at that time is in the look-ahead notice mode, the hold corresponding to the hold icon is held as compared with the case where the hold icon that becomes visible at that time is not in the look-ahead notice mode. In the special figure variation game that is started after being digested, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, all the character images and the variable icons among the plurality of character images are displayed. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or the variable icon may be visible. It may be configured so that only the player can see it, or it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be seen by the player.

Further, the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move the movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. As a result, it may be visible. The variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are visually recognized when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. The symbol variation display that may be possible is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display that is not visible even if both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving motion. It may be configured as follows. The visible parts of the variable icon and hold icon may differ before and after the movement of the movable body. When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible parts of the variable icon and hold icon may differ before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than when the pre-reading notice is executed. Further, the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move the movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. As a result, the symbol variation display that may be visible is determined as compared with the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move. It may be configured to be easily displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 16)
FIG. 194 shows an example of production in Example 16 of this embodiment. FIG. 194 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 194 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 194 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 194 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 194 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 194 (b), which continues from FIG. 194 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the starting port 230 of Special FIG. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol variation display when the same character image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed in comparison with the above.

FIG. 194 (c) following FIG. 194 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is started. In addition, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon has been erased.

FIG. 194 (d) following FIG. 194 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, FIG. 194 (d) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons that the hold icon becomes the change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 change game is completed in the sub display device 1030. ing.

FIG. 194 (e) following FIG. 194 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 194 (d).

FIG. 194 (f), which continues from FIG. 194 (e), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1. Further, in FIG. 194 (f), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. It shows the state of moving to the position where. Further, FIG. 194 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to be difficult to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transparent unit 1008b.

In FIG. 194 (g), which continues from FIG. 194 (f), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is hidden by the movable body 1008. The variable icon, hold icon, and yacht image displayed in are invisible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

FIG. 194 (h) following FIG. 194 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 192 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 193 (h), the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the look-ahead notice mode (white diamond) by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. However, the state in which the variable icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode are visually recognized is shown through the transparent unit 1008b. In the production of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the look-ahead notice mode via the transmission unit 1008b. However, the hold icon in the normal mode may be visually recognized by the player after changing to the look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 194 (i) following FIG. 194 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 194 (h) and returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 194 (i) shows a state in which the image of the yacht displayed on the sub-display device 1030, the variable icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized. ing.

FIG. 194 (j) following FIG. 194 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves downward from the state of FIG. 194 (i) and returns to the initial position. Further, on the sub display device 1030, an image imitating a button, a character string image of "push" above the image, and a meter image displaying the validity period of pressing the button are displayed overlapping with the hold icon. There is. In addition, the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode may change to an image imitating a button or the like. Further, FIG. 194 (j) shows a state in which an image imitating a variable icon and a button and a character string image of "push" above the variable icon are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b, and the meter image is a movable body 1008. It shows a state where it cannot be seen by being hidden by. Further, in FIG. 194 (j), the image of the yacht on the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which it cannot be visually recognized.

In FIG. 194 (k) following from FIG. 194 (j), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the state of FIG. 194 (j), and the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008a. It shows the possible states. Further, FIG. 194 (k) shows a state in which the character string image of "push" displayed on the sub-display device 1030 can be visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the variable icon, the image imitating the button, and the meter image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 are hidden by the movable body 1008 to show a state in which they cannot be visually recognized. The symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a has a jackpot symbol mode as compared with the symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 is not visually recognized. It may be configured so that it can be easily confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 194 (l) following FIG. 194 (k) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, the character string image of "push" is erased based on the player pressing the chance button 136, and the image imitating the button and the effect image are displayed in the vicinity thereof. Further, FIG. 194 (l) shows a state in which the effect image is visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008b.

In FIG. 194 (m) continuing from FIG. 194 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is based on the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (l). It shows the state of moving from the state of to the uppermost position. Further, FIG. 194 (m) shows a state in which a part of the button image and the effect image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008a.

FIG. 194 (n) following FIG. 194 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state of FIG. 194 (m) and returns to the initial position. Further, a variable icon, a button image, and an effect image are displayed on the sub display device 1030.

In FIG. 194 (o), which continues from FIG. 194 (n), the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is executed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It shows the state. FIG. 194 (o) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 194 (n).

In FIG. 194 (p) following from FIG. 194 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 194 (o) to return to the initial posture. After that, it shows the state of returning to the lower initial position. Further, in the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 executed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136, both the operation of rotating counterclockwise and the operation of moving to the lower initial position are performed in parallel. It may return to the initial posture and the initial position.

FIG. 194 (q) following FIG. 194 (p) shows a state in which the button image and the effect image are erased in the sub display device 1030, and the variable icon in the normal state is changed to the variable icon in the notice mode. Further, FIG. 194 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is a big hit. The symbol variation display in which the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is a jackpot symbol mode rather than the symbol variation display in which the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is not rotated based on the pressing of the chance button 136. May be configured so that is easily displayed.

As described above, in the production of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a plurality of character images, a variable icon, a hold icon, and an image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the character images among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. , The variable icon, the hold icon, and the image prompting the player to press the chance button 136 are configured so as not to be visible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only the variable icon displayed on the display device 1030 and the image prompting the player to press the chance button 136 may be visible to the player. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, all the character images and the variable icons among the plurality of character images are displayed. The hold icon and the image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the holding icon and the image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 can be visually recognized by the player. In some cases, only the variable icon may be visible to the player, or only the hold icon may be visible to the player. It may be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the image prompting the player to press the chance button 136.

In addition, the images displaying the variable icon, the hold icon, and the chance button 136 displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are images of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. It may be possible that both movable bodies can be visually recognized by performing a moving operation. The image prompting the pressing of the variable icon, the hold icon, and the chance button 136 displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is the image of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display that may be visible when the movable body performs the moving motion is compared with the symbol variation display that may not be visible even if both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving motion. Therefore, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed. The visible part of the image that prompts you to press the variable icon, hold icon, or chance button 136 may differ before and after the movement of the movable body. When the look-ahead notice is executed, the variable icon or hold before and after the movement of the movable body. The visible part of the image prompting the pressing of the icon or chance button 136 may not be different. The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the pre-reading target symbol variation display than when the pre-reading notice is executed. You may be. The image prompting the pressing of the variable icon, the hold icon, and the chance button 136 displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is the image of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. When the movable body can be visually recognized by performing the moving motion, the symbol variation display to be read ahead is compared with the case where both the movable body of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized by performing the moving motion. The jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 17)
An example of the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of the 17th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 195. Further, in FIG. 195 and each figure described later, production examples of the special figure 1 variable game in each embodiment are shown in chronological order. Further, the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030 is indicated by a thick white arrow. During the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 described later is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. The other effect may be, for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character without displaying the decorative pattern, or an effect of displaying the decorative pattern and displaying the predetermined background or character. Good. Further, during the period in which the effect of the sub-display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 is being executed, the decorative symbol display device 208 may execute the same effect as the effect of the sub-display device 1030.

First, the common points of FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 described later will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). As shown in FIG. 195 (a), a decorative frame F1 having a shape in which the letter "L" is inverted upside down is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the sub display device 1030. A square special figure 1 reserved number display area 1931 is provided in the upper left portion of the decorative frame F1, and a square special figure 2 reserved number display area 1932 is provided on the right side thereof. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 is provided below the 1931, and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934 is provided below the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as a number, and for example, "0" is displayed when there is no hold of the special figure 1. In the special figure 2 hold number display area 1932, the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed as a number, and for example, “0” is displayed when there is no hold of the special figure 2. Further, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, a "/" is notified as the variable display of the fourth symbol that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display. The image is displayed. "-" Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, and "○" is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, "/" is notified as the variable display of the fourth symbol that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed. , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display. The image is displayed. "-" Is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, and "○" is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game.

A horizontally long rectangular decorative frame F2 is displayed below the display area of the sub-display device 1030. In the center of the decorative frame F2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 1940 in which a part of the left and right frames is open is provided. The variable icon may be displayed in a display size different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 1930 described later (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon.

A special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 1940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 1940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth holding order of the special figure 1. That is, the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most memorized in the past) special figure 1 hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed respectively. Similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth holding order of the special figure 2. That is, the special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most memorized in the past) special figure 2 hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed respectively. Further, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960, various animations representing the movement of the hold icon are executed.

A square navigation character display area 1970 is provided on the left side of the special figure 1 hold display area 1950. A merchant character image H1 is displayed in the navigation character display area 1970. The merchant character image H1 is used for explanatory effects such as tutorial effects and notices (notices of changes and pre-reading notices) and the like.

A square-shaped effect custom state display area 1980 is provided on the right side of the special figure 2 hold display area 1960. In the effect custom state display area 1980, "levels 1 to 99" are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 1000. The level of the effect custom state is set to increase, for example, by performing an effect with a low appearance rate. The level of the effect custom state may be set to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big hit is won.

FIG. 195 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. ing. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying the loss is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game was out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 1931, and the number of reserved figures 2 of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 1932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

FIG. 195 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0.

Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, between the hold and the variable icons in the variable icon display area 1940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 of the sub display device 1030 The movement animation of is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 becomes the change icon 1941 and moves to the change icon display area 1940. .. The right-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the variable icon 1941 in FIG. 195 (b) indicates the moving direction of the variable icon 1941.

In FIG. 195 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030, the movement animation between the hold / change icons ends, and the change icon 1941 appears in the change icon display area 1940. Indicates the displayed state. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and white in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950. The default special figure 1 hold icon 1952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 in FIG. 195 (b) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952. Further, in FIG. 195 (c), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. The balloon image is an image used for a notice by the character image H1 of the merchant.

FIG. 195 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 1953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 in FIG. 195 (d) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and an effect that is expected to develop into a reach effect is executed. Further, the hold change image H2 having a substantially quadrangular shape including the image of the character string of "hold change" is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b and the right symbol display area 1030c. .. The hold change image H2 is an image displayed to notify that a look-ahead notice or an effect of the change notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon being displayed is executed. In this example, the hold change image H2 notifies that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed. The hold change image H2 may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1 is changed, or may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 2 is changed. It may be a display displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or it may be displayed only when the hold icon of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is changed. The display may appear only when the hold icon and the change icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or appear only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2, and the change icon are changed. It may be a display.

In FIG. 195 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified status. In addition, an erase animation is displayed in which the variable icon 1941 displayed in the variable icon display area 1940 moves downward, and the variable icon 1941 is gradually erased. Further, FIG. 195 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of a lightning strike from the hold change image H2 to the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 is displayed, and an effect image is displayed overlapping with the special figure 1 hold icon 1951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special figure 1 hold icons 1952 and 1953, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon 1952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are hidden by the effect image.

FIG. 195 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. ing. Further, in FIG. 195 (f), the change animation ends, the hold change image H2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 195 (e) are erased, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. It's changing.

FIG. 195 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 becomes a variable icon, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and the move animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are started. ing. Further, in FIG. 195 (g), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d.

FIG. 195 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 195 (h), an image of the character string "Don-" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, suggesting that the character image H3 of the character image H3 described later appears. The production is being executed. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 195 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030. Further, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 1030d, and the image of the character string "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the palace. In addition, an image of the character string "Don!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant.

FIG. 195 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1, and then "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the palace. The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the palace.

FIG. 195 (k) shows a screen of the sub-display device 1030 in which the sub-display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the sub-display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 195 (k) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed in the longitudinal direction due to the problem of space on the paper.

In FIG. 195 (l), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 195 (k) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center when viewed from the player. The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Further, the images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 before rotation of the sub-display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 195 (j) and (k) have an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). ) Is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen, whereas the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 shown in FIG. 195 (l) has an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. It is displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise takes the horizontal axis in the direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and is orthogonal to the horizontal axis. This is the aspect ratio when the vertical axis is taken in the direction. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 after rotation has a horizontal axis in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and a vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. This is the aspect ratio when

In FIG. 195 (m), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated 180 °) from the state of FIG. 195 (k) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation when viewed from the player. The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed to the aspect ratio before rotation.

FIG. 195 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 195 (m). Shown. Further, in FIG. 195 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps the middle symbol display area 1030b, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The pending change image H2 displayed in FIG. 195 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Note that FIG. 195 (n) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 has not changed.

FIG. 195 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 195 (n). Further, FIG. 195 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In this effect, a lightning strike is displayed from the pending change image H2, and an animation of lightning strikes on the variable icon displayed in a black circle is executed. The lightning strike variable icon overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 195 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second region of 1950 shows a state in which the hold icon increases animation. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 954 is enlarged and displayed as compared with other hold icons. Therefore, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the enlarged and displayed hold icon during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 195 (n) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 has not changed.

FIG. 195 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 195 (o). Further, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 195 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping with the entire change icon 1941 are erased, and the character "heat" is drawn in the circle. The variable icon is enlarged and displayed. Therefore, it may be possible for the player to pay attention to the enlarged and displayed variable icon during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 195 (n) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 has not changed. Next, in FIG. 195 (q), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 195 (p), and the sub display device 1030 rotates. It shows a state in which 1030 makes one rotation and returns to its original state. In addition, the hold icon and the variable icon that were enlarged and displayed have returned to their normal sizes. Next, in FIG. 195 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 1940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed. The downward arrow shown in the upper left of the variable icon in FIG. 195 (r) indicates the moving direction of the variable icon.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change. A character image or a decorative symbol may be used for the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030, and the presence of the character image or the decorative symbol is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image or the decorative symbol. It may be possible to make a strong impression on the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 makes one rotation (360 ° rotation), but the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate one or more rotations by using the slip ring described above. It may have been. For example, the higher the number of rotations of the sub-display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

The aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 may change in relation to the rotation angle of the sub-display device 1030. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the sub-display device 1030 as a variable, and from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. The work area of the VRAM 436 may be used to generate the display image. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 may change randomly. For example, when the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of an image using random numbers and generates a display image from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio using the work area of the VRAM 436. There may be. Further, the display area of the image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may be enlarged or reduced. The aspect ratio of the image may change so as to keep the display area constant.

Further, the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. .. Further, the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change is compared with the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. Therefore, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and degree of change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the more frequently the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 may be configured. The greater the degree of change in the aspect ratio of, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon and the variable icon are enlarged and displayed during the rotation display notice effect. When the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon or variable icon is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and stopped and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon or variable icon is not performed. It may be configured for ease of use. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is rotated. However, instead of the rotation of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated to rotate the decorative symbol display device. An effect of rotating the image displayed on the 208 may be performed, or by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time or separately, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display are displayed. An effect of rotating the image displayed on the device 1030 may be performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable and may be fixed to the game board 200 so that the sub display device 1030 cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 18)
An example of the sub-display device 1030 effect of the 18th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 196. FIGS. 196 (a) to 196 (r) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. FIG. 196 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as shown in FIG. 195 (a). Next, FIG. 196 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 195 (b). Next, in FIG. 196 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 ends, and the variable icon display area 1940 is displayed. The variable icon 1941 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and black is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon 952 appears by the increasing animation of the hold icon. Further, FIG. 196 (c) shows immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 1030d. Indicates the state.

FIG. 196 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant.

In FIG. 196 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. Next, FIG. 196 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 195 (f). Next, FIG. 196 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 195 (g). Next, FIG. 196 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 195 (h). Next, FIG. 196 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed, which is the same as FIG. 195 (i). Indicates the state.

FIG. 196 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and then "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace.

FIG. 196 (k) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. The decorative frame F1 displayed on the sub-display device 1030, and the image displayed in the decorative frame F1 (display of the number of holds, the image of the fourth symbol) (hereinafter, when these images are referred to as "non-rotating target images"). ) Is a sub-display device 1030 in preference to an image other than the non-rotating target image (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “rotating target image”) in a mode in which the player does not rotate. It is displayed in the upper left. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. In addition, the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotational target images may be displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that FIG. 196 (k) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 196 (l) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 196 (k). Further, the non-rotating target image has priority over a part of Yoshimune's character image H3 and a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area, and is placed in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030 by the player. It is displayed as moving in a mode that is not rotated when viewed from the viewpoint. Note that FIG. 196 (l) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 196 (m) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total rotation 180 °) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 196 (l). .. Further, the non-rotating target image is moved and displayed in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player, in preference to the decorative frame F2.

FIG. 196 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 196 (m). .. Further, in FIG. 196 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps with the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The pending change image H2 displayed in FIG. 196 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Further, the non-rotating target image is rotated to the lower left of the sub-display device 1030 when viewed from the player, in preference to a part of the decorative frame F2 and a part of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1. It is displayed in a moving manner. Note that FIG. 196 (n) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 196 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 196 (n). .. Further, FIG. 196 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In this effect, an animation is executed in which lightning strikes from the pending change image H2 and strikes a variable icon displayed in a black circle. The lightning strike variable icon overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 196 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 1954 displayed in a black circle in the second region of 1950 shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by animation. Further, the non-rotating target image has priority over a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area and a part of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1, and the left middle part of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the movement is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Note that FIG. 196 (o) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 196 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 196 (o). In addition, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 196 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping with the entire change icon are erased, and the change in the mode in which the characters "heat" are drawn in the circle. The icon is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in a smaller size than the other hold icons. Further, the non-rotating target image is moved and displayed on the upper left portion of the sub-display device 1030 in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player, in preference to a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area. Has been done. Note that FIG. 196 (p) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper. Next, in FIG. 196 (q), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 196 (p), and the sub display device is rotated. It shows a state in which 1030 makes one rotation and returns to its original state. Further, the non-rotating target image is displayed on the upper left portion of the sub-display device 1030 in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player, and returns to the state before the rotation display notice effect is executed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in the same size as the other hold icons. Next, in FIG. 196 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 1940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 1941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated and displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub-display device 1030 is rotated, the decorative frame F1 displayed on the sub-display device 1030 and the non-rotating target of the image displayed in the decorative frame F1 (holding number display, image of the fourth symbol). The image is displayed in a mode that does not rotate when viewed from the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, the non-rotating target image of the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed so as to be displayed at a prominent position of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. In addition, any one of the decorative design, Yoshimune's character image H3, the grandfather's character image H1, the hold icon, the variable icon, the decorative frame F2, etc., or all the images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are non-rotating targets. As an image, it may be displayed in a mode that is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in this case, the larger the number of non-rotating target images, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated to rotate the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol may be rotated. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 at the same time or separately, an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 may be performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.
(Example 19)
An example of the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of the 19th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (l) show the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. During the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 197 and 198 to 202, which will be described later, is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. ing. As the other effect, for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern and displaying a predetermined background or character may be used.

FIG. 197 (a) shows a state in which “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed as a hold number display image in the hold display area 1030e at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. There is. Next, FIG. 197 (b) shows that the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold number of the special figure 1 is 0 as the hold number display image in the hold display area 1030e at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. The indicated "0" is displayed.

FIG. 197 (c) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 197 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with respect to the center of rotation. Further, the hold display area 1030e at the lower left of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper left of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotated by °.

FIG. 197 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 197 (d). Is shown. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed with ° rotation (90 ° rotation in total). Next, in FIG. 197 (f), the sub-display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 135 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 197 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Shows the state of Further, the hold display area 1030e in the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 135 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 197 (g), the sub-display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 197 (f) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 as the center of rotation (total rotation of 180 °). Shows the state of Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 180 ° in total).

FIG. 197 (H) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 197 (g). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 1030e in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 1030. Further, the "0" image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed (rotated by 225 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 197 (i), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 197 (H). Shows the state of Further, the "0" image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed (rotated by 270 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 197 (j), the sub-display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 197 (i) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 as the center of rotation (total rotation of 315 °). Shows the state of Further, the hold display area 1030e at the lower right of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the original position at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 315 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 197 (k), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 197 (j). Shows the state of Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed by rotating (rotating 360 ° in total). Next, FIG. 197 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect is completed, and the character image H3 of the palace is erased in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image of the palace is rotated and displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from the player. Further, the hold display area 1030e of the sub display device 1030 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 1030 as viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate once (360 ° rotation), but by using the slip ring described above for the sub display device 1030, it rotates one rotation or more. It may be configured to do so. For example, the higher the number of rotations of the sub-display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol display device 208 may perform the effect of the present embodiment, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated at the same time or separately. As a result, the effect of this embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.
(Example 20)
A production example of Example 20 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIGS. 198 (a) to 198 (k) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 198 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 198 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 198 (c) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 198 (c) shows a state in which the sub-display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with respect to the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. Next, FIGS. 198 (d) to 198 (j) show a state in which the sub-display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 198 (d) to 198 (j), the character image H3 of the palace is rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the player always visually recognizes that the character image H3 of the palace is not rotating. Next, FIG. 198 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect is completed, and the character image H3 of the palace is erased in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, while rotating the sub display device 1030, the character image H3 of the palace displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 at the same speed. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a mode in which the character image is not rotated when viewed from the player. Therefore, even though the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the character image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, in this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, but the opposite direction of the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 and the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, an effect of rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 may be performed, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated at the same time or separately. The production may be performed.
(Example 21)
An production example of Example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIGS. 199 (a) to 199 (l) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 199 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 199 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 199 (c) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 199 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with respect to the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. In addition, the character image H3 of the palace is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (b). Next, in FIG. 199 (d), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 199 (c) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation (total 90 ° rotation). Shows the state of Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. In addition, the character image H3 of the palace is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (c). Next, in FIG. 199 (e), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 199 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation (total 135 ° rotation). Shows the state of Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. In addition, the character image H3 of the palace is slightly enlarged in the horizontal direction and compressed in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (d). Next, in FIG. 199 (f), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 199 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation (total 180 ° rotation). Shows the state of Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. Further, the character image H3 of the palace is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (e), and the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace is shown in FIG. 199. It has returned to the state of (b). Next, FIGS. 199 (g) to 199 (j) show a state in which the sub-display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 199 (g) to 199 (j), the character image H3 of the palace is rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the player always visually recognizes that the character image H3 of the palace is not rotating. Further, in FIGS. 199 (g) to 199 (j), the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace has not changed. Next, FIG. 198 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect is completed, and the character image H3 of the palace is erased in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, while rotating the sub display device 1030, the character image H3 of the palace displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 at the same speed. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a mode in which the character image is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes. Therefore, even though the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the character image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness and the character image. By changing the aspect ratio, the presence of the character image may be enhanced, and the player may be given a strong impression. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, in this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, but the opposite direction of the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 and the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the more frequently the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the character image may be displayed on the sub-display device 1030. The greater the degree to which the aspect ratio of the character image changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be. Further, instead of the sub-display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. May be done. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.
(Example 22)
An production example of Example 22 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200. FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 200A shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 200B shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is an image used for the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

FIGS. 200 (c) to 200 (e) show a state in which the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 moves in the left-right direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 200 (c) to 200 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before moving in the left-right direction.

FIG. 200 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 200 (b). Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode of moving to the right by the same distance as the left movement distance of the sub display device 1030. There is. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the character image H4 of the princess that was cut off in the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the upper left portion. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability.

FIG. 200 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 200 (c). Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode of moving to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the left direction. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed so as to be visually recognized as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire character image H4 of the princess is displayed in the upper left portion.

FIG. 200 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 200 (d). Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a mode of moving to the left by the same distance as the moving distance to the right of the sub-display device 1030. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left portion, and a part of the princess character image H4 is cut off.

FIG. 200 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 200 (e), and the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect has been completed. The character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a mode of moving to the left by the same distance as the moving distance to the right of the sub-display device 1030. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in a non-moving manner when viewed from the player. Further, the sub-display device 1030 does not display the princess character image H4.

As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed at the same speed in the direction opposite to that of the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 is horizontally moved. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in a mode in which the player does not move as seen from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4, which was cut off in the sub display device 1030 before the horizontal movement display notice effect is executed, is displayed next to the image displayed in the sub display device 1030. By performing the movement display, it is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Further, the character image H4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance. Therefore, the player pays attention to the moving distance of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed in the effect during the symbol change, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present implementation, the character may be displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the palace may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 1030 moves to the left by a predetermined distance to display the princess character image H4, the sub-display device 1030 moves to the right by a predetermined distance to display the enemy character of the palace. May be displayed. In addition, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace and the character image H4 of the princess used for the horizontal movement display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the horizontal movement display notice effect. Further, instead of the sub-display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. May be done. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.
(Example 23)
An example of the production of the 23rd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIGS. 201 (a) to 201 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 201A shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 201 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). Further, FIG. 201 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (b). .. The image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the palace character image H3, and the princess character image H3 and the princess character image H4 are This is image data in a non-rotating manner. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. FIG. 201 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 centered on the center of the image data is cut out and used as display data. FIG. 201 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (b-2).

FIGS. 201 (c) to 201 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then clockwise. Is rotated 45 °. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 201 (c) to 201 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. Further, the arrows shown in the drawings of FIGS. 201 (c) to 201 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 201 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 201 (b). .. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, a part of the character image H4 of the princess, which has been cut off from the sub-display device 1030, is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 201 (c-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1) is rotated by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 201 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1). FIG. 201 (c-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (c-2), and the sub-display device 1030 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (b). Shows the state rotated by 30 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (c).

FIG. 201 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 201 (c). .. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, the entire character image H4 of the princess is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player in the lower left. Further, FIG. 201 (d-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) is rotated clockwise by 15 ° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 201 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1). FIG. 201 (d-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (d-2), and the sub-display device 1030 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (e). Shows the state rotated by 15 °, and shows the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (d).

FIG. 201 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, a part of the character image H4 of the princess is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub-display device 1030. Further, FIG. 201 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 201 (e-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (e-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation, and is shown in FIG. 201. It is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). FIG. 201 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (e-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 201 (c-2). FIG. 201 (e-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (c-2), and the sub-display device 1030 is clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (d). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (d) is shown. FIG. 201 (e-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 201 (c-3).

FIG. 201 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 201 (e) and returned to the original state. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the sub-display device 1030 does not display the princess character image H4. FIG. 201 (f-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (f-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 201 (e-1) is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation, and is shown in FIG. 201. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). FIG. 201 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (f-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 201 (b-2). FIG. 201 (f-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (f-2), and the sub-display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (e). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (f) is shown. FIG. 201 (f-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 201 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated and displayed at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. , The character image H3 of the palace is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4, which has been cut off in the sub display device 1030 before the rotation display notice effect is executed, is a rotation display of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. Is displayed on the sub-display device 1030. Further, the character image H4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 1030 by rotating the sub display device 1030 by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the character image H4 of the princess may be displayed in the upper left portion of the character image of the palace. In this case, the princess character image H4 that was displayed before the rotation is cut off by the sub display device 1030 by rotating the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise. Further, by adjusting the display position of the character image H4 of the princess, the sub-display device 1030 can be rotated by a predetermined angle or more so that the sub-display device 1030 can be cut off from the sub-display device 1030. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

In the rotation display notice effect of this implementation, the character image H4 of the princess is displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030, but the character is displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. It may be. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the palace may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the princess character image H4, the sub-display device 1030 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle to display the enemy of the palace. Characters may be displayed. In addition, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace and the character image H4 of the princess used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect. In addition, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed in the effect during the symbol change, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, instead of the sub-display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. May be done. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.
(Example 24)
An example of the production of the 24th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIGS. 202 (a) to 202 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 202A shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, in FIG. 202B, the sub-display device 1030 moves downward, and the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 and the character image H1 of the merchant is displayed in the lower left of the sub-display device 1030. It shows the state. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the "rotation" notice shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). FIG. 202 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the palace character image H3, and the princess character image H3 and the princess character image H4 are This is image data in a non-rotating manner. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. FIG. 202 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 centered on the center of the image data is cut out and used as display data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (b-2) is located at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) of the first sub-control unit 400. This is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 202 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (b-2). Further, the character image H1 of the merchant is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) is prioritized over the character image H1 of the merchant. May be displayed.

FIGS. 202 (c) to 202 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then clockwise. Is rotated 45 °. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 202 (c) to 202 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. Further, the arrows shown in the drawings of FIGS. 202 (c) to 202 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 202 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 202 (b). .. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed at the lower left of the sub-display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 202 (b) by rotating the sub-display device 1030. Is displayed as being rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4, which has been cut off from the sub-display device 1030, is displayed in the lower right of the character image H1 in a mode in which the player does not rotate. Further, FIG. 202 (c-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display the image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) is rotated by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 202 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (c-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 202 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1). This is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 202 (c-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (c-2), and the sub-display device 1030 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (b). Shows the state rotated by 30 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (c).

FIG. 202 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 202 (c). .. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed at the lower left of the sub-display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 202 (c) by rotating the sub-display device 1030. Is displayed as being rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, the entire character image H4 of the princess is displayed on the right side of the character image H1 of the merchant in a mode in which the character image H4 of the princess is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 202 (d-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display the image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) is rotated clockwise by 15 ° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 202 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (d-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 202 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1). This is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 202 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (d-2), and the sub display device 1030 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (c). Shows the state rotated by 15 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (d).

FIG. 202 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed at the lower left of the sub-display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 202 (d) by rotating the sub-display device 1030. Is displayed in a mode in which the image is rotated by 15 ° clockwise with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player at the lower right of the character image H1, and the other part is cut off from the sub-display device 1030. ing. Further, FIG. 202 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. Further, FIG. 202 (e-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 202 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (e-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 202 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. In FIG. 202 (e-3), an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (e-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (d). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (d) is shown.

FIG. 202 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 202 (e) and returned to the original state. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 202 (e) by rotating the sub display device 1030. Is displayed in a mode in which the image is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of rotation and returned to the original position. Further, the sub-display device 1030 does not display the princess character image H4. FIG. 202 (f-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (f-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1) is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation, and is shown in FIG. 202. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). FIG. 202 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (f-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (f). The generated display data is shown. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (f-2) is located at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) of the first sub-control unit 400. It is the display data on which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 is superimposed, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 202 (b-2). In FIG. 202 (f-3), an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (e). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (f) is shown. FIG. 202 (f-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 202 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image (character image H3 of the palace) displayed on the sub display device 1030 in a mode in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated but does not rotate when viewed from the player. The character image H4) of the princess and the character image (character image H1 of the merchant) displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed. The rotating sub-display device 1030 simultaneously displays a character image displayed in a non-rotating mode as seen by the player and a character image displayed in a rotating mode as seen by the player. In some cases, it can give the player an unexpected surprise. In addition, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed in the effect during the symbol change, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, instead of the sub-display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. May be done. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the first embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 146 to 202.
(D1)
It is a game table provided with a first movable body (for example, a movable body 1002) capable of performing a production operation for directing a game.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000).
The first movable body is configured to move from a second position (eg, initial position) to a first position (eg, lowest position) when the power is turned off.
The first movable body is configured to move from the first position (for example, the lowest position) to the second position (for example, the initial position) when the power is turned on. ,
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The effect operation is configured to start from the second position (for example, the initial position) and end at the second position.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game table having the above configuration, it may be possible to improve the durability of the driving means for driving the first movable body.
(D2)
The game console described in (D1) above.
Even when the power is turned off while the first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is located at a position different from the second position (for example, the initial position), the first movable body remains. It is configured to move to the first position.
A game table characterized by that.
(D3)
The game console according to (D1) or (D2) above.
The effect operation includes an operation of moving to a third position (for example, the uppermost position).
The third position and the first position are different positions,
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game table characterized by that.
(D4)
The game console described in (D3) above.
An image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided.
The first movable body (for example, movable body 1002) is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means.
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(D5)
The game console described in (D4) above.
It is possible to perform a jackpot action (for example, directing a jackpot game),
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided in front of the image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208).
When the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, the uppermost position), at least of the preview image (for example, a cloud image or a balloon image) displayed on the image display means. The first movable body may overlap in part,
The preview image is the preview image of the jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.
(D6)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above.
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on.
The phrase "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position" described in (D1) means that "the first movable body moves from the first position to the initial operation". And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation ”(see, for example, FIGS. 177 (c)-(g)).
A game table characterized by that.
(D7)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above.
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on.
The phrase "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position" described in (D1) means that "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position". After moving to the position of, the initial operation is started, and at the end of the initial operation, the movement is moved to the second position again "(see, for example, FIGS. 179 (n) to (p)).
A game table characterized by that.
(D8)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above.
The "when the power is turned off" described in (D1) above means "when the main power of the game console is turned off".
The "when the power is turned on" described in (D1) above means "when the main power of the game console is turned on".
A game table characterized by that.
(D9)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D8) above.
The first movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is a movable body capable of changing its posture.
A game table characterized by that.
(D10)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D9) above.
It is equipped with a second movable body (for example, movable body 1006) capable of performing a production operation that directs a game.
The second movable body is a movable body that starts its operation from the position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game table characterized by that.
(D11)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.
(D12)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

All the effect operations of the first effect movable body are configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.
(D13)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (12) above.
The effect operation may start from the second position and end at the fourth position.
The effect operation may start from the fourth position and end at the second position.
The fourth position is a position different from the first position.
The fourth position is a position different from the second position.
The fourth position is a position different from the third position.
A game table characterized by that.
(D14)
The game console described in (D13) above.
The effect operation may start from the fourth position and end at the fourth position.
A game table characterized by that.
(D15)
The game console according to (D13) or (14) above.
Even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the fourth position, the first movable body is configured to move from the fourth position to the first position. ing,
A game table characterized by that.
(D16)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D15) above.
Even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the third position, the first movable body is configured to move from the third position to the first position. ing,
A game table characterized by that.
(D17)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D16) above.
A fourth control means for controlling the movable body and
A game table including a driving means for driving the movable body.

The first control means is the main control unit 300 that performs a lottery (for example, a big hit lottery) that is advantageous to the player. The first control means may be composed of one or more control circuits, or may be composed of one or more control boards.

The second control means is a production means (for example, a lighting unit (LED or the like), a sound output means (speaker or the like), an image display means (liquid crystal display) that directs a game in response to a command signal from the first control means. It is a sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect of the device, the dot matrix, etc. The second control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits. Alternatively, the second control means may be composed of a plurality of control boards. For example, the second control means draws a lottery to make the effect means perform an effect in response to a drive control of the effect means or a command signal from the first control means. Make a selection, etc.

The third control means is an effect control means that communicates with the second control means and performs effect control (for example, drive control) of the effect means. The effect control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards. The third control means may control the effect means in response to the effect command from the second control means, or determine the effect to be executed in response to the effect command from the second control means. Information based on the determined result may be returned to the second control means, or the effect means may be driven.

The fourth control means is an effect control means that communicates with the third control means and controls one or more or all of the effect means (sub liquid crystal unit 1030, movable bodies 1002 to 1012). The fourth control means may be composed of one or more control circuits, or may be composed of one or more control boards. The fourth control means is from the third control means. The effect means may be controlled according to the effect command, or the effect to be executed is determined according to the effect command from the third control means, and the information based on the determined result is returned to the third control means. Or, the effect means may be driven. Further, the fourth control means may be mounted on the moving unit 1036.
(D18)
The game console described in (D17) above.
The fourth control means is mounted on a drive unit (for example, a moving unit 1036).
At least one of the plurality of movements by the movable body (for example, vertical movement), the drive unit also performs the same movement.
A game table characterized by that.

In the above embodiment, since the moving unit 1036 is provided on the movable body 1002, when the movable body 1002 is moved up and down, the moving unit 1036 also operates together with the movable body 1002, but the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated. In this case, the moving unit 1036 is configured not to rotate. The moving unit 1036 may be arranged separately from the movable body 1002 so that the moving unit 1036 does not move together when the movable body 1002 is moved up and down, and also when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated. The moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together, or the moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together during all movements of the movable body 1002.

Although the movable body 1002 has shown an example in which vertical movement (position change, movement) and rotation movement (postural change) can be performed, movements other than vertical movement (for example, position change / movement in the horizontal direction) may be possible. Then, tilt operation (for example, the left side or the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 tilts forward or backward about the rotation axis in the vertical direction, or the upper side or the lower side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is forward or lower about the rotation axis in the horizontal direction. The operation of tilting backward) may be feasible.
(D19)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D18) above.
A fourth control means for controlling the movable body and
The driving means for driving the movable body and
A detection means for detecting the position of the first movable body is provided.
It is configured to confirm the position of the first movable body when the confirmation condition is satisfied.
When the position of the first movable body is not the first position, the first movable body is configured to move to the first position.
The confirmation condition is a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off.
Amusement table (E1)
An image display unit (for example, main liquid crystal unit 1001 or sub liquid crystal unit 1032) capable of displaying a production image for producing a game, and
A driving means (for example, a motor) for driving the image display unit and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means.
The image display is performed during a period (hereinafter, referred to as "first period") in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (rotational direction centered on the rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction). The unit may display the first video (for example, the video of the character image H3 of the palace or the character image H4 of the princess).
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the period of the movement as a notification means. It is possible to make movements that are not seen on a daily basis, and it may be possible for the player to forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. Further, with a certain effect as an opportunity, the entire period from the start of the image display unit moving in the first direction to the stop may be set as the first period, or an effect different from the one effect may be used as an opportunity. A part of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to when it stops may be set as the first period.
(E2)
The game console described in (E1) above.
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image (see, for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)).
A game table characterized by that.

In the embodiment according to the present embodiment, the facial expression, the outer shape, and the like of the first image (character image H3 of the palace and the character image H4 of the princess) are fixedly displayed, but the facial expression of the first image is shown. , The outer shape, etc. may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, exemplifying FIG. 202, the face of the palace, which was not displayed in FIG. 202 (a), is displayed as a straight face in FIG. 202 (b), and becomes a little smile in FIG. 202 (c). An animation may be performed such that a full smile is obtained in 202 (d), a slight smile is returned in FIG. 202 (e), and a true face is returned in FIG. 202 (f). Further, the mode in which the first image (for example, the character image H3 of the palace) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image H3 of the palace moves. Animation is not limited to variable display of character display, but changes in the outer shape of characters, variable display of dialogue (change display from a partial character string indicating dialogue to an entire character string, etc.), characters and icons. It may be either a color change of the character or a moving display of a character or an icon, or a combination of these may be included.
(E3)
The game console according to (E1) or (E2) above.
During the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first orientation (eg, counterclockwise orientation) (see, eg, FIGS. 202 (b)-(d)).
During the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation (eg, clockwise orientation) (eg, FIGS. 202 (b-1), (c-1), (See (d-1)),
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite directions.
A game table characterized by that.

In a game table equipped with this configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is one when a certain effect is triggered (for example, the timing to start the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, to the left), and triggered by another effect (for example, the timing to start the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether the probability change at the end of the big hit starts), the image The first orientation when the display unit operates may be another orientation (for example, rightward). Further, the first orientation and the second orientation may be the same orientation instead of the opposite orientation. In this case, the player is asked to move or rotate the first image faster than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. Is visible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained by rotating the image in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is further speeded up. It may be possible to forget more everyday feelings and concentrate on the game by rotating and moving with.
(E4)
The game console described in (E3) above.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at the first speed.
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed (for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 202 (b-1), (c-1), (d-1). )reference),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the image display unit appears to the player to move, but the display position, display angle, etc. of the first image do not appear to move, so it is unusual as a notification means. When it is possible to perform a similar operation, and the notification itself by the image display unit display can fulfill the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both an impactful operation and notification. There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite to each other, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In that case, the second speed is higher than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. The player visually recognizes that one image moves and rotates slowly. For this reason, the mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit is routinely seen on TVs, nets, etc., but since the image display unit rotates, it is extraordinary that cannot be obtained by the fixed image display unit. The first image in the image display unit moves and rotates so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the image display unit, so that a more everyday feeling can be given to the player. It may be possible to forget about and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with emphasis on impact, by slowly moving and rotating the first image, the notification itself by the image display unit display becomes close to the case where it is not moving. It may be possible to serve as a notification.
(E5)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E4) above.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image H1) is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 202).
A game table characterized by that.
(E6)
The game console described in (E5) above.
During the first period, the second image is configured to be immobile in the first direction (see, eg, FIGS. 202 (b-2), (c-2), (d-2)). ),
A game table characterized by that.

The game console provided with this configuration may be configured so that a second image that does not move in the first direction is not displayed in the first period. That is, in the first period, all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, so that the movement of the image display unit and the image is unified and has more impact. The production operation may be feasible.
(E7)
The game console according to (E5) or (E6) above.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the second image.

In the embodiment according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the facial expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image (merchant character image h1') are fixedly displayed, but according to the game console provided with the configuration. The facial expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, exemplifying FIG. 170, the face of the merchant, which was not displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 170 (a), is displayed as a straight face in FIG. 170 (b), and a little in FIG. 170 (c). An animation may be performed in which the face becomes steep, in FIG. 170 (d), the face becomes steep, in FIG. 170 (e), the face returns to a slightly steep face, and in FIG. 170 (f), the face returns to a true face. Further, the mode in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. Animation is not limited to variable display of character display, but changes in the outer shape of characters, variable display of dialogue (change display from a partial character string indicating dialogue to an entire character string, etc.), characters and icons. It may be either a color change of the character or a moving display of a character or an icon, or a combination of these may be included.
(E8)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above.
The phrase "moved by the drive of the drive means" described in (E1) above means "rotates by the drive of the drive means".
The "first image moves in the first direction" described in (E1) above means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction centered on the rotation axis of the image display unit (see, for example, FIG. 202).
A game table characterized by that.
(E9)
The game console according to (E3) or (E4) above.
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise (see, for example, FIG. 202).
A game table characterized by that.
(E10)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above.
The phrase "moving by driving the driving means" described in (E1) above means "moving linearly by driving the driving means".
The "first image moves in the first direction" described in (E1) above means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" (see, for example, FIG. 200). ),
A game table characterized by that.

The above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in the left-right direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of the leftward orientation and the rightward orientation. The above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in an oblique direction". The first orientation in this case is one of the upper left, lower right, upper right, and lower left directions.

A modified example of the configuration described in the examples according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the movement driven by the driving means may be a combination of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, and front-back direction when viewed from the player). Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a movable body for directing. Further, before the image display unit rotates or moves, the movable body for production moves from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the movable body for production is in the movable state performs the rotation or movement operation. After stopping, the movable body for effect may be configured to move to the initial state. Further, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more when the effect operation shown in FIG. 198 is performed than when the effect operation shown in FIG. 197 is performed. The mode may be configured so that the mode is likely to be a big hit mode, and the effect operation of FIG. 197 is performed when the effect operation of FIG. 197 is performed during the symbol variation display. The symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a jackpot mode. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 197 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the jackpot mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 198 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the jackpot mode. Further, although FIGS. 197 and 198 both show an example in which the same effect display is performed, when the sub display device shown in FIG. 197 is rotated, the image displayed on the sub display device is also rotated. The effect of being visually recognized by the player is different from the effect of being visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub-display device is not rotated together when the sub-display device shown in FIG. 198 is rotated. It may be configured to be the production of. For example, "one of the other productions" is a production in which the lord fights against the musician, and "the other production of another production" is a production in which the princess dances. May be good. One type of "one of the other effects" may be installed, a plurality of types may be installed, or one type of "the other effect of another effect" may be installed. , Multiple types may be installed. Also, when the sub-display device rotates as shown in FIG. 167, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub-display device rotates together with the number of types of effects. As shown in 198, when the sub-display device is rotated, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub-display device is visually recognized by the player as if they are not rotated together. It may be configured so that the number of types is larger. On the contrary, when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 198, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player as if they are not rotated together. At least a part (or all of) of the images displayed on the sub-display device are rotated together when the sub-display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 197, rather than the number of types of effects. It may be configured so that the number of types is larger.

Further, the effect example shown in FIG. 197 and the effect example shown in FIG. 198 may be combined. For example, during the period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is prevented from rotating the image displayed on the sub-display so that the player can see it to rotate with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at speed B (eg, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of B'(eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub-display device is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display device is larger than that of the sub-display device. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of C'(eg, 40 rpm) so that the player sees it as spinning slowly. Further, in the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. Rotate at least part or all of the image at speed D (eg 60 rpm) in other directions (eg clockwise) so that the player sees only the sub-display as rotating. Let me. In the next period (period E), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed of E (eg, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of E'(eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed F (eg, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of F'(eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. During the period (period G) before the end of rotation of the sub display device in the next period, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so that the player can visually recognize it so that it rotates together with the sub display device. In this way, as in the examples from period A to period D, as the period in which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. , The sub-display device rotates, and by shifting to a state where the player can see part or all of the display of the sub-display device as if it is stopped, a new sense of unity between the sub-display device and the image It may be possible to perform a certain production. Further, as in the examples from period D to period G, as the period during which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device. By making the player visually recognize the changes in this way, it may be possible to create a new sense of unity with the sub-display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced, and in the periods D to G, the sub display is displayed. The difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, but conversely, during periods A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and in the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. It may be configured so that the difference in speed is gradually reduced. Further, here, the image displayed on the rotating sub-display device and the rotating sub-display device is illustrated, but the same applies to the image displayed on the linearly moving sub-display device and the linearly moving sub-display device. Is also possible.
(F1)
An effect movable body (for example, a movable body 1001 or a movable body 1002) capable of executing a movable action for producing a game, and
A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with a window portion (for example, transparent portions 1008a and 1008b) and
It is a game table equipped with
Behind the decorative body, the effect movable body may perform an action (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (f)-(k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game table provided with the above configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body can make the player visually recognize the movement of the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body, and as a production means. It is possible to perform movements that are not seen on a daily basis, and it may be possible for the player to forget the daily routine and concentrate more on the game.
(F2)
The game console described in (F1) above.
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image, and is
It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (f) to (k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game table provided with this configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body is configured to be able to display an image, so that the player can see the movement and image of the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body. It is possible to visually recognize the image, and it is possible to perform an operation that is not seen on a daily basis as a notification means, so that the player can forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, a plurality of effect movable bodies capable of displaying an image may be provided, or only one may be provided. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image capable of operating behind the decorative body may have a main liquid crystal unit, or may have a sub liquid crystal unit. Further, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image capable of operating behind the decorative body may have both a main liquid crystal unit and a sub liquid crystal unit, or may have two or more sub liquid crystal units. There may be.
(F3)
The game console described in (F2) above.
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window portion may change (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (f) to (k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, by operating behind the decorative body, the image displayed on the effect movable body that is visually recognized through the window of the decorative body changes, so that the player thinks. It may be possible to give a surprising surprise. In addition, the above-mentioned "the image of the effect movable body changes" means that the image displayed on the effect movable body is changed (for example, the shape and display color of the cloud image are changed). Including the case where the appearance of the image displayed on the movable body changes.
(F4)
The game console according to any one of (F1) to (F3) above.
The ornament is operational (see, eg, FIGS. 186 (e), (f)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game table provided with this configuration, since the decorative body can be operated, it may be possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the decorative body and the operation of the effect movable body are linked.
(F5)
The game console according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above.
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing variable display of symbols is provided.
A game table characterized by that.
(F6)
The game console described in (F5) above.
In the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means, the player visually recognizes a part of the image (for example, the image of the cloud) in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body. When it becomes possible, the final result of the variable display of the symbol is a big hit, as compared with the case where a part of the image in the effect movable body is not visible to the player through the window portion of the decorative body. It is configured so that the symbol mode can be easily displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 186 and 187).
A part of the image in the effect movable body is at least a part of the preview image.
A game table characterized by that.
(F7)
The game console according to (F5) or (F6) above.
By the operation of the decorative body, a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode (for example, the white diamond-shaped mode) in the effect movable body is played through the window portion (for example, the transparent portion 1008b) of the decorative body. When a person becomes visible, a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body is not visible to the player through the window portion of the decorative body. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily definitely displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbol started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon (see, for example, FIG. 193).
A game table characterized by that.
(F8)
The game console according to any one of F1 to F7.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.
(G1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030) can perform a rotation operation (see, for example, FIG.
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image (for example, a character image H1 of a palace, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, etc.).
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIG. 195 (l)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the aspect ratio of the first image may change when the image display means is rotated, so that the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, it can give a strong impression to the player. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as the first image, and these images may be used as the first image. May use a different image as the first image. Further, the image display means capable of performing the rotation operation may be a main liquid crystal unit or a sub liquid crystal unit. Further, in both cases, the aspect ratio of the first image may be displayed so as to change. For example, when the first image is displayed on the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit are rotated simultaneously or separately, and the aspect ratio of the first image is changed simultaneously or separately. There may be. Further, by arranging two sub liquid crystal units side by side, the first image may be displayed by the two sub liquid crystal units. In this case, the aspect ratio of the first image may be changed by rotating the two sub liquid crystal units side by side.
(G2)
The game console described in (G1) above.
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image (for example, a decorative frame F1, a hold number display, an image of a fourth symbol).
The second image may not rotate when the rotation operation is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (k)-(p)).
A game table characterized by that.
(G3)
The game console described in (G2) above.
The second image does not rotate when the rotation operation is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (k)-(p)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, when the first image rotates, the second image may not rotate, so while emphasizing the rotation of the first image, the second image is firmly It can be visually recognized by the player. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as a second image, and these images and May use a different image as the second image.
(G4)
The game console according to any one of (G1) to (G3) above.
When the rotation operation is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image H4) that has been cut off by the image display means before the rotation operation is performed is displayed on the image display means by performing the rotation operation. (See, for example, FIGS. 201 (b), (c)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console having this configuration, the image that was cut off in the image display means before the rotation operation of the image display means is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation operation of the image display means. In some cases, it can give the player an unexpected surprise.
(G5)
The game console according to any one of (G1) to (G4) above.
When the rotation operation is performed, the image (for example, the character image H4 of the princess) displayed on the image display means before the rotation operation is performed is performed in the image display means by the rotation operation. May be cut off,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the image displayed in the image display means before the rotation operation of the image display means is cut off by the image display means due to the rotation operation of the image display means. Because of this, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.
(G6)
The game console according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.
(G7)
The game console according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.
(H1)
An effect movable body (for example, a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) capable of executing an effect operation for producing a game, and
A base body (for example, a moving unit 1036) capable of supporting the effect movable body and
It is a game table equipped with
The effect movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) can execute a rotational operation.
A slip ring (for example, rotating side substrates 1090, 1140) is provided on one of the effect movable body and the base body.
Conductive portions (for example, conductive portions 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) are provided on the other side of the effect movable body and the base body.
When the slip ring and the conductive portion come into contact with each other, power is supplied from the side of the base body to the side of the effect movable body.
A game table characterized by that.
(H2)
The game console described in (H1) above.
The base body is provided with a first communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1138).
The effect movable body is provided with a second communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1144).
The second communication means is a means capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game table characterized by that.
(H3)
The game console according to (H1) or (H2) above.
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication.
A game table characterized by that.
(H4)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above.
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication.
A game table characterized by that.
(H5)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H4) above.
The slip ring (for example, the rotating side substrate 1090, 1140) is provided on the effect movable body.
The conductive portion (for example, the conductive portion 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) is provided on the base body.
A game table characterized by that.
(H6)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H5) above.
The effect movable body is provided with an image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208).
The second communication means is a means capable of receiving an image information signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game table characterized by that.
[Third Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 231. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to the chance button 136, the opportunity button 139 is arranged side by side with the chance button 136. The opportunity button 139 has the same function as the chance button 136.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an outline of an effect pattern shown in each embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 203 shows an effect pattern in which the effect related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 is executed in each embodiment of the present embodiment. The effects related to these buttons can be roughly classified into five effect patterns (effect patterns 1 to 5). The effect related to the button is an effect related to the operation of the chance button 136 and / or the opportunity button 139. In FIGS. 203 (a) to 203 (d), time has passed from left to right.
<Production pattern 1>
The effect pattern 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (a). The effect pattern 1 is an effect related to the chance button 136, and is an effect that does not use the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation wait display 1 of the display performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and is a chance while the button operation wait display 1 is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button response display 1 of the display performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The button response display 1 is a display that does not include a display that is performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 1 to operate the button does not include the opportunity button pressing waiting display.
<Production pattern 2>
The effect pattern 2 will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG. 203 (b). The effect pattern 2 is an effect related to the chance button 136. The effect pattern 2 starts from the button operation waiting display 3 of the display performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button response display 3 of the display performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The button response display 3 is a display that does not include a part of the display that is performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed.
<Production pattern 3>
The effect pattern 3 will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG. 203 (b). The effect pattern 3 is an effect relating to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation wait display 3 of the display performed when the chance button 136 is waiting to be pressed, and is a chance while the button operation wait display 3 is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and is performed while waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. The button response display 4 including the display is displayed, and then when the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 being displayed in the button response display 4, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the opportunity button 139. The button response display 5 performed in response to the pressing is displayed.

When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed and the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 to operate the chance button 136, the effect pattern 2 (effect related to the chance button) or the effect pattern 3 (chance button and opportunity) One of the effect patterns related to the button) is determined. The effect pattern may be determined in advance before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, or the effect pattern is determined depending on the timing at which the player presses the chance button 136, the number of times the button is pressed, and the like. There may be cases. In this way, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 to operate the button includes the opportunity button pressing waiting display (or a part of the opportunity button pressing waiting display). It may or may not be included.
<Production pattern 4>
The effect pattern 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (c). The effect pattern 4 is an effect relating to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 4 starts from the button operation waiting display 4 of the display performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and is a button including a display displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. The response display 4 is displayed, and then, when the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol display device At 208, a button response display 5 performed in response to pressing the opportunity button 139 is displayed. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 4 to operate the button includes the opportunity button pressing waiting display.
<Production pattern 5>
The effect pattern 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (d). The effect pattern 5 is an effect related to the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 5 starts from the button operation waiting display 5 of the display performed when the opportunity button 139 is waiting to be pressed, and the operation of the opportunity button 139 while the button operation waiting display 5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button response display 2 of the display performed in response to the operation of the opportunity button 139. As described above, in the effect pattern 5, the button operation wait display 5 that prompts the operation of the opportunity button 139 is displayed when the effect related to the button is started.

In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during the symbol variation display, the ease of finalizing the display of the jackpot symbol mode differs depending on the effect pattern. In the present embodiment, among the effect patterns 1 to 5, the symbol variation display on which the effect pattern 4 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is most easily confirmed, whereas only the effect pattern 2 is rowed. The symbol variation display is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is most difficult to be fixedly displayed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without the effect pattern 3 being performed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed without the effect pattern 3 being performed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without the effect pattern 5, or the effect pattern 5 is In the case of the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without being performed and the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed without performing the effect pattern 1, the jackpot symbol mode is fixedly displayed with the same probability. There is also. In the effect pattern 4, which is the easiest to stop and display the jackpot mode, the chance button 136 must be pressed in order to press the opportunity button 139. Therefore, the player is motivated to operate the opportunity button 139, and at the same time, the chance is increased. The motivation to operate the button 136 can also be increased, and the interest of the player may be improved. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, other than the above-mentioned examples can be adopted. In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during the symbol variation display, the effect pattern may be configured to make the easiness of the final display of the jackpot symbol mode the same.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the effect patterns 1 to 5, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is determined that the chance button 136 is operated, but in the effect patterns 1 to 5, it is also operated by an operation method other than pressing. It may be determined that it has been done. For example, when the chance button 136 is configured to be rotatable, when the player rotates the chance button 136 from the normal state to a predetermined angle or more, it is determined that the chance button 136 has been operated. It may be configured.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the effect patterns 1 to 5, when the opportunity button 139 is pressed, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 is operated, but in the effect patterns 1 to 5, it is also operated by other operation methods. It may be determined that it has been done. For example, when the opportunity button 139 is configured to be rotatable, when the player rotates the opportunity button 139 from the normal state to a predetermined angle or more, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 has been operated. It may be configured. The predetermined angle at the chance button 136 and the predetermined angle at the opportunity button 139 may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 203, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are used in the effect patterns 1 to 5, but operation means other than these may be used. For example, instead of the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139, an operation means using the setting operation unit 137 or the transparent member 118 as a button may be used, or an operation means of the handle may be used. The start time and end time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the effect patterns 1 to 5 are determined before the button operation waiting display 1 or the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and the operation of the opportunity button 139 is valid. The start time and end time of the period are determined before the button operation waiting display 2 or the button response display 4 is displayed. The effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 may be executed by the sub display device 1030 instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be executed. It may be executed in both.
(Example 1-1)
An production example of Example 1-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order. FIG. 204 (a) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and FIGS. 204 (b) to 204 (f) show the main liquid crystal unit from the game board 1000. 1001 and the movable body 1002 are extracted and shown. In FIGS. 204 to 231 the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are shown in an exemplary manner. The character string "push" is written on the pressing surface of the chance button 136, and the character string "press" is written on the pressing surface of the opportunity button 139. In addition, in FIG. 204 and later, the illustration of the movable body 1006, 1008, and 1012 is omitted.

FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 204 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0.

FIG. 204 (b), which continues from FIG. 204 (a), shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIGS. 204 and 204, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a thick white arrow pointing downward. FIG. 204 (b) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 uses an LED as a light source. The opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 uses an LED as a light source. When the chance button 136 is in the normal state, the chance button lamp 138 may not be emitting light, or the chance button lamp 138 may be in a state of emitting light in a predetermined mode. When the opportunity button 139 is in the normal state, the opportunity button lamp 141 may not be emitting light, or the opportunity button lamp 141 may be in a state of emitting light in a predetermined mode. As the light source of the chance button lamp 138 and the opportunity button lamp 141, a light emitting means other than the LED may be used.

FIG. 204 (c) following FIG. 204 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 204 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 204 (d) following FIG. 204 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed while waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example may be referred to as an image of the chance button 136 displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as a “chance button image”. ) And an image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "button pressing instruction image") correspond. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 204 (d), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 are states in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). Represents. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

FIG. 204 (e) following FIG. 204 (d) is performed in response to the button response display 1 (pressing the chance button 136) by the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. As a display), a state in which a character string image of "chance" is displayed in a substantially central portion of a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be operated. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

FIG. 204 (f), which continues from FIG. 204 (e), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, a definite display of the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed.
(Example 1-2)
An example of the production of Example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203, and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 205A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 205 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 205 (b) following FIG. 205 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 205 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 205 (c) following FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example corresponds to the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped, which is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the first embodiment. In FIG. 205 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The color of the chance button image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same, or may be configured to be different. You may. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

In FIG. 205 (d) following FIG. 205 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 205 (c) is displayed, so that the button response display 1 ( The display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 1 of this example corresponds to a character string image of "chance !!" having a display different from that of the button response display 1 shown in the 1-1. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the operation of the chance button 136 may be valid. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

FIG. 205 (e), which continues from FIG. 205 (d), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

An example of the production of Example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 205 is a big hit, and the effect states are shown in chronological order. FIGS. 206 (a) to 206 (d) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (d).

FIG. 206 (e), which continues from FIG. 206 (d), shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

As described above, in FIGS. 204 to 206, an example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a) is shown. In the effect shown in Example 1-1, the character string image of "chance" is displayed as the button response display 1, and in the effect shown in Example 1-2, the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed as the button response display 1. Is displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button response display is more than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance" is displayed without displaying the character string image of "chance !!" as the button response display 1. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed as 1 may be configured so that the final display of the jackpot symbol mode is easier to be performed. Even if the effect pattern 1 is of the same type, the player may be able to improve the interest of the player by making the display of the button response display 1 different in the ease of confirming the jackpot symbol mode. .. In the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button is more than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed without displaying the character string image of "chance" as the button response display 1. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance" is displayed as the response display 1 may be configured so that the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol mode is easier to be performed, or the button response display 1 is the "chance". The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "Chance !!" is displayed without displaying the character string image and the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "Chance !!" is displayed as the button response display 1 are big hits. It may be configured so that the ease of definite display of the symbol aspect is the same.
(Example 1-3)
An example of the production of Examples 1-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 207 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 207 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 207 (b) following FIG. 207 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 207 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 207 (c) following FIG. 207 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example corresponds to a chance button image having the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the 1-1 and a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped. In FIG. 207 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 1, the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or is different from the normal state). It represents a state in which light is emitted in a mode. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

In FIG. 207 (d) following FIG. 207 (c), the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 207 (c) is displayed. After the period ends, the effect by the notice animation ends without displaying the button response display, and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is shown. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed may be a definite display of the jackpot symbol mode.
(Example 1-4)
An production example of Examples 1-4 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 shows an example of the effect in the above effect pattern 1, and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 208 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 208 (b) following FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 208 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 208 (c) following FIG. 208 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is a button pressing instruction image and "press!" Corresponds to the character string image of. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. FIG. 208 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

In FIG. 208 (d) following FIG. 208 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 208 (c) is displayed, the button response display 1 ( The display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) indicates a state in which the character string image of "great chance" is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be operated. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. The character "great chance" is displayed as the button response display 1 rather than the symbol variation display that displays the character string image of "chance" or "chance !!" without displaying the character string image of "great chance" as the button response display 1. In some cases, the symbol variation display for displaying the column image may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 208 (e), which continues from FIG. 208 (d), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.
(Example 1-5)
An example of the production of Example 1-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 shows an example of the effect in the above-mentioned effect pattern 1, and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 209 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 209 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 209 (b) following FIG. 209 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 209 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 209 (c) following FIG. 209 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the first to fourth embodiments. The character string image corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. FIG. 209 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

In FIG. 209 (d) continuing from FIG. 209 (c), when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 209 (c) is displayed, the player presses the chance button 136 to display the button response display 1 ( As the display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136), the character string image of "Great chance!", Which is different from the button response display 1 shown in Example 1-4, is substantially the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state displayed in. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be operated. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. The character string image of "Great Chance!" Is displayed as the button response display 1 rather than the symbol variation display that displays the character string image of "Great Chance" without displaying the character string image of "Great Chance!" As the button response display 1. The symbol variation display to be displayed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed, and vice versa.

FIG. 209 (e), which continues from FIG. 209 (d), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, a definite display of the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed.
(Example 1-6)
An example of the effect of Example 1-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 210 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 210 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 210 (b) following FIG. 210 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 210 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 210 (c) following FIG. 210 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is a chance button image having the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in Examples 1-3, a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped, and "press!". Corresponds to the character string image of. FIG. 210 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

In FIG. 210 (d) following FIG. 210 (c), the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 210 (c) is displayed. It shows the state just before the end of the period.

In FIG. 210 (e) following from FIG. 210 (d), the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 210 (c) is displayed. Even when the period ends, the same "great chance" character string image as the button response display 1 shown in Example 1-3 is decorated as the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136). The state displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the symbol display device 208 is shown. Even in the production of displaying the same "great chance" character string image as the button response display 1, the "great chance" character string image is displayed by pressing the chance button 136 in the third embodiment. In some cases, the symbol variation display on which the effect of this example is executed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display on which the indicated effect is executed. The opposite may be true. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in Example 1-3 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured so that the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same. There may be. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 210 (f), which continues from FIG. 210 (e), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the detached symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, a definite display of the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed.
(Example 1-7)
An example of the effect of Example 1-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 211A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 211 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

FIG. 211 (b) following FIG. 211 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 210 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 211 (c) following FIG. 211 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is a chance button image having the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in Examples 1-3, a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped, and "press!". Corresponds to the character string image of. FIG. 211 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

FIG. 211 (d) following FIG. 211 (c) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 211 (c) is displayed. It shows the state just before the end of the period.

FIG. 211 (e) following FIG. 211 (d) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 211 (c) is displayed. Even when the period ends, the character string image of "Great chance?" Is displayed in the substantially central part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136). It shows the state that was done. The button response display 1 of the character string image of "great chance?" Shown in this example is a button response display that is not displayed when the player operates the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed. When the player does not operate the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the character string image of "great chance" is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the effect shown in the first to sixth embodiments is executed. Rather, the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in the first to sixth aspects is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured so that the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same. There may be. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 211 (f) following FIG. 211 (e) shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, a definite display of the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed.

As described above, in the effect example shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, when the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 is shown. There is a button response display 1 displayed on the screen and a button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. The button response display 1 displayed when the chance button 136 is operated and the button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated may display the same or different displays. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 during the button operation waiting display 1, the button response display 1 may not be displayed.

In the effect example shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, the button response display 1 depends on the timing at which the player's chance button 136 is pressed and whether or not the button operation wait display 1 is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even if the same effect pattern 1 is produced, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 1. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 1 is displayed, if the effect has the same effect pattern 1, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 2-1)
An production example of Example 2-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 212 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 212 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 212 (b) following FIG. 212 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 212 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 212 (c) following FIG. 212 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 3 of this example is an image (hereinafter referred to as “chance button light emitting image”) that is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and that mimics the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. It may be referred to as) and a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped. The chance button light emitting image is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 212 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. You may. The display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 The symbol variation display having different emission colors may be configured so that the jackpot symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the light emitting color of the chance button 136 are the same. There may be cases where the ease of definitive display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same as that of the symbol variation display having different emission colors. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

In FIG. 212 (d) following FIG. 212 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 212 (c) is displayed. By pressing the button, the early stage of the button response display 3 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the button response display 3 of this example corresponds to a character string image of "further chance" and an image imitating the opportunity button 139 for moving display (hereinafter, may be referred to as "opportunity button image"). When the display of the button response display 3 is started, the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 212 (e) following FIG. 212 (d) shows a state in which the middle stage of the button response display 3 is displayed. In FIG. 212 (e), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 passes through the central portion of the display area, moves to the left end, and is framed out. It is erased by displaying it in. The arrow shown in FIG. 212 (e) indicates the direction in which the opportunity button image has moved and its trajectory, but it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 3. ..

FIG. 212 (f) following FIG. 212 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 3 is displayed. As the button response display 3, a state in which a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 212 (g) following FIG. 212 (f) shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is finished and the definite display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

As described above, the button response display 3 of this example is configured so as not to be displayed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

An production example of Example 2-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 212 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in chronological order. 213 (a) to 213 (f) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (f).

In FIG. 213 (g), which continues from FIG. 213 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is finished, and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" of the symbol mode is shifted to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 213 (h) following FIG. 213 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is repeatedly displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed after FIG. 213 (g), the decorative design may be configured to be variablely displayed.
(Example 2-2)
An production example of Example 2-2 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 2-1.

FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 214 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

FIG. 214 (b) following FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 214 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 214 (c) following FIG. 214 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 3 of this example corresponds to a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap with a chance button light emission image displayed in a substantially central portion of a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image imitating the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 214 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. You may. The display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 The symbol variation display having different emission colors may be configured so that the jackpot symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the light emitting color of the chance button 136 are the same. There may be cases where the ease of definitive display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same as that of the symbol variation display having different emission colors. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 214 (d) following FIG. 214 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 is continuously displayed.

FIG. 214 (e), which continues from FIG. 214 (d), shows immediately before the end of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. Indicates the state of.

FIG. 214 (f) following FIG. 214 (e) erases the button operation waiting display 3 when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and displays a character string image of "sorry" as the button response display 3. It shows the state of. In this example, as compared with Example 2-1 it took time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 3, so that the beginning of the button response display 3 shown in Example 2-2 It is configured not to display the character string image of "further chance" and the opportunity button image displayed in the middle stage. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 3 of the character string image of "sorry" may not be displayed.

FIG. 214 (g) following FIG. 214 (f) shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is finished and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

An production example of Example 2-2 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 shows an example in which the special figure variation game that executes the effect example shown in FIG. 214 becomes a big hit, and shows the effect state in chronological order. FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (f) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (f).

In FIG. 215 (g), which continues from FIG. 215 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is finished, and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" of the symbol mode is shifted to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 215 (h) following FIG. 215 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is repeatedly displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed after FIG. 215 (g), the decorative pattern may be varied and displayed.

In the effects shown in Examples 2-1 and 2-2, the button response display 3 depends on the timing and presence / absence of pressing the chance button 136 of the player when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. It may be configured differently. Even if the effect is the same effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 3. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 3 is displayed, if the effect is the same effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 3-1)
An production example of Example 3-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 216 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 216 (b) following FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 216 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 216 (c) following FIG. 216 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. The chance button light emitting image is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 216 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. You may. The display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 The symbol variation display having different emission colors may be configured so that the jackpot symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the light emitting color of the chance button 136 are the same. There may be cases where the ease of definitive display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same as that of the symbol variation display having different emission colors. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 216 (d) following FIG. 216 (c) shows the button response display 4 (chance button 136) when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 216 (c). The early stage of (display performed in response to pressing) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to the character string image of "more chance !!". The character string image of "further chance !!" is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

FIG. 216 (e) following FIG. 216 (d) shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of this example, after displaying the character string image of "further chance !!", the opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state displayed as.

FIG. 216 (f) following FIG. 216 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 216 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "further chance !!" is erased. The state in which the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The button pressing instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 216 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in motion during the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 (for example, a movement that repeats the movement display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction), and the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 is displayed. It may be displayed as a stop outside.

The display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. Good. The display color of the opportunity button image as the button and response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 are different from the symbol variation display in which the display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 are the same. The different symbol variation display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa.

In FIG. 216 (g) following from FIG. 216 (f), the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed, so that the button response display 5 (opportunity opportunity) 5 (opportunity opportunity) is displayed. The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 216 (h), which follows from FIG. 216 (g), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.
(Example 3-2)
An production example of Example 3-2 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 216 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in chronological order. 217 (a) to 217 (f) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (f).

In FIG. 217 (g) continuing from FIG. 217 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 217 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 217 (h), which continues from FIG. 217 (g), shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the definite display of the missed symbol mode may be displayed.

In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this embodiment is performed, the button response display 5 is a button rather than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is not displayed and the character string image of "sorry" is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed as the response display 5 is configured so that the final display of the jackpot symbol mode is easier to be performed. As the button response display 5, the ease of confirming the big hit symbol mode is the same depending on whether the character string image of "sorry" is displayed or the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed. It may be configured to be.
(Example 3-3)
An production example of Example 3-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 218 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 218 (b) following FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 218 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 218 (c) following FIG. 218 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 218 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

FIG. 218 (d) following FIG. 218 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 218 (c) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 218 (e), which continues from FIG. 218 (d), shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 218 (c) and 218 (d) is displayed. The state in which the button response display 4 shown in 216 (e) is displayed is shown. In this example, since it took more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 was started to be displayed than in the case shown in the third embodiment, FIG. 216 (d) shows. The middle part of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (e) is displayed without displaying the early part of the button response display 4 shown. It should be noted that all the buttons from the beginning to the end of the button response display 4 shown in Example 3-1 according to the time required from the start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4. The display may be displayed so as to be played at double speed.

FIG. 218 (f) following FIG. 218 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed. In FIG. 218 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "further chance !!" is erased. The state in which the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is reached. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 218 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 218 (g) continuing from FIG. 218 (f), the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 218 (f) is displayed, so that the button response display 5 (opportunity opportunity) 5 (opportunity opportunity) is displayed. The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 218 (h), which follows from FIG. 218 (g), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.
(Example 3-4)
An example of the production of Example 3-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

FIG. 219 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 219 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 219 (b) following FIG. 219 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 219 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 219 (c) following FIG. 219 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 219 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

FIG. 219 (d) following FIG. 219 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 219 (c) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 219 (e) following FIG. 219 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 219 (c) and 219 (d) is displayed. The state where the early stage of the button response display 4 shown in 216 (d) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends.

FIG. 219 (f) following FIG. 219 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed and the opportunity button 139 is informed that the operation valid period is in effect. There is. In this example, since it took more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 was started than in the case shown in the third embodiment, FIG. 216 (e) shows. The final stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed without displaying the middle stage of the button response display 4 shown. It should be noted that all the buttons from the beginning to the end of the button response display 4 shown in Example 3-1 according to the time required from the start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4. The display may be displayed so as to be played at double speed. In FIG. 219 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 219 (g), which continues from FIG. 219 (f), the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 219 (f) is displayed, so that the button response display 5 (opportunity opportunity) 5 (opportunity opportunity) is displayed. The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 219 (h), which continues from FIG. 219 (g), shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the definite display of the missed symbol mode may be displayed.
(Example 3-5)
An production example of Example 3-5 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

FIG. 220A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 220A, it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 220 (b) following FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 216 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 220 (c) following FIG. 220 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 220 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

FIG. 220 (d) following FIG. 220 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 220 (c) is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 220 (e) continuing from FIG. 220 (d), the player does not press the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 220 (f) is displayed, and the chance button 136 is operated. It shows the state just before the expiration date.

In FIG. 220 (f) continuing from FIG. 220 (e), the button operation waiting display 3 is deleted when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the final stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f). Is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 was not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the early stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (d) and FIG. 216 (e) shown in the embodiment 3-1 are shown. It is configured to display the final stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) without displaying the middle stage of the button response display 4 shown. By displaying the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f), it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is in the operation valid period. In FIG. 220 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, all the button response displays 5 shown in FIGS. 216D to 216 may not be displayed.

In FIG. 220 (g) following from FIG. 220 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 220 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 220 (h), which continues from FIG. 220 (g), shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the definite display of the missed symbol mode may be displayed.
(Example 3-6)
An production example of Example 3-6 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 221A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 221 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 221 (b) following FIG. 221 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 216 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 221 (c) following FIG. 221 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 221 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 221 (d) continuing from FIG. 221 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 221 (c) is displayed, the button response display 4 ( As an early stage of (display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136), a character string image of "further chance !!" is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 221 (e) following FIG. 221 (d) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed, and shows a state in which the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is notified. In FIG. 221 (e), the image of “further chance !!” displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and the button pressing instruction image in the form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. An image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and imitating a state in which the opportunity button 139 is projected (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “opportunity button protruding image”) is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. it's shown. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image from the center to the top of the opportunity button protrusion image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image below the center of the opportunity button protrusion image to display the entire opportunity button protrusion image. it's shown. In FIG. 221 (e), during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state), and the normal state. It represents a more prominent state. The player operates the opportunity button 139 by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or emit light in a mode different from the normal state) and to protrude from the normal state. You may be able to know that. It should be noted that the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes during the display of the button response display 4 is easier to stop and display the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 does not protrude during the display of the button response display 4. It may be configured as, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, in the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 does not protrude while the button response display 4 is displayed and the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes while the button response display 4 is displayed, it is easy to stop the jackpot symbol mode. May be configured to be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

In FIG. 221 (f) continuing from FIG. 221 (e), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 221 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "super hot !!!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that the button response display 5 is "super" rather than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "super hot !!!" is not displayed and the character string image of "sorry" or "big hit !?" is displayed. The symbol variation display on which the character string image of "Gekiatsu !!!!!" is displayed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be stopped and displayed more easily. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 221 (g) following FIG. 221 (f) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Even if the character string image of "super hot !!!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 5, even if the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. Good.
(Example 3-7)
An example of the production of Example 3-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 222 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 222 (b) following FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 216 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 222 (c) following FIG. 222 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 222 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 222 (d) continuing from FIG. 222 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 222 (c) is displayed, the button response display 4 ( As an early stage of (display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136), a character string image of "further chance !!" is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 222 (e) following FIG. 222 (d) shows a state in which the middle stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 222 (e), the image of “further chance !!” displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and the button pressing instruction image in the form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the opportunity button protruding image that imitates the state in which the opportunity button 139 is projected is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image from the center to the top of the opportunity button protrusion image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image below the center of the opportunity button protrusion image to display the entire opportunity button protrusion image. it's shown. In FIG. 222 (e), the opportunity button 139 is in a protruding state from the normal state, but the opportunity button lamp 141 is in the normal state, so that it is not the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139.

FIG. 222 (f) following FIG. 222 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 222 (f), an opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 that has returned to the normal state is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the opportunity button 139 has returned from the protruding state to the normal state. ..

In FIG. 222 (g) following from FIG. 222 (f), the button response display 4 is erased without starting the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, and the character string image of "sorry" is displayed as the button response display 5. It shows the state of.

FIG. 222 (h), which continues from FIG. 222 (g), shows a state in which the stop display of the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed.

In the effect example shown in Examples 3-1 to 3-7, the button response display 4 depends on the timing and presence / absence of pressing the player's chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. , The button response display 5 may be configured differently depending on the timing and presence / absence of pressing the player's opportunity button 139 when the button response display 4 is displayed. May occur. Even in the production of the same effect pattern 3, the jackpot reliability may be configured to be different depending on the display of the button response display 4 and the button response display 5. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed, if the effect has the same effect pattern 3, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 4-1)
An production example of Example 4-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 203 (c), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 223 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 223 (b) following FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 223 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 223 (c) following FIG. 223 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is reached. The button operation waiting display 4 of this example is an image of the chance button 136 that emits light in a special mode displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, “chance button special”). It may be referred to as a "light emitting image") and an image in which three inverted triangles displayed in a special color are overlapped (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "button press special instruction image"). .. The chance button special light emitting image and the button pressing special instruction image are images that are not displayed in the button operation waiting display 1 to 3, and by displaying these images, the button response display is always displayed after the button operation waiting display 4. 4 will be displayed. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 223 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 4. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The emission color of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the chance button special emission image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4.

In FIG. 223 (d) continuing from FIG. 223 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 223 (c) is displayed, the button response display 4 is displayed. As an early stage (display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136), a character string image of "further chance !!" is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 223 (e), which continues from FIG. 223 (d), the opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 is displayed as the middle part of the button response display 4 so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state of being done.

FIG. 223 (f) following FIG. 223 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 223 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "further chance !!" is erased. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is reached. In FIG. 223 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As the button response display 4, an image of the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode (hereinafter, may be referred to as an “opportunity button special emission image”) and the button pressing shown in FIG. 223 (c). A special instruction image may be displayed.

In FIG. 223 (g) continuing from FIG. 223 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 223 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 223 (h), which continues from FIG. 223 (g), the display of the button response display 4 is finished, and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" of the symbol mode is shifted to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 223 (u), which follows from FIG. 223 (h), shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed again in a variable manner and the jackpot symbol mode is stopped. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed after FIG. 223 (h), the decorative pattern may be varied and displayed.
(Example 4-2)
An production example of Example 4-2 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 224. FIG. 224 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 203 (c), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 4-1.

FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 224 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 224 (b) following FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 224 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 224 (c) following FIG. 224 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is reached. In the button operation waiting display 4 of this example, a chance button special light emitting image and a special chance button special light emitting image that imitates the chance button 136 that emits light in a special mode displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a special The button press special instruction image in which three inverted triangles displayed in color are overlapped corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 223 (c), in connection with the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The light emitting mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as the light emitting mode of the chance button special light emitting image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4, or may be different.

In FIG. 224 (d) continuing from FIG. 224 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 224 (c) is displayed, the button response display 4 ( As a display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136), a character string image of "further chance !!" is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as compared with the 4-1 embodiment, the time from when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed until the player presses the chance button 136 is longer.

In FIG. 224 (e), which continues from FIG. 224 (d), after displaying the character string image of “further chance !!” of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 224 (d), the button response display 4 is newly used. An opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 to be moved and displayed is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 224 (f) following FIG. 224 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 224 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "further chance !!" is erased. The state in which the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The button pressing instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is reached. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 224 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As the button response display 4, an image of the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special manner (hereinafter, may be referred to as an “opportunity button special emission image”) and the button pressing shown in FIG. 223 (c). A special instruction image may be displayed.

In FIG. 224 (g) continuing from FIG. 224 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 224 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as compared with Example 4-1 it takes a long time for the player to press the opportunity button 139 after the button response display 4 is displayed, so that the button response is started after the symbol variation display is started. It takes a long time to display the display 5.

FIG. 224 (h), which continues from FIG. 224 (g), shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed again in a variable manner and the jackpot symbol mode is stopped. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this example, since the time from the display of the button response display 5 to the end of the symbol variation display is shorter than that of the 4-1 embodiment, the effect of temporarily stopping the missing symbol shown in FIG. 223 (h) is performed. It is configured not to. When the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed and immediately before the end of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the display of the early stage or the middle stage of the display of the button response display 4 is displayed. May be thinned out to temporarily stop the out-of-order symbol shown in FIG. 223 (h).

In the effect example shown in Examples 4-1 and 4-2, the button response display 4 depends on the timing and presence / absence of pressing the player's chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed. , The button response display 5 is configured to be different depending on the timing of pressing the opportunity button 139 of the player when the button response display 4 is displayed and the presence or absence of pressing. In some cases. Even if the same effect pattern 4 is produced, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 4 and the button response display 5. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, if the effect pattern 4 is the same no matter what button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 5-1)
An production example of Example 5-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 225 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 225 (b) following FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 225 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 225 (c), which continues from FIG. 225 (b), shows a chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the image is displayed is shown. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button light emitting image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

In FIG. 225 (d), which continues from FIG. 225 (c), the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button light emitting image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle stage of the button operation waiting display 2. In parallel with moving the image to the left end of the area and erasing it so as to frame out, a state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The arrow on the left side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image. However, it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button waiting display 2.

In FIG. 225 (e), which continues from FIG. 225 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button is pressed in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state where the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 225 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As the button operation waiting display 2, an image of an opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode (hereinafter, may be referred to as an “opportunity button special emission image”) and a button shown in FIG. 223 (c). The pressing special instruction image may be displayed.

In FIG. 225 (f), which continues from FIG. 225 (e), the button press instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 225 (e). Shows the state of The opportunity button image is moved and displayed in a more conspicuous position to encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

In FIG. 225 (g) continuing from FIG. 225 (f), when the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 225 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 2 ( As a display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139), a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 225 (g), which continues from FIG. 225 (f), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-design mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. As the button response display 2, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed.
(Example 5-2)
An example of the production of Example 5-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 226 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 226 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 226 (b) following FIG. 226 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 225 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 226 (c), which continues from FIG. 226 (b), shows a chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the image is displayed is shown. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button light emitting image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

In FIG. 226 (d), which continues from FIG. 226 (c), the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button light emitting image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle stage of the button operation waiting display 2. In parallel with moving the image to the left end of the area and erasing it so as to frame out, a state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The arrow on the left side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image. However, it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

In FIG. 226 (e), which continues from FIG. 226 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button is pressed in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state where the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 226 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In addition, as the button operation waiting display 2, even if the opportunity button special light emission image that imitates the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode and the button press special instruction image shown in FIG. 223 (c) may be displayed. Good.

In FIG. 226 (f) following from FIG. 226 (e), the button press instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 226 (e). Shows the state of The opportunity button image is moved and displayed in a more conspicuous position to encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

In FIG. 226 (g), which continues from FIG. 226 (f), when the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 226 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139, so that the button response display 2 ( As an early stage of (display performed in response to pressing the opportunity button 139), a character string image of "big hit?" Is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 226 (h), which continues from FIG. 226 (g), is the middle part of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139), and is a “big hit ?!” in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string image of "is displayed.

FIG. 226 (i), which continues from FIG. 226 (h), is the final stage of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139), and is a "big hit ?!" at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string image of "!" Is displayed. The character string images of "big hit ?!" and "big hit ?!" displayed in the middle and the end of the button response display 2 are displayed when the opportunity button 139 is pressed and held for a predetermined time or longer, or for a predetermined time. It may be configured to be displayed when the button is pressed more than a predetermined number of times.

FIG. 226 (j), which continues from FIG. 226 (i), shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 2, even if the character string images of "big hit?", "Big hit ?!", and "big hit ?!" are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off-design mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

In the button response display 2 of this example, "big hit?", "Big hit ?!", and "big hit ?!" are displayed in this order, so that the player's expectation of big hit can be gradually increased. You may be able to do it. In addition, the jackpot reliability may be displayed by the number of "!". For example, when "Big hit?" And "Big hit ?!" are displayed in this order as the button response display 2 ("Big hit? !!" is not displayed), "Big hit?", "Big hit ?!", "Big hit ?!""Big hit? !!!" and "Big hit? !!!" may be displayed in this order.
(Example 5-3)
An example of the production of Example 5-3 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

FIG. 227 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 227 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 227 (b) following FIG. 227 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 225 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 227 (c), which continues from FIG. 227 (b), shows a chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the image is displayed is shown. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button light emitting image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

In FIG. 227 (d), which continues from FIG. 227 (c), the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle stage of the button operation waiting display 2. In parallel with moving the image to the left end of the area and erasing it so as to frame out, a state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The arrow on the left side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image. However, it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

In FIG. 227 (e), which continues from FIG. 227 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button is pressed in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state where the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 227 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In addition, as the button operation waiting display 2, even if the opportunity button special light emission image that imitates the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode and the button press special instruction image shown in FIG. 223 (c) may be displayed. Good.

In FIG. 227 (f), which continues from FIG. 227 (e), the button press instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 227 (e). Shows the state of The opportunity button image is moved and displayed in a more conspicuous position to encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

FIG. 227 (g) following FIG. 227 (f) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 227 (f) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 227 (h) following FIG. 227 (g) shows the state immediately before the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 227 (f) is continuously displayed and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. There is.

FIG. 227 (i), which continues from FIG. 227 (h), shows the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. The state in which the character string image of "big hit? !!" at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In this example, since it took more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in the 5-1 example, it is the beginning of the button response display 2 shown in the 5-2 embodiment. It is configured not to display the middle stage.

FIG. 226 (j), which continues from FIG. 227 (i), shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Even when the character string image of "big hit?", "Big hit ?!", or "big hit? !!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, the missed symbol mode is displayed. A stop display may be displayed.
(Example 5-4)
An example of the production of Example 5-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

FIG. 228 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 228 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 228 (b) following FIG. 228 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 225 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 228 (c), which continues from FIG. 228 (b), shows a chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the image is displayed is shown. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button light emitting image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

In FIG. 228 (d), which continues from FIG. 228 (c), the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button light emitting image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle stage of the button operation waiting display 2. In parallel with moving the image to the left end of the area and erasing it so as to frame out, a state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The arrow on the left side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image. However, it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

In FIG. 228 (e), which continues from FIG. 228 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button is pressed in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state where the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 228 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In addition, as the button operation waiting display 2, even if the opportunity button special light emission image that imitates the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode and the button press special instruction image shown in FIG. 223 (c) may be displayed. Good.

In FIG. 228 (f), which continues from FIG. 228 (e), the button press instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 228 (e). Shows the state of The opportunity button image is moved and displayed in a more conspicuous position to encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

FIG. 228 (g) following FIG. 228 (f) shows a state immediately before the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 228 (f) is continuously displayed and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. There is.

FIG. 228 (h), which follows from FIG. 228 (g), shows the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. The state in which the character string image of "big hit ?!" at the beginning of the button response display 2 shown is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 228 (i), which continues from FIG. 228 (h), shows the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. The state in which the character string image of "big hit? !!" at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In this example, since it took more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in the 5-1 example, the middle part of the button response display 2 shown in the 5-2 example is displayed. It is thinned out so that it is not displayed. It should be noted that all the displays from the beginning to the end of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-1 are double-speeded according to the time required from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2. It may be displayed to be played.

FIG. 228 (j), which continues from FIG. 228 (i), shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 2, even if the character string images of "big hit?", "Big hit ?!", and "big hit ?!" are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off-design mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

In the effect example shown in Examples 5-1 to 5-4, the button response display 2 depends on the timing at which the player's opportunity button 139 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 2 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even if the same effect pattern 2 is produced, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 2. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 2 is displayed, if the effect is the same effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 6-1)
An production example of Example 6-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 203B correspond to the hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 229 and later, the movable body 1002 is located at a position that does not overlap with the main liquid crystal unit 1001 when viewed from the player.

FIG. 229 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 229 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 229 (b), which continues from FIG. 229 (a), shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and moves to the left, the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b2 moves to the left, the change display of the decorative symbol is displayed. To be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 229 (c), which continues from FIG. 229 (b), shows the default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It shows the increased display state. A state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

FIG. 229 (d) following FIG. 229 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 229 (c) is being executed.

In FIG. 229 (e), which continues from FIG. 229 (d), one game ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 while the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 229 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the hold icon b4 is increased and displayed. In this example, the button operation waiting display 3 corresponds to a hold icon of an image imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “chance button hold icon”). In FIG. 229 (e), the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

FIG. 229 (f), which continues from FIG. 229 (e), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 229 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not reached.

In FIG. 229 (g), which continues from FIG. 229 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. Indicates the state of The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold and change icons and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left, and the move animation of the hold icon is displayed. And the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 229 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 229 (h), which continues from FIG. 229 (g), the player is in the process of continuously displaying the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 229 (g), and the player is in the operation valid period of the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 3. The button response display 3 of this example corresponds to a hold icon (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “chance button light emission hold icon”) of an image imitating a chance button 136 that emits light in a mode different from the normal state. ing.

In FIG. 229 (i) following from FIG. 229 (h), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 229 (i) shows a state in which the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 229 (h).

FIG. 229 (j), which continues from FIG. 229 (i), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 229 (j), the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3.

In FIG. 229 (k), which continues from FIG. 229 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and subsequently, the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 3. It shows the state of doing. The hold icon b3 becomes the change icon a3 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b4 move to the left. The change display of the decorative symbol and the chance button are displayed. The operation validity period of 136 is started. FIG. 229 (k) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As described above, in this example, the button response display 3 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed.

In FIG. 229 (l), which continues from FIG. 229 (k), while the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 229 (k) is continuously displayed, the player can perform the operation valid period of the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the chance button light emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 is changed to the black circular hold icon b4 in the look-ahead notice mode. In this example, the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon. It is configured so that the symbol mode is easily stopped and displayed. The chance button light emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 may be changed to a white circular hold icon, a white diamond hold icon, or a hold icon other than these.

In FIG. 229 (m) following from FIG. 229 (l), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

FIG. 229 (n) following FIG. 229 (m) shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In FIG. 229 (o) following from FIG. 229 (n), one hold of special figure 1 is digested, the next symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the black circular hold icon b4 is displayed. It becomes a black circular variable icon a4 and shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variable icons moving to the left has ended.

FIG. 229 (p) following FIG. 229 (o) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 229 (p), the effect (reach effect) by the predetermined advance notice animation is started.

FIG. 229 (q), which continues from FIG. 229 (p), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 229 (r), which continues from FIG. 229 (q), shows a state in which the stop display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 3 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player clicks the change button. By operating 136, the icon is changed to a black circular hold icon, which is a look-ahead notice mode. As described above, the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 of this example are configured so that the hold icon corresponds to the display including the display performed when the chance button 136 is waiting for the operation.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although it is configured, there may be other cases. For example, from the hold order when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display which is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested, the chance button 136 is displayed. The start timing of the operation valid period and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but when the hold icon is reduced and displayed, the specific hold icon is waiting for the button operation. It may be configured to change to the hold icon as the display 3, or the hold icon as the button operation wait display 3 is changed to the hold icon at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. It may be configured to change to.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but one or more of the hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 at the same time. There may be cases.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 3, but when one or more of the hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed at the same time as the button response display 3. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon and the button response corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to display 3 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 may be changed to the white circular hold icon in the default mode at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 is displayed, or a look-ahead notice other than the white circle. It may be changed to a hold icon in a mode.
(Example 6-2)
An production example of Example 6-2 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG. 203B correspond to the hold icon.

FIG. 230 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 230 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 230 (b), which continues from FIG. 230 (a), shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and moves to the left, the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b2 moves to the left, the change display of the decorative symbol is displayed. To be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 230 (c), which continues from FIG. 230 (b), shows the default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It shows the increased display state. A state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

FIG. 230 (d) following FIG. 230 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 230 (c) is being executed.

In FIG. 230 (e), which continues from FIG. 230 (d), one game ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 while the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 230 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the hold icon b4 is increased and displayed. In this example, the button operation waiting display 3 corresponds to the chance button hold icon of the image imitating the chance button 136. In FIG. 230 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

FIG. 230 (f), which continues from FIG. 230 (e), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 230 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not reached.

In FIG. 230 (g), which continues from FIG. 230 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. Indicates the state of The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold and change icons and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left, and the move animation of the hold icon is displayed. And the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 230 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left.

In FIG. 230 (h), which continues from FIG. 230 (g), the player is in the process of continuously displaying the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 230 (g), and the player is in the operation valid period of the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to a hold icon of an image imitating the opportunity button 139 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “opportunity button hold icon”).

FIG. 230 (i) following FIG. 230 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 230 (i) shows a state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 230 (h).

FIG. 230 (j), which continues from FIG. 230 (i), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 230 (j), the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

In FIG. 230 (k) following FIG. 230 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4. Indicates the state of The hold icon b3 becomes the change icon a3 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b4 move to the left. The change display of the decorative symbol and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation validity period of 139 is started. FIG. 230 (k) shows a state in which the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As described above, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed.

In FIG. 230 (l), which continues from FIG. 230 (k), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 230 (k) is continuously displayed, the player can operate the opportunity button 139 during the valid period. By pressing the opportunity button 139, the opportunity button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is changed to the white diamond-shaped hold icon b4 as the button response display 5. In this example, the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the white diamond hold icon is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon. It is configured so that the symbol mode is easily stopped and displayed. The jackpot symbol mode stops in the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the white diamond hold icon is digested, rather than the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is digested. It is configured to be easy to display. As the button response display 5, a white circular hold icon, a black circular hold icon, or a hold icon other than these may be displayed.

FIG. 230 (m) following FIG. 230 (l) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

FIG. 230 (n), which continues from FIG. 230 (m), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In FIG. 230 (o), which continues from FIG. 230 (n), one hold of special figure 1 is digested, the next symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the black circular hold icon b4 is displayed. It becomes a black circular variable icon a4 and shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variable icons moving to the left has ended.

FIG. 230 (p) following FIG. 230 (o) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 230 (p), the effect (reach effect) by the predetermined advance notice animation is started.

FIG. 230 (q), which continues from FIG. 230 (p), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 230 (r), which continues from FIG. 230 (q), shows a state in which the stop display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player has the opportunity button. By operating 139, the icon is changed to the black circular hold icon displayed as the button response display 5 which is the look-ahead notice mode. As described above, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display displayed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 includes a display performed while waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although it is configured, there may be other cases. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed from the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display which is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The start timing of the validity period and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation wait display 3 is configured to start the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon that moves to the left. There may be cases other than. For example, the hold order when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased, the time required to start the symbol variation display that is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested, and the chance button for the player. From the timing of operating 136, the start timing of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but when the hold icon is reduced and displayed, the specific hold icon is waiting for the button operation. It may be configured to change to the hold icon as the display 3, or the hold icon as the button operation wait display 3 is changed to the hold icon at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. It may be configured to change to.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 at the same time. There may be cases.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but when two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button response display 4 at the same time. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but when two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button response display 5 at the same time. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to display 4 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 may be changed to the white circular hold icon in the default mode at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 is displayed, or a look-ahead notice other than the white circle. It may be changed to a hold icon in a mode.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.
(Example 6-3)
An production example of Example 6-3 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG. 203B correspond to the hold icon.

FIG. 231 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 231 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 231 (b) following FIG. 231 (a) shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and moves to the left, the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b2 moves to the left, the change display of the decorative symbol is displayed. To be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 231 (c), which continues from FIG. 231 (b), shows the default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It shows the increased display state. A state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

FIG. 231 (d) following FIG. 231 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 231 (c) is being executed.

In FIG. 231 (e), which continues from FIG. 231 (d), one game ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 while the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 231 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the hold icon b4 is increased and displayed. In this example, the button operation waiting display 3 corresponds to the chance button hold icon of the image imitating the chance button 136. In FIG. 231 (e), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not valid, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

FIG. 231 (f) following FIG. 231 (e) shows a state in which the stop display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 231 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not valid, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

In FIG. 231 (g) succeeding from FIG. 231 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. Indicates the state of The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold and change icons and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left, and the move animation of the hold icon is displayed. And the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 231 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left.

In FIG. 231 (h) continuing from FIG. 231 (g), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (g) is continuously displayed, the player can operate the chance button 136 during the valid period. By pressing the chance button 136, the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to the opportunity button hold icon of the image imitating the opportunity button 139.

FIG. 231 (i) following FIG. 231 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 231 (i) subsequently shows a state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 231 (h).

FIG. 231 (j) following FIG. 231 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 231 (j), the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

In FIG. 231 (k) following FIG. 231 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4. Indicates the state of The hold icon b3 becomes the change icon a3 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b4 move to the left. The change display of the decorative symbol and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation validity period of 139 is started. FIG. 231 (k) shows a state in which the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As described above, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed.

In FIG. 231 (l), which continues from FIG. 231 (k), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (k) is continuously displayed, the player can operate the opportunity button 139 during the valid period. By pressing the opportunity button 139, an animation showing the state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 is changing in the area where the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "hold icon changing animation"). It may be referred to as).

In FIG. 231 (m) following from FIG. 231 (l), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Hold icon When the display of the changing animation ends, the hold icon of the image that imitates the opportunity button 139 in the state where the opportunity button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is projected (hereinafter, "opportunity button protrusion hold") It may be referred to as "icon".) The state changed to b5 is shown. In FIG. 231 (m), the opportunity button 139 protrudes in relation to displaying the button response display 5, but since the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is not valid, the opportunity button 139 is not emitting light. Or it remains in the normal light emitting state. In this example, the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon. The symbol mode is configured to be easily stopped and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is digested and started. Rather than the symbol variation display, the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is digested and started. The symbol variation display is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is more likely than the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the white diamond-shaped hold icon is digested. The symbol variation display that is started by digesting is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 231 (n) following FIG. 231 (m) shows a state in which the out-of-order symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In FIG. 231 (o) continuing from FIG. 231 (n), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the opportunity button protrusion hold icon b4 is projected. The variation icon of the image imitating 139 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "opportunity button protrusion variation icon") a4, the movement animation between the hold / variation icon that moves to the left is displayed, and the decoration pattern changes. The display and operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. FIG. 231 (o) shows a state in which the protruding opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state).

In FIG. 231 (p) following FIG. 231 (o), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (o) is continuously displayed, the player can operate the opportunity button 139 during the valid period. By pressing the opportunity button 139 in the protruding state, the "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" of the jackpot symbol mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. If the player does not press the opportunity button 139 in a protruding state during the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139, a big hit is made to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the end of the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" of the design aspect is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 231 (r) following FIG. 231 (q) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player has the opportunity button. By operating 139, the icon is changed to the opportunity button protrusion hold icon, which is a look-ahead notice mode displayed as the button response display 5, and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 in a state of protruding from the normal state. Temporary stop display of decorative design is performed. As described above, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display displayed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 include a display performed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139. To.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although it is configured, there may be other cases. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed from the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display which is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The start timing of the validity period and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation wait display 3 is configured to start the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon that moves to the left. There may be cases other than. For example, the hold order when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased, the time required to start the symbol variation display that is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested, and the chance button for the player. From the timing of operating 136, the start timing of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but when the hold icon is reduced and displayed, the specific hold icon is waiting for the button operation. It may be configured to change to the hold icon as the display 3, or the hold icon as the button operation wait display 3 is changed to the hold icon at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. It may be configured to change to.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 at the same time. There may be cases.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but when two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button response display 4 at the same time. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but when two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button response display 5 at the same time. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to display 4 may be composed of different hold icons.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.

As described above, in Examples 6-1 to 6-3, an effect example in which the hold icon is associated with the operation wait display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 2 and the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 is shown. However, there may be a case where the hold icon is associated with the operation waiting display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 1, the effect pattern 4, or the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the third embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 203 to 231.
(I1)
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of performing symbol variation display, and
An image display means capable of displaying an image (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 209) and
A first operating means (for example, chance button 136) provided at a position where the player can operate, and
A second operating means (for example, opportunity button 139) provided at a position where the player can operate, and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation wait display (for example, the button operation wait display 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b)).
The third type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means (for example, FIGS. 212 (c) to (d) and 216 (c) to (d)). Etc.),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display (for example, the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 203B).
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display (for example, the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 203B).
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display (for example, the button response display 5 shown in FIG. 203 (c)).
The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 203 (b) and 212 (c) to (f)). ),
The third type of operation response display does not include a part of the display (for example, a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped) displayed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means. It is a configured display (see, for example, FIGS. 203 (b), 212 (c)-(f)).
The fourth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 203 (c) and 216 (c) to (f)). ),
The fourth type of operation response display is a display configured to include the part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 203 (c), FIG. 216). (F)),
The fifth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means (see, for example, FIG. 203 (d) and FIG. 216 (g)).
The symbol variation display with the fifth type of operation response display is better than the symbol variation display with the third type of operation response display without the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the symbol variation in which the fifth type of operation response display displayed by causing the player to operate the first operation means and the second operation means step by step is performed. The display is more than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed, which is displayed by causing the player to operate only the first operation means without performing the fifth type of operation response display. Since the jackpot symbol is easily displayed as a definite display, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be gradually increased, and the interest of the game may be improved.
(I2)
The game console described in (I1) above.
The third type of operation response display and the fourth type of operation in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display (for example, a chance button emission image). Which type of display among the response displays is displayed is determined before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means.
The third operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the third types of operation waiting displays (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (c) and 216 (c)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I3)
The game console according to (I1) or (I2) above.
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display (for example, the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 203 (c)).
The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means (see, for example, FIGS. 203 (c) and 223 (c) to (d)).
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the fourth type of operation waiting display, the fourth type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. (See, for example, FIGS. 203 (c) and 223 (d) to (f)),
The symbol variation display in which the fourth type of operation waiting display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the operation waiting display of the third type is performed without performing the operation waiting display of the fourth type. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(I4)
The game console described in (I3) above.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the first type of operation wait display (for example, the operation wait display 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a)).
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the first type of operation response display (for example, the operation response display 1 shown in FIG. 203A).
The first type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means (see, for example, FIGS. 203 (a) and 204 (d)).
The first type of operation response display is a display configured not to include a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means (for example, FIGS. 203 (a) and 204 (e)). reference),
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first type of operation waiting display, the first type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. (See, for example, FIGS. 203 (a) and 204 (d) to (e)),
The first operation response display (for example, a character string image of "chance !!") is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation waiting display. (See, for example, FIGS. 205 (c)-(d)).
The fourth operation response display (for example, an opportunity button image and a button press instruction image) is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display. Cage (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (c)-(f)),
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even if the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display (for example, FIGS. 219 (c) to 219 (c) to FIG. (F)),
The first operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the first type of operation waiting displays.
The first operation response display is an operation response display of one of the first types of operation response displays.
The fourth operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the fourth types of operation waiting displays.
The fourth operation response display is an operation response display of one of the fourth types of operation response displays.
A game table characterized by that.
(I5)
The game console described in (I4) above.
The symbol variation display with the fifth type of operation response display is better than the symbol variation display with the first type of operation response display without the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(I6)
The game console according to (I4) or (I5) above.
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed is better than the symbol variation display in which the operation response display of the third type is performed without the operation response display of the first type. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(I7)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above.
The fourth type of operation response display is the first when the time from the display of the third type of operation waiting display to the operation of the first operation means is the first time. The display (for example, the button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 216 (d) to (f)) (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (c) to (f)).
When the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means is the second time, the operation response display of the fourth type is the second. The display (for example, the button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 219 (e) to (f)) (see, for example, FIGS. 219 (c) to (f)).
The second time is longer than the first time,
The display at the beginning of the first display and the display at the beginning of the second display are the same (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (d) and 219 (e)).
The display at the end of the first display and the display at the end of the second display are the same (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (f) and 219 (f)).
At least a part of the display in the middle of the first display (for example, the display in the middle of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (e)) is not displayed in the second display (for example, FIGS. 219 (e) to 219 (e). (F)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I8)
The game console described in (I7) above.
When the first operating means is operated from the display of the third type of operation waiting display to the end of the operation valid period defined before the start of the third type of operation waiting display. The display is configured to be performed according to the operation of the first operating means (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (d) to 216 (f)).
The first time is the time from the start of the third type of operation waiting display until the first operation means is operated at the shortest timing (for example, FIG. 216 (c). )-(D)),
The second time is a time when the first operating means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the operation waiting display of the third type is started (). For example, see FIGS. 219 (c) to 219 (d)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I9)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above.
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 2).
The second type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operating means (see, for example, FIG. 203 (d)).
When the second type of operation means is operated during the display of the second type of operation waiting display, the second type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. (See, for example, FIG. 203 (d)),
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed is better than the symbol variation display in which the second type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(I10)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I9) above.
The character display displayed on the fourth type of operation response display (for example, the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles shown in FIG. 223 (f) are overlapped) is waiting for the fourth type of operation. It is configured to be displayed on the display (see, for example, FIG. 223 (c)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I11)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I10) above.
The display of the character displayed on the fourth type of operation response display (for example, the button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles shown in FIG. 216 (f) are overlapped) is waiting for the third type of operation. It is configured to be displayed on the display (see, for example, FIG. 216 (c)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I12)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above.
The second operating means is configured to be determined to have been operated when pressed by the player.
A game table characterized by that.
(I13)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above.
The first operating means is configured to be determined to have been operated when rotated by the player.
A game table characterized by that.
[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 239. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
(Example 1)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. 232 (a) shows a schematic front of the gaming board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and from FIG. 232 (b), the game board 1000 to the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body. 1002 is extracted and shown.

FIG. 232 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 232 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. In FIG. 232, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 232 (b) following FIG. 232 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

FIG. 232 (c) following FIG. 232 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 232 (d) following FIG. 232 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The normal reach effect is started after FIG. 232 (d).

FIG. 232 (e) following FIG. 232 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost part of the operating range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and the part of the image becomes invisible to the player. A symbol variation display in which at least a part of a decorative symbol or a preview image (for example, an image of the sun, clouds, a balloon, a hold icon, a fluctuation icon, etc.) may overlap with a movable body and become invisible to the player. The pre-reading notice that the visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body compared to the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the decorative design or the notice image does not overwrap with the movable body. When is executed, the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movement of the movable body. Compared to the case where the look-ahead notice is executed, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead. It may be configured to be easy to handle.

FIG. 232 (f) following FIG. 232 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position of the moving range of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 232 (g) following FIG. 232 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways from side to side. In this embodiment, the wipe effect display described later is not executed during the normal reach effect.

FIG. 232 (h) following FIG. 232 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 232 (i) following FIG. 232 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is exhausted. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

FIG. 232 (j) following FIG. 232 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 232 (k) following FIG. 232 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 232 (k). In this example, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

FIG. 232 (l) following FIG. 232 (k) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during the execution of the normal effect or the normal reach effect, and the background image of the mountain road is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect.

FIG. 232 (m) following FIG. 232 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image has changed from a background image of the sea including an image of a yacht and an image of clouds to an image of a part of the background of a mountain road displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a portion of the sub-display device 1030 that overlaps and is hidden by the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 232 (n) following FIG. 232 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 provided with the sub-display device 1030 has moved upward to the right from the initial position shown in FIG. 232 (m). The sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a portion of the sub-display device 1030 that overlaps and is hidden by the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the movable body 1002 may be referred to as a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as a display screen front plane) by a drive system (not shown). ) Can be moved two-dimensionally. The drive system of the movable body 1002 can have various configurations. For example, one end of two rotatably connected connecting rods is rotatably fixed to a predetermined position of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 outside the decorative symbol display device 208, and two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen. Configure a movable link mechanism. The movable body 1002 is rotatably fixed to the other ends of the two connected connecting rods in the plane. A motor for driving the connecting rod is arranged at one end of the two connected connecting rods and at the connecting node. As a result, the movable body 1002 can be moved two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen. A motor for rotating the effect movable body may be arranged at the other end of the two connecting rods so that the effect movable body 1002 can be rotated in the front plane of the display screen.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 232 (o), which continues from FIG. 232 (n), shows a state in which a character string image of "sorry" is displayed as a display suggesting deviation in the center of the display screen (center of the effect display area 208d) of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is shown. The sub-display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping a part of the character image of the "mind" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the sub-display device 1030 has the lower half of the character "mind". It is displayed.

FIG. 232 (p) following FIG. 232 (o) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 232 (q), which continues from FIG. 232 (p), shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started after "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" suggesting a deviation during the super reach effect is displayed. .. The wipe effect display is an effect of erasing an image from the edge of the display screen of the display device as if wiping it off. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes two display devices, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a sub display device 1030. In the present embodiment, the wipe effect display is first started by the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the sub. It is started in the display device 1030. Hereinafter, the wipe effect display executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe effect display, the wipe display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe display, and is referred to as a sub display device 1030. The wipe effect display to be executed is referred to as a second wipe effect display, and the wipe display displayed on the sub display device 208 is referred to as a second wipe display.

As shown in FIG. 232 (q), the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. To do. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, or the like that has been displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 232, the patterns are shown by hatching that rises to the right.

The effect movable body 1002 is moving toward the initial position, and the sub display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping a part of the character string image of "sorry" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is sub. On the display device 1030, the lower half of the character "mind" is displayed.

FIG. 232 (r) following FIG. 232 (q) shows a state in which the wipe displays w1a and w1b gradually spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

FIG. 232 (s) following FIG. 232 (r) shows a state in which the second wipe effect display is started in the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 (effect movable body 1002) is moving. The wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display 1030, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. The appearance of the wipe display w2a and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to start the appearance display of the second wipe display, and the appearance of the second wipe display is the start of the second wipe effect display. The wipe displays w2a and w2b are displayed in the foreground on the sub-display device 1030, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the background image or the like that has been displayed before the start of the second wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w2a and w2b are the same, and in FIG. 232, the patterns are shown by white dots on a black background.

The design of the first wipe display and the design of the second wipe display are different. The first wipe display appears from the upper left and lower right corners of the screen, and the second wipe display appears from the upper right and lower left corners of the screen.

In this embodiment, the second wipe effect display is started during the effect operation in which the sub display device 1030 moves to the initial position, but the second wipe effect is performed after the sub display device 1030 is stopped at the initial position. The display may be started, the sub display device 1030 may start moving to the initial position after the second wipe effect display is finished, the timing at which the sub display device 1030 starts moving to the initial position, and the second The start timing of the second wipe effect display may be the same.

FIG. 232 (t) following FIG. 232 (s) shows a state in which the sub-display device 1030 is stopped at the initial position. The first wipe display and the second wipe display are emerging. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .. The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

FIG. 232 (u) following FIG. 232 (t) shows a state in which the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w2a and the end of the wipe display w2b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b. When the entire display screen of the sub-display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b, the wipe displays w2a and w2b are in a standby display state in which they are not moved and displayed. When the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The first wipe display is appearing, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed from the lower right corner of the display screen. It is displayed so that it gradually spreads in the center.

FIG. 232 (v) following FIG. 232 (u) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a and the end of the wipe display w1b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are in a standby display state in which they are not moved and displayed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

FIG. 232 (w) following FIG. 232 (v) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The second wipe display is in standby display.

FIG. 232 (x) following FIG. 232 (w) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is started. The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 232 (y) following FIG. 232 (x) shows the state during the withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display. A part of the decorative symbol during temporary stop is displayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b.

FIG. 232 (z) following FIG. 232 (y) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is completed. The wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. When the wipe display w2b is deleted from the screen, the withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed. The completion of the withdrawal of the second wipe display ends the second wipe effect display. The first wipe effect display is in the withdrawal display.

As shown in FIG. 232 (r), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the sub-display device 1030 before the start of the second wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. 232 (z), the second wipe effect display. After the end, the background image of the sea is displayed on the sub display device 1030. In this way, the background image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 changes before and after the second wipe effect display.

In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w2a starts appearing from the upper right corner of the display screen and withdrawal is completed in the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts appearing from the lower left corner of the display screen and appears in the lower left corner of the display screen. Withdrawal is complete. The appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w2a starts appearing from the upper right corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts appearing from the lower left corner of the display screen and appears in the upper left corner of the display screen. The withdrawal may be completed.

FIG. 232 (a) following FIG. 232 (z) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is deleted from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways in a display mode in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c sway. The variable display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 232 (p), the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the reduced display mode before the start of the first wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. 232 (a), the first After the wipe effect display is completed, the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a display mode of a normal size. In this way, the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

As shown in FIG. 232 (p), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the start of the first wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. 232 (a), the first wipe effect After the display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this way, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen and withdraws from the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen and appears in the lower right corner of the display screen. Withdrawal is complete. The appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen and withdraws from the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen and appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. The withdrawal may be completed.

FIG. 232 (b), which continues from FIG. 232 (a), shows a fluctuation display in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" sways from side to side in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state in which is displayed.

FIG. 232 (c) following FIG. 232 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an effect display means capable of executing the effect display. The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means, and one of the plurality of image display means is the decorative pattern display device 208, which is one of the plurality of image display means. One image display means is a sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can perform the first wipe effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the display suggesting the deviation is performed in the super reach effect, and the shift in the super reach effect. It is possible to perform the second wipe effect display on the sub-display device 208 after the display suggesting the above is performed. The scene change of the effect that the background image etc. changes by the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to refresh the mood of the player by making the scene change of the production gorgeous.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 232 (s) to 232 (t), a part of the second wipe effect display is performed in the sub display device 1030 that is performing the moving operation. The entire second wipe effect display may be performed while the sub display device 1030 is moving. The decorative symbol display device 208 can perform a moving operation, and at least a part of the first wipe effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 that is performing the moving operation.
(Example 2)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 233. FIG. 233 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 233, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 233 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 3, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. On the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold icons indicating the number of holds of the special figure 1 are displayed. The display mode of the three hold icons is a black circle.

FIG. 233 (b) following FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, and the hold icon movement animation in which the two hold icons move to the left is executed. Will be done.

FIG. 233 (c) following FIG. 233 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 233 (c). In this embodiment, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

FIG. 233 (d) following FIG. 233 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during the execution of the normal effect or the normal reach effect, and the background image of the mountain road is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect. All hold icons are deleted as the background image changes. The timing at which the hold icon is erased may be at the same time as the change in the background image, before the change, or after the change.

FIG. 233 (e), which continues from FIG. 233 (d), shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

In this example, it is assumed that one game ball wins in the special drawing 1 starting port 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the special figure 1 start information is acquired, and the special figure look-ahead process of pre-reading the newly acquired start information and preliminarily determining the stop symbol before the hit / fail determination process is executed by the main control unit 300. After executing the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 transmits a pre-reading result information command including the pre-determination result to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice based on the preliminary determination result. In this example, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is not executed.

FIG. 233 (f) following FIG. 233 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a detachment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display suggesting deviation, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a In ~ 208c, the shaking fluctuation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, swings up and down.

FIG. 233 (g), which continues from FIG. 233 (f), shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed during the super reach effect. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, or the like that has been displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 233, the patterns are shown by hatching that rises to the right.

FIG. 233 (h) following FIG. 233 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a and the end of the wipe display w1b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

FIG. 233 (i) following FIG. 233 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbol and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b.

The withdrawal display of the first wipe display now displays the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon with the last increased hold order after displaying at least some of the hold icons corresponding to the hold with the lower hold order. The player completes the withdrawal display of the wipe display while expecting whether the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed in response to the hold increased during the reach production is the look-ahead notice mode. You may be able to wait.

FIG. 233 (j) following FIG. 233 (i) shows the state of the withdrawal display of the first wipe display. The decorative symbol and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At the time shown in FIG. 233 (j), a part of the left symbol, the middle symbol, the right symbol, and the whole of all the hold icons are displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 233 (c), the number of hold icons before erasure was two, but since the number of hold icons in special figure 1 is increased by one while the hold icon is being erased, FIG. As shown in 233 (j), the number of hold icons after redisplay is three. The display mode of the three hold icons is a black circle.

FIG. 233 (k) following FIG. 233 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is deleted from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways in a display mode in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c sway. The variable display is displayed.

FIG. 233 (l) following FIG. 233 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice using the wipe effect display when the holding of the special figure increases before the wipe effect display is executed. In this example, since it is determined not to execute the look-ahead notice using the wipe effect display, the look-ahead notice is not executed.
(Example 3)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 234, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 234 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 234 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is, for example, 3, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. On the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold icons indicating the number of holds of the special figure 1 are displayed. The display mode of the three hold icons is a black circle.

FIG. 234 (b) following FIG. 234 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, and the hold icon movement animation in which the two hold icons move to the left is executed. Will be done.

FIG. 234 (c) following FIG. 234 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 234 (c). In this embodiment, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

FIG. 234 (d) following FIG. 234 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during the execution of the normal effect or the normal reach effect, and the background image of the mountain road is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect. All hold icons are deleted as the background image changes.

FIG. 234 (e) following FIG. 234 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

In this example, it is assumed that one game ball wins in the special drawing 1 starting port 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the special figure 1 start information is acquired, and the special figure look-ahead process of pre-reading the newly acquired start information and preliminarily determining the stop symbol before the hit / fail determination process is executed by the main control unit 300. After executing the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 transmits a pre-reading result information command including the pre-determination result to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice based on the preliminary determination result. In this example, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is executed, and the look-ahead notice is executed by the first wipe effect display and the display of the hold icon.

FIG. 234 (f) following FIG. 234 (e) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display suggesting the disconnection is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, or the like that has been displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 234, the patterns are plain black.

In this embodiment, the plain black wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in the first wipe effect display as a look-ahead notice. When the first wipe effect display is displayed as the look-ahead notice, the start timing of the first wipe effect display is the first wipe effect display when the first wipe effect display that is not the look-ahead notice is displayed. It is earlier than the start timing of. When the pre-reading notice is executed, the first wipe effect display is started immediately after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 234 (f), and the pre-reading notice is given. If not executed, a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 233 (f), and after a lapse of a predetermined period, the first wipe effect display is displayed as shown in FIG. 233 (g). It has been started.

The appearance positions of the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display which is the look-ahead notice is displayed are the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display which is not the look-ahead notice is displayed. It is different from the appearance position. In the case of the first wipe effect display, which is a pre-reading notice, the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is in the upper right corner of the display screen, and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is in the lower left corner of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 234 (f). is there. On the other hand, in the case of the first wipe effect display which is not a look-ahead notice, the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper left corner of the display screen, and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the right side of the display screen as shown in FIG. 233 (g). The lower corner.

The speed of the appearance display of the wipe display w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display which is the look-ahead notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display which is not the look-ahead notice is displayed. It is faster than the appearance display speed of w1b.

In this way, when the first wipe effect display is executed as the look-ahead notice, the first wipe effect display whose pattern, appearance position, and appearance display speed of the first wipe display are not the look-ahead notice is executed. It is different from the case where it is done. When the first wipe effect display is executed as a look-ahead notice, the first wipe effect display in which at least one of the pattern, the appearance position, or the speed of the appearance display of the first wipe display is not the look-ahead notice is executed. It suffices if it is different from the case where.

In this example, the pre-reading process is executed during the execution of the reach effect, and the pre-reading notice based on the result of the pre-reading process is executed during the execution of the reach effect. In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display as the look-ahead notice is different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display which is not the look-ahead notice. In addition, when the pre-reading process before the start of the reach effect or the pre-reading notice based on the result of the pre-reading process before the special figure variable game in which the reach effect is executed is executed, or the hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode is displayed. In some cases, the mode of the wipe effect display may be different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display.

FIG. 234 (g) following FIG. 234 (f) shows a state in which the wipe displays w1a and w1b gradually spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

FIG. 234 (h) following FIG. 234 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a and the end of the wipe display w1b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

FIG. 234 (i) following FIG. 234 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The decorative symbol and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The speed of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display which is the look-ahead notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display which is not the look-ahead notice is displayed. The speed of the withdrawal display of w1b may be faster, the same, or slower.

The withdrawal display of the first wipe display now displays the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon with the last increased hold order after displaying at least some of the hold icons corresponding to the hold with the lower hold order. The player completes the withdrawal display of the wipe display while expecting whether the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed in response to the hold increased during the reach production is the look-ahead notice mode. You may be able to wait.

FIG. 234 (j) following FIG. 234 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is deleted from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways in a display mode in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c sway. The variable display is displayed. The hold icon is also redisplayed, and the third hold icon from the left is displayed in a white square display mode. The hold icon is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode.

FIG. 234 (k) following FIG. 234 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pre-reading notice by the first wipe effect display. When the first wipe effect display is executed as a look-ahead notice, the jackpot may be won by all means until all the pending special figure variable games are digested.

The pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the look-ahead notice by the second wipe effect display. Similar to the first wipe effect display, the second wipe effect display as a look-ahead notice is a second wipe in which at least one of the second wipe display pattern, appearance position, or appearance speed is not a look-ahead notice. It suffices if it is different from the case where the effect display is executed.
(Example 4)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. Each figure of FIG. 235 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 235 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 235 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 235, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. At the time shown in FIG. 235 (a), the number of remaining special figure variation games in the electric support state is nine. On the sub-display device 1030, a character string image of "9 times" indicating the number of remaining special figure fluctuation games in the electric support state is displayed.

FIG. 235 (b) following FIG. 235 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested. On the sub-display device 1030, a character string image of "8 times" indicating the number of remaining special figure fluctuation games in the electric support state is displayed.

FIG. 235 (c) following FIG. 235 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 235 (c). In this embodiment, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

In FIG. 235 (d), which continues from FIG. 235 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character become different. It shows the state in which the effect of displaying the moving image of the confronting scene has been started. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. An image of the main character (hereinafter referred to as "hero") is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as "enemy") is displayed on the right side of the display screen. ) Is displayed, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed in the upper left of the display screen. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 235 (e), which continues from FIG. 235 (d), shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

At the time shown in FIG. 235 (e), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In FIG. 235 (d), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the character string image of “duel”. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including the lower plate full tank error information from the main control unit 300.

FIG. 235 (f) following FIG. 235 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

FIG. 235 (g) following FIG. 235 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways up and down. In the lower plate full tank error notification image, the character color has changed to a black display mode.

FIG. 235 (h) following FIG. 235 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display are started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display starts from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. w2a starts to appear, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display, and the wipe display w2a The appearance and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to start the appearance display of the second wipe display, and the appearance of the second wipe display is the start of the second wipe effect display.

The first wipe display appears so as to wipe off the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w1a. As shown in FIG. 235 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image before the start of the wipe effect. Is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 235 (h), after the start of the wipe effect, a black character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 235 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. It may be at the same time as, or it may be after the start of the wipe effect display.

The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is deleted by the first wipe display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is displayed overlapping with the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is taken as an example as an error display, but the same applies to other error displays, for example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error and an abnormal winning. The error notification image for notifying the illegal winning and the error notification image for notifying the magnetic detection are also displayed overlapping with the first wipe display.

FIG. 235 (i) following FIG. 235 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display and the appearance display of the second wipe display are completed. The completion of the appearance display of the first wipe display may be the same as the completion of the appearance display of the second wipe display, or the completion of any of the appearance displays may come first. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started, and when the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The design of the second wipe display is plain black. The first wipe display erases the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect, and displays all the displays displayed on the sub display device 1030 during the super reach effect. It will be erased.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 235 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the face of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the face of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 235 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 235 (j) following FIG. 235 (i) shows a state in which the first wipe display and the withdrawal display of the second wipe display are started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative pattern or the like is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the sub-display device 1030, the wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The start of the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be the same as the start of the withdrawal display of the second wipe display, or the start of either withdrawal display may come first.

FIG. 235 (k) following FIG. 235 (j) shows a state in which the first wipe display and the withdrawal display of the second wipe display are completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways in a display mode in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c sway. The variable display is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. In the sub-display device 1030, the wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen.

FIG. 235 (l) following FIG. 235 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a wipe effect when the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is correct or not is incorrect. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to making the player forget the effect suggesting the disconnection.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the display of a plurality of characters on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the super reach effect. Display of a plurality of characters One of the characters is a display of the main character, and one of the displays of the plurality of characters is a display of an enemy character. The display of the main character and the enemy character is erased when the first wipe effect display is displayed. In the super reach effect, the display of the main character or the enemy character may be displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the display of the main character or the enemy character is erased by displaying the second wipe effect display. You may.
(Example 5)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 shows an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 236 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 236 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 236 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 236, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The remaining number of special figure variation games executed in the electric support state may or may not be displayed on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 236 (b) following FIG. 236 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested.

FIG. 236 (c) following FIG. 236 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 236 (c). In this embodiment, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

In FIG. 236 (d), which continues from FIG. 236 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character are displayed. It shows the state in which the effect of displaying the moving image of the confronting scene has been started. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 236 (e) following FIG. 236 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 236 (f) following FIG. 236 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character defeats an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit.

FIG. 236 (g) following FIG. 236 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the shaking variation display is displayed in a display mode in which the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" swings up and down.

FIG. 236 (h) following FIG. 236 (g) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed with.

FIG. 236 (i) following FIG. 236 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not display the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit. Even when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the first wipe effect display may be displayed and the second wipe effect display may not be displayed, or the first wipe effect display may not be displayed. The second wipe effect display may be displayed, or the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display may be displayed.
(Example 6)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 237, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 237 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 237 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4.

FIG. 237 (b) following FIG. 237 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested.

FIG. 237 (c) following FIG. 237 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 237 (c). In this embodiment, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

FIG. 237 (d), which continues from FIG. 237 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 20 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. At the bottom of the display screen, a character string image of "Confrontation started!" Is displayed. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image of "Duel", and a part of the character string image is invisible. The character string image of "Confrontation start!" Is one of the message displays, and is a tutorial display for explaining the production and the like. In this embodiment, a tutorial display explaining the production contents of the super reach effect is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect.

FIG. 237 (e), which continues from FIG. 237 (d), shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "If the lord wins, a big hit" is displayed, and in the case of a big hit, it is explained that the main character who is the lord wins.

At the time shown in FIG. 237 (e), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of the message displays, and is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In FIG. 237 (d), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “duel”. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including the lower plate full tank error information from the main control unit 300.

FIG. 237 (f) following FIG. 237 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

FIG. 237 (g) following FIG. 237 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways up and down. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "If the palace stands up ..." is displayed, and it is explained that the revival effect is executed when the main character, which is the palace, stands up. In the lower plate full tank error notification image, the character color has changed to a black display mode.

FIG. 237 (h) following FIG. 237 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

The first wipe display appears so as to wipe off the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w1a. As shown in FIG. 237 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image before the start of the wipe effect. Is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 237 (h), after the start of the wipe effect, a black character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 237 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. It may be at the same time as, or it may be after the start of the wipe effect display.

The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is deleted by the first wipe display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is displayed overlapping with the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is taken as an example as an error display, but the same applies to other error displays, for example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error and an abnormal winning. The error notification image for notifying the illegal winning and the error notification image for notifying the magnetic detection are also displayed overlapping with the first wipe display.

FIG. 237 (i) following FIG. 237 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started. By the first wipe display, the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect is erased.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 237 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 237 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 237 (j) following FIG. 237 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design and the tutorial display are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In FIG. 237 (j), a character string image of "empty station" which is a part of the tutorial display is displayed.

FIG. 237 (k) following FIG. 237 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, sways and fluctuates in a display mode that sways left and right. Is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image of "Sky stage may be latent" is displayed. The super reach effect ends at the time shown in FIG. 237 (i), and after the end of the super reach effect, for example, a tutorial display explaining the stage effect is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

FIG. 237 (l) following FIG. 237 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing. A lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a tutorial display of a character string image of "possibility. The sea stage is ..." is displayed in the lower part of the display screen. Is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is deleted by the wipe effect display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is not deleted by the wipe effect display and continues even during the display of the wipe effect display. Is displayed. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display is not displayed after the end of the wipe effect display, and the tutorial display that was not displayed before the start of the wipe effect display (for example, explaining the stage) Tutorial display) is displayed in the scroll display mode after the wipe effect display ends. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may also be displayed in the scroll display mode. The tutorial display that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may be displayed after the end of the wipe effect display. At least one of the error display and the tutorial display may be displayed on the sub display device 1030.
(Example 7)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 238. FIG. 238 shows an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 238, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 238 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 238 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each of the drawings of FIG. 238, the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 238 (b), which continues from FIG. 238 (a), shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested.

FIG. 238 (c) following FIG. 238 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 238 (c). In this embodiment, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

In FIG. 238 (d), which continues from FIG. 238 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 238 (e), which continues from FIG. 238 (d), shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 238 (f) following FIG. 238 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 238 (g) following FIG. 238 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 238 (h) following FIG. 238 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 238 (i) following FIG. 238 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 238 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 238 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 238 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 238 (j) following FIG. 238 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

FIG. 238 (k) following FIG. 238 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 238 (l) following FIG. 238 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is displayed after the end of the wipe effect display. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed. Even when the jackpot is won, the wipe effect display is executed after the symbol mode suggesting the loss is displayed, and the wipe effect is provided by providing the effect pattern in which the symbol mode suggesting the jackpot is displayed after the wipe effect display. In some cases, it can contribute to helping the player forget the effect that suggests the deviation before the display is executed.
(Example 8)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 239, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 239 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 239 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 239, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 239 (b) following FIG. 239 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested.

FIG. 239 (c) following FIG. 239 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 239 (c). In this embodiment, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

In FIG. 239 (d), which continues from FIG. 239 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 239 (e), which continues from FIG. 239 (d), shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 239 (f) following FIG. 239 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

At the time shown in FIG. 239 (f), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of the message displays, and is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In FIG. 239 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the character string image of "duel". The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including the lower plate full tank error information from the main control unit 300.

FIG. 239 (g) following FIG. 239 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways up and down. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 239 (h) following FIG. 239 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 239 (i) following FIG. 239 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 239 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 239 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 239 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to helping the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 239 (j) following FIG. 239 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 239 (k) following FIG. 239 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, sways and fluctuates in a display mode that sways left and right. Is displayed.

FIG. 239 (l) following FIG. 239 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is restarted. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 239 (m) following FIG. 239 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 239 (m), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

FIG. 239 (n) following FIG. 239 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is restarted. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 239 (o), which continues from FIG. 239 (n), shows a state in which the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy has started. A character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 239 (p) following FIG. 239 (o) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character defeats an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a display mode in which it swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

FIG. 239 (q) following FIG. 239 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed with.

FIG. 239 (r) following FIG. 239 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variation game. In this embodiment, the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the second first wipe effect display are the same as the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the first first wipe effect display, but they are different. Good. The second wipe effect display may be executed twice during the execution of one special figure variation game.

The first wipe effect display may be displayed before and after the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 239 (c) to 239 (d). At this time, a wipe display for changing the scene may be displayed. The wipe display for the scene change may cover the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may cover only a part of the display screen. In FIGS. 239 (l) to (n), a wipe display for a scene change may be displayed. The same applies to the second wipe effect display.
(Example 9)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 240, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 240 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 240 (a), the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in Special FIG. In each figure of FIG. 240, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 240 (b) following FIG. 240 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the digestion of the earliest special figure 2 hold.

FIG. 240 (c) following FIG. 240 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 240 (c). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

FIG. 240 (d), which continues from FIG. 240 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 240 (e) following FIG. 240 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 240 (f) following FIG. 240 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 240 (g) following FIG. 240 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 240 (h) following FIG. 240 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 240 (i) following FIG. 240 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 240 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern is a pattern that includes an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 240 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 240 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the opportunity button 139, and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 240 (i') following FIG. 240 (i) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. The chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 240 (i'). At the time shown in FIG. 240 (i'), the operation validity period of the chance button 136 has started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be at the same time, or either one may be earlier.

In FIG. 240 (i'), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. There is. The plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 are states in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). Represents. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode or in a mode different from the normal state, the player knows that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the movement display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the operation of the chance button 136. It may be stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

In FIG. 240 (j) following FIG. 240 (i'), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It shows the state. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 240 (j). The button operation waiting display 1 is deleted based on the fact that the chance button 136 is pressed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed as the first wipe display. The withdrawal indication is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be configured. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of. For example, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation valid period ends.

FIG. 240 (k) following FIG. 240 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Has been done. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

As shown in FIGS. 240 (h) and 240 (i), when the effect image was wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display was given priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 was operated. In response to this, the wipe effect display is terminated, and a display that makes the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the shaking fluctuation display of the jackpot symbol mode (“decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) is a display that makes the player expect a jackpot. The display expected by the player may be a jackpot notice display or the like. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is preferentially displayed over the wipe effect display is finaler than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not preferentially performed over the wipe effect display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed, or the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is prioritized over the wipe effect display may be configured to confirm the jackpot, or may be more than the wipe effect display. May be configured so that the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display is performed may be preferentially removed. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be determined to be lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 240 (l) following FIG. 240 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode suggesting deviation, is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, a button operation waiting display is displayed during the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136. The wipe effect display is terminated according to the operation of. After the end of the wipe effect display, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a design mode suggesting a big hit, is displayed. Even when a big hit is won, a wipe effect display or a button operation waiting display is executed after a symbol mode suggesting a big hit is displayed, and an effect pattern is provided in which a symbol mode suggesting a big hit is displayed after the wipe effect display. As a result, it may be possible to contribute to helping the player forget the effect suggesting the deviation before the wipe effect display is executed.
(Example 10)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 241, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 241 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 241 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 241, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 241 (b) following FIG. 241 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested.

FIG. 241 (c) following FIG. 241 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 241 (c). The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

FIG. 241 (d), which continues from FIG. 241 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 241 (e) following FIG. 241 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 241 (f) following FIG. 241 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

At the time shown in FIG. 241 (f), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of the message displays, and is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In FIG. 241 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of "duel". The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including the lower plate full tank error information from the main control unit 300.

FIG. 241 (g) following FIG. 241 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways up and down. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 241 (h) following FIG. 241 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 241 (i) following FIG. 241 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 241 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 241 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 241 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to helping the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 241 (j) following FIG. 241 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 241 (k) following FIG. 241 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, sways and fluctuates in a display mode that sways from side to side. Is displayed.

FIG. 241 (l) following FIG. 241 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is restarted. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 241 (m) following FIG. 241 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 241 (m), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the opportunity button 139, and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 241 (m') following FIG. 241 (m) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. Below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 241 (m'), a chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. At the time shown in FIG. 241 (m'), the operation validity period of the chance button 136 has started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be at the same time, or either one may be earlier.

In FIG. 241 (m'), during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). There is. Below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 241 (m'), a chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. The plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 are states in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). Represents. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode or in a mode different from the normal state, the player knows that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the movement display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. It may be stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

In FIG. 241 (n) following from FIG. 241 (m'), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It shows the state. Below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 241 (n), a chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. The button operation waiting display 1 is deleted based on the fact that the chance button 136 is pressed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is restarted. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed as the first wipe display. The withdrawal indication is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be configured. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of. For example, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation valid period ends.

As shown in FIGS. 241 (l) to (m'), when the effect image is wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation wait display is given priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. In response to this, the wipe effect display is terminated, and a display that makes the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a big hit notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is preferentially displayed over the wipe effect display is finaler than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not preferentially performed over the wipe effect display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed, or the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is prioritized over the wipe effect display may be configured to confirm the jackpot, or may be more than the wipe effect display. May be configured so that the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display is performed may be preferentially removed. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be determined to be lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 241 (o) following FIG. 241 (n) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 241 (o), after the end of the first wipe effect display, the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. A character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 241 (p) following FIG. 241 (o) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character defeats an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a display mode in which it swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

FIG. 241 (q) following FIG. 241 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed with.

FIG. 241 (r) following FIG. 241 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variation game, and the button operation waiting display is displayed in the second wipe effect display. The button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first wipe effect display, or the button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first and second wipe effect displays. During the execution of the wipe effect display, the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 may be executed.
(Example 11)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 242, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 242 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 242 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each of the drawings of FIG. 242, the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 242 (b) following FIG. 242 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested.

FIG. 242 (c) following FIG. 242 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 242 (c). In this embodiment, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

In FIG. 242 (d), which continues from FIG. 242 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 242 (e) following FIG. 242 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 242 (f) following FIG. 242 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 242 (g) following FIG. 242 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 242 (h) following FIG. 242 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 242 (i) following FIG. 242 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 242 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 242 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

At the time shown in FIG. 242 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the opportunity button 139, and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 242 (i') following FIG. 242 (i) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Below the decorative symbol display devices 208 in FIGS. 242 (i') to 242 (j), the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. The button operation waiting display 3 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In FIG. 242 (i'), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state), the player indicates that the operation validity period of the chance button 136 has been started. You may be able to know.

FIG. 242 (i ") following FIG. 242 (i') shows a button response in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 242 (i') is being displayed. The early stage of display 4 (display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 of this example is "more chance! The character string image of "corresponds. The button response display 4 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

FIG. 242 (i'”) following from FIG. 242 (i") shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of this example, after displaying the character string image of "more chance !!", the opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state displayed in.

FIG. 242 (i "") following FIG. 242 (i'") shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 242 (i" "), the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Opportunity button image displayed to frame in from the right end of the area is stopped at the center of the display area, the image of "Further chance !!" is erased, and the button press instruction in the form of three inverted triangles overlapping The state in which the image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w1a and w1b. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 242 (i ""), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in motion during the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 (for example, a movement that repeats the movement display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction), and the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 is displayed. It may be displayed as a stop outside.

In FIG. 242 (j) following FIG. 242 (i ""), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the opportunity button 139 being pressed by the player during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. It shows the state that was done. The opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are deleted based on the fact that the opportunity button 139 is pressed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is restarted. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

In this example, when the player presses the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the button response display 5 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139) is displayed as the first wipe display. The withdrawal indication is displayed. If the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the opportunity button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, or the opportunity button 139 may be configured. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even if the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period of. For example, if the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation valid period ends.

As shown in FIGS. 242 (h) to (i "")), when the effect image is wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display and the button response display are given priority over the wipe effect display, and a chance is obtained. The wipe effect display is terminated in response to the operation of the button 136, and a display that causes the player to expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a big hit notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation wait display or button response display is prioritized over the wipe effect display is the symbol variation display in which the button operation wait display is not prioritized over the wipe effect display. Rather, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is prioritized over the wipe effect display is regarded as the jackpot confirmed. Alternatively, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is performed may be preferentially deviated from the wipe effect display. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is not performed with priority over the wipe effect display may be determined to be lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display and the button response display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 242 (k) following FIG. 242 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 242 (k), after the end of the first wipe effect display, the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. A character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 242 (l) following FIG. 242 (k) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character defeats an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a display mode in which it swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

FIG. 242 (m) following FIG. 242 (l) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed with.

FIG. 242 (n) following FIG. 242 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, the effect of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 216 may be executed while the wipe effect display is being executed. Of course, the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display. During the execution of the wipe effect display, the effect related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 shown in FIGS. 203 to 231 may be executed. At this time, the button operation waiting display and the button response display are displayed overlapping with the first wipe display and the second wipe display. The button operation waiting display and the button response display are displayed by overlapping with the first wipe display and the second wipe display. The symbol variation display on which the effect display is executed overlaps with the button operation waiting display and the button response display. The first wipe display and the second wipe display may be displayed so that the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the effect display is executed. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display overlaps with the wipe display or the second wipe display may be confirmed as a big hit. Even if the design variation display is configured so that the first wipe display and the second wipe display can be displayed by overlapping the button operation waiting display and the button response display. It may be good, or it may be confirmed that it is out of alignment. It should be noted that the wipe effect display and the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 can be executed even in the electric support state and the non-electric support state.
(Example 12)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. 243 shows an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 243, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 243 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each of the drawings of FIG. 243, the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 243 (b) following FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested.

FIG. 243 (c) following FIG. 243 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 243 (c). It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be more easily confirmed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

FIG. 243 (d), which follows from FIG. 243 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 243 (e) following FIG. 243 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 243 (f) following FIG. 243 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 243 (g) following FIG. 243 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 243 (h) following FIG. 243 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 243 (i) following FIG. 243 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 243 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 243 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 243 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 243 (j) following FIG. 243 (i) shows a state in which the simultaneous island production has been started. In the island simultaneous production, the pachinko machine 100 of the same model executes the same production at the same timing. At the start of the simultaneous island production, the character string image of "Start simultaneous island production!" Is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the island simultaneous production of this example, the production in which the character image of the princess is displayed is executed. When the island simultaneous production is started, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the character image of the princess displayed in the island simultaneous production, and is displayed with priority over the image displayed in the island simultaneous production. ..

FIG. 243 (k) following FIG. 243 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started during the execution of the island simultaneous production. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. During the execution of the island simultaneous production, the character string image of "island simultaneous production in progress" is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

FIG. 243 (l) following FIG. 243 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed after the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

In this embodiment, the island simultaneous production is started during the execution of the wipe effect display. During the simultaneous island production, the effect display displayed before the simultaneous island production such as the wipe effect display, reach effect display, and decorative symbol display is reduced to the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. The error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed while maintaining the display position, display size, and display mode from before the start of the simultaneous island production even during the execution of the simultaneous island production.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment can perform simultaneous island production. The pachinko machine 100 includes light emitting means (for example, various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 149, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542), a transmission region (for example, a transparent plate member 118), and display means (for example, for example. It is equipped with a decorative symbol display device 208) and is configured to be able to accept a brightness setting operation (hereinafter referred to as "first brightness setting operation") by a player, when the first effect is being performed. In addition, the brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation (for example, the "medium (duty ratio 70%)" brightness set by the player's brightness setting operation. The brightness is set by the player's brightness setting operation. If this is not the case, the light emitting means can emit light at the "brightness (duty ratio 100%)" brightness initially set in the game console, and when the second effect is performed, the first The light emitting means emits light at a brightness not corresponding to one brightness setting operation (for example, the brightness of "bright (duty ratio 100%)" initially set in the game console), and the first effect is the island simultaneous. The second effect is not the effect but the reach effect, the second effect is the island simultaneous effect, and the light emitting means is a means provided above the transmission region. The game console can independently perform the island simultaneous effect, and even if the second effect is performed, the display means displays the brightness of the light emitting means (hereinafter, referred to as "brightness setting display"). ) Can be displayed, and the brightness setting display is a display indicating the brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation, and even if the second effect is performed, the first brightness setting operation is performed. The brightness setting display corresponding to the above is displayed. When the second effect is not performed, the light emitting means can emit light with a brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation. The above-mentioned "brightness not corresponding to the first brightness setting operation" is the maximum value of the brightness that can be set by the first brightness setting operation, and the above-mentioned "first brightness" described above. The "luminance not responding to the setting operation" is the initially set brightness. When the second effect is completed, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light with a brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation. The reach effect is an effect that may be executed when the island simultaneous effect is not being executed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the effect can be sharpened between the execution of the simultaneous island production and the non-execution of the simultaneous island production.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the fourth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 232 to 243.
(I1)
Effect display means capable of executing effect display (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 1030)
It is a game table equipped with
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a symbol variation display (for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol).
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects (for example, normal reach effects and super reach effects).
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means.
One of the plurality of image display means is an image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208).
One of the plurality of image display means is an image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030).
One of the plurality of types of reach effects is the first reach effect (for example, a normal reach effect).
One of the plurality of types of reach effects is a second reach effect (for example, a super reach effect).
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display on which the first reach effect is performed.
In the second reach effect, after the display suggesting a deviation is performed, the first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b) can be performed in the first image display means. Yes,
In the second reach effect, after the display suggesting the deviation is performed, the second wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b) can be performed in the second image display means. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display may be able to renew the mood of the player who is not in the symbol variation display.
(I2)
The game console described in (I1) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
The second wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(I3)
The game console according to (I1) or (I2) above.
At least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is configured to give a look-ahead notice (see, for example, FIG. 234).
A game table characterized by that.
(I4)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I3) above.
The image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) constituting the first image display means and the image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030) constituting the second image display means are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(I5)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I4) above.
In the second reach effect, a plurality of types of symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is erased. It is configured to be redisplayed when the display ends.
The one symbol is configured to change from a first display mode (for example, a reduced display mode) to a second display mode (for example, a normal display mode).
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed.
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(I6)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I5) above.
In the second reach effect, the display of a plurality of characters can be executed.
Display of a plurality of characters One character is a display of the first character (for example, a display of a character of Yoshimune).
The display of the first character is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display. ..
(I7)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above.
The background display (see, for example, FIG. 232) changes before and after the wipe effect display of at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(I8)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I7) above.
A ball storage means (for example, lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls is provided.
The first image display means can display a display notifying that the game ball is pulled out from the ball storage means (for example, a lower plate full tank error notification image) (hereinafter, referred to as "ball removal display").
The ball removal display is a display that overlaps with the first wipe effect display and is displayed.
The ball removal display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the first wipe effect display.
The ball removal display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display.
A game table characterized by that.
(I9)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above.
The first wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the first wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (q) to (v)).
The first wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the first wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (w) to (a)).
The second wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the second wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (s) to (u)).
The second wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the second wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (x) to (z)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I10)
The game console described in (I9) above.
The first wipe display pattern (for example, the wipe display w1a, w1b picture shown in FIG. 235) and the second wipe display picture (for example, the wipe display w2a, w2b picture shown in FIG. 235) are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(I11)
The game console according to (I9) or (I10) above.
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (q) and (s)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I12)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above.
The second image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation.
In the second image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (s) and (t)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I13)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above.
The first image display means is a means capable of performing a moving operation.
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(I14)
The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 13.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp or lighting is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses a game ball enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a ball is enclosed and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine to be used, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed ball as a launching ball. The payout of the ball may be carried out by electronic display.

In addition, the matters described in the above detailed description, particularly the matters described in the examples and modifications shown in the first to fourth embodiments can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of the game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to the slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG. 240.

The game console according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 2002 having a plurality of types of symbols and being rotationally driven, a start lever 2004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel" shown in FIG. 240. Based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the stop button 2006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, the lottery means for determining the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations (winning combination internal lottery), and the lottery result. The combination of the reel stop control means (reel stop control process) that controls the stop related to the stop of the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. A game in which a determination means (winning determination processing) for determining whether or not the combination of symbols is determined in advance and a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning aspect are paid out when the stopping mode of the symbols is a predetermined winning aspect. In addition to the payout control means (medal payout process 2008) that performs the medium payout process, the effect means 2010 that executes the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means, and this effect means puts a ball in a predetermined game area 2012. The launching device 2014 to be launched, the winning opening 2016 configured to allow the ball launched from the launching device to enter, the detecting means 2018 to detect the ball entering the winning opening 2016, and the detecting means 2018 to detect the ball. The payout means 2020 that pays out the ball when the reels are used, the variable display device 2022 that variablely displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and the shutter 2024 that can be moved to a position that shields the variable display device 2022, operate in a predetermined operation mode. The movable body 2026 is provided, and when a game ball enters the winning opening and wins a prize, the variable display device 2022 changes the symbol and then stops the display to produce a game. It is also suitable for the slot machine 2000.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 241 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 3002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 3004 and start 3006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 3008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 3009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 3010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 6000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 4000 in FIG. 6B has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 5000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 6000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 7000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 7000 to the home video game machine 6000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as the recording medium for recording the game program.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The above embodiments can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of displays.
At least one of the plurality of indications is the first indication.
At least one of the plurality of indications is a second indication.
The display means is a display means capable of displaying the first display at least in the first display mode.
The display means is a display means capable of displaying the first display at least in the third display mode.
The display means is a display means capable of displaying the second display at least in the second display mode.
The display means is a display means capable of displaying the second display at least in the fourth display mode.
The first display mode is a display mode different from the third display mode.
The second display mode is different from the fourth display mode.
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
At least one of the plurality of indications is a third indication.
The display means is a display means capable of displaying the third display at least in the fifth display mode.
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The amount of change from the first display mode to the third display mode is the first change amount.
The amount of change from the second display mode to the fourth display mode is the second change amount.
The first change amount is the same change amount as the second change amount.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 3.
At least a part of the first display displayed in the first display mode has at least low visibility when the display means is in the first state.
The first state is a state in which at least the second display is displayed on the display means in the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
In the game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
The first display is a display including at least the first animation display.
The second display is a display including at least the second animation display.
The first animation display is at least different from the second animation display.
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the first animation display even when the display mode of the first display is switched from the first display mode to the third display mode. Yes,
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the second animation display even when the display mode of the second display is switched from the second display mode to the fourth display mode. is there,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
In the game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 5.
The display means is a display means that does not display the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
The display means is a display means that does not display the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means may rotate and display the first image.
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
The game console described in Appendix a1.
The second image may not rotate when the rotation display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
The game console described in Appendix a2.
When the rotation display is performed, the second image does not rotate.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a3.
When the rotation display is performed, an image that has been cut off by the image display means before the rotation display is performed may be displayed on the image display means by performing the rotation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a4.
When the rotation display is performed, the image displayed on the image display means before the rotation display is performed may be cut off by the image display means due to the rotation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a5.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a5.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b1)
Movable body for production and
Image display means and
It is a game table equipped with
When the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means, it may be in the first state of displaying the first image at the first position.
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means.
The first image is an effect image and
When the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means, it may be in a second state in which the first image is displayed at a second position.
The second position is a position different from the back of the movable body for effect in the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
The game console described in Appendix b1.
In the first state, the first image may be displayed straddling the first position and the third position.
The third position is a position different from the back of the movable body for effect in the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b3)
The game console described in Appendix b1 or b2.
The size of the first image in the first state is the first size.
The size of the first image in the second state is the third size.
The third size is smaller than the first size.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b3.
In the first state, the second image may be displayed in the first orientation.
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in the second direction.
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second orientation is a orientation different from the first orientation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b5)
The game console described in Appendix b4.
The size of the second image in the first state is the second size.
The size of the second image in the second state is the fourth size.
The fourth size is smaller than the second size.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b5.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b5.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c1)
An image display unit that can display a production image that directs the game, and
The driving means for driving the image display unit and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means.
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter, referred to as "first period"), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c2)
The game console described in Appendix c1.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.
(Appendix c3)
The game console described in Appendix c1 or c2.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction.
During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction.
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite directions.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c4)
The game console described in Appendix c3.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at the first speed.
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c4.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c6)
The game console described in Appendix c5.
During the first period, the second image is configured to be immobile in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c7)
The game console according to Appendix c5 or c6.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the second image.
(Appendix c8)
The game console described in Appendix c3 or c4.
The phrase "moved by the drive of the drive means" described in Appendix c1 means "rotates by the drive of the drive means".
The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in Appendix c1 means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction centered on the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c9)
The game console described in Appendix c8.
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c7.
The phrase "moving by driving the driving means" described in Appendix c1 means "moving linearly by driving the driving means".
The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in Appendix c1 means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction".
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d1)
It is a game table equipped with a first movable body that can perform a production operation that directs a game.
The game console is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
The first movable body is configured to move from the second position to the first position when the power is turned off.
The first movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position when the power is turned on.
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The effect operation is configured to start at the second position and end at the second position.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d2)
The game console described in Appendix d1.
Even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is located at a position different from the second position, the first movable body is configured to move to the first position. Yes,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d3)
The game console described in Appendix d1 or d2.
The effect operation includes an operation of moving to a third position.
The third position and the first position are different positions,
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d4)
The game console described in Appendix d3.
Equipped with image display means
The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means.
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d5)
The game console described in Appendix d4.
It is possible to perform jackpot operations,
The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means.
When the first movable body is located at the third position, the first movable body may overlap at least a part of the preview image displayed on the image display means.
The preview image is the preview image of the jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d5.
The first movable body can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in Appendix d1 means that “the first movable body starts the initial operation from the first position”. And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation. "
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d5.
The first movable body can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in Appendix d1 means that “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position”. The game console is characterized in that, after moving to, the initial operation is started, and at the end of the initial operation, the player moves to the second position again. "
(Appendix d8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d7.
The "when the power is turned off" described in Appendix d1 means "when the main power of the game console is turned off".
The "when the power is turned on" described in Appendix d1 means "when the main power of the game console is turned on".
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d8.
The first movable body is a movable body capable of changing its posture.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d9.
Equipped with a second movable body that can perform directing movements that direct the game,
The second movable body is a movable body that starts its operation from the position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d10.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d10.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e1)
An image display unit that can display a production image that directs the game, and
The driving means for driving the image display unit and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means.
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter, referred to as "first period"), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e2)
The game console described in Appendix e1
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.
(Appendix e3)
The game console described in Appendix e1 or e2.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction.
During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction.
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite directions.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e4)
The game console described in Appendix e3.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at the first speed.
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e4.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e6)
The game console described in Appendix e5.
During the first period, the second image is configured to be immobile in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e7)
The game console described in Appendix e5 or e6.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the second image.
(Appendix e8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e7.
The phrase "moved by the drive of the drive means" described in Appendix e1 means "rotates by the drive of the drive means".
The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in Appendix e1 means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction centered on the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e9)
The game console described in Appendix e3 or e4.
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e7.
The phrase "moving by driving the driving means" described in Appendix e1 means "moving linearly by driving the driving means".
The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in Appendix e1 means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction".
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f1)
A production movable body that can execute movable movements that produce a game,
Decorative bodies with windows and
It is a game table equipped with
Behind the decoration, the effect movable body may perform an action,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f2)
The game console described in Appendix f1.
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image, and is
It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f3)
The game console described in Appendix f2.
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window portion may change.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f3.
The ornament is operational,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f4.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute variable display of symbols,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f6)
The game console described in Appendix f5.
In the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means, when the player can visually recognize a part of the image in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body. The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitively displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbol than when the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body. It is configured to be
A part of the image in the effect movable body is at least a part of the preview image.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f7)
The game console described in Appendix f5 or f6.
When the operation of the decorative body makes it possible for the player to visually recognize a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body, the decorative body said. The hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested and started as compared with the case where a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body is not visible to the player through the window portion. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbol.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f7.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means can perform a rotation operation and can perform a rotation operation.
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display the first image.
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g2)
The game console described in Appendix g1
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image.
The second image may not rotate when the rotation operation is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g3)
The game console described in Appendix g2.
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image does not rotate.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g3.
When the rotation operation is performed, an image that has been cut off by the image display means before the rotation operation is performed may be displayed on the image display means by performing the rotation operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g4.
When the rotation operation is performed, the image displayed on the image display means before the rotation operation is performed may be cut off by the image display means due to the rotation operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g5.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g5.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h1)
A symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
Image display means that can display images and
The first operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A second operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation waiting display.
The third type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display.
The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means.
The third type of operation response display is a display configured not to include a part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means.
The fourth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means.
The fourth type of operation response display is a display configured to include the part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means.
The fifth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means.
The symbol variation display with the fifth type of operation response display is better than the symbol variation display with the third type of operation response display without the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h2)
The game console described in Appendix h1
Any type of the third type of operation response display and the fourth type of operation response display in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display. Whether or not the display of is displayed is determined before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means.
The third operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the third types of operation waiting displays.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h3)
The game console described in Appendix h1 or h2.
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display.
The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the fourth type of operation waiting display, the fourth type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. ,
The symbol variation display in which the fourth type of operation waiting display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the operation waiting display of the third type is performed without performing the operation waiting display of the fourth type. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h4)
The game console described in Appendix h3.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the first type of operation waiting display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the first type of operation response display.
The first type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means.
The first type of operation response display is a display configured not to include a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first type of operation waiting display, the first type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. ,
The first operation response display is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation waiting display.
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display.
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even if the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display.
The first operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the first type of operation waiting displays.
The first operation response display is an operation response display of one of the first types of operation response displays.
The fourth operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the fourth types of operation waiting displays.
The fourth operation response display is an operation response display of one of the fourth types of operation response displays.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h5)
The game console described in Appendix h4.
The symbol variation display with the fifth type of operation response display is better than the symbol variation display with the first type of operation response display without the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h6)
The game console described in Appendix h4 or h5.
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed is better than the symbol variation display in which the operation response display of the third type is performed without the operation response display of the first type. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h6.
The fourth type of operation response display is the first when the time from the display of the third type of operation waiting display to the operation of the first operation means is the first time. Is a display
When the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means is the second time, the operation response display of the fourth type is the second. Is a display
The second time is longer than the first time,
The display at the beginning of the first display and the display at the beginning of the second display are the same.
The display at the end of the first display and the display at the end of the second display are the same.
At least a part of the display in the middle of the first display is not displayed in the second display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h8)
The game console described in Appendix h7.
When the first operating means is operated from the display of the third type of operation waiting display to the end of the operation valid period defined before the start of the third type of operation waiting display. It is configured so that the display is performed according to the operation of the first operating means.
The first time is the time from the start of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means at the shortest timing.
The second time is a time when the first operating means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the operation waiting display of the third type is started. A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h8.
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display.
The second type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operating means.
When the second type of operation means is operated during the display of the second type of operation waiting display, the second type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. ,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed is better than the symbol variation display in which the second type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h9.
The display of the character displayed on the fourth type of operation response display is configured to be displayed on the fourth type of operation waiting display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h10.
The display of the character displayed on the fourth type of operation response display is configured to be displayed on the third type of operation waiting display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h11.
The second operating means is configured to be determined to have been operated when pressed by the player.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h13)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h12.
The first operating means is configured to be determined to have been operated when rotated by the player.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i1)
It is a game table equipped with an effect display means that can execute the effect display.
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a symbol variation display.
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects.
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The reach effect of one of the plurality of types of reach effects is the first reach effect.
The reach effect of one of the plurality of types of reach effects is the second reach effect.
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display on which the first reach effect is performed.
It is possible to perform the first wipe effect display in the first image display means after the display suggesting the deviation is performed in the second reach effect.
It is possible to perform the second wipe effect display in the second image display means after the display suggesting the deviation is performed in the second reach effect.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i2)
The game console described in Appendix i1
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
The second wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i3)
The game console described in Appendix i1 or i2.
The pre-reading notice is configured by at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i3.
The image display means constituting the first image display means and the image display means constituting the second image display means are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i4.
In the second reach effect, a plurality of types of symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is erased. It is configured to be redisplayed when the display ends.
The one symbol is configured to change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed.
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i5.
In the second reach effect, the display of a plurality of characters can be executed.
Display of Multiple Characters One of the characters is the display of the first character.
The display of the first character is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display. ..
(Appendix i7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i6.
The background display changes before and after the wipe effect display of at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i7.
Equipped with a ball storage means that can store game balls
The first image display means can display a display (hereinafter, referred to as "ball removal display") for notifying that the game ball is pulled out from the ball storage means.
The ball removal display is a display that overlaps with the first wipe effect display and is displayed.
The ball removal display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the first wipe effect display.
The ball removal display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i8.
The first wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the first wipe display.
The first wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the first wipe display.
The second wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the second wipe display.
The second wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the second wipe display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i10)
The game console described in Appendix i9.
The design of the first wipe display and the design of the second wipe display are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i11)
The game console described in Appendix i9 or i10.
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i11.
The second image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation.
In the second image display means performing the movement operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i13)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i12.
The first image display means is a means capable of performing a moving operation.
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i14)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i13.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Next, other ball game machines (including enclosed type) such as the pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. The enclosed type referred to here means an enclosed game machine or the like that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 246 to 279 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 246 to 279, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 246 to 279 are used. In the description using FIG. 279, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 246 to 279 are prioritized.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 246. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 247) by the operation of the player, and the chance button 136 that is built in the chance button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits light, the ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the card unit is instructed to return the player's balance. It includes a return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. Fire at.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. The specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 246, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 248.

FIG. 247 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 246 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 249) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 249) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 249) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 249). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 249) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 249). A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 249) that supplies power to various electrical game devices, and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

FIG. 248 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The effect device 206 will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) here. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of a 7-segment LED here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs here.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and here, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and here, a predetermined number of special figure changing games are held. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur to a high probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when the general winning opening 226 is won). , The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Sometimes called a ball (game ball).

The normal drawing start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and here, 1 is on the left side of the game board 200. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has passed through the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this example, only one first special figure start port 230 is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 247 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

Only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged directly below the first special figure start port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special drawing start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure start port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed (first state) is a difficult state to win. .. On the other hand, when the normal drawing variable game is won and the normal drawing display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special drawing start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the pair of blade members 2321 are open (second state) to easily win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. When the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and only one is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146. And, by the launching mallet 148, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed and launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the central portion of the stage 244 in the first special drawing start port 230. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

The effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 248 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a imitating a human right arm and a forearm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and of an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it.

When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may be able to visually recognize a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice hole, or the shoji portion of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body to be rearward. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 249. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be composed of one circuit board, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is subjected to predetermined control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means). (500))), one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, and the first sub-control unit 400 and the second A single unit including the sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means (for example, a sub-control means).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 has a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, or the like. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined sensor circuit 322. To control the display of a symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210. Drive circuit 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, normal drawing hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) for display control. The drive circuit 330 is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the start port 232 of the second special figure, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. ing.

The random number value generation circuit 318 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derive the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

The random number value generation circuit 318 acquires irregular values by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 is used when the value thus acquired is used as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is also the same. The value in is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 built in the random number value generation circuit 318.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main processing of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 send and receive communication confirmation commands when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both are capable of two-way communication. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. , The first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. The ROM 406 in which is stored is connected.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. It detects that the drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, the operation lever sensor 425 that detects the operation of the operation lever 190, the shield device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shield device 246, and the chance button 136 are pressed. The detection unit 710, the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the operation lever sensor 425, the shielding device sensor 430, and the detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404. It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that reads data or the like, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal to the basic circuit 502 is connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game underframe lamp 542, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door open command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Further, when a payout error occurs, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Regarding the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without going through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. The door opening sensor 609 may transmit a door opening command to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 sends the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may supply the voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the first sub-control unit 400. The launch control unit 630 may supply a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, or at least one of them.

Further, the second sub control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time as the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is set so that a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. You may. The second sub control unit 500 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

At the island facility installed in the game machine installation shop, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V alternating current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 249, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC current of 12V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit to obtain a predetermined voltage (5V). ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted into a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the supply current of 12V drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, in which a DC current of 12 V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Corresponds to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the input 24V alternating current as it is, or converts it into a 36V direct current and outputs it. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current having an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT3141 times out, there are cases where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a programming error or a voltage drop due to a lightning strike or fraudulent activity. In this example, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT3141 as an initial value. The start-up signal from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT3141 are input to the CPU 304 by a common signal line, but they may be input by a dedicated line. The start-up signal output from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT314, which have been described here, correspond to an example of a predetermined start-up signal.

In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power is cut off and immediately recovers, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and WDT3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 resets. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when executing the system reset operation, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Subsequently, the security check process is executed. In the security check process, whether or not the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct is recalculated. If the verification code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a fixed time plus a randomly selected random time. When the extension process is completed, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, even when the user reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 250A to 250C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained. FIG. 250 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of symbol variation display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. After that, a definite display is performed to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec).

Therefore, after starting the "variation display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed and the final display is completed, or after starting "variation display of special figure 2", the special figure The period from the stop display of the stop symbol mode of 2 to the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. In FIG. 250 (a), 10 types of special figures from "special figure 246" to "special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 250 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

"Special Figure 246" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure 247" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special Figure 246" is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special Figure 247" is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "Special Figure 246" and "Special Figure 247" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure 248" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure 248" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure 246" which is 15R. "Special figure 249" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure 249" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure 247" which is 15R.

The "special figure 250" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure 251" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure 250" and "Special Figure 251" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure 252" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure 253" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure 252" and "special figure 253" are in the same state as the "special figure 251", but the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure 253" By providing "252", "Special Figure 253" and "Special Figure 251", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "Special Figure 254" is the first missed symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second missed symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246, a symbol other than "Special Figure 246" is also prepared as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 250 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns here, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... is displayed in each symbol display area of area 208c. Perform "variable display of decorative pattern" to switch. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "Special Figure 247", a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot correspond to the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration") 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure 246", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7") "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure 250", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure 251", or the first small hit of "Special Figure 252", "Special Figure 253" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "Special Figure 248" sudden change or the 2R jackpot called "Special Figure 249" sudden time reduction, "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5" is used. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "Special Figure 254" and the second deviation of "Special Figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 248 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 250 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure, "Public figure 246" which is a hit symbol and "Public figure 247" which is a missed symbol. Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of normal map". Then, "Public Figure 246" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the Floating Figure Fluctuating Game, and "Floating Figure 247" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the Floating Figure Fluctuating Game. Also in FIG. 250 (c), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 251. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 251 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Permission to operate and set initial values. Here, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9v). It monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage is less than. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power supply status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 249 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after the interrupt prohibition is set, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, there are two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter, the normal figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer. Update the two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 252. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every about 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. It starts in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT is periodically (for example, main) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (for example, 32.8 ms) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). (Once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the control unit timer interrupt), restart is performed.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. Here, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 249 stores prize determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined prize determination pattern information (for example, no detection signal before the previous time, presence of the previous detection signal, presence of the current detection signal). When the information matches the above, the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or passes through the normal drawing starting port 228. Judge that there was. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the general winning opening 226 is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number, and the value is obtained as the initial value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308. Although the counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided here, the same counter may be used.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is clocked. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for clocking, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for timing a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the winning ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception processing, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize in the first special drawing starting port 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232, the normal drawing starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When the first special figure start port 230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage of the random number value generation circuit 318 corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. The value is acquired from the register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and the value is acquired from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation. The processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. Only the special figure 1 winning random value, or both the special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value correspond to the start information of the special figure 1. When the second special figure start port 232 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230 of the random number value generation circuit 318. The value is acquired from the value storage register, the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random number value, and the value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number counter for generating the random number value. Then, the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. Only the special figure 2 winning random value, or both the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value correspond to the start information of the special figure 2.

Further, when the winning determination process (step S217) is completed, the look-ahead process is called. In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the previously executed look-ahead processing. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds so far (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt processing, which is called the old hold number), and the CPU 304 stores the number of holds. The number of holds at the time of executing the current look-ahead process after the winning determination process (step S217) is compared with the number of old holds, and it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased. If the number of holds has not increased, this look-ahead process ends without pre-reading the start information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations is increasing, the increase in the special figure 1 winning random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the special figure 2 random value storage area is special. Fig. 2 Pre-read the increase in the winning random number value. As for the look-ahead here, only the increase is read ahead, but all may be read ahead. Note that the lookahead here means that the start information is read before the hit / fail judgment (final lottery), but in the subsequent lookahead processing, the word lookahead is used as the result of the lookahead (win / fail judgment (main lottery)). ) May be used to mean reading.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246 is in a control state of either a special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a big hit is relatively low or a special figure high probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. Being in a special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability change flag. When this probability fluctuation glag is set to on, the special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to off, the special figure low probability state is set.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a table for pre-determining whether or not the result is used in the look-ahead processing. In this pass / fail pre-determination table, a random number range is defined separately for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 winning random number value or the special figure 2 winning random number value is completed, this time, the pre-reading special figure 1 winning random number value or the special figure 2 winning random number value is in any random number range in the winning / failing pre-determination table. Determine if it belongs to. That is, with reference to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, when the pre-read special figure 1 winning random number value or the special figure winning random number value is within a predetermined numerical range, the winning / failing pre-judgment is made. The result is pre-determined as "big hit", and if not, the pre-judgment result is pre-determined as "missing". In the special figure-related processing (step S229, step S231), which will be described later, the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variation game is performed again using the hit / miss judgment table having the same contents as the hit / miss pre-judgment table, and the judgment here. The result is just the result of the preliminary judgment.

Next, the special figure 1 random value in the random value storage area of special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 or the special figure 2 random value in the random value storage area of special figure 2 is pre-read. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure pre-determination table used in the look-ahead processing. The special figure pre-judgment table defines a random number range corresponding to each of the 10 types of stop symbol modes (“Special Figure 246” to “Special Figure J”) shown in FIG. 250 (a), and the read-ahead special figure. Depending on which random number range the figure random number value belongs to, the special figure pre-determination result (which stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 250 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. The determination result of the special figure here is also the result of the preliminary determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure-related processing (step S229, step S231) described later. It should be noted that the special figure pre-judgment result may be obtained only when the hit / fail pre-judgment result is "big hit".

The pre-reading of the start information described above and the pre-judgment using the pre-read start information are executed before the pass / fail judgment (main lottery) of the special figure-related processing (step S229, step S231) described later is performed. Is.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a look-ahead information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a look-ahead information temporary storage unit for special figure 2 which is also divided into areas for each hold. Has been done. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (also referred to as information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as look-ahead information) is stored in the corresponding hold area of the look-ahead information temporary storage unit.

If the number of holds has not increased, the look-ahead information "no hold" is stored in the corresponding hold area of the look-ahead information temporary storage unit. Further, in the pre-reading process here, when the jackpot game is in progress, or when the current control state is the electric support state (the time saving flag is on), the pre-reading or advance of the start information of the special figure 1 is performed. No determination is made, and in these cases, the "undetermined" information indicating that the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the pre-read special figure 1 has not been performed corresponds to the pre-read information temporary storage unit. Store in the reserved area. That is, it is acquired during the big hit game and during the electric support based on the fact that the ball enters the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230 in which the state is a fixed starting area) in which the pair of blade members 2321 is not provided. The preliminary determination based on the start information is not performed, and the preliminary determination result is not notified. By doing so, the fairness of the player is guaranteed. It should be noted that the start information itself may not be pre-read, but the pre-reading may be performed and the pre-judgment and the result notification may not be performed. Further, the pre-reading and the pre-judgment are performed, but the pre-judgment result is notified. It may not be in the form.

Further, although the pre-determination is performed by the main control unit 300 here, it may be performed by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the pre-determination of success / failure may be performed by the main control unit 300, and the pre-determination result of the special figure may be performed by the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-determination of success / failure may also be performed by the first sub-control unit 400. Good.

In step S219, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is the outlier symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (Public diagram 246 shown in FIG. 250 (c)) and the deviated symbol (Public diagram 247 shown in FIG. 250 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for driving the opening / closing of the blade, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the normal figure state is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random number value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal map variable games is stored in the normal map reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal map variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure 246 and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 250 (a) are on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and the normal figure probability change flag is on. Is special figure 247, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure 248, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, normal figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure 249, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure 250, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure Special figure 251 when the probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure 251 when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, special figure 252 when the first small hit flag is on, and special figure 253 when the second small hit flag is on. , The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 so as to be in the special figure 254 when the first missed flag is on and in the special figure 254 when the second missed flag is on. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure 246), a 15R jackpot symbol (special figure 247), a sudden probability change symbol (special figure 248), and a sudden time saving symbol (special figure 248). 249), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure 250), sudden normal symbol (special figure 251), first small hit symbol (special figure 252), second small hit symbol (special figure 253), first missed symbol (special figure 253) 254) and one of the first outliers (special figure J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the variable winning opening 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration. The effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set to 100 times, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, there is a higher possibility of hitting the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special map fluctuation game are shorter in the normal map high probability state than in the normal map low probability state. Further, in the high probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of games will be played in the variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game, and many games will be played in the second special figure starting opening 232 until the game ball enters. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases due to the ball entering the ball and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is different, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the winning / failing determination means. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In this example, the special figure variable game (for example, special figure 2 variable game) having a high advantage is given priority over the special figure variable game (for example, special figure 1 variable game) having a low advantage. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the random number value storage area of the special figure 2. (A set of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) is acquired, and based on the obtained special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308, etc. Using the hit / fail determination table stored in the ROM 306, it is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the random number value storage area of special figure 2. , Special figure 2 Hold number The special figure 2 hold number in the storage area is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the random number value storage area of special figure 2 is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do it. After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. As an example, the special figure 2 variable game with low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and the hold of special figure 1 is held in special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (for example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, door open command, etc. (Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the special figure The value of the probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has won a prize, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has won a prize, and whether or not a variable winning port 234 has won a prize. Including presence / absence.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the values of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game. Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

Further, when the door opening command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the door opening command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The same applies when the door opening command is directly transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 without going through the payout control unit 600. Further, when the main control unit 300 directly receives the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609, when the detection signal is transmitted, the door opening command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S235, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. , When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display are displayed via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 251 is performed. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 251.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 253. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization process, the input / output port is initialized, the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized, and the like.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 is pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. When the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected as a result of the determination here, a process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or pressing the chance button 136. When the operation is valid, a process of preparing the effect data corresponding to the operation reception effect described later is performed.

In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S319, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 (for example, a control command related to the effect movable body 224), a setting to output this control command is set. Then, the process returns to step S303. If a door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the door opening command is set to be output to the second sub control unit in step S321.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with the timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 253 (a). Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, the effect random value value is updated, and the like.

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S601, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Processing of the second sub control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 254. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S701. In this initialization process, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S709, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S713, the process returns to step S703 after performing the movable body control process. In this movable body control process, when a control command related to the effect movable body 224 is received from the first sub-control unit 400, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed to control the operation of the effect movable body 224.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute with.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 254 (a). Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Subsequently, a game board that can be mounted on the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246 instead of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 248 will be described. In the following description, components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

FIG. 255 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 described below as viewed from the front. Hereinafter, the differences from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 248 will be mainly described, and the common matters will be omitted.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 255 is a so-called right-handed game board. In a generally known game board of a right-handed machine, it can be divided into right-handed and left-handed by changing the strength at which the game ball is launched by the operation of the player. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255, the normal drawing start port 228 (gate) and the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) are arranged in the right side area, and the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232 are in the central area. It is located in. The second special drawing start port 232 shown in FIG. 255 is of the attacher type, and the door member 2325 in the closed state (difficult to enter the ball) shown in FIG. 255 rotates toward the front to enter. The ball is in an easy state (open state). With respect to the game area 124, by arranging a game nail or the like, the first area (the left area in the game area) which is a route for entering the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232 is rolled. The game ball to be played is configured to make it difficult or impossible to enter the normal drawing start port 228 (gate) and the variable winning opening 234 (attacker), and conversely, the normal drawing starting port 228 (gate) and the variable winning opening. A game ball that rolls in a second area (the right area in the game area) provided with 234 (attacker) has difficulty or is unable to enter the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232. It is configured to be possible. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board of the right-handed machine, but can be widely applied to the pachinko machine provided with the general game board.

Further, in the lower right portion of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255, a special figure display device 213 which also serves as a first special figure display device and a second special figure display device is provided. The special figure display device 213 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and when a predetermined set of LEDs among the plurality of LEDs is blinking, the special figure 1 is changing, and another LED. When the set is blinking, the special figure 2 is changing, and the result of determining whether the special figure is correct or not is displayed according to various lighting patterns.

Further, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255, a decorative symbol display device 208 which is a liquid crystal display device, a first movable body 260 which is also a liquid crystal display device, and a chance are displayed on the center case 250 shown by a thick line in the figure. The second movable body 270 and the POV display 280, which is a POV (Persistence Of Vision) means, are directly or indirectly attached.

The decorative design display device 208 has a panel 208p which is a display screen and a bezel 208q which is a frame member supporting the panel 208p. The bezel 208q is inevitably required to have a certain width along the edge of the panel 208p for good reasons to support the panel 208p. The decorative pattern display device 208 corresponds to an example of an image display panel. Four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure or the start of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure is suspended, and the number of hold icons displayed is basically that of the special figure variation game. It is the same number as the number on hold. However, before and after the hold digestion, there may be a timing when the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number. The hold icon includes a hold icon of special figure 1 and a hold icon of special figure 2, and both are displayed separately. The area where the hold icon is displayed is predetermined and becomes the hold icon display area 208f. However, the location of the hold icon display area 208f may change depending on the effect mode and the game state (probability change state, etc.). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 255, the hold icon shown on the left side has the older hold icon, and the oldest hold icon is the first hold icon h1 and the second oldest hold icon is the second hold icon. The third oldest hold icon is referred to as the third hold icon h3, and the newest hold icon is referred to as the fourth hold icon h4. Further, the hold icon can give a pre-reading notice as to whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. In FIG. 255, the first hold icon h1 and the fourth hold icon h4 are the default display modes of white circles, and the second hold icon h2 and the third hold icon h3 are the look-ahead notice display modes. .. That is, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is a display mode in which the reliability or expectation of the jackpot is relatively high, and the display mode of the third hold icon h3 is the reliability of the jackpot. It is a display mode of a black circle having a relatively low degree or expectation. The reliability or expectation of the jackpot referred to here is the reliability or expectation of whether or not the jackpot is hit in the symbol variation display started when the hold represented by the hold icon is digested. In addition, animations related to the hold icon may be made. For example, an increase animation that is performed when a hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, the order of the hold changes due to the previous hold being exhausted, and the hold icon is displayed in a different display position (for example, left). Move animation executed when moving to the next position), change animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc., when the hold is digested and the hold icon is deleted. An erase animation to be executed, a save animation to be executed when the hold icon of the special figure on the non-priority side is saved when the hold of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority variable machine may be performed. In addition to the above animation, a standby animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the above animation during execution (for example, a period during which there is no increase / decrease in hold or change in the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the above animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repetitive animation of a fixed length animation) can be given as an example. In addition, each animation of increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting of the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

In addition, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255, the changing icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first hold icon h1. The area where the changing icon h0 is displayed is also predetermined, and becomes the changing icon display area 208e. However, the location of the changing icon display area 208e may change depending on the effect mode and the game state (probability change state, etc.). The changing icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure changing game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure changing game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes the changing icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon h1 having the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the changing icon display area 208e, the moving icon is called the changing icon, or the changing icon moves. Then it may be expressed. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the changing icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a changing icon. The changing icon h0 is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icons h1 to h4 (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the changing icon h0 and the holding icons h1 to h4, but they may have the same size. Further, the changing icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display modes of the hold icons h1 to h4, or may have a display mode completely unrelated to the display mode. The changing icon h0 can give a notice (notice of the change) as to whether or not the change is appropriate depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the changing icon h0 can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure change game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing.

The first movable body 260 also has a panel 260p which is a display screen and a bezel 260b having a certain width. The panel 260p of the first movable body 260 is smaller than the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. Based on this magnitude relationship, the decorative symbol display device 208 is the main liquid crystal unit, and the first movable body 260 is the sub liquid crystal. Although it becomes a unit, both are controlled by the sub-control unit side (for example, the first sub-control unit 400). The first movable body 260 is provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) and on the back side of the frontmost 251 of the center case 250, and is shown in FIG. 255. One movable body 260 overlaps the lower left portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the panel 208p. The position of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255 is the initial position. The first movable body 260 is positioned below the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be lowered to a retracted position (corresponding to an example of the moving position) that does not overlap the panel 208p. The first movable body 260 is visible to the player even in this retracted position. The first movable body 260 can be raised and lowered between the initial position and the retracted position. The mechanism for raising and lowering the first movable body 260 will be described later. The first movable body 260 in the retracted position may be hidden by the frontmost 251 of the center case 250 so as not to be seen in the front view.

The center case 250 is provided with a large window portion 252, and the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is located in the window portion 252. However, the lower right portion of the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the frontmost surface 251 of the center case 250. Further, the left corner portion of the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255 is also hidden by the frontmost surface 251 of the center case 250. The space between the frontmost surface 251 of the center case 250 and the edge of the window portion 252 is transparent.

The second movable body 270 is also provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) and on the back side of the frontmost 251 of the center case 250. The second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255 is partially hidden by the frontmost surface 251 of the center case 250, and the position of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255 is the initial position. The lower edge 271 of the second movable body 270 in the initial position coincides with the upper edge of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 can be lowered to the maximum lowering position (corresponding to an example of the moving position) overlapping a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the second movable body 270 moves up and down between the initial position and the maximum lowering position by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. LEDs are embedded in the second movable body 270, and these LEDs emit light or blink during operation. When the second movable body 270 stops at the maximum lowering position, for example, the LED blinks violently. The initial position of the second movable body 270 may be higher than the initial position of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255, and in such a case, the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255. Is located between its initial position and the maximum descending position.

The first movable body 260 does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may have a configuration like the second movable body 270. On the contrary, the second movable body 270 may be a liquid crystal display device, and both the first movable body 260 and the second movable body 270 may be a liquid crystal display device.

The POV display 280 is also called a versatile lighter, and the POV display 280 is also provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) and behind the front front 251 of the center case 250. Has been done. Further, the POV display 280 is provided behind the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255 is completely hidden by the second movable body 270 in the initial position. The position of the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255 is the initial position of the POV display 280 (a position corresponding to an example of the first position). The initial position may be a position where the entire center case 250 is hidden by the frontmost surface 251. The POV display 280 moves from this initial position to a position on the front side of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the POV display 280 can be moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display on the panel 208p becomes difficult to see.

FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255. FIG. (A) is an external perspective view of the POV display 280 as viewed from the front side (player side), and FIG. 3B is a side view of the POV display 280.

The POV display 280 has an elevating arm 281 and an LED array 282 rotatably attached to the tip of the elevating arm 281. The elevating arm 281 performs an elevating operation by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256A, LEDs 2821 are arranged in a horizontal row, and the posture of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256A is the initial posture. A motor is built in the tip portion 2811 of the elevating arm 281, and the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256A is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the central portion in the left-right direction. The LED array 282 rotates about the central portion when the motor rotates. On the sub-control unit side (first sub-control unit 400 or second sub-control unit 500), for each of the plurality of LEDs 2821 arranged on the rotating LED array 282, each lighting control is performed by a versa Perform based on data. By doing so, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs 2821 are changed during the rotation of the LED array 282, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation locus of each LED 2821, and a pattern is represented.

FIG. 257 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for moving the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255, including the first movable body 260 in the initial position described with reference to FIG. 255. (A) is a view seen from the front side (player side), and FIG. 3B is a perspective view seen from the back side. Further, FIG. 3C is a perspective view seen from the back side including the first movable body 260 in the retracted position.

FIG. 257 shows a screw shaft drive motor 2671, a screw shaft 2672, a guide shaft 2673, an upper base 2674, a lower base 2675, and a drive unit 268.

The screw shaft drive motor 2671 is fixed to the center case 250 shown in FIG. 255, and the screw shaft drive motor 2671 is a motor that rotates the screw shaft 2672 extending in the vertical direction.

The drive unit 268 is provided with a screw shaft nut (not shown) in the vertical direction, and the screw shaft 2672 is screwed into the screw shaft nut and penetrates the drive unit 268 in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 2673 also penetrates the drive unit 268 in the vertical direction.

The upper base 2674 is fixed to a transparent plate provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper base 2674 itself is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 2674 is provided with a sliding bearing for the screw shaft 2672, and the screw shaft 2672 is rotatably passed through the sliding bearing. Further, the upper end of the guide shaft 2673 extending in the vertical direction along with the screw shaft 2672 is fixed to the upper base 2674. Further, the upper base 2674 is provided with a drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a. The drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a projects downward, and the upper surface 268a of the drive unit 268 shown in FIG. 257 (c) comes into contact with the drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a (see FIG. 257 (b)), and the first movable portion is movable. Body 260 stops at the initial position.

The lower base 2675 is fixed to the game board 200. The lower base 2675 is also provided with a sliding bearing for the screw shaft, and the screw shaft 2672 is rotatably passed through the sliding bearing. Further, the lower end of the guide shaft 2673 is fixed to the lower base 2675. Further, the lower base 2675 is provided with a drive unit lower receiving portion 2675a. The drive unit lower receiving portion 2675a protrudes upward, and the lower surface 268b of the drive unit 268 shown in FIG. 257 (b) abuts on the drive unit lower receiving portion 2675a (see FIG. 257 (c)), and the first movable portion is movable. Body 260 stops at the retracted position. The upper limit of the movement range of the first movable body 260 is the position (initial position) where the upper surface 268a of the drive unit 268 abuts on the drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a, and the lower limit is the lower surface 268b of the drive unit 268 as the drive unit. It is a position (retracted position) in contact with the lower receiving portion 2675a.

Further, the first movable body 260 can also perform a rotational operation.

FIG. 257 (d) is a perspective view showing from the back side how the first movable body 260 is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side (player side).

Although not shown, the drive unit 268 includes a rotary drive motor, a driven gear, a slip ring, a movement control means, and the like. The mobile control means is composed of, for example, one or more of a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, a communication control circuit, and the like.

The rotation drive motor allows the first movable body 260 to rotate up to 180 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side (player side). It should be noted that it cannot rotate beyond 180 degrees, and it cannot rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

The horizontally long posture shown in FIG. 257 (c) of the first movable body 260 becomes the initial posture, and when returning to the initial position, the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position after the initial posture.

FIG. 258 is a diagram showing a modified example of the drive unit shown in FIG. 257, and is a diagram for explaining a structure of a so-called slip ring.

FIGS. 258 (a) to 258 (d) show perspective views of the drive unit when the front side (player side) is turned upward. In the example shown in FIG. 257, the rotary drive motor is built in the drive unit 268, but in this modified example, it is built in the back side of the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. The drive unit 268 shown in FIG. 258 has a fixed-side case body 261 arranged so as not to be rotatable, and a rotating-side case body 262 rotatably arranged in the fixed-side case body 261. The fixed side case body 261 is composed of a front side case body 261f and a rear side case body 261r. The fixed-side case body 261 is provided with a fixed-side connector 261c. Further, a rotation shaft fixing hole 262h is provided in the center on the surface of the rotating side case body 262 that is on the front side (player side), that is, on the surface that is on the first movable body 260 side, and is provided on the outside thereof. The rotating side connector 262c is arranged. The rotary shaft rotated by the rotary drive motor built in the first movable body 260 is fixed in the rotary shaft fixing hole 262h, and the rotary side case body 262 rotates together with the first movable body 260. ..

In this modification, the first movable body 260 can rotate in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions to a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, for example, to a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees. Or there is no restriction on the rotation angle.

The state shown in FIG. 258 (a) is a diagram showing the state of the drive unit 26 when the first movable body 260 is in the horizontally long initial posture, and FIG. 258 (b) is a diagram showing the state of the first movable body 260. Is a diagram showing the state of the drive unit 26 when is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the initial posture, and FIG. 3C is a diagram showing the state of the drive unit 26 when the first movable body 260 is further rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction. It is a figure which shows the state of the drive unit 26 when it is rotated 180 degrees from the initial posture, and FIG. 3D is a figure (d) in which the first movable body 260 is further rotated 90 degrees clockwise (270 degrees from the initial posture). It is a figure which shows the state of the drive unit 26 at the time of (rotation). From these figures, it can be seen that the rotating side case body 262 is rotating.

FIG. 258 (e) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the rear side case body 261r constituting the fixed side case body 261, and FIG. 258 (f) is a diagram rotating with the front side case body 261f constituting the fixed side case body 261. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the side case body 262. That is, by combining the edge R of the rear case body 261r shown in FIG. 258 (e) and the inner surface F of the front case body 261f shown in FIG. 258 (f) so as to face each other, FIG. It becomes the drive unit 26 shown in a). The fixed side connector 261c is placed on the edge R of the rear side case body 261r shown in FIG. 258 (e), and when the rear side case body 261r and the front side case body 261f are combined, the fixed side connector 261c is placed. Is sandwiched between the notch grooves 261 g provided in the front case body 261f.

The rear case body 261r shown in FIG. 258 (e) is provided with a rotation shaft insertion hole 261h in the center. A fixed-side substrate 261b connected to the fixed-side connector 261c is arranged outside the rotary shaft insertion hole 261h, and six J-shaped conductive plates 2611 to 2616 are provided on the fixed-side substrate 261b. Have been placed. That is, on the right side, three relatively short conductive plates 2611 to 2613 are arranged side by side in the same direction (the direction in which the letter J is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). Hereinafter, among these three short conductive plates 2611 to 2613, the conductive plate shown at the bottom in FIG. 258 (e) is referred to as a first conductive plate 2611, and the conductive plate on the first conductive plate 2612. The top conductive plate may be referred to as a third conductive plate 2613. Further, on the left side, three relatively long conductive plates 2614 to 2616 are arranged side by side in the same direction (the direction in which the letter J is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction). Hereinafter, among these three long conductive plates 2614 to 2616, the conductive plate shown at the top in FIG. 258 (e) is referred to as a fourth conductive plate 2614, and the conductive plate below the conductive plate is referred to as a fifth conductive plate 2615. The bottom conductive plate may be referred to as a sixth conductive plate 2616. A fastener 261 m, which is a protrusion of the anti-disengagement insulator, is provided in the middle portion of the R portion of each conductive plate 2611 to 2616, and the end portion of the R portion is mainly provided with a protrusion of the anti-rotation insulator. A fastener 261e is provided.

The rotating side case body 262 shown in FIG. 258 (f) is viewed from the opposite side (back side) of the rotating side case body 262 shown in FIG. 258 (a) and the like, and is a circular rotating side case body 262. A hole 262h for fixing the rotating shaft is shown at the center of the above, and an edge 262e of the rotating side case body 262 is shown at the outermost periphery. As is clear from FIG. 258 (f), a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the rotating side case body 262 and the inner peripheral surface of the front side case body 261f. Further, a rotating side substrate 262b is arranged inside the edge 262e of the rotating side case body 262, and six concentric wirings centered on the rotating shaft fixing hole 262h are arranged on the rotating side substrate 262b. Patterns 2621-2626 are formed. Hereinafter, the outermost wiring pattern is referred to as the first wiring pattern 2621, the inner wiring pattern is referred to as the second wiring pattern 2622, the number increases toward the inner side, and the innermost wiring pattern is the sixth wiring. It may be referred to as pattern 2626. The dotted line shown in FIG. 258 (f) represents the rotating side connector 262c (see the figure (a) and the like) provided on the surface to be the front side (player side), and is a rotating side substrate. The 262b is connected to the rotating side connector 262c.

FIG. 258 (g) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 258 (e). As shown in FIG. 258 (g), before the rear side case body 261r and the front side case body 261f are combined, the first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 are separated from each other, and electrical contact is not established. ..

FIG. 258 (g) is a cross-sectional view showing a state after the rear side case body 261r and the front side case body 261f are combined, and the first conductive plate 2611 is elastically deformed and always in contact with the first wiring pattern 2621. Both 2611 and 2621 can be kept in electrical contact with each other regardless of whether they are rotating or stopped.

Here, the combination of the first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 has been described as an example, but the same applies to other combinations such as the second conductive plate 2612 and the second wiring pattern 2621.

The first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 are used for power supply used in a circuit provided on the rotation side (for example, a circuit of the first movable body 260), and the second conductive plate 2612 and the second The wiring pattern 2622 is the same. The third conductive plate 2613 and the third wiring pattern 2623 are used to connect the GND of the rotating side circuit and the GND of the fixed side circuit (for example, the circuit on the game board 200 side), and are used with the fourth conductive plate 2614. The same applies to the fourth wiring pattern 2624. The fifth conductive plate 2615 and the fifth wiring pattern 2625 are used for transmitting various signals transmitted from the fixed side circuit to the rotating side circuit, and the same applies to the sixth conductive plate 2616 and the sixth wiring pattern 2626. is there.

The fixed side, which is the game board 200 side, and the rotating side, which is the first movable body 260 side, are the fixed side connector 261c-fixed side substrate 261b-conductive plate 2611 to 2616-wiring pattern 2621 to 2626-rotating side substrate 262b-. It is electrically connected by the path of the rotating side connector 262c, and can supply power and transmit / receive signals regardless of whether it is rotating or stopped.

Subsequently, a further modification example of the drive unit will be described.

FIG. 259 is a diagram showing a modified example of the drive unit shown in FIG. 258. In this modification, the power supply is exchanged by a so-called slip ring structure, and the signal is transmitted by optical communication. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals as those used so far will be used for the components having the same names as the components of the drive unit described with reference to FIG. 258, and the differences will be mainly described.

FIG. 259 (a) shows a perspective view of the drive unit when the front side (player side) is turned upward. As is clear from FIG. 259 (a), in this modified example, the rotation shaft fixing hole 262h provided at the center of the rotation side case body 262 is eliminated, and the three rotation body connecting shafts 263 are the rotation side case. It is fixed to the body 262. These three rotating body connecting shafts 263 are arranged at the apex of an equilateral triangle whose center of gravity is the center of the rotating body case body 262, and are first by all or a part of the three rotating body connecting shafts 263. The rotational force generated on the movable body 260 side of the above is transmitted to the rotating side case body 262.

FIG. 259 (b) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the rear side case body 261r in this modified example, and FIG. 259 (f) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the front side case body 261f and the rotating side case body 262 in this modified example. It is a figure which shows. In this modification, instead of the rotating shaft insertion hole 261h provided in the center of the rear case body 261r, a fixed side data transmitting / receiving unit 261t by optical communication is provided. Further, of the three relatively long conductive plates 2614 to 2616, the remaining two conductive plates (fifth conductive plate 2615, sixth conductive plate 2616) are left, leaving the fourth conductive plate 2614 which is the uppermost conductive plate. ) Is lost. Further, in this modification, a rotation side data transmission / reception unit 262t by optical communication is provided at the center of the back surface of the rotation side case body 262 instead of the rotation shaft fixing hole 262h. Further, the sixth wiring pattern 2626, which is the innermost wiring pattern, and the fifth wiring pattern 2625 on the outer side thereof are also eliminated in accordance with the conductive plate.

FIG. 259 (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 259 (b). Even in this modified example, the first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring before the rear side case body 261r and the front side case body 261f are combined. It is separated from the pattern 2621, and no electrical contact is established.

FIG. 259 (e) is a cross-sectional view showing a state after the rear side case body 261r and the front side case body 261f are combined. Also in this modified example, the first conductive plate 2611 is elastically deformed and the first wiring pattern 2621 is formed. 2611 and 2621 are always in contact with each other, and both 2611 and 2621 can be kept in electrical contact with each other regardless of whether they are rotating or stopped.

The first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 are used for power supply used in a circuit provided on the rotation side (for example, a circuit of the first movable body 260), and the second conductive plate 2612 and the second The wiring pattern 2622 is the same. The third conductive plate 2613 and the third wiring pattern 2623 are used to connect the GND of the rotating side circuit and the GND of the fixed side circuit (for example, the circuit on the game board 200 side), and are used with the fourth conductive plate 2614. The same applies to the fourth wiring pattern 2624.

The data communication transmitted from the fixed side data transmission / reception unit 261t shown in FIG. 259 (b) and received by the rotation side data transmission / reception unit 262t shown in FIG. 259 (c) is optical communication (optical wireless communication). The optical communication (optical wireless communication) here is communication using laser light, but may be communication using LED light. Further, the data communication here is communication of various signals (for example, image data or RGB information of each dot). When an image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) and a microcomputer for controlling the image control means are mounted on the rotating side (first movable body 260 side), the secondary control means on the fixed side (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) For example, from the first sub-control unit 400 or the effect control means), the effect command (command for specifying the effect, the progress of the effect, the still image, the moving image, the progress of the image display scenario, etc.) to the microcomputer is transmitted to the above-mentioned various signals. May be sent as. Further, when a microcomputer for controlling an image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) is not mounted on the rotation side, and the above image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) is mounted, the fixed side is mounted. Various image commands (commands for designating still images, moving images, progress of image display scenarios, etc.) for the image control means provided on the rotating side from a microcomputer for controlling the image control means provided in It may be transmitted as a signal. Further, the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) and the microcomputer are not mounted on the rotation side, but are mounted on the fixed side, and the image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means, etc.) are mounted on the rotation side. In that case, the image data is transmitted from the image control means provided on the fixed side to the image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means, etc.) on the rotation side as the various signals. For example, it may be transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second.

Both the fixed side data transmission / reception unit 261t and the rotation side data transmission / reception unit 262t may be capable of transmitting / receiving data. Further, radio wave communication may be used instead of optical communication.

When both the fixed side data transmission / reception unit 261t and the rotation side data transmission / reception unit 262t are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the fixed side data transmission / reception unit 261t to the rotation side data transmission / reception unit 262t is as described above. However, for the rotating side data transmission / reception unit 262t to the fixed side data transmission / reception unit 261t, control means or the like provided in the rotation side circuit (the image control means, the microcomputer, the image driving means (liquid crystal driving means), etc.) ACK signal, status signal, and information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (here, the first movable body 260) (for example, when a sensor provided on the rotating side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side). The output detection signal, the output signal of the encoder provided on the rotating side, etc.) may be transmitted.

FIG. 259 (f) is a diagram showing an example in which the number of rotating body connecting shafts 263 shown in FIG. 259 (a) is one. In FIG. 259 (f), one rotating body connecting shaft 263 is fixed to the center of the rotating side case body 262, and the rotating side data transmitting / receiving unit 262t shown in FIG. 259 (c) is provided on the back side thereof. Has been done.

FIG. 259 (g) is a diagram showing an example in which the number of rotating body connecting shafts 263 shown in FIG. 259 (a) is two. In FIG. 259 (g), the two rotating body connecting shafts 263 are fixed at positions facing each other 180 degrees equidistant from the center of the rotating body case body 262.

Subsequently, one of the features of the present invention will be described.

FIG. 260 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in a pachinko machine equipped with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255. In this figure, the process proceeds from (a) to (z), followed by (z), and then from (a) to (g). FIG. 260 shows a decorative symbol display device 208 that becomes the main liquid crystal unit, a first movable body 260 that becomes a sub liquid crystal unit, a second movable body 270 that is displayed as a chance, and a POV display 280. .. The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 260 is that an image is displayed on the POV display 280 as a look-ahead notice, a confrontation animation is performed on the POV display 280 when the symbol is subject to the look-ahead notice, and the character of the main character (lord) is finally. Win and win big. It becomes something like. The details will be described below.

In FIG. 260A, the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position behind the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is invisible to the player. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (a), a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed on an empty background image. Further, four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and this state is a state in which four holds of special figure 2 are accumulated. It should be noted that this state may be a state in which four reservations of the special figure 1 are accumulated. Of the four hold icons, only the second hold icon h2 is not the default display mode but the black diamond-shaped look-ahead notice display mode. In this black diamond-shaped look-ahead notice display mode, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that of the black circle look-ahead notice display mode in the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 255, and the “heat” in the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. It is a display mode lower than the display mode of the look-ahead notice described as ". Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 260 (a).

In FIG. 260 (b), one hold is exhausted, the special figure display device 213 shown in FIG. 255 starts the variable display of the special figure, and the decorative symbol display device 208 responds to the start of the variable display of the special figure. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (b), the first hold icon h1 moved to the changing icon display area is displayed as the changing icon h0, and the remaining hold icons are moved one by one to the left. .. As a result, the first hold icon h1 has a black diamond-shaped look-ahead notice display mode.

In FIG. 260 (c), the first movable body 260 has moved to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a reach state. Also, the POV display 280 begins preparing for operation. The preparation for the operation referred to here is a mechanism in which the elevating arm 281 shown in FIG. 256 meshes with the pinion gear of the rack and pinion mechanism for elevating the elevating arm 281 and further, the elevating arm 281 starts descending. Preparations, lottery as to whether or not the sub-control unit (first sub-control unit 400 or second sub-control unit 500) operates the POV display 280, or the production data for controlling the POV display 280. It may be a programmatic preparation for performing a selection lottery or reading the production data. Further, the preparation for the operation may be started in response to the start of the operation in which the first movable body 260 moves to the retracted position, or in response to the arrival of the first movable body 260 in the retracted position. It may be started, or it may be started in response to the development of the reach state by the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 260 (d), the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and the combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state also disappears. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (d), the changing icon h0 and the three hold icons are displayed on the unpatterned background. Further, the background image disappears even in the first movable body 260 that has moved to the retracted position, and the combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed on the first movable body 260. The combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state can be seen as being retracted from the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the main liquid crystal unit, to the first movable body 260, which is the sub liquid crystal unit. The POV display 280 is preparing for operation even at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (d).

In FIG. 260 (e), the POV display 280 appears from the back side of the second movable body 270. That is, the LED array 282 that maintains the horizontal posture, which is the initial posture, together with the elevating arm 281 descends to the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, although the plurality of LEDs arranged in a horizontal row on the LED array 282 are lit, they may be blinking or may be extinguished. When the LED is lit or blinking, the appearance of the LED array 282 is appealed, while when the LED is left off, the appearance of the LED array 282 is still hidden.

In FIG. 260 (f), the POV display 280 continues to descend, and in FIG. 260 (g), the LED array 282 reaches the operation start position (corresponding to the third position, hereinafter the same). The operation start position here is exactly the center position of the panel 208p in the decorative symbol display device 208. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array 282 may start lighting or blinking when the LED array 282 reaches the operation start position, or may continue lighting or blinking from the time when the LED array 282 appears. However, the light may remain off even when the operation start position is reached.

In FIG. 260 (h), the LED array 282 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction at the operation start position, and in FIG. 260 (i), the LED array 282 is in the process of accelerating the rotation. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array 282 may start lighting or blinking when the LED array 282 starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps all or a part of the changing icon h0 and the hold icon. That is, as shown in FIG. 260 (i), the entire changing icon h0 overlaps the rotation area s of the LED array 282, and a part of the first hold icon h1 also overlaps the rotation area s of the LED array 282. There is. It should be noted that the hold icons after the second hold icon h2 do not overlap.

In FIG. 260 (j), the LED array 282 finishes the acceleration rotation and shifts to the constant speed rotation. The LED array 282 can display a pattern due to the afterimage effect when the LED array 282 shifts to constant speed rotation, but the pattern is not yet displayed at the timing of FIG. 260 (j). The pattern due to the afterimage effect may be displayed at the same time as the constant speed rotation is reached, or the pattern due to the afterimage effect can be displayed before the constant speed rotation is reached, and the pattern is displayed before the constant speed rotation is reached. You may.

On the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 (k), the display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is started. At this timing, the first movable body 260 may operate, or the second movable body 270 may operate.

In FIG. 260 (l), a lost stop symbol (lighting pattern) is displayed on the special figure display device 213 shown in FIG. 255, and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 is displayed according to the display of the stop symbol of the special figure. A combination of lost decorative patterns ("decoration 3"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 3") is displayed.

In FIG. 260 (m), the hold represented by the first hold icon h1, which has been the display mode of the black diamond-shaped look-ahead notice, is digested, and the special figure display device 213 shown in FIG. 255 starts the variable display of the special figure. In response to the start of the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. That is, the symbol variation display that was the target of the pre-reading notice is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (m), although it is difficult to see due to the rotating LED array 282, the first hold icon h1, which has been the display mode of the black diamond-shaped look-ahead notice, is changed to the black diamond-shaped notice. It is displayed as the changing icon h0 of the mode, and the remaining hold icons are moved one by one to the left. That is, the variable display of the special figure (variable display of the decorative symbol) started in FIG. 260 (m) has been executed by changing the display mode of the hold icon to the pre-reading notice display mode. It is a variable display of the target. The black diamond-shaped notice mode, which is the display mode of the changing icon h0 here, is a display mode for notifying a big hit in the current symbol change display started here. Further, in this example, the rotation region s of the LED array 282, that is, the display on the POV display 280 (display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role) is continued across the symbol variation display.

In FIG. 260 (n), a combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, and in FIG. 260 (o), the second movable body 270 which has been in the initial position so far is displayed. It descends to the maximum descending position, overlaps a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and also overlaps with the rotating LED array 282, and the display of the character k of the samurai character of the enemy role displayed on the POV display 280 is displayed. Only part of it is visible. When the second movable body 270 descends to the maximum descending position, it immediately returns to the initial position, and the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 260 (p) returns to the initial position. As a result, the display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role, which is displayed on the POV display 280, can be visually recognized again.

In FIG. 260 (q), the LED array 282 that was rotating at the operation start position is further lowered, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps the lower end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 260 (q), all of the changing icon h0 and the holding icon are erased in a state where all of the changing icon h0 and the holding icon overlap with the rotation area s of the LED array 282. That is, when the LED array 282 starts moving from the operation start position (first operation position) to the second operation position different from the initial position, all of the changing icon h0 and the hold icon are erased. .. However, only the changing icon h0 may be deleted, only the hold icon may be deleted, or neither the changing icon h0 nor the hold icon may be deleted. Further, the rotation region s of the LED array 282 also overlaps a part including the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260.

The movement of the POV display 280 (LED array 282 that rotates at a constant speed) displaying the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role may be performed whenever the POV display 280 displays the pattern, or the POV display 280. It may be performed whenever the LED is rotating at a constant speed even if the pattern is not displayed, or it may be performed only when the POV display 280 displays a predetermined pattern. However, it may or may not be performed according to the selection lottery result for the production of the sub-control unit side (first sub-control unit 400 or second sub-control unit 500).

FIG. 261 (a) is an enlarged view of FIG. 260 (q), and FIG. 261 (b) is a diagram showing a display area by hatching.

The rotating region s of the LED array 282 also overlaps the lower end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part including the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260, thereby passing through the POV display 280. It seems that the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 are connected, and the three parties (280, 208p, 260p) have different arrangements in the front-rear direction (depth direction). It becomes integrated (see the display area shown by hatching in FIG. 261 (b)), and it seems that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has been expanded, and the display area of the POV display 280 has been expanded. , It seems that the display area of the first movable body 260 has been expanded. As described above, the appearance that the display is performed even in the places where the display is not originally performed, such as the bezels 208q and 260b, can give a great visual effect to the player.

Here, since the upper edge 260bu of the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260 coincides with the lower edge 208pd of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first The panels 260p of the movable body 260 are separated by the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260, but the rotation regions s of the LED array 282 connect the two 208p and 260p. Further, even if the first movable body 260 is located slightly below, both 208p and 260p are connected and integrated by the rotation region s of the LED array 282.

Further, the bangs portion k1 of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is displayed on the panel p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion k2 is displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. That is, the picture k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is displayed straddling the POV display 280, the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. By doing so, the sense of unity of the display areas of the three parties (280, 208p, 260p) is further increased. Moreover, when viewed in the front-rear direction (depth direction), the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is on the innermost side, the POV display 280 is on the foremost side, and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 is in between. There is a gap in the depth direction between these three (208p, 280, 260p), so the bangs k1 can be seen on the back side and the foot part k2 can be seen on the back side, which is just three-dimensional. It can give a sense of depth that is incomparable to the picture display.

The display position (center position of the rotation area s) of the villain character's pattern k on the POV display 280 (rotation area s of the LED array 282) shown in FIG. 260 (p) and the POV shown in FIG. The display position (the position closer to the left end of the rotation area s) of the villain's character in the display 280 (rotation area s of the LED array 282) is different from the display position, and the pattern k is in the rotation area s. Looks like it has moved. That is, the moving display of the pattern is performed.

In FIG. 260 (r), the LED array 282 rises diagonally upward to the left and then starts horizontal movement. The rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (r) overlaps the left end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. On the POV display 280, the display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is started in FIG. 260 (k) and has been continued since then, and the pattern k remains displayed in FIG. 260 (r). , The LED array 282 moves. Further, in the portion of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (r) on the rear side of the rotating LED array 282, the display of the character pattern t of the main character's lord is started, but it rotates. The LED arrays 282 overlap and are difficult to see.

In FIG. 260 (s), as the LED array 282 moves to the right, a part of the display of the character t of the main character, which was displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208, has begun to be seen. .. That is, in FIG. 260 (s), the rotation region s of the LED array 282 overlaps a part of the pattern t of the character of the lord displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 260 (t), as the LED array 282 further moves to the right, the entire display of the character pattern t of the main character's lord appears on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. The pattern t of the character of this lord corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern t corresponds to an example of the first effect display. It should be noted that only a part of the character t of the lord may correspond to an example of the first pattern. Alternatively, on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, in addition to the pattern t of the character of the lord, another pattern (for example, a horse pattern, a character pattern of a game, etc.) may be displayed. It may be used as an example of the first production display including the "picture of". The rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (t) overlaps the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the POV display 280 moves until it exceeds the display area (area of the panel 208p) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and by overlapping with the right end of the bezel 208q, the panel 208p and the POV of the decorative symbol display device 208 It seems that the displays 280 are connected, and the two (280, 208p) are integrated, although there is a difference in the arrangement in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 seems to be expanded to the right. Looks like.

In FIG. 260 (u), the LED array 282 further moves downward, and the rotation region s of the LED array 282 overlaps not only the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208 but also the lower end portion. .. As a result, the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 appears to be expanded not only on the right side but also on the lower side. From FIG. 260 (r) to FIG. (U), the display position of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role on the moving POV display 280 (rotation area s of the LED array 282) is the center position of the rotation area s. Matches with. However, since the POV display 280 (rotational region s of the LED array 282) itself is moving, it seems that the pattern k is also moving. That is, the moving display of the pattern is performed.

In FIG. 260 (v), the display of the character design t of the lord, which was displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208, moves toward the right side. Then, a part of the display of the character pattern t of the lord (here, the toes of the right foot, etc.), which was previously displayed only on the panel 208p, is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282. become. That is, the display of the character design t of the lord is displayed across both the decorative design display device 208 and the POV display 280. As described above, the rotating region s of the LED array 282 overlaps the right end and the lower end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 expands to the lower side in addition to the right side. Since it looks like this, the display of the character pattern t of the lord, which is displayed straddling both (208, 280), seems to be integrated, but between the two (208, 280), the front-back direction ( Since there is a difference (distance) in the arrangement in the depth direction), it is possible to give a sense of depth to the display of the character pattern t of the lord as compared with the case of a simple three-dimensional pattern display. That is, since the POV display 280 is arranged in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, it seems that the character of the lord is moving diagonally forward to the right, and the player gradually moves the character of the lord. I feel like I'm getting closer to.

In FIG. 260 (w), a confrontation animation between the character of the lord and the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is displayed. Here, the display of the character t of the lord has not completely moved to the POV display 280, and the toes and the like of the left foot are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 (w), the character of the samurai who plays the role of the enemy is lying down, and the pattern t of the character of the lord displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280 seems to have won. It is displayed. Further, in the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot (here, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2") is matched with the victory of the character's pattern t. The shaking display (temporary stop display) is started.

In FIG. 260 (x), the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is completely moved to the POV display 280, and the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed on the POV display 280. The entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed on the left side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282. In addition, the display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role has disappeared.

In FIG. 260 (y), the LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position at the upper left, and the rotation region s of the LED array 282 moves. That is, the POV display 280, which displays the entire display of the character t of the lord, starts moving toward the upper left. At this time, the relative display position of the pattern t of the character of the lord in the left-right direction is displayed so as not to change. That is, in FIG. 260 (y), the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed on the right side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 moves toward the upper left. On the other hand, the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord displayed in the rotation area s is displayed so as to move to the right side. On the other hand, the relative display position of the display of the character t of the lord has changed in the vertical direction, and the entire display of the character t of the lord has moved in the upper left direction of the rotation area s of the LED array 282. At the same time, it is displayed to move upward. The relative display position of the display of the character t of the lord in the vertical direction may also be displayed so as not to change. In this case, the entire display of the character t of the lord is displayed on the LED array 282. Although it is moving in the rotation region s, it is perceived by the player as being relatively completely stationary.

The display of the pattern t of the character of a part or all of the lords displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to 260 (y) corresponds to an example of the second effect display. .. In addition to the character pattern t of the lord, other patterns (for example, a horse pattern, a character pattern of a game, etc.) may be displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282. It may be used as an example of the second effect display including the "picture".

In FIG. 260 (z), the LED array 282 stops moving, the rotation slows down at the operation start position, and the display of the character pattern t of the lord disappears from the POV display 280. However, at the position behind the rotation region s of the LED array 282 at the operation start position on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, the same pattern as the character pattern t of the character (Den-sama) previously displayed on the POV display 280 is used. The display of the pattern in which the characters in the same pose) is started. It should be noted that, from the stage in FIG. 260 (v) where a part of the display of the character t of the lord is applied to the POV display 280, the same display of the portion applied to the POV display 280 may be started at the back side position. Then, from the stage where the entire display of the character t of the lord has moved to the POV display 280 in FIG. 260 (x), the same display of the entire display may be started at the back side position.

In FIG. 260 (a), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture, and the display of the character pattern t of the character t displayed at the back side position is visible. In the same figure (b), the LED array is displayed. The 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. When the LED array 282 starts to rise toward the initial position, all the displays of the changing icon h0 and the hold icon, which have disappeared so far, are restored. In addition, these displays may be restored in response to the rotation of the LED array 282 being stopped. The changing icon h0 whose display has been restored here is a notice mode of a black rhombus. In FIG. 260 (c), the POV display 280 has returned to the initial position. It should be noted that the shaking display (provisional) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 started in FIG. (Stop display) continues up to this stage.

In FIG. 260 (d), the decorative symbol previously displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 returns to the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a big hit. The combination of decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) is displayed as a shake (temporary stop display). Further, along with this return, the background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 also returns to the sky background image, and the background image of the first movable body 260 also returns to the sea background image. Although the decorative symbol is not displayed on the first movable body 260, the decorative symbol may be displayed together with the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 260 (e), the first movable body 260, which has been in the retracted position, returns to the initial position. In the special figure display device 213 shown in FIG. 255, the variation display of the special figure is completed, the stop symbol (lighting pattern) of the big hit is displayed, and it is shown in the same figure (f) according to the display of the stop symbol of the special figure. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) is completed, and the final display (stop display) is reached. That is, the variable display of the advance notice target of the look-ahead notice ends, and the jackpot symbol is displayed. Then, in FIG. 260 (G), the characters of the big hit notifying the big hit are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a pattern of a dedicated character that appears when it develops into super reach, a pattern of a character that appears during a big hit game, and the like, and these patterns are examples of the second pattern. Equivalent to.

In the example shown in FIG. 260 described above, the rotation region s of the LED array 282, that is, the pattern is displayed on the POV display 280, and the pattern is displayed on the POV display 280 may be hereinafter referred to as a versa notice. .. Even if it is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation when this versa notice is executed during the execution of the symbol variation than when it is not executed. Good. That is, the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot becomes high (hereinafter, the same applies), and when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this versa notice is executed, the symbol fluctuation is started. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed, or the missed symbol mode is always fixedly displayed in the symbol change in which the versa notice is not executed. You may. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when this versa notice is executed, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, when the POV display 280 appears as shown in FIG. 260 (e) during the execution of the symbol variation, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation than when the POV display 280 does not appear. It may be configured so that it is easy to perform, and when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time of the appearance of the POV display 280 is started, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed. It may be configured so that the POV display 280 does not appear, and the out-of-order symbol mode is always definitively displayed in the symbol variation in which the POV display 280 does not appear. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time of the appearance of the POV display 280 is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured.

Further, when the second movable body 270 operates as shown in FIG. 260 (o) during the execution of the symbol variation, the jackpot symbol mode is finally determined in the symbol variation than when it does not operate. It may be configured so as to be easily displayed, or when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the second movable body 270 is operated is started, the jackpot symbol mode is finally set. May be configured to be confirmed and displayed, or may be configured so that the finally missed symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed when the second movable body 270 does not operate. .. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when the second movable body 270 operates is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 260 (q), when the POV display 280 displaying the pattern moves during the execution of the symbol variation, the final big hit in the symbol variation is greater than when the POV display 280 does not move. The symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily fixedly displayed, or any of the symbol fluctuations held when the POV display 280 displaying the symbol starts moving is started. In such a case, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be finally fixedly displayed, or the POV display 280 displaying the symbol may be configured so that the final missed symbol mode is always displayed when the POV display 280 does not move. It may be configured to be fixedly displayed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the POV display 280 displaying the symbol starts moving, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. , May be configured. The greater the amount of movement of the POV display 280, the higher the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot may be.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to 260 (w), when the display of the design t is displayed across both the decorative design display device 208 and the POV display 280 during the execution of the design variation. However, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation as compared with the case where it is not displayed straddling, and the display of the symbol t is displayed straddling both 208 and 280. When any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time of the start is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the symbol t may be configured. In the case of a symbol variation in which the display is not displayed over both 208 and 280, the finally out-of-order symbol mode may be configured to be fixedly displayed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when the display of the symbol t is started to be displayed over 208 and 280, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to be easy or sometimes done.

Further, even if the confrontation animation is displayed during the execution of the symbol change, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol change than when the confrontation animation is not displayed. It is configured so that when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the display of the confrontation animation is started, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the missed symbol mode is always fixedly displayed in the symbol variation in which the confrontation animation is not displayed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when the display of the confrontation animation is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, it is configured so that when the character of the main character's lord wins in the confrontation animation during the execution of the symbol change, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol change than when the character is defeated. It may be, or when the symbol variation of any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the display of the confrontation animation in which the character of the main character wins is started is started, the final jackpot symbol mode May be configured to be fixedly displayed, or the out-of-order symbolic mode is always fixedly displayed in the symbol variation in which the confrontation animation in which the character of the main character wins is not displayed. You may be. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the display of the confrontation animation in which the character of the main character wins is started is started, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to be easy or sometimes done.

Further, during the execution of the symbol variation, as shown in FIGS. 260 (a) to (c), the symbol t of the character of the lord is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 even if it disappears from the POV display 280. In the case, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation as compared with the case where it is not displayed, and the symbol t is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be configured so that when any of the symbol fluctuations held at that time is started, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed, or the symbol t may be displayed. In the case of a symbol variation that is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode may be finally fixedly displayed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when the symbol t is started to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. , May be configured.

FIG. 262 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 260. In this figure, the process proceeds from (a) to (t). FIG. 262 also shows a decorative symbol display device 208 that becomes the main liquid crystal unit, a first movable body 260 that becomes a sub liquid crystal unit, a second movable body 270 that is displayed as a chance, and a POV display 280. .. The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 262 is that the character of the main character (lord) appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a notice in the variable display currently being performed, moves to the POV display 280, and makes a big hit. It becomes something like. The details will be described below.

In FIG. 262 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position behind the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is invisible to the player. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a combination of lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed on an empty background image. In this example, neither the hold icon nor the changing icon is displayed, but it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 260. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260. Hereinafter, the description up to FIG. 262 (j) will be omitted because it is the same as that of FIG. 260 (j).

In FIG. 262 (k), the LED array 282 rotating at a constant speed at the operation start position does not start displaying the pattern of the samurai character as the enemy, and the LED array 282 moves from the operation start position to the right side. Starting, the rotation region s of the LED array 282 overlaps the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 262 (l), the display of the character pattern t of the main character (lord) is started on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 208. The pattern t of the character of this lord corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern t corresponds to an example of the first effect display. After that, the pattern t of the character of the lord approaches the rotation area s of the LED array 282, which has moved to the right. Nothing is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 262 (l). In FIG. 262 (m), a part (here, the left half) of the display of the character t of the lord is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the remaining part (here, the right half) is displayed on the POV display 280. Has been done. That is, the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed straddling the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280. In FIG. 262 (n), the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is completely moved to the POV display 280, and the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is moved to the right in the center of the rotation area s of the LED array 282. It is displayed in. The display of the pattern t of a part or all of the lord's character displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 262 (m) to 262 (n) corresponds to an example of the second effect display. .. Contrary to this example, the display of the character pattern of the main character (lord) is started on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 is displayed on the display of the character pattern of the main character (lord). As we approached, the right part of the display of the character t of the lord was displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the left part was displayed on the POV display 280, and then the entire display of the character t of the lord was displayed. , It may be displayed in the center of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 moved to the right side.

In FIG. 262 (o), the rotating LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position. In the center of the rotation area s of the moving LED array 282, the pattern t of the character of the lord continues to be displayed. In FIG. 262 (p), the LED array 282 returns to the operation start position, and in response to this, in the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, a combination of jackpot decorative symbols (here, “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”). "-" Decoration 3 ") shaking display (temporary stop display) is started.

In FIG. 262 (q), the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated at the operation start position, and the display of the character pattern t of the lord disappears from the POV display 280. In FIG. 262 (r), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture. In addition, unlike the example shown in FIG. 260, the same pattern as the pattern t of the character of the lord, which has been displayed on the POV display 280, is not displayed at the position on the back side of the rotation region s of the LED array 282. In FIG. 262 (s), the LED array 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. It should be noted that, in the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, which was started in FIG. 262 (p), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) is swayed (provisionally). Stop display) is continuing. The shaking display may be continued until the LED array 282 returns to the initial position, or may be continued only until the LED array 282 starts the ascending operation.

In FIG. 262 (t), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. Further, the first movable body 260, which has been in the retracted position, returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable body 260 returns to the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the decorative symbol. In the device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is returned to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is returned to the sea background image.

It should be noted that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the example of FIG. 262 (“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) and the jackpot decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the example of FIG. 261 Comparing the combinations (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the example in FIG. 262 is more advantageous than the jackpot decorative symbol combination. .. That is, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols in FIG. 260 is a combination of jackpot decorative symbols without probability variation, whereas the combination of jackpot decorative symbols in FIG. 262 is a combination of jackpot decorative symbols with probability variation. Alternatively, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols in FIG. 262 may have a larger number of rounds in the jackpot game. On the contrary, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols in FIG. 260 may be a more advantageous jackpot than the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols in FIG. 262.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a button notice following from FIG. 262 (k).

FIG. 263 (l') is a state continuing from FIG. 262 (k). The rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlapping the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (l') includes the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 262 (l). As with, nothing is displayed. However, in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (l'), the pattern 136'of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 246 is displayed as a dotted line. This indicates that the pattern 136'of the chance button 136 is displayed on the back side portion of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The displayed pattern 136'of this chance button 136 is difficult to see. The pattern 136'of the chance button displayed on the back side portion of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern 136'is It corresponds to an example of the first effect display.

In the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (l') following FIG. 263 (l'), the chance button pattern 136'is displayed as a solid line. This indicates that the pattern 136'of the chance button is displayed in the rotation area s of the POV display 280, that is, the LED array 282. The design of the chance button is also displayed on the back side portion of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (m'). That is, the pattern 136'of the chance button is displayed on the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern display device 208 at positions that coincide with each other.

In FIG. 263 (n'), the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 has not changed, but the chance button pattern 136'is moving to the left, and the right half of the chance button pattern 136'is It is displayed on the POV display 280, and the left half thereof is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, an animation in which the chance button picture 136'goes out of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 is displayed, and in FIG. 263 (n'), the chance button picture 136' is displayed on the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern. It is displayed across the device 208. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the entire pattern 136'of the chance button, and the right half displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps the right half thereof.

The display of a part or all of the chance button pattern 136'displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 263 (m') to FIG. 263 (n') is an example of the second effect display. Correspondingly, in this example, in FIGS. 263 (m') to (n'), the first effect display (display of the pattern 136'of the decorative pattern display device 208) and the second effect display (POV display 280). The display of the pattern 136') is configured to be performed together.

In FIG. 263 (o'), the pattern 136'of the chance button completely escapes from the rotation region s of the LED array 282 and is displayed only on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the POV display 280 and the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (p'), a symbol (a character symbol "press" and a downward arrow pattern) that prompts the operation of the chance button 136 is added to the chance button symbol 136'. ing. The display of the pattern 136'of the chance button and the display of the pattern prompting the operation of the chance button 136 corresponds to an example of the first effect display. Also, as for the actual chance button 136, the built-in chance button lamp 138 emits light, and the word "push" emerges. On the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 263 (p'), a combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed.

In FIG. 263 (q'), the chance button 136 is pressed down. When the chance button 136 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 263 (r'), the chance button symbol 136'and the symbol urging the operation disappear from the decorative symbol display device 208, and the POV display 280 has a “big hit”. The character pattern is displayed. Further, in the first movable body 260, the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is started.

In FIG. 263 (s'), the rotating LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position. In the rotating area s of the moving LED array 282, the character pattern of the big hit continues to be displayed. In FIG. 263 (t'), the LED array 282 returns to the operation start position, the rotation of the LED array 282 slows down at the operation start position, and the display of the jackpot character pattern disappears from the POV display 280. In FIG. 263 (u'), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture, and in FIG. 263 (v'), the LED array 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. There is. It should be noted that the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, which was started in FIG. 263 (r'), continues.

In FIG. 263 (w'), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. Further, the first movable body 260, which has been in the retracted position, returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable body 260 returns to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is restored. On the display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is confirmed and displayed (stop display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is returned to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is returned to the sea background image.

Even if the button notice described above is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation when it is performed during the execution of the symbol variation than when it is not performed. It is also configured so that when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this button notice is executed, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the missed symbol mode is always fixedly displayed in the symbol change in which the button notice is not executed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this button notice is executed is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in.

FIG. 264 is a diagram stepwise showing another example following from FIG. 262 (g).

FIG. 264 (h') shows a state continuing from FIG. 262 (g) when the LED array 282 reaches the operation start position. In FIG. 264 (h'), the LED array 282 does not start rotating and starts ascending from the operation start position while maintaining the initial posture, and in FIG. 264 (i'), the LED array 282 reaches the initial position. are doing. Further, the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable body 260 is returned to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of lost decorative symbols (here, "decoration 3"-"decoration 2". "-" Decoration 3 ") is confirmed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is returned to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is returned to the sea background image. In this example, although the LED array 282 has descended to the operation start position, the rotation does not start, the display is not displayed on the POV display 280, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. That is, it is an example that the Versa notice is not actually started even if the Versa notice is expected to be started.

When the LED array 282 starts rotating as shown in FIG. 260 (h) during the execution of the symbol variation, the final rotation is performed in the symbol variation as compared with the case where the LED array 282 does not start rotating as shown in FIG. 264. The jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed, or when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when the LED array 282 starts to rotate is started. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed, or the out-of-order symbol mode is always fixedly displayed when the LED array 282 does not start rotating. It may have been done. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when the LED array 282 starts rotating starts, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

FIG. 265 is a stepwise diagram showing another example following FIG. 263 (l').

FIG. 265 (m ″) is a state continuing from FIG. 263 (l ′) in which the pattern 136 ′ of the chance button 136 is displayed on the back side portion of the rotation region s of the LED array 282. In FIG. 265 (m ″), nothing is still displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, and the chance button pattern 136 ′ is displayed on the back side portion thereof. The rotation region s of the non-display LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position (FIG. 265 (n'')), and in FIG. 265 (o''), the rotation of the LED array 282 starts operation. Decelerates at the position, and in FIG. 265 (p ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 stops in the initial position. The design 136'of the chance button 136 displayed on the back side portion of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208 disappears when the LED array 282 starts decelerating the rotation. Alternatively, the LED array 282 rotating at a constant speed disappears when it reaches the operation start position. Even if the LED array 282 starts to decelerate the rotation, the first movable body 260 displays a combination of decorative symbols in the reach state. In this example, in the end, the chance button 136 is operated because the player cannot clearly see or cannot see the pattern 136'of the chance button 136 and does not display any pattern prompting the operation of the chance button 136. There is no such thing.

In FIG. 265 (q ″), the LED array 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. On the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 265 (q ″), a combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is still displayed.

In FIG. 265 (r ″), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. Further, the first movable body 260, which has been in the retracted position, returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable body 260 returns to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is restored. On the display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is confirmed and displayed (stop display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is returned to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is returned to the sea background image.

When the chance button symbol 136'is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 as shown in FIG. 263 (m') during the execution of the symbol variation, the LED array 282 is displayed as shown in FIG. 265. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation than when is not displayed even if the LED is rotated, and the chance button symbol 136'is started to be displayed in the rotation area s. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time of the start is started, or the rotation region s thereof. In the case of a symbol variation in which the chance button symbol 136'is not displayed, the design mode may be configured so that the finally missed symbol mode is always fixedly displayed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when the chance button symbol 136'is started to be displayed in the rotation area s, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to be easy or sometimes done.

FIG. 266 is a diagram stepwise showing another example following FIG. 262 (c).

FIG. 266 (d') shows a state in which the first movable body 260 continues from FIG. 262 (c) in the initial position. In FIG. 266 (d'), the first movable body 260 does not move to the retracted position but remains in the initial position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination of symbols is confirmed (stopped).

The case where the first movable body 260 is moved to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 260 (c) during the execution of the symbol variation is more than the case where the first movable body 260 is still located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 266. It is possible to expect the player to start preparing for the operation of the POV display 280, and by extension, to start the Versa notice, and in fact, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed in the symbol variation. Easy to be. In addition, when any of the symbol fluctuations held when the first movable body 260 starts moving to the evacuation position is started, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally displayed in a definite manner, or the first movable body 260 may be in the initial position. It may be configured so that the finally missed symbol mode is always definitively displayed in the symbol variation that remains located at.

FIG. 267 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of a jackpot, continuing from FIG. 262 (i).

FIG. 267 (j') shows a state following FIG. 262 (i) while the LED array 282 has started rotating and is accelerating. In FIG. 267 (j'), the rotation of the LED array 282 is further accelerated, and the pattern is displayed before reaching the constant speed. That is, on the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 267 (j'), the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord has started, and even in the same figure (k') where the rotation speed of the LED array 282 has reached a constant speed, the display thereof is started. The display of the pattern t is maintained. In this example, when the pattern is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 that has reached the constant speed, the first movable body 260, which has been in the reach state until then, displays the shaking of the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot ( Temporary stop display) is started. Even in FIG. 267 (k'), the rotation region s of the LED array 282 does not move.

In FIG. 267 (l'), the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated, and the display of the character pattern t of the lord disappears from the POV display 280. Even if the rotation of the LED array 282 starts to decelerate, the pattern t of the character of the lord may continue to be displayed for a certain period of time (for example, until the speed drops to a certain speed).

In FIG. 267 (m'), the rotation of the LED array 282 stops in the initial posture, and in FIG. 267 (n'), the LED array 282 rises toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. There is. Then, in FIG. 267 (o'), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. Further, the first movable body 260, which has been in the retracted position, returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable body 260 returns to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is restored. On the display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (here, "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3") is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is returned to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is returned to the sea background image.

FIG. 268 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of loss, which continues from FIG. 262 (i).

FIG. 268 (j ″) shows a state following FIG. 262 (i) while the LED array 282 has started rotating and is accelerating. In FIG. 268 (j ″) as in FIG. 267 (j ″) above, the rotation of the LED array 282 is further accelerated, and the pattern is displayed before reaching the constant speed. That is, while the rotation of the LED array 282 is accelerated, the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed. Then, when the rotation speed of the LED array 282 reaches a constant speed, the display of the pattern t disappears as shown in the figure (k ″). In this example, nothing is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 that has reached a constant speed, and the first movable body 260 remains in the reach state.

In FIG. 268 (l ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated, and in FIG. 268 (m ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture. The rotation of the LED array 282 reaches a constant speed, and instead of the pattern t of the character of the lord disappearing on the POV display 280, the character pattern "sorry" may be displayed, or the rotation of the LED array 282 may be displayed. The character pattern "Sorry" may be displayed for a certain period of time (for example, until the speed drops to a certain speed) after the LED starts to decelerate.

In FIG. 268 (n ″), the LED array 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. Then, in FIG. 268 (o ″), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. In addition, the first movable body 260, which has been in the retracted position, has also returned to the initial position. Further, the display of the decorative symbol that was in the reach state in the first movable body 260 is returned to the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (o''), the decorative symbol that is lost is displayed. The combination (here, "decoration 3"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 3") is confirmed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is returned to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is returned to the sea background image.

As shown in FIG. 268 (k''), when the symbol is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 that has reached a constant speed as shown in FIG. 267 (k') during the execution of the symbol variation. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation rather than disappearing or not being displayed in the rotation area s, and is held when the symbol is started to be displayed in the rotation area s. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is always fixedly displayed when any of the symbol fluctuations that have been performed is started, or the symbol disappears or is displayed. It may be configured so that the finally missed symbol mode is surely displayed in the absence of the symbol variation. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when the symbol is started to be displayed in the rotation area s is started, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to be the case.

FIG. 269 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the first movable body 260, which is a sub liquid crystal unit, rotates at high speed by the mechanism shown in FIGS. 258 and 259 to display a pattern due to an afterimage effect. In this figure, the process proceeds from (a) to (r). FIG. 269 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 that becomes the main liquid crystal unit, the first movable body 260 that becomes the sub liquid crystal unit, and the second movable body 270 that is displayed as a chance. The POV display 280 shown in FIG. 268 is omitted. The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 269 is a versatility notice of the variable display currently being performed using the first movable body 260 that becomes the sub liquid crystal unit. That is, in the production here, the first movable body 260 corresponds to an example of the POV display. The details will be described below.

In FIG. 269 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (a), the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the empty background image. In this example as well, neither the hold icon nor the changing icon is displayed, but it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 260. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260.

In FIG. 269 (b), the variable display of the special figure is started, and in response to the start of the variable display of the special figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 269 (c), the first movable body 260 moves to the retracted position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c develop into a reach state. However, in the figure (d), the display of the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed in the upper right.

In FIG. 269 (e), the first movable body 260 in the leftmost retracted position moves toward the right side along the lower end portion of the bezel 208q of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in FIG. The first movable body 260, which is moving toward, starts to ascend slightly past the center in the left-right direction. The first movable body 260 that has started to ascend stops at the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 269 (g). In the first movable body 260 that has stopped ascending, the background image of the sea is switched to the unpatterned background image in preparation for the first movable body 260 to start the rotation operation.

In FIG. 269 (h), the first movable body 260 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the player, and in FIG. 269 (i), the rotation accelerates, and in FIG. ), The first movable body 260 finishes the acceleration rotation and shifts to the constant speed rotation. The rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 does not overlap with the display of the decorative symbol reduced to the upper right, but may overlap a part or all of the display of the decorative symbol. The first movable body 260 can display a pattern due to the afterimage effect when shifting to constant speed rotation, but the pattern is not yet displayed at the timing of FIG. 269 (j). The pattern due to the afterimage effect may be displayed at the same time as the constant speed rotation is reached, or the pattern due to the afterimage effect can be displayed before the constant speed rotation is reached, and the pattern is displayed before the constant speed rotation is reached. You may.

In the first movable body 260 that rotates at a constant speed as shown in FIG. 269 (k), the display of the character pattern of the jackpot is started. In addition, in response to the start of the display of the jackpot character pattern, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced to the upper right, which was previously in the reach state, is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (here, "" The shaking display (temporary stop display) of "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3") is displayed (see FIG. 269 (l)). It should be noted that the shaking display of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be performed at the same time as the display of the jackpot character symbol is started, or may be after the start.

In FIG. 269 (m), the position of the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 has not changed, but the character pattern of the jackpot has moved diagonally toward the upper left, and the character pattern of "hit" is the first. It is displayed in the rotation region 206s of the movable body 260, and the "large" character pattern is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. That is, an animation is displayed in which the jackpot character pattern exits from the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260, and in FIG. 269 (m), the jackpot character pattern is the first movable body 260 and the decorative pattern. It is displayed across the display device 208. The display of a part or all of the jackpot character pattern displayed in the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to 269 (m) corresponds to an example of the second effect display. To do. In addition to the jackpot character pattern, another pattern (for example, an oval pattern, a pattern representing an effect, etc.) may be displayed in the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260. It may be an example of the second production display including the "picture of".

Further, in response to the fact that the jackpot character pattern has begun to be displayed in the rotating region 206s of the first movable body 260 (FIG. 269 (k)), the decorative symbol display device 208 also hits the back side portion of the rotating region 206s. You may start displaying the character pattern of. The jackpot character pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed at the same time as the jackpot character pattern is displayed in the rotation region 206s, or even after the jackpot character pattern is displayed. Good. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (m), all the character patterns of the big hit are displayed, but the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 is displayed in the character pattern portion of the “hit”. It may be an overlapping mode.

In FIG. 269 (n), the jackpot character pattern completely escapes from the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 and is displayed on the upper left of the decorative pattern display device 208. This jackpot character pattern corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern corresponds to an example of the first effect display. In addition to the jackpot character pattern, another pattern (for example, an oval pattern or a pattern representing an effect) may be displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, and this "other pattern" may also be displayed. It may be included as an example of the first effect display. Nothing is displayed in the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (n). In FIG. 269 (o), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is decelerated, and in FIG. 269 (p), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is stopped in the initial posture. In FIG. 269 (q), the first movable body 260 is lowered, and the background image of the first movable body 260 is restored to the background image of the sea. Further, in FIG. 269 (r), the first movable body 260 moves toward the left side along the lower end portion of the bezel 208q of the decorative symbol display device 208, and returns to the initial position. In response to the return of the first movable body 260 to the initial position, the reduced display of the decorative symbol, which had been swaying and fluctuating in the upper right area, is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right. It returns to the symbol display area 208c, and the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed (stop display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is restored to the empty background image. The confirmation display may be performed at the same time as the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position, or may be displayed after the return.

In the example shown in FIG. 269 described above, a pattern due to the afterimage effect is displayed in the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260, and it is also an example of the Versa notice that the pattern due to the afterimage effect is displayed. It is configured so that when this versa notice is executed during the execution of the symbol change, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol change than when the versa notice is not executed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when this versa notice is executed, the jackpot symbol mode is always fixedly displayed. It may be configured so that the finally missed symbol mode is always definitively displayed in the symbol variation in which the versa notice is not executed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when this versa notice is executed, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in.

FIG. 270 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a button notice, continuing from FIG. 269 (g).

FIG. 270 (h') shows a state continuing from FIG. 269 (g) in which the first movable body 260 is raised to the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 270 (h'), the first movable body 260 in the stopped state has a chance button pattern 136'' and a pattern prompting the operation of the chance button 136 (the character pattern "press" and the downward arrow. Picture) is displayed. Also, as for the actual chance button 136, the built-in chance button lamp 138 emits light, and the word "push" emerges. Such an effect of urging the operation of the chance button 136 corresponds to an example of the button notice, and the button notice is started in FIG. 270 (h').

In FIG. 270 (i'), the chance button 136 is pressed down. When the chance button 136 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 270 (j'), the chance button symbol 136'' and the symbol urging the operation disappear from the first movable body 260, and the first movable body 260 disappears. However, it starts to rotate. That is, the first movable body 260 starts rotating in response to the operation of the chance button 136.

In FIG. 270 (k'), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is accelerated, and in FIG. 270 (l'), the first movable body 260 finishes the accelerated rotation and shifts to the constant speed rotation. In the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 270 (l'), a character pattern of a big hit due to an afterimage effect is displayed, and a versa notice is started. In this example, at the same time when the rotation speed of the first movable body 260 reaches a constant speed, a character pattern of a big hit is displayed. It is a moment from the start of rotation of the first movable body 260 until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed. In this example, a jackpot character pattern is displayed by the afterimage effect according to the operation of the chance button 136. It looks like there is. That is, it develops from a button notice to a versa notice.

In FIG. 270 (m'), the display of the decorative symbol reduced to the upper right, which has been displayed in the reach state, becomes a shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols. In this example, the character pattern of the jackpot does not move and remains within the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260.

In FIG. 270 (n'), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is decelerated, and the jackpot character pattern displayed in the rotation area 206s disappears. In FIG. 270 (o'), the rotation of the first movable body 260 stops in the initial posture. In FIG. 270 (p'), the first movable body 260 is lowered, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is returned to the background image of the sea. Further, in FIG. 270 (q'), as in FIG. 269 (r), the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the empty background image and the symbol is displayed. The combination of the big hit decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed (stop display) in the display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 271 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the button notice does not evolve into the versa notice, which continues from FIG. 270 (i').

FIG. 271 (j'') is from FIG. 270 (i') in which the chance button 136 is pressed down while the first movable body 260 is displayed with the chance button pattern 136'' and the pattern prompting the operation thereof. It is a state that continues. When the chance button 136 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 271 (j''), the chance button pattern 136'' and the pattern prompting its operation disappear from the first movable body 260, but in this example, The rotation of the first movable body 260 is not started.

In FIG. 271 (k ″), the first movable body 260 starts descending, and in this first movable body 260, the background image returns to the background image of the sea. Further, in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (k ″), the decorative symbol in the reach state is still displayed. Then, in FIG. 271 (l''), the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the empty background image and is lost in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols of is confirmed (stopped display).

When the button notice as shown in FIG. 270 (h') is displayed during the execution of the symbol change, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol change than when it is not displayed. It may be configured, and when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time of executing this button notice is started, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed in the end. It may be configured to be configured so that the finally missed symbol mode is always fixedly displayed in the symbol variation in which the button notice is not executed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this button notice is executed is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in. Further, as described above, the case where the Versa notice shown in FIG. 269 (k) or the like is executed during the execution of the symbol variation is more than the case where the Versa notice is not executed as shown in FIG. 271. In the symbol variation, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily finalized and displayed, or any of the symbol variations suspended at the time when this versa notice is executed starts. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the case where the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed, or the missed symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed in the symbol change in which this versa notice is not executed. It may be configured in. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when this versa notice is executed, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in.

FIG. 272 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a big hit with another type of Versa notice using the first movable body 260, which continues from FIG. 269 (i).

FIG. 272 (h') is a state following FIG. 269 (i) in which the first movable body 260 that has risen to the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In FIG. 272 (h'), the first movable body 260 starts moving to the right while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower right side shown in FIG. 272 (h'), the character pattern of "hit" is displayed on the upper left.

As shown in FIGS. 272 (i') to 272 (k'), the first movable body 260 starts the circular movement while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper right side shown in FIG. 272 (i'), the character pattern of "hit" is displayed in the lower left. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper left side shown in FIG. 272 (j'), the character pattern of "Daito" is displayed in the lower right. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower left side shown in FIG. 272 (k'), the character pattern of "Daito" is displayed on the upper right. In this way, the first movable body 260 that moves in a circular manner changes the character pattern according to the position, and when the moving speed of the circular movement becomes faster, as shown in FIG. 272 (l'), due to the afterimage effect. It seems that the character pattern of the jackpot is displayed. The circular movement region 260s'of the first movable body 260 does not overlap with the display of the decorative symbol reduced in the upper right, but may overlap a part or all of the display of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 272 (m'), in a state where the character pattern of the jackpot due to the afterimage effect is displayed on the first movable body 260 that circulates, the decoration in the reach state is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol display becomes a shaking display (temporary stop display) of a combination of jackpot decorative symbols. The start of the shaking display may be the same as the timing at which the big hit character pattern due to the afterimage effect starts to be displayed on the first movable body 260, or may be after that timing.

In FIG. 272 (n'), the first movable body 260 that was performing circular movement stopped, the character pattern of the jackpot due to the afterimage effect disappeared, and in FIG. 272 (o'), the first movable body 260 was initially set. After returning to the position, the decorative symbol display device 208 returns the background image to an empty background image, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is fixedly displayed (stopped display) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 273 is an example of the Versa notice continuing from FIG. 269 (i) as in FIG. 272, but is a diagram showing a stepwise example of loss.

FIG. 273 (h') is a state following FIG. 269 (i) in which the first movable body 260 that has risen to the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In FIG. 273 (h'), the first movable body 260 starts moving to the right while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower right side shown in FIG. 273 (h'), a display including a character pattern of "nsu" is displayed on the upper left.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 273, the first movable body 260 starts the circular movement while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper right side shown in FIG. 273 (i'), a display including a character pattern of "nsu" is displayed in the lower left. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper left side shown in FIG. 273 (j'), a display including a character pattern of "cha" is displayed in the lower right. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower left side shown in FIG. 273 (k'), a display including the character pattern of "cha" is displayed on the upper right.

In FIG. 273 (l'), the moving speed of the circular movement reaches a constant speed, and it seems that the character pattern of the chance is displayed in the circular movement region 260s' of the first movable body 260 due to the afterimage effect. .. Further, at the same time when the moving speed of the circular movement of the first movable body 260 reaches a constant speed, that is, the character pattern of the chance is displayed due to the afterimage effect, and at the same time, the reach reduced and displayed in the upper right of the decorative pattern display device 208. The display of the decorative symbol in the state becomes the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In addition, before the shaking display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols is displayed, the shaking display of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be displayed, and then the shaking display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols may be displayed.

In FIG. 273 (m'), the state shown in Fig. 273 (l') continues, and in FIG. The character pattern disappears. Then, in FIG. 273 (o'), the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the empty background image, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are lost. The combination of decorative symbols is confirmed (stopped). In addition, the shaking display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss may be switched to the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit.

In the example shown in FIG. 272, a picture of the afterimage effect due to the circular movement of the first movable body 260 is displayed, and it is also an example of the Versa notice that the picture of the afterimage effect is displayed. When this Versa notice is executed during the execution of the symbol change, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol change than when the Versa notice is not executed. In addition, in the Versa notice, the jackpot character pattern has a higher reliability (expectation) of the jackpot than the chance character pattern. In addition, even if it is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this versa notice is executed is started. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the missed symbol mode is always definitively displayed in the symbol variation in which the versa notice is not executed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when this versa notice is executed, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 269 to 273 described above, the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 has been omitted, but the POV display 280 is also mounted to mount the first movable body 260. The effects shown in FIGS. 269 to 273 and the effects shown by the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 may be performed simultaneously or staggered by rotating or circulating the movement.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of changing the display mode of the hold icon by using the Versa notice. In this figure, the process proceeds from (a) to (p). FIG. 274 also shows a decorative symbol display device 208 that becomes the main liquid crystal unit, a first movable body 260 that becomes a sub liquid crystal unit, a second movable body 270 that is displayed as a chance, and a POV display 280. .. The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 274 is that the pattern displayed as the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is moved onto the POV display 280, and the display mode is changed on the POV display 280, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 Seems to return to. It becomes something like. The details will be described below.

In FIG. 274 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position behind the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is invisible to the player. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (a), the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the empty background image. In addition, four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all of them are display modes of white circles, which is the default display mode. The four hold icons may be the hold icon of special figure 1, all four may be the hold icon of special figure 2, and the hold icon of special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Hold icons may be mixed. Further, only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 274 (a). Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 260 will be mainly described, and the description of common matters may be omitted.

In FIG. 274 (b), one hold is exhausted and three hold icons are displayed, and all the display modes are the default display modes. In FIG. 274 (c), the first movable body 260 has moved to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a reach state. Also, the POV display 280 begins preparing for operation. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (d), a changing icon h0 and three hold icons are displayed on a non-patterned background.

In FIG. 274 (e), the POV display 280 appears from the back side of the second movable body 270, in FIG. 274 (f), the POV display 280 continues to descend, and in FIG. 274 (g), the LED array 282 appears. Reach the operation start position. In FIG. 274 (h), the LED array 282 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction at the operation start position, and in FIG. 274 (i), the LED array 282 is accelerating the rotation. In FIG. 274 (j), the LED array 282 finishes the acceleration rotation and shifts to the constant speed rotation. The rotation region s of the LED array 282 here overlaps a part of the changing icon h0, but does not overlap the hold icon. That is, all the display modes of the three hold icons can be confirmed. Until this stage, all three hold icons continue to be displayed in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 208f. Of the three hold icons, the picture of the third hold icon h3 corresponds to an example of the first picture, and the display of the picture of the three hold icons including the picture corresponds to an example of the first effect display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (k), an animation is displayed in which the third hold icon h3 out of the three hold icons moves from the hold icon display area 208f toward the rotation area s of the LED array 282. , Only two hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. In FIG. 274 (l), of the pattern h3'representing the third hold icon h3, the right half is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left half is displayed on the rotation area s of the LED array 282. That is, the pattern h3'representing the third hold icon is displayed straddling the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280. Then, in FIG. 274 (m), the display mode of the pattern h3'representing the third hold icon, which is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280, changes from a white circle to a black rhombus and shines for a moment. To increase. As shown in FIG. 274 (n), the pattern h3'in which the display mode has changed is temporarily displayed on the POV display 280. That is, the pattern h3'displayed near the edge of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 straddling the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280 so as to enter the rotation area s of the LED array 282. Moving. The black diamond-shaped pattern h3'then then moves again near the edge of the rotation region s of the LED array 282, as shown in FIG. 274 (o). In FIG. 274 (o), the black diamond-shaped pattern h3'is displayed again straddling the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern display device 208. The display of the pattern h3 representing a part or all of the third hold icon displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o) is an example of the second effect display. Equivalent to.

In FIG. 274 (p), the black diamond-shaped pattern h3'displayed across the POV display 280 and the decorative symbol display device 208 returns to the hold icon display area 208f, and the hold icon display area 208f is also black. It is displayed as a diamond-shaped third hold icon h3, and a look-ahead notice is given.

Even if the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (j) is rotated at a constant speed, the display mode of the hold icon may not be changed and the rotation of the LED array 282 may be completed. From 274 (l) to Fig. (O) is the Versa notice, and the Versa notice here corresponds to the start of the look-ahead notice.

Further, in the example of FIG. 274, the default display mode (display mode of white circles) is changed to the display mode of pre-reading notice (display mode of black diamonds) by using the versa notice, but the default display mode is used. The mode can also be regarded as a kind of pre-reading notice display mode in which the reliability [expectation] of the jackpot is 0% or extremely low. Further, by using the Versa notice, the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the black circle, which is less reliable than the display mode of the black rhombus, may be changed to the display mode of the black rhombus, or conversely, from the display mode of the black rhombus. The display mode of the look-ahead notice marked "heat", which is highly reliable, may be changed to a black diamond-shaped display mode.

FIG. 275 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of changing the display mode of the changing icon using the Versa notice, which continues from FIG. 274 (l).

FIG. 275 (l') is a state following FIG. 274 (k) in which the animation of the third hold icon h3 moving toward the rotation region s of the LED array 282 is performed. Nothing is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (l'). However, the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (l') is indicated by a circle represented by a dotted line. This means that the design h3'' of the third hold icon h3 in the default display mode is displayed on the back side portion of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. is there. However, this pattern h3 ″ is difficult to see due to the rotating LED array 282. To the player, it appears that the moved third hold icon h3 has disappeared in the rotation area s of the LED array 282.

A rhombus represented by a dotted line is shown in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (m'). This indicates that the pattern h3 ″ of the third holding icon h3 changed to the diamond-shaped display mode is displayed on the back side portion. However, this pattern h3 ″ is also difficult to see due to the rotating LED array 282. In FIG. 275 (n'), the diamond-shaped display mode pattern h3'' displayed on the back side portion returns to the hold icon display area 208f, and the hold icon display area 208f also has the third black diamond shape. It is displayed as a hold icon h3, and a pre-reading notice is given. The state of return here may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by a movement animation or an increase animation, and the black diamond-shaped third hold icon h3 is suddenly displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. It may be. Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 275 (n'), the changing icon h0 of the display mode of the white circle is displayed. The pattern of the changing icon h0 of the white circle corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern corresponds to an example of the first effect display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 275 (o'), the changing icon h0 of the display mode of the white circle, which partially overlapped the rotation region s of the LED array 282, enters the rotation region s. The animation that appears to be displayed on the rotation region s, that is, the POV display 280. In the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (o'), a pattern h0'representing the changing icon h0 of the display mode of the white circle is displayed. Then, in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (p'), the above-mentioned pattern h0'in the display mode of the white circle is changed to the display mode of the white quadrangle. The display of the pattern h0'representing the changing icon displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 corresponds to an example of the second effect display.

In FIG. 275 (p'), the pattern h0'changed to the display mode of the white quadrangle returns to the changing icon display area 208e, and is also displayed as the changing icon h0 of the white quadrangle in the changing icon display area 208e. Will be done. As for the changing icon, the display mode of the white circle is the default display mode, and the display mode of the white square corresponds to the current notice mode of the variable display.

FIG. 276 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of changing the display mode of the changing icon, which continues from FIG. 275 (n').

FIG. 276 (o ″) is a state following FIG. 275 (n ″) in which the display mode of the third hold icon h3 is changed. Nothing is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 276 (o ″). However, the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 276 (o ″) is indicated by a circle represented by a dotted line. This indicates that the design h0'' of the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the back side portion of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. .. However, this pattern h0 ″ is difficult to see due to the rotating LED array 282. To the player, it seems that the changing icon h0, which partially overlaps the rotation area s of the LED array 282, disappears as if sucked into the rotation area s.

In the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 276 (p ″), a square represented by a dotted line is shown. This means that the pattern h0 ″ of the changing icon h0 changed to the quadrangular display mode is displayed on the back side portion. However, this pattern h0 ″ is also difficult to see due to the rotating LED array 282. In FIG. 276 (q''), the quadrangular display mode picture h0'' displayed on the back side portion returns to the changing icon display area 208e, and the changing icon display area 208e also has a quadrangle. It is displayed as a changing icon h0, and a notice (normal notice) of the changing display currently being performed is being performed. The state of return here may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by a movement animation or an increase animation, or the quadrangular changing icon h0 is suddenly displayed in the changing icon display area 208e. You may.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode (for example, the black diamond display mode) during the execution of the symbol change, the default display mode remains. Rather, it is easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode by the time all the reserved symbol fluctuations are digested. That is, when the black rhombus display mode, which is the look-ahead notice mode, is not displayed as the mode of the hold icon, it is finally displayed in the symbol variation started when the hold icon is digested. The jackpot symbol mode is easily displayed. There are a plurality of types of look-ahead notice display modes, and the reliability (expectation level) of the jackpot differs depending on the look-ahead notice display mode. In addition, any of the symbol changes that are held when the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, or when the display of the hold icon is started. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is always finalized when is started.
It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode may be easily or may be finally finalized. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the finally missed symbol mode is always fixedly displayed in the symbol change in which the change in the display mode of the hold icon is not executed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 274 to 276 described above can be combined with the examples shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 using a common POV display 280. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 to 273, the POV display 280 was omitted, but the POV display 280 is also mounted, and the first movable body 260 is rotated or circulated to move the first movable body 260. The effect shown in FIG. 273 and the effect shown in FIGS. 274 to 276 by the POV display 280 may be performed at the same time or may be staggered.

FIG. 277 is a diagram showing a modified example of the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 256 and 260.

The POV display 280'of this modification has a pair of left and right elevating arms 281'and an LED array 282' arranged between the pair of elevating arms 281'. FIG. 277 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the LED array 282'is in the initial posture, with the front side of the paper surface being the front side (player side) and the back side of the paper surface being the back side. In the LED array 282', LEDs 2821' are arranged in a horizontal row on each surface of the front surface 282f and the back surface 282r. Further, as shown in FIG. 277 (a), the rotation shaft of the rotary motor 283 fixed to the elevating arm 281'on the right side is connected to the end portion on the right side of the LED array 282'. On the other hand, the left end of the LED array 282'is rotatably supported by the left elevating arm 281'.

FIG. 277 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the LED array 282'is rotated by 90 degrees. In this figure, the front surface 282f of the LED array 282'where the LED 2821' is arranged is downward, and the LED array is arranged. The back surface 282r of 282'is upward.

In the POV display 280'of this modified example, the LED array 282' is rotated around the horizontal axis, and the light emitting mode of each LED 2821'arranged on the front surface and the back surface is changed to give an afterimage to the player. Is visually recognized. That is, an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation locus of each LED 2821', and a pattern is represented.

FIG. 278 is a diagram showing an example of a versa notice using the POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277. In this figure, the process proceeds from (a) to (p). The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 278 is a versatility notice of the variable display currently being performed using the POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277.

In FIG. 278 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display is also in the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270, and the POV display is invisible to the player. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (a), the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the empty background image. In this example as well, neither the hold icon nor the changing icon is displayed, but it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 260. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260.

In FIG. 278 (b), the variable display of the special figure is started, and in response to the start of the variable display of the special figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 278 (c), the first movable body 260 moves to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a reach state. Also, the POV display begins to prepare for operation. In FIG. 278 (d), the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and the combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state also disappears. Further, the background image disappears even in the first movable body 260 that has moved to the retracted position, and the combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed on the first movable body 260. The POV display is preparing for operation even at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (d).

In FIG. 278 (e), the POV display 280'appears from the back side of the second movable body 270, in FIG. 278 (f), the POV display 280' continues to descend, and in FIG. 282'reaches the operation start position. In FIG. 278 (h), the LED array 282'starts rotation about the horizontal axis at the operation start position, and in FIG. 278 (i), the LED array 282'is in the process of accelerating the rotation. Is. In FIG. 278 (j), the LED array 282'ends acceleration rotation and shifts to constant speed rotation at the operation start position. In the LED array 282', at the same time as shifting to the constant speed rotation, the display of the big hit character pattern by the afterimage effect is started. In FIG. 278 (k), the first movable body 260, which has been in the reach state until then, is started to shake display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit. The pattern due to the afterimage effect is not limited to the jackpot character pattern, but may be another character pattern (for example, a chance character pattern), and is not limited to the character pattern, but may be a pattern such as a figure or a symbol. There may be.

In FIG. 278 (l), the rotation of the LED array 282'decelerates at the operation start position, and the display of the jackpot character pattern disappears from the POV display 280'. In FIG. 278 (m), the rotation of the LED array 282'stops in the initial posture, and in FIG. 278 (n), the LED array 282' rises toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. There is.

In FIG. 278 (o), the LED array 282'reaches the initial position. In FIG. 278 (p), the first movable body 260, which had been in the retracted position, returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable body 260 is changed to the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is confirmed and displayed (stop display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is returned to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is returned to the sea background image.

In the example shown in FIG. 278, the pattern of the afterimage effect due to the rotation of the LED array 282'is displayed, and the display of the pattern of the afterimage effect is also an example of the Versa notice. It is configured so that when this versa notice is executed during the execution of the symbol change, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol change than when the versa notice is not executed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when this versa notice is executed, the jackpot symbol mode is always fixedly displayed. It may be configured so that the finally missed symbol mode is always definitively displayed in the symbol variation in which the versa notice is not executed. Alternatively, when any of the symbol fluctuations reserved at the time when this versa notice is executed, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily and finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in.

The effects shown in FIG. 278 described above may be performed simultaneously with the effects shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 and the effects shown in FIGS. 274 to 276 using the POV display 280, or may be performed alternately. .. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 to 273, the POV display 280 was omitted, but the POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277 was also mounted, and the first movable body 260 was rotated or circulated. The effect shown in FIGS. 269 to 273 and the effect shown in FIG. 278 by the POV display 280'may be performed at the same time or may be staggered.

Further, the rotation axis serving as the center of rotation is not limited to horizontal, and may be a rotation axis in any direction. For example, it may be a POV display in which the LED array rotates with an axis extending in the vertical direction as a rotation axis, a POV display in which the LED array rotates with an obliquely inclined axis as a rotation axis, or a POV display in the depth direction. A POV display in which the LED array rotates with an axis extending diagonally as a rotation axis may be used.

Further, the Versa notice described above is a so-called normal notice that targets the currently performed symbol variation display, but can also be applied to a look-ahead notice. For example, a symbol variation display in which a jackpot character symbol is displayed on the POV display does not result in a jackpot, but the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed before all the reserved symbol variations are digested. .. In this way, when the Versa notice is given as a look-ahead notice, the jackpot symbol mode is always displayed or confirmed by the time all the reserved symbol fluctuations are digested, compared to the case where it is not given. Easy to display. Alternatively, if the Versa notice is not given as a look-ahead notice, the lost symbol mode is always displayed in a definite manner until all the pending symbol changes are digested. Further, regardless of whether it is a normal notice or a look-ahead notice, the character pattern of the big hit or the pattern in which the character of the main character's lord wins may correspond to the pattern of the big hit confirmation.

FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example of a versa notice when the ball removal notification is being performed.

When a lower plate full tank error occurs, an error notification is given. In FIG. 279 (a), for example, an error of filling up the lower plate occurs in the state shown in FIG. Has been done. This character pattern is displayed from above the pattern t of the character of the lord, which was displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, the character pattern "Please pull out the ball" is drawn on the layer on the front side (player side) of the layer on which the character pattern t of the lord is drawn. As a result, the character pattern "Please pull out the ball" overlaps with the character pattern t of the lord, and the character pattern t of the lord is more visible than when there is no character pattern "Please pull out the ball". It's getting harder.

FIG. 279 (b) shows, for example, an example in which a lower plate full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 262 (m). In FIG. 279 (b), the Versa notice is started before the lower plate full tank error occurs, and a part (here, the left half) of the display of the character t of the lord is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. The remaining portion (here, the right half) is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282. That is, the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed straddling the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280. In this state, if a lower plate full tank error occurs, the character pattern "Please pull out the ball" overlaps with the pattern t of the character of the lord displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Since only the left half of the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, only the left half thereof overlaps. That is, as shown in FIG. 279 (b), only the character pattern of "excluded" overlaps with the pattern t of the character of the lord. Similar to the example shown in FIG. 279 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire character pattern "Please pull out the ball", but is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the rotation area s of the LED array 282, the character pattern "Please be" is invisible or difficult to see, and only a part of the right end of the character pattern "I" is visible.

In the above-described example, the error notification pattern is not displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, that is, the POV display 280, and the effect pattern is preferentially displayed. The POV display 280 may also display the error notification pattern. In this case, instead of displaying the effect pattern (here, the right half of the character pattern t of the lord), "Please stay". A character pattern may be displayed.

In addition, error-related notifications such as error occurrence notification (for example, display of the character pattern "The door is open"), error resolution notification, and hitting suggestion notification (for example, "Please hit right") Display) is also treated in the same way as the display of the character pattern "Please pull out the ball" explained here.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 280 to 282, an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 will be described. In each of the figures of FIGS. 280 to 282, the process proceeds from (a) to (z) in this order, followed by (z) and then from (a) to (g). Any of the effects shown in FIGS. 280 to 282 can be executed by the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect shown in FIG. 260, and like the effect shown in FIG. 260, an image is displayed on the POV display 280 as a look-ahead notice. A confrontation animation is performed on the POV display 280 when the symbol changes subject to the look-ahead notice, and the character of the lord finally wins and wins a big hit. It becomes something like. Hereinafter, the differences from the production shown in FIG. 260 will be mainly described, and the description of the matters overlapping with the matters described in FIG. 260 may be omitted, but the omitted explanation shall be quoted from the explanation of FIG. 260. Also, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 280-282 can be cited in the description of all other drawings.

FIG. 280 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 before the LED array 282 is operated at a constant speed.

In FIG. 280 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position behind the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is invisible to the player. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (a), a combination of loss of decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed on an empty background image. Further, four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and this state is a state in which four holds of special figure 2 are accumulated. The state shown in FIG. 280 is an electric support state. It should be noted that the non-electric support state may be in a state in which four reservations in FIG. 1 are accumulated. Of the four hold icons, only the second hold icon h2 is not the default display mode but the black diamond-shaped look-ahead notice display mode. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 280 (a).

In FIG. 280 (b), one hold is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (b), the first hold icon h1 moved to the changing icon display area is displayed as the changing icon h0, and the remaining hold icons are moved one by one to the left. .. As a result, the first hold icon h1 has a black diamond-shaped look-ahead notice display mode.

In FIG. 280 (c), the first movable body 260 has moved to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a reach state. Further, as in FIG. 260 (c), the POV display 280 starts preparing for operation.

In FIG. 280 (d), the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and the pattern t of the character of the lord who appears in the confrontation animation is displayed at the exact center position of the panel 208p. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (d), the changing icon h0 and the three hold icons are displayed, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state disappears. Further, the background image disappears even in the first movable body 260 that has moved to the retracted position, and the combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed on the first movable body 260. At the timing of FIG. 280 (d), the pattern t of the character of the lord may be displayed on the first movable body 260. Alternatively, it may be displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first movable body 260. Further, the POV display 280 is preparing for operation even at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (d).

In FIG. 280 (e), the POV display 280 appears from the back side of the second movable body 270. That is, the LED array 282 that maintains the horizontal posture, which is the initial posture, together with the elevating arm 281 descends to the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the pattern t of the character of the lord, and the descending LED array 282 overlaps the pattern t of the character of the lord from the front side. That is, the pattern t of the character of the lord is the display area on the back side of the LED array 282 descending toward the operation start position on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 (hereinafter referred to as "first back side display area bs1"). It is displayed in.). Since the vertical length of the pattern t of the character of the lord is larger than the height of the LED array 282 that maintains the horizontal posture, at a certain timing, one of the patterns t of the character of the lord is displayed in the first back side display area bs1. Only the part is displayed. The character of this lord may be displayed as an animation. Further, the pattern t of the character of the lord may be started to be displayed at the same time as or after the POV display 280 appears from the back side of the second movable body 270.

In FIG. 280 (f), the POV display 280 continues to descend, and in FIG. 280 (g), the LED array 282 reaches the operation start position (corresponding to the third position, hereinafter the same). The operation start position here is exactly the center position of the panel 208p in the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the pattern t of the character of the lord, and the LED array 282 overlaps the pattern t of the character of the lord from the front side. That is, the pattern t of the character of the lord is referred to as a display area on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 at the operation start position on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as "second back side display area bs2". ) Is displayed. In this example, the pattern t of the character of the lord is contained in the second back side display area bs2, but may be displayed so as to protrude outside the second back side display area bs2. The pattern t of the character of the lord may start to be displayed at the same time as or after the LED array 282 reaches the operation start position. Further, the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed in an area different from the second back side display area bs2, and the second back side display area is displayed at the same time as or after the LED array 282 reaches the operation start position. You may move to bs2. For example, an animation may be displayed in which the pattern t of the character of the lord moves from the position of the corner of the panel 208p to the second back side display area bs2, or the pattern t of the lord displayed on the first movable body 260. An animation may be displayed in which the character pattern t moves from the first movable body 260 to the second back side display area bs2 so as to straddle the panel 208p.

In FIG. 280 (h), the LED array 282 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction at the operation start position. The pattern t of the character of the lord is still displayed in the second back side display area bs2. Also here, the pattern t of the character of the lord may be displayed so as to protrude outside the second back side display area bs2. Further, the pattern t of the character of the lord may be displayed at the same time as the LED array 282 starts rotating, or after the LED array 282 starts rotating. Further, the pattern t of the character of the lord is started to be displayed in an area different from the second back side display area bs2, and is similar to the animation described above at the same time as or after the LED array 282 starts rotating. It may move to the second back side display area bs2 by animation.

In FIG. 280 (i), the LED array 282 is accelerating. That is, the LED array 282 in the stopped state is operating until the speed is increased to shift to the constant speed operation. During the acceleration operation of the LED array 282, the display in the second back side display area bs2 is easier to see than when the LED array 282 is performing the constant speed operation. Even during this acceleration operation, the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed in the second back side display area bs2, and the player can see the pattern t of the character of the lord through the rotating LED array 282. The faster the rotation speed of the LED array 282, the harder it is to see the display of the character pattern t of the lord displayed in the second back side display area bs2. Therefore, the pattern t of the character of the lord may appear to disappear gradually. Also here, the pattern t of the character of the lord may be displayed so as to protrude outside the second back side display area bs2. Further, the pattern t of the character of the lord may move in and out of the second back side display area bs2 by animation.

In FIG. 280 (j), the LED array 282 finishes the acceleration operation and shifts to the constant speed operation. The LED array 282 can display a pattern due to the afterimage effect when the LED array 282 shifts to constant speed rotation, but the pattern is not yet displayed at the timing of FIG. 280 (j). The pattern t of the character of the lord displayed in the second back side display area bs2 may be hidden (may disappear) in the middle of the acceleration operation, or may be hidden at the same time as the constant speed operation is started. It may be hidden after shifting to the constant speed operation (for example, before displaying the pattern by the afterimage effect, at the same time as displaying the pattern, or after displaying the pattern). Further, although the pattern t of the character of the lord is not hidden, it may be moved from the second back side display area bs2 to the outside of the second back side display area bs2. Further, during the constant speed operation of the LED array 282, at least continuously or intermittently from the second back side display area bs2 (only the second back side display area bs2 or the second back side display area bs2 including the second back side display area bs2). May be displayed in a large area). Here, the pattern t of the character of the lord displayed in the second back side display area bs2 is hidden at the same time as the pattern is displayed due to the afterimage effect.

On the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 280 (k), the display of the character pattern k of the samurai (swordsman) who plays the enemy role is started. The POV display 280 can also show how the enemy samurai character is moving. The start of displaying the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is evidence that the super reach effect has started. That is, when the super reach effect is started, the display of the pattern k of the samurai character who plays the enemy role is started.

In FIG. 280 (l), a combination of lost decorative patterns (“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”) is displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260.

In FIG. 280 (m), the hold represented by the first hold icon h1, which has been the display mode of the black rhombus look-ahead notice, is digested, and the variable display of the decorative symbol starts on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. Has been done. The symbol variation display started here becomes the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice. On the POV display 280, the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role continues to be displayed, and this pattern k is displayed across the symbol variation display.

In FIG. 280 (n), a combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, and in FIG. 280 (o), the second movable body 270 which has been in the initial position so far is displayed. It descends to the maximum descending position, overlaps a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and also overlaps with the rotating LED array 282, and the display of the character k of the samurai character of the enemy role displayed on the POV display 280 is displayed. Only part of it is visible. The second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 280 (p) has returned to the initial position. As a result, the display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role, which is displayed on the POV display 280, can be visually recognized again.

In FIG. 280 (q), the LED array 282 that was rotating at the operation start position is further lowered, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps the lower end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. While the LED array 282 is moving, the POV display 280 continues to display the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role. In this example, the pattern t of the character of the lord is not displayed in the second back side display area bs2, but when the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed in the second back side display area bs2, the LED array 282 By moving the rotation area s downward, the pattern t of the character of the lord becomes easier to see than before the rotation area s of the LED array 282 moves downward. Further, in FIG. 280 (q), all of the changing icon h0 and the holding icon are erased in a state where all of the changing icon h0 and the holding icon overlap with the rotation area s of the LED array 282.

The display position (center position of the rotation area s) of the villain character's pattern k on the POV display 280 (rotation area s of the LED array 282) shown in FIG. 280 (p) and the POV shown in FIG. The display position (the position closer to the left end of the rotation area s) of the villain's character in the display 280 (rotation area s of the LED array 282) is different from the display position, and the pattern k is in the rotation area s. Looks like it has moved. That is, the moving display of the pattern is performed.

In FIG. 280 (r), the LED array 282 rises diagonally upward to the left and then starts horizontal movement. On the POV display 280, the display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is started in FIG. 280 (k) and has been continued since then, and the pattern k remains displayed in FIG. 280 (r). , The LED array 282 moves. Further, in the portion of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (r) on the rear side of the rotating LED array 282, the display of the character t of the lord is started. The display of the pattern t of the character t, which is started to be displayed here, is more difficult to see than when the LED array 282 is not present.

In FIG. 280 (s), as the LED array 282 moves to the right, a part of the display of the character pattern t of the main character, which was displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, has begun to be seen. .. That is, in FIG. 280 (s), the rotation region s of the LED array 282 overlaps a part of the pattern t of the character of the lord displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 280 (t), as the LED array 282 further moves to the right, the entire display of the character pattern t of the main character's lord appears on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 280 (u), the LED array 282 moves further downward. From FIG. 280 (r) to FIG. 280 (u), the display position of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who is the enemy on the moving POV display 280 (rotation area s of the LED array 282) is the center position of the rotation area s. Matches with.

On the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (v), an animation is displayed in which the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord moves toward the right side. Then, a part of the display of the character pattern t of the lord (here, the toes of the right foot, etc.), which was previously displayed only on the panel 208p, is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282. become. That is, the display of the character design t of the lord is displayed across both the decorative design display device 208 and the POV display 280.

In FIG. 280 (w), a confrontation animation between the character of the lord and the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is displayed. Here, the display of the character t of the lord has not completely moved to the POV display 280, and the toes and the like of the left foot are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 280 (w), the character of the samurai who plays the role of the enemy is lying down, and the character of the lord who is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 280 is displayed as having won. There is. Further, in the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot (here, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2") is matched with the victory of the character's pattern t. The shaking display (temporary stop display) is started.

In FIG. 280 (x), the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is completely moved to the POV display 280, and the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed on the POV display 280. Between FIGS. 280 (v) and 280 (x), the entire pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, even if a part of the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed on the POV display 280, a part of it is also displayed on the panel 208p. Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (x), even if the entire display of the character pattern t of the lord is displayed on the POV display 280, the panel 208p also has the pattern t of the character displayed on the POV display 280. The same pattern is displayed.

In FIG. 280 (y), the LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position at the upper left, and the rotation region s of the LED array 282 moves. That is, the POV display 280, which displays the entire display of the character t of the lord, starts moving toward the upper left. Also at this time, in the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed in the display area on the back side of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 at the operation start position. In addition, the display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role has disappeared.

In FIG. 280 (z), the LED array 282 stops moving and starts a deceleration operation at the operation start position. That is, the LED array 282, which is operating at a constant speed, reduces the speed and operates until it shifts to the stopped state. In the second back side display area bs2, which is the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 that has returned to the operation start position, the display of the character pattern t of the lord continues. During the deceleration operation of the LED array 282, the display in the second back side display area bs2 is easier to see than when the LED array 282 is performing the constant speed operation. The player can see the pattern t of the character of the lord through the rotating LED array 282. Moreover, the slower the rotation speed of the LED array 282, the easier it is to see the display of the character pattern t of the lord displayed in the second back side display area bs2. Therefore, it may appear that the pattern t of the character of the lord gradually appears.

In FIG. 280 (a), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture, and the display of the character pattern t of the lord displayed in the second back side display area bs2 can be seen. The pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 280 (a) after the end of rotation of the LED array 282 and the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 280 (g) before the start of rotation are the same pattern, but are displayed. The position is different. However, the display position may be the same. On the other hand, the display mode may be changed before the start of rotation and after the end of rotation by changing the pose of the character of the lord and the color of the kimono. Further, the pattern t of the character of the lord may be displayed so as to protrude outside the second back side display area bs2.

Of the pattern t of the character of the lord, the part that is displayed on the POV display 280 as shown in FIGS. 280 (v) and 280 (w) is hidden on the panel 208p, and is not displayed in FIG. In x), the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord may be hidden on the panel 208p. In this case, the pattern t of the character of the lord may be displayed immediately before the LED array 282 starts the deceleration operation, at the same time as the start of the deceleration operation, or immediately after the start of the deceleration operation. ..

In FIG. 280 (b), the LED array 282 maintaining the horizontal posture, which is the initial posture, rises from the operation start position toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. While the LED array 282 is moving from the operation start position to the initial position, the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord continues, and the LED array 282 rising to the pattern t of the character of the lord. Overlaps from the front side. That is, the pattern t of the character of the lord is referred to as a display area on the back side of the LED array 282 rising toward the initial position on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as "third back side display area bs3". ) Is displayed. Similar to the case where the LED array 282 is lowered, at a certain timing, only a part of the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed in the third back side display area bs1 even when the LED array 282 is raised. Here, in FIG. 280 (x), when the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is hidden on the panel 208p, the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed at the timing of FIG. 280 (a). Instead of starting, the LED array 282 should start immediately before starting the movement from the operation start position to the initial position, at the same time as the start of the movement to the initial position, or after the start of the movement to the initial position. You may. When the LED array 282 starts to rise toward the initial position, all the displays of the changing icon h0 and the hold icon, which have disappeared so far, are restored.

In FIG. 260 (c), the POV display 280 has returned to the initial position. On the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, the pattern t of the character of the lord continues to be displayed. It should be noted that the shaking display (provisional) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 started in FIG. (Stop display) continues up to this stage.

In FIG. 280 (d), the decorative symbol previously displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 returns to the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a big hit. The combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) is displayed by shaking (temporary stop display). Further, along with this return, the background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 also returns to the sky background image, and the background image of the first movable body 260 also returns to the sea background image.

In FIG. 280 (e), the first movable body 260, which had been in the retracted position, returns to the initial position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (f), a combination of jackpot decorative symbols (“decoration”). The shaking display (temporary stop display) of "2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2") ends, and the confirmation display (stop display) is set. That is, the variable display of the advance notice target of the look-ahead notice ends, and the jackpot symbol is displayed. Then, in FIG. 280 (G), the characters of the jackpot notifying the jackpot are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the example shown in FIG. 280 described above, the same pattern (character) as the pattern (character) expected to appear in the reach effect is set in the first backside display area bs1 behind the LED array 282 constituting the appearing POV display 280. Character) is displayed. That is, in the first back side display area bs1, the same pattern (character) as the pattern (character) that may be displayed on both the POV display 280 and the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Further, in the second back side display area bs2 behind the LED array 282 during the acceleration operation, the same pattern (character) as the pattern (character) expected to appear in the reach effect is displayed. Further, in the second back side display area bs2 behind the LED array 282 during the deceleration operation, the same pattern (character) as the pattern (character) displayed on both the POV display 280 and the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the reach effect. (Character) is displayed.

Even if the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the character pattern t of the lord displayed on the POV display 280 are displayed in combination with other patterns (for example, a horse pattern or a character pattern of a game). Good.

Further, the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the role of the enemy displayed on the POV display 280 may also be displayed in combination with another pattern (for example, a character pattern of a swordsman).

FIG. 281 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which a pattern k of a samurai character acting as an enemy is displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 before the LED array 282 is operated at a constant speed. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 280 will be described.

On the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, the pattern t of the character of the samurai was displayed in FIGS. 280 (d) to (j), but in the example shown in FIG. 281, the same period (FIG. 281 (d)) was displayed. )-In the figure (j), the picture k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is displayed. That is, at the stage where the LED array 282 is descending toward the operation start position, the pattern k of the samurai character of the enemy role is displayed in the first back side display area bs1, and the LED array 282 rotates at the operation start position. At this stage, the pattern k of the samurai character who plays the enemy role is displayed in the second back side display area bs2. Then, on the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 281 (k), the display of the character pattern k of the samurai (swordsman) who plays the enemy role is started. That is, at the same time as the display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role in the second back side display area bs2 ends, the same pattern is started to be displayed on the POV display 280. Even after the LED array 282 shifts to constant speed operation, the display in the second back side display area bs2 may be visible, and the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is the period of FIGS. 281 (i) to 281 (k). , It may always be visible without disappearing. On the other hand, after the LED array 282 shifts to the constant speed operation or in the latter half of the acceleration operation, the display in the second back side display area bs2 may not be visible. In this case, the pattern k of the samurai character of the enemy role However, it will disappear once.

In the example shown in FIG. 281, in the display in the second back side display area bs2 and the display in the POV display 280, the pattern k of the samurai character of the villain is displayed in the same size and in the same display mode, but the size is different. It may be different, or the display mode may be different by changing the pose or the color of the kimono of the samurai character who plays the enemy role. Further, as for the display position, the display in the second back side display area bs2 is higher than the display in the POV display 280, and the two are misaligned, but they may be aligned at the same position.

Further, the display of the pattern k of the samurai character of the enemy role on the POV display 280 may be started at the same time as the transition to the constant speed operation, or may be during the acceleration operation. In these cases, the display of the villain's character's pattern k in the second backside display area bs2 may end at the same time as the display of the villain's character's pattern k on the POV display 280 starts or ends. There may be a period of time displayed on both the display area bs2 and the POV display 280. That is, it may be displayed in the second back side display area bs2 even after the display on the POV display 280 is started. Alternatively, the display in the second back side display area bs2 may be terminated before the display on the POV display 280 is started.

Also in this example, the confrontation animation between the character of the lord and the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is displayed, and on the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 281 (w), the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role has collapsed, and the pattern t of the character of the lord Is displayed, but the character of the lord has collapsed, and the character k of the samurai character who plays the enemy role may be displayed as having won. In this case, the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 281 (x) to 280 (y) displays a picture (not shown) in which the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is in a winning pose. That is, a pattern different from the pattern k of the samurai character of the enemy role displayed in FIG. 281 (k) and the like is displayed. Further, in FIG. 281 (z), while the LED array 282 starts the deceleration operation at the operation start position, the second back side display area bs2 has a pattern in which the character of the samurai who plays the enemy is in a winning pose. The display is started. The display start in the second back side display area bs2 may be after the LED array 282 starts the deceleration operation. The pattern in which the samurai character of the villain is in the winning pose continues to be displayed until the POV display 280 returns to the initial position (until the timing of FIG. 281 (c)), like the pattern t of the character of the lord. Therefore, the pattern in which the samurai character of the villain is in the winning pose is displayed in the third back side display area bs3. In addition, instead of the pattern in which the samurai character of the enemy role is in the winning pose, the same pattern as the pattern k of the samurai character of the enemy role first displayed on the POV display 280 in which the LED array 282 shifts to the constant speed operation. (A pattern having the same display mode) may be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 281 described above, in the first back side display area bs1 behind the LED array 282 constituting the emerging POV display 280, the POV display 280 in which the LED array 282 shifts to constant speed operation is first displayed. The same pattern (character) as the displayed pattern (character) is displayed. Further, in the second back side display area bs2 behind the LED array 282 during the acceleration operation, the same pattern (character) as the pattern (character) first displayed on the POV display 280 in which the LED array 282 shifts to the constant speed operation is performed. Is displayed.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the pattern h of the princess character is displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 before the LED array 282 is operated at a constant speed. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 280 will be described.

In FIGS. 282 (d) to 282 (i), the pattern h of the princess character is displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, at the stage where the LED array 282 is lowered toward the operation start position, the pattern h of the princess character is displayed in the first back side display area bs1, and the LED array 282 is rotating at the operation start position. At the stage, the pattern h of the princess character is displayed in the second back side display area bs2. The pattern h of this princess character is displayed beyond the second back side display area bs2. That is, the left side portion of the head does not overlap the rotation region s of the LED array 282, and the visibility does not change even if the LED array 282 rotates. In this example, the pattern h of the princess character displayed in the area including the second back side display area bs2 is hidden before the LED array 282 shifts to the constant speed operation. That is, the pattern h of the princess character disappears during the acceleration operation of the LED array 282. In the state shown in FIG. 282 (j), the pattern h of the princess character disappears.

Then, on the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 282 (k), the display of the character pattern h of the samurai (swordsman) who plays the enemy role has started. Therefore, in this example, at the timing of FIG. 282 (j), neither the POV display 280 nor the second back side display area bs2 displays the pattern.

Also in this example, the confrontation animation between the character of the lord and the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is displayed, the character of the lord wins, and in FIG. 282 (x), the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed on the POV display 280. Has been done. The pattern t of the character of this lord continues to be displayed until the POV display 280 returns to the initial position (until the timing of FIG. 282 (c)). Therefore, the pattern t of the character of the lord is displayed in the third back side display area bs3. As described above, the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role may win, and in this case, the display of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role is displayed on the POV display 280.

In the example shown in FIG. 282 described above, a pattern (character) that is not displayed on the POV display 280 is displayed in the first back side display area bs1 behind the LED array 282 constituting the emerging POV display 280. Further, a pattern (character) that is not displayed on the POV display 280 is displayed in the second back side display area bs2 behind the LED array 282 during the acceleration operation.

In this example, before the LED array 282 shifts to the constant speed operation, the pattern h of the princess character displayed in the area including the second back side display area bs2 is hidden, but the LED array 282 It may be hidden after shifting to constant speed operation. In FIG. 282 (j'), which shows a state in which the LED array 282 is operating at a constant speed, the pattern h of the princess character is displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In addition, the LED array 282 operates at a constant speed for the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 280 (e), the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role shown in FIG. Before the transition, there may be a period of simultaneous display in the area including the first backside display area bs1 and / and the area including the second backside display area bs2. Alternatively, there may be a period in which the pattern t of the character of the lord and the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role are displayed at the same time in the subsequent confrontation animation. In addition, there may be a period in which the character pattern t of the lord and the character pattern h of the princess samurai are displayed at the same time, or the pattern k of the enemy samurai character and the pattern h of the princess samurai character are displayed at the same time. There may be a period of time. In this way, even if a plurality of patterns (characters) are displayed in the area including the first back side display area bs1 and / or the area including the second back side display area bs2 before the LED array 282 shifts to the constant speed operation. Often, the order of appearance may be simultaneous or one by one.

In the description so far, as the POV display, the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the cyclically moving first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. The POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277 is taken as an example, but the POV display is not limited to these, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting body is changed during the operation of a movable body provided with a light emitting body such as an LED or a panel. As long as it is configured so that the player can visually recognize the afterimage, for example, a plurality of LED arrays may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on a rotatable disk. However, a plurality of LEDs may be arranged on the peripheral surface of the rotatable sphere.

Further, although the POV displays 280, 280', and 260 described above are all configured to be movable, they may be configured to be immovable. Further, the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 and the like may not move from the operation start position to any position other than the initial position, as in the POV display 280'shown in FIG. 278. However, even if it does not move, it performs operations such as rotation, rotation, and rocking. Further, when the POV displays 280, 280', 260 are arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the player views the front, the entire display area of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the POV display 280. The POV display 280, 280', 260 and the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided so as not to be hidden by the, 280', 260.

Further, when the POV displays 280, 280', 260 are arranged behind a liquid crystal display device such as a decorative pattern display device 208 and viewed from the front, they may be misaligned, or some or all of them may overlap. You may. When part or all of them overlap, the display panel of the liquid crystal display device is a transmissive display panel (for example, a transparent liquid crystal panel, a liquid crystal shutter, or the like). Further, the display panel of the liquid crystal display device such as the decorative symbol display device 208 is movable, the POV displays 280, 280', 260 are movable, or both are movable, and the POV display 280 is movable. , 280', 260 are behind the display panel of the liquid crystal display device, and the state can be changed between a state in which a part or all is hidden by the display panel and a state in which part or all is not hidden. You may.

The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (pachinko machine) has been described in detail above, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the spinning machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles. More specifically, it may be a game table equipped with a POV display, and a game table equipped with an image display panel (for example, a liquid crystal display device or the like) capable of performing an effect display in addition to the POV display. It is possible to perform an effect by combining a POV display and an image display panel, which is preferable.

In the above description,
"An image display panel capable of performing an effect display [for example, a panel 208p of a decorative symbol display device 208, a panel 260p of a first movable body 260, etc.] and
A POV display capable of performing an effect display [for example, a POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, a rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and a cyclically moving first movable body shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. 260, POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The first effect display may be performed by the image display panel.
A second effect display may be performed by the POV display.
The first effect display is one picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first picture") [for example, all or part of the picture t of the character of the lord, FIGS. 263 (l') to the same figure (q). All or part of the chance button pattern 136'shown in'), all or part of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIGS. 269 (m) to (n), and the pattern representing the third hold icon shown in FIG. 274. All or part of h3', all or part of the pattern h0'representing the changing icon shown in FIG. 275] is included in the effect display.
The second effect display is an effect display in an aspect including the first pattern [for example, the character of the lord shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) and FIGS. 262 (m) to (n). Display of the pattern t, display of the chance button pattern 136'shown in FIGS. 263 (m') to FIG. 263 (n'), display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to FIG. Display of the pattern h3'representing the third hold icon shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o), display of the pattern h0'representing the changing icon shown in FIGS. 275 (o') to (p'), etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

The "picture" referred to here may be a character picture, a character picture, or a figure picture.

The image display panel may or may not always execute the effect display. Further, the image display panel may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may execute a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). It may be an error. Further, the image display panel may always perform the first effect display.

The POV display may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be capable of executing a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). There may be. Further, the POV display may or may not always execute the effect display. Further, the POV display may always perform the second effect display.

The first effect display may be an effect display that includes at least all of the first pattern, or may be an effect display that includes only all of the first pattern. The effect display may include at least a part of the first pattern, or may include only a part of the first pattern. In addition, the second effect display may include at least all of the first pattern, may include only all of the first pattern, or may include only all of the first pattern. It may be a mode including at least a part of the pattern.

Also,
"The first effect display [for example, the display of the design 136'of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 263 (m') to FIG. 263 (n')" and the second effect display [for example, FIG. The display of the pattern 136'of the POV display 280 shown in m') to the figure (n')] is configured to be performed together.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first effect display and the second effect display may be configured to be performed together at all times, or may be configured to be performed together. That is, the first effect display and the second effect display are performed together in the first period, not together in the second period, and only one of the effect displays is performed. It may be configured.

Also,
"The second effect display is an effect display in which only a part of the first pattern is included [for example, a part shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (w) and 262 (m). Display of the character pattern t of the lord, display of some chance button patterns 136'shown in FIG. 263 (n'), display of some jackpot character patterns shown in FIG. 269 (m), FIG. 274 (l). ) ~ Display of the pattern h3'representing a part of the third hold icon shown in the figure (m) and the figure (o)].
By both the first effect display and the second effect display, one of the first patterns is displayed so as to be visually recognized by the player.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first pattern may be displayed across the second effect display and the first effect display. In other words, a pattern including the first pattern may be displayed across the second effect display and the first effect display, or only the first pattern may be displayed. More specifically, a part of the first pattern may be displayed on the image display panel, and the remaining part of the first picture may be displayed on the POV display. Further, the first pattern displayed on the image display panel may appear to move to the POV display, or conversely, the first pattern displayed on the POV display. The pattern may appear to move to the image display panel.

By displaying one of the first patterns so as to be visually recognized by the player by both the first effect display and the second effect display, a part of the first pattern is displayed by the POV display. Since the remaining part of the first pattern that emerges is configured to represent one pattern by being supplemented with an image projected on a flat surface of an image display panel (for example, a liquid crystal display panel), POV The distance between the position of the display and the position of the image display panel in the front-rear direction may give a sense of depth to the pattern compared to the case of a simple three-dimensional pattern display, and may increase the player's concentration on the game. , It may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also,
"The POV display is at a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter referred to as" second position ") [for example, the operation start position of the LED array 282, or FIGS. 262 (l) to FIG. The position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in (n), the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (j) to (n), FIG. 263 (m') to FIG. ), The position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282, FIG. 269 (k) to the position of the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG.
A second display area in the image display panel [for example, a region in which the rotation regions s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 262 (l) to 262 (n) in the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 do not overlap, decoration. The region where the rotation regions s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (j) to (n) do not overlap in the panel 208p of the symbol display device 208, and FIG. 263 (m') in the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. ) The first movable region shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to FIG. 269 (n) in the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the region where the rotation regions s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. The image may be displayed in the area where the rotation areas 206s of the body 260 do not overlap.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area in the image display panel.
The first display area is a display area behind the POV display located at the second position.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The POV display may be configured to be movable from the second position to another position, but conversely, it may be configured to be immovable. That is, the POV display may be fixedly arranged at the second position. However, the POV display may be fixedly arranged at the second position, or may perform operations such as rotation, rotation, and rocking at the second position. Further, the POV display is arranged in front of the image display panel so that when the player views the image from the front, the entire display area of the image display panel is not hidden by the POV display. And the image display panel may be provided.

Further, the POV display may be arranged behind the image display panel. When viewed from the front, the two may be misaligned, or part or all of them may overlap. In the latter case, the image display panel may be a transmissive display panel (for example, a transparent liquid crystal panel, a liquid crystal shutter, or the like). Further, the image display panel is movable, the POV display is movable, or both are movable, and the POV display is behind the image display panel and displays the image. The state may be changed between a state in which part or all is hidden by the panel and a state in which part or all is not hidden.

The POV display may be always located at the second position, or may be located only at the second position. Further, the image may be always displayed in the second display area of the image display panel, or the image may be displayed only in the second display area. The "image" here may be an image of the first pattern, an image including the image of the first pattern, or an image not including the image of the first pattern.

Also,
"The first effect display is an effect display performed in the second display area [for example, the display of the character pattern t of the lord in FIG. 262 (l) and the pattern of the third hold icon in FIG. 274 (j). Display, etc.]
A third effect display may be performed in the second display area.
A fourth effect display may be performed by the POV display.
In the second display area, the fifth effect display may be performed.
A sixth effect display may be performed by the POV display.
The first effect display is an effect display in which only a part of the first pattern is included [for example, the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 262 (m) on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. The display on the left half of the above, the display on the upper right half of the pattern h3'representing the third hold icon shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (m)].
The third effect display is an effect display in an aspect including the entire first pattern [for example, all of the patterns t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 262 (l) on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. Display, full display of the pattern of the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 274 (j), etc.]
The fifth effect display is an effect display in an aspect that does not include the first pattern [for example, the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 262 (n) on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. Display without, display without all display of the pattern of the third hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f or the like shown in FIG. 274 (n)].
The fourth effect display is an effect display in an aspect that does not include the first pattern [for example, the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 262 (l) in the rotation region s of the LED array 282. No display, display without all display of the pattern h3'representing the third hold icon shown in FIG. 274 (j)].
The sixth effect display is an effect display including the entire first pattern [for example, the entire display of the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 262 (n) in the rotation region s of the LED array 282. , Full display of the pattern h3'representing the third hold icon shown in FIG. 274 (n)].
The third effect display and the fourth effect display are configured to be performed together.
The fifth effect display and the sixth effect display are configured to be performed together.
The second effect display [for example, the display of the right half of the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 262 (m) in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (m). The display of the lower left half of the pattern h3'representing the third hold icon] is configured to be performed after the fourth effect display.
The second effect display is configured to be performed before the sixth effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Of the first effect display to the sixth effect display, the odd number effect display is the effect display performed by the image display panel, and the even number effect display is the effect display performed by the POV display. The term "display area" refers to the display area in the image display panel, and the term "position" refers to the position of the POV display.

Also,
"The first effect display is configured to be performed after the third effect display.
The first effect display is configured to be performed before the fifth effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, the second effect display [for example, the display of the right half of the chance button pattern 136'shown in FIG. 263 (n') in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, the jackpot character shown in FIG. 269 (m). The display of the right half of the picture, etc.] is the fourth effect display [for example, a display in the rotation area s of the LED array 282, in which the picture 136'of the chance button shown in FIG. 263 (o') is not completely displayed. It is configured to be performed before [Display without all display of the jackpot character pattern shown in 269 (n), etc.].
The second effect display is shown in the sixth effect display [for example, the entire display of the chance button pattern 136'shown in FIG. 263 (m') in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, FIG. 269 (l). It is configured to be performed after [displaying all the characters and patterns of the jackpot shown].
The first effect display [for example, on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the left half of the chance button symbol 136'shown in FIG. 263 (n'), the jackpot character symbol shown in FIG. 269 (m). The left half of the display, etc.] is the third effect display [for example, the entire display of the chance button pattern 136'shown in FIG. 263 (o') on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, FIG. 269 (n). ) Shows the jackpot character pattern, etc.] is configured to be performed before.
The first effect display is the fifth effect display [for example, a display on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button symbol 136'shown in FIG. 263 (m') is not completely displayed, FIG. 269. It may be configured to be performed after (k) to display without all display of the jackpot character pattern shown in the figure (l)].

Also,
"The third effect display [for example, the entire display of the pattern of the third hold icon h3 in the look-ahead notice mode in the modified example of FIG. 274 (j) on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208] and the sixth effect. [For example, the full display of the pattern h3'representing the third hold icon of the look-ahead notice mode shown in FIG. 274 (n)] is the look-ahead notice [for example, the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Pre-reading notice, etc.] may be performed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The third effect display and the fourth effect display may always be performed as a look-ahead notice. In addition, the first effect display and the second effect display may be performed as a look-ahead notice.

Also,
"When the first effect display including a part of the first pattern is performed in the second display area, the remaining part of the first pattern is displayed in the first display area. It is configured so that there is a case [for example, a case shown in FIG. 263 (n')] when the effect display of the mode including
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the effect display in the mode including the remaining portion of the first pattern, which is performed in the first display area, may be difficult to see by the POV display.

When the first effect display including a part of the first pattern is performed in the second display area, the rest of the first pattern remains in the first display area. It may be configured so that the effect display of the aspect including the portion is always performed.

Also,
"When the POV display is performing the effect display of the mode including all of the first pattern, the effect display of the mode including all of the first pattern is performed in the first display area. There is a case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 263 (m')].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, when the effect display in the mode including all of the first pattern, which is performed in the first display area, is difficult to see due to the POV display on which the second effect display is performed. There is.

In addition, even if the second effect display is performed on the POV display, the effect display in a mode including the entire first pattern may be performed in the first display area. It may be configured to be performed without fail.

Also,
"The POV display is a movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256, the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the cyclically moving first movable body shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. 260, the LED array 282'shown in FIG. 277, etc.] is provided.
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body [for example, LEDs 2821, 2821', panel 260p].
The POV display is configured to allow the player to visually recognize an afterimage by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting body during the operation of the movable body.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The case where the POV display is located at the second position is the case where the movable body is located at the second position.
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as "first position") [for example, an initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 260 (a) or the like].
The movable body is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"A symbol variation display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a special symbol display device 213 shown in FIG. 255, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260, etc.] is provided.
The second effect display may be performed during the execution of one symbol variation display [for example, variation display of a special symbol, variation display of a decorative symbol, etc.].
The symbol variation display with the second effect display finally has a jackpot symbol mode [for example, lighting pattern] than the symbol variation display without the second effect display [for example, Versa notice]. And decoration pattern combination] is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second effect display may be configured to start during the execution of the symbol variation display and end at the subsequent symbol variation display after the symbol variation display. That is, the second effect display may be an effect display executed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. Alternatively, the second effect display may be configured to always start and end during the execution of one symbol variation display.

The first effect display may be performed during the execution of one symbol variation display. Alternatively, the first effect display may be configured to start during execution of the symbol variation display and end at the next and subsequent symbol variation displays of the symbol variation display. That is, the first effect display may be an effect display executed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the first effect display may be configured to always start and end during the execution of one symbol variation display.

Also,
"By the image display panel, one pattern (hereinafter referred to as" second pattern ") [For example, the pattern of a special character that appears when it develops into super reach, or the pattern of a character that appears during a jackpot game. In some cases, an effect display including [picture, etc.] may be performed.
The second pattern is a pattern different from the first pattern,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"POV display capable of executing the effect display [for example, POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, the first rotating movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the first movable moving in circulation shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. A game table equipped with a body 260, a POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
The second effect display by the POV display [for example, the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) and FIGS. 262 (m) to (n), FIGS. 260 (k) to Display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai who plays the enemy role shown in FIG. (W), display of the pattern 136'of the chance button shown in FIGS. 263 (m') to (n'), FIG. Display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIG. (S'), display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to (m), third hold shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o). Display of the pattern h3'representing the icon, display of the pattern h0'representing the changing icon shown in FIGS. 275 (o') to (p'), etc.] may be performed.
When moving the POV display during the execution of the second effect display [for example, FIGS. 260 (q) to (u), 262 (n) to (o), 263 (r'). ~ Same figure (s') etc.]
A game table characterized by that. ] Was explained.

The POV display may or may not always execute the effect display. In addition, the POV display may ensure that the second effect display is performed. Further, the POV display may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be capable of executing a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). It may be a thing.

Also,
"An image display panel capable of performing an effect display [for example, a panel 208p of a decorative symbol display device 208, a panel 260p of a first movable body 260, etc.] and
In the image display panel, it is possible to execute variable display of decorative symbols [for example, FIG. 260 (m) to FIG. (F), etc.].
The movement of the POV display during the execution of the second effect display is configured to be performed in the variable display of the decorative symbol [FIGS. 260 (q) to (u)].
When the POV display during the execution of the second effect display is not moved, it is finally a jackpot symbol mode [for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol during execution]. "Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2"] is configured to be easily stopped and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The image display panel may or may not always execute the effect display. Further, the image display panel may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may execute a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). It may be an error. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be always executed on the image display panel.

Also,
"The POV display is configured to always move while the second effect display is being executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the POV display does not move during the execution of the second effect display [For example, the POV display 280 does not move except when displaying a predetermined pattern, or a selection regarding the effect on the sub-control unit side. If it does not move according to the lottery result],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the POV display that is executing the second effect display moves, the display position of the pattern on the moving POV display may be constant or may change. That is, the position of the POV display itself and the display position in the POV display are in a separate and independent relationship, and if the POV display displaying the pattern is simply moved, the relative display position of the pattern is displayed. Changes, and the pattern appears to be moving. On the other hand, if the display position of the pattern is adjusted in the moving POV display so that the relative display position of the pattern does not change according to the movement of the POV display, the pattern does not move. appear.

Also,
"The second effect display being executed on the moving POV display is a moving display of a pattern [for example, a moving display of the picture k in FIGS. 260 (p) to (q)" and FIG. 260 (r). )-Movement display of the pattern k in the figure (u)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "picture" referred to here may be a character picture, a character picture, or a figure picture.

Further, the movement display of the pattern referred to here may be a movement display that matches the movement of the POV display, or may be a movement display that is unrelated to the movement of the POV display. In the former case, by adjusting the display position of the pattern in the moving POV display so that the relative display position of the pattern does not change, it is possible to make the pattern appear not to move. It is possible, and in the latter case, the relative display position of the pattern can be changed, and the pattern appears to be moving.

Further, the second effect display being executed on the moving POV display may include at least all of the patterns, or may include only all of the patterns. , The mode may include at least a part of the pattern, or may include only a part of the pattern.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"An image display panel capable of performing an effect display [for example, a panel 208p of a decorative symbol display device 208, a panel 260p of a first movable body 260, etc.] and
A POV display capable of performing an effect display [for example, a POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, a rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and a cyclically moving first movable body shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. 260, POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The POV display is at a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter, referred to as “second position”) [for example, the operation start position of the LED array 282, or FIGS. 262 (l) to FIG. The position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in n), the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (i) to (n), FIG. 263 (l') to FIG. The position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in the above, and the position of the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 (i) to 269 (o)].
The POV display is a movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256, the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the cyclically moving first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. , The LED array 282'shown in FIG. 277] is provided.
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body [for example, LEDs 2821, 2821', panel 260p].
The POV display is in operation at a constant speed by the movable body [for example, FIGS. 260 (j) to (y), 269 (j) to (n), 272 (l') to the same. [M'), 278 (j) to 278 (k)], it is configured so that the player can visually recognize the afterimage by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting body.
The POV display has an acceleration operation of the movable body before the constant speed operation of the movable body is performed [for example, FIGS. 260 (h) to (i), 269 (h) to (i)). , FIGS. 272 (h') to FIG. 272 (m'), FIG. 278 (h) to FIG. (I), etc.].
The acceleration operation means the movable body in a stopped state [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (g), the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (g), and the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 278 (g). 'Etc.] is the operation until the speed is increased and the operation shifts to the constant speed operation.
The second production display may be performed after the first production display,
The first effect display is the state in which the acceleration operation is performed by the movable body [for example, the LED array 282] [for example, the state shown in FIGS. 274 (h) to (i)]. It is an effect display performed in an area including a first display area in an image display panel [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208].
The second effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display [for example, POV display 280].
The first display area is the rotation area of the LED array 282 shown in the second position [for example, FIGS. 274 (i) to (k) to 275 (l') to (q'). It is a display area behind the POV display [for example, POV display 280] located at the position of s].
The first effect display is an effect display [for example, FIG. 274] including one pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “first pattern”) [for example, the pattern of the changing icon h0 in the display mode of the white circle]. Display of the pattern of the changing icon h0 shown in (i)].
The second effect display is an effect display in an aspect including the first pattern [for example, display of a pattern h0'representing the changing icon h0 shown in FIGS. 275 (o') to p']. That is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Also,
"A third effect display may be performed after the first effect display.
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display.
The third effect display is an effect display in a mode that does not include the first pattern [for example, display of the pattern h3'of the third hold icon h3 shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (m)]. A game table characterized by being a thing. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the third effect display is performed after the first effect display [for example, when the display mode of the hold icon h3 is changed], the above is performed after the first effect display. When the second effect display is performed [for example, when the display mode of the changing icon h0 is changed], the running symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon h0] is used. ], It is easy to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"From the start of the first effect display to the start of the second effect display [for example, the timing of FIGS. 275 (n') to (o')", the first effect An animation display is performed to the player in which the pattern appears to enter the POV display from the image display panel.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"In the second effect display, the first pattern changes to another pattern (hereinafter referred to as" second pattern ") [for example, the pattern of the changing icon h0 in the display mode of the white quadrangle] [ For example, the display in FIG. 275 (p')] is performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"A fourth effect display may be performed after the second effect display.
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area.
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
The fourth effect display is an effect display in a mode including the second pattern [for example, display of the pattern of the changing icon h0 in the display mode of the white quadrangle shown in FIG. 275 (q')]. , A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area in a state where the acceleration operation is performed by the movable body [for example, FIG. 274 (i). ) Indicates the display of the pattern of the changing icon h0 of the display mode of the white circle]. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second effect display is an effect display including all of the first pattern [for example, display of all the patterns of the changing icon h0 of the white circle display mode shown in FIG. 275 (o')]. That is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the POV display is located at the second position, the movable body is located at the second position [for example, the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (l) or the like]. It's a case,
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as "first position") [for example, an initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 274 (a) or the like].
The movable body is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"An image display panel capable of performing an effect display [for example, a panel 208p of a decorative symbol display device 208, a panel 260p of a first movable body 260, etc.] and
A POV display capable of performing an effect display [for example, the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 256, 274, 275, etc., the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the circulation shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. First moving body 260, POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The POV display is at a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter, referred to as “second position”) [for example, the operation start position of the LED array 282, or FIGS. 262 (l) to FIG. The position including the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in n), the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (i) to (n) and 275 (l') to 275 (q'). A position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 263 (l') to FIG. 263 (r'), and a first movable body shown in FIGS. 269 (i) to (o). It may be located in the position including the rotation region 206s of 260].
The POV display circulates around the movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 256 and 274 (g), the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and FIGS. 272 to 273. The first movable body 260, the LED array 282'shown in FIG. 277, etc.] are provided.
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body [for example, LEDs 2821, 2821', panel 260p].
The POV display is in operation at a constant speed by the movable body [for example, FIGS. 260 (j) to (y), 269 (j) to (n), 272 (l') to the same. [M'), 274 (j) to 274 (p), 275 (l') to q', 278 (j) to 278 (k)] show the illuminant. It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the afterimage by changing the light emission mode.
The POV display has an acceleration operation of the movable body before the constant speed operation of the movable body is performed [for example, FIGS. 260 (h) to (i), 269 (h) to (i)). , Fig. 272 (h') to Fig. (M'), Fig. 274 (h) to Fig. (I), Fig. 278 (h) to Fig. (I), etc.]
The acceleration operation means the movable body in a stopped state [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (g), the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (g), and the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (g). , LED array 282'shown in FIG. 278 (g)] increases the speed and shifts to the constant speed operation [for example, the operation shown in FIGS. 274 (h) to (i)]. And
The first effect display may be performed on the POV display [for example, POV display 280].
The first effect display is the state in which the acceleration operation is performed by the movable body [for example, the LED array 282] [for example, the state shown in FIGS. 274 (h) to (i)]. It is an effect display performed in an area including a first display area in an image display panel [for example, panel 208p of a decorative symbol display device 208].
A second effect display may be performed on the POV display [for example, POV display 280].
The first display area is the rotation area of the LED array 282 shown in the second position [for example, FIGS. 274 (i) to (k) to 275 (l') to (q'). It is a display area behind the POV display [for example, POV display 280] located at the position including s.
The first effect display is an effect display [for example, FIG. 274] including one pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “first pattern”) [for example, the pattern of the changing icon h0 in the display mode of the white circle]. Display of the pattern of the changing icon h0 shown in (i)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Also,
"The second effect display is an effect display in an aspect including the first pattern [for example, a display of the pattern h0'representing the changing icon h0 shown in FIGS. 275 (o') to (p'). Display showing mode change],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"A third effect display may be performed after the first effect display.
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display.
The third effect display is an effect display that does not include the first pattern [for example, a change in the display mode of the pattern h3'of the third hold icon h3 shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o). Display that represents]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the third effect display is performed after the first effect display [for example, when the display mode of the hold icon h3 is changed], the above is performed after the first effect display. When the second effect display is performed [for example, when the display mode of the changing icon h0 is changed], the running symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon h0] is used. ], It is easy to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"From the start of the first effect display to the start of the second effect display [for example, the timing of FIGS. 275 (n') to (o')", the first effect An animation display is performed to the player in which the pattern appears to enter the POV display from the image display panel.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"In the second effect display, the first pattern is another pattern (hereinafter, referred to as" second pattern ") [For example, the changing icon h0 of the display mode of the white rectangle shown in FIG. The display [for example, the display in FIG. 275 (p')] that changes to the pattern h0'] is performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"A fourth effect display may be performed after the second effect display.
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area.
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
The fourth effect display is an effect display in a mode including the second pattern [for example, display of the pattern of the changing icon h0 in the display mode of the white quadrangle shown in FIG. 275 (q')]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area in a state where the acceleration operation is performed by the movable body [for example, FIG. 274 (i). ) Indicates the display of the pattern of the icon h0 during the change in the display mode of the white circle].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second effect display includes all the patterns h0'of the changing icon h0 of the white circle display mode shown in FIG. 275 (o'). Display of the aspect],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the POV display is located at the second position, the movable body is located at the second position [for example, the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (l) or the like]. It's a case,
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as "first position") [for example, an initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 274 (a) or the like].
The movable body is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"An image display panel capable of performing an effect display [for example, a panel 208p of a decorative symbol display device 208, a panel 260p of a first movable body 260, etc.] and
POV displays capable of performing the effect display [for example, the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 256, 260, 274, 275, 280 to 282, etc., and the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270. , The first movable body 260 that circulates and moves shown in FIGS. 272 to 273, the POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The POV display is at a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter, referred to as “second position”) [for example, the operation start position of the LED array 282, or FIGS. 260 (i) to FIG. Positions including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in (z), positions including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 280 (i) to (z), FIGS. 281 (i) to (z). The position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in (z), the position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 282 (i) to (z), FIGS. 262 (l) to (z). The position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in n), the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (i) to (n) and 275 (l') to 275 (q'). A position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 263 (l') to FIG. 263 (r'), and a first movable body shown in FIGS. 269 (i) to (o). It may be located in the position including the rotation region 206s of 260].
The POV display is a movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 256, 260 (e), 274 (g), 280 (e), 281 (e), and 282 (e). The rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, the circulatingly moving first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 272 to 273, the LED array 282'shown in FIG. 277, etc.] are provided.
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body [for example, LEDs 2821, 2821', panel 260p].
The POV display is in operation at a constant speed by the movable body [for example, FIGS. 260 (j) to (y), 280 (j) to (y), and 281 (j) to 281 (y). (Y), FIGS. 282 (j) to (y), 269 (j) to (n), 272 (l') to (m'), 274 (j) to FIG. (P), FIGS. 275 (l') to (q'), 278 (j) to (k)], the afterimage is visually recognized by the player by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting body. [For example, FIGS. 260 (k) to (y), 280 (k) to (y), 281 (k) to 281 (y), and 282 (k). ) ~ Figure (y), etc.],
The POV display has an acceleration operation of the movable body before the constant speed operation of the movable body is performed [for example, FIGS. 260 (h) to (i), 280 (h) to (i)). 281 (h) to FIG. 281 (i), FIG. 282 (h) to FIG. (I), FIG. 269 (h) to FIG. (I), FIG. 272 (h') to FIG. , Fig. 274 (h) to Fig. (I), Fig. 278 (h) to Fig. (I), etc.]
The acceleration operation includes the movable body in a stopped state [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (g), the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 280 (g), the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 281 (g), and FIG. 282. The LED array 282 shown in (g), the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (g), the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (g), the LED array 282'shown in FIG. It is the operation until it is increased and the operation shifts to the constant speed operation.
When the first effect display is displayed on the image display panel [for example, FIGS. 260 (h) to (i), 280 (h) to (i), and 281 (h) to 281 (i). (I), and FIGS. 282 (h) to (i), and 274 (h) to (i)].
The first effect display is a state in which the acceleration operation is performed by the movable body [for example, LED array 282] [for example, FIGS. 260 (h) to (i), FIGS. 280 (h) to The image in FIGS. 281 (h) to 281 (i), and 282 (h) to 282 (i), 274 (h) to 274 (i)]. It is an effect display performed in the area including the first display area on the display panel.
When the second effect display is performed on the POV display [for example, POV display 280] [for example, FIGS. 260 (k) to FIG. (V), FIGS. 280 (k) to (v), FIG. 281 ( x) to the same figure (y), FIG. 282 (k) to the same figure (v)].
The first display area is a display area behind the POV display located at the second position [for example, a second back side display area bs2, etc.].
The first effect display is one picture (hereinafter referred to as "first picture") [for example, the picture t of the character of the samurai shown in FIG. 280 (h) and the enemy role shown in FIG. 281 (h). A pattern of a samurai (swordsman) character k, a pattern h of a princess character shown in FIG. 282 (h), a pattern of a variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 260 (h) and 274 (h)] That is
The second effect display is an effect display in a mode that does not include the first pattern [for example, display of the character pattern k of the samurai (swordsman) who plays the enemy role shown in FIG. 280 (k) or the like, FIG. 281 (x). ) Etc., the display of the character pattern t of the lord, and the display of the character pattern k of the samurai (swordsman) who plays the enemy role shown in FIG. 282 (k) and the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

The "picture" referred to here may be a character picture, a character picture, or a figure picture.

The image display panel may or may not always execute the effect display. Further, the image display panel may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may execute a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). It may be an error. In addition, the first effect display may always be displayed on the image display panel.

The POV display may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be capable of executing a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). There may be. Further, the POV display may or may not always execute the effect display. Further, the POV display may always perform the second effect display. Further, the POV display may be always located at the second position.

The first effect display may be an effect display that includes at least all of the first pattern, or may be an effect display that includes only all of the first pattern. The effect display may include at least a part of the first pattern, or may include only a part of the first pattern. Further, the second effect display may be in a mode that does not include all of the first pattern, or may be a mode that does not include only all of the first pattern, or the first. It may be a mode that does not include a part of the pattern of.

Also,
"When the third effect display is performed after the first effect display is performed [For example, FIGS. 260 (x) to FIG. (Y), FIGS. 280 (x) to (y), FIG. 281 (k) to FIG. (V), FIG. 282 (x) to FIG. (Y), FIG. 274 (l) to FIG.
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display.
The third effect display is a certain pattern [for example, a pattern t (a pattern other than the first pattern) of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 260 (x), and a pattern of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 280 (x). t (first pattern), the character pattern k (first pattern) of the enemy samurai (swordsman) shown in Fig. 281 (k), and the character pattern t (first pattern) of the lord character shown in Fig. 282 (x). A pattern h3'(a pattern that is not the first pattern)] of the hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 274 (n)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third effect display may be started after the first effect display is started. In addition, the third effect display may always be performed after the first effect display is performed.

Further, the third effect display may be performed after the second effect display is performed, or the third effect display starts after the second effect display is started. It may be done. Alternatively, the second effect display may be performed after the third effect display is performed, or the second effect display starts after the third effect display is started. It may be done.

Further, the third effect display may always be performed after the second effect display is performed, or the third effect display is always started after the second effect display is started. You may. Alternatively, the second effect display may always be performed after the third effect display is performed, or the second effect display is always started after the third effect display is started. You may.

Further, a certain pattern referred to here may be the first pattern, the second pattern described later, or a pattern that is neither the first pattern nor the second pattern ( It may be a third pattern).

Also,
"The second effect display is an effect display in a mode including the second pattern.
The second pattern is a pattern different from the first pattern [for example, the pattern k of the character of the samurai (swordsman) who plays the enemy role shown in FIG. 260 (k), and the enemy role shown in FIG. 280 (k). The picture k of the character of the samurai (swordsman), the picture t of the character of the lord shown in FIG.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect display may be an effect display in a mode including only the second pattern, or an effect display in a mode including something other than the second pattern. You may. Further, the second effect display may be an effect display in which at least all of the second pattern is included, or may be an effect display in which at least a part of the second pattern is included. Alternatively, the effect display may include only a part of the second pattern.

Also,
"The fourth effect display may be started after the second effect display is started [for example, FIG. 260 (k), FIG. 280 (k), FIG. 282 (k)].
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area [for example, the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 260 (s), shown in FIG. 280 (s). The pattern t of the character of the lord, the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 282 (s), the pattern of the variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 260 (h) and 274 (h)].
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area [for example, an area outside the second back side display area bs2 connected to the second back side display area bs2]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth effect display may always be started after the second effect display is started. The start timing of the fourth effect display may not be limited after the start of the second effect display, or may be before the start of the second effect display. It may be at the same time as the start of the second effect display.

Further, the fourth effect display may be an effect display in a mode including the first pattern, or may be an effect display in a mode not including the first pattern. ..

Further, the fourth effect display may be an effect display in a mode including the second pattern, or may be an effect display in a mode not including the second pattern. ..

Also,
"The first effect display is performed in at least the first display area of the first display area and the second display area in a state where the acceleration operation is performed by the movable body. Production display [For example, the display of the character t of the lord shown in FIG. 280 (h), the display of the character k of the samurai (swordsman) who plays the enemy role shown in FIG. 281 (h), and the princess shown in FIG. 282 (h). Display of the character pattern h, display of the variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 260 (h) and 274 (h)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect display may be an effect display performed in both the first display area and the second display area, or an effect display performed only in the first display area. It may be.

Also,
"When the POV display is located at the second position, the movable body is at the second position [for example, FIG. 260 (j), FIG. 280 (j), FIG. 281 (j), FIG. 282 (. j), the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (l) and the like].
The movable body is in an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as “first position”) [for example, FIG. 260 (a), FIG. 280 (a), FIG. 281 (a), FIG. 282 (a), FIG. 274 (a). ) Etc., it may be located at the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270].
The movable body is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"An image display panel capable of performing an effect display [for example, a panel 208p of a decorative symbol display device 208, a panel 260p of a first movable body 260, etc.] and
POV displays capable of performing the effect display [for example, the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 256, 260, 274, 275, 280 to 282, etc., and the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270. , The first movable body 260 that circulates and moves shown in FIGS. 272 to 273, the POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The POV display is in an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “first position”) [for example, FIG. 260 (a), FIG. 280 (a), FIG. 281 (a), FIG. 282 (a), FIG. 274 (a). ) Etc., it may be located at the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270].
The POV display is at a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter, referred to as “second position”) [for example, the operation start position of the LED array 282, or FIGS. 260 (i) to FIG. Positions including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in (z), positions including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 280 (i) to (z), FIGS. 281 (i) to (z). The position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in (z), the position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 282 (i) to (z), FIGS. 262 (l) to (z). The position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in n), the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (i) to (n) and 275 (l') to 275 (q'). A position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 263 (l') to FIG. 263 (r'), and a first movable body shown in FIGS. 269 (i) to (o). It may be located in the position including the rotation region 206s of 260].
The POV display is a movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 256, 260 (e), 274 (g), 280 (e), 281 (e), and 282 (e). The rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, the circulatingly moving first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 272 to 273, the LED array 282'shown in FIG. 277, etc.] are provided.
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body [for example, LEDs 2821, 2821', panel 260p].
The POV display is in operation at a constant speed by the movable body [for example, FIGS. 260 (j) to (y), 280 (j) to (y), and 281 (j) to 281 (y). (Y), FIGS. 282 (j) to (y), 269 (j) to (n), 272 (l') to (m'), 274 (j) to FIG. (P), FIGS. 275 (l') to (q'), 278 (j) to (k)], the afterimage is visually recognized by the player by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting body. [For example, FIGS. 260 (k) to (y), 280 (k) to (y), 281 (k) to 281 (y), and 282 (k). ) ~ Figure (y), etc.],
The movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement") before the constant speed operation is performed. For example, FIGS. 260 (d) to (g), 280 (d) to (g), 281 (d) to (g), 282 (d) to (g), 274 (d) to 274 (g)],
The first effect display on the image display panel [for example, FIGS. 260 (d) to (g), 280 (d) to (g), 281 (d) to (g), FIG. 282 (d) to the same figure (g), FIG. 274 (d) to the same figure (g)] may be displayed.
The first effect display is a state in which the first movement is performed by the movable body [for example, LED array 282] [for example, FIGS. 260 (d) to (g), FIG. 280 (d). )-Fig. 281 (g), Fig. 281 (d) -Fig. (G), Fig. 282 (d) -Fig. (G), and Fig. 274 (d) -Fig. (G)]. It is an effect display performed in the area including the first display area in the image display panel.
A second effect display may be performed on the POV display [for example, POV display 280].
The first display area is a display area behind the movable body at a certain timing in the state where the first movement is being performed [for example, the first back side display area bs1].
The first effect display is one picture (hereinafter referred to as "first picture") [for example, the picture t of the character of the samurai shown in FIG. 280 (h) and the enemy role shown in FIG. 281 (h). A production display of a mode including a samurai (swordsman) character pattern k, a princess character pattern h shown in FIG. 282 (h), and a variable icon h0 picture shown in FIGS. 260 (h) and 274 (h). That is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

The "picture" referred to here may be a character picture, a character picture, or a figure picture.

The image display panel may or may not always execute the effect display. Further, the image display panel may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may execute a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). It may be an error. In addition, the first effect display may always be displayed on the image display panel.

The POV display may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be capable of executing a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). There may be. Further, the POV display may or may not always execute the effect display. Further, the POV display may always perform the second effect display. Further, the POV display may be always located at the second position.

The first effect display may be an effect display that includes at least all of the first pattern, or may be an effect display that includes only all of the first pattern. The effect display may include at least a part of the first pattern, or may include only a part of the first pattern.

Further, a certain timing may be a timing (period) having a certain length of time.

Also,
"Deceleration operation of the movable body [for example, FIGS. 260 (z) to FIG. (A), FIG. 280 (z) to FIG. (A), FIGS. 281 (z) to (a), FIG. 282 (z). )-Fig. 269 (a), Fig. 269 (o) -Fig. (P), Fig. 278 (l), etc.]
The deceleration operation is an operation until the movable body performing the constant speed operation reduces the speed and shifts to the stopped state.
The movable body is moved from the second position to the first position (hereinafter, referred to as "second movement") after the deceleration operation is performed and the movable body is stopped. It is configured [for example, FIGS. 260 (b) to (c), 280 (b) to (c), 281 (b) to (c), 282 (b) to same. Figure (c)],
The fifth effect display may be displayed on the image display panel,
The fifth effect display is a state in which the second movement is performed by the movable body [for example, LED array 282] [for example, FIGS. 260 (b) to (c), (c), FIG. 280 (b). ) To the state shown in FIG. 281 (c), FIG. 281 (b) to the same figure (c), and FIG. 282 (b) to the same figure (c)], the area including the third display area in the image display panel. [For example, the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIGS. 260 (b), 280 (b), 281 (b), and 282 (b)].
The third display area is a display area behind the movable body at a certain timing in the state where the second movement is being performed [for example, the third back side display area bs3].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In the above description,
"An image display panel capable of performing an effect display [for example, a panel 208p of a decorative symbol display device 208, a panel 260p of a first movable body 260, etc.] and
POV displays capable of performing the effect display [for example, the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 256, 260, 274, 275, 280 to 282, etc., and the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270. , The first movable body 260 that circulates and moves shown in FIGS. 272 to 273, the POV display 280'shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The POV display is a movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 256, 260 (e), 274 (g), 280 (e), 281 (e), and 282 (e). The rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, the circulatingly moving first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 272 to 273, the LED array 282'shown in FIG. 277, etc.] are provided.
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body [for example, LEDs 2821, 2821', panel 260p].
The movable body is in an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “first position”) [for example, FIGS. 260 (a), 280 (a), 281 (a), 282 (a), 274 (a). ) Etc., it may be located at the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270].
The movable body is at a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter, referred to as “second position”) [for example, the operation start position of the LED array 282, or FIGS. 260 (i) to FIG. Positions including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in (z), positions including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 280 (i) to (z), FIGS. 281 (i) to (z). Positions including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in (z), positions including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 282 (i) to (z), FIGS. 262 (l) to (z). The position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in n), the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (i) to (n) and 275 (l') to 275 (q'). The position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 263 (l') to FIG. 263 (r'), and the first movable body shown in FIGS. 269 (i) to (o). It may be located in the position including the rotation region 206s of 260].
The POV display is in operation at a constant speed by the movable body [for example, FIGS. 260 (j) to (y), 280 (j) to (y), and 281 (j) to 281 (y). (Y), FIGS. 282 (j) to (y), 269 (j) to (n), 272 (l') to (m'), 274 (j) to FIG. (P), FIGS. 275 (l') to (q'), 278 (j) to (k)], the afterimage is visually recognized by the player by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting body. [For example, FIGS. 260 (k) to (y), 280 (k) to (y), 281 (k) to 281 (y), and 282 (k). ) ~ Figure (y), etc.],
The movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement") before the constant speed operation is performed. For example, FIGS. 260 (d) to (g), 280 (d) to (g), 281 (d) to (g), 282 (d) to (g), 274 (d) to 274 (g)],
The first effect display on the image display panel [for example, FIGS. 260 (d) to (g), 280 (d) to (g), 281 (d) to (g), FIG. 282 (d) to the same figure (g), FIG. 274 (d) to the same figure (g)] may be displayed.
The first effect display is a state in which the first movement is performed by the movable body [for example, LED array 282] [for example, FIGS. 260 (d) to (g), FIG. 280 (d). )-Fig. 281 (g), Fig. 281 (d) -Fig. (G), Fig. 282 (d) -Fig. (G), and Fig. 274 (d) -Fig. (G)]. It is an effect display performed in the area including the first display area in the image display panel.
A second effect display may be performed on the POV display [for example, POV display 280].
The first display area is a display area behind the movable body at a certain timing in the state where the first movement is being performed [for example, the first back side display area bs1].
The first effect display is one picture (hereinafter referred to as "first picture") [for example, the picture t of the character of the samurai shown in FIG. 280 (h) and the enemy role shown in FIG. 281 (h). A pattern of a samurai (swordsman) character k, a pattern h of a princess character shown in FIG. 282 (h), a pattern of a variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 260 (h) and 274 (h)] That is
Deceleration operation of the movable body [for example, FIGS. 260 (z) to (a), 280 (z) to (a), 281 (z) to (a), 282 (z). -Fig. 269 (a), Fig. 269 (o) -Fig. (P), Fig. 278 (l), etc.]
The deceleration operation is an operation until the movable body performing the constant speed operation reduces the speed and shifts to the stopped state.
The movable body is moved from the second position to the first position (hereinafter, referred to as "second movement") after the deceleration operation is performed and the movable body is stopped. It is configured [for example, FIGS. 260 (b) to (c), 280 (b) to (c), 281 (b) to (c), 282 (b) to same. Figure (c)],
The fifth effect display may be displayed on the image display panel,
The fifth effect display is a state in which the second movement is performed by the movable body [for example, LED array 282] [for example, FIGS. 260 (b) to (c), (c), FIG. 280 (b). ) To the state shown in FIG. 281 (c), FIG. 281 (b) to the same figure (c), and FIG. 282 (b) to the same figure (c)], the area including the third display area in the image display panel. [For example, the display of the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIGS. 260 (b), 280 (b), 281 (b), and 282 (b)].
The third display area is a display area behind the movable body at a certain timing in the state where the second movement is being performed [for example, the third back side display area bs3].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.
Also,
"Acceleration operation of the movable body [for example, FIGS. 260 (h) to (i), 280 (h) to (i), 281 (h) to (i), 282 (h). )-Fig. (I), Fig. 269 (h) -Fig. (I), Fig. 272 (h')-Fig. (M'), Fig. 274 (h) -Fig. (I), Fig. 278 (h). ) ~ Fig. (I), etc.] is configured to be performed.
The acceleration operation includes the movable body in a stopped state [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (g), the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 280 (g), the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 281 (g), and FIG. 282. The LED array 282 shown in (g), the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (g), the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (g), the LED array 282'shown in FIG. It is the operation until it is increased and the operation shifts to the constant speed operation.
The first movement is configured to occur before the start of the acceleration motion.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fifth effect display may always be displayed on the image display panel.

Further, the fifth effect display may be an effect display in a mode including the first pattern, or may be an effect display in a mode including the second pattern. Alternatively, it may be an effect display in an aspect including a certain pattern different from the first pattern and the second pattern.

A certain timing may be a timing (period) having a certain length of time.

Also,
"After the first effect display is performed, the third effect display [for example, FIGS. 260 (x) to FIG. (Y), FIGS. 280 (x) to (y), FIG. 281 (k)) -Fig. 282 (x) -Fig. (Y), Fig. 274 (l) -Fig. (O)] may be performed.
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display.
The third effect display is a certain pattern [for example, a pattern t (a pattern other than the first pattern) of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 260 (x), and a pattern of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 280 (x). t (first pattern), the character pattern k (first pattern) of the enemy samurai (swordsman) shown in Fig. 281 (k), and the character pattern t (first pattern) of the lord character shown in Fig. 282 (x). A pattern h3'(a pattern that is not the first pattern)] of the hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 274 (n)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third effect display may be started after the first effect display is started. In addition, the third effect display may always be performed after the first effect display is performed.

Further, the third effect display may be performed after the second effect display is performed, or the third effect display starts after the second effect display is started. It may be done. Alternatively, the second effect display may be performed after the third effect display is performed, or the second effect display starts after the third effect display is started. It may be done.

Further, the third effect display may always be performed after the second effect display is performed, or the third effect display is always started after the second effect display is started. You may. Alternatively, the second effect display may always be performed after the third effect display is performed, or the second effect display is always started after the third effect display is started. You may.

Further, a certain pattern referred to here may be the first pattern, the second pattern described later, or a pattern that is neither the first pattern nor the second pattern ( It may be a third pattern).

Also,
"The second effect display is an effect display in a mode including the second pattern.
The second pattern is a pattern different from the first pattern [for example, the pattern k of the character of the samurai (swordsman) who plays the enemy role shown in FIG. 260 (k), and the enemy role shown in FIG. 280 (k). The picture k of the character of the samurai (swordsman), the picture t of the character of the lord shown in FIG.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect display may be an effect display in a mode including only the second pattern, or an effect display in a mode including something other than the second pattern. You may. Further, the second effect display may be an effect display in which at least all of the second pattern is included, or may be an effect display in which at least a part of the second pattern is included. Alternatively, the effect display may include only a part of the second pattern.

Also,
"The fourth effect display may be started after the second effect display is started [for example, FIG. 260 (k), FIG. 280 (k), FIG. 282 (k)].
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area [for example, the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 260 (s), shown in FIG. 280 (s). The pattern t of the character of the lord, the pattern t of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 282 (s), the pattern of the variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 260 (h) and 274 (h)].
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area [for example, an area outside the second back side display area bs2 connected to the second back side display area bs2]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth effect display may always be started after the second effect display is started. The start timing of the fourth effect display may not be limited after the start of the second effect display, or may be before the start of the second effect display. It may be at the same time as the start of the second effect display.

Further, the fourth effect display may be an effect display in a mode including the first pattern, or may be an effect display in a mode not including the first pattern. ..

Further, the fourth effect display may be an effect display in a mode including the second pattern, or may be an effect display in a mode not including the second pattern. ..

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description, the description of "... may be." Can be appropriately replaced with "... may not be ..." or "always ...". Is.

Further, in the above description, the description of "executable" can be read as "always execute" or can be read as "may be executed".

The following will be added including the explanations so far.

(Appendix R0-1)
An image display panel that can perform production display and
A POV display that can perform production display and
It is a game table equipped with
The POV display may be located at a certain position (hereinafter referred to as "second position") in front of the image display panel.
The POV display is provided with a movable body and has a movable body.
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body, and is provided with a light emitting body.
The POV display is configured to allow the player to visually recognize an afterimage by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting body during the operation of the constant speed operation by the movable body.
The POV display is configured to perform an acceleration operation of the movable body before the constant speed operation of the movable body is performed.
The acceleration operation is an operation until the movable body in the stopped state increases the speed and shifts to the constant speed operation.
The second production display may be performed after the first production display,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in an area including the first display area on the image display panel in a state where the acceleration operation is performed by the movable body.
The second effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display.
The first display area is a display area behind the POV display located at the second position.
The first effect display is an effect display in a mode including one pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first pattern").
The second effect display is an effect display in a mode including the first pattern.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-2)
The game console described in Appendix R0-1.
A third effect display may be performed after the first effect display.
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display.
The third effect display is an effect display in a mode that does not include the first pattern.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-3)
The game console described in Appendix R0-2.
The case where the second effect display is performed after the first effect display is being executed than when the third effect display is performed after the first effect display. In the symbol variation display, it is easy to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-4)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-3.
Between the start of the first effect display and the start of the second effect display, the player has an animation display in which the first pattern appears to enter the POV display from the image display panel. Made to,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-5)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-4.
In the second effect display, a display is performed in which the first pattern is changed to another pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second pattern").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-6)
The game console described in Appendix R0-5.
A fourth effect display may be performed after the second effect display.
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area.
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
The fourth effect display is an effect display in a mode including the second pattern.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-7)
The game console described in Appendix R0-6.
The first effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area in a state where the acceleration operation is performed by the movable body. The game table.

(Appendix R0-8)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-7.
The game table is characterized in that the second effect display is an effect display in a mode including all of the first pattern.

(Appendix R0-9)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-8.
The case where the POV display is located at the second position is the case where the movable body is located at the second position.
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as "first position").
The movable body is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-10)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be changed to another embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative pattern display device 208p panel 260 First movable body 260p panel 280 POV display 282 LED array s Rotation area 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub control unit 500 2nd sub control unit 600 Payout control unit The pattern of the character of the lord

Claims (6)

An image display panel that can perform production display and
A POV display that can perform production display and
It is a game table equipped with
The POV display is provided with a movable body and has a movable body.
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body, and is provided with a light emitting body.
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as "first position").
The movable body, a location in front of the image display panel (hereinafter,. As "second position") may be located,
Before SL POV display during operation of the constant-speed operation by the movable body, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitters are configured to visually recognize the residual image to the player,
The movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement") before the constant speed operation is performed.
The first effect display may be displayed on the image display panel,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in an area including the first display area in the image display panel in a state where the first movement is performed by the movable body.
A second effect display may be performed on the POV display.
The first display area is a display area behind the movable body at a certain timing in the state where the first movement is being performed.
The first effect display and is the one of the picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first pattern".) Ri Der things effect display aspects including,
It is configured to perform deceleration of the movable body.
The deceleration operation is an operation until the movable body performing the constant speed operation reduces the speed and shifts to the stopped state.
The movable body is moved from the second position to the first position (hereinafter, referred to as "second movement") after the deceleration operation is performed and the movable body is stopped. It is composed and
The fifth effect display may be displayed on the image display panel,
The fifth effect display is an effect display performed in an area including a third display area in the image display panel in a state where the second movement is performed by the movable body.
The third display area is a display area behind the movable body at a certain timing in the state where the second movement is being performed.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
It is configured to accelerate the movable body.
The acceleration operation is an operation until the movable body in the stopped state increases the speed and shifts to the constant speed operation.
The first movement is configured to occur before the start of the acceleration motion.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
After the first effect display is performed, the third effect display may be performed.
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display.
The third effect display is an effect display in a mode including a certain pattern.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The second effect display is an effect display in a mode including the second pattern.
The second pattern is a pattern different from the first pattern.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The fourth effect display may be started after the second effect display is started.
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area.
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.